TBDY 2018 English

SUPPLEMENT
PRINCIPLES FOR THE DESIGN OF BUILDINGS UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF EARTHQUAKES

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 – GENERAL PROVISIONS.... 1
1.1. SCOPE .... 1
1.2. GENERAL PRINCIPLES .... 2
1.3. DESIGN SUPERVISION AND CONTROL IN SPECIAL MATTERS ................................... 2
1.3.1. Definition .... 2
1.3.2. Scope.... 2
1.4. EXPERIMENTAL DESIGN.... 3
1.5. REFERENCED STANDARDS, REGULATIONS AND/OR DOCUMENTS.......... 3
CHAPTER 2 – EARTHQUAKE GROUND MOVEMENT.... 6
2.0. ICONS.... 6
2.1. EARTHQUAKE HAZARD MAPS.... 6
2.2. EARTHQUAKE GROUND MOTION LEVELS .... 7
2.2.1. Earthquake Ground Motion Level-1 (DD-1)............ 7
2.2.4. Earthquake Ground Motion Level-4 (DD-4).... 7
2.3. STANDARD EARTHQUAKE GROUND MOTION SPECTRA.... 7
2.3.2. Map Spectral Acceleration Coefficients and Design Spectral Acceleration
Coefficients................. 7
2.3.3. Local Ground Impact Coefficients ............ 8
2.3.4. Spectrum of Horizontal Elastic Design............ 9
2.3.5. Vertical Elastic Design Spectrum.... 10
2.4. SITE-SPECIFIC EARTHQUAKE GROUND MOTION SPECTRUM.................... 11
2.4.1. Field Specific Elastic Acceleration Spectrum................ 11
2.4.2. Site-Specific Ground Behavior Analysis.... 11
2.5. EARTHQUAKE GROUND MOVEMENTS IN THE TIME DEFINITION AREA
DEFINING.............................................................................................................. 11
2.5.1. Selection of Earthquake Records.... 11
2.5.2. Scaling of Earthquake Records by Simple Scaling Method........... 12
2.5.3. Conversion of Earthquake Records to Achieve Spectral Concordance....... 12
2.6. PLACEMENT OF ACCELERATION RECORDERS IN BUILDINGS.... 13
SECTION 3 – GENERAL PRINCIPLES FOR THE EVALUATION AND DESIGN OF BUILDINGS UNDER
THE INFLUENCE OF EARTHQUAKE........ 14
3.0. ICONS.... 14
3.1. BUILDING USAGE CLASSES AND BUILDING IMPORTANCE COEFFICIENTS........................ 15
3.1.1. Building Usage Classes .... 15
3.1.2. Coefficients of Building Importance .... 15
3.2. EARTHQUAKE DESIGN CLASSES.... 16
3.3. BUILDING HEIGHT AND BUILDING HEIGHT CLASSES.... 16
3.3.1. Building Base and Building Height .... 16
3.3.2. Building Height Classes.... 16
3.4. BUILDING PERFORMANCE LEVELS .... 17
3.4.1. Uninterrupted Use (QC) Performance Level .................... 17
3.4.2. Limited Damage (SH) Performance Level.... 17
3.4.3. Controlled Damage (KH) Performance Level............................ 17
3.4.4. Migration Prevention (IO) Performance Level .... 17
3.5. BUILDING PERFORMANCE TARGETS UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF EARTHQUAKES AND DESIGN
APPROACHES TO BE IMPLEMENTED.... 17
3.5.1. Building Performance Targets.... 18
3.5.2. Assessment/Design Approaches to be Applied.................... 19
3.6. IRREGULAR BUILDINGS UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF EARTHQUAKES .... 19
3.6.1. Description of Irregular Buildings.... 19
3.6.2. Conditions Relating to Irregular Buildings ............ 22 INFORMATION ANNEX 3A –
ARRANGEMENT OF CARRIER SYSTEMS FOR APPROPRIATE DESIGN UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF
EARTHQUAKES ............ 24 3A.1. SIMPLICITY AND SIMPLICITY OF THE CARRIER SYSTEM.... 24 3A.2.
REGULAR AND SYMMETRICAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE CARRIER SYSTEM. 24 3A.3. ENSURING
REDUNDANCY IN THE CARRIER SYSTEM ...... 24 3A.4. SUFFICIENT STRENGTH AND RHYTHM IN THE
CARRIER SYSTEM............ 24 3A.5. SUFFICIENT DUCTILITY IN THE CARRIER SYSTEM .... 25 3A.6.
ADEQUATE FLOORING RHYTHM AND STRENGTH ON THE FLOORS AND PASSAGE FLOORS .... 25
CHAPTER 4 – CALCULATION PRINCIPLES FOR THE DESIGN OF BUILDINGS ACCORDING TO
STRENGTH UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF EARTHQUAKES ........ 26
4.0. ICONS.... 26
4.1. GENERAL .... 30
4.1.1. Purpose .... 30
4.1.3. Scope.... 31
4.1.4. Performance Objectives .... 31
4.2. EARTHQUAKE LOAD COEFFICIENTS AND CAPACITY DESIGN PRINCIPLES............ 31
4.2.1. Earthquake Load Reduction Coefficient.... 31
4.2.2. Principles of Capacity Design .... 32
4.3. APPLICATION LIMITS OF CARRIER SYSTEMS, CARRIER SYSTEM BEHAVIOR COEFFICIENTS AND
SURPLUS COEFFICIENTS ................ 32
4.3.1. Application Limits of Carrier Systems ........ 32
4.3.2. Coefficients R and D by Carrier System Type............ 32
4.3.3. High Ductility, Limited and Mixed Carrier Systems ..................... 33
4.3.4. Conditions for Ductility Levels of Carrier Systems.................... 33
4.3.5. Application of Excess Strength Coefficients .................... 38
4.3.6. Use of Different R and D Coefficients in the Upper and Lower Parts of the Buildings.... 39th
4.4. IDENTIFICATION OF EARTHQUAKE IMPACT AND ITS COMBINATION WITH OTHER EFFECTS....
40
4.4.1. Reduced Design Acceleration Spectrum Under the Influence of Horizontal
Earthquakes....................... 40
4.4.2. Combining the Effects of Earthquakes in Perpendicular Directions on the Horizontal..........
41
4.4.3. Vertical Earthquake Impact .... 41
4.4.4. Combining the Earthquake Effect with Other Effects.................... 41
4.5. REGARDING THE MODELING OF THE CARRIER SYSTEM FOR LINEAR ACCOUNTING
RULES....................................................................................................................... 42
4.5.1. General Modeling Rules.... 42
4.5.2. Modeling of Beams and Columns............ 42
4.5.3. Modeling of Reinforced Concrete Gapless Curtains .................... 42
4.5.4. Modeling of Reinforced Concrete Bond Beamed (Spaced) Curtains ........................ 43
4.5.5. Modeling of Basement Curtains ................ 45
4.5.6. Modeling of Flooring.... 45
4.5.7. Modeling of Floors on Transition Floors................ 46
4.5.8. Effective Cross-Sectional Rigidities of Reinforced Concrete Carrier System Elements
........................ 46
4.5.9. Modeling of Masses.... 47
4.5.10. Modeling of Additional Eccentricity Effect.... 48
4.6. SELECTION OF LINEAR CALCULATION METHOD .... 49
4.6.1. Linear Calculation Methods ........ 49
4.6.2. Selection of Account Method .... 49
4.7. LINEAR EARTHQUAKE CALCULATION WITH EQUIVALENT EARTHQUAKE LOAD METHOD .... 49
4.7.1. Determination of Total Equivalent Earthquake Load .................... 49
4.7.2. Determination of Equivalent Earthquake Loads Affecting Floors ............ 50
4.7.3. Determination of the Prevailing Natural Vibration Period of the Building ............................
51
4.7.4. Torsion Calculation in Equivalent Earthquake Load Method ................ 52
4.7.5. Calculation of Basement Buildings with Equivalent Earthquake Load Method
........................... 52
4.8. LINEAR EARTHQUAKE CALCULATION WITH MODAL CALCULATION METHODS ................ 53
4.8.1. Modal Account Methods .... 53
4.8.2. Earthquake Calculation with Mod Merge Method ........................ 53
4.8.3. Earthquake Calculation by Mode Collection Method in Time Definition Area....................
54
4.8.4. Reduced Internal Forces and Displacements to Equivalent Base Shear Force
Enlargement according to .... 54
4.8.5. Calculation of Basement Buildings with Modal Calculation Methods ............................ 54
4.9. LIMITATION OF RELATIVE FLOOR ROLLOVERS, SECOND ORDER EFFECTS AND EARTHQUAKE
DRAINS .... 55
4.9.1. Calculation and Limitation of Effective Relative Floor Offsets .................... 55
4.9.2. Second Order Effects .... 56
4.9.3. Earthquake Joints.... 57
4.10. INTERNAL FORCES BASED ON THE DESIGN AND TRANSFERRED TO THE FOUNDATIONS
FORCES..................................................................................................................... 58
4.10.1. Internal Forces Based on Design in Basement Buildings................ 58
4.10.2. Internal Forces Based on Design in Basementless Buildings................ 59
4.10.3. Forces Transferred to the Foundation................ 59
4.10.4. Structure – Piling – Ground Interaction for Pile Foundations ......... 59 INFORMATION
ANNEX 4A – YIELD STRENGTH, DESIGN STRENGTH AND EARTHQUAKE LOAD COEFFICIENTS.... 60
4A.0. ICONS............................................................................................................... 60 4A.1. YIELD
STRENGTH AND YIELD STRENGTH REDUCTION COEFFICIENT ............. 60 4A.1.1. Yield Strength ....
60 4A.1.2. Yield Strength Reduction Coefficient .... 60 4A.2. DESIGN STRENGTH AND EXCESS
STRENGTH COEFFICIENT..................... 61 4A.2.1. Design Strength .... 61 4A.2.2. Excess Strength
Coefficient .... 61 4A.3. CARRIER SYSTEM BEHAVIOR COEFFICIENT AND EARTHQUAKE LOAD
REDUCTION
COEFFICIENT........................................................................................................................ 62
4A.3.1. Carrier System Behavior Coefficient.... 62
4A.3.2. Earthquake Load Reduction Coefficient.... 62 APPENDIX 4B – MODAL CALCULATION
METHODS.... 63 4B.0. ICONS...............................................................................................................
63 4B.1. MODAL ACCOUNT PARAMETERS ........ 65 4B.2. EARTHQUAKE CALCULATION WITH MOD
MERGING METHOD.... 66 4B.3. EARTHQUAKE WITH MODE COLLECTION METHOD IN TIME
DEFINITION FIELD
ACCOUNT............................................................................................................................... 67
INFORMATION ANNEX 4C – EXAMPLE OF FLEXIBLE CONNECTION DETAIL FOR INFILL WALLS .... 69
SECTION 5 – CALCULATION PRINCIPLES FOR THE EVALUATION AND DESIGN OF BUILDINGS
UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF EARTHQUAKES ACCORDING TO DEFORMATION................... 70
5.0. ICONS.... 70
5.1. EVALUATION AND DESIGN APPROACH ACCORDING TO DEFORMATION .... 72
5.1.2. Scope.... 72
5.1.3. Performance Objectives .... 73
5.2. IDENTIFICATION OF EARTHQUAKE IMPACT AND ITS COMBINATION WITH OTHER EFFECTS....
73
5.2.1. Impact of Earthquake.... 73
5.2.2. Combining the Earthquake Effect with Other Effects................ 73
5.3. NONLINEAR BEHAVIOR PATTERNS ........ 74
5.3.1. Stacked Plastic Behavior Model.... 74
5.3.2. Diffuse Plastic Behavior Models........ 75
5.4. RULES FOR MODELING THE CARRIER SYSTEM FOR NONLINEAR ACCOUNT .... 75
5.4.1. General Modeling Rules.... 75
5.4.2. Modeling of Beams and Columns............ 76
5.4.3. Modeling of Reinforced Concrete Curtains................ 76
5.4.4. Modeling of Basement Curtains and Floors .................... 77
........................ 77
5.4.6. Modeling of Masses.... 78
5.4.7. Modeling of Additional Eccentricity Effect............................ 78
5.5. CHOICE OF NONLINEAR CALCULATION METHOD .... 78
5.5.1. Nonlinear Calculation Methods ........ 78
5.6. EARTHQUAKE CALCULATION WITH NONLINEAR THRUST METHODS ............. 78
5.6.1. Push Methods .... 78
5.6.2. Single Mode Push Methods .... 79
5.6.3. Fixed Single Mode Push Method .... 79
5.6.4. Variable Single Mode Push Method.... 79
5.6.5. Obtaining the Modal Displacement Demand of the Earthquake in Single-Mode Thrust
Methods
To............................................................................................................................ 80
5.6.6. Multi-Mode Push Methods .... 80
5.7. EARTHQUAKE CALCULATION WITH NONLINEAR CALCULATION METHOD IN THE TIME
DEFINITION FIELD .... 80
5.7.2. Selection and Scaling of Earthquake Records .................... 81
5.7.3. Matters to be Considered in the Account.... 81
5.7.4. Evaluation Basis for Morphosis and Internal Force Demands..................... 81
5.8. EVALUATION OF DEFORMATIONS AND INTERNAL FORCES.... 81
5.8.1. Permitted Deformation and Internal Force Limits for New Reinforced Concrete Building
Elements.... 81
5.8.2. Permissible Deformation and Internal Force Limits for New Steel Building Elements
.......................................................................................................................................... 83
5.8.3. Permissible Deformation and Internal Force Limits for Reinforced Concrete and Steel Piles
.......................................................................................................................................... 84
5.9. FINALIZATION OF THE DESIGN ACCORDING TO DEFORMATION .......... 84 ANNEX 5A – STRESS
FOR CONCRETE AND REINFORCEMENT STEEL – DEFORMATION BONDS .... 85 5A.0.
ICONS............................................................................................................... 85 5A.1. WRAPPED
AND UNWRAPPED CONCRETE MODELS.... 85 5A.2. REINFORCEMENT STEEL MODEL ........ 87
APPENDIX 5B – SINGLE-MODE PUSH CALCULATION METHODS........ 88 5B.0.
ICONS............................................................................................................... 88 5B.1. OBTAINING
MODAL CAPACITY DIALOGUE BY FIXED SINGLE-MODE PUSH METHOD.... 90 5B.2. OBTAINING
MODAL CAPACITY DIALOGUE BY VARIABLE SINGLE-MODE PROPULSION METHOD.... 92 5B.3.
OBTAINING THE EARTHQUAKE'S MOTOL DISPLACEMENT DEMAND AS NONLINEAR SPECTRAL
RELOCATION .... 93 5B.4. OBTAINING THE EARTHQUAKE'S MODAL RELOCATION REQUEST FROM
A NONLINEAR CALCULATION IN THE TIME DEFINITION FIELD ....................... 96 ANNEX 5C –
PERMITTED DEFORMATION LIMITS FOR STEEL ELEMENTS .... 98 5C.0.
ICONS............................................................................................................... 98 5C.1.
DEFORMATION LIMITS OF STEEL DIRT AND COLUMNS ................. 98 5C.1.1. Calculating the Yield
Rotation for Steel Beams........................ 99 5C.1.2. Calculating the Yield Rotation for Steel
Columns.................... 99 5C.2. DEFORMATION LIMITS OF COLUMN – DIRT JUNCTION ZONES OF
MOMENT-TRANSFERRING FRAMES.... 99 5C.2.1. Rotational Rigidity of Butt Plate and Header
Plate Joints ......................... 100 5C.2.2. Butt Plate and Header Plate Joint Systems Beam Rigidity
................. 100 5C.3. DEFORMATION LIMITS OF CENTRAL DIAGONAL STEEL FRAMES .... 100
5C.3.1. Yield Deformation Under Axial Pressure Force ........................ 100 5C.3.2. Yield
Deformation Under Axial Tensile Force........................ 100 5C.3.3. Flow Morphing of Buckling
Prevented Steel Cross................... 101 5C.4. DEFORMATION LIMITS OF DISPLACEMENT CROSS
STEEL FRAMES AND STEEL BOND DIRT SYSTEMS.... 101
CHAPTER 6 – DESIGN PRINCIPLES OF NON-STRUCTURAL BUILDING ELEMENTS UNDER THE
INFLUENCE OF EARTHQUAKE ................ 103
6.0. ICONS.... 103
6.1. GENERAL RULES .... 103
6.2. EQUIVALENT EARTHQUAKE LOADS ........ 104
6.3. LIMITATION OF REPLACEMENTS.... 107
CHAPTER 7 – SPECIAL RULES FOR THE DESIGN OF CAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BUILDING
CARRIER SYSTEMS UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF EARTHQUAKES .................... 108
7.0. ICONS.... 108
7.1. SCOPE .... 111
7.2.1. Classification of Reinforced Concrete Carrier Systems .................... 111
7.2.2. Related Standards.... 112
7.2.3. Sectional Rigidities to be Used in the Carrier System Account............................ 112
7.2.4. Method to be Used in Cross-Section Calculations .................... 112
7.2.5. Material.... 112
7.2.6. Docking Length.... 113
7.2.7. Welded, Sleeved and Chemical Anchored Attachments and Connections..................... 113
7.2.8. Special Earthquake Attacks and Chiros .... 113
7.3. COLUMNS WITH HIGH DUCTILITY LEVEL .... 114
7.3.1. Cross-Sectional Conditions .... 114
7.3.2. Longitudinal Reinforcement Conditions.... 114
7.3.3. Arrangement of Longitudinal Reinforcement............ 114
7.3.4. Transverse Reinforcement Conditions.... 115
7.3.5. Condition that the columns are stronger than the beams .................... 116
7.3.6. Failure to Meet the Condition that the Columns Are Stronger Than the Beams in Some
Columns ............ 118
7.3.7. Cutting Safety of Columns ........ 118
7.3.8. Conditions for Short Columns............ 120
7.4. HIGH LEVEL OF DUCTILITY DIRT .... 121
7.4.3. Arrangement of Longitudinal Reinforcement.... 122
7.4.5. Cutting Safety of Beams ........ 123
7.5. COLUMN JOINTS IN FRAME SYSTEMS WITH HIGH DUCTILITY LEVELS.... 125
7.5.1. Encircled and UnEncompassed Combinations.................... 125
7.5.2. Cutting Safety of Column-Beam Junction Zones................ 125
7.6. DUCTILITY HIGH PITCHES.... 126
7.6.2. Curtain End Zones and Critical Shutter Height ........................ 127
7.6.3. Conditions for Body Reinforcement.... 127
7.6.4. Arrangement of Body Reinforcements ................ 128
7.6.5. Reinforcement Conditions in Curtain End Zones................ 128
7.6.6. Design Bending Moments and Shear Forces .................... 130
7.6.7. Cutting Safety of Curtains ................ 131
7.6.8. Terms and Conditions for Bond Beamed (Spaced) Curtains ................................. 132
7.6.9. Blanks in the Curtains ................ 133
7.7. DUCTILITY LEVEL RESTRICTED COLUMNS .... 134
7.7.5. Cutting Safety of Columns ........ 135
7.7.6. Conditions for Short Columns............ 135
7.8. DUCTILITY LEVEL LIMITED DIRT .... 135
7.8.5. Cutting Safety of Beams ........ 136
7.9. COLUMN-DIRT JUNCTION ZONES IN DUCTILITY LEVEL LIMITED FRAME SYSTEMS .... 136
7.10. DUCTILITY LEVEL LIMITED CURTAINS.... 136
7.11. FLOORING .... 136
7.12. WALL HATERS.... 141
7.13. RULES FOR REINFORCED CONCRETE APPLICATION PROJECT DRAWINGS 141
7.13.1. General Rules .... 141
7.13.2. Column and Curtain Details ........ 141
7.13.3. Beam Details .... 142
SECTION 8 – SPECIAL RULES FOR THE DESIGN OF PREFABRICATED REINFORCED CONCRETE
BUILDING CARRIER SYSTEMS UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF EARTHQUAKES .................... 143
8.0. ICONS.... 143
8.1. SCOPE ........ 143
8.2. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF PRE-FABRICATED BUILDINGS .... 143
8.2.1. Prefabricated Reinforced Concrete Carrier System Elements and Connections.....................
143
8.2.2. General Rules for Prefabricated Reinforced Concrete Building Design ........................... 144
8.2.3. Material Properties in Prefabricated Buildings.... 144
8.3. MAPPED LINKS (MFB).... 145
8.3.1. General Specifications .... 145
8.3.2. Rollover Stability in Articulated Joints.................... 145
8.3.3. Pin Links (MFB1) .... 146
8.3.4. Sourced Links (MFB2) .... 147
8.3.5. Slot Links (MFB3) .... 148
8.3.6. Other Articulated Links.... 148
8.4. MOMENT-TRANSFERRING LINKS (MAB)............ 149
8.4.1. General Specifications .... 149
8.4.2. Wet Column-Beam Connection (MAB1).... 149
8.4.3. Full Post-Tensioned Connection (MAB2).... 150
8.4.4. Wet at Top – Welded Links at the Bottom (MAB3) ............ 151
8.4.5. Sleeve-Pin Links (MAB4) ........ 152
8.4.6. Reinforcement Insertion Tools to be Used in the Annexes of Momentum Transferring
Elements. 153
8.5. PREFABRICATED CARRIER PANEL-FLOORING SYSTEMS ............. 153
8.5.1. Double Wall Panels .... 153
8.5.2. Single Wall Panels .... 153
8.6. CONDITIONS REGARDING DIAPHRAGMS IN PREFABRICATED BUILDINGS............ 154
8.6.1. Roof Diaphragm.... 154
8.6.2. Creation of Laying Diaphragm.... 154
8.7. ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR BUILDINGS WITH ARTICULATED COLUMNS FROM
ABOVE...... 156 ANNEX 8A – REINFORCEMENT ADDING TOOLS................ 157 APPENDIX 8B –
DEFINITION OF ROOF PLANE DIAPHRAGM................ 159
SECTION 9 – SPECIAL RULES FOR THE DESIGN OF STEEL BUILDING CARRIER SYSTEMS UNDER THE
INFLUENCE OF EARTHQUAKE........ 160
9.0. ICONS.... 160
9.1. SCOPE .... 164
9.2.1. Classification of Steel Carrier Systems .................... 164
9.2.2. Related Standards and Design Principles .... 165
9.2.3. Material Conditions .... 165
9.2.4. Possible Material Resistance.... 166
9.2.5. Load Combinations Involving the Effect of Earthquakes.................... 167
9.2.6. Earthquake Effects Amplified by Excess Strength Coefficient.................... 167
9.2.8. Stability Connections on Beams.... 167
9.2.9. Preserved Capacity for Horizontal Load Bearing Systems with High Ductility
Regions.......................................................................................................................... 170
9.2.10. Column and Beam Attachments .... 170
9.3. STEEL FRAMES TRANSFERRING HIGH MOMENT DUCTILITY LEVEL 171
9.3.1. General Conditions.... 172
9.3.2. Condition that the columns are stronger than the beams ............ 172
9.3.3. Failure to Meet the Condition that the Columns Are Stronger Than the Beams 173
9.3.4. Beam-Column Junction Zones.... 174
9.3.5. Column Attachments .... 176
9.3.6. Stability of Beam – Column Joints........ 176
9.4. STEEL FRAMES TRANSFERRING DUCTILITY LEVEL LIMITED MOMENTUM .. 177
9.4.2. Beam-Column Junction Zones.... 177
9.5. CENTRAL AND OUTWARD CENTER DIAGONAL STEEL FRAMES ........................ 178
9.6. DUCTILITY HIGH CENTER DIAGONAL STEEL FRAMES 179
9.6.2. System Analysis .... 179
9.6.3. Crosses .... 181
9.6.4. Additional Conditions for Custom Cross Layouts.................... 181
9.6.5. Cross – Beam – Column Joints.... 182
9.6.6. Necessary Resistance of Cross End Joints.................... 182
9.7. DUCTILITY LEVEL LIMITED CENTRAL DIAGONAL STEEL FRAMES.. 183
9.7.3. Crosses .... 183
9.7.4. Additional Conditions for Custom Cross Layouts................ 184
9.7.5. Cross Combinations .... 184
9.8. DUCTILITY HIGH CORE DIAGONAL STEEL FRAMES .... 185
9.8.2. Vineyard Beams .... 185
9.8.3. Lateral Support of the Vineyard Beam................ 186
9.8.4. Rotational Angle of the Vineyard Beam ................ 186
9.8.5. Rigidity (Fixture) Plates.... 187
9.8.6. Crosses, Floor Beams and Columns ................ 188
9.8.8. Cross-Tie Beam Joining.... 188
9.8.9. Vineyard Beam -Column Joint ........ 188
9.8.10. Cross – Beam – Column Combination................ 189
9.9. BUCKLING PREVENTED DIAGONAL STEEL FRAMES.................... 189
9.9.3. Crosses .... 190
9.9.4. Additional Conditions for Custom Cross Layouts.................... 191
9.9.5. Beam – Column Joints.... 191
9.9.6. Extreme Combinations of Crosses ............ 192
9.10. HEAD AND SEWING ELEMENTS INSIDE THE DIAPHRAGM.... 192
9.10.2. Aperture Hood .... 193
9.10.3. Aperture Struts .... 193
9.10.4. Horizontal Cross Systems and Space Roof Lattice Systems ................ 193
9.11. STEEL – REINFORCED CONCRETE COMPOSITE COLUMNS OF FRAMES TRANSFERRING
MOMENT.... 193
9.11.1. General .... 193
9.11.2. Condition that the columns are stronger than the beams ............ 194
9.11.3. Steel Recessed Composite Columns of Frames Transferring Moment with High Ductility
Level.... 194
9.11.4. Concrete Filled Composite Columns of Frames Transferring Moment with High Ductility
Level.... 196
9.11.5. Steel Recessed Composite Columns of Frames Transferring Ductility Level Limited
Momentum.... 196
9.11.6. Concrete Filled Composite Columns of Frames Transferring Ductility Level Limited
Momentum.... 197
9.12. BASIC LINK DETAILS .... 197
9.13. PROJECT ACCOUNT REPORT AND RULES FOR IMPLEMENTATION PROJECTS
........................................................................................................................................... 198
9.13.1. Project Account Report.... 198
9.13.2. Rules for Steel Application Project Drawings ............ 198
ANNEX 9A – GENERAL CONDITIONS IN THE COMPOSITION OF EARTHQUAKE FORCE CARRIER
SYSTEMS.... 200
ANNEX 9B – DETAILS OF THE DIRT-COLUMN UNION IN STEEL FRAMES TRANSFERRING MOMENT
.... 202 9B.0. ICONS............................................................................................................. 202 9B.1.
SCOPE AND GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS ........ 203 9B.2. FULL STRENGTH BOLTED WAIST PLATE
JOINTS.................... 206 9B.3. UNION WITH BILLED TITLE PLATE........ 207 9B.4. FULLY
PENETRATING BLUNT-WELDED MERGER ............... 211 9B.5. SOURCE WEAKENED DIRT WITH
INSECTIOR-CUT DIRT – COLON JUNCTION .... 213 ANNEX 9C – CROSS -DIRT -COLON UNION
DETAILS....................... 216
SECTION 10 – SPECIAL RULES FOR THE DESIGN OF LIGHT STEEL BUILDING CARRIERS UNDER THE
INFLUENCE OF EARTHQUAKE........ 218
10.0. ICONS.... 218
10.1. SCOPE .... 220
10.2.1. Classification of Light Steel Building Carrier Systems ..................... 220
10.2.2. Related Standards.... 221
10.2.3. Conditions Relating to Materials and Means of Compositing................ 222
10.2.5. Design Method and Load Combinations ............ 224
10.2.6. Earthquake Account.... 224
10.2.7. Height Limits of Light Steel Building Systems .................... 225
10.3. DESIGN PRINCIPLES OF PANELS .... 225
10.3.1. Creation of Coated Panel Systems ............ 225
10.3.2. Panel Design.... 227
10.3.3. Strut Design.... 229
10.3.4. Design of Combinations.... 231
10.4. REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELS BEARING HORIZONTAL LOADS
........................................................................................................................................... 232
10.4.1. Conditions for Coated Panel Systems ................ 232
10.4.2. Conditions for Crossover Panel Systems........ 233
10.4.3. Additional Special Conditions for Cross Panel Systems Whose Cross Elements Are Only
Under the Influence of Pulling ............ 234
10.5. FLOORING .... 234 ANNEX 10A – RULES FOR HOLES TO BE DRILLED IN THE ELEMENTS
................. 236 10A.0. ICONS...........................................................................................................
236 10A.1. SCOPE AND GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS ........ 236 10A.2. RULES FOR HOLES.... 236
ANNEX 10B– STRENGTH CALCULATIONS FOR DRILL-TIPPED SCREWS AND BOLTS .... 237 10B.0.
ICONS........................................................................................................... 237 10B.1.
SCOPE............................................................................................................... 238 APPENDIX 10C –
PRINCIPLES OF PANEL TEST ........ 241 10C.0.
ICONS........................................................................................................... 241 10C.1. SCOPE AND
GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS ........ 241
SECTION 11 – SPECIAL RULES FOR THE DESIGN OF MASONRY BUILDING CARRIER SYSTEMS
UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF EARTHQUAKE............ 243
11.0. ICONS.... 243
11.1. SCOPE AND DEFINITIONS .... 244
11.2. MATERIALS AND STRENGTH .... 245
11.3. EARTHQUAKE ACCOUNT .... 247
11.4. CALCULATION ACCORDING TO THE METHOD OF BEARING POWER ........................ 249
11.5. OTHER DESIGN CRITERIA.... 251
SECTION 12 – SPECIAL RULES FOR THE DESIGN OF WOODEN BUILDING CARRIER SYSTEMS UNDER
THE INFLUENCE OF EARTHQUAKE........ 257
12.0. ICONS.... 257
12.1. SCOPE ........ 257
12.2.1. Classification of Wood Carrier Systems............................ 257
12.2.2. Related Standards and Design Principles .... 258
12.2.3. Material Conditions .... 259
12.3. STRUCTURAL MODELING AND ACCOUNTING UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF EARTHQUAKES
................. 259
12.4. DESIGN PRINCIPLES OF PANELS .... 260
12.4.1. Elements Constituting Panels ............ 260
12.4.2. Rules for the Formation of Panels........ 261
12.4.3. Rules for the Design of Panels ............ 262
12.4.4. Design of Struts .... 264
12.4.5. Design of Combinations.... 264
12.5. DESIGN PRINCIPLES OF THE FLOORS.... 265
12.5.1. Elements Constituting Wooden Flooring............ 265
12.5.2. Rules for the Design of Slabs.................... 265
12.6. DESIGN OF COMBINATIONS .... 266
SECTION 13 – SPECIAL RULES FOR THE DESIGN OF HIGH BUILDING CARRIER SYSTEMS UNDER
THE INFLUENCE OF EARTHQUAKE.................... 267
13.0. ICONS.... 267
13.1. SCOPE AND DEFINITION .... 267
13.2. PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES AND DESIGN PHASES............... 268
13.2.1. Design Stage I: Preliminary Design Sizing Under DD-2 Earthquake Ground Motion.... 268
13.2.2. Design Phase II: Evaluation – Improvement for Uninterrupted Use or Limited Damage
Performance Target Under DD-4 or DD-3 Earthquake Ground Motion...... 268
13.2.3. Design Phase III: Assessment for Migration Prevention or Controlled Damage
Performance Target Under DD-1 Earthquake Ground Motion – Improvement – Final Design....
269
13.3. BEHAVIORAL CHARACTERISTICS OF HIGH BUILDING CARRIER SYSTEM ELEMENTS .... 269
13.3.1. Deformations of Nonlinear Ductile Behavior........................ 269
13.3.2. Internal Forces Relating to Linear Behavior............................ 270
13.4. DESIGN PHASE I: PRELIMINARY DESIGN – ACCOUNT PRINCIPLES FOR SIZING .... 270
13.4.1. Scope.... 270
13.4.2. Phase I Carrier System Modeling.... 271
13.4.3. Phase I Earthquake Calculation.... 271
13.4.4. Additional Conditions for Pre-Dimensioning of the Carrier System.................... 271
13.5. DESIGN PHASE II: ACCOUNT PRINCIPLES FOR UNINTERRUPTED USE OR LIMITED DAMAGE
PERFORMANCE EVALUATION................... 272
13.5.1. Scope.... 272
13.5.2. Phase II Carrier System Modelling .... 272
13.5.3. Phase II Earthquake Calculation.... 272
13.5.4. Evaluation in Phase II Basis for Deformation and Internal Force Demands .... 273
13.5.5. Phase II Performance Evaluation .... 274
13.6. DESIGN PHASE III: ACCOUNT PRINCIPLES FOR MIGRATION PREVENTION OR CONTROLLED
DAMAGE PERFORMANCE ASSESSMENT ................ 274
13.6.1. Scope.... 274
13.6.2. Phase III Carrier System Modelling .... 275
13.6.3. Phase III Earthquake Account.... 275
13.6.4. Evaluation in Phase III Basis for Deformation and Internal Force Demands... 275
13.6.5. Phase III Performance Evaluation.... 276
13.7. CONCLUSION OF THE DESIGN OF THE HIGH BUILDING AND DESIGN OF THE
FOUNDATIONS.... 276
13.7.1. Conclusion of High-Rise Building Design............................ 276
13.7.2. Performance Evaluation / Design of Foundations........................ 276
13.8. BUILDING HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM TO BE INSTALLED IN HIGH BUILDINGS.... 277
INFORMATION ANNEX 13A – HIGH BUILDING CARRIER SYSTEMS ................... 278 13A.1. TYPICAL
HIGH BUILDING CARRIER SYSTEMS.... 278
13A.2. ISSUES TO BE CONSIDERED IN THE ARRANGEMENT OF THE HIGH RISE BUILDING CARRIER
SYSTEM .... 279
SECTION 14 – SPECIAL RULES FOR THE DESIGN OF INSULATED BUILDING CARRIER SYSTEMS
UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF EARTHQUAKE........ 280
14.0. IMAGES AND DESCRIPTIONS.... 280
14.0.1. Icons .... 280
14.0.2. Definitions .... 283
14.1. SCOPE .... 284
14.2. PURPOSE .... 284
14.3. GENERAL DESIGN PRINCIPLES .... 284
14.4. BASIC FEATURES OF INSULATION UNITS.... 285
14.5. STABILITY OF THE INSULATION SYSTEM.... 286
14.6. WIND, FIRE AND ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS.... 286
14.7. INSPECTION, MONITORING AND MAINTENANCE OF THE INSULATION SYSTEM.................
286
14.8. APPROVALS AND DOCUMENTS.... 287
14.9. PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES.... 287
14.10. LOAD COMBINATIONS TO BE USED IN DESIGN.................... 287
14.10.1. Load Combinations to be Used in the Design of the Insulation Interface and the
Infrastructure Elements Underneath.... 287
14.10.2. Load Combinations to be Used in the Design of Superstructure Elements on the
Insulation Interface.... 287
14.10.3. Load Combinations to be Used in Insulation Unit Tests ........................... 287
14.11. INSULATION SYSTEM ACCOUNT PRINCIPLES.... 288
14.12. ELASTOMER INSULATION UNITS.... 288
14.12.1. Lower and Upper Limit Values to be Used in Design ................ 288
14.12.2. Unit Deformation Limits of Elastomer Insulation Units ..................... 289
14.12.3. Vertical Stability of Elastomer Insulation Units................ 290
14.12.4. Connections of Elastomer Insulation Units.................... 292
14.13. FRICTIONAL INSULATION UNITS WITH CURVED SURFACE ............... 293
14.13.1. Upper and Lower Limit Values to be Used in Design ........ 293
14.13.2. Connections of Frictional Insulation Units with Curve Surface......................... 293
14.14. CALCULATION METHODS .... 293
14.14.2. Effective Earthquake Load Method .... 294
14.14.3. Mod Merge Method .... 295
14.14.4. Nonlinear Calculation Method in the Time Definition Field ........................... 296
14.14.5. Relative Floor Rollover Limits and Earthquake Joints in Insulated Buildings......... 297
14.15. INSULATION UNIT TESTS.... 297
14.15.1. Test Conditions.... 297
14.15.2. Insulation Unit Prototype Tests........ 297
14.15.3. Insulation Unit Production Control Tests.................... 297
14.15.4. Insulation Unit Admission Requirements.... 299
14.15.5. Verification of Design .... 300 ANNEX 14A – MAIN CHARACTERISTICS OF ELASTOMER
INSULATION UNITS .......... 301 ANNEX 14B – BASIC FEATURES OF CURVED FRICTION INSULATION
UNITS .... 304
SECTION 15 – SPECIAL FOR THE EVALUATION OF EXISTING BUILDING SYSTEMS UNDER THE
INFLUENCE OF EARTHQUAKES AND FOR THE DESIGN OF REINFORCEMENT
RULES.................................................................................................................... 306
15.0. ICONS.... 306
15.1. SCOPE ........ 307
15.2. COLLECTION OF INFORMATION FROM BUILDINGS .... 307
15.2.1. Scope of Information to be Collected from Buildings ........................ 307
15.2.2. Knowledge Levels .... 308
15.2.3. Current Material Strength .... 308
15.2.4. Limited Level of Knowledge in Reinforced Concrete Buildings ........................ 308
15.2.5. Comprehensive Knowledge Level in Reinforced Concrete Buildings........................ 309
15.2.6. Limited Level of Knowledge in Steel Buildings ............ 310
15.2.7. Comprehensive Knowledge Level in Steel Buildings............ 310
15.2.8. Limited Knowledge Level in Prefabricated Reinforced Concrete Buildings................ 311
15.2.9. Comprehensive Knowledge Level in Prefabricated Reinforced Concrete Buildings
..................... 311
15.2.10. Limited Level of Knowledge in Masonry Buildings.... 311
15.2.11. Comprehensive Knowledge Level in Masonry Buildings.................... 311
15.2.12. Knowledge Level Coefficients.... 312
15.3. DAMAGE LIMITS AND DAMAGE ZONES IN BUILDING ELEMENTS...... 312
15.3.1. Sectional Damage Conditions .... 312
15.3.2. Sectional Damage Zones .... 312
15.3.3. Identification of Section and Element Damage........................ 313
15.4. GENERAL PRINCIPLES AND RULES REGARDING EARTHQUAKE ACCOUNT........................ 313
15.5. EARTHQUAKE CALCULATION WITH LINEAR CALCULATION METHODS............................ 314
15.5.1. Account Methods.... 314
15.5.2. Determination of Types of Damage to the Building Elements of Reinforced Concrete
Buildings ........ 314
15.5.3. Application Limits of Linear Calculation Methods .................... 315
15.5.4. Determination of Unit Deformation and Plastic Rotation Requests ................. 316
15.6. EARTHQUAKE CALCULATION WITH NONLINEAR CALCULATION METHODS ...... 316
15.6.1. Definition .... 316
15.6.2. Account Methods.... 317
15.7. DEFORMATION LIMITS.... 317
15.7.1. Sectional Unit Deformation and Plastic Rotation Limits of Reinforced Concrete and
Prefabricated Reinforced Concrete Elements .... 317
15.7.2. Deformation and Plastic Rotation Limits of Steel Elements ......................... 317
15.7.3. Boundaries of Morphosis of Reinforced Partition Walls................. 317
15.8. DETERMINATION OF EARTHQUAKE PERFORMANCE OF EXISTING BUILDINGS ....... 318
15.8.1. Targeted Earthquake Performance in Existing or Reinforced Buildings ...... 318
15.8.2. Earthquake Performance of Existing or To Be Strengthened Buildings ...........................
318
15.8.3. Limited Damage Performance Level on Existing Buildings.................... 318
15.8.4. Controlled Damage Performance Level in Existing Buildings .................... 318
15.8.5. Performance Level of Migration Prevention in Existing Buildings ........................... 319
15.8.6. Immigration Status .... 319
15.8.7. Performance Levels of Reinforced Partition Walls in Reinforced Concrete Buildings
........................................................................................................................................ 319
15.8.8. Determination of Earthquake Performance of Masonry Buildings ................ 319
15.9. STRENGTHENING OF BUILDINGS.... 319
15.9.1. Determination of Earthquake Safety of Reinforced Buildings............................. 320
15.9.2. Design of Elements to be Added to Buildings................ 320
15.9.3. Types of Power-Ups.... 320
15.10. STRENGTHENING OF REINFORCED CONCRETE BUILDINGS.... 320
15.10.1. Wrapping of Columns ............ 320
15.10.2. Increasing the Bending Capacity of the Columns.................... 321
15.10.3. Wrapping of the Beams ............ 321
15.10.4. Strengthening of Partition Walls........................ 322
15.10.5. Strengthening of Reinforced Concrete Carrier Systems with Cast Reinforced Concrete
Curtains in Place .... 322
15.10.6. Addition of New Frames to the Reinforced Concrete System.................... 323
15.10.7. Reduction of the Mass of the Reinforced Concrete System .................... 323 ANNEX 15A
– DEFINITION OF DISPLACED AXIS ROTATIONS IN COLUMNS, CURTAINS AND DIRT ELEMENTS IN
THE CALCULATION BY LINEAR METHODS ......... 324 15A.0.
ICONS........................................................................................................... 324 15A.1.
DEFINITIONS.......................................................................................................... 324 15A.2.
DISPLACED AXIS ROTATION.... 324 15A.3. YIELD ROTATION IN FRAME ELEMENTS................ 325
15A.4. YIELD ROTATION IN CURTAIN ELEMENTS........................ 325 ANNEX 15B – CALCULATION
OF INCREASE IN STRENGTH AND DUCTILITY IN COLUMNS WRAPPED WITH FIBER POLYMER.... 327
15B.0. ICONS.... 327 15B.1. INCREASING THE SHEAR STRENGTH OF THE COLUMNS.........................
328 15B.2. INCREASING THE AXIAL PRESSURE STRENGTH OF THE COLUMNS......... 329 15B.3.
INCREASING THE DUCTILITY OF THE COLUMNS.... 330 15B.4. WINDING FOR INSUFFICIENT
WEARING LENGTH IN COLUMNS............. 330 15B.5. STRENGTHENING THE COLON-KIRIS JUNCTION
ZONES WITH LP. 331 ANNEX 15C – STRENGTHENING OF THE EMBANKMENT WALLS ....................
332 15C.0. ICONS........................................................................................................... 332 15C.1.
STRENGTHENING OF THE EMBANKMENT WALLS ........ 332 15C.2. REINFORCEMENT OF INFILL
WALLS WITH SPECIAL PLASTER REINFORCED WITH WICKER STEEL.... 333 15C.3. STRENGTHENING
OF FILLER WALLS WITH FIBERS 335
SECTION 16 – SPECIAL RULES FOR THE DESIGN OF THE FOUNDATION GROUND AND
FOUNDATIONS UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF EARTHQUAKE.... 337
16.0. ICONS.... 337
16.1. SCOPE ........ 340
16.2. DEFINITION OF GROUND CONDITIONS .... 341
16.2.1. Soil Surveys .... 341
16.2.2. Soil and Foundation Survey Reports.... 341
16.3. DETERMINATION OF GROUND PARAMETERS .... 342
16.4. DETERMINATION OF LOCAL SOIL CLASSES .... 343
16.5. FIELD-SPECIFIC GROUND BEHAVIOR ANALYSES UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF EARTHQUAKES
........................................................................................................................................... 344
16.5.1. Scope.... 344
16.5.2. Nonlinear Free Ground Model and Earthquake Analysis ......................... 344
16.6. ASSESSMENT OF THE RISK OF LIQUIDATION OF THE GROUND UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF
EARTHQUAKE.... 345
16.7. GENERAL RULES FOR THE DESIGN OF THE FOUNDATIONS................ 346
16.7.1. Purpose .... 346
16.7.2. The Principle of Bearing Power in the Basic Design .................... 347
16.7.3. Design Effects.... 347
16.7.4. Design Strengths.... 347
16.8. SUPERFICIAL BASICS.... 347
16.8.1. Scope.... 347
16.8.2. Strength Coefficients for Superficial Foundations ................ 348
16.8.3. Bearing Power of Superficial Foundations ................ 348
16.8.4. Horizontal Shift of Superficial Foundations .................... 349
16.8.5. Basic Vineyard Beams.... 350
16.9. SCRATCHED FOUNDATIONS .... 350
16.9.1. Scope.... 350
16.9.2. Strength Coefficients for Pile Foundations ............ 351
16.9.3. Vertical Bearing Power of Piles .... 351
16.9.4. Lateral Bearing Power of Piles .... 352
16.10. EARTHQUAKE CALCULATION OF EXCAVATED FOUNDATIONS .................... 352
16.10.1. Structure – Pile – Ground Interaction.... 352
16.10.2. Special Conditions for the Design of Piles ............ 353
16.11. STATIC AND DYNAMIC GROUND PRESSURES AFFECTING THE BASEMENT CURTAINS OF
BUILDINGS .... 353
16.12. FOR THE DESIGN OF WITHSTAND STRUCTURES UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF EARTHQUAKES
RULES..................................................................................................................... 354
16.12.1. Stability of Bearing Structures .... 354
16.12.2. Soil Pressures .... 355
16.12.3. Effect of Water Level Behind Bearing Structure ............ 356
16.13. STABILITY OF THE SLOPES UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF EARTHQUAKES ........................ 357
ANNEX 16A – GENERAL RULES FOR SOIL RESEARCH ............................. 360 16A.1. GROUND
SURVEY DRILLING .... 360 16A.2. LAND EXPERIMENTS.... 360 16A.3. LABORATORY
EXPERIMENTS.... 361 ANNEX 16B– SIMPLIFIED FLOOR LIQUIDATION ASSESSMENT ........... 362
16B.1. SCOPE............................................................................................................... 362 16B.2.
CORRECTION OF SPT DATA.... 362 16B.2.1. Correction of Raw SPT Data.................... 362 16B.2.2.
Correction of SPT Data According to Fine Grain Content..................... 362 16B.3. CALCULATION
OF LIQUIDATION RESISTANCE.... 363 16B.4. CALCULATION OF THE SLIP STRESS CAUSED BY THE
EARTHQUAKE........... 363 ANNEX 16C – BUILDING UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF EARTHQUAKE –
PILE – GROUND INTERACTION....... 365 16C.1. STRUCTURE – GROUND INTERACTION .... 365
16C.2. STRUCTURE – PILE – GROUND INTERACTION ACCOUNT WITH METHOD I................... 365
16C.2.1. Method I– Scope.... 365 16C.2.2. Method I – Kinematic Interaction Calculus.... 365
16C.2.3. Method I – Inertial Interaction Calculus ........ 366 16C.2.4. Method I – Interaction
Calculation with Common System Approach ....................... 367 16C.3. STRUCTURE – PILE –
GROUND INTERACTION ACCOUNT WITH METHOD II ................. 367 16C.3.1. Method II – Scope....
367 16C.3.2. Method II – Kinematic Interaction Calculus ............ 367 16C.3.3. Method II – Inertial
Interaction Calculus ............ 369
16C.3.4. Method II – Interaction Calculation with Common System Approach..................... 369
16C.4. STRUCTURE – PILE – GROUND INTERACTION ACCOUNT WITH METHOD III................ 369
16C.4.1. Method III – Scope .... 369
16C.4.2. Method III – Kinematic Interaction Calculus .................... 370
16C.4.3. Method III – Inertial Interaction Calculus................ 371 16C.5. CHANGES IN THE FORM
OF ASSESSMENT/DESIGN IN THE RECESSES AND INTERNAL FORCES.... 371 16C.6. PILES –
NONLINEAR GROUND SPRINGS FOR GROUND INTERACTION ........ 371
16C.6.1. Definition.... 371

16C.6.2. Sources for p-y Springs ........ 372
16C.6.3. Source for t-z and Q-Z Springs ........ 372 ANNEX 16D – ON-SITE IMPROVEMENT OF LAND
SOIL PROPERTIES .......... 373
SECTION 17 – SIMPLIFIED DESIGN RULES FOR REGULAR DIE-CAST REINFORCED CONCRETE
BUILDINGS .... 374
17.0. ICONS.... 374
17.1. SCOPE ........ 378
17.3. SIZING OF VERTICAL CARRIER ELEMENTS..................... 381
17.3.1. Buildings Consisting of Carrier System Frames.................... 381
17.3.2. Buildings with Carrier System Consisting of Curtains and Frames.................... 382
17.4. LOWER LIMITS OF CROSS SECTION AND REINFORCEMENT ............ 382
17.4.1. Cross-Section Lower Limits for Carrier System Elements ............ 382
17.4.2. Reinforcement Lower Limits for Carrier System Elements ............ 383
17.5. SIMPLIFIED STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS .... 383
17.5.1. Calculation of Earthquake Effects............ 383
17.5.2. Calculation of Vertical Load Effects................ 388
17.6. INTERNAL FORCES BASED ON THE DESIGN .... 390
17.7. SIMPLIFIED CROSS-SECTION CARRYING POWER RULES ................. 391
17.8. CURTAINS WITHOUT A RECTANGULAR CROSSHAIR................. 393
17.9. TRANSFER OF EARTHQUAKE LOAD FROM FLOORS TO CURTAINS ....................... 394
SECTION 1 – GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.1. SCOPE
1.1.1 – The provisions of this Regulation shall apply to the design of new buildings under the
influence of earthquakes and the evaluation of existing buildings and the design of strengthening.
1.1.2 – The provisions of this Regulation shall apply to the design under the influence of
earthquakes of buildings made of reinforced concrete, steel, light steel, masonry and wood
materials with in-situ cast and pre-production under the influence of earthquakes.
1.1.3 – Specific rules for the design of high-rise buildings under the influence of earthquakes are
defined in Section 13.
1.1.4 – Special rules for the design of insulated buildings under the influence of earthquakes are
defined in Section 14.
1.1.5 – Special rules for the assessment and strengthening of existing buildings under the influence
of earthquakes are defined in Chapter 15.
1.1.6 – Active and passive behavior control practices different from the insulation applications
within the scope of 1.1.4 in buildings under the influence of earthquakes and the design rules
related to them are outside the scope of this Regulation.
1.1.7 – Structures such as bridges, dams, coastal and port structures, tunnels, pipelines, energy
transmission lines, nuclear facilities, natural gas storage facilities, structures that are all
underground and other structures designed according to calculations and security principles
different from buildings are outside the scope of this Regulation.
1.1.8 – The evaluation and strengthening of registered buildings and monuments of historical and
cultural value under the influence of earthquakes is outside the scope of this Regulation.
1.1.9 – Until its own special regulations are made for the design of buildings and building type
structures outside the scope of this Regulation under the influence of earthquakes, first of all, the
provisions given in the relevant Turkish Standards, as well as other equivalent standards such as
regulations, technical regulations such as regulations accepted as internationally accepted or
technical rules determined by the institutions may be used by taking into account the principles
stipulated in this Regulation.
1.1.10 – The annexes to this Regulation are defined in (a) and (b) below:
(a) The annexes, called the Information Supplement, are intended to provide information for the
better understanding and application of the relevant parts of the Regulation. These annexes are
not mandatory parts of the Regulation.
(b) The other Annexes contained in the Regulation are integral parts of the Regulation and must
be implemented.
1.2. GENERAL PRINCIPLES
1.2.1 – According to this Regulation, the earthquake ground motion levels to be taken as the basis
for the design of new buildings under the influence of earthquakes and the evaluation of existing
buildings are defined in Section 2. The earthquake effects that correspond to these earthquake
ground motion levels are defined by the Turkey Earthquake Hazard Maps enacted by the decision
of the Council of Ministers dated 22/01/2018 and numbered 2018/11275 .
1.2.2 – According to this Regulation, the Building Performance Targets and Earthquake Design
Classes (DTS) to be used as the basis for the design of new buildings under the influence of
earthquakes and the evaluation of existing buildings are defined in Section 3.
1.2.3 – According to this Regulation, the buildings designed under the influence of earthquakes
are subject to Turkish Standards and the General Technical Specification of the Ministry of
Environment and Urbanization in terms of materials and labor conditions, the Regulation on
Construction Materials published in the Official Gazette dated 10.07.2013 and numbered 28703, the
Regulation on the Criteria to be Applied to Construction Materials published in the Official Gazette
dated 26.06.2009 and numbered 27270 rules.
1.3. DESIGN SUPERVISION AND CONTROL IN SPECIAL MATTERS
1.3.1. Definition
1.3.1.1 – In the evaluation and design processes related to the implementation of this
Regulation, "design supervision and control" services must be obtained from civil engineers who
have theoretical and professional knowledge and experience in the relevant field to serve in all
relevant design stages from the beginning to the completion of the project in subjects requiring
special expertise.
1.3.1.2 – The training conditions, professional qualification and experience issues of those who
will perform such services and their certification and the procedures and principles related to the
execution of the service shall be determined by the Ministry of Environment and Urbanization.
1.3.2. Scope
In the implementation of this Regulation, the following subjects specified in (a) to (g) are subject
to the service of "design supervision and control" as defined in 1.3.1:
(a) Site-Specific Earthquake Hazard Analyses referred to in 2.4.1 under Section 2
(b) Identification of Earthquake Ground Movements in the Time Definition Area in accordance
with 2.5 under Section 2
(c) Site-Specific Soil Behaviour Analyses in accordance with 2.4.2 and 16.5 under Sections 2 and
16
(d) Earthquake Calculation by Multimodal Propulsion Methods in accordance with 5.6.6 and
Nonlinear Calculation Method in Time Definition Field according to 5.7 under Section 5
(e) Earthquake Calculation and Design of High-Rise Building Carrier Systems in accordance with
Section 13
(f) Earthquake Calculation and Design of Insulated Building Carrier Systems in accordance with
Section 14
(g) Calculations of Nonlinear StructurePile-Ground Interaction in Time Definition Field in
accordance with 16.10 under Section 16
1.4. EXPERIMENTAL DESIGN
In cases where there are not sufficient calculation models, where a large number of similar
components are used or in the experimental studies to be carried out in order to verify the
assumptions used in the design, the principles given in TS EN 1990 Annex D or equivalent
international rules shall be taken into consideration and the certification procedures shall be
carried out according to 1.2.3.
1.5. REFERENCED STANDARDS, REGULATIONS AND/OR DOCUMENTS
In this Regulation, reference is made to other standards and / or documents with or without
specifying the date. These citations are indicated in appropriate places in the text and are given in
Table 1.1. Subsequent amendments or revisions to the citations referred to shall be applied
provided that amendments or revisions are also made to this Regulation making the citation. If
the date of the cited standard and/or document is not specified in Table 1.1, the latest edition
EN, ISO, TS, etc. No Name & T Cited Section

Regulation on Design, Calculation and Construction
ÇYTHYE:2016 Chapter 9
Principles of Steel Structures
TS EN 1990: 2002 + A1: 2005 Building Design Principles Part 1
TS 500: 2000 + T1: 2001 + T2: Design and Construction Rules of Reinforced Concrete Chapter 7, Chapter 8,
2002 + T3: 2014 Structures Chapter 15
Calculation Values of the Loads to be Taken in the Sizing Chapter 7, Chapter 9,
TS 498
of the Building Elements Chapter 10,
TS 708: 2016 Steel – For Reinforced Concrete – Reinforcement Steel Chapter 7
TS EN 13670 Construction of Concrete Structures Chapter 7
TS EN 1992-1-1: 2004 + AC: Design of concrete structures -Part 1-1: General rules and
Chapter 7
2009 + A1: 2015 rules to be applied to buildings
Concrete-Feature, performance, manufacturing and
TS EN 206 Chapter 7
conformity
Determination of Frost-Thaw Resistance of Concrete -
TSE CEN/TR 15177 Chapter 8
Structural Internal Damage
Standard Specification for Sampling Procedure for Impact
ASTM A673 Chapter 9
Testing of Structural Steel
TS EN 10025 Hot Rolled Structural Steels Chapter 10
Hot Dip Continuously Coated Steel Flat Products -
TS EN 10346 Chapter 10
Technical Delivery Conditions
Galvanized Coatings Made by Hot Dip on Materials Made
TS EN ISO 1461 Chapter 10
of Iron and Steel -Properties and Test Methods
Standard Specification for Steel Tapping Screws for Cold-
ASTM C1513 Chapter 10
Formed Steel Framing Connections
Screed Based Boards -Characteristic Values for Design for
TS EN 12369-1 Structural Purposes -Part 1: OSB, Particleboard and Fiber Chapter 10
Boards
shall be used.
Table 1.1 – Cited Standards, Regulations and/or Documents

Table 1.1 (continued)
General Requirements
Characteristic Values for
forTimber-Based
the CompetenceBoards
of Test
Structural
and
TS ISO
EN 12369-2
/ IEC 17025 Episode
Chapter 10
14
Design – Part
Calibration Laboratories
2: Plywood
Wood Based Boards
ConcreteTests in Concrete
-Characteristic
Structure-Part
Values1: for
CoreStructural
Samples-
TS EN 12369-3 Chapter 10
TS EN 12504-1 Core
DesignTaking,
-Part 3:
Inspection
Solid Wood
andBoards
Determination of Compressive Chapter 15
Strength Steel Structures -Part 1-3: General Rules -For
Designing
TS EN 1993-1-3: 2006 + AC:
Cold-Formed Thin Measured Elements and Sheet Metal Chapter 10
2009
Coating
North American Specification for The Design of Cold-
AISI S100 Chapter 10
Formed Steel Structural Members
Mechanical Properties of Fasteners -Made of Carbon Steel
TS EN ISO 898-1 Chapter 10
and Alloy Steel -Part 1: Bolts, Screws and Studs
Design of Masonry Structures-Part 1-1: General Rules for
TS EN 1996-1-1: 2005 + A1:
Buildings-Equipped and Non-Reinforcement Masonry Chapter 11
2012
Rules
TS EN 771-1 Masonry Units -Features -Part 1: Clay Masonry Units Chapter 11
Masonry Units -Features -Part 3: Concrete Masonry Units
(Dense and Light Aggregate)
Masonry Units -Specifications -Part 4: Aerated Concrete
Masonry Units
Masonry units -Features -Chapter 6: Natural Stone
Masonry Units
Masonry units -Features -Chapter 5: Artificial Stone
Masonry Units
Masonry units -Test methods -Part 1: Determination of
Compressive Strength
Prefabricated Reinforced Aerated Concrete Building
Elements
Masonry mortar -Test methods -Part 11: Determination of
Pressure and Flexural Strength of Hardened Mortar
Masonry – Test Methods – Part 1: Determination of
Compressive Strength
Masonry Mortar -Test Methods -Part 11: Determination of
Pressure and Flexural Strength of Hardened Mortar
Masonry Test Methods - Part 3: Determination of Initial
Shear Strength
Masonry-Test Methods-Part 4: Determination of Shear
Strength in Joints with Waterproofing Layer
TS EN 1995-1-1: 2004 + A1: Design of wooden structures -Part 1-1: General -General
Chapter 12
2008 + A2: 2014 rules and rules for buildings
Wooden Structures – Test Methods – Cyclic Loading Test
for Joints with Mechanical Binders
Bearings – Used in Buildings – Part 1: General Design
TS EN 1337-1 Episode 14
Rules
TS EN 15129 Anti-Seismic Devices Episode 14
CHAPTER 2 – EARTHQUAKE GROUND MOTION
2.0. ICONS
DD-1 = Earthquake ground motion level DD-2 = 10% probability of being exceeded in 50 years (recurrence
period 475 years) earthquake ground motion level DD-3 = 50% probability of being exceeded in
50 years DD-3 = Earthquake ground motion level DD-4 = earthquake ground motion level with a
probability of exceeding 50% (repetition period 72 years) with a probability of being exceeded in
50 years FS = Local ground impact coefficient for the short period region F1= Local ground effect
2
coefficient for a period of 1.0 seconds g = Gravitational acceleration [g= 9.81 m/s ] ST()=
Horizontal elastic design spectral acceleration [g]
ae
ST = Vertical elastic design spectral acceleration [g]

()
aeD
ST = Horizontal elastic design spectral displacement [m] S DS = Short-period design spectral

acceleration coefficient [dimensionless] S D1 = Design spectral acceleration coefficient for 1.0 second
period [dimensionless] S= Short-period map spectral acceleration coefficient [dimensionless] S1= Map
spectral acceleration coefficient for 1.0 second period [dimensionless] T = Natural vibration
period [s]
TA = Horizontal elastic design acceleration spectrum corner period [s] T AD= Vertical elastic design
acceleration spectrum corner period [s] T B = Horizontal elastic design acceleration spectrum corner
period [s] TBD= Vertical elastic design acceleration spectrum corner period [s]
de()
p
(V)= Average shear wave velocity at upper 30 meters [m/s]
S 30
2.1. EARTHQUAKE HAZARD MAPS

2.1.1 – The data on earthquake ground movements to be taken as the basis for the design of
buildings under the influence of earthquakes are defined in this Section.
LT Horizontal elastic Spectrum cons to the displacement zone tran

= design tant siti
on
Period [s]
tran
cons
LDT = In the vertical elastic design spectrum Relocation Region siti
tant
on
Period [s]
2.1.2 – Earthquake data for four different earthquake ground motion levels defined in 2.2 are
defined by the Turkey Earthquake Hazard Maps put into effect by the decision of the Council of
Ministers dated 22/01/2018 and numbered 2018/11275 . These maps can be accessed from the
website at https://tdth.afad.gov.tr/.
2.2. EARTHQUAKE GROUND MOTION LEVELS
Within the scope of this Regulation, the following four different earthquake ground motion levels
are defined.
2.2.1. Earthquake Ground Motion Level-1 (DD-1)
DD-1 Earthquake Earth Motion describes very rare earthquake ground motion, where spectral
magnitudes have a 2% probability of being exceeded in 50 years and the corresponding recurrence
period is 2475 years. This earthquake ground motion is the largest earthquake considered as
ground motion
is also called.
DD-2 Earthquake Earth Motion describes a rare earthquake ground motion in which spectral
magnitudes have a 10% probability of being exceeded in 50 years and the corresponding
recurrence period is 475 years. This earthquake ground motion is also used as standard design
earthquake ground motion
Called.
DD-3 Earthquake Earth Motion describes frequent earthquake ground motion in which spectral
magnitudes have a 50% probability of being exceeded in 50 years and the corresponding
recurrence period is 72 years.
DD-4 Earthquake Earth Motion characterizes very frequent earthquake ground motion, where
spectral magnitudes have a 68% probability of being exceeded in 50 years (50% probability of
being exceeded in 30 years) and the corresponding recurrence period is 43 years. This earthquake
ground motion, also serves earthquake ground motion
Called.
2.3. STANDARD EARTHQUAKE GROUND MOTION SPECTRA
2.3.1. Definition
Earthquake ground motion spectra are specifically defined for a 5% damping rate based on a given
level of earthquake ground motion, in a standard format based on map spectral acceleration
coefficients and local ground impact coefficients as described in 2.3.2, 2.3.3, 2.3.4 and 2.3.5, or by
site-specific earthquake hazard analyses according to 2.4.1.
2.3.2. Map Spectral Acceleration Coefficients and Design Spectral Acceleration Coefficients
2.3.2.1 – Dimensionless map spectral acceleration coefficients are defined within the scope of the
Turkish Earthquake Hazard Maps for the four different levels of earthquake ground motion
specified in 2.2:
(a) Short-period map spectral acceleration coefficient S S

(b) Map spectral acceleration coefficient S 1 for a period of 1.0 seconds
Opposing the geometric average of earthquake effects in two horizontal directions perpendicular
to each other
map spectral acceleration coefficients are the map spectral accelerations for a 5% damping rate
based on the reference ground condition [ (V ) = 760 m/s] for a given earthquake ground motion
level
S 30
defined as dimensionless coefficients divided by gravitational acceleration.
2.3.2.2 – The map spectral acceleration coefficients S and S 1 defined in 2.3.2.1 are converted to
the design spectral acceleration coefficients and to as follows:
S
D S S D1 S = SF
DS SS
(2.1)
S = SF
D1 11
where F S and F1 represent the local ground effect coefficients defined in 2.3.3.
2.3.2.3 – Horizontal and vertical elastic design spectra, Equivalent.( 2.1) is defined in 2.3.4 and
2.3.5, respectively, using the spectral acceleration coefficients.
2.3.3. Local Ground Impact Coefficients
Local Soil Local ground impact coefficient f s for the short period region
Class
S 0.25 S S = 0.50 S S = 0.75 S S = 1.00 S S = 1.25 S S 1.50 S ≥
≤
ZA 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
ZB 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9
ZC 1.3 1.3 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
ZD 1.6 1.4 1.2 1.1 1.0 1.0
ZE 2.4 1.7 1.3 1.1 0.9 0.8
ZF A site-specific soil behaviour analysis will be carried out (see 16.5).
2.3.3.1 – Local ground impact coefficients depending on the local soil classes defined in 16.4
FS and F 1 are given in Table 2.1 and Table 2.2, respectively. Linear interpolation can be performed
for intermediate values of map spectral acceleration coefficients in the tables.
Table 2.1 – Local Ground Impact Coefficients for the short period region
Table 2.2 – Local Ground Impact Coefficients for a period of 1.0 seconds
Local Ground Impact Coefficient F 1 for a period of 1.0
Local Soil seconds
Class 1 0.10 S 1of 0.20 S 1 of 0.30 S 1 of 0.40 S 1 of 0.50 S 1 0.60 S ≥
≤ = = = =
ZA 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
ZB 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
ZC 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.4
ZD 2.4 2.2 2.0 1.9 1.8 1.7
ZE 4.2 3.3 2.8 2.4 2.2 2.0
ZF A site-specific ground behaviour analysis will be carried out (see
2.3.3.2 – Specific soil behaviour analyses shall be carried out in accordance with 16.5 for floors
falling into the ZF local floor class according to Table 2.1 and/or Table 2.2.
2.3.4. Horizontal Elastic Design Spectrum

2.3.4.1 – Horizontal elastic design spectral accelerations ae () which are the ordinates of the
horizontal elastic design acceleration spectrum for any earthquake ground motion level under
consideration
ST is
equivalent in terms of gravitational acceleration [g] depending on the natural vibration period.
2.2) (Figure 2.1):
T⎞
Sae ( ) =⎜0.4  DS A
T + 0.6S (0 ≤ T ≤ T )
T
 A  S ()= S ( ≤ T ≤ T
TT )
ae DS AB
(2.2)
S
D1
Sae ()T = (T B ≤ T ≤ T L)
T ST
D1
Sae ()T = 2
L (T L ≤ T ) T
where SDS and SD1 represent the design spectral acceleration coefficients defined in 2.3.2.2, and T
is the natural
shows the vibration period. Horizontal design spectrum corner periods T A and TB
Equivalent. (2.3) is defined as connected to SDS and SD1:
SS
D1 D1
T=
0.2 ;
T=
(2.3)
AB
SS
DS DS
The transition period to the fixed displacement zone will be taken T L = 6 s.

Figure 2.1
2.3.4.2 – Horizontal elastic design for any earthquake ground motion level considered
horizontal elastic design spectral displacements, which are the ordinates of the displacement
spectrum, are also ()
ST is equivalent in meters [m] depending on the natural vibration period. 2.4) is defined by (Figure
2.2):
2
T
S () = gS () (2.4)
TT
de 2mm
4π
Figure 2.2
2.3.5. Vertical Elastic Design Spectrum
Vertical elastic design spectral accelerations which are the ordinates of the vertical elastic design
acceleration spectrum for any earthquake ground motion level considered ST , horizontal
earthquake
()
is equivalent in
aeD
terms of gravitational acceleration [g] depending on the short period design spectral
acceleration coefficient defined for ground motion and the natural vibration period.( 2.5) is
defined by (Figure 2.3):
T⎞
S ( ) T = 0.32 + 0.48S (0 ≤≤
⎜ DS AD
TT )
aeD
T
 AD  S () T = 0.8S (T ≤ TT )
≤ (2.5)
AED DS AD BD
T
BD
S () T = 0.8S ( ≤ TT )
T≤
aeD DS BD LD
T
Equivalent. (2.5) The vertical spectrum vertral periods of T AD and T BD in T LD are equivalent to the
period of TLD. 2.6).
T TT
ABL
TAD = ; TBD = ; TLD= 2 (2.6)

3 3
Figure 2.3
2.4. SITE-SPECIFIC EARTHQUAKE

GROUND MOTION SPECTRUM
2.4.1. Site-Specific Elastic

Acceleration Spectrum
2.4.1.1 – In some special cases,
site-specific earthquake ground motion
spectra can be defined by site-specific
earthquake hazard analyses. Such
spectra can be used in any case,
depending on the preference of
the project engineer.
2.4.1.2 – The ordinates of site-specific earthquake ground motion spectra shall never be smaller
than 90 % of the design spectrum ordinates defined in 2.3.4 or 2.3.5.
2.4.2. Site-Specific Ground Behavior Analyses

On soils defined as class ZF in the local soil classification according to 16.4, site-specific soil
behavior analyses shall be carried out according to 16.5. Such analyses can also be carried out on
floors in other classes, depending on the preference of the project engineer.
2.5. DESCRIPTION OF EARTHQUAKE GROUND MOVEMENTS IN THE TIME DEFINITION FIELD
According to this regulation, the rules required to be applied for the selection of earthquake
records to be used for the identification of earthquake ground movements required in the one- or
two-dimensional and three-dimensional earthquake calculation of building carrier systems in the
time definition field and for scaling them with simple scaling method or for their transformation
to achieve spectral compatibility are defined in 2.5.1, 2.5.2 and 2.5.3.
2.5.1. Selection of Earthquake Records

2.5.1.1 – The selection of earthquake records to be used in the earthquake calculation in the time
description area of the building carrier systems shall be made by taking into account the
earthquake magnitudes, fault distances, welding mechanisms and local ground conditions
compatible with the earthquake ground motion level based on the design. If there are past
earthquake records that are compatible with the earthquake ground motion level based on the
design in the region where the building is located, these records will be used first.
Earthquake hazard separation can be used to determine the magnitude and fault distance
information of the earthquakes that contribute the most to the site-specific earthquake hazard.
2.5.1.2 – In cases where the selection of earthquake records of sufficient number or quality cannot
be made, simulated ground motion records may be used in the time definition field. In the case of
using such records, the seismic source, wave propagation and local ground characteristics of the
site where the building is located shall be taken into account. The model parameters to be used
for the simulation are compatible with the actual earthquake records recorded in the earthquakes
that have occurred in the region in question.
Shown.
2.5.1.3 – The number of earthquake records to be selected for one- or two-dimensional calculation
and earthquake record sets to be selected for three-dimensional calculation shall be at least
eleven. The number of records or recording teams to be selected from the same earthquake shall
not exceed three.
2.5.2. Scaling of Earthquake Records by Simple Scaling Method

2.5.2.1 – Apart from the ground behavior analyses to be carried out according to 16.5.2 or 16.10,
the earthquake ground movements to be used in the calculation in the time definition field can be
obtained from the selected earthquake records by simple scaling method as follows:
(a) The mean of the spectra of all records selected for one- or two-dimensional calculation is
0.2Tp
and 1.5According to the rule that their amplitude between periods T p shall not be smaller than
the amplitudes of the design spectrum defined in 2.3.4 or 2.4.1 in the same period range, the
amplitudes of earthquake ground motions shall be scaled.
(b) The composite horizontal spectrum shall be obtained by taking the square root of the sum of
the squares of the spectra belonging to the two horizontal components of each earthquake
recording team selected for the three-dimensional calculation. The mean of the composite
spectra of all selected records were 0.2 T p and 1.5Tp periods.
The amplitudes of the components of earthquake ground motion shall be scaled according to the
rule that the ratio of their amplitude to the amplitudes of the design spectrum defined in
accordance with 2.3.4 or 2.4.1 shall not be less than 1.3. This period interval may vary for insulated
buildings (see 14.14.4.2). Scaling of both horizontal components will be done with the same scale
coefficients.
2.5.2.2 – In the event that the building characteristics are required by the available earthquake
data and the site-specific earthquake ground motion spectrum is determined, the building will be
scaled up by selecting the earthquake records in a way that ensures less scattering in the analysis
results, using the conditioned average spectra associated with a certain number of vibration periods.
goable.
2.5.3. Conversion of Earthquake Records to Achieve Spectral Concordance
Earthquake ground motions for use in ground behavioural analyses in accordance with 16.5.2 or
16.10 or in other calculations in the time definition area may also be obtained by converting selected
earthquake records into spectral agreement to the design spectrum defined in accordance with
2.3.4 or 2.4.1. The averages of the spectra of the converted earthquake ground motions shall not
be smaller than the design spectrum ordinates for all periods.
2.6. PLACEMENT OF ACCELERATION RECORDERS IN BUILDINGS
If deemed appropriate by the Disaster and Emergency Management Presidency, the installation
of acceleration recorders in buildings, other structures or open areas belonging to public, private
and legal persons for the purpose of measuring strong earthquake movement by the Presidency
or other public institutions or university organizations under the coordination of the Presidency
shall be permitted, and the owners or operators of buildings or structures shall be responsible for
their protection.
SECTION 3 – GENERAL PRINCIPLES FOR THE EVALUATION AND DESIGN OF BUILDINGS UNDER
THE INFLUENCE OF EARTHQUAKES
3.0. ICONS
BKS = Building Use Class
BYS = Building Height Class
Earthquake with a 2% probability of being exceeded in 50 years (recurrence
DD-1
= period 2475 years)
Movement Level
DD-2 =
period of 475 years)
Movement Level
DD-3 =
period 72 years)
Movement Level
DD-4 =
period 43 years)
Movement Level
DTS = Earthquake Design Class
SEE = Migration Prevention Performance Level
HN = Total Height of Building [m]
hi = Floor height of the first floor of the building [m]
KH = Controlled Damage Performance Level
QC = Uninterrupted Performance Level
I = Building Importance Coefficient
. .SH = Limited Damage Performance Level
SDS = Short period design spectral acceleration coefficient [dimensionless]
pe
rp
buil
Each en vibrati
Tp,all = din axes of each judge
other di on
g
cu
lar
mode, calculated in the same direction for the entire building, including the
basement floors
natural vibration period [s]
pe
rp
buil
Each en vibrati
Tp,top = din axes of each judge
other di on
g
cu
lar
mode, the entire building's entire load-bearing system, including the ground floor
covering
natural vibration calculated in the same direction without taking into account
the basement masses
Period [s]
Effective cutting area on any floor in line with the earthquake under
e∑ A =
consideration[m2]
g∑ A = On any floor, in line with the direction of the earthquake under consideration
sum of cross-sectional areas of carrier system elements operating as curtains [m2]
On any floor, masonry filling parallel to the earthquake direction under
=
∑ Ak consideration
sum of wall areas (excluding door and window cavities) [m2]
w∑ A = On any floor, the sum of the effective body areas of the column section [m2]
avg (x)i (
)∆ = Average reduced relative floor deferral on the first floor of the building [m]
(X)
(∆i ) max
= Maximum reduced relative floor displacement on the first floor of the building [m] = Torsion
Irregularity Coefficient defined on the first floor

η
bi
= Strength Irregularity Coefficient defined on the first layer
η
ci
= Rigidity Irregularity Coefficient defined on the first floor
η
that
3.1. BUILDING USAGE CLASSES AND BUILDING IMPORTANCE COEFFICIENTS
3.1.1. Building Use Classes

Building Use Classes (BKS), which are the basis for determining the Earthquake Design Classes
defined in 3.2, are defined in Table 3.1 depending on the purpose of use of the buildings.
3.1.2. Building Importance Coefficients
Building Building Building

Importance Use Class Importance
Purpose of Use of the Building
Coefficients Coefficient depending
on the ()I Building
Use Classes Buildings that need to be used after the are defined
earthquake, buildings where people are long-
in Table 3.1.
term and intensive, buildings where valuable
goods are stored and buildings containing
Table 3.1 – dangerous materials a) Buildings that need to Building
Use Classes be used immediately after the earthquake and
Building (Hospitals, dispensaries, health centers, fire
Importance brigade buildings and facilities, PTT and other
communication facilities, transportation stations
Coefficients BKS 1= and terminals, energy production and distribution 1.5
facilities, province, district governorship and
municipality administration buildings, first aid
and disaster planning stations) b) Schools, other
educational buildings and facilities, dormitories
and dormitories, military barracks, prisons, etc.
c) Museums & Museums d) Buildings where
toxic, explosive, flammable, etc. substances with
properties are located or stored
Buildings where people are located for a short
time and intensively are shopping malls, sports
BKS = 2 1.2
facilities, cinemas, theaters, concert halls, places
of worship, etc.
Other buildings that do not fall within the
definitions given for BKS=1 and BKS=2
BKS = 3 1.0
(Residences, workplaces, hotels, building-type
industrial structures, etc.)
3.2. EARTHQUAKE DESIGN CLASSES
Depending on the Building Use Classes defined in 3.1.1 and the Short Period Design Spectral
Acceleration Coefficient defined in 2.3.2.2 for the DD-2 earthquake ground motion level, the
Earthquake Design Classes (DTS) to be used as the basis for the design under the influence of
earthquakes in this Regulation shall be determined according to Table 3.2.
Table 3.2 –
Earthquake DD-2 Earthquake Ground Motion Level Short Building Use Class Design
Classes Period Design Spectral Acceleration BKS = 2, 3 (DTS)
Coefficient ( SDS ) BKS 1=
DS< 0.33 s DTS = 4A DTS = 4

3.3. DS0.33 < 0.50 ≤ S DTS = 3A DTS = 3 BUILDING
HEIGHT DS0.50 < 0.75 ≤ S DTS = 2A DTS = 2 AND
BUILDING DS0.75 ≤ S DTS = 1A DTS 1=
HEIGHT
CLASSES
3.3.1. Building Base and Building Height
3.3.1.1 – In basement buildings that meet both the conditions given in (a) and (b) below, the
building base is defined at the level of the floor covering at the upper elevation of the basement
curtains.
(a) rigid basement curtains surround the building from all sides or from at least three sides;
(b) In the prevailing vibration mode in the direction of each of the axes of the building
perpendicular to each other, the ratio of the natural vibration period calculated for the whole
building, including the basement floors, to the natural vibration period calculated in the same
direction without taking into account all the basement masses including the ground floor
flooring in the same carrier system is less than 1.1 (T p, all ≤1.1 T p, top).
3.3.1.2 – In buildings with basements and buildings without basements that do not meet any of
the conditions given in 3.3.1.1, the building base is defined at the upper level of the foundation.
3.3.1.3 – Building height in terms of earthquake calculation H N is defined as the height measured
from the building base defined in accordance with 3.3.1.1 or 3.3.1.2. In this definition, the roof
The elevator engine room and similar small mass extensions located above the upholstery may
not be taken into account.
3.3.2. Building Height Classes

3.3.2.1 – In the design under the influence of earthquakes, buildings are divided into eight Building
Height Classes (BYS) in terms of their height. The height ranges defined on the basis of 3.3.1.3 for
buildings falling into these classes are given in Table 3.3 depending on the Earthquake Design Classes
in Table 3.2.
3.3.2.2 – Buildings specified as BYS = 1 in Table 3.3 as high-rise buildings according to Section 13
will be classified.
Table 3.3 – Building Height Classes and Building Height Ranges Defined by Earthquake Design
Classes
Building Height Ranges defined by Building Height Classes and
Building Height Earthquake Design Classes [m]
Class
3.4. DTS = 1, 1a, 2, 2a DTS 3, 3a= DTS 4, 4a=
BYS 1= N 70H > > N 91H N 105H >
BYS 2= N 56 70< H ≤ N70 91< H ≤ N91< 105H ≤
BYS 3= N 42 56< H ≤ N56 70< H ≤ N56 91< H ≤
BYS 4= N42< 28 H ≤ N42 56< H ≤
BYS 5= N17.5 < 28≤ H N 42< 28 H ≤

BYS 6= N10.5 to 17.5< H ≤ N17.5 < 28≤ H
BYS 7= N7 10.5< H ≤ N10.5 to 17.5< H ≤
BYS 8= N 7H ≤ N 10.5H ≤
BUILDING PERFORMANCE LEVELS
Building Performance Levels for building carrier systems under the influence of earthquakes are
defined in 3.4.1, 3.4.2, 3.4.3, 3.4.4 as a basis for the definition of Building Performance Targets.
3.4.1. Uninterrupted Use (QC) Performance Level
This level of performance corresponds to the situation in which structural damage does not occur
in the building carrier system elements or where the damage remains negligible.
3.4.2. Limited Damage (SH) Performance Level
This level of performance is against the level of damage to which a limited level of damage has
occurred to the building carrier system elements, i.e. nonlinear behavior has been limited.
is coming.
3.4.3. Controlled Damage (KH) Performance Level
This level of performance corresponds to the level of damage to the building carrier system
elements, which is not too severe and can often be repaired, to ensure life safety.
3.4.4. Migration Prevention (IO) Performance Level
This level of performance corresponds to the pre-migration situation where severe damage to the
building carrier system elements occurs. Partial or complete migration of the building is
prevented.
3.5. BUILDING PERFORMANCE TARGETS UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF EARTHQUAKES AND DESIGN
APPROACHES TO BE IMPLEMENTED
Building performance targets under the influence of earthquakes refer to the building
performance levels targeted under the earthquake ground motion levels defined in 2.2 and defined
according to 3.4.
3.5.1. Building Performance Targets
3.5.1.1 – For the four levels of earthquake ground motion defined in 2.2, the
Normal Performance Targets defined for Earthquake Design Class DTS = 1, 2, 3, 3a, 4, 4 4a and
Advanced Performance Targets defined for Earthquake Design Class DTS = 1a, 2a are given in
Table 3.4 and Table 3.5 for the purpose of applying to buildings. Further performance targets
against the earthquake ground motion levels in Table 3.4, depending on the building owner's
request
selectable.
Table 3.4. Performance Targets for New or Existing Buildings According to Earthquake Design Classes
and Evaluation / Design Approaches to be Applied
Earthq (1) DTS = 1.1a , 2 2a , 3, 3a, 4, 4a (2) (2) DTS = 1a , 2a )

uake Normal Evaluation/Design Advanced Evaluation/Design
Locatio Performance Target Approach Performance Approach
n H. Target
Level
DD-3 –– –– . .SH SCTT
DD-2 KH DGT(5) KH DGT(3.4)
DD-1 –– –– KH SCTT
(a) New On-Site Cast Reinforced Concrete, Prefabricated Reinforced Concrete and Steel Buildings (Except High-
Earthq DTS = 1, 2, 3, 3a, 4, 4a DTS = 1a, 2A

n H. Target
Level
DD-4 QC DGT –– ––
DD-3 –– –– . .SH SCTT
DD-2 KH DGT(3) KH DGT(3.4)
DD-1 SEE SCTT KH SCTT
Rise Buildings – BYS ≥ 2)

n H. Target
Level
DD-3 –– –– . .SH SCTT
DD-2 KH SCTT –– ––
DD-1 –– –– KH SCTT
(b) New Constructed or Existing High-Rise Buildings ( BYS = 1)
(c) Existing Cast Reinforced Concrete in Place, Prefabricated Reinforced Concrete and Steel Buildings (Except
Tall Buildings – BYS ≥ 2)
(1) BYS
It will be applied in buildings with > 3.

(2) BYS
= 2,3.
(3) It will be made as a preliminary design.
(4) It will be applied by taking I = 1.5.
(5) See 3.5.2.2.
3.5.1.2 – Masonry, wooden, and light steel buildings not specified in Table 3.4 will meet the
Controlled Damage (KH) performance target under the influence of DD-2 earthquake ground
motion.
3.5.2. Applied Evaluation/Design Approaches
3.5.2.1 – The scope of application of the Design by Strength (DGT) approach, whose calculation
principles are given in Chapter 4, and the Evaluation and Design by Changing Shape (SCT) approach,
whose calculation principles are given in Chapter 5, are given in Table 3.4 and Table 3.5.
Table 3.5. Performance Targets for Earthquake Insulated Buildings According to Earthquake
Design Classes and Evaluation / Design Approaches to be Applied

n H. Target
Level
DD-2 . .SH DGT QC DGT
DD-1 –– –– –– ––
(a) New Earthquake Insulated Buildings – Superstructure

n H. Target
Level
DD-2 KH DGT . .SH DGT
DD-1 –– –– –– ––

n H. Target
Level
DD-2 –– –– –– ––
DD-1 QC SWDT(1)–DGT(2) QC SWDT(1)–DGT(2)
(b) Existing Buildings to be Strengthened by Earthquake Insulation – Superstructure
(c) New Earthquake Insulated Buildings to be Constructed and Strengthened – Insulation System and
Infrastructure
(1) Shall be applied to the insulation system.

(2) To be applied for infrastructure.
3.5.2.2 – The preliminary design of buildings with full post-stress preproduction as defined in
Chapter 8 shall be carried out by the DGT approach and the final design shall be carried out by the
SCTT approach according to 8.4.3.
3.5.2.3 – The design of masonry, wood and light steel buildings not specified in Table 3.4 shall be
carried out with the Design by Strength (DGT) approach according to Section 4.
3.6. IRREGULAR BUILDINGS UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF EARTHQUAKES
3.6.1. Definition of Irregular Buildings

Table 3.6 – Uneven Buildings
A – IRREGULARITIES IN THE PLAN Related

Articles
A1 – Torsion Irregularity: For any of two earthquake directions
perpendicular to each other, the Torsion Irregularity Coefficient η bi is
greater than 1.2, which expresses the ratio of the largest relative layer
displacement on any floor to the average relative displacement in the same 3.6.2.1
direction on that floor (Figure 3.1). (X) (X) bi i max i avg [ ( ) ( ) 1.2]η=∆ ∆ >/ .
The calculation of relative floor offsets will be made according to 4.7,

taking into account the additional decentralization effects of ±5%.
A2 – Floor Discontinuities: On flooring on any floor (Figure 3.2); I – If
the sum of the space areas, including staircases and elevator shafts, is more
than 1/3 of the floor gross area, II – The presence of local floor gaps that
3.6.2.2
make it difficult to transfer the earthquake loads safely to the vertical carrier
system elements, III – The presence of sudden decreases in the in-plane
rigidity and strength of the flooring
A3 – Protrusions in the Plan: The dimensions of the protruding parts of
the building floor plans in two perpendicular directions are both larger than
3.6.2.2
20% of the total plan dimensions of that floor of the building in the same
directions (Figure 3.3).
B – VERTICAL IRREGULARITIES Related
Articles
B1 – Strength Irregularity Between Neighboring Floors (Weak Floor):
In reinforced concrete buildings, in any of the two earthquake directions
perpendicular to each other, the Strength Irregularity Coefficient ciη,
which is defined as the ratio of the total effective cutting area on
3.6.2.3
any floor to the total effective cutting area on the upper floor, is less than
0.80. e eci i i+1 [ ( ) ( ) 0.80]/A A η= <∑ ∑ Definition of the effective
cutting area on any floor: e w g ki i i i( ) ( ) ( ) ( 0.15 )A A = A + +∑ ∑ ∑
∑ Note: k 0 A = shall be taken for the walls defined in 4.9.1.3(b).
B2 – rigidity irregularity between neighboring floors (soft Floor): For
any of the two earthquake directions perpendicular to each other, except for
the basement floors, the average relative floor displacement rate on any ith
floor is divided by the average relative floor displacement rate on the one
upper or a lower floor ηthe coefficient of rigidity irregularity soot 3.6.2.1
more than 2.0. (X) ki i avg i 1 i 1 avg ( / ) ( / ) 2.0 h h+ +η=∆ ∆ >[ /
or (X) (X) ki i AVG i-1 i-1 AVG ( / ) ( / ) 2.0]/h h η=∆ ∆ > The
calculation of relative floor displacements shall be made according to 4.7,
taking into account the ±5% additional eccentricity effects.
B3 – Discontinuity of the vertical elements of the Carrier System: The 3.6.2.4
condition in which the vertical elements of the carrier system (columns or
curtains) are lifted on some floors and placed on top or end of the beams or
guseli columns, or the curtains on the upper floor are seated in the columns
below ( Figure 3.4).
Regarding the definition of irregular buildings whose design and construction should be avoided due
to the negativities in their behavior against earthquakes, the situations that cause irregularities in
the plan and vertical direction are given in Table 3.6 and the conditions related to them are given
in 3.6.2.
Figure
3.1
Type
A2
irregularity state – I A b/ A > 1/3 Ab: Sum of space fields
A : Gross
floor area
Figure
3.2
Figure 3.3
Figure 3.4
3.6.2. Conditions Relating

to Irregular
Buildings
The conditions for
irregularities
described in Table
3.6 are as follows:
3.6.2.1 – A1 and B2 type

irregularities are
irregularities that are
factors in the
selection of the
earthquake
calculation method
according to 4.6.
3.6.2.2 – In
buildings with
irregularities of type A2
and A3, the two-
dimensional sheet
(membrane) or shell shall be modeled with finite elements to show that
the floor tiles can safely transfer earthquake forces between
vertical carrier system elements within their own planes (see 4.5.6.2).
3.6.2.3 – In buildings where there is an irregularity of type B1, if the sum of the filling wall areas
on the first floor taken <into account is more than the one on the upper floor, the filling walls shall
not be taken into account in the calculation of the η ηci.
0.60 ≤η)
ci min
The carrier system behavior coefficient given in Table 4.1 is 1.25 (η)
ci min
It will be applied to the entire building in line with both earthquakes. However, the ηwill never be
0.60 <. Otherwise, the earthquake calculation will be repeated by increasing the strength and
rigidity of the weak floor.
3.6.2.4 – The conditions for buildings with type B3 irregularities are set out below in (a) to (d):
(a) Columns shall never be allowed to be seated on any floor of the building above or at the end
of the cantilever beams or the guses formed in the columns below.
(b) If the column sits on a beam with support at both ends, it is sufficient to calculate the vertical
earthquake in accordance with 4.4.3.
(c) The curtain on the upper floors shall never be allowed to be seated in the columns below.
(d) Curtains shall never be allowed to be placed on any floor of the building, in the middle of the
opening above the beams within their plane.
NNEX 3A – ARRANGEMENT OF MAJOR CARRIER SYSTEMS FOR APPROPRIATE DESIGN UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF
EARTHQUAKES
The following general rules should be taken into account in the arrangement of building carrier
systems. In this context, the plan and vertical irregular carrier systems described in 3.6 should be
avoided as much as possible.
3A.1. SIMPLICITY AND SIMPLICITY OF THE CARRIER SYSTEM
Due to the uncertainties in earthquake ground motion, structural modeling and structural element
behavior, as well as the approximations in analysis and design methods, it is the basic rule of
design under the influence of earthquakes that the carrier system is as simple and simple as
possible in order to ensure that the earthquake behavior of the building is predictable.
3A.2. REGULAR AND SYMMETRICAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE CARRIER SYSTEM
3A.2.1 – By arranging the carrier system in a regular and symmetrical manner in the plan, the
inertial forces arising from the diffuse masses in the floors can be optimally transferred to the
vertical carrier system elements. With the symmetrical carrier system arrangement, the
eccentricities that may occur in terms of mass, rigidity and strength can be prevented and a
predictable earthquake behavior can be realized.
3A.2.2 – The carrier system shall also be arranged in an orderly manner in a vertical direction. In
this context, soft coat and weak floor arrangements that may occur due to sudden changes in floor
rigidity and strength should be avoided as much as possible.
3A.3. ENSURING THE OVER-DEPENDENCE FEATURE IN THE CARRIER SYSTEM
3A.3.1 – In the event that the hyper-dependence behavior under static loads is also valid under
the effects of earthquakes, in this context, if the strength of some carrier system elements
decreases or even fails during the earthquake, it should be ensured that a sufficient number of
spare elements are activated to ensure stable behavior in the system, in other words, the carrier
system is backed up.
3A.3.2 – It should not be overlooked that building blocks separated from each other by structural
joints carry the risk of being damaged by collision in an earthquake. In this context;
(a) Except for reasons such as the prevention of torsional irregularity, the balanced arrangement
of the bearing system elements, etc., the separation of the bearing system into independent
blocks by structural joints should be avoided as much as possible simply because of the length of
the building or building blocks in the plan.
(b) The length of the building or building blocks in the plan may, irrespective of the earthquake
calculation, be determined according to the carrier system calculation for smooth temperature
change and shrinkage effects using the effective cross-sectional rigidities defined in 4.5.8 for
reinforced concrete elements.
3A.4. ADEQUATE STRENGTH AND RHYTHM IN THE CARRIER SYSTEM
3A.4.1 – Considering that earthquake ground movement is effective in all directions in the plan,
it is essential that the bearing system elements are arranged preferably in two prime directions
perpendicular to each other and have close strength and rigidity.
3A.4.2 – It is essential to ensure sufficient torsional strength and rigidity in order to eliminate
torsional irregularity that causes negative behavior in the carrier system and to prevent dangerous
torsional vibrations. A suitable solution in this direction is to arrange the bearing system elements
with high rigidity and strength around the building as much as possible.
3A.5. SUFFICIENT DUCTILITY IN THE CARRIER SYSTEM
Design The principles of ductile design and capacity design defined in this Regulation should be
meticulously complied with in order to reduce the earthquake effects occurring in the building under
the ground movement of the design by the ductile behavior of the carrier system.
3A.6. ADEQUATE FLOOR RHYTHM AND STRENGTH ON FLOORS AND TRANSITION FLOORS
3A.6.1 – In order to ensure that the inertial forces generated in the floors in an earthquake are
safely transferred to the vertical carrier system elements and at the same time the effects of the
earthquake are safely distributed among the vertical carrier system elements with different
rigidities, it is essential that the floors have high in-plane rigidity and sufficient strength.
3A.6.2 – It shall be shown by calculation that in-plane forces are safely transferred from the floors
to the vertical carrier system elements. If necessary, reinforced concrete slabs should be equipped
with additional connecting reinforcements and transfer elements (see 7.11).
3A.6.3 – Large gaps in the slabs shall be avoided. Horizontal elements with sufficient rigidity and
strength at the gap edges to ensure that inertial forces are transferred to the vertical carrier
system elements where voids cannot be avoided
should be regulated.
3A.6.4 – It is essential to ensure sufficient in-plane rigidity and strength, especially in transition from
normal rigidity floors to rigid basement floors and transferring most of the earthquake forces
generated on the upper floors to the perimeter curtains in the basement floors.
SECTION 4 – CALCULATION PRINCIPLES FOR THE DESIGN OF BUILDINGS ACCORDING TO
STRENGTH UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF EARTHQUAKES
4.0. ICONS
tA = Equivalent field used in empirical natural vibration period calculation [m2]
Awj = Body cross-sectional area of curtain j [m2]
Ch = The empirical coefficient used in the calculation of the second order
tC = Coefficient used in the calculation of the empirical natural vibration period
Between the cross-sectional centers of gravity of the curtain parts with bond
c =
beams (gaps)
distance [m]
D = Strength Excess Coefficient
DSubsy = Excess Strength Coefficient applied to the lower part of the building
stem
(X)
DSubs = Equivalent Strength Excess Coefficient applied to the lower part of the building
ystem
(X)
Equivalent Strength Surplus applied to the lower part of the building in the nth
Dn,bott =
om mode
Coefficient
Dball = Excess Strength Coefficient applied to the upper part of the building
Earthquake with a 2% probability of being exceeded in 50 years (recurrence period
DD-1 =
2475 years)
Movement Level
DD-2 =
period of 475 years)
Movement Level
DD- Earthquake with a 50% probability of being exceeded in 50 years (recurrence
=
3 period 72 years)
Movement Level
Dbi = Additional eccentricity magnification coefficient on the i floor
(X) in the calculation of the prevailing period of natural vibration of the building
(X) dfi =
in line with the earthquake
Displacement consisting of fictitious load acting on the ith layer [m]
Ed = Total earthquake effect based on the design with direction joining applied
(H) Ed = Horizontal earthquake effect based on the design with direction joining applied
Earthquake effect based on design under the influence of the influence
(X) Ed =
earthquake in line (X)
Earthquake Effect based on design under the influence of earthquake in line
(Y) Ed =
(Y)
The earthquake effect based on the design under the influence of the earthquake
(Z) Ed =
of the direction of (Z)
(X) in the calculation of the prevailing period of natural vibration of the building
(X) Ffi =
in line with the earthquake
The fictitious load acting on the ith floor [kN]
(X) (X) equivalent earthquake load acting on the ith floor mass center in line with the
FiE =
earthquake
[kN]
(S)
e = Additional eccentricity of 5% [m ] fjE = equivalent earthquake load acting on the finite
2
element node of the j [kN] G = Constant load effect g = Gravitational acceleration [m/s ] H =
Horizontal ground thrust effect H i = Upper section above the basements of the building
Height measured from base [m] HN = Total height of the upper section of the building
above the basements [m] Hw = Curtain height [m]
h = height of the first floor [m] I = Coefficient of Building Importance  = Height of the curtain in
i w
the plan [m]
wj = length of pitch j'in the plan [m]

MDEV = Tipping moment caused by earthquake loads at the base of the reinforced concrete curtain
or diagonal frame [kNm]
(X)
Mib = additional floor torsion moment on the i floor (X) that corresponds to the additional eccentricity effect in
the direction perpendicular to the earthquake direction [kNm] Mo = Total tipping moment at the
base from the earthquake loads for the whole building [kNm]
(X)
M = (X) at the base of the earthquake loads for the entire building in line with the earthquake
he
total tipping moment [kNm] M1, M2= Flexural moments obtained at the base from
the impact of the earthquake in the curtain parts that make up the bond-beamed curtain [kNm]
mi = total mass of the ith layer [t]
2
m = moment of mass inertia of the ith floor [tm ]
iθ
(S)
m j = The singular mass acting on the typical finite element node j [t]
m t = The total mass of the upper section of the building above the basements [t]
(X)
mtxn = (X) the modal effective mass of the base shear force of the nth vibration mode in the x-axis
direction of the building for the earthquake direction [t]
(X)
mtxn,all = The modal effective mass of the base shear force calculated in the nth mode under the
influence of the earthquake in the direction (X) for the whole building (upper
section + lower section) [t]
(X) = In the nth mode under the influence of the earthquake in the direction (X) for the upper
part of the building
m
txn,top
modal effective mass of the calculated base shear force [t]
(Y)
mtyn = (Y) base shear force modal effective mass of the nth vibration mode in the direction of the y axis of the
building for the earthquake direction [t] N = Total number of floors in the upper section above the
basement floors of the building N V = Equal to each other tensile and pressure generated at the
base of the curtain parts as the sum of the cutting forces generated in the bond beams of the
bond beam curtain under the effect of the earthquake over the entire curtain height axial forces
[kN] n = Moving load participation coefficient R = Carrier System Behavior Coefficient R a()=
Projected ductility capacity and period-dependent Earthquake Load Reduction Coefficient
T
Rsub = Carrier System Behavior Coefficient applied to the lower part of the building
R upper = Carrier System Behavior Coefficient applied to the upper part of the building
(R ) = Applied to the lower part of the building Earthquake Load Reduction Coefficient
a bottom
(R ) = nth vibration mode applied to the lower part of the building Earthquake Load Reduction
a n,alt
Coefficient (Equivalent Earthquake Load Reduction Coefficient applied to the lower

Ra =
) alt = (Ra )n,alt nth Equivalent Earthquake Load Reduction Coefficient applied to the lower
part of the building in vibration mode
(R ) = Applied to the upper part of the building Earthquake Load Reduction Coefficient
a top
(R ) = nth vibration mode applied to the upper part of the building Earthquake Load Reduction
a n,top
Coefficient Q = Moving load effect

S = Snow load effecti ST()= Horizontal elastic design spectral acceleration [g]
ae
SaR () Reduced design spectral acceleration [g]
T = SDS = Short-period design spectral acceleration coefficient [dimensionless] T = Natural

vibration period [s]
TB = Horizontal elastic design acceleration spectrum corner period [s]
Tn = natural vibration period of the nth mode [s]
TpA = Prevailing natural vibration period calculated as amprically [s]
(X)
Tp(X) = is the period of natural vibration prevailing in the building in line with the earthquake
[s]
u (X) = (X) for any column or pitch in the direction of the earthquake,
i
reduced displacement [m]

(X)
V (X) = reduced floor shear force on the ith floor in line with the earthquake [kN]
i
(X)
Vx,all = Base shear force [kN] calculated under the influence of the earthquake in the direction (X)
for the whole building (upper section + lower section)
(X)
Vxn,all = Base shear force calculated in the nth mode under the influence of the earthquake in the
direction (X) for the whole building (upper section + lower section) [kN]
(X) =
calculated under the influence of the earthquake in the direction (X) for the upper part of
the building
V
x,top
base cutting force [kN]
(X) =
In the nth mode under the influence of the earthquake in the direction (X) for the upper
V
xn,top
calculated base cutting force [kN]
(X)
VtE = (X) the total equivalent earthquake load (base shear force) affecting the entire building in
line with the earthquake [kN]
(X)
V tx
= The largest total earthquake load obtained in the direction x by one of the modal
calculation methods [kN]
(S)
(S)
w j = Singular weight acting on typical finite element nodal point j [kN] = Singular constant weight
acting on typical finite element node j [kN]

w
G,j
(S)
wQ,j = Singular additional (moving) weight acting on the typical finite element node j [kN]
w k = Total weight acting on the k layer [kN] YM = Sufficient number of vibration modes α =
Empirical coefficient used for earthquake joint cavities
(X)
β = Equivalent base cutting force magnification coefficient

tE
(X)
β = Second order magnification coefficient

II
(X)
∆FNE = (X) additional equivalent earthquake load acting on the Nth floor (top) of the building in line with the
2
earthquake [kN] Δmiθ = Increase in the moment of inertia of the floor mass [tm ] (X)
∆i =
(X) for any column or pitch in the direction of the earthquake, the reduced relative
layer displacement, which expresses the displacement difference between two
consecutive layers [m]
(X
(∆ ) ) = (X) refers to the displacement difference between two consecutive layers in the direction
of the earthquake
i avg
for the average reduced relative floor displacement [m] δ i(X) = (X) for the
earthquake direction, effective relative floor displacement for columns or curtains on the first floor
X
of the building [m] δ( ) = (X) for the earthquake direction, the effective relative floor
displacement on the first floor of the building

i,max
the largest value in the coat [m] ηbi = torsion irregularity coefficient in the i layer
Used to determine the equivalent base shear force magnification coefficient

γ =
E empirical coefficient
λ = Empirical coefficient used to limit relativefloor displacements κ = Coefficient used
differently for reinforced concrete and steel carrier systems in the definition of permissible
relative floor displacements
μk = Ductility capacity ν(X) for the carrier system
= Coefficient used in the calculation of the equivalent earthquake load reduction

coefficient applied for the lower part of the building
(X)
ν = Equivalent earthquake load reduction applied in the nth mode for the lower part of the building
n
The coefficient used in the calculation of the coefficient

(X)
= Reduced internal forces of the lower part of the building consisting of its own
vibration
ν
bottom
the coefficient used to calculate
(X)
νn,alt = the coefficient used to calculate the reduced internal forces of the lower part of the building
itself in the mode nth
(X)
ν upper = Coefficient used to calculate the internal forces transferred from the upper part of the
building to the lower part
(X)
νn,upper = coefficient used to calculate the internal forces transferred from the upper part to the lower
part of the building in the nth mode
Ω = Coefficient of bond degree in the curtain with bond beam
(X)
θ = (X) is the second order defined for each ith floor in line with the
II,i
earthquake
indicative value
(X)
θII,max = (X) maximum second order indicator value defined in line with the earthquake
4.1. GENERAL
4.1.1. Purpose
The purpose of this Chapter is to explain the principles of linear calculation to be used for the design
of buildings within the scope given in 4.1.3 with the Design by Strength (DGT) approach.
4.1.2. Definition
In the Design by Strength (DGT) approach, which is one of the two main approaches for the design
of building carrier systems under the influence of earthquakes:
(a) Reduced earthquake loads corresponding to the ductility capacity of the carrier system
defined for a specific projected performance target shall be determined.
(b) Under reduced earthquake loads, the linear earthquake calculation of the carrier system is
made. The reduced internal forces of the element found from this calculation are combined with
the internal forces consisting of other loads, taking into account the excess strength when
necessary, and the strength demands are obtained.
(c) Element strength demands shall be compared with the internal force capacities (strength
capacities) of the elements defined for the foreseen performance target.
(d) The relative floor displacements obtained from the earthquake calculation shall be compared
with the permissible limits.
(e) The design shall be completed by showing that the strength demands are below the strength
capacities and at the same time the relative floor shifts are below the permissible limits.
Otherwise, the element sections are changed and the calculation is repeated and the result is
reached.
4.1.3. Scope
Design by Strength (DGT) calculation principles described in this section, the design of Tall Buildings
described in Section 13, the design of Earthquake Insulated Buildings described in Section 14 and
the design of all buildings specified in Table 4.1 under this Regulation, except for the Assessment
and Strengthening of Existing Buildings described in Section 15. will be applied as basic account
principles. The DGT calculation principles will be partially utilized in the design of Tall Buildings
(Section 13) and Earthquake Insulated Buildings (Section 14).
4.1.4. Performance Targets

4.1.4.1 – In all buildings covered by this Chapter according to Table 4.1, earthquake calculation shall
be made with the DGT calculation principles given in this Section under the influence of DD-2
earthquake ground motion in order to achieve the Controlled Damage (KH) performance target
defined as the Normal Performance Target in Table 3.4(a).
4.1.4.2 – According to Table 3.4(a), in buildings with Earthquake Design Class DTS=1a, DTS=2a and
also Building Height Class BYS=2, BYS=3;
(a) Under the influence of DD-2 earthquake ground motion, I = 1.5 and the design made with the
DGT calculation principles in this Chapter shall be considered as a preliminary design.
(b) Assessment and Design by Deformation according to Chapter 5 to ensure the Controlled
Damage (KH) performance target, defined as the Advanced Performance Target in Table 3.4(a)
under the influence of DD-1 earthquake ground motion, as well as the Limited Damage (SH)
performance target under the DD-3 earthquake, (SCT) approach and if necessary, the design will
be repeated in a way to ensure the targeted performance.
4.2. EARTHQUAKE LOAD COEFFICIENTS AND CAPACITY DESIGN PRINCIPLES
4.2.1. Earthquake Load Reduction Coefficient
4.2.1.1 – Within the framework of Design by Strength, the definition of the relationship between
the predicted ductility capacity and the strength demand and the earthquake load coefficients
determined accordingly is given in Annex 4A.
4.2.1.2 – According to the definition made in Annex 4A, the Earthquake Load Reduction
Coefficient () to be used as the basis for reducing linear elastic earthquake loads is defined as
follows:
RT
a
R
Ra()T = T > T B (4.1a)
I
RT
Ra() = D + − D  T ≤ TB (4.1b)
T
T
I
 B
where R and D represent the Carrier System Behavior Coefficient and the Strength Surplus
Coefficient defined in Table 4.1, I represent the Building Importance Coefficient defined in Table
3.1, the natural vibration period of the T system, and TB is the Equivalent.( 2.3) the spectrum
corner period defined by
Shows.
4.2.2. Principles of Capacity Design
In the design of building carrier systems within the framework of Design by Strength, the principles
of capacity design shall be taken into consideration in addition to the rules given in this Section.
The capacity design approach is a design approach that envisages that nonlinear ductile behavior
in the carrier system is limited to specific elements (or sections) that are explicitly defined, and
that all other elements have sufficient strength capacity in accordance with this behavior. The
rules for the implementation of the Capacity Design Principles are given in the relevant sections of
this Regulation.
4.3. APPLICATION LIMITS OF CARRIER SYSTEMS, CARRIER SYSTEM BEHAVIOR COEFFICIENTS AND
SURPLUS STRENGTH COEFFICIENTS
4.3.1. Application Limits of Carrier Systems
The building carrier systems to which the calculation principles given in this section can be applied
within the framework of Design by Strength and the Building Height Classes (BYS) permitted for
these systems according to the definition in Table 3.3 are given in Table 4.1, depending on the
ductility levels defined in 4.3.3.
4.3.1.1 – Carrier systems and calculation principles for High-Rise Buildings (BYS=1) are defined in
Section 13.
4.3.1.2 – In the carrier systems denoted by A21, A22 and C21, C22 in Table 4.1, the permissible
Building Height Class can be increased to BYS ≥ 2 , limited to buildings with DTS = 4.
4.3.2. Coefficients R and D According to the Carrier System Type
4.3.2.1 – For cast-in-place and prefabricated reinforced concrete, steel, light steel, masonry, wood
building carrier systems and various ductility levels defined in 4.3.3, the Carrier System Behavior
Coefficient R and the Strength Surplus Coefficient defined in Annex 4A are given in Table 4.1.
4.3.2.2 – In composite column systems, the R and D coefficients given for steel carrier systems
shall be used.
4.3.2.3 – According to the definition given in 3.3.1, in buildings with basements surrounded by
external rigid curtains, in the lower part where the basements are located (R/I) = 2.5 and D = 1.5
shall be taken.
4.3.2.4 – In buildings with reinforced concrete curtains and/or steel crossed frames where DTS =
1, 1a, 2, 2a, if one of the two conditions described in (a) and (b) below cannot be met in any
direction, the Carrier System Behavior Coefficient shall be considered (4/5)R instead of R. No
changes will be made to the Strength Excess Coefficient D. The curtain system with tie beams
satisfying the condition given in 4.5.4.5 shall be considered as a single curtain.
(a) Base tipping from which a single curtain or steel diagonal frame in the carrier system receives
The moment of MDEV shall not be more than 1/3 of M in that direction the total base tipping
moment consisting of earthquake loads for the entire building .
he
(b) The curtain(s) on each side axis of the building or steel diagonal
The sum of the base tipping moment M DEV or M DEV received by the frame(s), the total base
tipping moment consisting of earthquake loads for the entire building in that direction shall not
be less than 1/6 of M.
he
4.3.3. High Ductility, Limited and Mixed Carrier Systems
4.3.3.1 – Reinforced concrete and steel carrier systems, as given in Table 4.1, are divided into three
classes: ductility level carrier systems, ductility level limited carrier systems and ductility level mixed
carrier systems.
4.3.3.2 – High ductility and limited in-situ casting and preproduction

The definitions and conditions to be complied with for reinforced concrete, steel, light steel and
wood carrier systems are given in Chapter 7, Chapter 8, Section 9, Chapter 10 and Chapter 12,
respectively.
4.3.3.3 – Ductility level mixed carrier systems are systems formed by using frame carrier systems
with limited ductility level with reinforced concrete curtains with high ductility level or steel diagonal
frames.
4.3.4. Conditions Relating to the Ductility Levels of Carrier Systems
4.3.4.1 – With regard to systems with limited ductility and mixed systems;
(a) Carrier systems with limited ductility may not be used in buildings classified as DTS=1a,
DTS=2a, DTS=3a and DTS=4a. Other limitations on such carrier systems are set out in 4.3.4.3.
(b) Ductility level mixed carrier systems cannot be used in buildings with BYS ≤ 6 and classified as
DTS=1a and DTS=2a.
4.3.4.2 – The ductility levels of the carrier systems in directions perpendicular to each other must
be the same. However, different R coefficients and corresponding D coefficients can be used in
perpendicular directions. The maximum Class of Building Height allowed according to Table 4.1 shall
be determined as unfavorable to those granted in two directions.
4.3.4.3 – Carrier systems (A31, B31, C31 carrier systems in Table 4.1) where all of the effects of
earthquakes are met by reinforced concrete frames with limited ductility levels that transmit
momentum, shall be used only in buildings with DTS=3 and DTS=4. Carrier systems consisting of
reinforced concrete frames with or without filled single-direction threaded flooring shall also be
classified as carrier systems with limited ductility levels if they do not contain curtains and shall be
used only in buildings with DTS=3 and DTS=4. Such carrier systems can be made as ductility level
mixed systems by arranging them together with reinforced concrete bond beams (hollow) and/or
gapless curtains with high ductility level or steel eccentric and/or central diagonal frames with
high ductility level (A2, B2, C2 carrier systems in Table 4.1).
4.3.4.4 – In the case of carrier systems containing only beamless slabs, all earthquake effects shall
be borne by ductile bonded beams (hollow) and/or gapless curtains in reinforced concrete
buildings or by gapless curtains with limited ductility levels (A12, A13 and A32 carrier systems in
Table 4.1). In steel buildings, central and/or eccentric diagonal frames with high ductility level or anti-
buckling cross frames or central diagonal frames with limited ductility level shall be used (C12, C13
and C32 in Table 4.1 carrier systems). The calculation of such systems will be carried out in two
stages. In the first stage calculation, the frame columns will be taken jointly from the bottom and
top. In the second stage calculation, the connections of these elements will be modeled
monolithically. The internal forces on the curtains, columns, crosses and floors will be calculated
as the unfavorable of those obtained in two stages. Relative floor rollovers will be obtained from
the second stage account.
4.3.4.5 – In buildings where cast or prefabricated reinforced concrete curtains with or without
ductility levels with high ductility levels and steel diagonal frames with high ductility level are
used together with frames with high ductility level transferring momentum, the sum of the tipping
moments caused by earthquake loads at the base of the curtains or diagonal frames shall be
determined from the total tipping torches occurring at the base from the earthquake loads for the
whole building shall not be less than 40% of its moment, nor more than 75%:
0.40 m <∑ m < 0.75m (4.2)
o DEV o
If the upper limit condition in this relation cannot be met, the coefficients R and D defined in Table
4.1 for cases where all earthquake effects are met by ductility curtains or diagonal frames and the
highest permissible BYS shall be taken into account. If the lower limit condition is not met, the
coefficients R and D given in Table 4.1 will not be changed, but a surplus of the maximum
permissible BYS will be taken into account.
4.3.4.6 – In reinforced concrete and steel ductility level mixed carrier systems, the sum of the tipping
moments resulting from earthquake loads at the base of reinforced concrete curtains with high
ductility level bond beams (hollows) or gapless reinforced concrete curtains and central, eccentric
or buckling prevented steel diagonal frames shall not be less than 75% of the total tipping moment
occurring at the base from the earthquake loads for the whole building:
∑ m ≥ 0.75m (4.3)
GIANT o
If this condition cannot be met, the coefficients R and D defined in Table 4.1 for cases where all
earthquake effects are met with limited-ductility frameworks and the highest permissible BYS shall
be taken into account.
4.3.4.7 – Equivalent in buildings where reinforced concrete curtains with limited ductility levels or
central steel diagonal frames with limited ductility are used together with reinforced concrete or
steel frames with limited ductility levels that transmit momentum. The condition given in 4.3) shall
be satisfied. Otherwise, the rule given in 4.3.4.6 shall apply.
4.3.4.8 – For use in 4.3.2.4, 4.3.4.5 and 4.3.4.6, the base tipping moments received by the curtains
shall be calculated according to MDEV , 4.5.3.7(d) or 4.5.3.8(c) for gapless curtains and according to
4.5.4.3 for curtains with bond beams (gaps). If the total tipping moment from the earthquake
loads for the entire building is Mo, it will be obtained according to 4.7, 4.8.2 or 4.8.3.
Table 4.1. Carrier System Behavior Coefficient, Excess Strength Coefficient and Permissible Building
Height Classes for Building Carrier Systems
Carrier Permitted
System Excess Building
Building Carrier System Behavior Strength Height
Coefficie Coeffici Classes
nt R ent D BYS
A. CAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BUILDING CARRIER SYSTEMS
IN PLACE
A1. High Ductility Carrier Systems
A11. Buildings where all of the effects of earthquakes are met by
reinforced concrete frames with high ductility levels that transmit 8 3 BYS ≥ 3
momentum
A12. Buildings where all earthquake effects are met with reinforced
7 2.5 BYS ≥ 2
concrete curtains with high ductility level bond beams (hollows)
A13. Buildings where all earthquake effects are met with reinforced
6 2.5 BYS ≥ 2
concrete curtains with high ductility levels
A14. Buildings where the effects of earthquakes are met together
by reinforced concrete frames with high ductility levels and 8 2.5 BYS ≥ 2
reinforced concrete curtains with high ductility levels (see
4.3.4.5)
by reinforced concrete frames with a high level of
7 2.5 BYS ≥ 2
ductility and reinforced concrete curtains with a high level of
ductility (see 4.3.4.5)
A16. Single-storey buildings where all the effects of earthquakes are
met by reinforced concrete columns with articulated connections at
3 2 –
the roof level and high ductility levels not exceeding 12 m in
height
A2. Ductility Level Mixed Carrier Systems (See 4.3.4.1, 4.3.4.6)
by reinforced concrete frames with limited ductility levels 6 2.5 BYS ≥ 4
that transmit momentum and reinforced concrete curtains with
high ductility level bond beams (hollows) (see 4.3.1.2)
by reinforced concrete frames with limited ductility levels
5 2.5 BYS ≥ 4
and gapless reinforced concrete curtains with high ductility levels
(see 4.3.1.2)
by reinforced concrete frames with limited ductility level
limited filling (asmolen) or unfilled single-directional toothed 6 2.5 BYS ≥ 6
flooring and reinforced concrete curtains with high ductility level
bond beams (hollows)
are met together
A24. Buildings where the effects of earthquakes
by reinforced concrete frames with limited ductility level
limited filling (asmolen) or unfilled single-directional toothed 5 2.5 BYS ≥ 6
pavement and gapless reinforced concrete curtains with high
ductility level
A3. Ductility Limited Carrier Systems (see 4.3.4.1, 4.3.4.3, 4.3.4.7)
A31. Buildings where all of the effects of earthquakes are met by
reinforced concrete frames with limited ductility levels that 4 2.5 BYS ≥ 7
transmit momentum
A32. Buildings where all earthquake effects are met by reinforced
4 2 BYS ≥ 6
concrete curtains without gaps limited to ductility
are met together
A33. Buildings where the effects of earthquakes
by reinforced concrete frames with limited ductility levels 4 2 BYS ≥ 6
Carrier Permitted
nt R ent D BYS
B. PREFABRICATED REINFORCED CONCRETE BUILDING
CARRIER SYSTEMS
B1. High Ductility Carrier Systems
B11. Buildings where all of the effects of earthquakes are met with
prefabricated frames with high ductility levels that transfer
momentum MAB1MAB2 type momentum transfer
connections: MAB3, MAB4 type momentum transferring BYS ≥ 4
connections: 75 2.5 2.5 BYS ≥ 6
B12. Connections of earthquake effects are met by prefabricated
frames with high ductility levels that transmit momentum and
reinforced concrete curtains with high ductility level cast bond
beams (hollows) (see 4.3.4.5) MAB1, MAB2 type
momentum transferring connections: MAB3, MAB4 type BYS ≥ 2
momentum transferring connections: 75 2.5 2.5 BYS ≥ 6
B13. The connections of earthquake effects are met by
prefabricated frames with a high level of ductility that transmit
momentum and buildings where the ductility level is met by
reinforced concrete curtains without voids cast in place (see 4.3.4.5)
MAB1, MAB2 type momentum transferring connections: BYS ≥ 2
MAB3, MAB4 type momentum transferring connections: 65 2.5 2.5 BYS ≥ 6
B14. Buildings where the connections of vertical loads are met with
articulated prefabricated and two-way frames, and where all
earthquake effects are met by reinforced concrete curtains 4 2 BYS ≥ 7
with high ductility level without cast gaps and/or bond beams
(hollows)
all the effects of the
B15. Single-storey buildings where
earthquake are met by columns with articulated joints at the 3 2 –
roof level and with a high level of ductility not exceeding 12 m in
height
B2. Ductility Level Mixed Carrier Systems (See 4.3.4.1, 4.3.4.6)
B21. Connections of earthquake effects are met by prefabricated
frames with limited ductility levels that transmit momentum
and buildings where ductility level soot met by reinforced
concrete curtains with cast bond beams (gaps) or without gaps
MAB1, MAB2 type momentum transfer connections: MAB3, BYS ≥ 5
MAB4 type torque transferring connections: 54 2.5 2.5 BYS ≥ 6
B3. Ductility Limited Carrier Systems (see 4.3.4.1, 4.3.4.7)
B31. Buildings where all of the effects of earthquakes are met by
prefabricated frames with limited ductility that transmit 3 2 BYS = 8
momentum connections
B32. Buildings where the connections of earthquake effects are
met together by prefabricated frames with limited ductility
3 2 BYS ≥ 7
levels transferring momentum and gapless reinforced concrete
curtains with limited level of bulk ductility in place
B33. Buildings with limited ductility where all earthquake loads are
covered by prefabricated reinforced concrete vertical double-walled 4 2 BYS ≥ 6
panels
B34. Buildings with limited ductility where all earthquake loads are
covered by prefabricated reinforced concrete vertical single-walled 3 2 BYS ≥ 7
panels
Carrier Permitted
nt R ent D BYS
C. STEEL BUILDING CARRIER SYSTEMS
C1. High Ductility Carrier Systems
C11. Buildings where all of the effects of earthquakes are met by
8 3 BYS ≥ 3
steel frames with high ductility levels that transmit momentum
C12. Buildings where the effects of earthquakes are fully offset by
8 2.5 BYS ≥ 2
a ductility eccentric or sprain-resistant central diagonal steel frames
C13. Buildings where all earthquake impacts are met by high-
5 2 BYS ≥ 4
ductility central diagonal steel frames
C14. Buildings where the effects of earthquakes are met together
by steel frames with a high level of ductility and a center
diagonal steel frame with a high level of ductility or a
8 3 BYS ≥ 2
central diagonal steel frame with a high level of ductility or
reinforced concrete curtains with a bond beam (hollow) with a high
level of ductility (see 4.3.4.5)
by steel frames with high ductility levels that transmit
momentum and central diagonal steel frames with high ductility 6 2.5 BYS ≥ 2
levels or by gapless reinforced concrete curtains with high ductility
level (see 4.3.4.5)
C16. Single-storey buildings where all the effects of earthquakes are
met by steel columns with articulated connections at the roof level 4 2 –
and with a high level of ductility not exceeding 12 m in height
C2. Ductility Level Mixed Carrier Systems (See 4.3.4.1, 4.3.4.6)
are met together
C21. Buildings where the effects of earthquakes
by steel frames with limited ductility levels that transmit
momentum and eccentric or sprain-resistant central diagonal steel 6 2.5 BYS ≥ 4
frames with high ductility levels or reinforced concrete curtains
with high ductility level bond beams (hollows) (see 4.3.1.2)
by steel frames with limited ductility levels that transmit
momentum and central diagonal steel frames with a high level of 5 2 BYS ≥ 4
ductility or by gapless reinforced concrete curtains with a high
ductility level (see 4.3.1.2)
C3. Ductility Limited Carrier Systems (see 4.3.4.1, 4.3.4.7)
C31. Buildings where all of the effects of earthquakes are met by
4 2.5 BYS ≥ 7
steel frames with limited ductility that transmit momentum
C32. Buildings where all earthquake impacts are met by central
3 2 BYS = 8
diagonal steel frames with limited ductility
by steel frames with limited ductility levels and central 4 2 BYS ≥ 7
diagonal steel frames with limited ductility levels transferring
momentum
Carrier Permitted
Coeffici Coeffici Classes
ent R ent D BYS
D. LIGHT STEEL BUILDING CARRIER SYSTEMS
D1. High Ductility Carrier Systems
Light steel buildings with high ductility where all earthquake effects
4 2 BYS = 8
are met by screw, bolted sheet, OSB or plywood wall panels
D2. Ductility Limited Carrier Systems (see 4.3.4.1)
Light steel buildings with limited ductility where the effects of
earthquakes are all met by coated or diagonal panels containing 3 2 BYS = 8
gypsum boards
E. STACKING BUILDING CARRIER SYSTEMS
E1. High Ductility Carrier Systems
E11. Reinforced masonry buildings 4 2 BYS ≥ 7
E12. Reinforced aerated concrete panel buildings 4 2 BYS ≥ 7
E2. Ductility Limited Carrier Systems (see 4.3.4.1)
E21. Besieged masonry buildings 3 2 BYS = 8
E22. Masonry buildings without reinforcement 2.5 1.5 BYS = 8
F. WOODEN BUILDING CARRIER SYSTEMS
F1. High Ductility Carrier Systems
Wooden buildings with high ductility where all earthquake effects
4 2 BYS ≥ 7
are met by spiked or screw OSB or plywood wall panels
F2. Ductility Limited Carrier Systems (see 4.3.4.1)
Wooden buildings with limited ductility where the effects of
earthquakes are all met by glued wall panels combined with nails, 3 2 BYS = 8
screws and bolts, or by wooden diagonals
4.3.4.9 – Table in gapless curtains with H / ≤2.0, except for basement perimeter curtains
Ww
Internal forces calculated according to the coefficients R given in 4.1 with a coefficient of 31/ )]
[ /( + H
Ww
will be magnified by multiplying. However, this coefficient will not be taken greater than 2.
4.3.4.10 – Rigid reinforced concrete curtains used around the basements of buildings shall not be
considered as part of the curtained or curtain-framed systems in Table 4.1 (see Table 4.1). 4.3.5.1).
4.3.5. Application of Excess Strength Coefficients
4.3.5.1 – Excess Strength Coefficient D is the coefficient that expresses the excess of yield strength
in proportion to design strength, as defined in Annex 4A.
4.3.5.2 – The Excess Strength Coefficient shall not be used in the calculation of reduced internal
forces (bending moment, tensile force and the like) that correspond to the high or limited ductile
behavior of the carrier system elements (D = 1).
4.3.5.3 – The Excess Strength Coefficient shall be used as a multiplier for reduced internal forces
that oppose the non-ductile behavior of the bearing system elements (shear force in reinforced
concrete elements, forces affecting joints in steel elements and the like) (D > 1). However, in carrier
systems with a high level of Reliability, the internal forces magnified by the coefficients D shall
not be taken greater than the internal forces compatible with the yield state in the defined
(permissible) sections as required by the principle of capacity design.
4.3.5.4 – Detailed rules for the application of the Strength Excess Coefficient in building carrier
systems are given in the relevant sections of the Regulation.
4.3.5.5 – The Strength Excess Coefficient defined in Table 4.1 for the relevant carrier system shall
be applied to the reduced internal forces acting in the plane in the building floors.
4.3.5.6 – Coefficients of Excess Strength shall be taken into account in the bearing system
elements in basements surrounded by externally rigid curtains in accordance with 4.10.1.
4.3.5.7 – Rules for the consideration of excess strength in the forces transferred from building
carrier systems to foundations are defined in 4.10.3.
4.3.6. Use of Different R and D Coefficients in the Upper and Lower Parts of the Buildings
In buildings where different R and D coefficients are used in the upper and lower sections, the
calculation shall be made according to the rules given in 4.3.6.1 or 4.3.6.2. According to the
definition given in 3.3.1, these rules may also apply to buildings with basements surrounded by
external rigid curtains. Alternatively, calculations can be made according to the rules described in
4.7.5 or 4.8.5.
4.3.6.1 – The entire carrier system with the Equivalent Earthquake Load Method described in 4.7
(parent section)
+ subsection) in the calculation made;
(a) The reduced internal forces corresponding to the ductile behavior of the carrier system
elements in the upper section, the upper coefficients R and the upper coefficients D selected from
Table (4.1) for the upper section, and the
(X) is equivalent to the prevailing natural vibration period in the direction of the earthquake
(X).
depending on Tp from 4.1)
will be obtained using the calculated Earthquake Load Reduction Coefficient (R).
a top
(b) The reduced internal forces corresponding to the non-ductile behavior of the carrier system
elements in the upper section shall be obtained from multiplying the internal forces obtained in
(a) by the upper coefficient D.
(c) The equivalent earthquake load reduction coefficient for reduced internal forces
corresponding to the ductile behavior of the carrier system elements in subdivision (Ra) sub-
Equivalent.( 4.4) shall be determined by:
(R )
(4.4)
a bottom
(X)
ν
The coefficient in this equation is given below:

(X) (X) (X)
ν = ν +ν (4.5a)
top bottom
(X)
V
(X) x,top (X) (X)
(4.5b)
νtop = (X) ; ν=(1 −ν
upside down
V
x,all
in (X)
Equivalent. (4.5a) The first term is the reduced forces transferred from the upper part to the
lower part,
ν
top
(X)
if the second term ν issubdivision, to calculate the reduced forces generated by the vibration of the
subdivision itself
It corresponds to the coefficients used for. (R ) Table for the carrier system in subsection
a bottom
(4.1) Equivalent, depending on the sub-coefficients R and D sub-coefficients selected from and
(X)
Tp Calculated from 4.1)
(X)
The Earthquake Load Reduction Coefficient is shown by νthe base shear force of the upper section
under unreduced earthquake loads.
It is defined as the ratio to cutting force.
(d) Reduced internal forces corresponding to the non-ductile behavior of the carrier system
elements in subchapter (c) are the equivalent strength of the internal forces obtained in
subdivision as defined below.
(X)
The excess coefficient D will be obtained from the product by sub-:
(4.6)
4.3.6.2 – In the calculation made by taking into account the Modal Calculation Methods described
in 4.8 and the entire carrier system (upper section + lower section),
(a) Equivalent. (4.4) , Denk.( 4.5) and Equivalent.( All operations in 4.6) shall be applied for each
nth vibration mode and taking into account the corresponding natural vibration period Tn. Instead
of the ratio of base shear forces in 4.5b, the ratio of modal active masses corresponding to these
cutting forces in the same mode can also be used (see 4B.1.4). (X)
(b) In buildings with rigid basements with Rlower <Rupper , the equivalent for all vibration modes ( 4.5b)
to νn,above
(X)
If the calculation of ν n is avoided, the assumption oftop = 0 can be made, which always gives a more
unfavorable result. In this case, the following simplifications are made in the nth mode for the
subdivision
4.4. IDENTIFICATION OF EARTHQUAKE IMPACT AND ITS COMBINATION WITH OTHER EFFECTS
4.4.1. Reduced Design Acceleration Spectrum Under the Influence of Horizontal Earthquakes
In the calculation methods given in 4.7 and 4.8.2, the reduced design spectral acceleration with the
ordinate for a given period of natural vibration T of the reduced design acceleration spectrum to
be used to determine the reduced earthquake loads in the horizontal direction is ST , Equivalent.(
4.8)
aR ()
defined:
SaR ()
doable:
(X)
a n,alt a n,alt ( ) ( )R R≅ ; n,bott under D≅ (4.7)
om D
su
For basements according to b 1.5 will be
4.3.2.3 D = taken.
(4.8)
Here is Sae ()
T is equivalent for DD-2 earthquake ground

motion as defined in 2.2 ( 2.2) is the spectral acceleration
of the horizontal elastic design, and a()is Equivalent.( 4.1)
Earthquake Load as defined by
RT
Shows the Reduction Coefficient.
4.4.2. Combining Earthquake Effects in Perpendicular Directions
4.4.2.1 – If the earthquake calculation of the carrier system under the influence of horizontal
earthquake is made by one of the methods given in 4.7 or 4.8.2, the earthquake effects consisting
of earthquakes defined in the directions (X) and (Y) perpendicular to each other horizontally are
equivalent ( 4.9) shall be combined as defined in:
(H) (X) (Y)
E =±E ±0.3E
dd d
(4.9)
(H) (X) (Y)
E =±0.3 E ±E
d dd
(X) (Y)
where E d and Ed are the earthquakes in the directions perpendicular to each other (X) and (Y) in
any section.
(H)
E d stands for the earthquake effects defined according to 4.10 and calculated separately, and Ed
stands for the horizontal earthquake effect based on the design with direction joining applied.
4.4.2.2 – If the earthquake calculation of the carrier system under the influence of a horizontal
earthquake is made in the time definition area by the method given in 4.8.3, the earthquake
components in the directions perpendicular to each other (X) and (Y) are defined simultaneously
according to 2.5,
(H)
The combined horizontal earthquake effect Ed is obtained directly as a result of this calculation.
4.4.3. Vertical Earthquake Effect
4.4.3.1 – Vertical earthquake calculation in buildings classified as DTS=1, DTS=1a, DTS=2 and
DTS=2a and containing the following elements, based on the local vertical vibration modes of
these elements only according to the vertical elastic acceleration spectrum defined in 2.3.5 for
these elements in 4.8.2
(Z)
will be done by the given method. In this way of calculating the vertical earthquake effect Ed, R/I =
1 and D = 1 will be taken for all carrier systems.
(a) Buildings containing beams whose span has a horizontal projection of 20 m or more;
(b) Buildings containing cantilevers with a horizontal projection of 5 m or more of their opening;
(c) Buildings containing columns seated on rafters;
(d) Buildings whose columns are inclined relative to the duchess.
4.4.3.2 – in the carrier system parts other than those specified in 4.4.3.1 and in the
(Z)
vertical earthquake effect in buildings that fall outside the definition E d , without special calculation,
Equivalent.( 4.10).
(Z)
E ≈ (2/3) SG (4.10)
d ds
where G denotes the constant charge effect and SDS denotes the short-period design spectral
acceleration coefficient as defined in 2.3.2.
4.4.4. Combining the Earthquake Effect with Other Effects
4.4.4.1 – Load combinations involving the earthquake effect to be taken as a basis for the design
of the carrier system elements are equivalent ( 4.11) and Equivalent.( 4.12) is defined as:
(H) (Z)
GQ++0.2S +E +0.3E (4.11)

Dd
(H) (Z)
0.9GH E d −0.3 d
++ E (4.12)
where Q represents the moving load effect, S represents the snow load effect, and H is the
horizontal ground as defined in Chapter 16.
(H) (Z)
symbolizes his impulse. The horizontal earthquake effect will be determined according to E d 4.4.2
and the vertical earthquake effect will be determined according to Ed 4.4.3.
4.4.4.2 – In steel and light steel buildings;

(a) In the case of application of the Design (IAC) approach with Load and Strength Coefficients,
Equivalent.( In 4.11) G will be replaced by 1.2G, Equivalent.( 4.12) will be used verbatim.
(b) In the case of the application of the Design with Safety Coefficients (GCP) approach, the load
combinations given in Chapter 9 and Chapter 10 shall be used, with the exception of the basic
design according to Chapter 16.
4.5. REGARDING THE MODELING OF THE CARRIER SYSTEM FOR LINEAR ACCOUNTING
RULES
The rules for modeling the carrier systems to be used in the linear calculation to be made within
the scope of Design by Strength are given in this section.
4.5.1. General Modeling Rules
4.5.1.1 – Building carrier systems shall always be modelled in three dimensions.
4.5.1.2 – The earthquake effect in two horizontal directions perpendicular to each other shall
always be taken into account. The vertical earthquake effect will also be taken into account
according to 4.4.3.
4.5.1.3 – The damping rate shall be taken at 5%, unless otherwise specified.
4.5.1.4 – The modelling rules given here may also apply to loading situations that do not involve
earthquakes.
4.5.2. Modeling of Beams and Columns
4.5.2.1 – Beams and columns shall be modelled as frame (bar) finite elements. At the nodal points
where the columns and beams meet, all 6 degrees of freedom shall be considered. If the tiles are
modeled as rigid diaphragms, those degrees of freedom that correspond to rigid motion will be
removed.
4.5.2.2 – The effective cross-sectional rigidity of reinforced concrete columns and beams shall be
determined in accordance with 4.5.8.
4.5.3. Modeling of reinforced concrete gapless curtains
4.5.3.1 – Reinforced concrete gapless curtains are vertical carrier system elements, usually
operating as cantillabus.
4.5.3.2 – Rectangular reinforced concrete curtains are the bearing system elements whose ratio
of length to thickness in the section is defined as at least 6 (six).
4.5.3.3 – In the case of reinforced concrete curtains whose cross-sectional shape is I, T, L, U or C,

at least one curtain arm in each direction shall meet the condition given in 4.5.3.2. Otherwise, the
carrier system element will not be counted as a curtain in that direction. However, in the case of
curtains with sections I, T, L, U or C, the condition given in 4.5.3.2 may not apply if the curtain arm(s)
of the curtain arm(s) is part (or parts) of a tie beamed curtain that satisfies 4.5.4.5.
4.5.3.4 – Sliding frame models in which the curtain end zones defined in Section 7 for the reinforced
concrete design of the curtain section are modeled as columns and the body area between them
as a very rigid beam shall not be used for curtains.
4.5.3.5 – Modeling techniques in which the curtain arms are modeled and calculated separately
in curtains with cross-sectional shapes T, L, U or C shall not be used for curtains.
4.5.3.6 – Reinforced concrete curtains shall be modelled by one of the methods given in 4.5.3.7
and 4.5.3.8.
4.5.3.7 – Reinforced concrete curtains whose cross-sectional shape is rectangular, I, T, L, U or C

shall be modeled with shell finite elements containing degrees of freedom for both in-plane and
out-of-plane displacements.
(a) At the nodal points where the shell finite elements converge, all 6 degrees of freedom shall
be considered.
(b) Finite element dimensions shall be selected in such a way as to enable the internal force
distribution to be calculated with sufficient accuracy.
(c) The effective cross-sectional rigidities for in-plane and out-of-plane behavior shall be
determined in accordance with 4.5.8.
(d) In curtains whose cross-sectional shape is rectangular, I, T, L, U or C, the junctions of the
finite element nodal forces shall be obtained as equivalent rod sectional effects
(bending/torsional moments, shear forces, axial force) in the cross-sectional center of gravity to
be taken as the basis for the reinforced concrete sectional calculation. In the curtain base the
bending moment thus obtained, 4.3.4.5, 4.3.4.6 and 4.3.4.7, the curtain base tipping moment
shall be used as M DEV.
4.5.3.8 – Curtains whose cross-sectional shape is rectangular, I, T, L, U or C may be modeled as an

equivalent rod finite element whose axis passes through the cross-sectional center of gravity when
the ratio of the largest curtain arm length in the plan to the total curtain height does not exceed
1/2 . In this case;
(a) At the floor levels, the dependent degrees of freedom at the nodal points where the curtain
parts meet the beam and/or slab finite elements in the plan shall be kinematically connected to
the 6 independent degrees of freedom at the main node to be defined in the cross-sectional
center of gravity to satisfy the condition of three-dimensional rigid body motion.
(b) The effective cross-sectional rigidity of the curtains modelled as equivalent rods for bending
and cutting shall be determined in accordance with 4.5.8.
(c) Bar sectional effects (bending/torsion/torsional moments, shear forces, axial force) are
obtained directly in the cross-sectional center of gravity to be taken as the basis for reinforced
concrete section calculation. The bending moment obtained at the curtain base shall be used as
the curtain base tipping moment in 4.3.4.5, 4.3.4.6 and 4.3.4.7.
M
DEV
4.5.4. Modeling of Reinforced Concrete Bond Beamed (Hollow) Curtains
4.5.4.1 – Curtains with reinforced concrete bond beams (hollows) are vertical bearing system
elements in which two parts of the gapless curtain work together as a single curtain by connecting
them with bond beams with short and very high shear strengths. Such curtains behave between
frames, with gapless curtains acting as cantilevers thanks to their strong bond beams (see 4.5.4.5).
4.5.4.2 – The cross-sectional shapes of the curtain parts that make up the connective beamed
curtain may be rectangular or U or C shaped, as is usually the case with building cores (Figure 4.1).
Figure 4.1
4.5.4.3 – The base tipping moment of the curtain with a tie beam (gap) is equivalent ( 4.13) is:
M = M +M +cN (4.13)
GIANT 12 V
where MDEV represents the total tipping moment at the base of the bond beamed (hollow) curtain,
M 1 and M2 are the bending moments obtained at the base from the earthquake effect in the
curtain parts forming the bond beamed curtain, and NV is equal to each other formed at the base
of the curtain parts as the sum of the cutting forces generated in the bond beams under the
influence of earthquake over the entire curtain height.
it opposes the axial forces of tensile and pressure. c shows the distance between the cross-
sectional centers of gravity of the curtain segments (Figure 4.1). Equivalent. (4.13) In magnitude
4.3.4.5 and 4.3.4.6 the curtain base tipping moment M will be used as DEV.
4.5.4.4 – The coefficient of the degree of bond on which

the determination of the curtains with bond beams (gaps)
is based on Ω, Equivalent.( 4.14).
(4.14)
GIANT 12 V
4.5.4.5 – Curtain with tie beam (gap), Equivalent.( 4.14) of the coefficient of the degree of bond
given in ( 4.15) is defined as the carrier system element for which it satisfies the condition defined:
1
Ω≥ (4.15)
3
Equivalent. (4.15) If the condition defined in , each of the curtain parts is considered to be a curtain
without gaps. In addition to this condition, it should be tried to meet the Ω≤23 condition in order
to prevent excessive axial forces from occurring in the curtain parts.
4.5.4.6 – The curtain parts that make up the reinforced concrete bond beamed curtain shall be
modeled according to 4.5.3.7 or 4.5.3.8.
4.5.4.7 – Bond beams can be modeled as bar elements. The effective cross-sectional rigidity of the
bond beams shall be determined in accordance with 4.5.8.
4.5.5. Modeling of Basement Curtains
4.5.5.1 – Basement curtains, which are arranged around the perimeter in basement buildings, are
the bearing system elements that take on all or a large part of the inertial forces that occur on the
upper floors with transition floors (see 4.5.7) and transfer them to the foundation, as well as meet
the ground impulses in an earthquake.
4.5.5.2 – Basement curtains shall be modelled with shell finite elements according to 4.5.3.7.
4.5.6. Modeling of Floors

4.5.6.1 – Floor coverings;
(a) transfers the inertial forces generated by the masses in the floors under the influence of
earthquake accelerations, together with the beams, if any, to the vertical carrier system
elements thanks to their high in-plane rigidity,
(b) at the same time, and often more importantly, horizontal carrier system elements that allow
the earthquake loads acting on the building to be distributed among the vertical carrier system
elements according to their rigidity. The planes of the tiles, which may also contain voids of
various sizes
it is essential that they are properly modeled in order to accurately determine the load transfer in it.
4.5.6.2 – In buildings where there are irregularities of type A2 and A3 according to 3.6.2.2 and/or where
the slabs are not foreseen to work as rigid diaphragms, and in systems with floors without reinforced
concrete beams, the floors shall be modeled with two-dimensional finite elements.
4.5.6.3 – In regular buildings where according to 3.6.2.2 there are no irregularities of type A2 and A3 and
where it is expected that significant intra-plane deformations will not occur, reinforced concrete slabs may
be modeled as rigid diaphragms. The rigid aperture model shall also be used in the calculation to be made
to take into account the additional eccentricity effect according to 4.5.10.
4.5.6.4 – As a result of the calculation made according to the rigid diaphragm model, the force transferred
from the flooring in any direction to any vertical carrier system element (column or curtain) shall be
calculated as the difference of the cutting forces obtained in the relevant direction for that element in the
floors below and above the slab.
4.5.6.5 – According to 4.5.6.2 or 4.5.6.4, it shall be shown by calculation that the in-plane forces obtained
from the earthquake calculation are safely transferred from the floors to the vertical carrier system
elements. If necessary, additional connection reinforcements and transfer elements will be used in
reinforced concrete slabs.
4.5.7. Modeling of Floors on Transition Floors
4.5.7.1 – As stated in 3A.6.4, all or a large part of the inactivity forces that occur on the upper floors in the
transition from normal floors to more rigid basements
It is essential to provide sufficient in-plane rigidity and strength in the transitional floors that have to be
transferred to the perimeter curtains in the basement floors. This condition also applies to other transition
floors where sudden changes in rigidity are made for other reasons.
4.5.7.2 – Regardless of whether there are irregularities of type A2 and A3 according to 3.6.2.2, the floors
of the transition floors shall be modeled according to 4.5.6.2 , taking sufficient slab thicknesses.
4.5.7.3 – As a result of the earthquake calculation, the forces transferred to the rigid perimeter curtains in
the basements shall be calculated and it shall be shown that the transition floors have sufficient strength
for this transfer. If necessary, transfer elements will be arranged in the floors and additional connection
equipment for the transfer of loads to the curtains.
4.5.8.1 – The effective cross-sectional rigidity multipliers given in Table 4.2 in modeling the cross-sectional
properties of reinforced concrete carrier system elements within the scope of Design by Strength
will be used.
4.5.8.2 – Both multipliers given in Table 4.2 will be considered in the calculation model.
4.5.8.3 – Multipliers of effective cross-sectional rigidities shall be applied only in calculations under the loads
included in and falling within earthquake-effect load combinations.
4.5.9. Modeling of Masses
4.5.9.1 – If the carrier system elements are modeled as rod, sheet (membrane) or shell finite element, the
individual nodal point masses are assigned as compounds of diffuse masses in the coverage areas of the
connected finite elements. The individual masses at the finite element nodes are defined in such a way as
to counteract only two horizontal or additionally vertical degrees of displacement freedom.
(S)
4.5.9.2 – Equivalent to the singular mass m j acting on the typical finite element nodal point j ( 4.16).
(S)
w
(S) (S) (S) (S) j
w j = w G,j + nwQ,j ; mj = (4.16)

g
(S) (S)
where w G,j and wQ,j are the finite element nodal

point j acting on the Reinforced Concrete Carrier System Element compound constant
charge and moving Curtain – Flooring (In-Plane) Axial Glide
Curtain 0.50 0.50
shows the load. Basement curtain 0.80 0.50 Equivalent. (4.16) The
moving charge mass Flooring 0.25 0.25 participation coefficient
in , n, is given in Table 4.3. Curtain – Flooring (Out of
Bending Cut
For fixed equipment
weights in industrial Plane) buildings, n = 1 will be
taken, but crane lifting Curtain 0.25 1.00 loads will not be taken
Basement curtain 0.50 1.00
into account in the calculation of floor
Flooring 0.25 1.00
weights. In calculating the weight of the attic, 30%
Bar element Bending Cut
of the snow loads will be Vineyard beam 0.15 1.00
taken into account. With
regard to non-structural Frame beam 0.35 1.00 elements and
equipment, the Frame column 0.70 1.00 requirement given in
6.1.3 shall be taken into Curtain (equivalent rod) 0.50 0.50 account.
Table 4.2. Effective Cross-Sectional Rigidity

Multipliers of Reinforced Concrete Carrier System Elements
Table 4.3. Moving Load Mass Participation Coefficient
Purpose of Use of the Building n

Warehouse, warehouse, etc. 0.80
School, student dormitory, sports facility, cinema,
theater, concert hall, place of worship, restaurant, store, 0.60
etc.
Residential, workplace, hotel, hospital, parking, etc. 0.30
4.5.9.3 – If floor slabs are modeled as rigid diaphragms within their plane according to 4.5.6.4, the floor
masses are defined in such a way as to correspond to the three independent in-plane rigid degrees of freedom
of movement at the main node in the center of mass of the coat. Independent degrees of freedom are usually
chosen as two horizontal degrees of displacement freedom and rotational degrees of freedom around the
vertical axis passing through the main node. In the calculation of the floor masses, the equivalent ( 4.16).
The masses corresponding to the vertical degrees of freedom in the slab shall be defined as in 4.5.9.2.
4.5.10. Modeling of the Additional Decentralization Effect
4.5.10.1 – Additional eccentricity effect has been defined to take into account possible uncertainties in the
effect of earthquake ground motion on the building and in the rigidity and mass distribution of the carrier
system.
4.5.10.2 – If the floor tiles are modeled as rigid diaphragms within their own planes according to 4.5.6.4,
(a) An earthquake calculation shall be made in accordance with each earthquake on the basis of the floor
mass defined in the floor mass center (main node) in accordance with 4.5.9.3.
(b) The horizontal earthquake loads acting on the floor center of mass (the main nodal point) shall be
shifted by +5% and −5% of the ﬂoor size in the direc:on perpendicular to the earthquake direc:on under
consideration and an earthquake calculation shall be made for these cases.
(c) In the event that the earthquake calculation is made according to 4.7, instead of shifting the earthquake
load in terms of ease of modeling, the effect at the floor mass center (main node)
X)
Equivalent earthquake load with FiE( in combination with equivalent.( 4.17) is appropriate to consider the
additional coat torsional moment given by .
(X) (X)
M = Fe (4.17)
ib iE
where e represents an additional 5% eccentricity.

(d) If the earthquake calculation is made by modal methods according to 4.8, instead of shifting the earthquake
load for ease of modeling, the ply mass moment of inertia together with the solid mass m i defined in the
center of mass (main node) is equivalent to miθ ( 4.18)
it is appropriate to add the given increment of Δmiθ.
2
Δm = me (4.18)
iθi
4.5.10.3 – If the earthquake calculation is made under the influence of a unidirectional earthquake according
to 4.7 or 4.8.2, the additional eccentricity for each direction shall be taken into account. In the event that
the calculation is made under the influence of a two-way earthquake acting at the same time according to 4.8.3,
the eccentricities for both directions shall be applied separately.
4.5.10.4 – Relating to the displacement of floor slabs within their planes in accordance with 4.5.6.2
in the case of modeling with two-dimensional plate (membrane) finite elements to include degrees of
freedom,
(a) With this model created, earthquake calculation will be made without the effect of eccentricity,
internal forces and displacements will be obtained in the floors and in the bearing system elements other
than the floors. The resulting sizes for the flooring will be taken into account in the design of the flooring.
(b) In order to consider the eccentricity effect, the rigid diaphragm assumption shall be made for the
degrees of freedom of finite element in the plane and the centers of mass of the coat shall be shifted as
defined in 4.5.10.2. A second earthquake calculation based on rigid diaphragm modeling will be made to
determine the effect of additional eccentricity on the bearing system elements other than the slabs and
beams.
(c) For load-bearing system elements other than slabs and beams, the internal forces and displacements
essential to the design shall be determined as envelopes (unfavourable) of those obtained in (a) and (b).
4.6. CHOOSING THE LINEAR CALCULATION METHOD
4.6.1. Linear Calculation Methods
The linear calculation methods to be used within the scope of Design by Strength are the Equivalent
Earthquake Load Method, the details of which are described in 4.7, and the Modal Calculation Methods, the
details of which are described in 4.8.
4.6.2. Choosing the Calculation Method
4.6.2.1 – Any of the Modal Calculation Methods (Mode Aggregation Method or Mode Aggregation Method)
whose details are described in 4.8 may be used to calculate earthquakes for all buildings covered by this
Section.
4.6.2.2 – Buildings to which the Equivalent Earthquake Load Method described in 4.7 can be applied are
given in Table 4.4.
Table 4.4. Buildings to which the Equivalent Earthquake Load Method Can Be Applied
4.7. LINEAR EARTHQUAKE CALCULATION WITH EQUIVALENT EARTHQUAKE LOAD METHOD
The Equivalent Earthquake Load Method will be applied separately for earthquakes affecting the building in
the direction of (X) and (Y) earthquakes perpendicular to each other. The following correlations (X) are given
for the earthquake
direction. Building Type Permissible Building Height Class For building
base and DTS = 1, 1a, 2, 2a DTS = 3, 3a, 4, 4a building
height Buildings where the coefficient of torsional BYS ≥ 4 BYS ≥ 5 definitions
in irregularity on each floor meets the basement
and condition of η ≤ 2.0 and also does not have a basement-
type B2 irregularity
less buildings
All other buildings BYS ≥ 5 BYS ≥ 6
3.3.1 shall be
taken as the
basis.
4.7.1. Determination of Total Equivalent Earthquake Load
4.7.1.1 – In line with the earthquake under consideration (X ), the total equivalent earthquake load (base
(X),
shear force), VtE Equivalent, which affects the entire building. (4.19).
(X) (X)
V = mS (T) ≥ 0.04mIS g (4.19)

tE taR p tDS
where SaR (Tp(X) is the building calculated according to 4.7.3 in line with the earthquake considered (X)
X)
The prevailing natural vibration period is Tp( taking into account the equivalent.( Reduced calculated from
4.8)
The design illustrates the Spectral Acceleration. The SDS is the design spectral acceleration coefficient defined
in 2.3.2.2 for the short term.
4.7.1.2 – Equivalent. (4.19) Equivalent to the building in Mt ( 4.20) corresponds to the total mass calculated
with:
Nmt = ∑mi (4.20) i=1
where m i is the total mass of the i i floor slab.
4.7.2. Determination of Equivalent Earthquake Loads Affecting Floors
4.7.2.1 – Equivalent. The total equivalent earthquake load calculated by (4.19) is the sum of the equivalent
earthquake loads affecting the building floors . 4.21) is expressed as:
N
(X) (X) (X)
V = ∆F + ∑F (4.21)
tE NE iE i=1
(X)
4.7.2.2 – The value of the additional equivalent earthquake load affecting the N floor (top) of the building
∆FNE is equivalent.( 4.22).
(X) (X)
∆F = 0.0075 NV (4.22)
NE tE
(X),
4.7.2.3 – The remainder of the total equivalent earthquake load including the Nth layer
∆F
NE
equivalently to the floors of the building.( 4.23) (Figure 4.2a).
(
X
)
(
X
) F
( =
X
)
(
V
−
∆ (
F 4
i
E
.
t 2
E
N
E
∑mH
j jj=1
4.7.2.4 – Equivalent in the case of modelling of floor slabs as rigid diaphragm according to 4.5.6.4
(X)
4.23) The earthquake load equivalent to FiE calculated with the main node on the i floor shall be
acted in accordance with the earthquake considered.
4.7.2.5 – In the case of modeling the floor slabs with sheet (membrane) finite elements according
to 4.5.6.2, the equivalent earthquake load acting on the j'th node on the first floor is equivalent (
4.24) shall be calculated with:
X
(S) F ( ) (S)
iE
fjE = mj (4.24)
m
i
(S)
where mj is the equivalent of the jth node ( 4.16).
4.7.2.6 – The total tipping moment at the base of the building from the earthquake loads is
equivalent to ( 4.25) is calculated as:
N
(X) (X)
Mo =∑FHiE i (4.25) i=1
4.7.3. Determination of the Prevailing Natural Vibration Period of the Building
4.7.3.1 – Equivalent in all buildings where the Equivalent Earthquake Load Method is applied.
4.19)
area and Tp(X), which refers to the prevailing period of natural vibration of the building in line with
(X),
the earthquake under consideration is the equivalent unless a more
precise calculation is made. 4.26). i fi ⎟
12
⎛
N
(X)2(X)
⎜
∑md
(4.26)
T =2
⎜∑Fd ⎟
p
fi fi fi
⎝i=1 (X)(X) (X)
where F denotes the fictitious charge acting on the ith floor , Equivalent.( 4.23) instead of (V −∆F)
fitE NE
any value (e.g. 100) will be put.
4.7.3.2 – Equivalence of the building( 4.26) is the largest value to be considered in the
(X)
earthquake calculation of the prevailing natural vibration period T p calculated by 4.7.3.4 times
more than 1.4 times the period T given in 4.7.3.4
Pa
there will be no more.
4.7.3.3 – In buildings with DTS = 1, 1a, 2, 2a and BYS ≥6 and in all buildings with DTS = 3, 3a, 4, 4a
the prevailing period of natural vibration can be taken directly as the empirical period T pA given in
4.7.3.4, without calculating from 4.7.3.1 (T p ≅TpA).
(X)
4.7.3.4 – Empirically dominant natural vibration period equivalent.( 4.27) will be calculated as:
3/
TpA = Ct H 4 (4.27)
N
(a) C t = 0.1 in buildings whose carrier system consists only of reinforced concrete frames, Ct =
0.08 in buildings consisting of steel frames or diagonal steel frames, and Ct = 0.07 in all other
buildings.
(b) In buildings where all the effects of the earthquake are met by reinforced concrete curtains,
the C t coefficient is equivalent ( 4.28a) shall be calculated as:
C = 0.07 (4.28a)
t
At
The equivalent field At in this relation is Equivalent.( 4.28b) is given at:
⎡⎤
⎛⎞
2
A= ∑A⎢0.2 +
⎥≤∑A (4.28b)
 wj  wj
j ⎢⎝HN⎠ j
t wj
⎣
0.1
4.7.4. Torsion Calculation in Equivalent Earthquake Load Method
In the event that there is an irregularity of type A1 as defined in Table 3.6 on any first floor of the
building, provided that it is 1.2 <η ≤2.0, the ±5% additional applied on this floor in accordance
with 4.5.10.2
bi
eccentricity is equivalent to both earthquake directions. 4.29) given in Dwill be multiplied by the bi
coefficient.
⎛ηbi ⎞
2
D=
(4.29)
bi⎜⎟
⎝1.2 
4.7.5. Calculation of Basement Buildings with Equivalent Earthquake Load Method
According to the definition given in 3.3.1, in buildings with basements surrounded by rigid
curtains from the outside, the upper part of the building and the lower part with the basement
shall be modeled together as a single common carrier system. In the earthquake calculation of such
buildings, one of the following two methods can be used:
(a) the calculation method described in 4.3.6.1;
(b) The two-load-state calculation method described in 4.7.5.1, 4.7.5.2 and 4.7.5.3 (Figure 4.2).
Figure 4.2
4.7.5.1 – In basement buildings, the upper section in terms of horizontal rigidity and the lower
part (basement floors), which are relatively very rigid, have very different characteristics in terms
of dynamic behavior and strength. In the approximate two-loading-state calculation approach,
which can be applied for linear earthquake calculation with modal calculation methods of such
buildings, the upper part of the building and the basement lower part are modeled together as a
single carrier system, but since the upper section and the lower section vibrate at modes far away
from each other, the earthquake calculation is made separately as two loading states:
4.7.5.2 – In the case of initial loading, in the common single-carrier system model according to
4.7.2.3 or 4.7.2.5
The calculated equivalent earthquake loads are acted only on the upper section (Figure 4.2b). In
the calculation, the upper coefficients R and the upper coefficients of D selected from Table (4.1)
X)
for the upper
section and T p( in the direction of the earthquake are equivalent according to the
prevailing vibration period. ( Earthquake load reduction coefficient calculated from 4.1)
(R ) will be used. As a result of the calculation for the first upload state, both the parent
a top
reduced internal forces are obtained in both the subdivision and the subdivision.
4.7.5.3 – In the case of the second loading, again in the common single-carrier system model, only
the masses of the basements in the lower section shall be equivalent ( The reduced spectral
acceleration obtained by putting T=0 at 4.8 ) multiplied by S aR (0) and the approximately
equivalent earthquake loads acting on these floors
(Figure 4.2c). Equivalent( for the subdivision (basement) in the account The earthquake load
reduction coefficient calculated from 4.1 (Ra ) alt = Dalt = 1.5 shall be used. As a result of the
calculation for the second loading state, the reduced internal forces in the subdivision are
obtained.
4.7.5.4 – The internal forces of design in basement buildings are defined in 4.10.1.
4.8. LINEAR EARTHQUAKE CALCULATION WITH MODAL CALCULATION METHODS
4.8.1. Modal Calculation Methods
4.8.1.1 – Modal Calculation Methods based on the modal behavior of the carrier system under the
influence of earthquakes, Mode Coupling Method based on calculation with the earthquake
spectrum given in 4.8.2 and Mode Collection Method based on calculation in the time definition
field given in 4.8.3. Detailed explanations for these methods are provided in Appendix 4B. In
buildings with and without basements, 3.3.1 shall be taken as the basis for the definitions of
building base and building height.
4.8.1.2 – In modal calculation methods, the sufficient number of vibration modes to be taken into
account,
YM
(a) The base shear force calculated for each mode in the earthquake directions (X) and (Y) in
accordance with Annex 4B shall be determined in accordance with the rule that the sum of the
modal effective masses shall not be less than 95% of the total mass of the building.
YM YM
(X) (Y)
∑ m ≥ 0.95m ; ∑
txn t
m tyn ≥ 0.95mt (4.30) n=1 n=1
However, all modes with a contribution greater than 3% will be considered.

(b) The larger of the YMs calculated for both directions shall be taken into account in the three-
dimensional calculation.
4.8.2. Earthquake Calculation by Mode Coupling Method

4.8.2.1 – In the Mode Coupling Method, the maximum values of the behavior magnitudes in each
vibration mode taken into consideration by using the earthquake design spectrum in line with a given
earthquake are calculated by modal calculation method. The maximum modal behavior
magnitudes that are calculated for sufficient vibration modes, but are not synchronous, are then
statistically combined to obtain the approximate values of the largest behavior magnitudes. Details
of the method are given in APPENDIX 4B.
4.8.3. Earthquake Calculation by Mode Collection Method in Time Definition Field
4.8.3.1 – In the Mode Addition Method, if it is taken into account that the earthquake acts
simultaneously in two horizontal directions perpendicular to each other, the modal behavior
magnitudes of each vibration mode are calculated by modal calculation method in the time
definition field. The synchronous modal behavior magnitudes calculated for a sufficient vibration
mode are then summed directly in the time definition field to obtain the maximum values of the
behavior magnitudes to change over time and to be taken as a basis for design . Details of the
method are given in APPENDIX 4B.
4.8.3.2 – In the Mode Collection Method:

(a) Since mode contributions are collected directly in the time definition area, statistical mode
consolidation rules do not need to be applied.
(b) Since the components of horizontal ground motion perpendicular to each other can be
considered at the same time, there is no need to apply the approximate direction joining rules
defined in 4.4.2.
4.8.4. Reduced Internal Forces and Displacements to Equivalent Base Shear Force
Growing by
(X) (X)
4.8.4.1 – In the case of V <γ V for any (X) earthquake direction, 4.8.2 or
All reduced internal force and displacement

quantities obtained by the modal calculation method applied according to tx EtE 4.8.3 shall be
equal.( 4.31) with equivalent base cutting force magnification
(X)
its coefficient will be increased by multiplying β by tE.
1 (4.31)
X)
where VtE( is equivalent according to the Equivalent Earthquake Load Method.( 4.21)
(X)
equivalent earthquake load (base shear force), V x according to 4.8.2 or 4.8.3

Tx
The γmultiplier E shall be taken as follows:
(a) If at least one of the irregularities of type A1, B2 or B3 described in Table 3.6 is present in the
building, γ=0.90 shall be taken.
E
(b) If none of the irregularities described in Table 3.6 are present in the building, γ=0.80 shall be
taken.
E
4.8.4.2 – According to the definition given in 3.3.1, in buildings with basements surrounded by
external rigid curtains, the equivalent base shear force magnification coefficient shall be calculated
only for the upper part above the basements of the building.
4.8.5. Calculation of Basement Buildings with Modal Calculation Methods
According to the definition given in 3.3.1, in buildings with basements surrounded by external
rigid curtains, the upper part of the building and the lower part with the basement shall be
modeled together as a common carrier system. In the earthquake calculation of such buildings,
one of the following two methods can be used:
(a) the calculation method described in 4.3.6.2;
(b) The two-load-state calculation method described in 4.8.5.1, 4.8.5.2 and 4.8.5.3.
4.8.5.1 – Similar to the method described in 4.7.5.1, in the approximate two-load-state

calculation approach, which can be applied to the linear earthquake calculation of basement
buildings with modal calculation methods, the upper part of the building and the lower part with the
basement are modeled together as a single carrier system, but since the upper section and the
lower section vibrate in modes far away from each other, the earthquake calculation is modeled
as two loading states. are done separately as:
4.8.5.2 – In the case of the first loading of the account, the modal calculation is made only taking
into account the masses of the upper section in the common single-carrier system model. In this
case, the sufficient number of vibration modes shall be determined solely by the effective mass
participation rates calculated on the basis of the total mass of the upper section. R top and Dtop
selected from Table (4.1) for the top section in the account
According to their coefficient, for each mth vibration mode, the equivalent.( The earthquake load
reduction coefficient calculated from 4.1 (Ra )m, the upper shall be used. In the case of the first installation,
both in the parent section and in the case of the
In the subdivision, reduced internal forces are obtained.
4.8.5.3 – In the second loading state of the account, in the common single-carrier system model,
analysis is carried out only taking into account the masses of the subdivision. In this case, the
sufficient number of vibration modes shall be determined solely by the effective mass participation
rates calculated on the basis of the total mass of the subdivision. For the subdivision (basement) in
the calculation (R alt / )=2.5 I and Dalt = 1.5 and each
nth vibration mode for Equivalent.( Earthquake load reduction coefficient calculated from 4.1) (Ra
)n,sub
will be used.
4.8.5.4 – The internal forces of design in basement buildings are defined in 4.10.1.
4.9. LIMITATION OF RELATIVE FLOOR DELAYS, SECOND ORDER EFFECTS AND EARTHQUAKE
DISTROS
4.9.1. Calculation and Limitation of Effective Relative Floor Offsets
4.9.1.1 – (X) for any column or pitch in the direction of the earthquake, reduced relative floor
X)
displacement, which expresses the displacement difference between two consecutive layers, ∆i(
, Equivalent.( 4.32)
will be obtained with.
(X) (X) (X)
∆ = u − u (4.32)
Ii
i1
(X) (X)
Equivalent. (4.32) u i and ui1 in , the ith and (i–1) of the building for the typical (X) earthquake
direction
- shows horizontal displacements calculated according to reduced

earthquake loads
at the ends of any column or curtain in its layers. However, in this account, the condition given
in 4.7.3.2 and also the Equivalent.( The minimum equivalent earthquake load requirement
defined in 4.19) shall not be taken into account.
4.9.1.2 – For the direction of a typical (X) earthquake, the effective relative floor displacement for
X)
columns or curtains on the first floor of the building, δi( , Equivalent.( 4.33).
R
(X) (X)
δ i = ∆i (4.33)
I
4.9.1.3 – For each earthquake direction, in columns or curtains on any first floor of the building,
(X)
Equivalent.( 4.33) of the δi effective relative floor displacements calculated by
(X)
i,max
δ greater value shall satisfy the conditions given in (a) or (b) below.
(a) If the walls of hollow or non-gapped filler walls and façade elements made of brittle material
are completely adjacent to the frame elements, without any flexible joints or connections
between them:
(X)
δ
i,max
λ≤0.008 κ (4.34a)
h
i
(b) If flexible joints are made between the filler walls made of brittle material and the frame
elements, if the façade elements are connected to the outer frames with flexible connections, or
if the filler wall element is independent of the frame:
(X)
δ
i,max
λ≤0.016 κ (4.34b)
h
i
However, in this case, the in-plane horizontal displacement capacities of jointed infill wall
elements, flexible filler wall elements and flexible connected façade elements are equivalent to (
The limit value given in 4.34b) shall be certified on the basis of the experiment in accordance with
1.4 that it provides. An example flexible joint application for filler walls is given in Annex 4C.
4.9.1.4 – Equivalent. (4.34) The coefficient λ in is the ratio of the elastic design spectral acceleration
of DD-3 earthquake ground motion calculated according to 2.3.4.1 to the elastic design spectral
acceleration of DD-2 earthquake ground motion as defined in 2.2 for the prevailing vibration
period in the direction of the earthquake considered in the building. Equivalent. (4.34) The
coefficient κ in reinforced concrete buildings will be taken as κ=1 and in steel buildings as κ=0.5.
4.9.1.5 – In single-storey buildings where all earthquake loads are transported by steel frames
capable of transferring reversible moments, 4.34) can be increased by a maximum of 50%.
4.9.1.6 – Equivalent. (4.34) In the event that the condition given in cannot be met on any floor of
the building, the earthquake calculation will be repeated by increasing the rigidity of the carrier
system.
4.9.2. Second Order Effects

4.9.2.1 – Equivalent on each first floor in accordance with the (X) earthquake under consideration
( 4.35) with Second
(X)
The Rank Indicator Value θII,i will be calculated.

X
N (∆( ) ) ∑w
i avg k
(4.35)
The mean (∆i(X)) in this relation will be found in the columns and curtains on the i floor (X) as the
average value in the floor of the reduced relative floor displacements calculated in line with the
earthquake according to 4.9.1.
(X) (X)
4.9.2.2 – The maximum value of θ II,i calculated for all multiples is the equivalent of θII,max ( 4.36)
where it satisfies the given condition, it is not necessary to take into account the second-order
effects in the calculation of the internal forces inherent in the design.
D
(X)
θII,max ≤ 0.12 (4.36)

CR
h
In this case, local second-order effects can be taken into account in the design of the element
according to the applicable reinforced concrete and steel regulations. Equivalent. (4.36) In R and
D, the carrier system behavior coefficient and the strength excess coefficient given in Table 4.1 for
the building carrier system, and C h
a coefficient defined depending on the nonlinear hysteretic behavior of the carrier system
Shows. C h = 0.5 in reinforced concrete buildings, Ch = 1 in steel and composite column buildings
will be taken.
(X) (X)
4.9.2.3 – The maximum value of θ II,i calculated for all multiples is equivalent to θII,max ( 4.36)
in the event that it does not meet the given condition, the entire internal for the earthquake
direction considered (X)
(X)
The forces are equivalent below ( 4.37), the second order magnification coefficient will be
increased by multiplying β by II.
CR
(X) h (X)
β II = 0.88 +θII,max ≥1 (4.37)

D
Another option that can be applied in this case is to renew the earthquake calculation by
increasing the rigidity and / or strength of the carrier system accordingly.
4.9.2.4 – The above operations shall also be carried out for the direction of the (X) perpendicular
(Y) earthquake. According to the definition given in 3.3.1, in buildings with basements surrounded
by external rigid curtains, the second order effects shall be taken into account for the upper section
above the basements of the building.
4.9.3. Earthquake Joints
Apart from the effect of foundation displacements and rotations due to different ground settling
and temperature changes, the conditions for joint cavities to be left between building blocks or
existing old buildings and new buildings for earthquake effect only are as follows:
4.9.3.1 – Unless a more unfavorable result is obtained in accordance with 4.9.3.2, the joint
cavities shall not be less than the value found as a result of multiplying the square root of the sum
of the squares of the displacements obtained in the neighboring blocks or buildings for each floor
and the coefficient of α defined below. Floor displacements to be considered, at the nodal points
where columns or curtains are connected
(X)
the calculated reduced ui displacements will be the averages in the floor. If it is not possible to
calculate for the existing old building, the relocations of the old building will not be taken smaller
than the values calculated on the same floors for the new building.
(a) If the floor coverings of neighboring buildings or building blocks are at the same level on all
floors, the α = 0.25 (R / I) shall be taken.
(b) If the floor tiles of neighboring buildings or building blocks are at different levels, even if they
are on some floors, α = 0.5 (R/I) shall be charged for the entire building.
4.9.3.2 – The minimum joint spacing to be left shall be at least 30 mm up to a height of 6 m, to

which at least 10 mm shall be added for every 3 m of height after 6 m.
4.9.3.3 – The joints between the building blocks shall be arranged in such a way as to allow the
blocks to work independently of each other in all directions in the event of an earthquake.
4.9.3.4 – In the event that two discrete building blocks or two parts of a building that are different
in terms of earthquake behavior are connected to each other by a bridge or similar element, the
displacement capacity of the moving bearing on one of the blocks connected by the said element
in both earthquake directions and directions shall be at least 1.5 (R/I) times the sum of the
absolute values of the displacements calculated for the earthquake loads reduced at the fastener
level of the two blocks.
4.10. INTERNAL FORCES BASED ON THE DESIGN AND FORCES TRANSFERRED TO THE FOUNDATIONS
Equivalent in Design According to Strength.( 4.9) The internal forces (strength demands) based on
(H)
the design to counter the horizontal earthquake effect denoted by Ed and the forces transferred
to the foundations
will be determined as follows.
4.10.1. Interior Forces Based on Design in Bodrum Buildings
According to the definition given in 3.3.1, in buildings with basements surrounded by external
rigid curtains, in the upper section above the basements and in the lower section where the
basements are located, the internal forces based on the design shall be determined as follows:
4.10.1.1 – internal forces based on the design that oppose the ductile behavior of the carrier
system elements in the upper section;
(a) In the case of calculation by the method described in 4.3.6, they are internal forces as
defined in 4.3.6.1(a) or 4.3.6.2.
(b) In the case of calculation by the methods described in 4.7.5 or 4.8.5, the internal forces
obtained in the upper section in the case of the first loading.
4.10.1.2 – Defying the non-ductile behavior of the carrier system elements in the upper section
internal forces based on design;
(a) In the case of calculation by the method described in 4.3.6, they are internal forces as
defined in 4.3.6.1(b) or 4.3.6.2.
(b) In the case of calculation by the methods described in 4.7.5 or 4.8.5, it shall be obtained
from multiplying the internal forces obtained in the upper chapter in the case of the first loading.
D
top
4.10.1.3 – Internal forces of design that correspond to the ductile or non-ductile behavior of the
bearing system elements in the upper section, if necessary, the second order defined in 4.9.2
(X)
magnification coefficient (βII ≥1) and Modal Calculation Methods are also used
(X)
By multiplying the equivalent base shear force magnification coefficient defined in 4.8.4 (βtE ≥1)
will be enlarged.
4.10.1.4 – internal forces based on the design that oppose the ductile behavior of the carrier
system elements in the subdivision;
(a) In the case of calculation by the method described in 4.3.6, the internal forces defined in
4.3.6.1(c) or 4.3.6.2.
(b) in the case of calculation by the methods described in 4.7.5 or 4.8.5, the sum of the internal
forces obtained from the second loading state and the internal forces obtained in the subsection
in the case of the first loading in 4.7.5.2 or 4.8.5.2.
4.10.1.5 – Defying the non-ductile behavior of the carrier system elements in the subdivision
internal forces based on design;
(a) In the case of calculation by the method described in 4.3.6, the internal forces defined in
4.3.6.1(d) or 4.3.6.2.
(b) In the case of calculation by the methods described in 4.7.5 or 4.8.5, the internal forces
obtained from the second loading state multiplied by the Dsub-sub-, the first in 4.7.5.2 or 4.8.5.2
In the case of loading, it will be obtained by adding the internal forces obtained in the lower section
multiplied by 0.6 Dupper forces.
4.10.2. Internal Forces Based on Design in Basementless Buildings
According to the definition given in 3.3.1, the internal forces of buildings without basements are
the internal forces defined only for the upper section in 4.10.1.1, without considering the
basement.
4.10.3. Forces Transferred to the Foundations
Within the scope of Chapter 16, the forces to be transferred from the building to the foundation
will be determined as follows, which will be taken as a basis for the design and the bearing power
approach of the foundations.
4.10.3.1 – In buildings without basements or in buildings with basements, according to the

definition given in 3.3.1, where the critical curtain height starts from the upper level of the
foundation,
(a) The bending moment transferred from the curtain to the foundation shall be obtained from
the bending moment in the curtain base section multiplied by the upper coefficient D of the
upper section. However, this bending moment shall not be taken greater than the yield moment at
the base of the curtain in curtains with high ductility levels. The cutting force transferred from
the reinforced concrete curtain to the foundation is the force defined in the curtain base section
according to 7.6.6.3.
(b) In such buildings, the internal forces to be transferred from the other internal force
components of the curtains and other elements other than the curtains to the foundation shall
be obtained by multiplying the internal forces contrary to the ductile design in accordance with
4.10.1.1 by multiplying them by the upper 0.6 D.
4.10.3.2 – According to the definition given in 3.3.1, in buildings with basements, where the
critical curtain height starts higher than the upper elevation of the foundation, the internal forces
to be transferred from all elements to the foundation, including the bending moments and cutting
forces transferred from the curtains, shall be calculated according to 4.10.1.5.
4.10.4. Structure – Piling-Ground Interaction for Pile Foundations
Details of the calculations of structure-pile-ground interaction made within the scope of the design
according to strength for pile foundations are given in 16.10 and EK 16C.
NNEX 4A – YIELD STRENGTH, DESIGN STRENGTH AND EARTHQUAKE LOAD COEFFICIENTS
4A.0. ICONS
D = Excess Strength Coefficient fd (, )μ T = The design strength that the carrier system should have
depending on the predicted ductility capacity and the period
e
()=
fT Linear (elastic) strength demand calculated for the carrier system fy (μ k,T ) = Projected ductility
capacity and yield strength depending on the period I = Building Importance Coefficient
R = Carrier System Behavior Coefficient R a()= Predicted ductility capacity and period-dependent
Earthquake Load Reduction Coefficient
T
Ry(μ k,T ) = Projected ductility capacity and Yield Strength Reduction Coefficient depending on the
period
T = Natural vibration period [s] TB = Horizontal elastic design acceleration spectrum corner
period [s] μk = Ductility capacity predicted for the carrier system
4A.1. YIELD STRENGTH AND YIELD STRENGTH REDUCTION COEFFICIENT
Within the framework of Design by Strength, the ductility capacity predicted for the modal single
degree of freedom system and the strength demand relationship and the earthquake load
coefficients defined accordingly are given below (Figure 4A.1).
4A.1.1. Yield Strength
In the Design by Strength approach, depending on the predicted ductility capacity μ k, the yield
strength that the carrier system must have is fy (μ k,T), Equivalent.( 4A.1) is defined by:
fy(μ k,T ) µ,
(4A.1)
yk
where e() is the linear (elastic) strength demand calculated for the carrier system, T is the
Ft.
the natural vibration period, Ry(μ,T) is the yield strength reduction defined in 4A.1.2
k
Coefficient.
4A.1.2. Yield Strength Reduction Coefficient
Yield Strength Reduction Coefficient Ry (μ ,T ), the rigidity is more than in accordance with the
equal displacement rule
The ductility capacity prescribed for non-k carrier

systems is equal to μk:
Ry (μ k,T k > W
) =μ TT (4A.2a)
T
tems with high rigidity, it is equivalent in this Regulation.( 4A.2b) is based on: Ry(μ k,T ) =1 +μ − (k 1) TT (4A.2b) ≤
B
T
B
Here TB is the equivalent in Chapter 2.( 2.3)

denotes the spectrum corner period.
Figure 4A.1 4A.2. DESIGN STRENGTH AND EXCESS
STRENGTH COEFFICIENT 4A.2.1. Design Strength
In Design by Strength, depending on the predicted ductility capacity, for cross-sectional design
with the bearing power approach, the design strength that the carrier system must have is equal
to f d (μ k,T ) ( 4A.3) is defined by:
f ( T )fd
(μ k,T ) (4A.3)
4A.2.2. Coefficient of Excess Strength
Equivalent. (4A.3) In , D indicates the Strength Excess Coefficient. With this coefficient, the excess
of yield strength according to design strength is expressed.
4A.3. CARRIER SYSTEM BEHAVIOR COEFFICIENT AND EARTHQUAKE LOAD REDUCTION
COEFFICIENT
4A.3.1. Carrier System Behavior Coefficient
Carrier System Behavior Coefficient R, the predicted ductility capacity is equivalent to μ k,

equivalent.( 4A.3) is equivalent depending on the Excess Strength Coefficient D and the Building
Importance Coefficient I defined in Table 3.1 4A.4) is defined by:
R
=μk D (4A.4)
I
4A.3.2. Earthquake Load Reduction Coefficient
For sectional design with the conveying power approach in Design by Strength, the Earthquake
Load Reduction Coefficient ()Equivalent, which corresponds to a specific fixed ductility capacity
selected for each type of carrier system .() 4A.5a);
RT
a
(4A.5a)
R ()
T
a
or Denk.( 4A.1) and Equivalent.( 4A.3) using Denk.( 4A.5b) can also be expressed as follows:
a ()
= DRy(μ k,T )
RT (4A.5b)
In conclusion, Denk.( 4A.2), Denk.( 4A.4) and Equivalent.( 4A.5) using the Earthquake Load
Reduction Coefficient () to be used in practice Equivalent.( 4A.6) is expressed as:
RT
a
R
Ra()T = T > T B (4A.6a)
IRT
Ra() = D + − D  T ≤ TB (4A.6b)
T  I  TB
ANNEX 4B – MODAL CALCULATION METHODS
4B.0. ICONS
(X,Y)
a ()t = nth under the joint influence of the ground motion components of the earthquake (X) and
(Y) simultaneously
Nr
2
time-reduced linear modal pseudo-acceleration of vibration mode [m/s ]
(X,Y)
d ()t = nth under the joint influence of the ground motion components of the earthquake (X) and
(Y) simultaneously
n
time-dependent linear modal displacement of vibration mode [m]
(X,Y)
dn ()t = Time-dependent linear modal velocity of the nth vibration mode under the joint influence
of the ground motion components of the earthquake (X) and (Y) at the same time
[m/s]
(X,Y)
d ()t = nth under the joint influence of the ground motion components of the earthquake (X) and
(Y) simultaneously
n
2
Time-dependent linear modal acceleration of vibration mode [m/s ]
(X) =
(X) the nth natural vibration in the x-axis direction of the building for the earthquake
direction
The
largest modal earthquake load acting on the ith floor in f ixn,max mode [kN]
(X,Y)
fixn = Change of modal earthquake load with respect to time [kN ] acting simultaneously in the
direction of x to the ith layer in the nth vibration mode under the joint influence of
the ground motion components of the earthquake (X) and (Y) [kN]
Hi = The height of the ith floor from the base of the upper section in the upper section above the
basements of the building [m]
M (X) = (X) to the nth vibration mode in the direction of the x axis of the building for the
direction of the earthquake
oxn,max
Largest modal base tipping moment [kNm]
(X,Y)
Moxn ()t = Simultaneous change of modal base tipping moment according to time in the nth
vibration mode under the joint influence of the ground motion components of the
earthquake (X) and (Y)
[kNm]
mi = the total mass of the ith layer [t]
2
miθ = moment of mass inertia of the ith floor [tm ]
(X)
mixn = (X) the modal effective mass of the ith floor of the nth natural vibration mode in the x-axis
(X) =(X) the nth natural vibration in the direction of the y axis of the building for the direction
of the earthquake
m
i'th layer modal effective mass of iyn mode [t]
(X)
miθn = (X) the ith layer modal active mass moment of inertia of the nth natural vibration mode
2
around the z-axis of the building for the earthquake direction [tm ]
(S)
m j = The singular mass acting on the typical finite element node j [t]
(X)
mtxn = (X) the modal effective mass of the base shear force of the nth vibration mode in the x-axis
(Y)
mtyn = (Y) the base shear force modal effective mass of the building in the direction of the y axis
for the earthquake direction [t]
(X)
r = (X) to any behavior magnitude (displacement,

.max
relative layer displacement, internal force component) versus the combined typical
maximum
modal behavior magnitude
(X)
r = nth natural vibration mode (X) for any behavior for the direction of the earthquake
n
corresponding to its magnitude (displacement, relative floor displacement, internal
force component)
typical unit modal behavior magnitude r(X) = nth any behavior for earthquake
direction in natural vibration mode (X)

n,max
corresponding to its magnitude (displacement, relative floor displacement, internal
force component)
typical maximum modal behavior magnitude (X,Y)
()
rt = Change over time of the typical behavior magnitude corresponding to any behavior
magnitude (displacement, relative fold displacement, internal force component)
under the joint influence of the ground motion components of earthquakes (X) and
(Y) at the same time
(X,Y)
r ()t = nth under the joint influence of the ground motion components of earthquakes (X) and (Y)
simultaneously
n
change over time of the typical modal behavior magnitude corresponding to any
behavior magnitude (displacement, relative floor displacement, internal force
component) in vibration mode
Reduced design spectral acceleration of the S() nth vibration mode [g]
T=
aR n
Tn = natural vibration period of the nth mode [s]
ug(X) ()t = (X) change of ground acceleration component defined in the earthquake direction according to
time [m/s 2] ug(Y) ()t = (Y) change of the ground acceleration component defined in the
2
earthquake direction according to time [m/s ]
(X)
Vtxn,max= (X) for the earthquake direction of the building's x-axis relative to the nth modal base
cutting force [kN]
(X,Y)
V ()t = nth under the joint influence of the ground motion components of the earthquake (X)
and (Y) simultaneously
txn
in vibration mode, change of modal base cutting force over time YM = Sufficient
number of vibration modes βmn = ratio of mth and nth natural vibration periods
Φ i(X)n = nth natural vibration mode shape amplitude in direction of earthquake in ith layer (X) = nth
natural vibration mode shape amplitude in line with x axis in ith layer
Φ
ixn Φ iyn = nth natural vibration mode shape amplitude in the direction of the y axis on the ith floor
Φ θ = nth natural vibration mode shape amplitude as rotation around the z axis on the ith layer
of
(X)
Γ = (X) for the earthquake direction, the modal additive multiplier of the nth shaving mode
n
ξn = modal damping ratio of the nth vibration mode
ωn = natural vibration angular frequency of the nth vibration mode [rad/s]
ρmn = Belonging to the mth and nth natural vibration modes in the Fully Quadratic Joining Rule
cross-correlation coefficient
4B.1. MODAL ACCOUNT PARAMETERS
The modal calculus parameters defined in 4B.1.1 –4B.1.4, 4B.1.5 and 4B.1.6 shall be determined
from the earthquake data
are quantities that are calculated independently only in accordance with the earthquake
consideration and according to the information obtained from the free vibration calculation of the
carrier system and are used in both modal calculation methods described below in 4B.2 and 4B.3.
4B.1.2 – Modal calculation parameters are defined below only for the (X) horizontal earthquake
direction. The same parameters can be similarly defined for the earthquake direction
perpendicular (X) to (Y).
4B.1.3 – As degrees of freedom of the carrier system in the definition of modal calculus
parameters:
(a) In the case of modeling the floor slabs as rigid diaphragms, the displacements defined in the
horizontal directions x and y in the center of mass of any ith floor flooring and the rotation
around the vertical axis passing through the center of mass of the floor are taken into account
and the floor mass inertia m iθ corresponding to these degrees of freedom aredefined.
(b) If the floor slabs are not taken as rigid diaphragms and are modeled with two-dimensional
sheet (membrane) finite elements to include degrees of freedom for displacements within their
planes in accordance with 4.5.6.2, the finite element instead of the mi fold masses
(S)
the masses mj at the nodal points shall be considered.
4B.1.4 – Modal Additive Multiplier and Base Cutting Force Modal Effective Mass: Given (X)
(X)
for the earthquake direction, the x-axis of the building with the modal additive multiplier Γ of the
nth vibration mode
n
(X)
The modal effective mass of the base shear force in the direction m txn , Equivalent.( 4B.1) is defined
by:
N
∑m Φ
i i(X)n N
(X) (X)
i =1
; m txn =Γn ∑m i Φixn (4B.1) mmm θ
iixn iiyn i iθn i=1
4B.1.5 – Coefficient Modal Active Masses: In a typical nth vibration mode for the given (X)
earthquake direction, the coefficient effective masses of the degrees of freedom defined in 4B.1.3
above are Equivalent. 4B.2) is defined by:
(X) (X) (X) (X) (X) (X)
m =m ΦΓ ; m =m ΦΓ ; m =m ΦΓ (4B.2)
ixn i ixn n iyn i iyn n iθn iθ iθn n
4B.1.6 – Unit Modal Behavior Magnitude: The typical unit modal behavior magnitude r (X) ,
Equivalent, which corresponds to any behavior magnitude (displacement, relative floor
displacement, internal force component) in the typical nth vibration mode for the given (X)
earthquake direction , 4B.2)
n
a in which the defined coefficient layers of modal active masses are acted as charges in their
respective directions
obtained by static calculation.
4B.2. EARTHQUAKE CALCULATION WITH MOD MERGING METHOD
4B.2.1 – Mode Coupling Method is described below for earthquake direction (X). Perpendicular to
(X)
(Y) similarly calculated for the direction of the earthquake.
4B.2.2 – For the horizontal (X) and (Y) earthquake directions, the direction joining shall be applied
according to 4.4.2 to the maximum behavior magnitudes obtained separately.
4B.2.3 – In a typical nth vibration mode for the given (X) earthquake direction, the typical
maximum modal behavior magnitude r(X) corresponding to any behavior magnitude
X)
(displacement, relative floor displacement, internal force component) is equivalent to r( ,
Equivalent.( 4B.3) is calculated as:
n,max
(X) (X)
r = rS
(T )
(4B.3)
n,max n aR n
where r (X) is the typical unit modal behavior magnitude defined in 4B.1.6, and S (T) is the typical
naR n
The nth natural vibration period is equivalent to Tn.( 4.8) shows the reduced design spectral
acceleration.
4B.2.4 – The maximum non- (X) (X) simultaneous modal

contributions calculated according to 4B.2.3 for each vibration mode shall be statistically combined
as described below, to be applied separately for each of the magnitudes of behavior, such as
internal force components, displacement, and relative fold displacement:
(a) The most common mode is the Exact Quadratic Merge (TKB) Rule as the merging rule .( 4B.4).
YM YM
(X)
r max = ρ r (4B.4)
∑∑ r m,max mn n,ma x
m=1 n=1
(X) (X)
where r and r are calculated with 4B.2.3 for the typical m'th and nth vibration modes
m,maxn,max
denotes the largest modal behavior magnitudes, and ρmn is the cross-correlation coefficient for
these modes.
(b) The above Equivalent.( The cross correlation coefficient in 4B.4) is equivalent ( 4B.5a) is given
at:
T
m
; βmn =
T
(4B.5a) n
β here is the ratio of the mth and nth natural vibration periods considered, ξ and ξ
mn mn
modal damping ratios that belong to the same modes and can be taken differently from each other
Shows.
(c) If the modal damping rates are assumed to be the same in all modes, the cross-correlation
coefficient is equivalent.( 4B.5b) can be simplified as given:
(ξ m = ξ n = ξ) (4B.5b)
(d) the requirement of β mn < 0.8 is met for all modes considered;
Equivalent. (4B.4) Instead of the merge rule given in Equivalent.( 4B.6) The Quadrical Root of the
Sum of Squares (CTKK) Rule can be used.
YM
(X)
r max = r (4B.6)
∑( n,max ) (X) 2
n=1
This merging rule is equivalent to Equivalent.( 4B.4) is taken as ρ = 0 (m ≠ n) and ρ = 1 (m = n)
mn mn
situation.
4B.2.5 – At a typical nth vibration mode for the given (X) earthquake direction, the maximum
(X)
modal base shear force V in the direction of the x-axis of the conveyor system and its
corresponding
txn,max
X)
The largest base tipping moment is M ( Equivalent.( 4B.7) is calculated as:
oxn,max
NN
(X) (X) (X) (X) (X)
V ∑ = mS (; M = H (4B.7)
= T ) f
txn,max f ixn,max txn aR n oxn,max ∑ ixn,max i i=1 i=1
The consolidation of mod contributions of these magnitudes shall also be made in accordance
with 4B.2.4.
4B.3. EARTHQUAKE WITH MODE COLLECTION METHOD IN TIME DEFINITION FIELD

ACCOUNT
4B.3.1 – In a typical nth vibration mode for an earthquake acting simultaneously in the directions
(X) and (Y), it is necessary to determine the magnitude of any behavior (displacement, relative
floor displacement, internal force)
(X,Y)
components) the change in the (X,Y) (X,Y) magnitude of the typical modal
behavior against time r ()t,
n
Equivalent. (4B.8) is calculated as:
(X,Y) (X) (X,Y)
r n ()t =r n a nR ()t (4B.8 )
(X)
where r is in 4B.1.6 for the earthquake direction (X) selected as the calculation reference line
n(X,Y)
the typical unit defined is the magnitude of modal behavior, and if a()t is for the nth vibration
mode
Nr
Equivalent below.( 4B.9) versus reduced modal pseudo-acceleration defined as time-dependent
is coming.
2π
a ()t =ω ; ω= (4B.9)
nR n
T
an n (X,Y)
Equivalent. (4B.9) In ω n represents the natural angular frequency of the typical nth mode of
vibration, and dn ()t denotes the modal displacement calculated in 4B.3.2.
(X,Y)
4B.3.2 – Equivalent. (4B.9) Linear modal displacement in , d ()t, simultaneously (X), and
n
(Y) Equivalent of the modal single degree of freedom system of the nth mode under the joint
influence of the ground motion components of the earthquake .( 4B.10) is derived from the linear
solution of the equation of motion given in the time definition field:
(Y) (X,Y) (X,Y) 2 (X,Y) (X) Γ n (Y)
d + ξω t n() g t − (X) ug ()t (4B.10)
Γ
n ()t 2 n n d n () +ω d n t =− u() n
(X) (Y)
where ug ()t and ug ()t are perpendicular to each other in the (X) and (Y) earthquake
directions according to 4B.3.5
(X,Y) (X,Y)
if the defined ground accelerations are d ()t and d ()t , then the time of the nth vibration mode
depends on the
nn
shows linear modal velocity and acceleration. The time increment to be taken as the basis for the
calculation shall not be greater than T n/10.
4B.3.3 – Under the influence of the earthquake defined in the directions (X) and (Y), changes in
the magnitudes of behavior such as internal force components, displacement and relative layer
displacement over time,
(X,Y)
()
rt is the use of simultaneous modal contributions calculated according to 4B.3.1 for each vibration
mode,
(X,Y)
r ()t shall be obtained by direct addition:

n
YM
(X,Y) (X,Y)
r ()t =∑ rn ()t (4B.11 )

n=1
4B.3.4 – In a typical nth vibration mode under the influence of the earthquake defined in the (X)
and (Y) directions, the modal base shear force in the direction of the x-axis of the carrier system
and against it
(X,Y) (X,Y)
variations of the incoming base tipping moment over time V()t and M()t
txn oxn
Equivalent. (4B.12) is calculated as:
NN
(X,Y) (X,Y) (X) (X,Y) (X,Y) (X,Y)
V()t =∑ f ()t = ma ()t ; M()t =∑ f()tH (4B.12)

txn ixn txn nR oxn ixn i i=1 i=1
The collection of mod contributions of these magnitudes in the time definition field shall also be
made in accordance with 4B.3.3.
4B.3.5 – At least 11 earthquake ground motion sets shall be used in linear calculations to be made
with the Mode Addition Method in the time definition area. The acceleration registers in two
horizontal directions perpendicular to each other will be acted together simultaneously in the
direction of the (X) and (Y) prime axes of the carrier system. Then the calculation will be repeated
o
by rotating the axes of the acceleration records to 90 . The selection and scaling of the earthquake
records to be used in the calculations will be made according to 2.5.
4B.3.6 – The magnitudes of the behavior shall be found as the average ×of the maximum
absolute values of the results to be obtained from each of the calculations made according to 4B.3.3
from each of the calculations of at least 2.11 = 22.
NNEX 4C – EXAMPLE OF FLEXIBLE CONNECTION DETAIL FOR FILLER WALLS
4C.1 – Under the frequently repeated DD-3 and DD-4 earthquake ground movements, flexible
joints are formed between the brittle fill walls and the adjacent columns/curtains in order to
prevent damage to the filling wall. These joints should be filled with a flexible material that does
not prevent the wall from changing shape.
4C.2 – A sample detailing for flexible joints that can be applied for this purpose is given in Figure
4C.1. The flexible joint is provided by a C-profile that anchors the inner faces of the column/curtain
and the upper beam/slab bottom face along the column/curtain height. This profile also prevents
the out-of-plane movement of the wall during an earthquake. In the implementation of the detail,
measures related to fire, heat, sound and waterproofing should be taken separately.
Figure 4C.1
SECTION 5 – PRINCIPLES OF CALCULATION FOR THE EVALUATION AND DESIGN OF BUILDINGS UNDER THE
INFLUENCE OF EARTHQUAKES ACCORDING TO DEFORMATION
5.0. ICONS
Ash = Transverse reinforcement area (rectangular section) [mm 2 ] A os = Area of transverse

2
reinforcement (circular section) [mm ] a = Distance between the axes of longitudinal
reinforcements supported by an ether arm or gyros horizontally [mm ]
bo = Section size between the axes of the ethers winding the umbilical concrete [mm]
bk = Core size (distance between the outermost transverse reinforcement axes) [mm]
If D = D , the distance between the spiral/winding reinforcement axes [mm]
DD-1 = Earthquake with a 2% probability of being exceeded in 50 years (recurrence period 2475
years)
earthquake ground motion level DD-3 = 50% probability of being exceeded in 50
years DD-3 = earthquake ground motion level DD-3 = 50% probability of being exceeded in 50
years (repetition period 72 years) earthquake ground motion level DD-4 = 68% probability of
being exceeded in 50 years (repetition period 43 years) db = Longitudinal reinforcement diameter
(average in pulling) [m] Ed = Total earthquake effect based on design with line joining applied
(H)
Ed = Horizontal earthquake effect based on the design with direction joining applied
(Z)
Ed = Vertical earthquake effect

(EI) e = Column, beam, ba beam or curtain modeled according to the behavior of stacked plastic
effective cross-sectional rigidity

fce = Average (expected) compressive strength of concrete [MPa] f ck = Characteristic compressive
strength of concrete [MPa] f e = Linear (elastic) strength demand calculated for the carrier
system fy = Yield strength of the carrier system
fye = Average (expected) yield strength of steel [MPa]
fyk = Characteristic yield strength of steel [MPa]
fywe = Average (expected) yield strength of transverse reinforcement [MPa]

G = Constant load effect
h = Section height [m] ho = Section size between the axes of the saddles winding the umbilical
concrete [mm]
I = Coefficient of Building Importance L p = Plastic joint length [m] Ls = Cutting opening [m] M y =
Effective yield moment [kNm] mi = Total mass of the ith floor [t]
2
m = Mass moment of inertia of the ith floor [tm ] N = Total number of floors in the upper
iθ
section above the basements of the building n = Moving load participation coefficient Ry = Yield
Strength Reduction Coefficient Q = Moving load effect i Qe = Effective moving load effect S = Snow
load effect i
s
= Winding reinforcement range [m] SDS = Design spectral acceleration coefficient

defined for the short-period region αh = Winding rebar activity coefficient
(LO)
ε = Unit of coiled concrete allowed for Migration Prevention performance level

c
shortening limit
(KH)
ε = Controlled Damage performance level for permissible winding concrete unit shortening
c
Limit
(SH)
ε = Allowable winding concrete unit shortening for Limited Damage performance level
c
Limit
(LO)
ε = Unit of reinforcing steel allowed for Migration Prevention performance level

s
morph limit
(KH)
ε = Unit of rebar steel allowed for Controlled Damage performance level

s
morph limit
(SH)
ε = Unit of rebar steel allowed for Limited Damage performance level

s
water ε limit of deformation = Reinforcement unit elongation φy = Yield curvature

m-1
[ ]
m-1
φu = Curvature before migration [ ] Mechanical reinforcement ratio of effective winding
reinforcement
ω =
we Volumetric ratio of transverse reinforcement in the direction under consideration
ρ sh =
ρsh,min = Small proportion of volumetric transverse reinforcement in two horizontal directions
θy = Displaced axis rotation for yield state [rad]

(KH)
θp = Permissible plastic rotation limit for Controlled Damage performance level [rad]
(LO)
θp = Permissible plastic rotation for Migration Prevention performance level

limit [rad]
(SH)
θp = Allowable plastic rotation limit for Limited Damage performance level [rad]
5.1. EVALUATION AND DESIGN APPROACH ACCORDING TO DEFORMATION
5.1.1. Definition
In the Evaluation and Design by Deformation (SCT) approach, which is one of the two main approaches
for the design of building carrier systems under the influence of earthquakes:
(a) Internal force-deformation relations compatible with nonlinear modeling approaches of existing or
previously pre-designed carrier system elements shall be determined.
(b) Earthquake ground movement(s) selected in accordance with the projected performance target(s)
under, the carrier system is calculated by dynamic incremental methods in the static or time definition field,
deriving deformation demands for nonlinear ductile behavior and strength demands for brittle behavior.
(c) The resulting deformation and internal force demands shall be compared with the deformation and
strength capacities defined in accordance with the prescribed performance target(s).
(d) For existing buildings, the assessment shall be completed according to the deformation by showing
that the deformation and strength demands are below or exceed the deformation and strength capacities
corresponding to them.
(e) The design shall be completed according to the deformation and strength demands for existing
buildings to be constructed or strengthened and if they are below the deformation and strength capacities
corresponding to them . Otherwise, the element sections are changed and the calculation is repeated and re-
evaluated and in this way, the design is finalized according to the deformation.
5.1.2. Scope
5.1.2.1 – Evaluation and Design by Deformation described in this section – The CSD calculation principles
shall apply to the design of the Tall Buildings described in Chapter 13, the design of the Earthquake
Insulated Buildings described in Chapter 14 and the Assessment and Strengthening of Existing Buildings
described in Chapter 15.
5.1.2.2 – Design by Strength in the buildings referred to in 5.1.3.2 in accordance with Chapter 4 – DGT
calculation
After the preliminary design is made by applying the principles, performance evaluation will be made by
using the Evaluation and Design According to the Morphosis and Design – SCT account principles described
in this section.
5.1.2.3 – After the preliminary design of the buildings with full post-stress preproduction defined in Section
8 is made with the DGT approach, performance evaluation will be carried out with the SCDT approach
according to 8.4.3.
5.1.3. Performance Targets
5.1.3.1 – Evaluation and Design by Deformation – Performance targets to be used as the basis for the
design of Tall Buildings described in Chapter 13 and the Evaluation and Strengthening of Existing Buildings
described in Chapter 15 under the CGD Table 3.4, Earthquake Insulated Buildings described in Chapter
14 The performance targets to be used as the basis for the design of are defined in Table 3.5.
5.1.3.2 – According to Table 3.4(a), in buildings with Earthquake Design Class DTS = 1a, DTS = 2a and
Building Height Class BYS = 2, BYS = 3;
(a) Under the influence of DD-2 earthquake ground motion, the design made with the DGT calculation
principles in Section 4 by taking I = 1.5 shall be considered as a preliminary design.
( b) Assessment and Design by Deformation according to this Section to ensure the Controlled
Damage (SH) performance target, defined as the Advanced Performance Target in Table 3.4(a) under the
influence of DD-1 earthquake ground motion, as well as the Limited Damage (SH) performance target
under DD-3 earthquake ground motion, (SCT) approach and the design will be improved if necessary.
5.2. IDENTIFICATION OF EARTHQUAKE IMPACT AND COMBINATION WITH OTHER EFFECTS
5.2.1. Earthquake Impact
5.2.1.1 – Earthquake impact to be taken as the basis for the Propulsion Methods detailed in 5.6 within the
scope of Evaluation and Design by Morphos, horizontal elastic design acceleration spectrum given in 2.3.4
or 2.4.1, or earthquake ground movements scaled selectively according to 2.5
will be considered as.
5.2.1.2 – Within the scope of Evaluation and Design by Deformation, in the Nonlinear Calculation Method
in the Time Definition Area, the details of which are described in 5.7, the earthquake effect will be
considered as earthquake ground movements that are selectively scaled according to 2.5.
5.2.2. Combining the Earthquake Effect with Other Effects
5.2.2.1 – To be used as a basis for the evaluation of the carrier system elements, the combination of the
earthquake effect with the vertical load effect is equivalent to ( 5.1) is defined in:
(H) (Z)
GQ++ 0.2 S + E + 0.3 E (5.1)

e dd
(Z)
where G indicates the constant load effect, S indicates the snow load effect, and Ed indicates the vertical
earthquake effect determined according to 4.4.3. Active moving load effect, Moving Load Mass as defined in
Table 4.3
(H)
The Participation Coefficient will be calculated as Q = nQ using n. Horizontal earthquake effect
e
e d
It is defined in 5.2.2.3.
5.2.2.2 – Before the earthquake calculation to be made by the non-linear calculation methods given in this
Chapter, Equivalent.( In 5.1), a nonlinear static calculation shall be made in which static vertical loads
(H)
other than Ed are applied incrementally to the carrier system. The internal obtained from this account
forces and shapes will be considered as initial values in the horizontal earthquake calculation. Nonlinear
deformation is not allowed at this stage in newly constructed and reinforced buildings. However, in the
evaluation of existing buildings, nonlinear deformations (if any) will also be taken into account as initial
values.
5.2.2.3 – Equivalent. (5.1) Ed(H) in is defined as follows in (a) and (b):
(a) If the calculation of a nonlinear horizontal earthquake is made by the Thrust Methods given in 5.6,
H),
Ed( (X) and (Y) corresponds to the horizontal earthquake effect obtained by combining the effects
calculated separately in the earthquake directions according to 4.4.2.1.
(b) If the calculation of a nonlinear horizontal earthquake is made in the time definition field according to
5.7, the earthquake components in the directions (X) and (Y) perpendicular to each other horizontally
according to 2.5
(H)
Since they are defined together simultaneously, the combined horizontal earthquake effect Ed is obtained
directly as a result of this calculation.
5.3. NONLINEAR BEHAVIOR PATTERNS
5.3.1. Stacked Plastic Behavior Model
5.3.1.1 – The Stacked Plastic Behavior (Plastic Knuckle) Model can be used as a nonlinear behavior model
in columns, beams and reinforced concrete curtains that meet the geometric condition given in 4.5.3.8, which
can be modeled as frame (bar) finite elements.
5.3.1.2 – The Stacked Plastic Behavior Model assumes that plastic deformations occur in a uniformly diffuse
manner across regions of finite length where internal forces reach their plastic capacity. Plastic deformation
zone called plastic joint length
L shall be taken equal to half of p h (length ofp h), the cross-sectional size in the working
direction ()(L 0.5 ).
5.3.1.3 – The length of the plastic deformation zones of the elements that make plastic deformation only
under axial force shall be taken equal to the free length of the element concerned.
5.3.1.4 – The plastic joint representing the stacked plastic deformation must theoretically be placed in the
middle of the plastic deformation zone specified in 5.3.1.2. In practical application, however, approximate
idealizations specified in 5.4.2.3 for beams and columns and in 5.4.3.1 for curtains are permissible.
5.3.1.5 – The conditions for defining the effective yield moments of reinforced concrete plastic joint sections
are given below in (a), (b), (c):
(a) Material strengths shall be taken in accordance with 5.4.1.5.
(b) In the calculation of the effective yield moment, the pressure unit deformation of the concrete can
be taken as 0.0035 and the unit deformation of the reinforcing steel as 0.01.
(c) In calculating the effective pour moment, axial forces arising from vertical loads shall be taken into
account.
5.3.1.6 – Strengthening effect on two-line internal force-plastic deformation relations of reinforced concrete
and steel sections (increase of plastic moment due to increase in plastic rotation) abandonment
Be.
5.3.1.7 – In the calculation of non-linear earthquakes in the time definition field according to 5.6 and 5.7,
the elasto-plastic standard cycle model for steel carrier systems or the previous maximum-oriented model for
reinforced concrete carrier systems or models derived from it to allow for a reduction in online rigidity may
be used as the cyclic behavior model.
5.3.2. Diffuse Plastic Behavior Models
5.3.2.1 – Diffuse plastic behavior models may also be used as nonlinear behavior models in columns, beams
and reinforced concrete curtains that make up the bearing system of the building.
5.3.2.2 – Diffuse plastic behavior patterns can be used to continuously consider finite length end zones
(plastic deformation zones) or nonlinear deformations along the entire length of the element.
5.3.2.3 – The cross-sectional cell (fiber) model, in which concrete or structural steel is modeled individually
with sufficiently small cells in a cross-section, and steel reinforcing bars are individually modeled and
nonlinear axial stressunit deformation relations can be considered cyclically in each cell, can be used in
practice, especially for nonlinear modeling of reinforced concrete curtains. With this model, in reinforced
concrete curtains with complex sections (T, L, U or C shaped), the cross-section in the plan can be divided
into various regions, and in the vertical direction, a two-dimensional finite element network can be formed
in each curtain arm, taking into account finite length pieces along the curtain .
5.3.2.4 – Shear shapeshifts in the pitch in parallel with the cross-sectional cell (fiber) model used to model
the nonlinear behavior of reinforced concrete curtains under the influence of bending and axial force can
also be approximated by a linear shift model connected parallel to the finite element network referred to in
5.3.2.3. The slip module to be used in this model can be retrieved from Table 4.2.
5.3.2.5 – Material strengths shall be taken in accordance with 5.4.1.5.
5.3.2.6 – In the calculation of non-linear earthquakes to be made in the time definition field according to
5.7, generally accepted models shall be used as cyclic behavior models for concrete and steel fibers.
5.4. RULES FOR MODELING THE CARRIER SYSTEM FOR NONLINEAR ACCOUNTING
5.4.1. General Modeling Rules
5.4.1.1 – Building carrier systems shall always be modelled in three dimensions.
5.4.1.2 – The earthquake effect in two horizontal directions perpendicular to each other shall always be
taken into account.
5.4.1.3 – The linear damping rate shall be taken to 5%, unless otherwise specified.
5.4.1.4 – The second-order effects of axial forces on the deformed carrier system shall be considered.
5.4.1.5 – Modeling based on evaluation and design according to deformation shall be based on the material
strengths given in (a) and (b) below:
(a) The assessment of existing buildings according to deformation shall be based on the existing strength of
concrete and reinforcing steel as defined in Chapter 15.
(b) The evaluation and design of new buildings according to deformation shall be based on the expected
(average) strength of concrete and reinforcement steel and structural steel as defined in Table 5.1. In the
table, the average and characteristic compressive strengths of f ce and f ck concrete aredetermined by the
shows the average and characteristic yield strengths of steel.
f
yk
5.4.1.6 – In new reinforced concrete carrier systems with a high level of ductility to be evaluated in
accordance with this Section, the effects of online strength reduction, shear damage, column-beam joint zone
damage, reinforcement overlap length insufficiency and lack of winding reinforcement may not be taken into
account in the carrier system and cyclic behavior models due to the preliminary design made in accordance
with the principles of capacity design and other ductile design rules.
5.4.1.7 – Modeling and accounting rules for the evaluation of existing buildings and the design of retrofits
are given in Chapter 15.
Table 5.1. Expected (Average) Material

Strengths Concrete ce ck 1.3 ff=
Reinforcing steel ye yk 1.2f f=
Structural steel (S235) 1.5 fff=
5.4.2. Modeling of Beams ye yk
and Columns
Structural steel (S275) ye yk1.3 f f f=
5.4.2.1 – Beams and columns Structural steel (S355) ye yk1.1f f= shall be modelled as frame
(bar) finite elements. Structural steel (S460) ye yk1.1f f= Nonlinear behavior can be
modeled by the stacked plastic behavior model
according to 5.3.1 or by the diffuse plastic behavior
models according to 5.3.2 in finite plastic deformation zones defined at the ends of the elements. In practice,
the use of a stacked plastic joint model can generally be considered sufficient.
5.4.2.2 – All six degrees of freedom shall be taken into account at the nodal points where the columns and
beams meet. If the tiles are modeled as rigid diaphragms, those degrees of freedom that correspond to rigid
motion will be removed.
5.4.2.3 – In the case of columns and beams, plastic joints may be placed just outside the column-beam
junction zone, i.e. at the ends of the net openings of the column or beams. However, it should be taken into
account that plastic joints can also form in the beam openings due to the effect of vertical loads.
5.4.2.4 – Reinforced concrete columns and beams along the length between the plastic joints at the ends shall
be modeled as linear elements. The effective cross-sectional rigidities of these elements are reduced to 5.4.5
will be determined accordingly.
5.4.3. Modeling of Reinforced Concrete Curtains
5.4.3.1 – If the earthquake calculation is made by nonlinear Thrust Methods according to 5.6, the Stacked
Plastic Behavior (Plastic Knuckle) Model may be used as a nonlinear behavior model in reinforced concrete
gapless curtains that meet the geometric condition given in 4.5.3.8 or in each of the curtain parts that make
up the bond beam (gap) curtain.
(a) In this case, the plastic joints may be placed at the lower end of the curtain cutting on each floor. In the
case of rigid perimeter curtains in the basements of buildings, the plastic sections of the curtains continuing
from these curtains to the upper floors should be defined, starting at least from the first basement floor.
(b) Along the length between the plastic joints, the curtains shall be modelled as linear elements. The
effective cross-sectional rigidity of these elements shall be determined in accordance with 5.4.5.
(c) The dependent degrees of freedom at the nodal points where the curtain parts forming the curtains of
complex cross sections (in the form of T, L, U or C) meet the beam and/or slab finite elements at the floor
levels and the kinematic of six independent degrees of freedom at the main node to be defined in the
cross-sectional center of gravity to satisfy the condition of three-dimensional rigid body motion will be
connected as.
5.4.3.2 – In the event that the earthquake calculation is made by non-linear method in the time definition
field according to 5.7 and in high-rise buildings covered by Section 13, the plastic joint model shall not be
used for curtain parts without gaps and with bond beams (gaps). For these elements, it is mandatory to use
the cross-sectional cell (fiber) model defined in 5.3.2.
5.4.3.3 – Nonlinear models of the tie beams of curtains with bond beams (gaps) can be carried out as bar
elements or by special modeling methods according to 5.4.2.
5.4.4. Modeling of Basement Curtains and Floors
Except in special cases, nonlinear modeling of basement curtains and building floors around the building is
not required. In normal cases, linear modeling equivalent to the effective cross-sectional rigidities given in
Table 4.2 shall be carried out for these elements and all the modeling rules given in 4.5.5, 4.5.6 and 4.5.7
shall be followed.
5.4.5. Effective Sectional Rigidity of Reinforced Concrete Carrier System Elements
5.4.5.1 – The effective cross-sectional rigidity multipliers for the in-plane and out-of-plane behavior of
linarally modelled curtains and tiles shall be taken from Table 4.2 in 4.5.8.
5.4.5.2 – The effective cross-sectional rigidity of columns, beams, tie beams and curtains modeled according
to the behavior of stacked plastics is equivalent. 5.2).
MyL
s
EI
()e =
(5.2)
θ3
y
where M y and θy are associated with the effective yield moments of the plastic joints at the ends of the rod
element.
shows the averages of yield rotations. Lsis the cutting opening (the ratio of torque per section/shear force);
in columns and beams, it can be taken as approximately half of the opening, and in curtains as half of the
distance from the base of each floor to the top of the curtain. Equivalent. (5.2) The return of the plastic joint
yield located in θy Equivalent.( 5.3) shall be calculated with:
φy Ls  h 
θ= +0.0015η⎜1+1.5  + (5.3)
y
3  L s  8 fce
where φy shows the effective yield curvature in the plastic joint cross-section. Beams and columns
η=1 and η=0.5 will be taken for curtains. h is the section height. Reinforcement for slippage
φ DF
in the last term, which refers to the stripping rotation of the db mesne (to the node or
to foundation) shows the average diameter of the reinforcing steels clamped, andto fce and f the average
(expected) compressive strength of the concrete and the average yield strength of the reinforcement.
5.4.6. Modeling of Masses
The modeling of the masses will be carried out according to 4.5.9.
5.4.7. Modeling of Additional Decentralization Effect
In the event that there is an irregularity of type A1 as defined in Table 3.6 on any first floor of the building
and the torsion irregularity coefficient is 1.5, the annex as defined in 4.5.10.2
η>
the effect of eccentricity shall also be considered in this Chapter. The additional coefficient mass moment of
inertia on each floor shall be calculated in accordance with 4.5.10.2(b) and 4.5.10.3 shall be observed.
5.5. CHOICE OF NONLINEAR CALCULATION METHOD
5.5.1. Nonlinear Calculation Methods
The nonlinear calculation methods to be used within the scope of Evaluation and Design by Deformation
are the Push Methods, the details of which are described in 5.6, and the Nonlinear Calculation Method in
the Time Definition Field described in 5.7.
5.5.2. Selecting the Account Method
5.5.2.1 – The Single Mode Push Methods detailed in 5.6.2 to 5.6.5 may be used for buildings with a
Building Height Class of BYS ≥ 5 according to Table 3.3 and meeting the conditions given in 5.6.2.2. The
Multi-Mode Push Methods defined in 5.6.6 can be used for all buildings with BYS ≥2.
5.5.2.2 – The Nonlinear Calculation Method in the Time Definition Area, the details of which are described
in 5.7, can be used to calculate earthquakes of all buildings. The use of this method is mandatory for high-
rise buildings according to Chapter 13 (buildings with BYS = 1 in Table 3.3).
5.6. EARTHQUAKE CALCULATION WITH NONLINEAR THRUST METHODS
5.6.1. Push Methods
5.6.1.1 – Under this Regulation, the Single Mode Thrust Methods described in 5.6.2 to 5.6.5 and the
Multimodal Thrust Methods defined in 5.6.6 can be used in the calculation of nonlinear earthquakes.
5.6.1.2 – As with all nonlinear methods, in the initial step (step 0) of the calculation, nonlinear incremental
static calculation is performed under non-earthquake loads as specified in 5.2.2.2. The internal forces and
shapeshifts obtained from this calculation will be taken into account as the initial values in the earthquake
calculation. Nonlinear deformation caused by vertical loads is not allowed in newly constructed buildings.
5.6.1.3 – Evaluation is completed according to deformation by comparing the plastic deformations (e.g.
plastic rotations) and the internal forces opposing the non-ductile (brittle) behavior with the limit values
allowed for the selected performance level.
5.6.2. Single Mode Push Methods
5.6.2.1 – Single-Mode Push Methods is the nonlinear incremental equivalent of the single-mode
implementation of the linear Mode Coupling Method described in Section 4.
5.6.2.2 – In order for Single Mode Push Methods to be applied, both the conditions given in (a) and (b)
below must be met:
(a) The torsional irregularity coefficient calculated in accordance with Table 3.5 of Chapter 3, on the
basis of linear elastic behavior without taking into account additional eccentricity on any floor, must satisfy
the condition of η<bi 1.4.
(b) In line with the earthquake under consideration, the ratio of the effective mass of the base shear
force of the first (dominant) vibration mode, calculated on the basis of linear elastic behavior, to the total
building mass (excluding the masses of basements surrounded by rigid curtains) must be at least 0.70.
5.6.2.3 – In Single-Mode Thrust Methods, under the influence of earthquake load increases applied
monotonically step by step up to the limit of the earthquake displacement demand in proportion to the
prevailing vibration mode shape in line with the earthquake under consideration, the displacement, plastic
deformation (plastic rotation, elongation, etc.) and internal force increases occurring in the carrier system
and their cumulative (cumulative) values are calculated. In the last step, the cumulative values that
correspond to the earthquake demand, the magnitudes that are the basis for the evaluation of the deformation
is obtained.
5.6.2.4 – In this Chapter, Single-Mode Thrust Methods are described for the situation in which the rigid
diaphragm assumption is made for the floors on each floor and the degrees of freedom are defined as the
rotation around the vertical axis with the horizontal displacement components in two directions perpendicular
to each other in the center of mass of the coat. Single-mode push methods are the same when considering the
degrees of freedom in floor slabs that oppose in-plane deformations
can be adapted within the framework of principles.
5.6.3. Fixed Single Mode Push Method
In the Constant Single Mode Thrust Method, the earthquake load increments acting on the floors in
each thrust step in line with the earthquake considered are defined as proportional to the fixed mode shape
determined in the first step after non-earthquake loading and never changed during the thrust calculation.
Obtain. Then, with the coordinate transformation applied to this curve, the modal capacity diagram is
obtained, the coordinates of which are modal displacement – modal pseudo-acceleration. At the final stage
of the calculation, this diagram is taken as the basis for calculating the modal displacement demand under the
earthquake effect defined and the corresponding internal force and plastic deformation demands occurring in
the carrier system. Details of the method are given in APPENDIX 5B.
5.6.4. Variable Single Mode Push Method
In the Variable Single Mode Thrust Method, earthquake load increases affecting the floors in line with the
earthquake taken into consideration and the floor displacement increases compatible with them, non-
earthquake
they are defined in proportion to the variable mode shape obtained from the free vibration calculation, which
is renewed by taking into account the previously formed plastic joints at each thrust step after loading. In
this method, the modal capacity diagram is obtained directly without the need to draw the thrust curve
specified in 5.6.3. The final stage of the calculation is as specified in 5.6.3. Details of the method are given
in APPENDIX 5B.
5.6.5. Obtaining the Modal Displacement Demand of the Earthquake in Single-Mode Thrust Methods
To
5.6.5.1 – Obtaining the modal displacement demand of the earthquake corresponds to the calculation of
the greatest displacement of the modal single-degree of freedom system represented by the modal capacity
diagram under the influence of the given earthquake.
5.6.5.2 – Request for modal displacement of the earthquake;

(a) Modal can be obtained as Nonlinear Spectral Displacement in a single-degree of freedom system.
(b) Modal single-degree of freedom can be obtained from the calculation of the system in the time definition
field under the influence of earthquakes.
Both methods are described in APPENDIX 5B.
5.6.6. Multi-Mode Push Methods
In the calculation of nonlinear earthquakes, Multimodal Propulsion Methods included in the international
application literature can also be used, provided that the conditions defined in 5.6.6.1 and 5.6.6.2 below are
met.
5.6.6.1 – It shall be shown in the calculation report that all internal forces and displacements obtained as
a result of the application of the Multi-Mode Thrust Method for linear calculation using initial (elastic)
rigidities in the particular case according to the given design spectrum are identical to the magnitudes
obtained according to 4.8.2 on the basis of the same design spectrum.
5.6.6.2 – In the case of incrementally separate application of the independent constant modal load vectors
defined for different vibration modes of the building in the Multi-Mode Thrust Method used, the resulting
modal internal forces shall not be statistically combined but shall be calculated in accordance with the
combined modal element end displacements and yield rotations according to 4B.2.4.
5.7. EARTHQUAKE CALCULATION WITH NONLINEAR CALCULATION METHOD IN TIME

DEFINITION FIELD
5.7.1. Definition
In the field of time definition, the nonlinear calculation corresponds to the step-by-step direct integration of
the set of differential equations with time increments, which express the equations of motion of the carrier
system under the influence of earthquake ground motion. During this process, the change of the system
rigidity matrix over time is taken into account due to nonlinear behavior.
5.7.2. Selection and Scaling of Earthquake Records
5.7.2.1 – At least eleven earthquake ground motion teams shall be used for non-linear calculations in the time
definition area. The acceleration registers in two horizontal directions perpendicular to each other will be
acted together simultaneously in the direction of the (X) and (Y) prime axes of the carrier system. Then the
o
calculation will be repeated by rotating the axes of the acceleration records to 90 .
5.7.2.2 – The selection and scaling of earthquake records to be used in the calculations shall be made
according to 2.5.
5.7.3. Matters to be Considered in the Account
5.7.3.1 – Nonlinear modeling of the carrier system shall be carried out according to the principles given in
5.4.
5.7.3.2 – Dynamic energy loss in linear structural and non-structural elements, except for energy consumption
related to nonlinear behavior in carrier system elements,
in the equations of motion will be represented by the viscous damping matrix. viscous damping matrix,
It will be created as a Rayleigh Proportional Damping Matrix or Modal Damping Matrix.
5.7.3.3 – In the initial step of the calculation, as in all nonlinear methods, nonlinear incremental static
calculation is performed under non-earthquake loads as specified in 5.2.2.2. The internal forces and
nonlinear deformations obtained from this calculation (not allowed in newly constructed buildings) will be
considered as the initial values in the earthquake calculation.
5.7.3.4 – The time increment to be used in the calculation will be selected in such a way as to allow a sufficient
representation of all vibration modes that contribute to the dynamic behavior.
5.7.4. Evaluation Basis for Deformation and Internal Force Demands
The deformation requests based on evaluation in the case of elements with ductile behavior and the internal
force demands based on evaluation in the case of elements without ductile behavior shall be calculated as the
average of the maximum absolute values of the results obtained from each of the analyzes (at least 2×=11 22
analyzes).
5.8. EVALUATION OF DEFORMATIONS AND INTERNAL FORCES
5.8.1. Permitted Deformation and Internal Force Limits for New Reinforced Concrete Building Elements
5.8.1.1 – To the diffuse plastic behaviour model given in this Chapter in new reinforced concrete building
elements, including Tall Buildings given in Chapter 13, for use in the performance evaluation for the
Migration Prevention (LO) Performance Level
(LO) (LO)
The total unit deformations of concrete and reinforcement steel calculated according to the ε and
permission for ε
.cs
the limits given are defined below in (a) and (b):
(a) Concrete unit shortening for the Migration Prevention performance level:
In rectangular columns, beams and curtains:
(LO)
c
= 0.0035 +0.04
ε ω≤
we
0.018
(5.4a)
In circular sections: ω≤0.018
(LO)
(5.4b)
ε=0.0035 +0.07
c we
The first term in these correlations corresponds to the unit shortening of unwound concrete (shell concrete).
ωwe represent the ratio of mechanical reinforcement of the effective winding reinforcement:
f
ywe
ω =αρ
(5.4c)f
we se sh,min ce
Equivalent. (5.4c) The efficiency coefficient of the αse winding reinforcement in
ρsh,min is determined by two
the smaller proportion of volumetric transverse reinforcement in the horizontal direction, the average of the
f-ywe
transverse reinforcement
shows the (expected) yield strength:
⎛∑a ⎞ s ⎞ s  A
2
Shi
αse= 1−⎜1− ⎟⎜1− ; ρ= (5.4d)
sh
6bh 2 b 2h bs
 oo ⎠ o ⎠ o k
Equivalent. (5.4d) In the direction taken into account A sh and ρshin the area of the transverse reinforcement
and the volumetric
ratio, bk is the core size in the perpendicular direction (between the outermost transverse reinforcement axes)
distance), s transverse reinforcement range, curved concrete measured from b o and h o winding
reinforcement axes
shows their size, the distance between the axes of the longitudinal reinforcements supported by an etriye arm
or ciroz. The efficiency coefficient of circular winding reinforcement is Equivalent.( 5.4e) is given at:
n
 s  2A
Os
α=1− ; ρ= (5.4e)
se⎜ sh
 2D  Ds
where A is the area of the spiral/winding reinforcement os, s is the transverse reinforcement interval or step
of the spiral, and D is the distance between the spiral/winding reinforcement axes. n2 for circular ether
=, n = 1 for spiral reinforcement.
(b) Unit deformation of reinforcing steel for the Migration Prevention performance level:
(LO)
ε=0.4ε (5.5)
s water
Here ε shows the unit elongation that corresponds to the water tensile strength (see Section 1.c.). EK5A).
5.8.1.2 – The permissible limit for plastic rotations calculated according to the stacked plastic behavior
model given in this Chapter in new reinforced concrete building elements, including Tall Buildings given
in Chapter 13, for use in the performance evaluation for the Migration Prevention (LO) Performance Level,
the axial force acting on the cross section and Annex 5A As a result of the curvature analysis to be made by
taking into account the concrete and reinforcement steel models given in Denk.( 5.6).
2 ⎡ L ⎞⎤
(LO)
θp = ⎢(φ−φ y)L ⎜1−0.5 ⎟+4.5 φd (5.6)
ub ⎥
p
up
⎢ s ⎥
3 L
Here, φu shows the total curvature before migration obtained from the analysis made by using the concrete
and reinforcement steel unit deformations given in 5.8.1.1 and the concrete and reinforcement steel models
given in Annex 5A and taking into account the axial force acting on the cross-section. Equivalent. (5.6) The
last term in corresponds to the reinforcement stripping rotation due to the penetration of the yield elongation
penetration for the post-yield (until pre-migration) situation.
5.8.1.3 – The total allowable unit for concrete and reinforcement steel calculated by the calculation methods
given in this Chapter in new reinforced concrete building elements to be used in the performance evaluation
for the Performance Level of Controlled Damage (KH)
(KH) (KH) (KH)
plastic rotation θ p limits with deformations ε and ε, Prevention of Migration

.cs
depending on the values defined in 5.8.1.1 and 5.8.1.2 for the performance level, Equivalent.( 5.7) is defined
in:
(KH) (LO) (KH) (LO)
ε= 0.75ε ; ε= 0.75ε (5.7a)

cc ss
(KH) (LO)
θ p = 0.75θp (5.7b)
5.8.1.4 – Calculation methods given in this Chapter for new reinforced concrete building elements to be used
in the performance evaluation for the Limited Damage (SH) Performance Level
(SH) (SH)
The total permissible unit deformations of concrete and reinforcing steel calculated by ε and ε
.cs
Equivalent. (5.8a) is defined in:
(SH) (SH)
ε= 0.0025 ; ε= 0.0075 (5.8a)

.cs
In the calculation made using the effective cross-sectional rigidities defined in 5.4.5.2, the formation of
plastic joints in the carrier system for the SH performance level shall not be allowed:
SH
θ( ) = 0 (5.8b)
p
5.8.1.5 – For new reinforced concrete building elements, by the calculation methods given in this Chapter
The internal force demands calculated for the Migration Prevention performance state shall be shown to be
smaller than the internal force capacities defined in Chapter 7 for the elements concerned. However,
characteristic material strengths in the calculation of internal force capacities
instead of the average (expected) material strengths given in Table 5.1 shall be taken as the basis. The
relevant rules for reinforced concrete high-rise buildings are given in Section 13.
5.8.1.6 – Unit deformation and internal force limits permissible in the evaluation of existing building elements
are defined in Chapter 15.
5.8.2. Permissible Deformation and Internal Force Limits for New Steel Building Elements
5.8.2.1 – New steel building, including Tall Buildings given in Chapter 13

The permissible limits for deformations calculated by the calculation methods given in this Chapter are given
in Annex 5C for the respective performance levels.
5.8.2.2 – For new steel building elements, the internal force demands calculated by the calculation methods
given in this Chapter shall be shown to be smaller than the internal force capacities defined in Chapter 9 for
the elements concerned. However, the calculation of internal force capacities shall be based on the average
(expected) material strengths given in Table 5.1 rather than on the characteristic material strengths.
5.8.3. Permissible Deformation and Internal Force Limits for Reinforced Concrete and Steel Piles
5.8.3.1 – The permissible limits for plastic rotations obtained in reinforced concrete or steel piles as a result
of the calculation of nonlinear structure – pile-ground interaction made under the influence of DD-1
earthquake ground motion by Method I or Method II according to 16.10 are defined below in (a), (b), (c):
(a) 35% of the limits given in 5.8.1.2 and 5.8.1.3 shall be taken as the plastic rotation limits for reinforced
concrete piles.
(b) In reinforced concrete stoppers made for the connection of the steel pile to the foundation, as the plastic
rotation limits
50% of the limits given in 5.8.1.2 and 5.8.1.3 shall be taken.

(c) 50% of the limits given in Annex 5C shall be taken as the plastic rotation limits on the steel pile.
5.8.3.2 – For reinforced concrete and steel piles, Method I or Method II according to 16.10 and DD-1 shall
show that the internal force demands obtained as a result of the calculation of nonlinear structure-pile-
ground interaction under the influence of DD-1 earthquake ground motion are smaller than the internal
force capacities defined for the columns in Sections 7 and Section 9. However, the calculation of internal
force capacities shall be based on the average (expected) material strengths given in Table 5.1 rather than
on the characteristic material strengths.
5.9. FINALIZATION OF THE DESIGN ACCORDING TO DEFORMATION
As stated in 5.1.3.2, the dimensions and reinforcements of the vertical bearing elements (curtains and
columns) and foundations determined in the preliminary design made with the Design by Strength
approach given in Section 4 shall not be reduced as a result of the non-linear calculation made in accordance
with this Section. If reduction is desired, both designs will be repeated by changing the sections. For other
bearing elements (beam, tie beam, etc.), if deemed necessary, a reduction can be made. In this case, however,
the nonlinear calculation made according to this Chapter shall be repeated.
ANNEX 5A – STRESS FOR CONCRETE AND REINFORCEMENT STEEL – DEFORMATION
BONDS
5A.0. ICONS
A s = Longitudinal reinforcement area ai = Distance between the axes of the vertical reinforcements
around the section bo = Section size between the axes of the saddles winding the belly concrete E c =
Elasticity modulus of concrete Es = Modulus of elasticity of reinforcing steel f c = Pressure stress of
concrete in coiled concrete f cc = Pressure stress of coiled concrete Resistance
Compressive strength of unwound concrete
f
co = f e = Effective winding pressure f s = Stress in reinforcing steel f sy = Yield strength of reinforcing
=
steel f water = Breaking strength of reinforcing steel fyw = Yield strength of transverse reinforcement ho
Section size between the axes of the saddles winding the umbilical concrete k e
= Coefficient of Winding
Efficiency s = Transverse reinforcement range ρ = Volumetric ratio of total transverse reinforcement (ρ

=ρ +ρ )
ssxy ρ
x
, ρy = Transverse reinforcement volume ratio in the relevant directions ε c = Concrete pressure unit
deformation ε cu = Maximum pressure unit deformation in the coiled concrete εsy = Yield unit deformation
of the reinforcement steel Unit deformation of the reinforcement steel at the beginning of reinforcement
ε
s = εwater = Breaking unit deformation of reinforcing steel
5A.1. MODELS OF COILED AND UNWOUND CONCRETE
In the evaluation by deformation by Nonlinear Methods, the following stress-deformation relations are
defined for coiled and unwound concrete to be used in cases where no other model is selected (Figure 5A.1).
(a)
Concrete
pressure stress
f c in
coiled
concrete is
equivalent as a
function of
pressure unit
deformation εc ( 5A.1) is
given by:
(5A.1)
The relationship between the coiled concrete strength f and the unwound concrete
strength f in this relation
cc co
Equivalent. (5A.2) is given in .
f f
e e
f = λ f ; λ = 2.254 1+7.94
cc cco c c
Ff −2
−1,254 (5A.2)
co co
The effective winding pressure f here is equivalent for two directions perpendicular to each other in
rectangular sections. 5A.3) can be taken as an average of the values given in:
f =k ρ f ; f = k ρ f (5A.3)
ex ex yw ey ey yw
In these relations, f indicates the yield strength of the transverse reinforcement, ρ and ρ are the transverse in
the respective directions.
yw xy
the volumetric ratios of the 6bh 2

b 2h reinforcements, and the k
e
is equivalent.( 5A.4)
bh
shows the ratio of the coefficient of winding effectiveness.
2
⎛∑ a ⎞ s ⎞ s ⎞  A ⎞
−1
ke= 1− ⎜1− ⎟⎜1− ⎟⎜ 1− s  (5A.4)

i
 oo  o ⎠ o ⎠ oo 
where ai shows the distance between the axes of the longitudinal reinforcements around the section, b o
and ho the section dimensions between the axes of the cores that wrap the umbilical concrete, s the interval
between the axes of the etricycles in the longitudinal direction, and As shows the longitudinal reinforcement
area. Equivalent. (5A.1) Normalized concrete unit deformation in relation to the variable x and r
correlations Denk.( 5A.5) and Equivalent( 5A.6).
ε
c
x = ; ε = ε [1 +5( λ−1)] ; ε≅ .
c sec cc f [MPa ]
; E = (5A.6) 0
002(5
A.5)
ε
cc co c co cc
F
c
c
r
; E ≅ 5000
c co sec
ε
5A.2. REINFORCEMENT STEEL MODEL

Equivalent for reinforcing steel to be used in evaluation by deformation by Nonlinear Methods.(
The stress-morphing relations in 5A.7) are defined (Figure 5A.2):
f =E ε (ε ≤ε )
ss s ssy
f =f (ε <ε ≤ε ) (5A.7)
f =f − (f − f
(ε <ε ≤ε )
s su su sy
sh s water
The modulus of elasticity of reinforcing steel is E = 2x10 MPa. Other

information on reinforcing steels
su sh
s
Table 5A.1 is given.
Table 5A.1. Information on Rebar Steels
Quality f (Mpa)
Sy Sy ε ε.sh water ε water sy f/f
S220 220 0.0011 0.011 0.12 1.20
S420 420 0.0021 0.008 0.08 1.15 – 1.35
B420C 420 0.0021 0.008 0.08 1.15 – 1.35
B500C 500 0.0025 0.008 0.08 1.15 – 1.35
ANNEX 5B – SINGLE-MODE PUSH CALCULATION METHODS 5B.0. ICONS
(X,k) a1 (X) modal single of the first mode in the kth thrust step for the direction of the
=
earthquake
modal pseudo-acceleration of the system with degrees of freedom [m/s2]
ay1 = Yield pseudo-acceleration for first mode [m/s2]
CR = Spectral displacement rate
(X) modal single of the first mode in the kth thrust step for the direction of the
(X,k) d1 =
earthquake
modal displacement of the system with degrees of freedom [m]
(x)
d1,max = (X) the largest modal single degree of freedom system for earthquake direction
displacement [m]
(X,1)
mix1 = (X) for earthquake direction x axis, in the first thrust step
according to the fixed mode shape that is determined and never changed during
the push calculation
calculated ith layer modal effective mass [t]
(X,1)
mtx1 = (X) for earthquake direction x axis, in the first thrust step
modal effective mass of the calculated base shear force [t]
(X,1) (X) in the first thrust step in the direction of the y axis for the direction of the
miy1 =
earthquake
calculated ith layer modal effective mass [t]
(X,1) (X) determined in the first thrust step around the z axis for the direction of the
mi1θ =
earthquake, and
ith layer modal active mass moment of inertia calculated according to the constant
mode shape that has never changed during the thrust calculation [tm2]
(X,k)
mix1 = (X) on each kth thrust step in the direction of the x-axis for the earthquake direction
Work calculated according to the variable mode shape renewed by free vibration
calculation
modal effective mass of layers [t]
(X,k)
miy1 = (X) on each kth thrust step in the direction of the x-axis for the earthquake direction
Work calculated according to the variable mode shape renewed by free vibration
calculation
modal effective mass of layers [t]
(X,k)
mi1θ = (X) on each kth thrust step in the direction of the x-axis for the earthquake direction
ith layer modal effective mass moment of inertia calculated according to the
variable mode shape renewed by free vibration calculation [tm2]
ae 1()S Linear elastic spectral acceleration corresponding to the first natural vibration
=
T period T1 [g]
at
1()ST.
= First period of natural vibration Linear elastic spectral Versus T1
displacement [m]
di
1()ST.
= First period of natural vibration Nonlinear spectral Versus T1
displacement [m]
TB = Horizontal elastic design acceleration spectrum corner period [s]
T1 = The natural vibration period of the first mode [s]
(X,k) uix1 (X) earthquake Direction for kth Pus
=
Displacement calculated in accordance with [m]
(X,k) unx1 = (X) on the Nth floor (at the top of the building) on the k thrust step for the direction of the ea
displacement calculated in line with the x-axis [m]
g (X) ()u
= (X) earthquake of the ground acceleration component defined in accordan
t
change [m/s2]
(X,k) VTX1 = (X) in the kth thrust step for the direction of the earthquake
calculated base cutting force [kN]
(X,k) ∆ 1 = (X) modal single of the first mode in the kth thrust step for the direction of the earthquak
modal pseudo-acceleration increment of the system with degrees of freedom [m/s2
(X,k) ∆d1 = (X) modal single of the first mode in the kth thrust step for the direction of the earthquak
modal displacement of the system with degrees of freedom [m]
(X,k) ∆ fix1 Pus
= (X) earthquake Direction for kth
Earthquake load increase acting in line [kN]
Pus
(X,k) ∆ fiy1 = (X) earthquake Direction for kth
Earthquake load increase acting in line [kN]
(X,k) fi1θ∆ = (X) around the z axis on the ith floor in the kth thrust step for the direction of the earthquake
Earthquake moment increase [kNm]
(X,k) ∆uix1 Pus
= (X) earthquake Direction for kth
displacement increment calculated in accordance with [m]
Pus
(X,k) ∆uiy1 = (X) earthquake Direction for kth
displacement increment calculated in accordance with [m]
(X,k) ui1θ∆ = (X) around the z axis on the ith floor in the kth thrust step for the direction of the earthquake
calculated rotational increment [m]
1Φix()1 = Determined in the first thrust step on the i floor and no push account at all
amplitude in x direction of unchanged fixed mode shape
(k) Φix1 Pus Wor Floo Calculate
= kth step in x Axis in line with
h k r d
default approximate mode shape amplitude equal to displacement
(1) Φiy1 = Determined in the first thrust step on the i floor and no push account at all
amplitude of unchanged fixed mode shape in direction of y
(1)i1Φ θ = Determined in the first thrust step on the i floor and no push account at all
rotational amplitude around the z-axis of an unchanged fixed mode shape
(k) Φix1 = replenished with free vibration calculation at each k'th thrust step on the ith floor
amplitude of variable mode shape in x direction
(k) Φiy1 = replenished with free vibration calculation at each k'th thrust step on the ith floor
amplitude of variable mode shape in direction y
(k)
Φ = renewed by calculating the free vibration at each k'th thrust step on the ith floor
i1
θ
rotational amplitude around the z-axis of variable mode shape
(X,1)
Γ = (X) determined in the first thrust step for the earthquake direction and the thrust calculation
1
modal contribution multiplier calculated based on the fixed mode shape that has
never been changed throughout
(X,k)
Γ = (X) with the calculation of free vibration at each kth thrust step for the earthquake direction
1
modal contribution multiplier calculated based on refreshed variable mode shape
(X,k)
Γ = (X) in the direction of the earthquake and the kth thrust step for the first vibration mode
1
calculated approximate modal contribution multiplier
ξ1= Modal damping ratio of the first vibration mode
μ( ,)= According to the Yield Strength Reduction Coefficient and the first natural vibration period
RT
y1
calculated ductility demand
(k)
ω = The first from the calculation of the free vibration regenerated at each k'th thrust step
1
Mode natural angular frequency [rad/s]
5B.1. OBTAINING MODAL CAPACITY DIALOGUE BY FIXED SINGLE-MODE

PROPULSION METHOD
5B.1.1 – In the fixed single-mode propulsion method, the earthquake load increases affecting the
floors in the kth thrust step in line with the earthquake considered (X) are expressed in terms of
the ply modal effective masses calculated according to the constant mode shape determined in the
first step after non-earthquake loading and never changed during the thrust calculation:
(X,k) (X,1) (X,k) (X,k) (X,1) (X,k) (X,k) (X,1) (X,k)
∆f ix1 =m ix1 ∆a 1 ; ∆f iy1 =m iy1 ∆a 1 ; ∆f θ=m i1

∆a (5B.1)
i1 θ 1
(X,1) (X,1) (X,1)
where m ix1 , m iy1 and m i1θ are equivalent in Annex 4B. ( 4B.2) of the first of the effective masses
of the coats given by
The first mode equivalents calculated in step (k =1) are (n =1):
(X,1) (1) (X,1) (X,1) (1) (X,1) (X,1) (1) (X,1)
m = ΦΓ
m; m = ΦΓ m ; m =m ΦΓ (5B.2)
ix1 i ix1 1 iy1 i iy1 1 iθ1 iθ θ 1
i1
(X,1)
In these correlations, Γ for the (X) earthquake direction considered and the first vibration mode
1
In the first thrust step, Denk.( 4B.1) is the modal contribution multiplier.
5B.1.2 – The unknown magnitude in step k defined between two consecutive joint formations is the
equivalent of the modal single-degree of freedom system of the first mode. 5B.1)
(X,k)
The modal pseudo-acceleration increment is ∆ 1 to 1. This size is calculated from the yield
condition defined in 5.3.1 of a new plastic joint formed at the end of each step. Step k by adding
the resulting modal pseudo-acceleration increase to the pseudo-acceleration value found at the
end of the previous step
(X,k) (X,k)
The cumulative modal pseudo-acceleration at the end is achieved at a1 . In the traditional push
calculation a1 , (X)
(X,k)
Equivalent to the type for the base shear force Vtx1 in the direction of the earthquake.( 5B.3) is
derived from:
(X,k)
V
(x,k) tx1
a=
(5B.3)
1 (X,1)tx1
m
(X,1)
The modal effective mass of the base shear force in this relation m tx1 , in line with the x-axis
Equivalent. (5B.2) All push accounts defined by Mode shape in the first push step in
(X,1)
The layer modal effective masses taken as constant throughout are the sum of m ix1 in all layers.
(X)k
5B.1.3 – Modal displacement of the modal single-degree of freedom system of the first mode d 1,
It can be calculated from the thrust calculation without horizontal displacement obtained in line x
on any ith floor. In the traditional thrust calculation, hill displacement on the Nth floor is used for
this purpose:
(X,k)
(5B.4
)
5B.1.4 – In the traditional thrust calculation, the thrust curve is first drawn as the base shear force
– peak displacement relationship (Figure 5B.1a) and then the coordinates of this curve are
Equivalent.( 5B.3) and Equivalent.( 5B.4) to the modal so-called acceleration of the modal
single-degree of freedom system converted according to
– A modal capacity diagram is obtained as a modal displacement relationship (Figure 5B.1b).
5B.1.5 – In the traditional thrust calculation, modal displacement is equivalent at each step. 5B.4)
to partially eliminate the approximation due to the constant mode shape of the linear system in
the initial step, the displacement increase obtained at any thrust step k can be taken approximately
as the amplitude of the variable mode shape in that step. In this context, Denk.( The relation in
5B.5) is written for the degree of freedom in the direction of x on a typical ith floor:
(k) (X,k) (X,k-1)
Φ≈u −u (5B.5)
ix1 ix1 ix1
In this case the modal displacement is Equivalent.( 5B.4), without dependence on hill
displacement, Denk.( 5B.6) can be obtained as follows:
1st
(X,k) (X,k-1)
d1= d1 + (5B.6)
(X,k)
Γ
1
(X,k)
Here Γ , Denk.( Equivalent, using the approximate mode shape defined in 5B.5( 4B.1)
1
is the approximate modal contribution multiplier calculated at each push step.
Figure 5B.1
5B.1.6 – In buildings where the second order effects of vertical loads on the deformed carrier
system may be significant, the Variable Mode Thrust Method given in 5B.2 should be used
because the Fixed Mode Thrust Method is based on the base cutting force and since these effects
cannot be considered in a harmonious manner.
5B.2. OBTAINING MODAL CAPACITY DIALOGUE BY VARIABLE SINGLE-MODE

PROPULSION
5B.2.1 – In the variable single-mode propulsion method, the earthquake load increases acting on
the floors in line with the (X) earthquake considered are expressed in terms of the ply modal
effective masses calculated according to the variable mode shape obtained from the free vibration
calculation renewed at each k'th thrust step after non-earthquake loading:
(X,k) (X,k) (X,k) (X,k) (X,k) (X,k) (X,k) (X,k) (X,k)
∆f ix1 =m ix1 ∆a 1; ∆f iy1 =m iy1 ∆a 1 ; ∆f θ=m i1 ∆a (5B.7)

i1 θ 1
(X,k) (X,k) (X,k)
where mix1, m iy1 and mi1θ are regenerated free vibration at each kth thrust step
Depending on the mode shape, the equivalent in ANNEX 4B ( 4B.2) are the first mode equivalents
of the effective masses calculated by (n=1):
(X,k) (k) (X,k) (X,k) (k) (X,k) (X,k) (k) (X,k)
m; m = ΦΓ m ; m =m ΦΓ (5B.8)
m = ΦΓ
ix1 i ix1 1 iy1 i iy1 1 iθ1 iθ θ 1
i1
(X,k)
In these correlations, Γ in each k-th thrust step for the (X) earthquake direction taken into
consideration
1Equivalent, depending on the renewed first vibration mode.( 4B.1) is the

modal contribution multiplier.
5B.2.2 – At each step of the k, the above Equivalent.( 5B.7) is equivalent to the floor displacement
increases that occur under the influence of the floor earthquake load increments given in ( 5B.9)
Is:
(X,k) (k) (X,k) (X,k) (X,k) (k) (X,k) (X,k) (X,k) (k) (X,k) (X,k)
∆u = ΦΓ ∆ d ; ∆u = ΦΓ ∆ d ; ∆u = ΦΓ ∆ d (5B.9)
ix1 ix1 1 1 iy1 iy1 1 1 iθ1 i1 11
θ
(X,k)
5B.2.3 – Equivalent. (5B.7) The modal pseudo-acceleration increment of the kth thrust step in
∆a1
(X,k)
Equivalent. (5B.9) The step-by-step linear relationship between modal displacement increase ∆d1
in Equivalent.( 5B.10) is given:
(X,k) (k) 2 (X,k)
∆a =() d (5B.10)
ω∆
1 11
(k)
Here the ωcarrier system is calculated from the free vibration calculation that is renewed at each k's
thrust step.
1
The first mode found is the natural angular frequency.
5B.2.4 – Equivalence of the modal single-degree of freedom system as the unknown magnitude in
step k defined between two consecutive joint formations. The first fashion in 5B.7)
(X,k)
The modal pseudo-acceleration increase of ∆ can be taken to1 (force-based calculation). But
instead, in the sense that it enables the direct calculation of internal forces, Denk.( modal in 5B.9)
(X,k)
displacement increase ∆d1 should be preferred to be taken as unknown magnitude (calculation based
on displacement). In both cases, the modal increment taken as unknown shall be calculated from
the yield condition defined in 5.3.1 of the new plastic joint formed at the end of step k.
After calculating the modal increment taken as unknown, the other modal increment is also
equivalent.( 5B.10).
5B.2.5 – The modal pseudo-acceleration and modal displacement increments obtained in step k
are added together with the values obtained at the end of the previous step and the cumulative
values of these magnitudes are equivalent to ( 5B.11) is obtained as follows:
(X,k+1) (X,k) (X,k)
a = a +∆ a
1 11
(5B.11)
(X,k+1) (X,k) (X,k)
d = d +∆ d
1 11
Thus, in the variable load or displacement distributed thrust method, the modal capacity diagram
is obtained directly without the need to plot the thrust curve. In this diagram, the step-by-step
linear behavior in the kth thrust step between two consecutive joint formations represents
(k) 2
The slope of the correct part, Equivalent.( 5B.10) is equal to (ω ) (Figure 5B.2a).
1
5B.2.6 - Free vibration of the geometric rigidity matrix representing the second order effects
(k) 2
If it is taken into account in the account, Denk.( In 5B.10 (ω ), i.e. modal
The slope of the capacity diagram 1

can be obtained as negative values in forward thrust steps where plastic deformations increase in
the carrier system (Figure 5B.2b).
Figure 5B.2
5B.3. OBTAINING THE EARTHQUAKE'S MOTOL DISPLACEMENT REQUEST AS

NONLINEAR SPECTRAL RELOCATION
The acquisition of the modal displacement demand of the earthquake corresponds to the calculation
of the greatest displacement of the modal single-degree of freedom system represented by the modal
capacity diagram under the influence of the given earthquake.
5B.3.1 – The greatest displacement in a modal single-degree of freedom system is defined as

nonlinear spectral displacement:
X)
d( = ST() (5B.12)
1,max di 1
(X) is the
where largest displacement of a modal single-degree of freedom system, ST1
d ), the
1,max di ( first natural vibration period of the carrier system corresponds to T 1 and
is equivalent to ( 5B.13) shows the nonlinear spectral displacement defined by .
()T=CS() (5B.13)
ST.
di1 Rde1
Here too(), Denk.( 2.5) is the elastic design spectral displacement defined by
ST.
C
R 1
Equivalent. (5B.14) shows the spectral displacement rate as defined in .
5B.3.2 – Equivalent. (5B.13) The spectral displacement rate in CR, Equivalent.( 5B.14)
defined:
(5B.14)
Here, R y, which indicates the yield strength reduction coefficient, differs from the definition given
in Annex 4A for the design approach by strength, not a size defined depending on the predicted
ductility capacity, but a size directly dependent on the yield strength obtained from the thrust
calculation:
(5B.15)
In this correlation, the elastic strength demand fe and ST1 and the elastic spectral acceleration
corresponding to it,
()
ae f and denote yield strength and the pseudo-acceleration of the flow
that opposes it
a
y y1
(Figure 5B.4).
5B.3.3 – Equivalent. (5B.14) μ in RT
,), yield strength and natural vibration period
for ductility, which is expressed as

y1 is the demand
dependent. For the calculation of this magnitude, the equivalent in Annex 4A is ( 4A.2) is
written in reverse to obtain the following relations:
(a) The ductility demand of the earthquake μ (RT
,), whose rigidity is not much in accordance with the equal

displacement rule
y1
For carrier systems, the Yield Strength Reduction Coefficient is taken equal to R y:
y1
= Ry1 TB (5B.16a)
( ,) T>
μ RT
(b) For carrier systems with high rigidity, the equivalent shall be Equivalent from 4A.2b)(
5B.16b)
Is:
T
( ,) =1+ (R −1) B T 1 ≤ TB (5B.16b)
μ RT
y1 y
T
1
5B.3.4 – Equivalent. (5B.14) The spectral displacement rate

defined in C R, Equivalent.( 5B.16) using Denk.( 5B.17) is
expressed as follows:
C = 1 TT (5B.17a)
>
R 1B
T
B
1+ (R −1)
1 TT (5B.17b)
≤
1B
5B.3.5 – The coordinates of the first (dominant)

vibration mode in Figure 5B.3 and Figure 5B.4 and the
coordinates are modal displacement – modal pseudo-
acceleration (,, with a diagram of modal capacity )
)
11
spectral displacement–linear earthquake spectrum with spectral acceleration ( , ) together
SS
de ae
Drawn.
(a) The situation shown in Figure 5B.3 shall be 5B.13) together with Denk.( 5B.17a)
against its implementation. In this case, without any operation on the modal capacity diagram,
only the TTB or the natural vibration period in the first thrust step
>
1
(1) 2 2
(ω) It is sufficient to show that the condition of ≤ ω is met.

1B
(b) On the other hand, the situation shown in Figure 5B.4 is the equivalent ( 5B.13) together with
Denk.( 5B.17b). In this case, the spectral displacement rate CR will be calculated by sequential
approximation. For this purpose, the modal capacity diagram, as shown in Figure 5B.4a, is first
taken CR = 1 and converted into a two-line elasto-plastic diagram. The transformation process is
based on the equality of the fields below the diagrams. Approximate found in this way
Equivalence using the so-called acceleration of flow.( 5B.15) to R and accordingly
a
y1 y
Equivalent.
(5B.17b)
from and
Denk.( ST
from 5B.13)
()calculated. Accordingly, elasto-plastic

C
R di1
the diagram is recreated (Figure 5B.4b) and the same operations are performed based on the re-
found
a
y1
Repeated. The sequential approach is terminated in the step where the results are close enough.
5B.3.6 – Equivalence of the modal displacement demand of the earthquake ( 5B.13) and
Equivalent.( 5B.17) using Denk.( 5B.12) is not valid in the cases described in (a) and (b) below.
(a) Where the distance of the nearest fault to the building is less than 15 km, the calculation shall
be made in the time definition field according to 5B.4 using near-field earthquake records
selectively scaled to 2.5.
(b) If the post-yielding slopes of the modal capacity diagram are negative due to second-order
effects, the calculation shall be made in the time definition field according to 5B.4 using
earthquake records selectively scaled according to 2.5.
S ()
T
ae 1
(X)
a 1& S
S ()
T
ae 1
Figure
5B.4
5B.4.
OBTAINING
THE
EARTHQUAKE'S MODAL RELOCATION REQUEST FROM A NONLINEAR

CALCULATION IN THE TIME DEFINITION AREA
5B.4.1 – The modal displacement demand of the earthquake, as the largest displacement of the
modal single-degree of freedom system, can also be obtained from the nonlinear calculation to be
made in the time definition area. An appropriate model of hysteretic behavior to be selected
according to 5.3.1.7 is adapted to the modal capacity diagram obtained in 5B.1 or 5B.2 and
simulated. 5B.18) given incrementally
the equation of motion is solved.
(X) (X) (X) (X)
∆d ()t + 2ξω ∆ d ()t +∆ a ()t =−∆ u() t (5B.18 )

11111 g
The displacements of the carrier system and, accordingly, their deformation and internal forces, are
determined to be equivalent ( 5B.18) by taking the maximum value of the modal displacement
obtained from the solution of the equation of motion in Equivalent.( 5B.4) or Equivalent.( 5B.9)
with Equivalent( 5B.11).
5B.4.2 – In line with the earthquake under consideration, at least eleven earthquake ground motion
shall be used in the nonlinear calculation in the time definition area. The selection of earthquake
records to be used is defined in 2.5. 2.5.3 will be used to convert records. Modal displacement will
be calculated as the average of the maximum absolute values of the results obtained from each of
the eleven analyzes performed.
ANNEX 5C – PERMISSIBLE DEFORMATION LIMITS FOR STEEL ELEMENTS
5C.0. ICONS
2
Abec = Tapestry protected steel cross section area [m 2] Ac = Cross cross section area [m ] d =
Beam cross-sectional height [m]

Column cross-sectional height [m]
d =
c 82
E = Modulus of structural steel elasticity, E = 2×10 [kN/m ]

2
Fye = Expected yield stress of structural steel [kN/m ] I b = Beam section inertia moment [m 4] Ik
4
= Column sectional moment of inertia [m ]
Joint zone rotational rigidity with face plate and head plate [kNm/rad]
K =
o = b = Beam length [m] bec = Buckling steel cross length [m] k = Column length [m] c
Cross length [m]
Mpe = Plastic torque capacity [kNm] P = Axial load on the steel section in the case of maximum
plastic rotation [kN] Pc = Expected axial compressive strength of the steel element [kN]
= Axial tensile and compressive strength of the buckling prevented steel cross [kN]
P
bec Pye= Expected axial yield force of the steel element [kN]
tp = Shear region thickness [m] θ = Displaced axis rotation [rad] θ y = Yield rotation [rad]
3
Vye= Expected shear force capacity [kN] Wp = Plastic strength moment [m ] EIbn = Beam rigidity
2
for joint-joints with butt plate and header plate [kNm ] ∆c = Yield displacement against the axial
compressive strength of the steel element [m] ∆T = Yield displacement against the axial tensile
strength of the steel element [m] ∆y = Yield displacement of the buckling prevented steel element
[m]
5C.1. DEFORMATION LIMITS OF STEEL DIRT AND COLUMNS
In steel beams and columns (bending), the deformation limits shall be calculated in terms of yield
rotation. In calculating the yield rotations, the connections given below in 5C.1.1 for steel beams
and in 5C.1.2 for steel columns shall be used.
5C.1.1. Calculation of Yield Rotation for Steel Beams
For all section types: y

(5C.1)
WF b b
5C.1.2. Calculation of Yield Rotation for Steel Columns
For all section types: y

WF
P  (5C.2)
P
k ⎢ ye ⎥
The permissible deformation limits for steel beams in Table 5C.1 and for steel columns in
Table 5C.2 are given as plastic rotation for different performance levels. The level of ductility in
steel beams and columns shall be determined taking into account the cross-sectional conditions
Morphing Limits
Beam (Bending)
. .SH KH SEE
High level of ductility (see Table 9.3) y 1θ y 6θ y 9θ
Limited Ductility Level (See Table 9.3) y 0.25θ y 3θ y 4θ
defined in Table 9.3. / c > 0.50
Nonlinear deformation in PPolan columns

will not be allowed.
Table 5C.1. Plastic Rotation Limits in Steel Beams
Table 5C.2. Plastic Rotation Limits in Steel Columns

5C.2. DEFORMATION LIMITS OF COLUMN – DIRT JUNCTION ZONES OF MOMENTUM
TRANSFERRING FRAMES
In the case of momentum-transferring steel frame systems, the plastic rotation limits given in Table 5C.3 for
the column-beam junction zones shall be taken into account. Full-strength bolted butt-plate joints and bolted
header plate joints will be modeled using rotational springs that express nodal rigidity. The swivel spring
rigidity will be calculated according to 5C.2.1, and the beam rigidity according to 5C.2.2:
Plastic Rotation Limits [Rad]
Column-Beam Joining Type
. .SH KH SEE
Full Strength Bolt Butt Plate Joint
Leakage of the forehead plate 0.01 0.025 0.04
The Facility condition of leakage of bolts 0.008 0.012 0.018
Bolt Header Plate Joint
Headboard net cross section or bolts flow in the cut 0.008 0.02 0.03
Breakage of the welding of the header plate or the plate 0.003 0.008 0.012
0.026 through 0.0323 through 0.043 –
Fully penetrating blunt-welded coupling 0.00045d 0.00060d
0.00063d
0.025 – 0.0525 – 0.070 –
Welded attenuated beam cross-section joint 0.00015d 0.00023d 0.00030d
Table 5C.3. Column Beam Junction Zone Plastic Rotation Limits in Steel Frames Transferring
Torque
5C.2.1. Rotational Rigidity of Butt Plate and Header Plate Joints
M
pe
Rotational rigidity: Ko = (5C.3)
0.005
5C.2.2. Joining Systems with Butt Plate and Head Plate Beam Rigidity
New beam rigidity: EI = (5C.4)

bn
31
5C.3. DEFORMATION OF CENTRAL DIAGONAL STEEL FRAMES

LIMITS
The deformation limits for steel crosses in central diagonal steel frame systems are given in Table 5C.4
in terms of axial plastic deformations. The yield deformation of the cross elements under axial pressure
force is given in 5C.3.1 and the flow deformation under axial tensile force is given in 5C.3.2. In steel
crosses with which buckling is prevented, the rigidity of the axial element shall be achieved by the serial
connection of the core element that is allowed to flow and the transfer elements that are not allowed to flow.
In the calculation of rigidity, the column-beam zone with the flag boards to which the crosses prevented
from buckling are connected can be considered fully rigid. The flow deformation of steel diagonals with no
auscession is given in 5C.3.3 in the light of the information given above.
5C.3.1. Yield Morphosis Under Axial Pressure Force
P
Cc
Yield deformation: ∆= (5C.5)

c
EA c
5C.3.2. Yield Morphosis Under Axial Tensile Force
P
ye c
Yield deformation: ∆= (5C.6)

T
EA
c
5C.3.3. Flow Morphing of Buckling Prevented Steel Cross
y
Yield deformation:
(5C.7)
Element Type Axial Plastic Deformation L
. .SH KH SEE
Cross Elements Under Pressure (Except Excenter Crosses)
Delicate Sections y 4.2Kl E r F≥
W, I, 2L, 2C sections: in-plane buckling c0.5 ∆ c7∆ c10 ∆
2L, 2C sections: out-of-plane buckling c0.5 ∆ c6 ∆ c9 ∆
Bec HSS, pipe, box sections c0.5 ∆ c6 ∆ c9 ∆
L-section c0.5 ∆ c9 ∆ c12 ∆

Table 5C.4
Tough Sections y 2.1Kl E r F≤
HD I, 2L, 2C sections: in-plane buckling c0.5 ∆ c6∆ c8∆
2L, 2C sections: out-of-plane buckling c0.5 ∆ c5 ∆ c7 ∆
HSS, pipe, box sections c0.5 ∆ 5∆

c 7∆
c
Cross Elements Under Pull (Except Excenter Crosses)

W section T0.5 ∆ T 10 ∆ T 13 ∆
2L section T0.5 ∆ T9∆ T12 ∆
HSS section T0.5 ∆ T8 ∆ T11 ∆
Pipe section T0.5 ∆ T7∆ T9∆

L-section T0.5 ∆ T8∆ T10 ∆
Beams and columns under the pull T0.5 ∆ T6 ∆ T7 ∆
Wrinkle-resistant steel crosses y1 ∆ y 10 ∆ y 13.3 ∆
Morphing Boundaries of Central Cross Steel Frames
5C.4. DEFORMATION LIMITS OF OUTSTREAM STEEL FRAMES AND STEEL BOND DIRTY
SYSTEMS
The deformation limits for the bond beams in outline crossed steel frame systems and in systems with
reinforced concrete curtains with steel bond beams are given in Table 5C.5 in the plastic rotation type. In
systems with reinforced concrete curtain with steel bond beams, the rigidity of the steel bond beams will
be taken as 60% of the total bond beam rigidity.
Table 5C.5. Element Type Plastic Rotation Limits [rad] Plastic Rotation
Limits in Outer .SH KH SEE Center Cross
Steel Frames and Steel Bond Beam Steel Bond
Beam Systems 16 M e V≤ .
pe ye 0.005 0.12 0.15
pe ye 26 M e V≥ . It is identical to the steel beams in Table
5C.1.
pe pe ye ye 1.6 2.6M M eV Linear interpolation will be performed.
V< <
SECTION 6 – DESIGN PRINCIPLES OF NON-STRUCTURAL BUILDING ELEMENTS UNDER
Aie DD-2 earthquake to lay the element or equipment on the first floor under ground
= 6.0.
motion
the largest total acceleration affecting the region to which it is connected
eB = Magnification coefficient applied to element or hardware
Fie = Horizontally acting on the center of gravity of the element or equipment and
equivalent earthquake that can be distributed on the hardware in proportion to its
mass
Load
g = Acceleration of gravity [9.81 m/s2]
hi = height of the ith floor [m]
x The relevant floor of the upper and lower connection points of the non-structural
y, h =
h element and equipment
height from base [m]
Effective coefficient of rigidity of the element or equipment and/or its
ek =
connection
em = The working mass of the element or hardware [t]
R = Carrier system behavior coefficient
eR = Behavior coefficient defined for element or hardware
SDS = Short period design spectral acceleration coefficient [dimensionless]
eT = The period of natural vibration of the element or equipment [s]
nT = The Facility nth period of natural vibration of the building [s]
The Facility period of natural vibration Prevailing in the direction of the
pT =
earthquake considered in the building [s]
Reduced earthquake in line with the earthquake considered on the first floor of
=
ui the building
Horizontal displacement calculated according to the loads under
Reduced earthquake in line with the earthquake considered on the first floor of
=
in u the building
horizontal displacement of the nth mode calculated under loads
( )X eδ Relating to non-structural element and equipment for typical (X) earthquake
=
direction
effective relative shift
( (X) for the direction of the earthquake, the effective relative floor displacements
)Xδi,max
=
on the first floor of the building
the maximum value in the Coat [m]
ICONS
6.1. GENERAL RULES
6.1.1 – In the event of damage in the earthquake, all kinds of protrusions (such as balconies, parapets,
chimneys, consoles), façade and intermediate partition panels, architectural elements and mechanical and
electrical equipment and their connection to the structure that may damage people or the structural system of
the building or that may prevent the use of the building, connected to the carrier system but working
independently According to the given rules, it is mandatory to make an earthquake calculation. However, it
is not mandatory to make an earthquake calculation for the furniture in the building, the equipment
temporarily in the building that is not connected to the building and the non-structural elements in the
buildings with Earthquake Design Class DTS=4.
6.1.2 – Non-structural elements and equipment shall be permanently connected to the structure and the
fasteners shall be capable of satisfying the equivalent earthquake loads and displacements given in this
Chapter. The additional capacity consisting of frictions shall not be taken into account in the calculation
of the fasteners connecting the hardware to the structure (e.g. welding, bolt, dowel, rivet, etc.) under the
influence of earthquakes . Fasteners must have the strength to ensure uninterrupted transfer of loads from
hardware to construction.
6.1.3 – If the weight of the non-structural element or equipment is greater than 10% of the total weight
of the floor on which it is located, the element or equipment shall be considered part of the building carrier
system. In this case, the rigidity characteristics of the mass of the element or equipment and its connection to
the building will be taken into account in the earthquake calculation of the building carrier system.
6.2. EQUIVALENT EARTHQUAKE LOADS
6.2.1 – The equivalent earthquake load F acting horizontally on the centre of gravity of the element or
equipment and acting on the element or equipment shall be defined by the following correlation:
(6.1)
where m e is the working mass of the element or equipment, Aie DD-2 is the largest
total acceleration affecting the area where the element or equipment on the i floor is
connected to the flooring under earthquake ground motion, B e is the
magnification coefficient applied to the element or equipment, Re is the behavior coefficient defined for the
element or equipment, and I is Table 3.1 shows the coefficient of building importance defined in . The
coefficients Be and R e are given in Table 6.1 for non-structural architectural elements and in Table 6.2
for mechanical and electrical equipment.
6.2.2 – The greatest total acceleration affecting the element or equipment shall be defined as the greatest
value to be obtained from the following calculations:
(a) As a result of the linear earthquake calculation to be made according to 4.7 for the building carrier system,
the absolute acceleration value calculated in the relevant direction at the location of the element or equipment
of any ith floor is Aie Equivalent.( 6.2).
⎛⎞
2
2π
Aie =( / )⎜ ⎟ u (6.2)
RI
⎜⎟
i
⎝p⎠
Here T p is the dominant period of natural vibration in the direction of the earthquake taken into account in
the building.
R is the carrier system behavior coefficient defined in Table 4.1. ui is the horizontal displacement calculated
according to the reduced earthquake loads on the first floor of the building in line with the earthquake taken
into consideration.
(b) For each of the YM vibration mode according to 4.8.1.2, in the calculation made in accordance with
4.8 for the building carrier system, on the first floor of the building, in the location of the element or
equipment, the relevant
The absolute modal fold acceleration calculated in the direction will be taken as the square root of the
sum of the squares of the A's . AienDenk.( 6.3).
⎛ 2π ⎞
2
Aien =( / )⎜ ⎟ uin (6.3)
RI
T
Architectural Element eB eR
Non-structural masonry interior walls and partitions 1.0 1.5
Other non-structural interior walls and partitions 1.0 2.5
Cantilever elements without lateral support or whose lateral support is below the
2.5 2.5
center of gravity (parapets, console inner walls, chimneys, Etc.)
Cantilever elements (parapets, console outer walls, chimneys, etc.) whose lateral
1.0 2.5
support is above the center of gravity.
Exterior walls and connections 1.0 2.5
Facade cladding panels 1.0 1.5
Attics independent of the building system 2.5 3.5
Suspended ceilings 1.0 2.5
Storage cabinets and laboratory equipment 1.0 2.5
Access floors 1.0 1.5
Billboards 2.5 2.5
Other rigid architectural elements 1.0 2.5
Other flexible architectural elements 2.5 2.5
⎝ n ⎠ Here Tn shows the nth natural vibration period of

the building, and u ien shows the horizontal modal displacement calculated according to the reduced
earthquake loads on the first floor of the building in line with the earthquake taken into account .
Table 6.1. Growth and Behavior Coefficients for Architectural Elements
(c) The average of the absolute maximum accelerations calculated for eleven ground motion sets in the
relevant direction at the location of the element or equipment on the first floor of the building, as a
result of the earthquake calculation in the time definition area to be made in accordance with 4.8.3 or 5.8
for the building carrier system;
It
will be defined as A ie.
(d) In special cases where it is considered necessary to take into account the rigidity and masses of the
element or equipment and/or its connections, the floor spectrum shall be derived using the acceleration
function obtained in the time definition field as defined in 6.2.2 (c) at the location of
the element or equipment and shall be assigned tothe natural vibration period of the element
or equipment m
its corresponding spectral accelerationcan be calculated as Aie. Tenatural vibration period is Equivalent.(
6.4).
Te = 2π
(6.4)
e
where k isthe effective coefficient of rigidity of the element or equipment and/or its connection . In this case
Denk.( The Magnification Coefficient defined in 6.1) shall be taken from Be=1.
6.2.3 – Equivalent. The equivalent earthquake load calculated with (6.1), Equivalent.( 6.5) shall not be
taken less than the value given.
F ≥ g 0.3mIS (6.5)
Mechanical or Electrical Equipment eB eR ie eDS
Mechanical systems made of sheet metal, such as ventilation, heating, cooling
2.5 6.0 Table
systems.
6.2. Mechanical systems made of flexible materials such as water heaters, water coolers,
1.0 2.5
heat exchange systems.
Elements such as engines, turbines, pumps, compressors, etc. 1.0 2.5
Elevators and escalator components 1.0 2.5
Generators, Transformers and similar electrical equipment 1.0 2.5
Control panels made of thin sheet, instrument cabinets, connection and replacement
2.5 6.0
boxes, and similar equipment
Communication equipment, computers, devices and control systems 1.0 2.5
Chimneys, towers, cooling and electrical systems built on the roof supported
2.5 3.0
horizontally from under the center of gravity
Chimneys, towers, cooling and electrical systems built on the roof supported
1.0 2.5
horizontally from above the center of gravity
Lighting systems 1.0 1.5
Other mechanical and electrical systems 1.0 1.5
Vibration-isolating equipment 2.5 2.5
Hardware insulated from the inside. 2.5 2.0
Hanging equipment that is carried by vibration insulated suspension systems or
2.5 2.5
insulated from inside.
Pipe and tube systems made of materials with low deformation capacity (E.g.. cast
2.5 3.0
iron, glass, rigid plastic)
Channel distribution systems made of materials with high deformation capacity and
2.5 9.0
connected to each other by welding or solder
Channel distribution systems made of materials with high deformation capacity and
2.5 6.0
connected to each other with substances other than welding or hard soldering
Channel distribution systems made of materials with low deformation capacity
2.5 3.0
(E.g.. cast iron, glass, rigid plastic)
Electrical transmission pipes, water pipes, rigidly connected cable trays 1.0 2.5
Hanging cable trays 2.5 6.0
Augmentation and Behavior Coefficients for Mechanical and Electrical Equipment
6.2.4 – Equivalent earthquake load shall be determined separately in line with two horizontal earthquakes
perpendicular to each other, the fixed load of the element or equipment, the service loads carried by the
element and ( 0.3 m IS
± g)
e DS
magnitude vertical equivalent will be applied in conjunction with earthquake load.
6.2.5 – In the case of elements or equipment attached to the building carrier system with suspension-type
(chain, cable, etc.) connections, instead of the equivalent earthquake loads mentioned above, a load equal to
1.4 times the weight of the element or equipment shall be applied together in horizontal and vertical
directions.
6.3. LIMITATION OF RELOCATIONS
6.3.1 – Where non-structural elements and equipment are connected to two separate points of the same
structure capable of different relocations or to points in two separate carrier systems, the effects of relative
displacements between the connection points during the earthquake shall also be taken into account. The
relative displacements shall be obtained using the results of the method of calculation applicable in
accordance with Chapter 4 or Chapter 5.
6.3.2 – Effective relative floor deflection for non-structural elements and equipment for the direction of a
X)
typical (X) earthquake δ ( Equivalent.( 6.6).
e
X ( i,max
X
δ
(
δ ≤ h − h ) ()(6.6 )
e xy
h
i
where hx and hyare the order of the upper and lower connection points of the non-structural element and
hardware.
(X)
represents its height from the floor base concerned, and δi,max/hi indicates the largest rate of relative floor
displacement allowed in 4.9.1.3 according to the method used.
CHAPTER 7 – SPECIAL RULES FOR THE DESIGN OF CAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BUILDING
CARRIER SYSTEMS UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF EARTHQUAKES
7.0. ICONS
In
cA = Gross cross-sectional area of the column or curtain end Area
ACh = Gross cross-sectional Area of each curtain without gaps, each curtain part in a
tie-beamed curtain, a slab or each piece of flooring in a hollow slab
Core concrete area within the measure taken out of the outside of the winding
ACk =
reinforcement
e∑ A = Effective cutting area on any floor in line with the earthquake considered
g∑ A = The Facility Sum of the cross-sectional areas of the bearing system elements
operating as curtains in parallel with the earthquake direction considered on any
floor
OsA = Cross-sectional Area of the spiral/winding reinforcement
p∑ A = The sum of the plan areas of all floors of the building
As1 = On one side of the column-beam node, the total area of the tensile reinforcement
placed on top to meet the negative moment of the beam
As2 = On the other side of the column-beam node relative to As1 , the total area of the
pulling reinforcement placed at the bottom to meet the positive moment of the
beam
ifa = Transfer equipment
ASb = Connection equipment
ASd = The total area of each of the cross reinforcement bundles in the tie beam
A.sh = Sum of the projections of all the cross-sectional area values of all the etria arms
and gyrosses in the column or curtain end area along the height corresponding to
the transverse reinforcement spacing s in the direction perpendicular to bk taken
into account
wA = Column section effective body area (except for the area of the column protrusions
perpendicular to the earthquake)
w∑ A = On any floor, column section-enabled body areas Sum of w A's
Wpa a = Total cross-sectional area of vertical punching reinforcements (skirting arms or
= slip wedges) located around the punching circumference Horizontal distance
between the stapling arms and/or chiros in the column or curtain end area
bj = In line with the earthquake under consideration, if the beam attached to the joint
zone is the same width as the column or overflows from both sides of the column,
the column width is twice the smaller of the distances from the vertical middle
axis of the beam to the column edges (it cannot exceed the sum of the width of the
beam and the height of the joint)
dimensional expressions using the following symbols in this section, the forces are in Newton [N], the lengths
2
are in millimeters [mm], and the stresses are in Mega Pascal [MPa] = [N/mm ].
bk = For each of the horizontal directions perpendicular to each other, the cross-sectional size of the core of
the column or curtain end zone (the distance between the outermost transverse reinforcement
axes)
bw = Body width of the beam, body thickness of the curtain
D = Umbilical diameter of the circular column (distance between spiral/winding reinforcement axes)
D = Strength Excess Coefficient
d = Useful height of the beam
E = Earthquake effect = Design compressive strength of concrete
f
cd
fck = Characteristic cylinder compressive strength of concrete
fctd = Design tensile strength of concrete
fyd = Design yield strength of longitudinal reinforcement
fyk = Characteristic yield strength of longitudinal reinforcement
fywd = Design yield strength of transverse reinforcement
fywk = Characteristic yield strength of transverse reinforcement
Hcr = Curtain critical height

Hw = Total curtain height, measured from the top of the foundation or the ground floor covering
h = Cross-sectional size of the column in the direction of the earthquake taken into consideration
hk = Beam height
b = Clamping length given for tensile reinforcement in TS 500

n= Free height of the column between the beams, free opening of the beam between the column or curtain faces w=
Length of the curtain or piece of curtain with a tie beam in the plan
Ma = At the lower end of the free height of the column, the moment (M dt) based on the calculation of the column
cutting force = Vertical loads multiplied by the load coefficients in the base section of the curtain and the
moment calculated under the common effect of earthquake loads Mpa = At the lower end of the free height
of the column f ck, fyk and the increase in strength of steel is taken into consideration The moment capacity
calculated by taking M pi = The positive or negative moment capacity calculated by taking into account the
increase in strength of f ck, f yk and steel on the column face at the left end of the beam i M pj = The
right end of the beam is on the column face at j f ck , fyk and the strength of the steel ∑ the negative or
positive torque capacity calculated by taking into account the increase Mp = The sum of the torque capacity
of the beams joining to the nodal point corresponding to the rotation of the node in the same direction
MPu = At the upper end of the free height of the fCk , fyk and increase in strength of
column steel
torque capacity calculated by taking into account
At the base section of the
Pt(M ) = Considering the strength increase of fCk, fyk and steel
curtain
calculated torque capacity
At the lower end of the free height of the column or curtain a
Ram = fC n According to
D fYd
d
calculated carrying power moment
The left end of the beam is on the column or a
Calculated according
MRi = curtain face at i fCD n
to fYd
d
positive or negative conveying power moment
The right end of the beam is on the column or a
Calculated according
MRj = curtain face at j fcd n
to fYd
d
negative or positive conveying power moment
Rt(M ) At the base section of the f a Carrying power moment calculated according to
= curtain c n fYd
d d
a
Mrü = At the upper end of the free height of the column or curtain fC n According
D to fYd
d
calculated carrying power moment
mü At the upper end of the free height of the column, in the calculation of the column
=
üü cutting force
the underlying moment
Nd = Vertical loads multiplied by load coefficients and the common effect of earthquake loads
axial Force calculated Filed under
Under the joint influence of vertical loads and earthquake loads (moving loads in TS
NDm =
498)
taking into account the moving load reduction coefficients defined for )
the largest of the axial pressure forces calculated
Q = Moving load effect
s = Transverse reinforcement range, spiral/winding reinforcement step
pu = Stapling circumference in flooring
cV = The contribution of concrete to shear force strength
Vd = Vertical loads multiplied by load coefficients and the common effect of earthquake loads
Shear force calculated Filed under
VDy = From vertical loads not multiplied by load coefficients in any cross section of the beam
simple beam cutting force occurring
eV = Column, beam, junction zone and curtain transverse reinforcement calculation
Cutting Force
VHr = In line with the earthquake observed in all columns on the first floor of the building
Sum of the shear forces calculated according to Chapter 4
al
Buildin Wor on the Unde
Vsoot = Equivalent.7.3 also also s Ball node
g k floor, rlying
o
In the columns where the points are provided, in line with the earthquake taken into
account
Sum of the shear forces calculated according to Chapter 4
Varm = Column cutting above and below the node calculated according to Section 4
the smaller of their strength
rV = Shear force strength of column, beam or curtain section
Vt = Total earthquake load affecting the building according to Chapter 4 (base shear force)
Vyi = Simple beam bearing cutting force under vertical loads in earthquake condition
αi = Rate of so/ik calculated on any ith floor
VV
βv = Dynamic magnification coefficient of cutting force in the pitch
φ = Rebar diameter
γ = The horizontal angle of the cross reinforcement bundle used in the bond beam
ρ = Ratio of towing reinforcement at the top or bottom of the beam boring
μ = Coefficient of shear friction
ρ s = Volumetric ratio of spiral reinforcement in the column [ρs = 4A )]

ρ sh = Volumetric ratio of horizontal body reinforcements in the curtain [(ρ sh )min =.0025]
7.1. SCOPE
7.1.1 – The sizing and equipping of the bearing system elements of reinforced concrete buildings under the
influence of earthquakes shall be carried out primarily in accordance with the rules specified in this section,
together with the relevant standards and regulations in force in this regard. The rules regarding the
foundations of reinforced concrete buildings are given in Section 16.
7.1.2 – Horizontal load-bearing systems of reinforced concrete buildings covered by this section may consist
only of frames, only curtains or a combination of frames and curtains.
7.1.3 – Reinforced concrete buildings with a concrete class higher than C80 are excluded from the scope of
this regulation. In addition, steel-reinforced concrete composite columns in which steel profiles are used as
reinforcement in the bearing system elements are outside the scope of this section and are subject to the rules
given in Section 9.
7.2. GENERAL RULES
7.2.1. Classification of Reinforced Concrete Carrier Systems
In terms of their behavior against earthquakes, the horizontal load-bearing systems of reinforced concrete
buildings are divided into three classes defined in 7.2.1.1, 7.2.1.2 , 7.2.1.3.
7.2.1.1 – The reinforced concrete carrier systems specified in (a), (b) and (c) below are defined as High
Ductility Systems:
(a) frame-type carrier systems consisting of columns and beams dimensioned and equipped according to the
rules laid down in 7.3, 7.4 and 7.5;
(b) load-bearing systems consisting of gapless or gapped (bond beam) curtains dimensioned and equipped
in accordance with 7.6;
(c) Curtain-frame carrier systems formed from the combination of the two types of systems in (a) and (b)
above.
7.2.1.2 – The reinforced concrete carrier systems specified in (a), (b) and (c) below are defined as Ductility
Limited Systems:
(a) frame-type carrier systems consisting of columns and beams dimensioned and equipped in accordance
with the rules laid down in 7.7, 7.8 and 7.9;
(b) carrier systems consisting of gapless curtains dimensioned and equipped in accordance with 7.10;
(c) Curtain-frame carrier systems formed from the combination of the two types of systems in (a) and (b)
above.
7.2.1.3 – Ductility Level Mixed Carrier Systems are systems created by using frame carrier systems with
limited ductility level with reinforced concrete curtains with high ductility level.
7.2.1.4 – Conditions for high ductility, limited and mixed-carrier systems are given in 4.3.4.
7.2.2. Related Standards
Bulk reinforced concrete carrier systems within the scope of this Chapter, together with the rules specified in
this Chapter, the calculation rules in Chapters 2, 3, 4 and 5, the loads stipulated in TS 498, TS 500, TS
708 and TS They will be projected using the rules in EN 13670. In special cases where the rules given in
the relevant standards are different, the rules in this section shall be taken as the basis.
7.2.3. Cross-sectional Rigidities to be Used in the Carrier System Calculation
The effective cross-sectional rigidity of the carrier system elements given in 4.5.8 shall be used in the
carrier system calculation.
7.2.4. Method to be Used in Cross-Section Calculations
Within the scope of this section, it is mandatory to use the acceptances given in TS 500, stress distribution
and elasticity module in the reinforced concrete elements in earthquake-resistant sizing and reinforcement
calculations . In cases where concrete grades higher than C50 are used, the stress distribution and elasticity
modulus formed in the concrete shall be used in the calculations of the bending moment of the sections
and the bearing power under axial load as given in TS EN 1992-1.
7.2.5. Material
7.2.5.1 – Concrete with a strength lower than C25 cannot be used in all reinforced concrete buildings to be
constructed within the scope of this Regulation.
7.2.5.2 – In all reinforced concrete buildings to be constructed within the scope of this Regulation, it is
mandatory to use concrete that is qualitatively controlled, maintained and placed with vibrators according to
the definition in TS 500. However, self-settling concrete can also be used.
7.2.5.3 – In reinforced concrete elements to meet the impact of earthquakes;

(a) Concrete grades C25 to C80 shall be used from the concretes given in TS EN 206. If it is necessary to
determine the concrete compressive strength at different ages of 28 days for use for special purposes, TS
EN 206 shall be taken as basis.
(b) B420C and B500C ribbed reinforcement steels given in TS 708 shall be used. In addition to the
conditions given in TS 708, the "tensile strength / yield strength" ratio is less than 1.35
S420 concrete provided that it is ( m/e ) and the equivalent carbon content does not exceed 0.55%
RR <1.35
steel can also be used.
7.2.6. Docking Length of Reinforcements
Unless otherwise specified in this section, the clamping lengths required for reinforced concrete
reinforcement shall be calculated according to the rules given in TS 500.
7.2.7. Welded, Sleeved and Chemical Anchored Attachments and Connections
7.2.7.1 – Overlapping welded attachments of longitudinal reinforcements must be made by certified welders
from the relevant organizations. Blunt resource attachments are not allowed. The carbon equivalent of the
reinforcement steel to be welded shall not exceed the limit value of 0.50% given in TS 500.
7.2.7.2 – The rules given in Annex 8A of Chapter 8 on the fact that welded and sleeved longitudinal
reinforcement inserts have sufficient performance under monotonic and repetitive loads shall be
documented on the basis of international standards and regulations. The characteristic tensile strength of the
annex, found by experiment, shall not be lower than the characteristic rupture strength given in TS 500 ,
taking into account the net cross-sectional area of the added reinforcing rods in the case of sleeved inserts.
7.2.7.3 – Transverse reinforcements shall not be allowed to be welded to longitudinal reinforcements.
7.2.7.4 – Steel window and door frames, dowels, connection plates, plumbing elements, machinery and
equipment are not allowed to be welded to longitudinal and transverse reinforced concrete reinforcements.
7.2.7.5 – Technical regulations such as internationally recognized standards and regulations shall be used in
the design and application of sprout cultivation and reinforcement attachments.
7.2.8. Special Earthquake Attacks and Chiros
The etria used in the columns, column-beam junction zones, curtain end zones and beam wrapping zones of
all reinforced concrete systems with high ductility levels or limited ductility levels will be arranged as
special earthquake etria and chiros will be arranged as special earthquake ciros. The conditions required
to be met by special earthquake skirting and gyros are given in Figure 7.1.
7.2.8.1 – Hooks with 135 degree bends at both ends of special earthquake stages
will be found. In special earthquake chiros, a 90 degree curved hook can be made at one end. In this case, on
one side of the column or curtain, the chiros with hook folds of 135 degrees and 90 degrees will be arranged
in both horizontal and vertical direction. The inner bend diameter of the hooks with 135 degrees of bend shall
be at least 5φ to indicate the transverse reinforcement diameter of the φ.
The end flat length of the hooks shall not be taken smaller than 6φ and 80 mm in ribbed rods from the last
tangent point in the bend (Figure 7.1).
7.2.8.2 – Special earthquake stages shall grip the longitudinal reinforcement from the outside and their hooks
shall be closed around the same longitudinal reinforcement . The diameter and spacing of the special
earthquake spikes shall be the same as the diameter and spacing of the skirts. Chiros will necessarily wrap
longitudinal fittings and external ether at both ends . The skirting and ciros will be firmly attached to the
longitudinal reinforcements so that they do not slip out of place when pouring concrete.
>150mm
he
135Diameter>5 φether
>6φ
Ribbed reinforcement
Figure 7.1
7.3. COLUMNS WITH HIGH DUCTILITY LEVELS
7.3.1. Cross-Section Conditions
7.3.1.1 – The smallest cross-sectional size of rectangular columns shall not be less than 300 mm and the
diameter of circular columns shall not be less than 350 mm.
7.3.1.2 –The gross cross-sectional area of the column, taking into account the moving load reduction
coefficients defined for moving loads in TS 498 Ndm, the vertical loads G and Q and the common effect of
the earthquake effect E are the largest of the axial pressure forces calculated under GQE+
+
shall satisfy the condition AN≥/(0.40 f).
c dm ck
7.3.2. Longitudinal Reinforcement Conditions
7.3.2.1 – The area of longitudinal reinforcement in the columns shall not be less than 1 % of the gross cross
section and not greater than 4 %. Columns thinner than φ14and circular columns shall not be reinforcement
less than 6 pieces.
7.3.2.2 – The total longitudinal reinforcement rate shall not exceed 6% in the case of sections with
overlapping supplements.
7.3.3. Arrangement of Longitudinal Reinforcement
7.3.3.1 – Immersed inserts of column longitudinal reinforcements shall be made in the middle third zone of
the free height of the column. The height of the trapped attachment shall not be less than b. The spacing of
transverse reinforcements to be placed along the superimposed insert shall not be greater than 1/3 of the
smallest size of the column and 150 mm.
7.3.3.2 – In case of change of column cross section between the floors, the slope of the longitudinal
reinforcement relative to the duchess within the column-beam junction zone shall not be greater than 1/6. In
case the section change is larger or in the top floor columns; the longitudinal reinforcement of the lower
column
The clamping length in the beam on the opposite side shall not be shorter than the clamping length given
for the tensile reinforcement in TS 500 1.5b and 40φ. In cases where there is no beam on the opposite side,
clamping will be ensured by folding downwards on the opposite side of the column if necessary. The length
of the 90-degree horizontal hook or the vertical hook curved down will be at least 12φ(Figure 7.2).
7.3.3.3 – The longitudinal distance between sleeved or welded inserts made in side-by-side longitudinal
reinforcements shall not be less than 600 mm.
7.3.4. Transverse Reinforcement Conditions
Unless a more favourable condition is achieved than 7.3.7.6, the conditions for the minimum transverse
reinforcement to be used in the columns are given in 7.3.4.1 for the column winding zones and in 7.3.4.2
for the middle column zone (Figure 7.3). Throughout the entire column, special earthquake trenches and
special earthquake spikes as defined in 7.2.8 will be used.
7.3.4.1 – Special hugging zones shall be established at the lower and upper ends of each column. The length
of each of the winding zones shall not be smaller than 1/6 of the free height of the column, 1.5 times the
maximum cross-sectional size of the column, and 500 mm, to measure the height connected to the column
upwards or downwards starting from the bottom side of the largest beam attached to the column. In cantilever
columns, the wrapping zone will be formed at the lower end of the column and its length will not be taken
smaller than twice the size of the column. The conditions for the transverse reinforcement to be used in the
winding zones are given below in (a) to (d). These reinforcements continue inside the foundation for a height
not less than the minimum size of the column
will be made. However, in the columns that are supported on the bowl foundations, the transverse
reinforcement in the winding area will be continued along the height of the bowl.
(a) No transverse reinforcement with diameters smaller than φ8 shall be used in winding zones. In this
region, the spacing of the ether and gyros in the longitudinal direction shall not be smaller than 1/3 of
the smallest section size, greater than 150 mm, six times the diameter of the longitudinal reinforcement, and
not smaller than 50 mm. The horizontal distance between the ether arms and/or the rattles shall not be
greater than 25 times the diameter of a, ether. The step of continuous circular spirals will be no larger than
1/5 of the diameter of the belly and 80 mm. In circular columns, all winding reinforcement shall be
provided by circular transverse reinforcement placed around the perimeter.
(b) In the case of N >0.20 Af (pressure) in the saddled columns
d cck
minimum total transverse reinforcement area, Equivalent( 7.1) shall be calculated in such a way as to ensure
that the conditions given in Section 7.1 are unfavorable. In this calculation, the core size of the column bk will
be considered separately for both directions (Figure 7.3):
Ash ≥0.30 sb k[( A c/ A ck ) −1]( f ck / fywk )
(7.1)
Ash ≥0.075 sb k(f ck / fywk )
(c) Winding in case of N >0.20Af (pressure) in circular reinforced columns
Theminimum volumetric ratio of transverse reinforcement in the d

cck regions is equivalent to ( 7.2) shall be calculated in such a way as to ensure that the conditions in the
present are unfavorable.
0.45[( / ) −1]( / fywk
ρ≥ AA f )
s cck ck
(7.2)
ρ≥0.12( f / f )
s ck ywk
(d) N ≤0.20 In the case of amnesty, in the case of amnesty, the colon is denied in the areas of hugging (
7.1) and
(eu) 1.5
e ≥1.5abc)+≥ ( ++≥ 1.5bb b (ab) 40 e 40 (abc)+≥φ ≥φ 40++≥φ b ≥φ
Equivalent( 7.2)
d cck
At least 2/3 of the transverse reinforcements supplied with shall be used as minimum transverse
reinforcement.
Figure 7.2
7.3.4.2 – The middle region of the colon is the area between the cuddling zones defined at the lower and
upper ends of the colon (Figure 7.3). No transverse reinforcement with a diameter smaller than φ8 shall be
used in the middle column area. The spacing of the ether, gyros or spiral along the column will be taken
no more than half the size of the smallest cross section and no more than 200 mm. The horizontal distance
between the ether arms and/or the straws shall not be more than 25 times the diameter of the etriye a.
7.3.5. Condition that the columns are stronger than the beams
7.3.5.1 – In carrier systems consisting only of frames or a combination of curtains and frames, the sum of the
bearing power moments of the columns joining to each column-beam nodal point shall be at least 20% greater
than the sum of the bearing power moments in the sections of the beams on the column face of the beams
merging at that nodal point (Figure 7.4):
(M ra + M rü ) ≥1.2( M ri + Mrj ) (7.3)
7.3.5.2 – Equivalent. (7.3) shall be applied separately in line with each earthquake and in such a way as to
give unfavorable results for both aspects of the earthquake (Figure 7.4). In the calculation of column bearing
power moments, N d axial which makes these moments the smallest in accordance with the direction of the
earthquake
forces will be considered.
7.3.5.3 – Equivalent. (7.3) The special circumstances relating to the application of are set out below in (a),
(b) and (c):
Figure 7.3
(a) in the case of N≤ 0.10 Amnesty in both columns converting to the nodal point,
d cck
Equivalent. (7.3) The provision of is not mandatory.
(b) In single-storey buildings and at the nodal points where the columns of multi-storey buildings do not
continue to the upper floor, Equivalent.( 7.3) shall not be considered.
(c) If the curtain to which the beams are attached operates like a column in a weak direction, Denk.( 7.3)
shall not be considered.
MM
ra ra
Earthquake
Earthquake
Direction
Direction
M M
rj ri
M
ri
M
rj
M
rü
M
rü
Figure 7.4
7.3.6. Failure to Meet the Condition that the Columns Are Stronger Than the Beams in Some Columns
7.3.6.1 – In the case of carrier systems consisting only of frames or a combination of curtains and frames, on
any first floor of the building in accordance with the earthquake under consideration, Equivalent.( 7.4) at
some nodal points below and/or above the relevant floor, provided that the equivalent is ( 7.3) may not be
provided.
α=V /Vik≥ 0.70 (7.4)
i is
N≤0.10 At the ends of the columns satisfying the condition of amnesty, Equivalent. (7.3) Even if it is not
provided, this
d cck
The columns can also be considered in the calculation of Vis.
7.3.6.2 – Equivalent. (7.4) In the case of the provision of , in the range of 0.70 ≤α ≤1.0, Equivalent. (7.3) of
both
i
The bending moments and shear forces acting on the columns provided at the lower and upper nodal points
will be increased by multiplying them by the ratio (1/ αi). Equivalent. (7.3) The columns that do not provide
shall be equipped under the effects of vertical loads and earthquakes formed in their sections.
7.3.6.3 – Equivalent on any floor ( If 7.4) cannot be achieved, all frames in carrier systems consisting only
of frames or a combination of curtains and frames shall be considered as frames with limited ductility
according to Table 4.1. As stated in 7.2.1.3, frames with limited ductility levels are equal to ductility in
combination with curtains with high ductility level ( 7.5) For the calculation of M and M in the lower
a ü
and/or upper ends of the column,

It is also possible to use it as level mixed systems.
7.3.7. Cutting Safety of Columns
7.3.7 – Cutting force to be taken as the basis for the transverse eV, Equivalent.
.1 reinforcement calculation in the columns (7.5) with
will be calculated.
eV a ü n = ( + M ) /M  (7.5)
Equivalent. (7.3) shall apply to 7.3.7.2 in the event that it is not provided, and 7.3.7.3 shall apply if it is
not provided (Figure 7.5). The sum of the shear force calculated from the earthquake increased by D together
with the vertical loads, Equivalent. If V calculated by (7.5) is less than e, this cutting force shall be used
instead of Ve.
Figure
7.5
7.3.7.2
–
Equivalent. (7.3) The moment M shall be calculated, which is the sum of the torque capacities at the ends
p
of the beams joined to the nodal point where , ∑:
∑M = M+M
p pi pj
(7.6)
In the absence of more precise calculations, 1.4 M and M ≈1.4M can be taken ≈ M. ∑ M
The pi ripj rj p moment shall be distributed to the columns

at the ends of the columns converging to the nodal point in proportion to the moments obtained in
accordance with Chapter 4, and the moment obtained at the lower or upper end of the respective column
as a result of the distribution shall be equivalent to 7.5) shall be considered as M a or M.
Equivalent for both aspects of the earthquake ( 7.6) shall be applied separately and the value of the
largest ∑ Mp obtained in each direction shall be taken as the basis for distribution.
Equivalent. (7.3) Although Denk.( The calculation of M a or Mü in 7.5) may also be made in accordance
with 7.3.7.3, while remaining on the safe side.
7.3.7.3 – Equivalent. (7.3) The moments at the ends of the columns converging to the nodal point where the
(7.5) Ma in and/or
It will be used as M. The torque capacities are not calculated more precisely,
Mpa can be taken as ≈1.4 Mra and M as ≈1.4Mrü. In the calculation of the M pa and Mpu moments,
the axial forces N d that make these moments the largest in accordance with the direction of the earthquake
will be considered.
7.3.7.4 – The moment Ma at the lower end of the columns connected to the foundation shall also be calculated
as the moment capacities according to 7.3.7.3 .
7.3.7.5 – Equivalent. Shear force calculated by (7.5), Ve, vertically multiplied by load coefficients
The shear force calculated under the joint influence of loads and earthquake loads shall not be taken smaller
than V d, and shall also be equivalent to ( 7.7). Equivalent. (7.7) If the second condition in the earthquake
cannot be met, the earthquake calculation will be repeated by increasing the section dimensions as needed.
V≤V
private
V ≤ 0.85Amnesty (7.7)
e wck
7.3.7.6 – In the calculation of column transverse reinforcement according to the cutting force V e, the cutting
of concrete
its contribution to its strength shall be determined according to V c, TS 500. However, the column defined
in 7.3.4.1
in the calculation of the transverse reinforcement in the winding zones, the contribution of the concrete to the
shear strength only if the shear force consisting of earthquake loads is greater than half of the total shear force
in the earthquake state, and also if the N ≤ 0.05Amnesty condition is met,
d cck
Vc = 0 will be taken.
7.3.8. Conditions for Short Columns
Short columns may be formed due to the carrier system or due to the gaps left between the columns in the
filling walls (Figure 7.6). In cases where the formation of short columns cannot be prevented, the shear force
to be taken as the basis for the transverse reinforcement calculation is Equivalent.( 7.5). Equivalent. (7.5)
The bending moments at the lower and upper ends of the short column are M a ≈1.4Mra and
Mü≈1.4 shall be calculated as Mrü, n shall be taken as the free length of the short column, and the calculated
shear force shall be Equivalent.( 7.7). Throughout the entire short column, the minimum transverse
reinforcement and placement requirements defined in 7.3.4.1 for the winding zones of the columns shall
apply. In the case of columns that turn into short columns if the filling walls are completely adjacent to the
columns, the transverse reinforcements will be continued at the entire floor height (Figure 7.6).
Figure 7.6
7.4. DIRT
WITH HIGH
DUCTILITY
7.4.1. Cross-
Section
Conditions
7.4.1.1 – The
conditions for
the cross-
sectional
dimensions of
the beams
forming frames
with the columns
or connecting to
the curtains within their planes are given below in (a) to (d):
(a) The beam body width shall be at least 250 mm. The width of the beam body shall not exceed the sum of
the width of the column or curtain perpendicular to the beam with which the beam joins with the height of
the beam.
(b) The beam height shall not be less than 3 times the thickness of the slab and not less than 300 mm.
Elements that do not meet this requirement will be modeled together with the laying elements in the
analysis, equipped like beams, but will not be considered frame beams. Also, the height of the beam will
not be more than 3.5 times the width of the beam body.
(c) If the beam height is more than 1/4 of the free opening, longitudinal body reinforcement shall be
placed on both sides of the beam body along the beam height. The total area of longitudinal body
reinforcement shall not be less than 30% of the largest of the sum of the upper and lower longitudinal
reinforcement areas in the right or left bearing sections. The diameter of the body reinforcement shall not be
less than 12 mm, and the spacing shall not be more than 300 mm. Horizontal body girders shall be placed at
intervals not exceeding 600 mm along the beam height and 400 mm along the beam axis. Similar to the
clamping of longitudinal reinforcements, for the clamping of body reinforcements, the provisions of 7.4.3.1
Paragraphs (b) and (c) shall apply.
(d) The limitations referred to in (a), (b) and (c) above with regard to beam width and height shall not be
mandatory for reinforced concrete beams attached jointly to columns, for tie beams of curtains with
ligaments (hollows) and for secondary beams attached to frame beams except for column-beam nodal
points.
7.4.1.2 – In the case of carrier system elements to be dimensioned and equipped as beams, the design axial
compressive force must meet the condition N ≤0.10 Amnesty. Otherwise, this
d cck
elements shall be dimensioned and equipped as columns according to 7.3.
7.4.2.1 – Equivalent for the minimum ratio of tensile reinforcements on beam bearings ( 7.8).
ρ≥ 0.8 f ctd / fyd (7.8)
7.4.2.2 – Longitudinal reinforcements shall not be less than 12 mm in diameter. At least two reinforcing rods
at the bottom and top of the beam will be continuously located along the beam opening.
7.4.2.3 – Earthquake Design Class; In carrier systems with DTS =1, 1a and DTS =2, 2a, the beam
The lower reinforcement in the bearing cannot be less than 50% of the upper reinforcement in the same
bearing. However, in other cases, this rate can be reduced to 30%.
7.4.2.4 – The ratio of tensile reinforcement in openings and bearings shall not be more than the maximum
value given in TS 500 and 2%.
7.4.3.1 – The conditions for the installation and clamping of longitudinal reinforcements are given below in
(a), (b)
and (c)
(Figure
7.7):
a
b
(a+b)
>b a >
0.4
φ bb b > 12
o
(a) At least 1/4 of the f
larger of the bearing t
upper reinforcements
h
at both ends of the
e
beam shall be
maintained
a
continuously m
throughout the entire e
beam. The rest of the a
bearing upper s
reinforcement shall u
be arranged r
according to TS 500, e
leaving no unmet i
moment along the s
beam. g
(b) In cases where r
the beams joining e
into the column do a
not continue on the t
other side of the e
column, the upper r
and lower t
reinforcement in the h
beams shall be a
extended to the n
surface of the core 
of the column b
wrapped with ethers a

on the opposite side n
and bent 90 degrees d
5
from the inner side
0
of the saddles. In this
φ
case, the total length
,
of the horizontal part
t
of the longitudinal
h
reinforcement
e
remaining in the
c
column and the
l
vertical part curving
a
at 90 degrees shall
m
not be less than the
p
flat clamping length
i
b prescribed in TS n
500. g
the vertical part shall o
not be less than 12φ. f
In curtains and t
columns where the h
flat clamping length e
longitudinal
reinforcement can
be achieved straight
without a 90 degree
hook.
(c) In the case of the
joining of beams
from both sides to
the columns, the
beam underfitting
shall be
From the reason of

the column, not less
than 50φ, the
clamping length
given in TS 500 will
be extended by b.
In the absence of this
possibility, such as
the difference in
height in the beams,
clamping shall be
carried out in
accordance with
paragraph (b) above
of the
it will be done in the
form defined for
cases where it does
not continue on the
face.
7.4.3.2 – The conditions for the addition of longitudinal reinforcements are given below in (a) and
(b):
(a) No overlay shall be made in critical areas where the reinforcement is likely to reach its yield
state, such as the girder winding zones described in 7.4.4., the column-beam junction zones and the
sub-reinforcement zones in the middle of the opening. Where overlay inserts are to be made outside
these zones, special earthquake skirmishes as defined in 7.2.8 shall be used throughout the annex.
The spacing of these spacing shall not exceed 1/4 of the beam height and 100 mm. Special
earthquake stages are used in the annexes of the upper mounting reinforcement outside the opening
winding zones
no need.
(b) Sleeve inserts or overlapping weld inserts shall be applied in a section but by skipping one
reinforcement and the longitudinal distance between the centres of the two adjacent inserts shall not
be less than 600 mm.
In beam bearings, the zone twice the length of the beam from the side of the column is defined as
the Winder Zone. Special earthquake syllings described in 7.2.8 will be used throughout this region.
Transverse reinforcement with diameter less than φ8 in winding zones
shall not be used and the distance of the first ether to the face of the column shall be no more than
50 mm. Unless a more unfavorable value is obtained from 7.4.5.3, the spacing spacing shall not
exceed 1/4 of the beam effective height, eight times the diameter of the smallest longitudinal
reinforcement and 150 mm (Figure 7.8). Outside the winding zone, the transverse reinforcement
conditions given in TS 500 shall be complied with. The skirting arms spacing in the direction
perpendicular to the beam axis shall not exceed 350 mm.
7.4.5. Cutting safety of beams
7.4.5.1 – Shear force to be calculated on the calculation of transverse reinforcement in beams, Ve,
from the left side of the earthquake
separately and in such a way as to give an unfavorable result for the cases of right-to-left or right-
to-left effect, Denk.( 7.9) (Figure 7.9).
Ve=Vdy ± ( M pi + Mpj) / n (7.9)

The torque capacities at the beam ends can be taken as M ≈1.4 M and M ≈1.4M. Vertical
pi ripj rj
the sum of the D and the increased shear force calculated from the earthquake together with the
loads, is equivalent to ( 7.9) if V is less than e calculated by V, this cutting force shall be used
instead of Ve.
Figure 7.8
7.4.5.2 – Shear force calculated in accordance with 7.4.5.1, Ve, Equivalent.( 7.10)
will provide. Equivalent. (7.10 a.m.) If the second condition in the earthquake cannot be met,
the earthquake calculation will be repeated by increasing the section
dimensions as needed. f
Ve ≤ Vr
(7.10)
V ≤ 0.85bd
e wck
7.4.5.3 – In the calculation of the transverse reinforcement of the beam, the contribution of
concrete to the shear strength shall be determined in accordance with Vc, TS 500. However, the
transverse reinforcement in the rafter winding zones defined in 7.4.4
In the calculation, if the shear force consisting only of earthquake loads is greater than half of the
total shear force in the earthquake state, the contribution of the concrete to the shear strength Vc = 0
shall be taken. In frame beams, the contribution of the pleats to the shear strength shall not be
taken into account.
Figure 7.9
124
7.5. COLUMN JUNCTION ZONES IN FRAME SYSTEMS WITH HIGH DUCTILITY
LEVELS
7.5.1. Surrounded and Unencompassed Combinations
In the framing systems formed by columns and beams with high ductility levels, the column-beam
combinations shall be divided into two classes as defined in (a) and (b) below.
(a) If the beams join the column from four sides and the width of each beam is not less than 3/4 of
the width of the column in which it joins, the column-beam joint shall be defined as the
encompassed joint.
(b) All combinations above which do not satisfy the conditions in (a) shall be defined as
unencompassed combinations.
7.5.2. Cutting Safety of Column-Beam Junction Zones
7.5.2.1 – The shear force in the column-beam junction zones in line with the earthquake under
consideration, Equivalent.( 7.11) (Figure 7.10).
Ve = 1.25 f yk (A s1 + As2 ) −Varm (7.11)
As2 = 0 will be taken for cases where the beam is stuck in the column only on one side and does
not continue on the other side.
Conditions of beleaguered joining:

bw1 and bw2 > 3b/4
b
w2
bw3 and b w4>3h/4 b
w3 (See 7.5.1)
Va C2
A
s1
1.25A f
s1 hr
1.25A f
s2 tbsp
C1
A
s2
Vü
b1 V arm =min(V ; V )
b2
AU
b
(See 7.5.2.1) w1
b
w4
Earthquake
h
Direction
b
b >b and b >b if b = b
w1 w2 j
b < b and b < b b =2min(b ;b ) b < (b w1+h) (b for w1< b w2)
w1w2 j12 j
Figure 7.10
7.5.2.2 – Equivalent in any combination region ( 7.11) is never equivalent in line with the earthquake under
consideration. (7.12) and Equivalent. (7.13) shall not exceed the limits given in (Figure 7.10). If these limits
are exceeded, the earthquake calculation will be repeated by increasing the column and/or beam section
dimensions.
(a) In beleaguered joints: V ≤1.7bh f (7.12)
e jck
(7.13)
(b) In unsurrounded combinations: V ≤1.0bh f
e jck
7.5.2.3 – The minimum transverse reinforcement conditions in the column-beam junction zone are given
below in (a) and (b) (Figure 7.3):
(a) In the case of besieged joints, at least 40 % of the amount of transverse reinforcement calculated for
the winding zone of the lower column shall be used throughout the junction zone. But the diameter of the
transverse reinforcement shall not be less than 8 mm, and its spacing shall not exceed 150 mm.
(b) In the case of unenclosed joints, at least 60 % of the amount of transverse reinforcement calculated
for the winding zone of the lower column shall be used throughout the junction zone. But in this case, the
diameter of the transverse reinforcement will not be taken smaller than 8 mm, and its spacing will not
exceed 100 mm.
7.6. DUCTILITY HIGH CURTAINS
The following cross-sectional conditions shall be provided for curtains other than basement curtains.
7.6.1.1 – The net cross-sectional area of the curtain remaining after the gaps have been removed, taking
into account the movable load reduction coefficients defined for moving loads in TS 498 Ndm, G and Q vertical
loads, and the common effect of the earthquake effect E GQE
It shall satisfy the condition A ≥N/(0.35 f), being the

largest of the axial pressure forces calculated under ++. Vineyard beam
c dm ck
In calculating the values of dm Ac and N in (gap) curtains, the entire section of the curtain with the gap
(curtain
parts).
7.6.1.2 – Curtains are vertical carrier system elements whose ratio of the long edge to the thickness of the
plan is at least six.
(a) Except in the special cases referred to in 7.6.1.3, the curtain thickness in the body area of rectangular
curtains such as U, L and T shall not be less than 1/16 of the floor height and 250 mm.
(b) The thickness of the rectangular curtain or curtain arm shall not be less than 1/30 of the length of the
curtain or curtain arm not held in the lateral direction of the plan.
(c) If the curtain arm is held by a curtain in a lateral direction at both ends, the thickness of the curtain
arm shall not be less than 1/20 of the floor height and 250 mm.
7.6.1.3 – In buildings whose load-bearing system consists of curtains, Equivalent.( 7.14) if both of the
conditions given by the curtain are met, the curtain thickness shall not be less than 1/20 of the height of
the highest floor in the building and 200 mm. In addition, the condition in 7.6.1.1 shall be complied with.
Ag/ Ap 0.002
Σ Σ≥
(7.14)
Vt/ Σ≤Ag 0.5 fctd
Equivalent. (7.14) will be applied at the ground floor level in buildings where there are very rigid reinforced
concrete curtains around the basement floors, and at the level of the foundation upper elevation in other
buildings.
7.6.2. Curtain End Zones and Critical Shutter Height
7.6.2.1 / > 2.0 curtain end zones at both ends of the plan
–H w
(Figure 7.11). End zones can be formed within the thickness of the curtain end zone itself, or they can be
arranged inside another curtain that merges into the curtain.
7.6.2.2 – The critical curtain height from the top of the foundation or from the level at which the length of
the curtain in the plan is reduced by more than 20%, not to exceed 2 , Equivalent.( 7.15) shall be
w
determined in such a way as to ensure that the conditions given in Section 7.15 are unfavorable.
2w ≥ Hcr ≥ max[ w; Hw/6] (7.15)
where H is the pitch height measured from the top of the foundation or from the level at which the gross
w
sectional bending rigidity of the curtain is halved (its length in the plan shrinks by more than 20% or the
section width becomes smaller by more than half). In buildings where there are reinforced concrete
perimeter curtains in the basement floors whose rigidity is very large compared to the upper floors and
where the basement floors work as rigid diaphragms in the horizontal plane, the H and H sizes shall be
w cr
considered upwards from the ground floor slab. Critical in such buildings
the curtain zone will be extended separately downwards along the height of the first basement, at least
below the ground floor.
7.6.2.3 – In rectangular curtains, along the critical curtain height defined in 7.6.2.2
The length of each of the end zones in the plan shall not be less than 20% of the total length of the curtain
in the plan and twice the thickness of the curtain. During the curtain section above the critical curtain height,
the length of each curtain end zone in the plan shall not be less than 10% of the total length of the curtain
in the plan and the curtain thickness (Figure 7.11).
7.6.2.4 – Where the curtain end zones are arranged inside another curtain joining into the curtain, each
curtain end zone shall be extended towards the inside of the curtain body by at least 300 mm to the
thickness of the curtain (Figure 7.11). The cross-sectional area of the curtain end zone shall be arranged in
such a way that it is not less than the area defined in 7.6.2.3 for curtains of rectangular section.
7.6.3. Conditions of Body Reinforcement
7.6.3.1 – The total cross-sectional area of the body reinforcements on both sides of the curtain shall not
be less than 0.0025 of the gross cross-sectional area of the curtain body between the curtain end zones for
each of the longitudinal and transverse reinforcements . If the ≤ is H / 2.0, the curtain body area is the
w w
will be considered as the entire cross-section. The longitudinal and transverse reinforcement spacing in the
curtain body shall not be more than 250 mm (Figure 7.11).
7.6.3.2 – Equivalent in 7.6.1.3 7.14) in buildings where both conditions are met, the total proportion of
longitudinal and transverse body reinforcement may each be reduced to 0.002. But the reinforcement
interval in this case will not exceed 300 mm.
7.6.3.3 – Except for the end zones, the reinforcement nets on both sides of the curtain bodies shall be
mutually connected by at least four special earthquake ciros on each square meter curtain face. However,
during the critical curtain height defined in 7.6.2.2, at least ten special earthquake cigars shall be used on each
square meter curtain face except for the end zones. The diameter of the chiros will be at least as much as
the diameter of the horizontal reinforcement. However, the number of chiros per unit area φ body / φchiros
its diameter can be reduced by increasing the rate.
7.6.4. Arrangement of Body Reinforcements
It will be ensured that the body reinforcements are clamped in the curtain end area. The curtain end zone
will consist of winding reinforcement, closed ether and gyros reinforcements. In addition, horizontal body
reinforcements with 135 degree hooks attached to the longitudinal reinforcement can also be used as
curtain end zone winding reinforcement. A horizontal or vertical miter (90-degree hook) can be made to
ensure that the horizontal body reinforcements are clamped in the curtain end areas. The distance between
the ends or miters of the horizontal body reinforcement and the outer edge of the curtain shall not be
greater than 150 mm. In cases where an overlapping addition to the horizontal body reinforcements is
required in the curtain body, the overlapping inserts shall be made staggered along the length of the curtain
body, the overlap length shall be less than 1.5b
will not be small, 90-degree hooks will be formed at the ends of the horizontal reinforcements in the
appendix with overlays. If hooks are not used at the ends of the horizontal body reinforcements, these
reinforcements shall be arranged in such a way that they remain on the inner side of the longitudinal body
reinforcements, there shall be at least six longitudinal body reinforcements along the overlapped
attachment, and the horizontal distance between the longitudinal body reinforcements in the
superimposed insert zone shall not exceed 200 mm (Figure 7.11).
7.6.5. Reinforcement Conditions in Curtain End Zones
7.6.5.1 – The ratio of the total vertical reinforcement area to the gross cross-section area of the curtain
in each of the curtain end zones along the critical curtain height defined in 7.6.2.2 shall be at least 0.002.
Outside this height, this ratio shall not be less than 0.001. The transition in the geometry and reinforcement
of the curtain end zone will be made gradually over three layers. Also, the amount of longitudinal
reinforcement in each of the curtain end zones shall not be less than 4 14. Curtain end zones
φ
the longitudinal reinforcement ratio shall not exceed 0.03 (0.06 in the overlay zone) (Figure 7.11).
7.6.5.2 – Vertical reinforcements in the curtain end zones shall be wrapped with transverse reinforcements
consisting of etria and/or gyros, as in the case of columns, following the rules in (a), (b) and (c) below.
(a) The transverse reinforcement to be used in the end zones shall not be taken less than 8 mm in
diameter. The horizontal distance between the etria arms and/or chiros shall not be more than 25 times
the diameter of a, etrie, and chiros.
(b) To the curtain end zones along the critical curtain height defined in 7.6.2.2, and in 7.3.4.1 for the
hugging zones of the columns, At least 2/3 of the transverse reinforcement specified by the second
condition of 7.1) shall be placed. In vertical direction, the pitch and/or gyros spacing shall not be greater
than 150 mm or smaller than 50 mm (Figure 7.11). This range shall not be more than 6 times the diameter
of the longitudinal reinforcement and 1/3 of the thickness of the curtain. Transverse reinforcements in the
curtain end zone continue inside the foundation, along a height not less than 300 mm and the thickness of
the curtain
will be made.
(c) In the curtain end areas outside the critical curtain height, the pitch and/or gyros spacing in the vertical
direction shall not be taken greater than the curtain thickness and 200 mm (Figure
7.11).
End zone n end zone O
vertical u
reinforcem t
entEnd s
zone i
vertical min φ8 <250mm d
e
reinforcem
<250mm s < t
ent
200mm s < bw h
5 e
s
h
aa 0
e
m i
m g
<
s
s
<
1
Curtain end zone Curtain
5 zone
end Curtain body >6bww Curtain end zone
0
m
m h
s t
Critical curtain height H
<
b Cr
C
w a u
/ r
2 a < 25φetr t
> a
0 i

u n
.
b
0 o
> 2 b
0 d
Uw y
2
b <150mm  > 0.2 
w Uw

 > b
w Uw
> > 0.1
0 Uw
. Curtain end zone
0 A
r
0
e
1 a
b >
w b
 w

 u
w
m 
w
i
>
n
4
6
Section1a-a b
w
4
φ
Critical curtain
along the height
min 4 14
φ Critical curtain
Curtai
bw
u
> 10 pcs/m special

earthquake chiros 2
> 4 pcs/m special
earthquake chiros 2
>b Curtain end
>300 zone
mm w
bw
Fig.
7.11
7.6.6.
Design
Bending
Momen
ts and
Shear
Forces
7.6.6.1 – In
curtains that
meet the
condition H w/ w
> 2.0, the
flexural
moments based
on the
design shall
be taken as a
constant value
during the
critical
curtain height
determined in
accordance with
7.6.2.2 equal
to the
bending
moment
calculated in
accordance with
Chapter 4 at the
curtain base.
Above the
section where
the critical
curtain height
ends, at the base and top of the curtain according to Chapter 4
a linear moment diagram that is parallel to the line connecting the calculated moments will be applied
(Figure 7.12). In buildings with basements meeting the conditions given in 3.3.1.1, the constant pitch
moment shall be taken into account during the critical curtain height defined in 7.6.2.2.
In all sections of curtains with Hw/ w ≤2.0, the design bending moments shall be taken equal to the bending
moments calculated in accordance with Chapter 4.
7.6.6.2 – In the case of Hw/ w >2.0, the bearing power moments of the curtain sections on each floor shall
be equivalent for the columns in the strong direction of the curtain . 7.3)
must provide. Otherwise, the earthquake calculation will be repeated by increasing the curtain dimensions
and / or reinforcements.
7.6.6.3 – In curtains satisfying the condition H w/ w >2.0, in any section taken into consideration
The design shear force to be taken as the basis for calculating the transverse reinforcement, V , Equivalent.(
e
7.16).
(Mpt) V = β V (7.16)
evd
(Mdt)
The dynamic magnification coefficient of the shear force in this equation β=1.5 will be taken. However
v
In buildings where the entire earthquake load is carried by reinforced concrete curtains, β=1.0 can be
obtained. More
v
where no final calculation is made, (M pt) ≤1.25 (Mr)t is acceptable. Vertical loads
and 1.2 D of the shear force calculated from the earthquake according to Chapter 4 (curtains without gaps),
or
1.4 D (curtains with bond beams) of the value obtained by enlarging with solid, Equivalent. In the case of V
e calculated by (7.16), this cutting force shall be used instead of V e.
The design cutting forces on all sections of curtains with Hw/w ≤2.0 shall be taken equal to the cutting forces
calculated in accordance with Chapter 4.
7.6.7. Cutting Safety of Curtains
7.6.7.1 – Shear strength of curtain sections, Vr , Equivalent.( 7.17).

fck
(Curtains
Vr = A ch fck (0.65 f ctd + ρsh fywd ) (7.17)
without gaps
(Vineyard
) (7.18)
Thedesign shear force V e as defined inbeam perdel 7.6.6.3 is equivalent ( 7.18) shall meet the
conditions set out in: er )
V≤
V
e r
Ve ≤0.85 Ach
Ve ≤0.65 Ach
Otherwise, the curtain transverse reinforcement and/or curtain section dimensions will be increased to
meet these conditions.
7.6.7.2 – The vertical reinforcement in the horizontal construction joints to be made at the level of
connection to the foundation and on the upper floors shall be controlled by the cutting friction method
defined in TS 500, taking into account the cutting force transferred in that section . In the calculation of
shear friction, the entire curtain body and end zone vertical reinforcement with Asand the contribution of
concrete for the roughened surface fctd
will be considered. Equivalent tofriction cutting force V e ( 7.19) shall meet the conditions set out in:
V ≤ fA+μaf
e ctd c syd
(7.19) V ≤ min[0.2 fA; (3.3 + 0.08 f ) A]

e ck c ck c
0.5 (a)
V Eq
c
ur ui
tai va
n le
ba nt
se . If
Design cutting an
Design bending y
Design bending
of
force VEd
th
moment M e
moment M co
moment nd
EdEd
iti
Increased on
Cutting force found in the solution s
moment diagram diagram in
(Curtain system)
H
H w w Solution (7.
Find Cut from 20
Solution Found
)
force diagram ar
moment diagram
(Curtain-frame system) H e
H
cr m
Cr et,
th
V- e
curtai ca
n base lc
(a) Design bending moment M (b) Design bending moment M (c) Design cutting force V
EdEd Ed
ul
(Curtain system) (Curtain-frame system)
ati
on
Fig. 7.12 of
th
The yield stress of the reinforcement in the calculation of the shear friction is f = 500 e
MPa cu
yk tti
will not pass. ng
rei
7.6.8. Terms and Conditions for Bond Beam (Hollow) Curtains nf
or
7.6.8.1 – All the above rules and conditions for curtains also apply to each of the ce
curtain parts that make up the curtains with bond beams. m
en
7.6.8.2 – The rules for the cutting reinforcement of the tie beams are given below:
t of the tie beams shall be made in accordance with 7.4.5. th
n > 2hk (7.20a) e
be
V ≤ 1.5 b DF (7.20b) a
m
d w ctd
wi
(b) Equivalent. In the event that both of the conditions given by (7.20) cannot be dt
met, cross reinforcements shall be used to meet the shear force on the tie beam and h
the bending moment created by it (Figure 7.13). Total rebar space in each cross-rebar (Fi
bundle gu
Equivalent. (7.21 ). re
A sd = Vd/(2 fyd sin γ) (7.21) 7.
13
The cross reinforcement bundles shall have at least four reinforcements and these ).
reinforcements shall be extended to at least 1.5b into the curtain parts. The H
/3
reinforcement bundles shall be wrapped with special earthquake trenches and the 2
diameter of the stages to be used shall not be greater than 8 mm and the spacing H
/
shall not be greater than 8 times the diameter of the cross reinforcement and 100 3
mm. In addition to the cross reinforcements, the minimum amount of ether and w
horizontal reinforcement stipulated in TS 500 shall be placed in the tie beam. In the w
event that the reinforcement bundle is not surrounded by special earthquake skirts,
the spacing of the beam skirting shall not exceed 6 times the diameter of the cross
reinforcement and 150 mm. In addition, horizontal and vertical whirlpools shall be
used at intervals not exceeding 200 mm along the beam height and 200 mm along
The ether and gyros placed in this way are placed in both vertical and horizontal directions, Equivalent.(
7.1).
n
γ
n
<200mm
<200mm
γ
<200mm <200mm
n
Examples of tie beam reinforcement in hollow curtain
Fig. 7.13
7.6.8.3 – In curtains with bond beams, the shear force acting on the bond beams is VdEquivalent.( 7.22).
V≤0.85bd f (7.22)
d wck
7.6.9. Gaps in Curtains
Gaps such as windows and installations in the curtain shall be created in the middle third of the curtain in
the plan, the horizontal dimension of the gap shall not be greater than 20% of the curtain width and the
vertical dimension shall not be greater than 20% of the floor height. On the edges, top and bottom of the
cavity will be installed additional vertical and horizontal reinforcement, which is wrapped in skirts; the
total cross-sectional area of the additional reinforcement placed in these zones in each direction shall not
be less than the total cross-sectional area of the reinforcement not placed in the cavity zone, and the
spacing shall not be greater than 150 mm (Figure 7.14).
Fig. 7.14
7.7. COLUMNS WITH LIMITED DUCTILITY

LEVELS
Taking into account the gross cross-sectional

area of the column, the moving load reduction
coefficients defined for moving loads in TS 498
Ndm, G and Q vertical loads and the common
effect of the earthquake effect E being the
largest of the axial pressure forces calculated
under GQE,
++
Equivalent. (7.23) will satisfy the condition given in . A ≥ N / (0.40fck ) (7.23)

c dm
In addition, the conditions specified in 7.3.1.1 for columns with a high level of ductility in relation to cross-
sectional dimensions shall also apply to columns with limited ductility.
The conditions referred to in 7.3.2 for columns with a high level of ductility with regard to longitudinal
reinforcement shall also apply to columns with limited ductility.
With regard to the arrangement of longitudinal reinforcement, the conditions referred to in 7.3.3 for
columns with a high level of ductility shall also apply to columns with limited ductility.
The requirements for the minimum transverse reinforcement to be used in the columns are given in 7.7.4.1 for
the column winding zones and in 7.7.4.2 for the column middle zone. In all column areas, special earthquake
trenches and special earthquake spikes as defined in 7.2.8 shall be used.
7.7.4.1 – The definition given in 7.3.4.1 for the length of each of the column cuddling zones also applies to
columns with limited ductility. In columns with limited ductility, the transverse reinforcement interval in
the winding area shall not be greater than 1/3 of the smallest cross-sectional size, 8 times the diameter of
the smallest longitudinal reinforcement and 150 mm. Transverse reinforcement Equivalent. (7.1) and
Equivalent. (7.2) shall not be less than half of the values given in .
7.7.4.2 – The definition given in 7.3.4.2 for columns with a high level of ductility in relation to the middle
region of the colon and the minimum transverse reinforcement conditions shall also apply to columns with
limited ductility. The transverse reinforcement in the middle zone of the column shall be determined in
accordance with 7.7.5.3.
7.7.5. Cutting Safety of Columns
7.7.5.1 – In columns with limited ductility, vertical loads and the shear force V d obtained under the joint
effect of earthquake effects determined in Chapter 4 and calculated by increasing the Strength Excess
Coefficient D shall be taken as the basis for the calculation of transverse reinforcement.
7.7.5.2 – Equivalent for columns with high ductility in relation to the upper limit of the shear force( The
condition given in 7.7) shall also apply to columns with limited ductility levels, with V d increased by the
Coefficient of Excess Strength D instead of V.
7.7.5.3 – The contribution of the column transverse reinforcement to the shear strength of the concrete in
the calculation of the shear force defined in 7.7.5.1, V c, according to the vertical loads together with the
earthquake loads
will be determined according to TS 500, taking into account the smallest Nd axial force calculated.
7.7.6. Conditions for Short Columns
With regard to short columns, the conditions referred to in 7.3.8 for columns with a high level of ductility
shall also apply to columns with limited ductility.
7.8. DUCTILITY RESTRICTED DIRT
The conditions referred to in 7.4.1.1 for beams with a high level of ductility with regard to cross-sectional
dimensions shall also apply to beams with limited ductility.
The conditions referred to in 7.4.2 for beams with a high level of ductility with regard to longitudinal
reinforcement shall also apply to beams with limited ductility.
The conditions referred to in 7.4.3 for beams with a high level of ductility with regard to the arrangement of
longitudinal reinforcement shall also apply to beams with limited ductility.

In the case of beam bearings, a zone twice the length of the beam height from the side of the column shall
be defined asthe s treatment zone and special earthquake skirmishes defined in 7.2.8 shall be used
throughout this zone . Transverse reinforcement with a diameter of less than φ8 shall not be used in the
winding zones and the distance of the first skirting to the column face shall be no more than 50 mm. Unless
a more unfavorable value than 7.8.5 is obtained, the spacing spacing shall not exceed 1/4 of the beam height,
8 times the diameter of the smallest longitudinal reinforcement and 200 mm. Outside the winding zone,
the transverse reinforcement conditions given in TS 500 shall be complied with. The skirting arms in the
rafters will not be larger than 350 mm between them.
7.8.5. Safety of Cutting Beams
7.8.5.1 – In the case of beams with limited ductility, vertical loads and the shear force V d obtained under
the joint effect of earthquake effects determined in Chapter 4 and increased by the Strength Excess
Coefficient D shall be taken as the basis for the calculation of transverse reinforcement.
7.8.5.2 – Equivalent for beams with a high level of ductility with respect to the upper limit of the shear force.
(7.10 a.m.) The condition given in shall also apply to beams with limited ductility, with V d increased by the
Coefficient of Excess Strength D instead of V.
7.8.5.3 – The contribution of the beam transverse reinforcement to the shear strength of the concrete in
the calculation according to the shear force defined in 7.8.5.1 shall be determined in accordance with V c,
TS 500. In frame beams, the contribution of the pleats to the shear strength shall not be taken into account.
7.9. COLUMN-DIRT JUNCTION ZONES IN FRAME SYSTEMS WITH LIMITED DUCTILITY LEVEL
The rules and conditions given in 7.5 regarding the column-beam combinations of frame systems consisting of
columns and beams with high ductility levels also apply to column-beam joints of systems with limited
ductility, with the exception of 7.5.2.1 and 7.5.2.2.
7.10. DUCTILITY LEVEL RESTRICTED CURTAINS
The net cross-sectional area of the curtain remaining after the gaps are removed, taking into account the
movable load reduction coefficients defined for moving loads in TS 498 Ndm, the common effect of the vertical
loads G and Q and the earthquake effect E GQ + E
+ to be the largest of the axial pressure forces calculated

under Equivalent.( 7.24).
A ≥ Ndm / (0.35fck ) (7.24)

c
Curtains with limited ductility levels shall be dimensioned and equipped according to the internal forces
consisting of vertical loads and the common effect of the earthquake. All other terms and conditions given
in 7.6, except for the terms and conditions given in 7.6.6, 7.6.8.2 and 7.6.8.3 for curtains with a high level of
ductility, are defined as ductility by taking V e = DV d, with V e being the D Strength Excess Coefficient
instead of Ve.
it also applies to curtains with limited levels.
7.11. FLOORS
7.11.1 – The floors shall have the rigidity and strength to ensure that the earthquake loads acting on the
masses on the floors are safely distributed to the vertical carrier system elements.
7.11.2 – In systems with or without filled cast gear upholstery under the influence of earthquakes, the
plaque thickness shall not be less than 70 mm. However, in order to ensure the safe transfer of earthquake
forces within the plate plane together with the shear forces consisting of vertical loads, shear force
connections will be made between the teeth and the plaque and these connections will be shown by
calculation to be sufficient. For the thickness of other floors, the conditions given in TS 500 apply.
7.11.3 – In-plane axial and shear stresses in the slabs of buildings with and without beams shall be calculated
by accepting the elastic diaphragm. In the flooring of these buildings, the Strength Excess Coefficient D will
be applied to the average in-plane tensile, pressure and shear stresses that occur under the influence of
earthquakes . In the case where the tensile stress value generated within the laying plane is greater than f
ctd
, the in-plane tensile stress value shall not exceed the limit of ρ fyd, with the reinforcement ratio ρ remaining
from what is required for the flexural strength of the slab. In cases where this condition cannot be met, the
lack of reinforcement will be completed with additional in-plane reinforcement. The value of the pressure
stress generated within the floor plane shall not exceed the limit of 0.85fcd. The horizontal shear stresses in
the floor plane are equivalent in both directions. 7.25)
shall not exceed the limit given by .
τr = 0.65 f ctd +ρ fyd (7.25)
In this calculation, ρ is the ratio of floor reinforcement that remains from what is required for flexural
strength and will be placed in the direction parallel to the shear stress. Slip within the plane
tensile 0.65
fck limit.
The in-plane shear stresses that occur between the flooring and the curtain shall not exceed
the strength of the in-plane shear friction in these sections. The strength of the shear friction is equivalent
to the tensile kind, the ratio of laying reinforcement stuck in the curtain and the length of clamping sufficient
and remaining from the one required for the flexural strength is ρ ( 7.26).
τr =μρ fyd (7.26)
The value of μ=1.0 will be used for the coefficient of shear friction in casting joints.
7.11.4 – In buildings with beamed flooring where there are A2 and A3 irregularities, where it must be
shown by calculation that earthquake loads are safely transferred from the floors to the vertical bearing
elements, the conditions given in 7.11.3 for the floors shall be met, and the axial pressure and tensile forces
generated in these beams in the cross-sectional calculation and elaboration of the beams transferring the
earthquake loads from the slab to the curtain will be met by the Strength Excess Coefficient D will be taken
into consideration. The axial pressure stress generated in these beams is greater than 0.5 fck
In such cases, the beam section shall meet the transverse reinforcement conditions given in 7.3.4 for column
wrapping zones. The axial pressure force generated in these beams shall in no case exceed the axial pressure
bearing power of the cross-section, which is calculated as a column.
7.11.5 – In buildings with beamless flooring or in buildings with beamed flooring where it is necessary to
show that the earthquake loads are transferred safely from the floors to the vertical bearing elements, the
earthquake force to be transferred strongly from the flooring to the curtain or curtain arm is the difference
of the DV d curtain cutting forces calculated by taking into account the Excess Strength Coefficient D of the
earthquake effects that occur in the lower and upper sections of the floor level and are calculated by taking into
account the Strength Excess Coefficient D
will be calculated. This force difference is the sum of the axial tensile strengths of the beam or laying
reinforcements that are stuck on both sides in a strong direction to the curtain and that are left over from
what is required for bending strength 2Af and the bending at the junction of the slab and curtain
sa yd
The shear friction generated by the flooring reinforcement remaining from what is necessary for its strength
shall not exceed the sum of the μAmnesty of its strength.
sb yd
There will be no reduction along the length of the curtain in which it is calculated in the amount of axial
reinforcement (transfer reinforcement) stuck in a strong direction to the curtain, and the cutting friction
(connection) reinforcement will provide the conditions for clamping both in the curtain and in the flooring.
In flooring and curtain joints, the cutting friction will be calculated in accordance with TS 500 and the μ≤1.0
value will be used for the friction coefficient. It should be taken into account that the amount of transfer
reinforcement can be reduced by an appropriate amount as it moves away from the curtain face, starting
from the curtain surface where the reinforcement is attached.
Between the transfer elements formed in this way and the slab, the control of the shear friction along the
length of the transfer element will be carried out separately (Figure 7.15).
7.11.6 – Where there are large gaps in the slab, additional horizontal reinforcement shall be placed on both
sides of the gap wrapped in skirting in each direction; the total cross-sectional area of the additional
horizontal reinforcement in these zones shall not be less than the total horizontal reinforcement cross-
sectional area not placed in the gap area, and the spacing shall not be greater than 150 mm. These additional
horizontal reinforcements shall be at least three times the length of the gap in each direction.
A
sa fyd
DV
d,i+1
Transfer
Accessory
A
sa
Connection equipment
A A f
sb sa yd
D Vd,i
Figure 7.15
7.11.7 – Sanding control in beamless slabs and beamless plate foundations can be carried out on the basis
of the slip stress in the vertical direction that occurs under the effects of earthquakes obtained from the
finite element model solution and magnified by the Excess Strength Coefficient D together with vertical
loads. For the shear stress value obtained from the finite element solution, the effective height of the slab
or foundation is equal to d.( 7.27) shall be satisfied.
τ pd = νpd / d ≤ fctd (7.27)
where νis the cutting force calculated in pd unit width. The design value of τpd , column
or it will be calculated at a distance of d / 2 because of the curtain.
7.11.8 – In the laying-column joints in beamless plate systems, the column is folded under the effects of
earthquakes magnified by the Strength Excess Coefficient D with vertical loads
with the γcoefficient of the total bending moment transmitted in the direction considered at the level
The value obtained from

the multiplication f is multiplied by the bending reinforcement and the value obtained by multiplying 1−γ
by the coefficient f is transferred by the stapling (shear) stresses and the shear stresses in the slab change
linearly according to the geometric center of the punching circumference in the direction of loading, and
the stapling circumference (u ) acting on the slab
p
the idealized distribution of the shear stresses can be calculated. The highest shear stress value obtained
from this calculation, as the τ value based on the design, is the stapling of the flooring
Pd
control.
7.11.9 – In the calculation of the total bending moment transferred to the column at the floor level, the
bending moment that balances the bending moments in the upper and lower column sections of the tile-
column junction shall be taken into account γ.
the dimensions of its circumference, in line with the given loading, b1 and
in the direction perpendicular to the loading
to be Denk.( 7.28). γ=0.60 in circular section columns
b
2f
will be used.
(7.28)
7.11.10 – condition is not met and the plaque thickness is not less than 250 mm
Pd
In the case of τ≤f

ctd, the stapling strength of the plate can be increased using reinforcement.
However, in this case the contribution of concrete to the stapling strength will be reduced to 0.5fctd in
terms of shear stress,
the contribution of the reinforcement to the stapling strength shall not be less than , and the stapling of
the reinforced plate shall not be less than
The strength of f ctd shall be
not more than 1.5 f ctd. When a slip wedge is
used as a stapling reinforcement
the contribution of concrete to the stapling strength will be 0.75fctd in terms of shear stress,
its contribution to stapling strength shall not be less than , and the stapling strength of the reinforced
plate shall not be less
f
ctd will be no more than 1.75fctd .
7.11.11 – In the case where the punching reinforcement is used as properly spread placed gyros or coffee
table reinforcements, the stapling strength of the reinforced plate is equivalent in terms of slip stress .(
7.29a), and when slip wedges are used, Denk.( 7.29b ).
τ= 0.5 f +ρ f ≤1.5 f (7.29a)
pr ctd yd ctd
τ= 0.75 f +ρ f ≤1.75f (7.29b)

pr ctd yd ctd
where ρ is the cross-sectional area of the stapling ciros (and/or the coffee table to grip the horizontal
reinforcement) reinforcement in the unit area, the stapling reinforcement shall be at least four pieces/m
2, shall be placed in smooth spread starting at a maximum distance of d / 4 from the side of the column or
2
curtain, the distance between the stapling reinforcements shall not exceed d / (Figure 7.16).
7.11.12 – In the case of the use of closed ether strips or slip wedge rails in at least two directions
perpendicular to each other instead of the smooth spreading placement of the punching reinforcement,
the stapling strength of the reinforced plate is equivalent in terms of slip stress .( 7.30a); when slip
wedges are used, Equivalent.( 7.30b ).
τ=0.5 f +Af / (us) ≤1.5f (7.30a)
pr ctd wp yd p ctd
τ=0.75 f +Af / (us) ≤1.75f (7.30b)

pr ctd wp yd p ctd
where Awp is the total cross-sectional area of the vertical punching reinforcements (etria arms or slip
wedges) located around the stapling perimeter. The punching reinforcements shall be placed at a
maximum distance of d/4 from the side of the column or curtain, and the distance perpendicular to the
surface of the column or curtain between the skirting or sliding wedges shall not exceed d/ 2. The
distance between the etria arms or slip wedges in the direction parallel to the surface of the column or
curtain shall not exceed 2 d (Figure 7.16).
(a) Stapling reinforcement in the form of wedges in the form of staple reinforcement wedges in the form of a sliding coffee table in the
flooring and plate foundation and (b) in the flooring and on the plate foundation
(τ
pd
<f ctd to 2)
Staple without reinforcement
Punching circle with punching
stapling circle
(τ
pd
<f ctd to 2)
<2
(c) Stapling reinforcement

<d/2 in Chiros or Coffee Table Plan
The use of equipment
(τ
pd
<f ctd to 2)
Punching reinforced
punching environment Punching environment without stapling reinforcement
(τ <f ctd to 2)
pd
<2d <2d
(
d
)
S
t
a
p
l
i
n
g d
r /
e 2
i <
d/2 d/2 Plan
Use of closed etria strips in two directions as d/2
Column Section
Flooring
4/2/<d/<d/4
Fig. 7.16
7.11.13 – Stapleing reinforcements, not less than four times the thickness of the slab or raft from
the surface of the column or curtain, the calculated slip stress at a distance d / 2 from the section
where the punching reinforcement ends decreases to fctd / 2
will be continued until the region.
7.11.14 – The reinforcement rules given in Figure 7.17 shall be complied with in the column strips
and middle strips of the beam slabs. There shall be no reduction in the floor bottom reinforcement
along the column strips, and no overlay shall be made in the upper and lower reinforcement of
the flooring in areas where stapling is critical.
7.12. WALL LINES
For horizontal and vertical reinforced concrete lines arranged within the body of elements such as
partition walls, parapets and shield walls in reinforced concrete buildings, the rules given in
Section 11 shall be complied with.
Middle lane
1/2As aperture sub > As aperture bottom
Reinforcement scheme in the columns and middle strips of non-

beamed floors
Fig. 7.17
7.13. RULES REGARDING REINFORCED CONCRETE APPLICATION PROJECT DRAWINGS
7.13.1. General Rules
7.13.1.1 – Concrete strength class and reinforcement class and environmental impact class in
accordance with TS EN 206 shall be specified on all drawing sheets.
7.13.1.2 – Map Spectral Acceleration Coefficients S S and S 1, Local Ground Class (Table 16.1), Building
Use Class (BKS, Table 3.1), Building Importance Coefficient (I, Table 3.1) and Building Height Class
(BYS, Table 3.3) taken into consideration in the design , Earthquake Design Classes (DTS, Table
3.2),
Carrier System Behavior Coefficient (R, Table 4.1) and Strength Excess Coefficient (D, Table 4.1) will
be specified in all formwork plan sheets.
7.13.1.3 – The hook fold details of the special earthquake strives and special earthquake spikes
described in 7.2.8 shall be shown on each of the column, curtain and beam detail sheets (Figure
7.1).
7.13.2. Column and Curtain Details
7.13.2.1 – In column layout plans, the location, diameter and number of vertical reinforcements
within the cross section shall be indicated in detail. The column and curtain sprout reinforcements
coming out of the foundation, the number, diameter and intervals of the transverse reinforcement
associated with them and their expansions will be indicated on the drawing.
7.13.2.2 – Longitudinal sections shall be taken for each column type whose longitudinal and
transverse reinforcements are all the same, and vertical openings of the reinforcements shall be
made. Longitudinal cross section in the columns; will contain additional zones of reinforcement,
trapping lengths.
7.13.2.3 – For each column type, the lengths of the winding zones, the diameters, numbers and
intervals of the transverse reinforcements placed in these zones, in the middle zone of the
column and in the upper column-beam junction zone, and their expansion in the most sectional
section shall be shown on the drawing.
7.13.2.4 – In addition to showing the positions, diameters and numbers of vertical

reinforcements in the curtain body and curtain end areas in the curtain layout plans, vertical
openings of the reinforcements shall be made by taking longitudinal sections for each curtain
type. In the curtain longitudinal section, the critical curtain height will be clearly indicated. The
diameter, number and spacing and expansions of the transverse reinforcements used along this
height and in other curtain cuts will be shown on the drawing.
7.13.3. Beam Details
In the beam detail drawings, the lengths of the winding zones on the beam bearings, the
diameters, numbers and intervals of the transverse reinforcements placed in these zones and
the middle zone of the beam and their expansions will be shown on the drawing, separately for
each beam.
SECTION 8 – SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DESIGN OF PREFABRICATED REINFORCED CONCRETE
BUILDING CARRIER SYSTEMS UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF EARTHQUAKES
8.0. ICONS
D = Excess Strength Coefficient F H = Equivalent earthquake force affecting the articulated

connection = Design strength of concrete
f
cd fyd = Design strength of reinforcing steel (pin) I = Building Importance Coefficient n = Free
opening of the beam M pi = Torque capacity of the left end of the beam
M pj = Torque capacity of the right end of the beam

mk = Active mass for articulated coupling n = Pin number R = Coefficient of Carrier System
Behavior Sae () Horizontal elastic design spectral acceleration corresponding to natural vibration
period T
T = Vr = The cutting force capacity of the pin in the frame plane μ = Coefficient of cutting
friction φ = Pin diameter
8.1. SCOPE
8.1.1 – Specific rules for the design of prefabricated reinforced concrete building carrier systems
under the influence of earthquakes are given in this Chapter.
8.1.2 – Column – Beam connection types and panel – flooring systems used in prefabricated
reinforced concrete buildings and the rules for their design are also within the scope of this
Section.
8.1.3 – The rules for the creation of roof and floor diaphragms in prefabricated reinforced
concrete buildings and the transmission of earthquake effects through diaphragms are described
in this Section.
8.2. GENERAL FEATURES OF PREFABRICATED BUILDINGS
8.2.1. Prefabricated Reinforced Concrete Carrier System Elements and Connections
8.2.1.1 – Buildings with reinforced concrete preproduction are buildings consisting of columns,
beams, curtains, panels, double-walled panels, floors, walls or cell elements produced in
production facilities and combined by transporting to the construction site.
8.2.1.2 – Building elements with reinforced concrete preproduction can be connected to each
other in such a way as to transfer momentum, as well as pinned, welded or different ways in
such a way as not to transfer momentum and they are designed in accordance with these
characteristics.
8.2.1.3 – Connection types other than those described in this section may also be designed and
implemented. However, these different types of connections; Experimental studies to be carried
out in accordance with 1.4 shall certify that it has sufficient rigidity, strength and ductility
properties, that it can form stable cyclic cycles and that it can consume energy equivalent to a
monolithic connection with similar strength.
8.2.2. General Rules for Prefabricated Reinforced Concrete Building Design
8.2.2.1 – In the design of buildings with reinforced concrete preproduction, it is essential to make
calculations and detailing by taking into account the installation and usage stages.
8.2.2.2 – Within the scope of Design According to Strength of buildings with reinforced concrete
preproduction,
(a) For linear earthquake calculation, depending on the connection types and the type of carrier
system, the Carrier System Behavior Coefficients (R), the Strength Excess Coefficients (D) and the
permissible Building Height Classes (BYS) are given in Table 4.1.
(b) For columns, beams, curtains and their casting joints with a high level of ductility, the
conditions laid down in 7.3, 7.4, 7.6 and 7.5 shall be complied with.
(c) For columns, beams, curtains and one casting connection zone thereof with a limited level of
ductility, the conditions laid down in 7.7, 7.8, 7.10 and 7.9 shall be complied with.
(d) The connections of reinforced concrete prefabricated elements are given in 8.3 and 8.4.
8.2.2.3 – According to Table 3.4(a), in prefabricated reinforced concrete buildings with Earthquake
Design Class DTS=1a, DTS=2a and Building Height Class BYS=2, BYS=3;
(a) Under the influence of DD-2 earthquake ground motion, I = 1.5 and the design made with the
DGT calculation principles in Section 4 shall be considered as a preliminary design.
(b) The pre-designed building carrier system is now under the influence of DD-1 earthquake
ground motion, taking into account the appropriate modeling and evaluation rules for various
connection types, in order to achieve the Controlled Damage (SH) performance target defined as
the Advanced Performance Target in Table 3.4(a) and also the Limited Damage (SH) performance
target under the DD-3 earthquake, Section 5 will be evaluated with the Evaluation and Design by
Deformation (SCT) approach and if necessary, the design will be repeated in such a way that the
targeted performance is achieved.
8.2.2.4 – For the preliminary design of buildings with full post-stress preproduction as defined in
8.4.3, the earthquake calculation will be made with the DGT approach according to Section 4 and then
the performance evaluation will be carried out with the SCDT approach according to Section 5.
8.2.3. Material Properties in Prefabricated Buildings
8.2.3.1 – The material specifications given in 7.2.5 shall be complied with.
8.2.3.2 – The lowest concrete quality to be used in prefabricated reinforced concrete buildings
shall be C30.
8.2.3.3 – The cement mortar to be used during the assembly phase and in post-tensioning
applications shall have the ability to gain rapid strength and non-shrinkage. The mortar
compressive strength shall not be smaller than the design compressive strength of the combined
carrier elements.
8.2.3.4 – Prefabricated elements exposed to earthquake loads and their connections must meet
the conditions given in 4.3.3 and 4.3.4 in relation to the selected level of ductility.
8.3. MODULAR CONNECTIONS (MFB)
8.3.1. General Features
8.3.1.1 – Articulated joints are combinations that cannot transfer momentum in the main frame
plane, but can transfer shear force and axial force.
8.3.1.2 – Articulated joints can only be used in multi-storey buildings in combination with concrete
curtains with cast in place or prefabricated gapless and/or bond beams (hollows).
8.3.1.3 – It is not allowed to support horizontally positioned carrier elements in articulated joints
without connection to other horizontally positioned carriers, columns and curtains.
8.3.1.4 – Ignoring the frictional force generated on the bearings on which the horizontally
positioned carriers sit, the assumption of an ideal articulated connection shall be made.
8.3.1.5 – A steel-reinforced elastomer cushion with a thickness of at least 10 mm shall be used in

the connections formed with pins, slots or different forms of which no sheet metal plate is used
in the bearings.
8.3.1.6 – It is mandatory that all pinned joints except for the lover-truss connections are filled with
cement mortar and their free ends are finished with washers and nuts.
8.3.1.7 – Lover-truss joints shall be arranged using a wet or mechanical connection shape with
details capable of cutting to transfer the forces that will occur within the roof plane. The use of
elastomer pillows is not mandatory in lover-scissor connections.
8.3.1.8 – In the calculation of the connection forces in all articulated joints, the Strength Excess
Coefficient (D) defined in Table 4.1 shall be taken into account.
8.3.1.9 – In systems formed from articulated bottom-built columns in the roof plane, the capacity
design shall be applied to the articulated connection and it shall be ensured that it remains in the
linear elastic zone.
8.3.1.10 – Lateral stability calculations shall be made under the influence of vertical and horizontal
loads in all load-bearing roof beams that are articulated or articulated during the assembly phase.
8.3.1.11 – The width of the beam top table shall be at least n/ 50. Here n shows the free opening
of the beam.
8.3.2. Rollover Stability in Articulated Joints
In the roof planes of buildings where the horizontal diaphragm condition given in 8.3.2.1 – 8.6 is
met, the out-of-plane tipping control of the beams with articulated connections shall be carried
out. The equivalent earthquake load to be used in the control is
Equivalent.( 8.1).
(8.1)
where mk represents the calculated mass for the junction point. The F H equivalent earthquake load
will be affected by the beam end from the level of the center of mass to give the most unfavorable
internal forces in horizontal and vertical directions and a tipping investigation will be carried out
(Figure 8.1). Pin diameters, welding areas and slot thicknesses determined by this investigation
are calculated as defined in the relevant sections
methods.
8.3.2.2 – For different stages of assembly, lateral stability checks of pre-production elements shall
be carried out.
Figure 8.1
8.3.3. Pin
Connections (MFB1)
A typical pin
connection detail is given
in Figure 8.2.
8.3.3.1 – Pin holes shall be at least 6 times the diameter of the pin from both the beam end and
the free edge of the column support.
Figure 8.2
8.3.3.2 The diameter of the pin-bolt holes to be left in the beams shall be at least twice the
diameter of the pin.
8.3.3.3 – In pin housings, materials or details that will create a smooth surface cannot be used.
8.3.3.4 – The cement mortar used to fill the pin slots shall have the strength to provide the
necessary clamping.
8.3.3.5 – Sufficient winding reinforcement shall be used against tensile stress accumulation in the
column and beam end areas connected by the pin. Winding will be done with closed skirtings in
the column end area and horizontal U-ethers in the beam end areas. The winding reinforcements
shall be placed by the minimum effective pin length, the clean distance between them shall not
exceed 50 mm. The pin slots shall be placed so as to correspond to the corners of the closed and
U-skirts, and if necessary, the pin slots shall be kept in the horizontal plane with closed skirts.
8.3.3.6 – The tensile strength of the concrete shall not be taken into account in the capacity
calculations to be made in the direction perpendicular to the pin axis.
8.3.3.7 – Shear force capacity of the pin in the main frame plane Vr, Equivalent.( 8.2). The d/φ
ratio shall be greater than 6.0. φ pin diameter, the smallest distance from the center of the pin to
the edge of the beam or column in line with the length of the d beam, npins
number.
2
V = 0.7nφ ff (8.2)
r cd yd
8.3.4. Welded Connections (MFB2) The detail of the welded articulated connection is given in
Figure 8.3.
8.3.4.1 – Transverse winding reinforcement shall be placed around the anchor reinforcements of
the connecting plate placed in the column.
Figure 8.3
8.3.4.2 – At the connection point, weld up to 45% of the yield strength of the junction metal
(electrode), provided that it is equal to or greater than the yield strength of the joined materials
capacity may be allowed.
8.3.5. Slot Connections (MFB3) Slot articulated connection details are given in Figure 8.4 and
Figure 8.5.
Figure 8.4
8.3.5.1 – The
minimum
thickness of the slot
sidewalls shall be 15
cm and the pin shall be
used.
8.3.5.2 – The bending reinforcements on the socket sidewalls shall be calculated to meet 1.2 times
the internal forces to be generated by the tipping moment of the underlying beam.
8.3.5.3 – Equivalent, for the direction perpendicular to the main frame plane at the socket
sidewalls.( 8.1) The shear force obtained from the equivalent earthquake load calculated with 8.1)
shall be met only by the reinforcements located on the sidewalls of the housing.
Figure 8.5
8.3.6. Other Articulated Links
Articulated
connections to
be created
with
different
forms of
connection
types
defined
above,
It shall
satisfy all the
conditions
defined in
8.3.1 and
8.3.2.
8.4. MOMENTUM TRANSMITTING CONNECTIONS (MAB)
8.4.1. General Features
8.4.1.1 – The momentum-transferring connections of prefabricated reinforced concrete buildings

shall be designed to exhibit ductile behavior under the influence of reversible repeated
earthquake loads.
8.4.1.2 – It shall be shown that momentum-transferring connections are capable of transferring

internal forces at the level of the bearing capacity of the connected elements without a decrease
in strength and ductility.
8.4.1.3 – Coefficients R and D for prefabricated reinforced concrete buildings with wet column-
beam connection (MAB1), full post-tension column-beam connection (MAB2), wet-bottom-welded
column-beam connection at the top (MAB3) and sleeve-pin column-beam connection (MAB4) are
given in Table 4.1.
8.4.1.4 – The earthquake calculation for the preliminary design of prefabricated reinforced
concrete buildings with a full post-tension column-beam connection (MAB2) shall be made in
accordance with Chapter 4, and the earthquake calculation for the final design shall be made
according to Chapter 5, taking into account the non-linear specifications given in 8.4.3 for the
column-beam connection mechanism (opening-closing).
8.4.1.5 – In the calculation of reinforcement-plate and plate-plate resources and in the calculation
of sleeve-pin connections, the internal forces from the earthquake effect shall be magnified by
multiplying by the coefficient of strength excess (D) given in Table 4.1.
8.4.2. Wet Column-Beam Connection (MAB1)
Wet connections made to exhibit equivalent behavior to cast-in-place column-beam connections

are combinations in which positive and negative torque capacities are provided by casting
concrete and continuity reinforcement in place (Figure 8.6). The beam-column geometric seating
shape can be formed as a guse, without a guse or as a temporary guse.
8.4.2.1 – The clamping lengths of the continuity reinforcements shall be determined in accordance
with the relevant requirements of this Directive and TS 500.
8.4.2.2 – In the sections of the beams and columns joined; all necessary controls such as the
clamping length, cutting capacity, etc. of the longitudinal reinforcements shall be carried out for
both directions of the bending moment.
Fig. 8.6
8.4.3. Full Post-Tension Connection (MAB2)
Prefabricated beams can only be connected post-stressed to transfer momentum to the columns
(Figure 8.7). The sheaths through which the post-stretching ropes are passed shall be filled with
cement mortar after the post-stretching process.
8.4.3.1 – It shall be filled with non-shrinking cement mortar between the column and the beam.
8.4.3.2 – In post-tensioned connections, the transfer of shear force between the beam and the
column face takes place by the vise force and friction generated by the post-tension ropes.
8.4.3.3 – The initial pulling force to be given to the post-tensioning ropes, taking into account the
tensile losses;
(8.3)
Figure 8.7
will be calculated taking into

account that the cutting force
determined by the expression is
carried by friction (μ = 0.5).
Equivalent. (8.3) In , M pi
and M pj
represent the bending moment

capacities of the left and right
ends of the beam, respectively,
and n indicate the beam free
opening.
8.4.3.4 – If the beam is based on the column core, the contribution of the gusen to the strength
of the shear force may be taken into account. However, it will be shown that the shear force that
will occur in the opposite direction to the direction of gravity due to the earthquake can only be
carried by friction.
8.4.3.5 – The initial post-stress shall not be more than 50% of the rope yield stress.
8.4.3.6 – The inner cross-sectional area of the spiral sheath shall not be less than twice the total
cross-sectional area of the post-tensioning ropes passing through it.
8.4.3.7 – Circular behavior model envelope for post-stress connection and critical torque and
rotation
definitions are given in Figure 8.8. where M 1 and θ 1 represent the moment and rotation at which
the post-tensioning force is defeated, and M 2 and θ 2 show the moment and rotation at the stage
when 90% of the yield stress is reached in the post-tensioning ropes.
8.4.3.8 – In the case of nonlinear analysis in the time definition field for post-stressed connections
, a center-oriented circular behavior model will be used (Figure 8.8).
Fig. 8.8
8.4.3.9 – In the case of nonlinear earthquake calculation according to Section 5, the allowable on-
off rotation at the junction shall not be greater than θ 2 rotation for the Limited Damage
Performance Target, 0.02 radic for the Controlled Damage Performance Target , and 0.03 radic for
the Migration Prevention Performance Target.
8.4.4. Wet at Top – Welded Connections at the Bottom (MAB3)
These are combinations in which the negative torque capacity continuity is provided by cast
concrete in place and the positive torque capacity continuity is provided by welding (Figure 8.9).
8.4.4.1 – The gap left in the column for negative moment continuity reinforcements shall be
carefully filled at the stage of pouring the structural cladding concrete.
8.4.4.2 – If separate holes are left for each reinforcement, the hole diameter shall be at least
twice the diameter of the rebar through which it will pass. The hole will be filled with non-
shrinking cement mortar so that there are no gaps. There will be a distance between the holes at
least as much as the diameter of the reinforcement.
8.4.4.3 – The column shall be filled with cement mortar between the beam and the beam.
8.4.4.4 – Reinforcement arrangements shall be made to ensure that plasticization occurs outside
the connection zone.
8.4.4.5 – In order to increase the deformation capacity of the beam longitudinal reinforcements
welded to steel plates, a plastic sheath shall be used to disrupt the adhesion with concrete in the
area at least 12 φ L (the diameter of the corresponding longitudinal reinforcement φ L) from the
plate to the beam opening.
8.4.4.6 – At the distance at which the beam sits on the cantilever formed in the column, the
spacing of the ether shall be maximum 4φL and 75 mm.
Fig. 8.9
8.4.4.7 – In the area where the beam sits on the cantilever formed in the column, inverted U-
shaped beam skirtings shall be connected by corner welding seam to steel plates at least 50 mm
high welded to the lower plate. Etries are not allowed to be welded directly to the bottom plate.
8.4.4.8 – In the joined beam and column sections; all necessary controls such as longitudinal
reinforcement clamping length, horizontal cutting capacity, welded bottom connection, etc. shall
be carried out for both directions of the bending moment.
8.4.5. Sleeve-Pin Connections (MAB4)
In this type of connection, the negative moment is carried by cast reinforced concrete in place and
the positive moment is carried by the cutting capacity of at least 4 pins left in the column console
(Figure 8.10). Reinforcements carrying negative moments are concreted by screwing them into
the gap left in the column or special sleeves left in the column.
8.4.5.1 – Adherence plates shall be used at the reinforcement ends when necessary to ensure the
adherence of pins and sleeve anchor reinforcements.
8.4.5.2 – For the anchoring of the pins used in the positive moment continuum to the beam,
special grooved sheet pipes shall be used in the beams. The inner diameter of the ribbed sheet
pipes shall be at least twice the diameter of the pin. Pin nests will be filled with cement mortar
that does not shrink.
Fig.
8.10
8.4.5.3
– The
ends of
the pins
shall be
threaded and the grooved pipe shall be tightened using washers and nuts of sufficient size
immediately after filling with mortar.
8.4.5.4 – The total cutting capacity of the pins shall be greater than the total yield capacity of the
beam support sub-reinforcements.
8.4.5.5 – Special cutting teeth shall be left on the cantilever and under the beam to ensure contact
between the column console and the lower surface of the beam, and all gaps between the column
and the beam shall be filled with cement mortar.
8.4.5.6 – Sleeve connections shall indicate that the migration will occur ductlessly outside the
sleeve area.
8.4.6. Reinforcement Insertion Tools to be Used in the Annexes of the Momentum Transferring
Elements
The rules for sleeved, tube (cement mortar or special adhesive), mechanical (special bolted) or
welded reinforcement additions to be used in column-column, beam-beam and column-foundation
connections transferring momentum are given in Annex 8A.
8.5. PREFABRICATED CARRIER PANEL-FLOORING SYSTEMS
8.5.1. Double Wall Panels
8.5.1.1 – Wall elements produced by combining two thin-walled panels with lattice
reinforcements. After the double-walled panels and flooring elements are installed, panel-panel,
panel-floor bond reinforcements are placed and the panel gaps together with the flooring are
filled with concrete.
8.5.1.2 – Wall wall wall thicknesses shall be 50 mm.
8.5.1.3 – Typical details for different panel combinations are given in Figure 8.11.
8.5.2. Single Wall Panels
8.5.2.1 – After the single-walled prefabricated wall panel and flooring elements are installed,
panel-panel, panel-to-floor bond reinforcements are placed and slab concrete is created.
8.5.2.2 – Minimum panel thickness shall be 120 mm.

Fig. 8.11
8.5.2.3 – Typical details for different panel connections are given in Figure 8.12.
8.6. CONDITIONS FOR DIAPHRAGMS IN PREFABRICATED BUILDINGS
In prefabricated single or multi-storey buildings, diaphragms shall be formed and diaphragm

calculations shall be made in the slab or roof planes as defined in 8.6.1 and 8.6.2.
8.6.1. Roof Diaphragm
In the roof planes of single-storey building systems, where all earthquake loads are carried by
columns with articulated connections at the roof elevation, and in articulated connecting roof
planes of multi-storey buildings, the metal roof cover shall be considered and taken into account
as diaphragms transferring in-plane forces. The rules for creating an aperture are given in
APPENDIX 8B.
8.6.2. Creation of a Laying Diaphragm
8.6.2.1 – The internal forces of the diaphragm for the design of prefabricated reinforced concrete
buildings shall be determined by the diaphragm calculation and design made in accordance with
the additional conditions given in Sections 4 and 7 and listed below.
8.6.2.2 – When creating the diaphragm model; the effective rigidity of the flooring elements such
as prefabricated reinforced concrete TT plate, hollow slab, filigree slab, rigidity of the composite
section in case of horizontal cutting friction conditions, otherwise only the rigidity of the structural
cladding concrete will be taken.
8.6.2.3 – Slabs shall not be considered infinitely rigid in their planes, finite element modeling shall
be performed. It will be shown that vertical and horizontal loads are transferred safely. The
internal forces obtained by the diaphragm calculation shall be met by bond reinforcements
calculated in accordance with the method of calculating the shear friction. Additional
reinforcement shall be used in areas where there are tensile forces on the diaphragm.
Fig. 8.12
8.6.2.4 – Prefabricated reinforced concrete flooring systems must be limited to curtains and/or
beams. For this purpose, frame beams will be used in both directions, on all axes.
8.6.2.5 – In areas where prefabricated reinforced concrete slab systems are directly combined
with curtains, it shall be shown by calculation that the internal forces of the diaphragm are
transferred by the reinforcements contained in the structural cladding concrete and appropriate
details.
8.6.2.6 – It is mandatory to apply structural cladding concrete together with prefabricated

concrete laying elements. The thickness of the structural cladding concrete shall be at least 70
mm.
8.6.2.7 – The quality of structural cladding concrete shall comply with 8.2.3.2.
ANNEX 8A – TOOLS FOR ADDING REINFORCEMENTS
In the column-column, beam-beam and column-foundation connections transferring momentum,

reinforcement attachments can be formed as sleeves, tubes (cement mortar or special adhesive),
mechanical (special bolted) or welded.
8A.1 – It shall be shown that the strength and ductility capacities provided in the section related
to the reinforcement insertion tools are compatible with the strength and ductility of the
connected element(s).
8A.2 – Cutting force control shall be carried out in the annexes.
8A.3 – 7.2.7.1 applies to welded reinforcement attachments.
8A.4 – High strength (f yk > 800 MPa) bolts used in mechanical connections
In case of applying stretching, they will be shown to remain elastic under the influence of
earthquakes.
8A.5 – The expected behavior in reinforcement inserts with sleeves or tubes (with high-strength
cement mortar or special adhesives); is the realization of plasticization in reinforcements
connected beyond the joint zone for tensile, pressure and cyclic loading situations.
8A.6 – Drawing, pressure, stripping, fatigue and cyclic loading tests shall be applied to the sample
consisting of two reinforcements and an insertion tool placed between them . In these
experiments; In the event that a reinforcement bar break is observed in all samples examined, the
insertion tool shall be considered successful.
8A.7 – For each reinforcement insertion tool of different types, 2% of the total number of uses
shall be tested. This number cannot be less than 5 pieces.
8A.8 – If the yield strength of the reinforcement determined by a sufficient number of tensile
tests is less than and equal to the yield strength declared by the manufacturer of the insertion
tool, there is no need to carry out the cyclical loading test.
8A.9 – In the tensile test, the sample must reach 100% of the characteristic tensile strength of the
reinforcement, 135% of the characteristic yield strength and 120% of the determined
reinforcement yield strength.
8A.10 – In the pressure test, the sample must reach 125% of the yield strength characteristic of
the reinforcement.
8A.11 – In the circular loading experiment, the cycles described in Table 8A.1 will be applied.
8A.12 – At least four cube mortar samples shall be taken for each reinforcement attachment to
be tested in scuba reinforcement inserts formed with high-strength mortar. Mortar samples and
tube reinforcement attachment shall be stored in the same conditions. At the beginning and end
of the tests applied on the reinforcement annex, pressure tests of at least two mortar samples
shall be carried out. In order to determine the mortar strength, the results of at least four samples
will be averaged and this value will be evaluated as the minimum mortar strength. This strength
shall be higher than the minimum mortar strength declared by the manufacturer for the
reinforcement attachment.
8A.13 – If the ribbed shapes of the reinforcing rods added by the mortar tube are different, a
separate test shall be carried out for each rib shape.
Table 8A.1. Cyclic Loading
Tests to be Steppe Pull Pressure Number of Cycles Applied
1 0.95 f Tk 0.5 f Tk 20
in Rebar
2 y2ε 0.5 f Tk 4
Attachments 3 y5ε 0.5 f tk 4
4 Pull will be applied until rupture
fyk :
reinforcement bar characteristic yield strength
εy : reinforcement unit elongation that counteracts to actual yield stress
8A.14 – Freeze-thaw tests for mortar will be carried out according to TSE CEN / TR 15177. After at
least 300 freeze-thaw cycles, the ratio of the realized modulus to its initial value will be at least
90%.
8A.15 – The rules given in this section do not apply to sleeves used for lifting and transport.
ANNEX 8B – DEFINITION OF ROOF PLANE DIAPHRAGM
8B.1 – In the three-dimensional carrier system model to be created for the calculation, trapezoidal
sheet metal or sandwich panel type roof covering materials shall also be included. The roofing
covering material will be represented by elastic cross pairs with articulated ends placed between
lovers.
ECK = Oblique Roof Beam; A = Lover; aç = lover's range≤

2.0m, α≈45°
Figure 8B.1
8B.2 – Equivalent axial rigidities of diagonals

representing roof cover of trapezoidal sheet metal
or sandwich panel type made of steel or aluminum alloy
()e [kN] Equivalent.( 8B.1)
EA
will be calculated.
(EA) e = 3.5 t (8B.1)
Here, t[mm] shows the wall thickness of the sheet that makes up the covering material. In the case
of trapezoidal sheet metal is equal to the plate thickness, and in the case of sandwich panel, it is
equal to the sum of the lower and upper plate thicknesses. Denk.( In order for 8B.1) to be applied,
the lover's spacing must be no more than 2 m and the cross angle α must be around 45°.
8B.3 – Additional internal forces arising from lovers, gutter beams and oblique roof beams (ECK)
due to the diaphragm formed in the roof plane shall be taken into account in the sizing of the
relevant elements and in the calculation of joint.
8B.4 – Using the greatest axial force generated by the diagonals representing the roof cover, the
number of fasteners connecting the cover to the lovers shall be determined. Taking the projection
of the largest transverse force N max, the number of fasteners required is equivalent. 8B.2).
(8B.2)
where Q em indicates the shear force that a fastener can safely carry, and n indicates the number
of fasteners to be used in length bç (Figure 8B.1).
CHAPTER 9 – SPECIAL RULES FOR THE DESIGN OF STEEL BUILDING CARRIER SYSTEMS UNDER THE
INFLUENCE OF EARTHQUAKES
9.0. ICONS
In dimensional expressions using the following symbols in this section, the forces are Newton [N],
the lengths are millimeters [mm], the angles are radians [rad], and the stresses are MegaPascal
2
[MPa] = [N/mm ]
unit. A = Cross-sectional area A c = Concrete cross-sectional area A e = Effective net cross-sectional

area A fb = Head cross-sectional area A g = Lossless cross-sectional area A g = Total cross-sectional area
of the composite element A os = Cross-sectional area of the spiral winding reinforcement A s =
Steel cross-sectional area A sc = Cross-sectional area indicating the yield deformation of the
steel core Ash = Minimum total etribe area in the winding area in saddled composite columns =
Longitudinal reinforcement area
A
srAw= Body cross-sectional area Aw = Corner welding area a = Horizontal distance between the
skirting arms and/or nails b = Width (half head width) b bf = Head width of the beam section bk =
Distance between the outermost transverse reinforcement axes in the column cross section C a
= Ratio of required axial force strength to design axial force strength D = Outer diameter in
circular ring sections D = Coefficient of excess strength D = Core diameter of the circular
column (distance between the axes of spiral winding reinforcement) d b = Beam cross section
height dc = Column cross section height E = Modulus of building steel elasticity, E = 200000
2
N/mm Ed = Earthquake effect e = Bond beam length Fcr = Critical buckling stress
CreF = Critical buckling stress calculated by possible yield stress
FE = Welding material (electrode) characteristic tensile strength
uF = Characteristic tensile strength of structural steel
yF = Characteristic yield stress of structural steel
FYb = Characteristic yield stress of the beam material
ycF = Characteristic yield stress of the column material
yscF = Characteristic yield stress of steel core or tensile test of steel core
actual yield stress, determined by
ysrF = Characteristic yield stress of reinforcing steel
fCk = Concrete characteristic compressive strength
fywk = Characteristic yield strength of transverse reinforcement
G = Constant load
H = Floor height
H = Ground horizontal thrust
cH = Column height
Avg H = Average of column heights above and below the node
h = Cross section height
hi = Floor height of the first floor of the building
oh = Distance between the centers of the sectional heads
I = Building importance coefficient
i = Inertial radius
yi = Radius of inertia relative to the weak axis of the beam cross section
K = Buckling coefficient
L = Rod length
Lb = Pressure head is supported in the lateral direction or the cross section is against distortion
the distance between the bases
Bea at the poss Colo His Distanc
= plastic joint Point
h m end ible n face e
(See Appendix 9B)
n = The distance between possible plastic joint points at the beam ends (see Annex 9B)
am = (GCT) required flexural strength determined on the basis of load combinations
fund
prey (GCT) load by taking the possible plastic joint at the ends of
M = ame
combinations the beams
ntal
Additional bending of the column axis due to the shear force at the point
Moment
pM = Characteristic plastic flexural strength
*
plastic momen strength a1.1 solid with possible plastic at the end of
tum R the beam
additional bending on the column axis due to the shear force at the joint
The bending moment, determined by the sum of its moment
Pcm = Characteristic plastic bending strength of the column
In accordance with the direction of the earthquake in the beam-column junction
*PcM =
zone, the column bending
Considering the design axial forces that make the momentum strength the smallest
upper or lower layer column flexural force strength calculated by taking
Prm = Possible bending torque capacity
rM = Required flexural strength
um = (IAC) required flexural strength determined on the basis of load combinations
At the beam-column junction, the column Necessary on the bending
=
UcM of the beam face moment
Resistance
fun
da
by taking the possible plastic joint at the ends
UVM = (IAC) load combinations me
of the beams
nta
l
Additional bending of the column axis due to the shear force at the point
Moment
Column axial force calculated under the joint effect of vertical loads and
NDm =
earthquake
aP = Required axial force strength calculated by load combinations (GCT)
Taking into account the effects of increased earthquakes, for load combinations
AcP =
(GCP)
calculated required axial pressure force
PBr = Required axial force strength of lateral support elements
noP = Axial compressive strength of composite column cross section
rP = Required axial force strength
uP = Required axial force strength calculated by load combinations (IAWT)
Taking into account the effects of increased earthquakes, (IAWT) for load
UcP =
combinations
calculated required axial pressure force
yP = Axial force strength in the case of yield limit
yscP = Steel core axial force yield strength
Q = Moving load
tR = Ratio of possible tensile strength to characteristic tensile strength
yR = The ratio of possible yield stress to characteristic yield stress
RYb = The ratio of possible yield stress on the beam to characteristic yield stress
ycr = The ratio of possible yield stress in the column to characteristic yield stress
S = Snow load
Mpb = In the beam-column junction zone, characteristic for each of the joining beams
s = Transverse reinforcement range in composite column s = Spiral winding reinforcement step t
= Thickness
= Head thickness of the beam cross section
t
bf
= Head thickness of the column cross section
t
cf t t t = Reinforcing plate thickness tw = Body thickness u = Length of the circumference of the
slip zone
Vd = Possible plastic joint points at the beam ends, (1.2G+0.5Q+0.2S) with the load combination, the cutting
force calculated under the influence of vertical load V E = Design cutting force consisting of
earthquake effects V n = Characteristic cutting force strength Vp = Plastic cutting force strength
strength
Vuc= Required shear force strength strength of the beam-column combination on the column face Vup
= Required shear force strength of the beam-column junction shear (panel) zone W = Plastic
strength moment of strength
p
Wpb = Beam plastic strength torque
Wpc= Column plastic strength torque

WRBS = Plastic strength moment of the attenuated beam cross section Δ i = Relative floor
displacement on the i floor of the building β = Compressive strength correction coefficient γp =
Angle of rotation of the bond beam
θp = Relative floor displacement angle
λhd = Cross-sectional condition limit value for elements with high ductility level λ md = Cross-
sectional condition limit value for elements with limited ductility
μ = Friction coefficient
ρ = Volumetric ratio of spiral reinforcement in a circular column, ⎡ρ=4 A ⎤

s⎣s
⎦
φ = Strength coefficient ω = Reinforcement effect correction coefficient Ω =
Safety coefficient
9.1. SCOPE
9.1.1 – The sizing and arrangement of the joints of steel building carrier system elements under
the influence of earthquakes shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant standards and
regulations in force in this regard, first of all in accordance with the special rules specified in this
section.
9.1.2 – Horizontal load-bearing systems of steel buildings covered by this chapter may consist only
of steel frames that transfer momentum, only steel frames with central or outcenter crosses, only
cross-steel frames that are prevented from buckling, or combinations of momentum-transferring
steel frames, diagonal steel frames or reinforced concrete curtains. In addition, steel-reinforced
concrete composite columns of frame-type carrier systems that transfer momentum are also
covered by this section.
9.1.3 – The rules for the design of systems established within the normal floor and roof planes,
which allow horizontal forces to be transferred to horizontal load-bearing systems, are given in
9.10.
9.1.4 – The rules for the basic design of steel and steel-reinforced concrete composite column
buildings are given in Section 16.
9.2. GENERAL RULES
9.2.1. Classification of Steel Carrier Systems
Horizontal load bearing systems of steel buildings, in terms of their behavior against earthquakes,
9.2.1.1,
It is divided into three classes defined in 9.2.1.2 and 9.2.1.3.
9.2.1.1 – The horizontal load carrier systems mentioned below for steel buildings are defined as
Systems with High Ductility Levels.
(a) Torque Transferring Steel Frame type carrier meeting the conditions specified in 9.3 and
9.11.1.1
Systems.
(b) Central Cross Steel Frame meeting the conditions specified in 9.6, Exfocal Cross Steel Frame
meeting the conditions specified in 9.8 and Buckling Avoidant Cross Steel Frame type carrier
systems meeting the conditions specified in 9.9.
(c) Systems consisting of a combination of moment-transferring steel frames as defined in 9.3
and cross-steel frames as defined in (b).
9.2.1.2 – The horizontal load bearing systems specified below for steel buildings are defined as
Ductility Level Limited Systems.
(a) Momentum Transfer Steel Frame type carrier meeting the conditions specified in 9.4 and
9.11.1.2
Systems.
(b) Central Cross Steel Frame type carrier systems that meet the conditions specified in 9.7.
(c) Systems consisting of a combination of momentum-transferring steel frames as defined in
9.4 and cross-steel frames as defined in (b).
9.2.1.3 – Systems created by using steel frame systems that transfer momentum with limited
ductility level with high ductility level steel cross frames or reinforced concrete curtains are defined
as Ductility Level Mixed Systems . However, frame systems transferring torque with composite
columns with limited ductility that meet the conditions specified in 9.11.1.2(a) are allowed to form
a mixed system with reinforced concrete curtains only.
9.2.1.4 – R carrier system behavior coefficients and D strength surplus coefficients to be applied
in the design of the systems falling into these three classes under earthquake effects and the
permissible building height classes (BYS) are given in Table 4.1. The special circumstances and
conditions for the mixed use of these systems are contained in 4.3.4.
9.2.1.5 – The conditions for steel buildings containing up to two different horizontal load-bearing
systems in a vertical direction or mixed buildings consisting of reinforced concrete and steel carrier
systems and the coefficients R and D to be applied to them are given in 4.3.6.
9.2.1.6 – In the event that reinforced concrete curtains with high ductility levels are also present
in the carrier system, the rules given in 7.6 shall apply for the design of reinforced concrete
curtains .
9.2.2. Related Standards and Design Principles
9.2.2.1 – The design of the steel carrier systems covered by this section shall be carried out in
accordance with the relevant standards and, in particular, the rules of calculation given in Sections
2, 3, 4 and 5 of this Regulation and the loads stipulated in TS 498.
9.2.2.2 – Steel structural elements and their joints shall have a level of strength, stability and
rigidity capable of performing all the functions expected from them under a certain safety during
the operational life of the structure.
9.2.2.3 – In the design of a steel building, the Design (YDKT) method with Load and Strength
Coefficients or the Design with Safety Coefficients (GKT) method defined in the "Regulation on the
Design, Calculation and Construction Principles of Steel Structures" published in the Official
Gazette dated 04/02/2016 and numbered 29614 can be used, provided that only one of them is
applied. However, only the IACT method shall be used in the design of the beam-column
combinations transferring the moment in Annex 9B, the composite column bearing systems and
foundations given in 9.11. The strength coefficients defined in Annex 9B shall be used in the design
of the beam-column combinations transferring momentum to be dimensioned in accordance with
Annex 9B by the YDKT method.
9.2.2.4 – Within the scope of this Regulation, the design rules to be applied for the sectional
calculations to be made under the joint effect of vertical loads and earthquakes, as well as for the
combination and additional calculations, are given separately for the relevant YDKT and GKT
methods.
9.2.3. Material Conditions
9.2.3.1 – Within the scope of this regulation, all structural steels defined in the "Regulation on the
Design, Calculation and Construction Principles of Steel Structures" can be used. However, the
steel material to be used in the elements of the horizontal load-bearing system must also meet
the following conditions.
(a) The characteristic yield stress of the structural steel to be used in elements expected to
2
exhibit nonlinear behavior shall not exceed 355 N/mm . Furthermore, the characteristic yield
stress of the structural steel to be used in the columns of the horizontal load-bearing systems
described in this chapter shall not exceed 460 N/mm 2, with the exception of columns of steel
frames transferring torque with a limited level of ductility specified in 9.4.
(b) In rolling profiles with a thickness of at least 40 mm, in sheets with a thickness of at least 50
mm and in profiles manufactured with these plates, the minimum Charpy-V-Notch (CVN)
strength (Notch Toughness) value shall be 27 Nm (27 J) at 21° C in tests carried out in accordance
with ASTM A673 or equivalent standards.
9.2.3.2 – In the joints and annexes of the elements under the influence of earthquake loads, high-
strength bolts of (8.8) or (10.9) quality shall be used with full pre-pull. In the joints where the bolts
are under the influence of cutting force, it will be ensured that the bulons are in the sliding plane
of the body cross-section without tooth opening. The contact surface between the joining parts
will ensure that a coefficient of friction equal to at least μ=0.20 is achieved even in crushing joints.
should be prepared in such a way. Normal bolts defined in the "Regulation on the Design,
Calculation and Construction Principles of Steel Structures" can be used in the joints and annexes
of the elements that are not under the influence of earthquake loads.
9.2.3.3 – In welded joints, welding metal in accordance with the steel material and welding
method shall be used and the yield stress of the welding metal shall not be less than the yield
stress of the assembled base metal. In all welds of elements and combinations under the influence
of earthquake loads, welding metal that meets the conditions stipulated in Table 9.1 shall be used.
9.2.3.4 – Bulons and welds may not be used together to share the force transmitted at the junction
or a component of that force (see Section 9.2.3.4 Appendix 9A).
Table 9.1 – Welding Metal Properties to be Used in the Joints and Annexes of Elements Under
the
Influence Welding Metal Class E 480 E 550 of
Characteristic yield stress, N/mm2 400 470
Min. Tensile strength, ( FE ) N/mm2 480 550
Min. Elongation, % 22 19
Notch Toughness (CVN) -180C de min. 27J
Earthquake Loads
9.2.4. Possible Material Strength
Where required by the relevant articles of this section, possible (expected) material strengths shall
be used in the design of steel structural elements and their joints. For possible migration limit
situations in the element whose strength is determined, the characteristic yield stress, Fy and
characteristic tensile strength in the characteristic strength expressions are determined
respectively;
yield stress, RF and possible tensile strength, RF shall be used. Possible yield stress and
yytu
The coefficients to be applied in calculating the probable tensile strength are given in Table 9.2,
depending on the class of the structural steel and the type of element.
Table 9.2 – Ryand RtCoefficients

Building Steel Class and Element Type R
y t R
Rolling profiles and sheets made of S 235 steel 1.4 1.1
Rolling profiles made of S 460 steel 1.1 1.1
Pipe and Box profiles 1.4 1.3
Reinforcing steel 1.2 1.2
9.2.5. Load Combinations Involving the Effect of Seismicity
Steel structural elements will be sized on the basis of Section 5.3 of the "Regulation on the Design,
Calculation and Construction Principles of Steel Structures". In this sizing, the load combinations
given in 9.2.5.1 or 9.2.5.2 shall be used as load combinations involving the earthquake effect,
except in the special cases specified in 9.2.6.
9.2.5.1 – When the IACT (Design with Load and Strength Coefficients) is applied, Section 4.4.4.2(a)
shall be taken as the basis for Load Combinations Involving the Earthquake Effect. Equivalent, if the
2
moving load value is less than or equal to 5.0 kN/m .( Q in 4.11 ) by 50%
Reduced. However, this reduction will not apply to garages and buildings with a high concentration
of people.
9.2.5.2 – When GCT (Design with Safety Coefficients) is applied, the Load Combinations Including
the Earthquake Effect are equivalent below.( 9.1).
G + 0.75 Q + 0.75 S ± 0.75 0.7 E (9.1a)
( d)
G ± 0.7Ed (9.1b)
0.6W + 0.75H ± 0.7Ed (9.1c)
9.2.6. Earthquake Effects Amplified by Surplus Coefficient
Where described in the relevant articles of this Chapter, the necessary strengths of the joints and
additional details of the steel structural elements shall be obtained by using the internal forces
determined by multiplying the earthquake effects by multiplying the excess strength coefficient D
in the load combinations defined in 9.2.5. However, these internal forces, as required by the capacity
design principle, shall not be taken greater than the internal forces compatible with the yield
(mechanism) situation defined by taking into account the effects of consolidation and increase in
material strength . D strength surplus coefficients are given in Table 4.1 depending on the types
of carrier systems and their ductility levels.
The head width/thickness, body height/thickness and diameter/wall thickness ratios of the cross
section of the system elements to be designed with a high S integrity level or limited ductility level
shall not exceed the relevant limit values given in Table 9.3.
9.2.8. Stability Connections on Beams
9.2.8.1 – Lower and/or upper headings of the steel beams of horizontal load-bearing systems
designed with a high level of ductility or limited ductility, Equivalent.( 9.2) or Equivalent.( 9.3)
against lateral sprains. In steel carrier systems where reinforced concrete slabs work in composites
with steel beams, it is not mandatory to comply with this condition in the heads of the beams
connected to the reinforced concrete slab.
Largest distance between lateral support elements
(a) Beams of earthquake load carrier systems designed as elements with high ductility levels
E
L ≤ 0.086i (9.2)
by
F
y
(b) In the beams of earthquake load carrier systems designed as elements with limited ductility
levels
E
Lb ≤ 0.17iy (9.3)
F
y
condition.
In addition, during the nonlinear deformation of the system, the beam heads will be supported
against lateral displacement and torsion at the points where plastic joints may occur, the points
where individual loads affect and the points where the beam cross section changes suddenly.
9.2.8.2 – In the case of elements to be designed with a high level of S uniqueness or a limited level
of ductility
lateral stability support elements shall be sized in such a way that they have sufficient strength
and rigidity. The conditions to be taken as a basis for this are given below.
(a) The required strength and rigidity of the elements to be used against lateral displacement and
torsional in the beam heads of horizontal load-bearing systems shall be determined in Section 16.3
of the "Regulation on the Design, Calculation and Construction Principles of Steel Structures" for
Cd = 1.0 in the Equivalence of the beam ( 9.4)
will be determined on the basis of bending strength.
M = M = R FW (GKT) (9.4a)
r ayy
or
M = M = R FW (MPEG) (9.4b)
r u yyp
(GKT)
(b) In the case of possible plastic joint zones, the (9.5a) elements to be used
against lateral displacement and torsional in the beam heads shall be
dimensioned in such a way that they have sufficient strength and rigidity under the special
conditions given below.
(1) The strength of the lateral bearing elements required for both heads is equivalent. 9.5).
P =(
) R FW
br yy
or
P = 0.06 R FW (YDKT) (9.5b)
br yy
(2) The required strength of the elements used against torsion in the beam is equivalent by taking
C d = 1.0 in Section 16.3 of the "Regulation on the Design, Calculation and Construction Principles
of Steel Structures". (9.6).
Ma =(
) R FW yy p
(GKT) (9.6a)
or
M = 0.06R FW (MPEG) (9.6b)
u yyp
(3) The required rigidity of these elements is specified in Section 16.3 of the "Regulation on the
Design, Calculation and Construction Principles of Steel Structures" for Cd= 1.0, equivalent.( 9.4)
shall be determined on the basis of the flexural strength of the beam given by .
Table 9.3 – Cross-sectional Conditions
Precisi Limit values Explanation

Employee
on
Description High Ductility Elements, Hdλ Ductility Element
Ratio
Rectangular / IT/IT
box sections /Ht
Making
rectangular
box sections
and heads of
sections
formed in
the form of
boxes from
the I
section,
side plates y 0.55 EF []a y 0.64 E F
of the
sections
formed in
the form of
boxes from
the I section
and making
box sections
to be used
R as cross
i elements
g
i
d
i Bodies of I
z or making I
e sections to
d be used as w /Ht y 1.49 EF y 1.49 EF
E cross
l
e
members
m
a a y 0.125 if 2.45 (1 0.93 ) C E C F ≤ − a a y 0.125 if 3.76 (1 2.75 ) C E C F ≤ −
e Bodies of I
a y y 0.125 if 0.77 (2.93 ) 1.49 a a y y 0.125
if 1.12 (2.33 )
n or made I
t sections to C E EC F F > − ≥ 1.49 C E EC F F > − ≥
s be used as
beams or
columns[b]
Side plates
of sections
formed in
the form of w/ht
boxes from
/ht /Ht
the I profile
to be used
as beams or
columns ca u a c a c y c y , 1.67 (GKT) , 0.90 ( ) P PC CFA FA Ω = Ω= = φ= φ
Bodies of
made box
sections to
be used as
beams or
columns
Tubular []c y 0.044 E F
cross-
/Dt y 0.038 EF
section
elements
Precisi Limit values Explanation

Employee
on High Ductility Elements, λHd Ductility Element
Description
Ratio λMd
U Heads of I
n or Made I
r sections,
i U or T
g
sections,
i
d arms of
i cornary (L)
z or discrete
e double /IT y 0.30 EF y 0.38 EF
d corneers,
E arms of
l continuousl
e y joined
m double
e corneers
n
t
s
C Walls of
o box-section
m composite /bt y 1.4 EF y 2.26 EF
p elements
o EF will be
s
i taken as y. /
Membrane
[a] In /y rectangular box sections used as beams or columns, the made box cross-sections and the sections formed in
the form of boxes from the I section
limit value of cross-sectional condition in headings
1.12 /
[b]
C≤ 0.125 /2.45
For I sections in frames that transmit high ductility momentum, the limit value of the cross-sectional
condition (ht) cannot exceed EF. Ca ≤ for 0.125 ductility level in frames transferring limited momentum
in I sections, the limit value of the
cross-sectional condition ( htw )
a wy
/
It cannot exceed EF.
3.76
[c] The limit value of the cross-sectional condition in pipe profiles used as beams or columns can be taken as 0.07EF y.
9.2.9. Preserved Capacity for Horizontal Load Bearing Systems with High Ductility
Regions
For horizontal load-bearing systems with a high level of ductility , the regions with preserved
capacity cover the possible plastic joint zones in the momentum-transferring frames and the end
and middle zones of the bond beams of the eccentric cross-steel frames and the cross elements
of the central diagonal steel frames (Figure 9.1). Within these zones, sudden cross-sectional
changes, which adversely affect the nonlinear behavior of the respective elements, the application
of additional detail, gaps (including gaps for temporary installation purposes), element
connections and the use of sliding elements with heads, are not allowed.
9.2.10. Column and Beam Attachments
9.2.10.1 – For all columns, including columns that are outside the scope of carrier systems under
the influence of earthquake load, the columnsshall be made at least 1.2 m away from the joining
planes of the beam heads to the column. However, if the net height of the column is less than 2.4
m, the column attachment shall be formed in the middle of the net height. However, it may be
permissible to form the attachments in which the column body and heads are joined by full
penetration blunt welding, provided that they are not less than the cross-sectional height of the
column, in areas closer to the joining planes of the beam heads.
Figure 9.1
9.2.10.2 – The required strength of the additional detail in the sizing of the column inserts shall
be determined on the basis of the internal force status on which the column is sizing and the rules
specified in the relevant articles.
9.2.10.3 – Column attachments can be made of bolted, corner and blunt welded. If the crop is of
blunt welding, full penetration blunt welding shall be used (see Section 1.c.). Appendix 9A).
9.2.10.4 – Beam attachments within the scope of carrier systems under the influence of
earthquake load shall be established outside the areas with protected capacity defined in 9.2.9.
9.2.10.5 – The required strength of the additional detail in the sizing of the beam inserts shall be
determined on the basis of the internal force state defined in 9.2.6.
9.2.10.6 – In the additional details, the connection of the boards to one element only with bolts
to the other only welded may be allowed.
9.3. STEEL FRAMES THAT TRANSMIT HIGH MOMENTUM LEVEL OF DUCTILITY
Steel frames that transmit high ductility levels of torque are carrier systems in which the beams
have the ability to make a significant amount of non-linear deformation under the effects of
earthquakes and the sliding zone of the beam-column joints to make a limited amount of nonlinear
deformation. The rules to be followed in the sizing of steel frames that transmit high ductility level
momentum are given below.
9.3.1. General Conditions
9.3.1.1 – In the beams and columns of steel frames transmitting high ductility momentum, the
ratio of head width/thickness and body height/thickness shall not exceed the limit value of λ hd
given in Table 9.3.
9.3.1.2 – Beam heads of steel frames transferring torque with a high level of ductility shall be
supported against lateral displacement and torsion, on the basis of the relevant conditions given
in 9.2.8 for elements with a high level of ductility.
9.3.1.3 – The sizing of steel frame columns transferring momentum with a high level of ductility
shall be based on the most unfavorable internal forces, which shall be determined by taking into
account the conditions given below.
(a) The shear force, axial force and bending moments to be obtained by taking into account the
load combinations involving the earthquake effect given in 9.2.5.
(b) The axial tensile and compressive forces to be obtained in accordance with 9.2.6, without
regard to the bending moments. However, if there are horizontal forces acting between the ends
of the columns, the bending moments they will create shall also be taken into account.
9.3.1.4 – The beams of steel frames transferring torque with a high level of ductility shall be
dimensioned under the most unfavorable internal forces to be obtained on the basis of 9.2.5.
9.3.2.1 – At each beam-column nodal point of steel frames or systems with reinforced concrete
webs transferring torque high ductility, in accordance with the earthquake considered,
Equivalent.( 9.7) it will be shown that the condition that the columns be stronger than the beams
is met (Figure 9.2).
∑Mpc
*
M
* >1.0 (9.7) ∑ pb
*
Equivalent. The bending moment capacities of the Mpc column in (9.7) are equivalent.( 9.8a) or
Equivalent.( 9.8b)
*
will be calculated. M beam bending moment capacities, Equivalent.( 9.9a) or Equivalent.( 9.9b)
and
Pb
in the case of using a combination with a weakened beam cross-section, the Equivalent.( 9.9c) or
Equivalent.( 9.9d ).
In the calculation of column bending moment capacities, this bending in accordance with the
direction of the earthquake
The smallest of the momentum capacities is the P ac(GCT) or P uc (IAC) obtained by 9.3.1.3
the required axial compressive force shall be considered.
*
∑ M WF YC
PA
* pb y yb pb av (1.1 1.5 )M RF W M = +∑ ∑ (GKT) (9.9a)
or
* pb y yb pb uv(1.1 )M RF W M = +∑
∑ (RESCT) (9.9b)
* pb y yb RBS av (1.1 1.5 )M RF W M = +∑ ∑ (GKT) (9.9c)
or
* pb y yb RBS uv(1.1 )M RF W M = +∑ ∑ (RESCT) (9.9d)
Earthquake Earthquake
PC
=∑ PC (−1.5 ac/g) (GCT) (9.8a)
or * WF PA ) (MPEG) (9.8b)
∑M
=
pc ∑
(
pc yc
− /
uc g
direction direction
*
M
pb
*
M
pb
1.5
**
m pc m (GCT)
pc
(9.10a)
Figure 9.2
9.3.3. Failure to Meet the Condition that the Columns Are Stronger Than the Beams
9.3.3.1 – Taking into account the load combinations involving the earthquake effect given in 9.2.5,
Denk.( In the case of columns where 9.10) is provided, it shall not be required that the columns
be stronger than the beams for the following situations.
P < 0.3 FA
a ( )
h
or
(
P < 0.3(FA) (YDKT) 9.10b)
u hg
(a) Single-storey structures and top-storey columns of multi-storey structures.

(b) The sum of the shear force strengths of the columns on a floor which does not satisfy the
condition that the columns are stronger than the beams in the direction taken into consideration is
less than 20 % of the sum of the shear force strengths of the frame columns transmitting
moment in the same direction on that floor, and the sum of the shear force strengths of the
columns in the frame axis transferring each moment shall be the frame columns transferring
torque are less than 33% of the sum of the shear force strength.
For this condition, the column axis is defined as the axis with parallel row columns within 10% of
the plan size perpendicular to a column axis. The design shear force strength of the column shall
be obtained by dividing the sum of the bending moment strengths of the column ends by the H
floor height in the columns that provide the condition that the columns are stronger than the
beams, the beams connected to both ends or in the columns where this condition is not met .
9.3.3.2 – In line with the earthquake under consideration, the ratio of the existing shear force
strength of the columns on any first floor of the building to the required shear force strength
shall not be required if the existing shear force strength of the columns above the relevant floor
is 50% greater than the ratio of the existing shear force strength to the required shear force
strength.
9.3.4. Beam-Column Junction Zones
9.3.4.1 – The following three conditions shall be met together in the beam-column joints of steel
frames that transmit torque with a high level of ductility.
(a) The combination shall be capable of providing at least 0.04 radians relative floor
displacement angle (relative floor displacement/floor height). For this, details that have been
proven to be valid by experimental and/or analytical methods will be used. Examples of various
bolted and welded joining details that have proven their validity and their application limits are
given in Annex 9B.
(b) The strength of the required bending moment M uc on the column face of the joining, in the
details described in Annex 9B, taking into account the possible plastic bending moment of the beam
joining to the nodal point, the location of the possible plastic joint at the end of the beam with
the Mpr, Equivalent. 9.11) to be calculated by
its moment will not be less than its strength.
M uc = Mpr +Vuch (9.11)
In determining the required bending moment strength, for the section of the beam between the
plastic joint and the column face, the contribution of the additional bending moment from vertical
loads can also be taken into account.
(c) The V-end shear force to be used in the sizing of the joint, the cutting force determined on the basis
of the yield (mechanism) condition and the plastic joint points at the end of the beam
(By adding the shear force to be calculated under the load combination of 1.2 G + 0.5 + S
Q 0.2 ) Equivalent.( 9.12). In determining the G-end shear force strength,

the contribution of additional shear force from vertical ) n loads for the section of the
beam between the plastic joint and the column face may (9.12) also be taken into account.
Vuc = Vd ±(M pri + Mprj
9.3.4.2 – Slippage in the beam-column joint detail, bounded by the column and beam heads
(Figure 9.3) Vup the required shear force strength is equivalent on the basis of the column shear
force resulting from the effect of possible plastic moments of the beams joining into the column.
9.13).
⎛ 11 ⎞
Vup =∑ Muc ⎜ −⎟ (9.13) ⎝ b bf avg. ⎠

d −t H
(a) The slip zone shall be dimensioned so that it has sufficient shear force strength. For this, taking
into account the yield limit situation in the effect of slipping, the design of the slip zone
The shear force strength will be determined by φv = 1.0 (YDKT). If this condition cannot be met, the
slip zone, body reinforcement boards or, for example, the reversal line plates
will be strengthened by adding.
(b) The smallest thickness of the column body plate and, if used, of each of the reinforcing plates
shall satisfy the condition of tmin ≥ u/180 (Figure 9.4). In cases where this condition is not met, the
reinforcing boards and the column body plate shall be welded to each other so that they work
together, and the sum of the plate thicknesses shall meet the condition of ∑tu/180.
≥
will be checked.
(c) If reinforcement plates are used in the slip zone, full penetration blunt welding or corner
welding shall be used to connect these plates to the column header plates (Figure 9.4). These
welds shall be
dimensioned taking
into account the cutting
force met by the
reinforcing plate.
Figure 9.3
t = min ( t , t )
min t
(a) (b)
Fig. 9.4
9.3.4.3 – In the beam-

column joint details
that transfer
momentum, continuity plates shall be placed on both sides of the column body at the level of the
beam heads, ensuring that the tensile and pressure forces in the beam heads are safely transferred
to the column (and to the neighboring
beam in the case of two- sided beam-
column joints) (Figure 9.3).
(a) The thickness of the continuity plates shall not be less than the heading thickness of the
beam joined in single-sided beam joints and, in the case of beam joining on two sides of the
column, the greater than the heading thickness of the joined beams.
(b) Full penetration blunt welding shall be used for the connection of continuity plates to column
bodies and heads. Corner welding can also be used for the connection of the continuity plate to
the column body. However, this weld must be of such a length and thickness that it will transfer
a force equal to the cutting capacity of the continuity plate in its plane to the column body.
(c) Column head thickness
RF
yb yb IT
t ≥ 0.4 1.8
(9.14a)
cf bfbf
RF
yc yc
and
b
bf
t ≥ (9.14b)
6 CF
if both conditions meet together, there may be no need for a continuity plate.
9.3.4.4 – In the sizing of the beam-column joint detail, the calculation principles given in Annex 9B
shall be used.
9.3.4.5 – Areas with protected capacity shall also comply with the conditions laid down in 9.2.9.
Within these zones, the use of hooded sliding elements is not allowed.
9.3.5. Column Attachments
The column attachments shall be sized to meet the relevant conditions given in 9.2.10. In addition,
if the bolted additional detail is applied, the required flexural strength of the column inserts shall
be taken into account the smaller cross-section of the added elements, such as RFW yy p/1.5 (GCT)
or RFW yy p
(YDKT). Required shear force strength of inserts, ∑ Mpc /1.5Hc
(GCT) or ∑ Mpc / Hc (IAC), 9.3.1.3(a) and 9.3.1.3(b)
will be taken as the greatest of its values. Here, ∑ Mpc is the sum of the column bending moment
strengths at the lower and upper ends of the added column.
9.3.6. Stability of Beam-Column Joints
In order to prevent rotations that may occur outside the frame plane, the columns shall be
supported in the beam-column junction zones, taking into account the following situations.
(a) Where the beam-column junction zones are supported in a lateral direction by the slab system
or roof stability joints, if the beam and column bodies are in the same plane and the column
remains elastic outside the slip zone, the column heads shall be supported only in the lateral
direction at the level of the beam upper heads. Equivalent. (9.7) In cases where the ratio given in
is greater than 2.0, it can be assumed that the columns remain elastic. In other cases, the column
heads will be supported in a lateral direction from the alignments of the beam lower and upper
heads. Each lateral support element shall be charged 2% of the value calculated by FAfb /1.5 (GCT)
or FA (RRA)
yyfb
will be evenly dimensioned under the influence of an axial force.
(b) In cases where the beam-column junction zones are not supported laterally in the direction
perpendicular to the frame plane where they are located, the columns shall be sized in
accordance with the principles of Section 11 of the "Regulation on the Design, Calculation and
Construction of Steel Structures" by using the length between the points where they are
supported laterally and in accordance with the following conditions:
(1) The required strength of the column shall be achieved by using the load combinations
described in 9.2.6.
(2) The ratio of the delicate proportion of the colon shall satisfy its condition.
Li≤ 60
(3) The required bending moment strength in the direction perpendicular to the frame plane of
the column shall be calculated as the second order bending moment on the basis of the
displacement in the lateral direction to be formed under the influence of the required axial force
strength defined in (a) for the lateral support element.
9.4. STEEL FRAMES THAT TRANSMIT DUCTILITY LEVEL LIMITED MOMENT
Steel frames that transfer momentum with limited ductility levels are carrier systems in which the
shear zone of beams, columns and beam-column joints has the ability to make a limited amount
of nonlinear deformation under the effects of earthquakes. The rules to be followed in the sizing
of steel frames that transfer ductility limited momentum are given below.
9.4.1.1 – In the beams and columns of steel frames transferring ductility limited momentum, the
ratio of head width/thickness and body height/thickness shall not exceed the limit values of λmd
given in Table 9.3.
9.4.1.2 – Beam heads of steel frames transferring ductility limited momentum shall be supported
against lateral displacement and torsion, on the basis of the relevant conditions given in 9.2.8 for
elements with limited ductility.
9.4.1.3 – The rules given in 9.3.1.3 apply to the sizing of steel frame columns that convey a moment
with limited ductility.
9.4.1.4 – The rules given in 9.3.1.4 apply to the sizing of steel frame beams that convey a ductility
limited momentum.
9.4.1.5 – Columns stronger than beams, given in 9.3.2 for steel frames transferring ductility high
torque in steel frames with limited ductility levels
condition is not mandatory.
9.4.2. Beam-Column Junction Zones
9.4.2.1 – The following three conditions shall be met in the beam-column joints transferring
torque of steel frames with limited ductility levels:
(a) The combination shall be capable of providing at least 0.02 radians relative floor displacement
angle (relative floor displacement/floor height). For this, details that have been proven to be valid
by experimental and/or analytical methods will be used. Examples of various bolted and welded
joining details that have proven their validity and their application limits are given in Annex 9B.
(b) In calculating the required flexural moment strength of the combination Muc, the rules laid
down in 9.3.4.1(b) shall apply.
(c) The rules laid down in 9.3.4.1(c) shall apply to the determination of the V-endshear force on which
the sizing of the joint is to be based.
9.4.2.2 – In the beam-column junction detail, the required shear force strength of the slip zone
(Figure 9.3) bounded by the column and beam heads shall be determined by the beam end moments
that will give the most unfavorable result under the load combinations (YDKT) or (GKT).
9.4.2.3 – For the details of the beam-column joint transferring momentum, the rules given in
9.3.4.3 apply.
9.4.2.4 – In sizing the merger detail, the calculation principles given in Annex 9B shall be used.
9.4.2.5 – In areas with protected capacity, the conditions laid down in 9.3.4.5 shall be complied
with.
Given in 9.3.5 for column inserts of steel frames transferring torque with high ductility levels
conditions are the same for column inserts of steel frames that transfer ductility limited
momentum
valid.
9.5. CENTRAL AND OUTWARD CENTER DIAGONAL STEEL FRAMES
Cross-steel frames are horizontal load-bearing systems consisting of articulated joint or

momentum-transferring frames and diagonals connected to them centrally and outwardly. The
horizontal load carrying capacities of such systems are provided by the axial force strengths of the
elements more or completely as well as their flexural strength. Crossed steel frames are divided
into two depending on the arrangement of the crosses.
(a) Steel frames with central diagonal (Figure 9.5).
Diagonal diagonal cross x diagonal inverted v diagonal v cross k cross
Figure 9.5
(b) Exfocal diagonal steel frames (Figure 9.6).

The rules for the design of systems that are formed within the normal floor and roof planes and
that enable the transfer of horizontal forces to horizontal load-bearing systems will be evaluated
within the scope of 9.10.
Steel frames with central crosses, where diagonals are centrally connected to the frame nodes,
can be sized as a system with high ductility or limited ductility. In contrast, the frame nodes of the
diagonals are outcentered to the
The outer center diagonal steel frames to which it is attached shall be dimensioned as a system
with a high level of ductility.
Fig. 9.6
9.6.
DUCTILITY
HIGH
CENTRAL
DIAGONAL STEEL FRAMES
Steel frames with high ductility are sized in such a way that even if some of the crossover elements
under the influence of pressure are buckled, there is no significant loss of strength in the system.
The rules to be applied in the sizing of these systems are given below.
9.6.1.1 – In the beams, columns and crosses of steel frames with high ductility levels, the width /
thickness, body height / thickness and diameter / thickness ratios of the head shall not exceed the
λ hd limit values given in Table 9.3.
9.6.1.2 – The elements of the central cross system on one axis of the building shall be arranged in
such a way that at least 30% and at most 70% of the horizontal forces acting in the direction of
both earthquakes in the direction of that axis are met by the diagonals working against the
pressure.
9.6.2. System Analysis
9.6.2.1 – The required strengths for sizing columns, beams and joints of central diagonal steel
frame systems with high ductility shall be calculated on the basis of 9.2.6.
9.6.2.2 – The internal forces of the crossover elements for the calculation of the internal forces
of columns, beams and joints in accordance with the yield (mechanism) state described in 9.2.6
are described below in (a) and (b).
(a) In the case of the typical mechanism that corresponds to the moment of buckling of the cross
elements under the influence of axial compressive force (Figure 9.7a), the one which causes the
plasticization of the cross elements and the equivalent ( 9.15) and Equivalent.( 9.16) as
determined by the possible axial tensile and compressive force strengths.
Direction of the Earthquake
Fig. 9.7a
(b) In the case of the typical mechanism of the cross

elements under the influence of axial compressive force,
which counteracts the post- buckling (Figure 9.7b),
the one which causes the plasticization of the
cross elements and the equivalent ( 9.15) and
Equivalent.( 9.17) and the possible axial tensile
force strengths determined by the possible axial
compressive force after buckling.
Direction of the
Earthquake
Equivalent. (9.15) , Denk.( 9.16) and Equivalent.( 9.17) shall be used exactly for the possible axial
tensile and compressive force strengths (IAC) and divided by 1.5 for (GCT). Fcre, the calculation of
the possible critical buckling stress can be based on the length of the cross element itself.
9.6.2.3 – The axial forces of columns, beams and joints shall be calculated with the help of
equilibrium equations for each of the mechanical states
on which 9.6.2.2(a) and (b) are based.
T yy g = RFA
1 g of creP = 1.14FA
2P = cre g0.30 (1.14 )FA
9.6.2.4 – In determining the required strength of columns, beams and joints, the most unfavorable
internal forces defined in 9.6.2.3 shall be used instead of the earthquake effects in the load
combinations given in 9.2.5. These earthquake effects will not be greater than the effects of
increased earthquakes, in accordance with 9.2.6.
9.6.3. Crosses
The cross elements of the central diagonal steel frames with a high level of ductility shall be
dimensioned in such a way as to meet the following conditions.
9.6.3.1 – The ratio of precision (rod buckling length / inertial radius) in the cross elements shall
meet the condition KL i/≤ 200.
9.6.3.2 – Cross-sections with multi-part crosses may only be used provided that their parts are
joined continuously.
9.6.3.3 – Crosses shall be sized taking into account the load combinations containing the
earthquake effect given in 9.2.5.
9.6.3.4 – Fracture strength calculated using the effective net area of the cross, tue
Yield
strength calculated using RFA lossless cross-sectional area is less than RFA
yyg
will not be. When this condition cannot be met, the net field cross section will be supplemented
by considering the following conditions.
(a) The characteristic yield stress of the reinforcing element shall be at least equal to the
characteristic yield stress of the cross element.
(b) Detail of the joining of the reinforcing element to the cross-element, RFA fb /1.5 (GCT) or RFA
yyyyfb
(YDKT) will be dimensioned under the influence of axial force.
9.6.4. Additional Terms for Custom Cross Layouts
9.6.4.1 – In the case of V or inverted V-shaped diagonal systems, the additional conditions that
the beams to which the crosses are connected must meet are given below.
(a) The beams shall be continuous between the columns joined together.
(b) The upper and lower headings of the beams shall be supported in a lateral direction on the
basis of the relevant conditions given in 9.2.8. In addition, it will be ensured that the upper and
lower heads of the beams are supported in the lateral direction at the points where the
diagonals are connected.
(c) The required strengths of the beams and their combinations shall be calculated according to
the load combinations including the earthquake effects, taking into account the unbalanced
forces and vertical loads generated by the internal forces referred to in 9.6.2.2 as earthquake
effects.
9.6.4.2 – In frames with a high level of ductility central steel, the K-shaped diagonal arrangement
(where the crosses are connected to the midpoint of the column) is not allowed.
9.6.4.3 – In steel frames with high ductility central diagonals, the use of only pulling crosses is not
allowed.
9.6.5. Cross – Beam – Column Joints
The connection of the cross element or nodal plate to the beam-column junction zone shall comply
with the following conditions. Furthermore, the following internal forces shall be evaluated
together with the internal forces of the struts (transmission elements) calculated as described in
9.10.3.
(a) When the column join of the beam is designed jointed, the joining detail shall be so as to
provide a rotation angle of at least 0.025 radians. For this connection detail, one of the beam-
column joining details given in Annex 9C and proven to meet this condition can be used.
(b) When the column junction of the beam is designed rigidly, the joining detail shall be sized to
transfer a smaller of the bending moment values given below.
(1) From a multiple of 1.1 R / 1.5 (GCT) or 1.1 R (RV) of the plasticization moment M of the beam
p yy
formed bending moment.
(2) 1.1 Ry /1.5 of the total plasticization moment of the columns ∑ Mp of the columns converging to
the nodal point
(GCT) or 1.1Ry (YDKT) multiple of the bending moment.
9.6.6. Required Strength of Cross-End Joints
Cross-end joints will be dimensioned based on the internal forces of the earthquake magnified by
multiplying the strength excess coefficient by D. These internal forces shall not exceed the axial
tensile and compressive forces given below and the flexural strengths.
(a) Tensile force strength
In the event that the cross is under the tensile effect, the tensile force strength RFA (YDKT) or
yyg
0.7 will be calculated with RFA /1.5 (GCT).
yyg
(b) Compressive strength strength

In case of pressure influence of the cross, the compressive force strength, RFA and 1.14FA
yygcre g
The smallest of the possible axial compressive strength strength strength calculated by (YDKT) will
be obtained by multiplying by (1.1) for (IAC) or (GKT).
0.7 1.1/1.5)
(c) Compatibility of the nodal plate with cross-buckling

The cross joint will have the strength to meet the bending effects that will occur due to the twisting
of the cross. This shall be ensured by complying with one of the following conditions.
(1) Required flexural strength
When it is foreseen that the end plastic joints are formed in the cross element itself, the flexural
strength of the cross joint must be greater than the possible flexural strength value of the cross
element. The possible bending moment strength of the diagonal is the one that corresponds to
the slightest buckling strength
will be calculated with RM (GKT) or 1.1RM (YDKT) according to the axis (1.1/1.5 ).
yp yp
(2) Rotational capacity

When it is envisaged that the end plastic joints will form at the nodal point or connecting plate, its
cross joint will have sufficient rotational capacity. Sufficient rotational capacity shall be ensured
by the establishment of sufficient zones in the nodal plate or mounting plate to be used in the
cross-element end junction to allow plastic rotation. The details that can be applied to meet this
condition are given in Annex 9C.
Column attachments shall be sized to meet the conditions given in 9.2.10. The bending moment
strength of the column inserts shall not be less than 50% of the bending capacity of the smaller
section of the added elements. Required shear force strength, ∑ Mpc /1.5H c
(GCT) or ∑ be calculated as M / H (YDKT). Here ∑ M , crop top and
pcc pc
the sum of the characteristic plastic bending moment strengths of the columns below
Shows.
9.7. DUCTILITY LEVEL LIMITED CENTRAL DIAGONAL STEEL FRAMES
The rules to be applied in the sizing of central diagonal steel frames with limited ductility are given
below.
9.7.1.1 – In the beams, columns and crosses of steel frames with limited ductility levels, the width
/ thickness, body height / thickness and diameter / thickness ratios of the head shall not exceed
the limit values of λmd given in Table 9.3.
Taking into account the required strengths for sizing the columns, beams and joints of the central
diagonal steel framing systems with limited ductility, the excess strength coefficient defined in
9.2.6, the load combinations involving the earthquake effect magnified by D
will be determined.
9.7.3. Crosses
The cross elements of the central diagonal steel frames with limited ductility shall be dimensioned
in such a way as to meet the following conditions.
9.7.3.1 – The ratio of precision of the cross elements (rod buckling

length/inertia radius) shall not exceed the limit value of 200 ≤ KL/i. However
In the
9.7.3.2 – In steel frames withcase of using central diagonals with limited ductility, the
use of multi-part elements may becross permitted provided that the parts that
make up the cross-section of theirarrangements in cross elements behave as one piece. This
condition must be ensured bythe form of V or evenly spaced bond plates in multi-part
bars, the distance between which isinverted V, the the thickness of a bond plate, and in other
cases by lattice joints (meshcondition of 4.0 y elements). In the design of the
interconnecting elements of multi-for the ratio of part crosses, Section 8.4 of the "Regulation
on the Design, Calculation andslender will be Construction Principles of Steel Structures"
shall be taken as basis. observed.
9.7.3.3 – Crosses, taking into account the load combinations including the earthquake effect given
in 9.2.5
will be sized.
9.7.4.1 – In V- or inverted V-shaped diagonal systems, the additional conditions that the beams
must meet where the crosses are connected outside the beam-column junction zone are given
below.
(a) The beams shall be continuous between the columns.
(b) The upper and lower headings of the beams shall be supported in a lateral direction on the
basis of the relevant conditions given in 9.2.8. In addition, it will be ensured that the upper and
lower heads of the beams are supported in the lateral direction at the points where the
diagonals are connected.
(c) The beams shall be dimensioned under their vertical loads and transverse axial forces as
defined below, in the case of the disregard of the crosses. In sizing the diagonals under the
tensile effect, the smallest of the following axial forces will be taken.
(1) Possible axial tensile force calculated as RFA /1.5 (GCT) or RFA (RSC).
yygyyg
(2) Coefficient of excess strength, tensile force magnified by D.
30% of the characteristic compressive strength (0.3FAg) at pressure-induced diagonals

Cr
will be taken as the compressive force.
(d) It shall also be shown that the beams to which the crosses are attached shall be shown to safely
bear the vertical loads acting on them if the crosses are ignored.
9.7.4.2 – In steel frames with central diagonals with limited ductility, the K-shaped diagonal
arrangement (where the crosses are connected to the midpoint of the column) is not allowed.
9.7.4.3 – In steel frames with central diagonals with limited ductility, the use of only pulling
diagonals may be permitted. However, for diagonals sized to carry only tensile force, the slender
ratio (rod buckling length/inertia radius) shall not exceed 300. This limit shall not apply to steel
cables and shafts.
9.7.5. Cross Joins
The required strengths for sizing cross joints shall be determined on the basis of 9.7.2. However,
the axial tensile and compressive forces to be used as the basis for sizing the cross combination
need not be greater than the axial tensile and compressive strength strengths described below.
(a) In the event that the cross is under a pulling effect,the possible tensile force strength calculated
by RFA yy g/1.5 (GCP) or RFAyy g(IAC).
(b) If the cross is under pressure influence, the possible possibility determined by RFA and
1.14FA
yygcre g
the possible cross-strength calculated by multiplying the smallest of the cross-axial compressive
strength strengths by (IAC) by 1.1 for (IAC) or (GCT).
0.7 1.1/1.5)
The conditions given in 9.6.7 for column inserts of central diagonal steel frames with high ductility
level shall also be specified for column inserts of central diagonal steel frames with limited ductility
valid.
9.8. HIGH DUCTILITY LEVEL OUTWARD CENTER DIAGONAL STEEL FRAMES
Exfocal cross steel frames with high ductility levels are horizontal load-bearing systems in which
the bond beams have the ability to make significant nonlinear deformation under the effects of
earthquakes. These systems are sized in such a way that during the plastic deformation of the
bond beams, columns, crosses and other beams other than the bond beam remain in the elastic
zone. The rules to be applied in the sizing of eccentric cross steel frames with high ductility are
given below.
9.8.1.1 – In the beams, columns and crosses of steel frames with high ductility levels, the width /
thickness, body height / thickness and diameter / thickness ratios of the head shall not exceed the
limit value of λ hd given in Table 9.3.
9.8.2. Vineyard Beams
9.8.2.1 – In steel frames with a high level of ductility, there shall be a tie beam at least one end of
each cross element.
9.8.2.2 – The bond beams shall be dimensioned under internal forces (bending moment, axial
force and shear force) calculated on the basis of the load combinations including the earthquake
effects given in 9.2.5.
9.8.2.3 – Design shear force strength strength of the bond beam, V / Ω (GKT) or φV (YDKT),
nv vn
Equivalent. (9.18) As specified in , the smallest shear force found in the body from the yield limit
states under the influence of the shear force and the yield limit in the effect of the bending
moment of the section is taken as the strength. For both limits, Ω=v 1.67 (GCP) or φ= v 0.90 (RSA).
(9.18)
(
Vn =min Vp;2
The following expressions shall be used for V p and M p.
P
r
≤ V p = 0.6 FA and M = for 0.15 (9.19)

yw p yp
P
FW y
P
r
(9.20)
V = 0.6FA 1−(/) for 0.15 and M =FW
> PP
p yw ry pyp
P
y
In the case of yield limit, theaxial force strength strength of P y is FA Y G/1.5 (GCT) or FAy g(IAC)
will be taken as.
9.8.2.4 – The body plate of the tie beam shall be one-piece, there shall be no reinforcing plates
within the plane of the body. Gaps in the body plate are not allowed.
9.8.2.5 – The tie beam shall have a wide-head rolling I profile or construction I cross-section. In
the case of using a cross-sectional ligament beam, the cap and body plate joints shall be provided
by full penetration blunt welding.
2
9.8.3. Lateral Support of the Vineyard Beam
will be supported accordingly.

9.8.4. Angle of rotation of the bond beam
Floor I where the tie beam is located, as defined in Section 4 ∆ relative floor degradation
i
ermine
pθ = iii R Ih ∆ (9.21)
9.8.3.1 – The upper and lower heads of the tie beam are at both ends of the beam, and in the
case of the vineyard beams arranged on the edge of the column, at one end of the beam, on the
basis of the special conditions given in 9.2.8.2(b), the lateral
In terms of the relative layer displacement found by the equation, the angle of rotation of the
bond beam p in the γ between the bond beam and the floor beam in the extension of this beam
shall not exceed the limit values given below (Figure 9.8).
(a) 0.08 radians if the length of the bond beam is less than or equal to 1.6 MV.
/
pp
(b) 0.02 radians if the length of the bond beam is greater than or equal to 2.6 MV.
/
pp
If the
length of
the
bond
beam is
between these two limit values, linear interpolation will be performed.
LL
γp=θpγ p =θp
So
L
γp= θp
2m
Figure 9.8
9.8.5. Rigidity Plates
9.8.5.1 – Rigidity plates shall be arranged at the ends where the cross elements transfer a direct
load to the tie beam and its extensions. Rigidity plates, unless otherwise specified, shall be
placed on both sides of the bond beam body plate, at the height of the body plate and (bbf – tw)/2
(Figure 9.9). The thickness of the rigidity boards shall not be less than 0.75 of the body plate
thickness and 10mm. The continuous corner welds connecting the rigidity plates to the body of
the ligament beam shall be capable of transferring the forces consisting of the cross-sectional
area of the rigidity plate multiplied by the material yield stress.
rigidity plates (9.8.5.1)

axes bond
cross and tie beam
Fig. 9.9
beam e
9.8.5.2
– In
addition to the rigidity plates at the ends of the tie beam, intermediate rigidity plates as defined
below shall be placed.
(a) The intermediate distances of the intermediate rigidity plates in the case of bond beams
with a length of 1.6M p/Vp or less shall be greater than if the angle of rotation of the bond beam is
0.08 radians (30 t w- d b /5 ) and if the angle of rotation of the bond beam is less than 0.02 radians
(52t – d /5 ) will not be more than .
Wb
Linear interpolation will be performed for the intermediate values of the angle of rotation of the
bond beam.
(b) In the case of bond beams whose length is equal to or greater than 2.6 M/V and whose
length is less than 5 M/V, the bond
Rigidity plates shall be placed at a distance of 1.5bbf from the ends of the pp pp beam.
(c) In the case of bond beams between 1.6M/V and 2.6M/V in length, the spacing specified in (a)
and (b)
pp pp
rigidity plates shall be used together.
(d) There is no need to use intermediate rigidity plates in bond beams with a length of 5M p/Vp
or longer.
9.8.6. Crosses, Floor Beams and Columns
l
9.8.6. reas In o
– Bond Beam plasticization one loading Given
1 on 9.2.5 a
d
V= min V;2 Me, with a design magnification coefficient defined as VV

( /)
p n/
npE
will be determined by increasing it to be compatible.
9.8.6.2 – In determining the required strength of the crosses, the load given in 9.2.5
The earthquake effects at their junction will be magnified by 1.25 R y times the loading that causes
the bond beam to plasticize. Crosses with cross-sections, whose cross sections are multipart, can
only be used provided that their parts are joined continuously.
9.8.6.3 – In determining the required strength of the part of the floor beam other than the bond
beam, the earthquake effects at the load combinations given in 9.2.5 shall be magnified by 1.1 R y
times of the load causing the plasticization of the bond beam if the beams are working as
composites with reinforced concrete slabs, and in the other case by 1.25Ry times.
9.8.6.4 – In determining the required strength of the columns, the load given in 9.2.5
The earthquake effects in their combination will be magnified by 1.1Ry times the loading that causes
the bond beam to plasticize.
The conditions given in 9.6.7 for column inserts of central diagonal steel frames with a high level of
ductility shall also be specified for column inserts of eccentric cross steel frames with a high
ductility level
is true.
9.8.8. Cross-Tie Beam Joint
The detail of the joining of the crosses with the tie beam shall be dimensioned according to the
internal forces calculated as specified in 9.8.6.2.
9.8.9. Bond Beam-Column Joint
9.8.9.1 – Length of the ligament beam joining into the column

(9.22) e≤1.6
(Figure 9.10).
9.8.9.2 – Detail of the joint transferring the welded moment in the connection of the bond beam
to the column (See Annex 9C) will be used. Full penetration blunt welding shall be applied for the
connection of the heads of the tie beam to the column. Flexural moment strength of the
connection of the bond beam to the column Mp
value, the shear force strength shall not be less than 1.1V p. The bend here
The torque strength M p and the shear force strength Vp are equivalent in 9.8.2.3 ( 9.19) or
Equivalent.( 9.20).
Fig. 9.10
9.8.10. Cross – Beam –

Column
Junction
The connection of the

cross or nodal point
board to the beam-
column
junction zone shall
comply with the
following
conditions. In
addition, the
following
internal forces shall be
evaluated together with the internal forces of the struts (transfer elements) calculated as
described in 9.10.3.
(a) When the column join of the beam is articulated, the joining detail shall be so as to provide a
rotation angle of at least 0.025 radians. For this connection detail, one of the beam-column
joining details given in Annex 9C or analytically proven to satisfy this condition can be used.
(b) When the column join of the beam is taken rigidly, the joining detail shall be sized to convey
the smaller of the bending moment values given below.
(1) The plasticization moment of the beam is 1.1 R / 1.5 (GCT) or 1.1R (RV) of M
py y
magnified bending moment.
(2) The total plasticization moment of the columns converging to the nodal point is 1.1 Ry /1.5 of
the ∑ Mp
(GKT) or 1.1Ry (YDKT) multiples magnified by a tense.
9.9. BUCKLING RESISTANT DIAGONAL STEEL FRAMES
The buckling-prevented cross steel frames, which are formed by centrally connecting specially
produced buckling-prevented cross elements to the beams or beam-column joint zones, are sized in
such a way that plastic deformations are formed on the cross elements under the effects of tensile
and pressure. The rules to be applied in the sizing of these systems are given below.
9.9.1.1 – In the beams and columns of the crossed steel frames that are prevented from buckling,
the ratio of head width/thickness, body height/thickness and diameter/thickness shall not exceed
the limit values of λ hd given in Table 9.3.
9.9.1.2 – An amount of eccentricity not exceeding the beam cross-sectional height at the end joints
of the cross-sectional joints of the cross-sectioned cross-sections of the cross-section may be
permitted provided that the internal forces obtained by taking this effect into account in the
design of the elements and joints are shown not to alter the state in which plastic deformations
occur in the cross members.
9.9.1.3 – Sprain prevented diagonals shall be sized on the basis of the greater of the deformation
situations corresponding to at least 2% relative ply offset and twice the design relative ply offset.
In determining the amount of deformation of the element, the displacement situation caused by
vertical load effects on diagonal frames shall also be taken into account.
9.9.1.4 – Cross-steel frames with buckling prevention shall be dimensioned on the basis of the fact
that the cross elements reach the flow under the force of tensile and compressive forces under
the influence of earthquake ground motion of the design.
9.9.2.1 – The required strengths for sizing columns, beams and joints of anti-buckling steel frame
systems shall be calculated on the basis of 9.2.6 as follows.
(a) For the calculation of the internal forces of columns, beams and joints in accordance with the
yield (mechanism) state described in 9.2.6, the internal forces of the crossover elements shall be
equivalent below. (9.23) and Denk. (9.24).
T = ωRP (9.23)
y ysc
P = βωRP (9.24)
y ysc
(b) The reinforcement effect correction coefficient, ω, shall be determined by the manufacturer
as the ratio of the maximum tensile strength to the yield strength (RP) for the possible
displacement situation.
y ysc
(c) The axial yield strength of the steel core is obtained by tensile test in determining P ysc
In the case of using the resulting yield stress, thereis no need to apply the coefficient R y.
(d) The coefficient of compressive strength correction, β, the maximum pressure for possible
displacement
will be determined as the ratio of the force to the maximum tensile force. This rate, determined
by the manufacturer, may in no case be less than 1.0.
9.9.2.2 – Crosses that have been prevented from buckling shall not be taken into account in the
transmission of vertical load effects.
9.9.2.3 – In the columns of the crossed steel frames with buckling prevention, it may be
permissible to neglect the bending moments that occur under the effects of earthquakes.
However, if there are horizontal forces acting between the tips of the columns, the bending
moments they will create shall be taken into account.
9.9.3. Crosses
The cross elements of the anti-buckling cross steel frames shall be sized in such a way as to meet
the following conditions.
9.9.3.1 – The cross elements shall consist of a steel core that satisfies the conditions given below
and a winding system that winds this core and prevents it from buckling.
(a) If sheets thicker than 50 mm or more are used as steel cores, such plates shall meet the
minimum notch toughness requirement given in 9.2.3.1(b).
(b) The creation of attachments in the steel core is not permitted.
(c) The system preventing buckling shall, in the event of possible displacement, limit the local
and general buckling of the steel core.
9.9.3.2 – Steel core shall meet the entire axial force acting on the cross-element
will be sized as follows. Axial force strength of the cross element, Pysc, Equivalent.( 9.25).
P = FA (9.25)
ysc ysc sc
Design axial force strength, φPysc, (YDKT) or safe axial force strength,
Pysc / Ω will be determined by taking (GKT), φ=0.90 (YDKT) or Ω=1.67 (GKT).
9.9.4.1 – In the case of V- or inverted V-shaped diagonal systems, the additional conditions that
the beams must meet are given below.
(a) The required strengths of the beams and their joints shall be determined according to the
respective load combinations, under the assumption that there are no crosses under the
influence of constant and moving loads. In load combinations involving earthquake effects,
earthquake effects will be calculated using the possible tensile and compressive strengths of the
cross elements.
(b) The beams shall be continuous between the columns. The upper and lower headings of the
beams shall be supported in a lateral direction on the basis of the conditions given in 9.2.8.1(b).
9.9.4.2 – In the case of anti-buckling diagonal steel frames, the K-shaped diagonal arrangement
(where the crosses are connected to the midpoint of the column) shall not be used.
9.9.5. Beam – Column Joints
In the beam-column junction zone, where the cross or nodal point plate is attached to the beam
and column, the joint will provide one of the following conditions. In addition, the following
internal forces shall be evaluated together with the internal forces of the struts (transfer elements)
calculated as described in 9.10.3.
(a) When the column join of the beam is designed jointed, the joining detail shall be so as to
provide a rotation angle of at least 0.025 radians. For this connection detail, one of the beam-
column joining details given in Annex 9C or analytically proven to satisfy this condition can be
used.
(b) When the column junction of the beam is designed rigidly, the joining detail shall be sized to
transfer a smaller of the bending moment values given below.
(1) The bending moment of the beam consisting of a multiple of 1.1 R y /1.5 (GCT) or 1.1Ry (YDKT)
of the plasticization momentM p.
(2) The total plasticization moment of the columns converging to the nodal point ∑Mp is 1.1 Ry
/1.5
(GCT) or 1.1Ry (YDKT) multiple of the bending moment.
9.9.6. Insert Joints of Crosses
9.9.6.1 – Cross-end joints obtained taking into account the conditions given in 9.9.2.1
will be dimensioned under the internal forces performed. These internal forces shall be taken into
account by multiplying by 1.1 for (IAC) or (by (GKT).
0.7 1.1/1.5)
9.9.6.2 – In the design of the joint, the buckling limit conditions of the nodal plate shall be taken
into account. If necessary, lateral support of the nodal point plate shall be provided.
Column attachments shall be sized to meet the conditions given in 9.2.10. If blunt welding is used
in the design of the attachment, full penetration welding will be used. The bending strength of the
column inserts shall not be less than 50% of the bending capacity of the smaller section of the
added elements. Required shear strength, ∑ M /1.5 H (GCT) or ∑ M / H (MNPR)
pcc pcc
will be calculated as follows.
9.10. HEAD AND SEWING ELEMENTS IN DIAPHRAGM
Diaphragms are carrier systems that are formed within the normal floor and roof planes and allow
horizontal forces to be safely transferred to horizontal load-bearing systems. The head zones and
struts (transfer elements) of a typical diaphragm system with reinforced concrete slab system, e.g.
for
earthquake
effects in
the
direction of
(y), are
shown
schematically in Figure 9.11. The elements and joints of the horizontal cross systems and space
lattice roof systems based on one of the horizontal load-bearing systems described in Table 4.1
shall also be dimensioned under the diaphragm forces defined in this section.
Fig. 9.11
9.10.1.1 – Diaphragms shall be sized to meet the cutting and bending effects created by horizontal
design forces on the floor plane. If there are discontinuities such as gaps and indented corners in
the diaphragms, the additional effects that will occur due to these discontinuities will be taken
into consideration and the cutting and bending effects in these areas will be safely transferred.
9.10.1.2 – In addition to the rules given in this section, the relevant design rules given in 7.11
shall also be taken into account in the sizing of the reinforced concrete structural elements
constituting the diaphragm.
9.10.2. Aperture Head
The diaphragm heads shall be dimensioned taking into account the force pair that creates tensile
and pressure effects due to the bending effect arising from the horizontal forces in the floor plane.
In reinforced concrete slabs, it shall be ensured that the pulling force of the diaphragm head is
safely transported by the additional tensile reinforcement to be placed inside the reinforced
concrete slab or only by the steel element. In reinforced concrete slabs, if the pressure stress value
in the outermost concrete fiber in the pressure zone does not exceed 0.20 fck , additional pressure
and winding reinforcement shall be used.
no need. The internal forces to be used in the design of the head zones shall be calculated taking
into account the load combinations involving the earthquake effect given in 9.2.5.
9.10.3. Aperture Struts
The diaphragm struts and joints shall be sized in such a way as to ensure safe transfer of loads
from the structural parts outside the horizontal load-bearing systems to the horizontal load-
bearing systems. The internal forces to be taken as the basis for sizing these elements and their
combinations shall be calculated by taking into account the load combinations given in 9.2.6,
including the coefficient of excess strength and the earthquake effect magnified by D.
9.10.4. Horizontal Cross Systems and Space Roof Lattice Systems
The elements and joints of horizontal cross systems and space roof truss systems shall be sized in
such a way as to ensure safe load transfer from the structural parts outside the horizontal load
bearing systems to the horizontal load bearing systems. The internal forces to be taken as the
basis for sizing these elements and their combinations shall be calculated on the basis of the load
combinations given in 9.2.6, which include the earthquake effect magnified by the strength
surplus coefficient, D.
9.11. STEEL – REINFORCED CONCRETE COMPOSITE COLUMNS OF MOMENTUM TRANSFERRING

FRAMES
9.11.1. General
The steel-reinforced concrete composite columns of the momentum-transferring frame type

carrier systems shall be dimensioned on the basis of the rules given in this section, Section 7 and
Section 12 of the "Regulation on the Design, Calculation and Construction Principles of Steel
Structures". The transition of the external load effect applied to steel recessed and concrete-filled
composite columns between the common surfaces of concrete and steel components with
longitudinal shear forces will be evaluated within the scope of Section 12.7 of the "Regulation on
the Design, Calculation and Construction Principles of Steel Structures". Horizontal load bearing
systems in buildings with steel reinforced concrete composite columns are divided into two classes
defined in 9.11.1.1 and 9.11.1.2 in terms of their behavior against earthquakes.
9.11.1.1 – In steel-reinforced concrete composite column buildings, the horizontal load bearing
systems mentioned below are defined as Systems with High Ductility Levels.
(a) Frame-type carrier systems that transmit momentum, consisting of reinforced concrete
beams satisfying the conditions given in 7.4 and steel recessed composite columns satisfying the
conditions referred to in 9.11.2.1 and 9.11.3.
(b) Momentum-transferring frame type carrier consisting of steel beams satisfying the
conditions laid down in 9.3 and composite columns filled with concrete filling satisfying the
conditions referred to in 9.11.2.2 and 9.11.4
Systems.
9.11.1.2 – In buildings with steel-reinforced concrete composite columns, the horizontal load
bearing systems specified below are defined as systems with limited ductility levels .
(a) Frame-type carrier systems that transmit momentum, consisting of reinforced concrete
beams satisfying the conditions given in 7.8 and steel recessed composite columns satisfying the
conditions specified in 9.11.5.
(b) Frame-type carrier systems that transmit momentum consisting of steel beams satisfying the
conditions specified in 9.4 and composite columns filled with concrete filling satisfying the
conditions specified in 9.11.6.
9.11.2.1 – In frames with high ductility levels of reinforced concrete beams and steel recessed
composite columns, in accordance with the earthquake under consideration, the sum of the
bending moment capacities of the columns converging to the nodal point of each beam column
shall be at least 20% greater than the sum of the bending moment capacities in the column face
sections of the beams joined to that node. In the case of columns where this condition cannot be
met, the rules given in 7.3.6 shall be taken as basis.
9.11.2.2 – In frames with high ductility levels of torque, consisting of steel beams and composite
columns filled with concrete, in accordance with the earthquake under consideration, Equivalent.(
9.7) shall be shown that the condition that the columns be stronger than the beams is satisfied. In
the case of columns in which this condition cannot be satisfied, the conditions given in 9.3.3 shall
be 9.10) will be applied on the basis of 0.10 coefficient instead of 0.30 coefficient.
9.11.2.3 – In calculating the bending moment capacities of composite columns, in accordance with
the direction of the earthquake, the design axial forces that make these moment capacities the
smallest shall be taken into account.
9.11.2.4 – In steel-reinforced concrete composite column ductility-less frames transferring limited

momentum, it is not mandatory to meet the condition that the columns are stronger than the
beams.
9.11.3. Steel Recessed Composite of Frames Transferring Moment with High Ductility Level
Columns
9.11.3.1 – The cross section of the columns of the frames transferring the ductile high momentum
consisting of reinforced concrete beams and steel recessed composite columns, the vertical loads
under vertical loads and the axial load combination calculated by the load combination of 1.2++ ± d
under the joint influence of vertical loads, taking into account the load reduction coefficients
defined for moving loads in TS 498 under vertical loads
GQSE 0.2
the largest of the compressive forces is Ndm
NDM ≤ 0.40P( 9.26)
condition. Here, the axial compressive strength strength strength of the composite column cross
section is Pno, Equivalent.( 9.27).
P = 0.85AF +AF +AF (9.27)
no cck sy srysr
9.11.3.2 – Special hugging zones shall be established at the lower and upper ends of each column.
The length of each of the winding zones shall not be less than 1/6 of the free height of the column,
1.5 times the large size of the column cross section and 500 mm, to be measured upwards from
the upper elevation of the slab and downwards starting from the lower side of the deepest beam
attached to the column.
9.11.3.3 – Transverse reinforcement with a diameter of less than 10 mm shall not be used in
winding areas. In this region, the spacing of the ether and gyros in the longitudinal direction shall
not be smaller than 1/3 of the small size of the column cross-section, six times the diameter of the
longitudinal reinforcement and no greater than 150 mm, not smaller than 50 mm. The horizontal
distance between the ether arms and/or chiros surrounding the longitudinal reinforcement shall
not be greater than twenty-five times the diameter of the ether. The step of continuous circular
spirals will be no larger than 1/5 of the diameter of the belly and 80 mm. In circular columns, all
winding reinforcement will be provided by transverse reinforcement placed around the perimeter.
9.11.3.4 – The middle region of the colon is the area between the cuddling zones defined at the
lower and upper ends of the colon. The range of winding reinforcement in this zone shall not
exceed twice the interval specified in 9.11.3.3.
9.11.3.5 – Column attachments shall be sized to meet the conditions specified in 9.2.10.2, 9.2.10.3
and 9.3.5.
9.11.3.6 – Reinforcing steel inserts shall be constructed in such a way as to meet the conditions
specified in Chapter 7.
9.11.3.7 – Total longitudinal reinforcement cross-sectional area A, 0.01 A <A <0.04 A

srgsrg
Will. where Agis the total cross-sectional area of the composite column. An overlay addition is
made
The total longitudinal reinforcement cross-sectional area in sections shall not exceed 0.06A g.
9.11.3.8 – In the case of etricated columns, if the axial force is Ndm >0.20Pno (pressure)
the minimum total transverse reinforcement area in the winding zones, Equivalent.( 9.28).
⎛ FA ⎞⎛f ⎞
Ash =0.075sbk ⎜1− ⎟⎜ ⎟ (9.28) ⎝ no ⎠⎜⎝ ysr
ys ck P F
⎟ ⎠
9.11.3.9 – In the case of N >0.20P (pressure) in spiral-equipped circular columns

dm no
The minimum volumetric ratio of transverse reinforcement in the winding areas is equivalent to (
9.29).
ys ⎞
⎛f ⎞
⎛ FA
⎟ (9.29)
ck
⎜ ⎟
s ⎜ ⎟⎜
ρ≥0.12 1 −
Pf
⎝ no ⎠⎝ ywk ⎠
9.11.3.10 – In the case of Ndm ≤0.20Pno ., the equivalent in the column wrapping areas shall be 9.28)
and
Equivalent. At least 2/3 of the transverse reinforcements supplied with (9.29) shall be used as
minimum transverse reinforcement.
9.11.3.11 – Inside the transverse reinforcement foundation a column not less than the minimum
size
will be maintained along the height.
9.11.4. Concrete Filled Composite of Frames Transferring Momentum with High Ductility Level
Columns
9.11.4.1 – In the case of frames with high ductility levels consisting of steel beams and composite
columns filled with concrete filling, the head width/thickness, body height/thickness and
diameter/wall thickness ratios are given in Table 9.3 of the λhd limit values given in Table 9.3
will not exceed.
9.11.4.2 – Column cross-section, under vertical loads, taking into account the load reduction
coefficients defined for moving loads in TS 498 under vertical loads and under the joint influence
of the earthquake
1.2 ++ The largest of the axial pressure forces calculated by the load combination of 0.2S ± d is N dm
GQ E
to be Denk.( 9.26).
In this equation, the axial compressive force strength strength of the composite column cross
section is Pno, Equivalent.( 9.27). Here, instead of the coefficient 0.85, the coefficient 0.95 will be
used.
9.11.4.3 – The characteristic shear force strength strength of the composite column shall be
calculated only by taking into account the effective shear area of the structural steel cross-section.
9.11.4.4 – Column attachments shall be sized to meet the conditions specified in 9.2.10.2 and
9.2.10.3.
9.11.4.5 – Beam-column joints shall be formed using diaphragm plates at beam head levels,
outside the column or inside the column. The thickness of these boards shall be taken at least
equal to the thickness of the beam head. The diaphragm boards shall be connected to the column
along its entire perimeter using full-penetration blunt welding or double-sided corner welding. In
the diaphragm plates formed in the column, circular gaps of such dimensions as to ensure the
passage of concrete will be opened.
9.11.4.6 – Steel beam-composite column joints shall be capable of providing a relative floor
displacement angle of at least 0.04 radians (relative floor displacement/floor height). For this,
details that have been proven to be valid by experimental and/or analytical methods will be used.
9.11.5. Steel Recessed Composite Columns of Frames Transferring Ductility Limited Moment
9.11.5.1 – For columns of frames with a high level of ductility consisting of reinforced concrete
beams and steel recessed composite columns, all the conditions given in 9.11.3 apply equally to
columns of frames that transfer ductility limited momentum consisting of reinforced concrete
beams and steel recessed composite columns.
9.11.5.2 – Column cross-section, under vertical loads, under the joint influence of vertical loads
and earthquakes, taking into account the load reduction coefficients defined for moving loads in
TS 498
1.2 ++ The largest of the axial pressure forces calculated by the load combination of 0.2S ± d is N dm
GQ E
to be Denk.( 9.26). In this equation, the axial compressive force strength strength of the
composite column cross section is Pno, Equivalent.( 9.27).
9.11.6. Concrete Filled Composite Columns of Frames Transferring Momentum Limited to Ductility Level
9.11.6.1 – The columns of frames transferring ductility limited momentum, consisting of steel
beams and composite columns filled with concrete, shall meet the following cross-sectional
conditions.
(a) In frame columns, the heading width/thickness, body height/thickness and diameter/wall
thickness ratios shall not exceed the λ md limit values given in Table 9.3.
(b) Under the joint influence of vertical load and earthquake, the column section is under the
joint influence of vertical load and earthquake, taking into account the load reduction coefficients
defined for moving loads in TS 498 under vertical loads
1.2+0.2S d
The largest of the axial compressive forces calculated by GQ ± E load combinations

Ndm , Denk .( 9.26). In this equation, the composite column
Axial compressive strength strength strength of the cross section, Pno, Equivalent.( 9.27). Here
The coefficient 0.95 will be used instead of the 0.85 coefficient.
9.11.6.2 – For columns of frames with a high level of ductility consisting of steel beams and
composite columns filled with concrete filling, the conditions given in 9.11.4.3, 9.11.4.4 and
9.11.4.5 apply equally to columns of frames with limited momentum transfer consisting of steel
beams and composite columns filled with concrete filling.
9.11.6.3 – Steel beam-composite column joints shall be capable of providing a relative floor
displacement angle of at least 0.02 radians (relative floor displacement/floor height). For this,
details that have been proven to be valid by experimental and/or analytical methods will be used.
9.12. BASIC CONNECTION DETAILS
Unless otherwise specified below, all basic connection details, including basic connection details
that are outside the scope of carrier systems under the influence of earthquake loads, will be sized
according to the rules given in this section.
9.12.1 – The required strengths for sizing the basic connection details shall be determined on the
basis of 9.2.6.
9.12.2 – The necessary axial tensile and compressive strength strength of the connection details
of the horizontal load-bearing system columns to the foundation shall be calculated taking into
account the vertical components of the required strengths of the other element combinations
connected to the foundation in question. However, these forces shall not be less than the greater
of the axial pressure and tensile forces defined for the column inserts in the relevant substances.
9.12.3 – The required shear force strength of the basic connection details shall be calculated taking
into account the matters described below.
(a) The sum of the horizontal components of the required strength of the joints of the diagonals
connected to the foundation of the diagonal frame systems.
(b) In the columns of the frames transferring momentum, the shear force strength defined for
the column inserts.
9.12.4 – The required flexural strength of the connection details of the horizontal load carrier
systems to the foundation shall be calculated by taking into account the issues described below.
(a) The combination of the required flexural strength of the joints of the columns and crosses
connected to the foundation of the diagonal frame systems.
(b) In the columns of the frames transmitting momentum, the bending moment values defined
below are less.
(1) Flexural impingement of the columns calculated by 1.1 R FW /1.5 (GCT) or 1.1R FW (YDKT)
yyp yyp
Resistance.
(2) The flexural moment calculated by taking into account the load combinations including the
earthquake effect magnified by the coefficient of strength surplus given in 9.2.6, D.
9.12.5 – In the case of the use of full penetration blunt welding in the connection of the column
to the base plate, the starting and ending plates and the underlay plates shall be removed after
welding. However, if the underlay boards on the inner face of the heads and the body of profiles with
I cross section are fixed to the base plate by corner welds with a thickness of at least 6 mm, the
underlay plates do not need to be removed. Underlay slabs are not allowed to be welded to the
column heads.
9.12.6 – The elongation rate of the anchor rod material shall not be less than 14%.
9.13. PROJECT ACCOUNT REPORT AND IMPLEMENTATION PROJECTS

RULES
9.13.1. Project Account Report
9.13.1.1 – The project account report shall contain the main information given in Sections 2, 3, 4
and 5 regarding the earthquake account report.
9.13.1.2 – The project account report shall also contain the following information.
(a) The material qualities and characteristic strength values of the profiles and sheet metal
sheets constituting the building carrier system and of the bolts used in additions and joints.
(b) The tensile strength characteristic of the welding material (welding metal).
(c) Load combinations based on design, earthquake design load combinations and increased
earthquake effects.
9.13.1.3 – In addition to the sizing calculations and stability (stability) investigations of the
structural elements, the calculations of the joints and additional details are also detailed within
the scope of the project account report.
will be given.
9.13.2. Rules for Steel Application Project Drawings
9.13.2.1 – The steel application project shall include the following sheets.
(a) General construction plans for roofing and floor coverings.
(b) Column application (layout) plan.
(c) Anchor plan and details.
(d) A sufficient number of façade views and sections.
(e) Detail drawings of the columns and beams that make up the building system and of the roof,
horizontal plane and vertical plane crosses.
(f) All joining and additional details.
9.13.2.2 – The type and material qualities of the profiles and plates used in the construction of the
building and the bolts used in the joints, the type of electrode to be used and the characteristic
tensile strength shall be indicated on all sheets.
9.13.2.3 – Building Use Class (BKS), Earthquake Design Class (DTS) and local ground characteristics
taken into consideration in the design and the carrier system behavior coefficient, R and strength
surplus coefficient determined according to Table 4.1, D shall be specified in all general
construction sheets.
9.13.2.4 – Bolt type, bolt and hole diameters used in bolt joints and additional details,
information about the properties of washers and nuts, the pre-pulling force to be applied to the
bolts and the friction surface will be given.
9.13.2.5 – In the welded joints and additional details, the type of welding to be applied, the
thickness and length of the weld, the geometric dimensions of the welding bevel, the base plate
and the welding access hole details shall be given in the blunt welds where the welding bevel
should be opened.
9.13.2.6 – Information on the characteristics of the anchor rod to be applied, bar and hole
diameters, anchor length shall be given in the anchor details.
ANNEX 9A – GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR THE COMBINATION OF EARTHQUAKE FORCE CARRIER SYSTEMS
9A.1 – In order to prevent the same force sharing between bolts and sources, the principles to be
followed in the typical combination and its additional details are given in Figure 9A.1.
Figure 9A.1
A. In the bolted connection of the

body, welded joints of the heads, the
body joint should be
dimensioned taking into account
only the cutting force, and the welded
joints of the heads should be
dimensioned taking into account the
column axial force (tensile or
pressure) and bending moments.
B. In the case of on-site welded
cross-beam-column joints, the vertical
component of the force in the cross
element must be distributed in
accordance with the welded joints
between the nodal plate- column
head and the beam body- column
head. Mounting bolts can be used on the
beam body.
C. In cross-node plate joints, the caps
and welds in the body should be
dimensioned according to the axial
force of the cross. Bolts can be used for
installation purposes.
D. In bolted cross-beam- column
joints , the horizontal and vertical
components of the force in the cross
element must be distributed in accordance with the bolted joints between the nodal plate-column
head and the beam body-column head.
E. In workshop welded cross-beam-column joints , the vertical component of the force in the
cross element must be distributed in accordance with the welded joints between the nodal plate-
column head and the beam body-column head.
F. In beam-column joints transferring momentum, the bolted body joint should be dimensioned
by taking into account the cutting force, and the welded heads should be dimensioned under
bending moments and axial forces.
9A.2 – Bolts and welds may not be used together in such a way as to share a force or component of
a force in the combination, as specified in 9.2.3.4. The situations encountered in bolted and welded
joints that are not suitable for force sharing are described in Figure 9A.2.
Figure 9A.2
A. In the bolted connection of the body,

welded heads of the housing, bolts and welds
cannot be used in such a way as to transfer the
axial force at the cross together.
B. If the nodal point plate is welded to the
column face and the beam body is bolted, the
load transfer will be different depending on
whether the connection to the column face
consists of welded or bolted joints. In such a
case, the welded nodal plate junction on the
column face will tend to transfer the sum of the
vertical component of the force in the cross
element and the vertical bearing response on the beam. At the same time, the transfer of
horizontal force to the column by bolted joint in the beam body will also be prevented due to the
more rigid welded nodal plate joints, so that the nodal board-beam head welded joint will also
tend to transfer the entire horizontal component of the force at the cross. Thus, the forces
required to be transferred to the column in the beam-column-cross combination will be
transferred to a large extent by the welded connection of the nodal point plate to the column face,
and the sliding plate in the beam body will not be able to transfer force. In this case, taking into
account the stability of the joint, additional moments will be formed in the beams and columns,
and in order to transfer these moments, greater forces will affect the welds on the nodal plate-
column face and nodal plate-beam head.
t = Element thickness
tBf = Beam head thickness
tBw = Beam body thickness
tCf = Head thickness of the column section
pt = Butt plate thickness
pt =
b = Body
Widthslip plate thickness part
of cross-sectional
st =
bBf = Body
Beamrigidity plate thickness
head width
Sct = Column body rigidity plate thickness
bCf = Column head width
wt = Element housing thickness
pb = Forehead plate width
V
pb
d =
= Header plate width plastic joint point of the beam, consisting of vertical loads
Simple beam at the
cutting
Taking force
into account situations such as consolidation, pos m great
UcV = Required a of the joint
etc. in theshear force strength strength on the column face
combination sibl o bending
c
pPrW = Plastic strength moment according to the bending axis n
= e s
φd = Strength coefficient for ductile migration d
t
nφ = Strength coefficient forthe
non-ductile migration
A coefficient used for calculation of the strength of the moment
d = Characteristic height of the cross section
db = Beam cross-section height
cd = Column cross section height
E = Modulus of elasticity of structural steel ( 200000MPa E = )
uF = Structural steel characteristic tensile strength
yF = Structural steel characteristic yield stress
FxF = Characteristic yield stress of the plate
g = Horizontal distance between bolts
h = Element body height
ph = Body slip plate height
St.h = Height of rigidity plate
h = Distance of the possible plastic joint point at the beam ends to the column face
n = Opening of the beam between possible plastic joint points at the beam ends
St.L = Minimum length of rigidity sheets
Prm = Possible bending torque capacity
Mpri = Possible bending moment capacity at the left end of the beam i
Mprj = Possible bending moment capacity at the right end of the beam j
UcM = Required bending moment strength on the column face of the joint
n = The total number of bolts used in one head of the beam
tR = Ratio of possible tensile strength to characteristic tensile strength
yR = The ratio of possible yield stress to characteristic yield stress
s = Distance between the centers of two consecutive holes
s1 = Distance of the hole closest to the column head to the column head surface
ANNEX 9B – DIRT-COLUMN JOINING DETAILS IN MOMENT-TRANSFERRING STEEL FRAMES
9B.0. ICONS
9B.1. SCOPE AND GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
9B.1.1 – In this section, various examples of bolted and welded joint details are given, which have
been proven by experimental and/or analytical methods to be capable of providing at least 0.04
radians or 0.02 radians relative floor displacement angle (relative floor displacement / floor height)
as stipulated in 9.3.4.1(a) and 9.4.2.1(a).
9B.1.2 – These details may be used in beam-column joints transferring momentum of frames with
high ductility and limited ductility within the limits of application given for them in this chapter.
9B.1.3 – The cross-sections of the joined beams and columns shall meet the conditions described
below.
(a) Profiles with rolling product broad titles shall be used in accordance with the boundary
conditions given for them in this section.
(b) Dual symmetry axis elements with cross section I may be used if the following conditions are
met:
(1) The width, height and thickness of the heads and body shall be compatible with the rolled
product profiles that meet the relevant conditions given in this section.
(2) Continuous welding should be used in the connection of the body to the heads. The
application principles for the making beams and columns of these welds are given in the
following articles.
(i) In the case of made beams, the body and heads shall be joined by full-penetrating blunt
welding, together with corner welding reinforcement applied to both sides of the body,
exceeding the plastic joint position (h) from the end of the beam not less than one beam
height. The thickness of the corner welding reinforcement cannot be less than 6 mm and 0.70
times the thickness of the beam body.
(ii) In the case of sections I, the column body and caps shall be joined by full-penetrating blunt
welding together with the corner welding reinforcement applied in the zone containing the
section up to 300 mm away from the upper and lower heads of the joining beam. The thickness
of the corner welding reinforcement cannot be less than 6mm and 0.70 times the thickness of
the column body.
(iii) Box cross-sectional wide-head I profiles as the title of the plates
if used, the width / thickness of these boards,
height/thickness, /w
The ht ratio cannot be greater than the corresponding limit value given in Table
9.3. The head and body plates of the box-cross-sectioned columns shall be
joined by full- penetrating blunt welding, in the zone covering the section
up to 300 mm The away from the upper and lower heads of the joining beam.
Outside this zone,bt/ratio cannot the joining of the plates will be provided by a continuous
corner or bluntexceed 0.6 y, with welding.
b being the net
(iv) Titled (
width between
headings. If the
) cross- sectional columns can be formed using rolling product or
plates are used
made-cross sectional elements. The body of the T-cross section element
as a body,
shall be joined to the body of the continuous I-cross section element with full-
penetration blunt welding, together with the corner welding reinforcement applied on both sides.
The minimum thickness of the corner weld is 6 mm and the thickness of the column body
It will be taken equal to the smaller one of 0.70 times. Continuous plates will provide the
conditions given for columns with wide heads.
9B.1.4 – The design of the combinations under this section shall be carried out in accordance with
the principles described below.
(a) Only the (IAC) method shall be used as the basis for sizing the combinations. In the
combination design, depending on the migration border situation considered, the strength
coefficients given below for the ductile migration border situation (flowing border situation) and
non-ductile migration border situation (fracture border situation) will be used.
(1) For the border situation on ductile migration, φ=1.0
d
(2) For the border situation of non-ductile migration, φ= 0.9n
(b) The distance of the plastic joint from the side of the column, h, is defined within the limits of
the relevant application for each joint type in this section.
(c) The maximum possible moment in the plastic joint, Mpr
Fy +FuM =C RFW C =≤1.2 (9B.1)

pr pryyp pr
2F
y
will be calculated as follows. The required bending moment strength on the column face of the
joint Muc
and the required shear force strengthV-end (Figure 9B.1), possible plastic joint points at the beam end
will be determined with consideration.
(d) In accordance with 9.3.4.3 , continuity plates shall be used at the beam head alignments when
necessary.
9B.1.5 – The slip zone bounded by the beam-column junction shall satisfy the requirements of
9.3.4.2 or 9.4.2.2, respectively, for steel frames transferring momentum with a high level of
ductility or limited in ductility.
9B.1.6 – Regions with protected capacity shall be defined for each type of combination. Unless
otherwise specified, the areas with preserved capacity are defined as zones starting from the side
of the column and covering a distance of 1.5 times the beam height from the plastic joint point.
Bolt on the beam body, arranged in accordance with the conditions in the relevant sections for
each joint type
holes are permissible.
9B.1.7 – Weld details of welded joining applications shall be arranged in such a way as to meet
the conditions given below.
(a) When the joining of the continuity plates to the column body is made by full penetration
blunt welding, there is no need to remove the baseboard. However, at the junction with blunt
welding with full penetration into the column head, the base plate will be connected to the
column head by continuous corner welding with a welding thickness of 6 mm. This corner weld
shall be applied to the side where the blunt weld is located in such a way that it is below the
blunt weld with full penetration. If the underlay is removed, the groove will be opened by
grinding at the welding root, and this area will be reinforced with continuous corner welding
with a welding thickness of 6mm.
(b) If a base plate is used in the fully penetrating blunt welded connection of the beam sub-head
to the column head, the underlay plate shall be removed after welding. After the removal of the
underlay plate, the groove will be opened by grinding at the welding root and this area will be
reinforced with continuous corner welding with a welding thickness of at least 6mm. The
thickness of this corner welding reinforcement shall be determined to include the beam head
surface.
Figure 9B.1
(c) If a basewall plate is used in the fully penetrating blunt-welded connection of the beam
upper head to the column head, the baseboard shall be left in place and welded to the column
head by continuous corner welding with a welding thickness of 6 mm. It will be ensured that this
corner weld is applied to the side where the blunt weld is located in such a way that it is below
the blunt weld with full penetration.
(d) Especially in applications of full-penetration blunt welding, starting and ending plates shall be
used at the ends. After the welding process, these plates will be removed by cutting with a
suitable cutting method. Surfaces will be processed in such a way that no notches and sharp
corners are left.
(e) In areas with preserved capacity, the temporary welds (point welding) connecting the base
plate and the start and end plates shall remain in place if they remain within the welded joints.
(f) The junctions of the continuity plates to the body and head shall comply with the conditions in
9.3.4.3. However, the welding process to be applied to the column body will be terminated at
least 40 mm away from the curvature end points in the neck area of the column insection. The
welding process to be applied to the column head will be terminated at least 15 mm away from
the curvature end points in the neck area of the column incision.
9B.2. FULL-STRENGTH BOLTED WAIST-PLATE JOINTS
9B.2.1 – In this section, three different types of butt plate joints are detailed, the adequacy of
which has been proven by experimental and/or analytical methods (Figure 9B.2).
Figure 9B.2
The
boundary
conditions
that are
decisive in
the behavior
of this type
of beam-
column
joints are;
The fact that
the beam cross section reaches the flow under the bending effect, the forehead plate reaches the
flow under the bending effect, the flow of the column panel area, the rupture of bolts under the
effect of pulling, the breakage of bolts under the effect of sliding or the breakage of fractures in
the welded joints can be listed as follows. The design principles defined here are based on the
principle that the joining elements have sufficient strength to allow inelastic deformation to occur
due to the flow in the beam cross-section.
9B.2.2 – In order for these types of joint details to be used as combinations described in 9B.1.1 in
the joins of frames transferring moments with a high level of ductility and limited in ductility, it is
necessary to comply with the following additional conditions within the limits of application given in
Table 9B.1. The geometric variables to be used as the basis for evaluating the application limits of
these combination types are given in Figure 9B.3.
9B.2.3 – Where the joints in Figure 9B.2 which are in contact with reinforced concrete slab are
used in frames with a high level of ductility and a moment transfer with a limited level of ductility,
these joints may only be used if the following special conditions are met.
(a) Slip joints shall not be used in the part of the beam head between the column head and the
distance of 1.5 times the beam height.
(b) The reinforced concrete slab shall be finished at least 25 mm away from both heads of the
column. The gap remaining between the column face and the edge of the reinforced concrete
slab will be filled with a compressible material.
9B.2.4 – In the application of these combinations, the forehead plate shall be attached to the
column head.
9B.2.5 – The width of the forehead plate shall be equal to or greater than the width of the head
of the joining beam. However, in the calculations of the forehead board, the effective width should
be taken no more than 25 mm more than the width of the beam head.
9B.2.6 – In the case of 4 and 8 bolt butt plate joints with rigidity plates, the minimum length of the
rigidity plates shall be LstEquivalent.( 9B.2).
h
st
L st = (9B.2)

tan 30
9B.2.7 – The following conditions shall be observed in the welded combination of the beam and
the forehead board.
(a) Welding access holes shall not be used.
(b) In rigidity plate joints, full penetration blunt welding shall be used in the joining of the
rigidity plate to the forehead plate. If the thickness of the rigidity plate is less than 10 mm, it is
permissible to use corner welding with strength equal to the strength of the rigidity plate
can be given.
9B.3. UNION WITH BOULONED HEADER PLATE
9B.3.1 – Junctions transferring moment with bolted header plates are formed by bounced cap
plates welded to the column head and bolted into the beam head (Figure 9B.4). The conditions
described here are based on the principle that the joining elements have sufficient strength to
form a plastic joint near the end of the header plate.
9B.3.2 – In order for this joint detail to be used as combinations of frames transferring moments
with a high level of ductility and limited ductility, as the combinations described in 9B.1.1, it is
necessary to comply with the following additional conditions within the application limits given in
Table 9B.2.
Figure 9B.3
Table 9B.1 – Application Limits of Full Strength Bolted Butt Plate Joints
Table Junction Detail Variables Application Limits 9B.1 –
The distance of the plastic joint
from the side of the column, h ( )b Bfmin / 2, 3 d b
Beam opening / cross-sectional 7≥ (frames with high ductility) 5≥(frames with limited
height ratio ductility)
p12 60 mm t≤≤ (without 4-bolt rigidity plate)
Butt plate thickness, pt p 12 40 mm t≤≤ (with 4-bolt rigidity plate)

p 18 65 mm t≤≤ (with 8-bolt rigidity plate)
p 160 to 300 mm b≤ ≤ (without 4-bolt rigidity plate)
Forehead plate width, pb p160 to 300 mm b≤ ≤ (with 4-bolt rigidity plate)
p215 400 mm b≤ ≤ (with 8-bolt rigidity plate)
The horizontal distance between 155 mm to 100 g≤≤ (without 4-bolt rigidity plate)
bolts, g 70 to 155 mm g≤≤ (with 4-bolt rigidity plate)
125 to 155 mm g≤≤ (with 8-bolt rigidity plate)
f 40 to 115 mm p≤ ≤ (without 4-bolt rigidity plate)
pf ( p fi and pFo ) f 45 to 140 mm p≤ ≤ (with 4-bolt rigidity plate)
f 40 to 50 mm p≤ ≤ (with 8-bolt rigidity plate)
pb 90 to 100 mm p≤ ≤ (with 8-bolt rigidity plate)
b
b270 to 1400 mm d≤ ≤ (without 4-bolt rigidity plate)
Beam cross-sectional height, db b610 mm to 270 d≤ ≤ (with 4-bolt rigidity plate)

b450 to 950 mm d≤ ≤ (with 8-bolt rigidity plate)
Bf 10 25mm t≤ ≤ (without 4 bolt rigidity plate)
Beam head thickness, tBf Bf 10 25mm t≤ ≤ (with 4 bolt rigidity plate)
Bf 14 35 mm t≤ ≤ (with 8 bolt rigidity plate)
Column cross section height 920 mm ≤ (for I profiles)
Bolt class 8.8 or 10.9
Bolt pre-drawing conditions Full pre-pull
Butt plate material class S 235, S275, or S355
Header plate welding Blunt welding with full penetration
For rigidity plateless joints, the zone with the column
face as far away as the beam height due to the column or
the smaller area from the area three times the width of
the beam head due to the column
Zone with protected capacity
For rigidity plate joints, the zone at a distance of half the
end point of the rigidizer and half the beam depth due to
the column or the zone three times the width of the beam
head due to the column
Application Limits of Full Strength Bolted Butt Plate Joints

full penetrationor blunt weld
s1 s at least 8.8 quality yield bolt at least ISO 8.8 quality cunt melted bolt
reinforcing plates (when required)

bolt at least 8.8 quality at least ISO 8.8
quality bolt
continuity plates (when required)
or
slip plate
shim (when required)

additional header plate
Figure 9B.4
Table 9B.2 – Junction Detail Application Limits for Transferring Moment with Bolt Header Plate
Junction Detail Variables Application Limits

Because of the column of the plastic joint
⎛n⎞
s + s −1
h1 ⎜⎟
⎝2⎠
distance,  h
≥ 9 (frames with high ductility)

Beam opening / cross-sectional height ratio
≥ 7 (frames with limited ductility)
Beam cross-sectional height, d b
≤ 920mm
≤ 25mm
Beam head thickness
≤ 920mm (for I profiles)
Column cross section height
≤ 610mm (making box for profiles)
Bolt class
8.8 or 10.9
Largest bolt size M 27
Bolt pre-drawing conditions
Full pre-pull
Title plate material class
S 235, S275, or S355
Header plate welding
Blunt welding with full penetration
From the furthest bolt because of the colon face and the columnProtected area
area as far away as the depth of the beam
9B.3.3 – If bolted joints with head plates in contact with reinforced concrete slab are used in frames with high
ductility and limited ductility, these joints may only be used if the following special conditions are met.
(a) Slip joints shall not be used in the section of the beam head between the face of the column head and a
distance of 1.5 times the beam height from the side of the column.
(b) The slab concrete shall be finished at a distance of at least 25 mm from the face of the column heads.
The gap between the column face and the edge of the slab concrete shall be filled by placing a compressible
material.
9B.3.4 – Both titles shall have the same geometric properties.
9B.3.5 – The welding of the head plates to the column head shall be full penetration blunt welding. When the
underlay plate is used, this plate will not be left in place.
9B.3.6 – The body slip plate shall be welded to the column head. The column head-body plate junction shall
be provided by full penetration blunt welding or two-sided corner welding.
9B.3.7 – The length of the bolt group to be used in the title plate shall not exceed the height of the beam.
Standard hole diameter shall be used in the beam head. If it is on the title board, then it is permissible to use
a standard or large circular hole diameter. It is not allowed to drill bolt holes by the method of stapling.
9B.3.8 – Equivalence for the diameter of the bolt to prevent the beam head from reaching the tensile fracture
limit state at the junction ( 9B.3) shall be satisfied.
RF
bbf ⎛ yy ⎞
db ≤⎜1− ⎟− 3mm (9B.3)

2 RF
⎝ tu ⎠
9B.3.9 – A feeding plate may be used between the beam head and the header plate when necessary; however,
the thickness of the feed board shall not exceed 6mm.
9B.3.10 – In steel-framed systems with a high level of ductility and a limited moment of ductility, if the beam
head is connected to the reinforced concrete slab with steel anchors with heads whose distance between the
centers does not exceed 300 mm during the gap between the areas with protected capacity, there is no need
to use special stability connections in the upper and lower heads of the beam in the plastic joint zones.
9B.4. FULLY PENETRATING CUT-WELDED UNION
9B.4.1 – The conditions given below are based on the principle that the joint must have sufficient strength to
form the plastic joint in the area close to the column head by applying the special details given for the column
head -beam head welds, column head - beam body welds and welding access holes. The junction detail is
shown in Figure 9B.5.
9B.4.2 – In order for this joint detail to be used as combinations of frames transferring moments with a high
level of ductility and limited in ductility, as the combinations described in 9B.1.1, the additional conditions
described below must also be complied with within the application limits given in Table 9B.3.
9B.4.3 – In the sizing of the combination, the Equivalent.( 9B.1) and in the calculation of the maximum
possible moment in the plastic joint, Cpr = 1.4 will be taken.
Figure 9B.5 Table 9B.3 –
Application Limits of
Full Penetration Blunt
Welded Joint Detail
9B.4.4 – In plastic joint zones,

lateral supports shall be
formed in both headings in
the zone covering a distance of 1
to 1.5 times the beam height
from the side of the column.
From the side of the column,
to the lateral support organization in the area covering the distance up to the height of the beam
Allowed.
Junction Detail Parameters Application Limits 9B.4.5

– In The distance of the plastic joint from the side h = 0 steel
of the column, h frame
Beam cross-section height ≤ 920 mm
≥ 7 (frames with high ductility) ≥ 5 (frames with
limited ductility)
Beam head thickness ≤ 25 mm
≤ 920 mm (for I profiles) ≤ 610 mm (for making box
profiles)
Resource transport hole Necessary
Header plate welding Blunt welding with full penetration
The region covering the distance from the side of the
column to the height of the beam cross section
systems with a high level of ductility and limited momentum transfer, if the beam head is connected to
reinforced concrete pavement with a head steel anchors whose distance between the centers does not exceed
300 mm during the gap between the protected areas, there is no need to use special stability connections in
the upper and lower heads of the beam in the plastic joint zones.
9B.4.6 – The following conditions shall be observed in the combination of column head – beam head.
(a) The beam head shall be connected to the column head by a full-penetration blunt weld.
(b) Welding transport holes shall have the geometry and application conditions given in Figure 9B.6.
Figure 9B.6
9B.4.7 – The following conditions shall be observed in the combination of column head – beam body.
(a) The thickness of the body slip plate shall be at least equal to the thickness of the beam body. The height
of the body slip plate shall be arranged so that there is a minimum distance of 6 mm and a maximum distance
of 12 mm between the edges of the board for the upper and lower headings and the edges of the welding
transport hole. Its width ends at least 50 mm away from the source access hole.
(Figure 9B.6).
(b) The body slip plate shall be welded to the column head. Design strength of welds, hp
plate height and t plate thickness, to be calculated as ht (0.6 RF)
p pp yyp
will not be less than the value.
(c) The body slip plate shall be joined to the beam body by corner welds with an arm length tp − 2 mm, in
accordance with the detail given in Figure 9B.6.
(d) If necessary, the use of mounting bolts with short oval holes in the beam body in accordance with the
standard or beam may be permitted.
(e) Column head and beam body welds shall be full-penetrating blunt welds applied along the entire length
of the zone between the welding access holes. Start and finish plates are not required for the welding
process.
9B.5. WEAKENED DIRT FROM THE SOURCE OF THE CUT OF DIRT – COLON FUSION
9B.5.1 – In welded, attenuated beam cross-sectional moment transferring joining details, the widths of the
beam heads in the region close to the beam column joint are reduced by an appropriate cut. Details of the
joining are given in Figure 9B.7. The conditions described here are based on the principle that the joint must
have sufficient strength to form a plastic joint in the reduced beam cross-section.
Figure 9B.7
9B.5.2 – In
order for this
combination to be used as combinations described in 9B.1.1 in frames with a high level of ductility and a
moment transfer with a limited level of ductility, it is necessary to comply with the following additional
conditions within the limits of application given in Table 9B.4.
9B.5.3 – Since the joint is foreseen to form plastic joints due to flow in the reduced beam cross-section, at
these points additional lateral support against lateral torsional buckling should be established in both
headings according to 9.2.8.1. However, if the length between the centers of the beam upper head is
connected to reinforced concrete slab with steel anchors with heads not exceeding 300 mm, there is no need
to use these additional lateral supports in the lower and upper heads of the beam. In the case of lateral support,
this support should be established at a distance of up to half the beam height from the point of the area where
the beam cross section is reduced from the column. The lateral support is not allowed to join the beam within
the area between the face of the column and the farthest end of the reduced beam cross-sectional region from
the side of the column.
Table 9B.4 – Application Limits of Welded Attenuated Beam Cross Section Beam – Column Junction
Detail
Junction Detail Parameters Application Limits

Beam cross-section height ≤ 920 mm
Beam unit height weight ≤ 450 kg/m
≥ 7 (frames with high ductility) ≥ 5 (frames with
limited ductility)
Beam head thickness ≤ 44 mm
≤ 920 mm (for I profiles) ≤ 610 mm (for making
box profiles)
Resource transport hole necessary
Additional header plate welding Blunt welding with full penetration
The area between the column face and the farthest
point of the attenuated beam cross section
9B.5.4 – Full penetration blunt welding shall be used in the joining of the beam heads to the column head.
9B.5.5 – The following conditions shall be observed in the combination of the beam body to the column head.
(a) In frames with a high level of ductility, the connection of the beam body to the column head shall be
ensured by blunt welding with full penetration between the welding access holes. For full-penetration blunt
welding, it is permissible to use a sliding plate with a thickness of at least 10 mm between the welding
transport holes, in order to serve as a base board. Bolt holes for mounting purposes can be drilled in the
beam body.
(b) In the context of limited ductility, the conditions given in (a) may apply. However, in these systems,
the body assembly with bolted sliding plates is also allowed. In this case, the joint will be dimensioned and
applied as a frictional effective joint. In the joining of the sliding plate to the column head, full penetration
blunt welding or double-sided corner welding shall be used. In the case of using corner welding, the
minimum thickness of each corner weld should be 0.70 of the thickness of the board. Bolt holes will be
standard holes. However, it is permissible to use short oval holes made parallel to the beam head, provided
that it is opened in one of the beam body or slip plates.
(c) The reduced beam cross section shall be formed by thermal cutting.
ANNEX 9C – CROSS -DIRT -COLON UNION DETAILS
(a) In the connection of the cross or nodal plate to the beam-column junction zone, the following junction
details, which have been proven to provide the necessary rotational capacity, shall be used when the column
junction of the beam is designed articulated or rigid, as defined in 9.6.5 and 9.8.9 (Figure 9C.1).
Figure 9C.1
(b) When plastic joints are intended to form at

the nodal point or mounting plate as defined in
9.6.6(c)(2), their cross- joint shall have
sufficient rotational capacity;
Must be. Sufficient rotational capacity
shall be ensured by the establishment of
sufficient zones in the nodal plate or
mounting plate to be used in the cross-element
end junction to allow plastic rotation. The
details that can be applied to satisfy this
condition are given in Figure 9C.2 and
Figure 9C.3.
(c) The junction detail transferring welded
reinforced full-strength moment that can be
used in the connection of the bond beam to the
column is given in Figure 9C.4.
Figure 9C.2
Figure 9C.3
Figure 9C.4
HAPTER 10 – SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DESIGN OF LIGHT STEEL BUILDING CARRIERS
UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF EARTHQUAKES
10.0. ICONS
In dimensional expressions using the following symbols in this section, the forces are Newton [N], the
lengths are millimeters [mm], the angles are radians [rad], and the stresses are MegaPascal
2
[MPa]=[N/mm ]
unit. A = Cross-sectional area A et = FnEffective area in stress A = Gross cross-sectional area

g
Anet = Net cross-sectional area b = Profile header width
bp = Coating width CC,i = Pressure force c = Length of the first edge punch perpendicular to the head cd =
Maximum distance between two struts D = Coefficient of excess strength

d = Horizontal length of the second edge punch ds = Profile body height
dv = Characteristic screw diameter d w = Larger diameter of flake or screw head E = Steel elasticity
modulus Ed = Earthquake effect
Fe = Characteristic compressive strength for the bend-down buckling limit condition F n = Characteristic
compressive strength F u = Steel tensile strength F u1 = Breaking strength of the sheet in contact with
the screw head F u2 = Breaking strength of the sheet that does not come into contact with the screw head Fy
= Steel yield stress G = Shear modulus of the coating material

G = Constant load H = Floor horizontal thrust h = Panel height
ih = Profile body height
I = Moment of inertia
K = Effective buckling length coefficient
L = Non-retained length of the strut
 = Panel width
i = Width of full-height panel compartments
iM = Panel tipping torque
nM = Strut axial compressive strength
nP = Strut axial compressive strength
n,diagonal
P = Axial force calculation strength of the cross element
clear,
diagonalP
= Net cross-sectional calculation strength of the cross-element
Characteristic pull-out strength of the screw head from the sheet
novP =
metal
noteP = Characteristic pull-out strength of the screw end from the sheet
NsP = Characteristic shear strength of the screw
Characteristic slip strength of the screw for the side-slip boundary
ns1P =
condition
ns2.3P = Characteristic shear strength of the screw for crush limit situations
NtP = Characteristic emancipation strength of the screw
n,designP = Axial force based on design
sP = Screw design shear resistance
tP = Screw design pull-out strength
p = Spacing of joining elements in intermediate struts
Q = Moving load
r = Inertial radius of the vertical cross section
pr = Profile inner bend radius
S = Snow load
s = Spacing of joining elements at edge posts
i,TT = Tensile force
t = Sheet wall thickness
The wall thickness of the sheet that is not in contact with the screw
ct =
head or flake
Strut = Planting wall thickness
tcoating = Coating material thickness
t1 = Wall thickness of the sheet in contact with the screw head t2 = Wall thickness of the sheet that does
not come into contact with the screw head V d = Total horizontal load acting on the wall V c = Panel
cutting force capacity v c = Characteristic shear strength of the unit paint vd = Slip demand of the unit paint
λ = Precision ratio
φ = Strength coefficient Ω = Safety coefficient
10.1. SCOPE
10.1.1. Arrangement of the bearing system elements of all light steel buildings consisting of cold-formed
profiles under the influence of earthquakes,
Together with the relevant standards and regulations in force on the subject, first of all, in this section
will be carried out according to the specified rules.
10.1.2. Horizontal load bearing systems of light steel buildings within the scope of this section shall be
formed in two ways: coated panel systems and cross panel systems. If the horizontal load-bearing system
contains rolling steel elements, the rules given in Chapter 9 shall be complied with.
10.1.3. The rules for light steel building foundations are given in Section 16.
10.2. GENERAL RULES
10.2.1. Classification of Light Steel Building Carrier Systems
Horizontal load bearing systems of light steel buildings, in terms of their behavior against earthquakes,
It is divided into two classes defined in 10.2.1.1 and 10.2.1.2.
10.2.1.1 – Light steel buildings where all earthquake effects are met by screwed, bolted OSB or plywood
wall panels (Figure 10.1). Such buildings shall be taken as Systems with High Ductility Levels.
10.2.1.2 – Light steel buildings where the entire impact of an earthquake is met by diagonal panels
(Figure 10.2) or coated panels containing gypsum boards. Such buildings will be taken as Ductility Level
Limited Systems.
Figure 10.1
Figure 10.2
10.2.1.3 – The Carrier System Behavior Coefficients (R)

and Strength Excess Coefficients (D) to be
applied in the design of the systems falling into these
two classes and the permissible Building Height Classes
(BYS) are given in Table 4.1.
10.2.1.4 – The bearing panels of light steel buildings shall

be placed in the plan as regularly as possible and
symmetrically or symmetrically according to the main
axes. On all floors, the carrier panels will be arranged
overlappingly.
10.2.2. Related Standards
10.2.2.1 – The design of light steel building carrier systems formed with cold-formed steel elements within
the scope of this section shall be carried out in accordance with other relevant standards and primarily in
accordance with the rules of calculation given in Sections 2, Part 3 and Section 4 of this Regulation and the
loads stipulated in the TS 498 Standard.
10.2.2.2 – For matters other than earthquake design that are not included in this section, internationally
accepted standards and regulations may be used.
10.2.3. Conditions Relating to Materials and Means of Assembly
10.2.3.1 – The material of cold-formed steel elements is the building material obtained by bending steel flat
products with wall thicknesses ranging from 0.45 mm to 16 mm in forming machines, defined by TS EN
10025, TS EN 10346 and TS EN ISO 1461.
10.2.3.2 – The material properties of cold-formed steel elements shall meet the following minimum
requirements.
(a) The minimum yield stress shall be 235 MPa.
(b) The ratio of rupture strength to yield stress shall be at least 1.08.
(c) Materials with a minimum elongation rate of 10% are called normal ductile materials, and
materials with a minimum elongation rate of 16% are called high ductile materials.
(d) Normal ductile materials may only be used in lovers, façade belts and non-bearing struts.
(e) In the case of materials with a tensile strength of 550 MPa or more, it shall be checked by means of
experiments in which the conditions referred to in paragraphs (b) and (c) above are met.
(f) Screws and/or bolts with drill bits shall be used in the joints. These screws shall provide the minimum
torque strength, Rockwell surface hardness, and Rockwell core hardness values given in Table 10.1 for
testing in accordance with ASTM C1513 or equivalent standards.
Table 10.1 – Conditions for Drill Bit Screws
International Screw Minimum Torque Minimum Rockwell Minimum Rockwell

No. Diameter Strength (Nm) Surface Hardness Core Stiffness
(mm)
6 3.5 2.7 C 50 C 32
8 4.2 4.7
10 4.8 6.9
12 5.5 10.4
¼’’ 6.3 16.9
10.2.3.3 – Wood-based panels to be used in horizontal load bearing systems of light steel buildings shall
comply with TS EN 12369-1, 2, 3 standards.
The cross-sectional conditions that the profiles to be used in the creation of the panel systems specified in
10.2.1.1 and 10.2.1.2 must meet are given in the following articles.
10.2.4.1 – The limit values for the ratio of head width/head wall thickness, body height/body wall
thickness and edge berkitma length/edge berkyma wall thickness in elements consisting of cold-formed
profiles are given in Table 10.2.
10.2.4.2 – In addition to the conditions set out in Table 10.2, the following conditions shall also be
complied with in order to ensure the effective contribution of the marginalizations.
0.20 ≤ cb/ ≤ 0.60 (10.1a)
0.10 ≤ db/ ≤ 0.30 (10.1b)
Table 10.2 – Cross-sectional Conditions
10.2.4.3 – /< or /<
If cb is 0.20 db
0.10, the
contribution of edge
berkitmes will be ignored
(taken as c= 0 or d= 0).
10.2.4.4 – effective
cross-sectional properties
in the case of cb> 0.60
or db> 0.30 TS EN
It will be
calculated by equations
given in the 1993-1-3
standard and verified by
experiment.
10.2.4.5 – If the inner bend

radii of the profiles are
r p < 5tve r p < 0.1b, their
effect on the cross-
sectional properties
shall be ignored by taking r
p
= 0.
10.2.4.6 – The conditions to be observed in the holes to be drilled in the profiles are given in Annex 10A.
10.2.4.7 – The minimum title width of the profiles shall provide the following limit values.
(a) The head width shall be a minimum of 30 mm to ensure that coatings to be connected to C and/or Σ
profiles can be screwed (Figure 10.3).
(b) In U profiles, the head width shall be minimum 20 mm (Figure 10.3).
Figure 10.3
10.2.5. Design Method and Load Combinations
10.2.5.1 – Cold-formed steel structural elements and their

joints shall have a level of strength, stability and rigidity
capable of performing all the functions expected of them
under a certain safety during the operational life of the structure.
10.2.5.2 – In the design of a light steel building carrier system, provided that only one of them is applied, the
principles and load combinations are defined in the "Regulation on the Design, Calculation and Construction
Principles of Steel Structures" published in the Official Gazette dated 04/02/2016 and numbered 29614 with
the Safety Coefficients and Design (GKT) method or Design with Load and Strength Coefficients (YDKT)
method can be used. However, only the IAT method will be used in the design of the foundations.
10.2.5.3 – Within the scope of this Regulation, the design rules required for the sectional calculations to be
made under the joint effect of vertical loads and earthquakes, as well as for the combination and additional
calculations, are given separately for both GCT and YKT methods.
10.2.5.4 – In the Design with Safety Coefficients (GCT) method, the load combinations to be applied under
the effects of vertical loads and earthquakes are equivalent. 10.2a) and Equivalent.( 10.2b).
G + 0.75 Q + 0.75 S + 0.75 0.7 E (10.2a)
( d)
0.6G + 0.7Ed + H (10.2b)
In these equations, G indicates the constant charge, Q indicates the moving charge, S indicates the snow
charge, H indicates the ground horizontal thrust, and Ed indicates the earthquake effect calculated according
to 4.4.
10.2.5.5 – Load and Strength Coefficients and the load combinations to be applied under vertical loads and
earthquake effects in the Design (YDKT) method are given in 4.4.4.2.
10.2.6. Earthquake Calculation
10.2.6.1 – In the earthquake calculation, the Equivalent Earthquake Load Method given in 4.7 will be used
and the equivalent earthquake load found according to 4.7.1 will be taken as the basis for the calculation
of the elastic design spectral acceleration by taking T=0.2s. The equivalent earthquake load will be distributed
to the bearing system elements depending on the horizontal load carrying capacity of the coating materials or
the unit paint on the diagonal panels and their position in the plan.
10.2.6.2 – The Carrier System Behavior Coefficient (R) and the Excess Strength Coefficient (D) to be
applied in earthquake analysis and sizing shall be taken from Table 4.1.
10.2.6.3 – For panels formed with OSB, plywood, gypsum board and sheet metal cladding types, the
conditions specified in 10.3.1 shall be taken into account.
10.2.6.4 – The shear strength of panels created using other coating materials shall be determined and
documented according to the principles specified in Annex 10C and by conducting tests in accordance with
1.4.
10.2.7. Height Limits of Light Steel Building Systems
10.2.7.1 – Height limits of light steel building systems are given in Table 4.1.
10.2.7.2 – Coated Panel Systems created with Gypsum Board are not allowed to meet the earthquake demand
alone. The maximum coverage rates of these systems to the earthquake demand depending on the number of
floors are given in Table 10.3. The remaining earthquake demand will be met by distributing it to other
horizontal load-bearing systems with the approach described in 10.2.6.1.
Table 10.3 – Maximum Earthquake Demand Coverage Rates at the

Coverage Rates for Most (%)
Coated Panel Systems Floor Number of Floors
Formed with Gypsum 3 2 1
Boards 3rd Floor 80 - -
2nd Floor 60 80 -
1st Floor 40 60 80
10.3. DESIGN
PRINCIPLES OF
PANELS
A typical sliding panel with a coating is given in Figure 10.4. The shear rigidity and strength of the panel are
determined depending on the range of the joining elements. For panels created with cold-formed steel
profiles, the design approach is based on the distribution of the total cutting demand on one floor according
to the relative carrying capacity of the panels on that floor.
(a) The cutting capacity of a panel is greater than the cutting force demand for that panel
Will.
(b) The axial force-carrying capacity of the struts shall be greater than the axial forces acting on the struts.
(c) The design of the anchors transferring shear force and the foundation and floor connection anchors shall
be such as to meet the base cutting force, the ply cutting force and the tipping moment.
10.3.1. Creation of Coated Panel Systems
The rules to be followed in the creation of Coated Panel Systems are given below.
10.3.1.1 – In order for the coating to be considered a carrier, the greatest strut spacing shall be " cd " 625 mm
(Figure 10.4).
10.3.1.2 – Load-bearing struts shall consist of Cor Σ-cross section elements with a wall thickness of at
least 0.8 mm and a body height of at least 70 mm, and the edge berkit length of these elements shall be at
least 9 mm. If a different cross section is used, it must be shown that the cross-section used safely carries the
account load.
10.3.1.3 – Panel bottom and top cap shall consist of U or C-cross section elements with the smallest wall
thickness of 0.8 mm (Figure 10.4). In the case of using a different cross section, it must be shown that the
selected
cross
section
carries
the
accounting load safely.
Figure 10.4
10.3.1.4 – The coating shall generally be used with the long side in a vertical direction (Figure 10.4). In the
case when the coatings are used in a horizontal direction, a horizontal belt will be placed inside the panel and
the coating will be screwed in such a way as to transfer the cutting force to this element (Figure
10.5).
10.3.1.5 – Sections of full-rise load-bearing panels are considered to be capable of meeting the shear force
(Figure 10.6). As can be seen from the figure, for each section of the load-bearing panel, tensile force transfer
anchors shall be used in the edge struts. In addition, if the coated panel and the diagonal panels are used side
by side, there shall be at least one tensile force transfer anchor in the common edge struts of the panels (Figure
10.6).
Figure 10.5
Figure 10.6
10.3.2. Panel Design
10.3.2.1 – The demand for cutting force on

the panel, according to the design method
to be chosen, is equivalent to
10.3a) and Equivalent.( 10.3b) less than the
shear force capacity calculated by
selecting the appropriate one from
The characteristic shear strength vc of the unit

paint will be obtained from Table 10.5
and the relevant coefficients for the
earthquake situation are taken from Table 10.4 and equivalent. ( 10.3a) or Equivalent.( 10.3b)
Will:
(a) For the Design with Safety Coefficients (GCT) method:
v= ∑Ω
c c i 1V (10.3a)
(b) For the Design with Load and Strength Coefficients (IACT) method:
c c iV v= ∑ (10.3b)
will be used. If the wind loads are more effective in the design, Ω=2.0 and φ= 0.65 will be taken for the GCT
and IACT
Design Method Earthquak methods,
e
Design Method with Safety Coefficients (GKT) Ω 2.5
Design Method with Load and Strength Coefficients (IAC) φ 0.6
respectively.
Table 10.4 – Safety and Strength Coefficients
10.3.2.2 – In the design, the contribution of panels with a width ≥30 cm and a height/width ratio h /
≤4 shall be taken into account (Figure 10.7). The shear strength vc of the unit paint of the panels with a
height/width ratio of 2 ≤h / ≤4 will be obtained by multiplying the values obtained from Table 10.5 by
the ratio of 2/h.
Fig. 10.7
10.3.2.3 – The shear strength of the panels of the unit paint and the minimum conditions used to obtain these
values are given in Table 10.5. The values given in Table 10.5 are those that oppose the coating of one side
of the panel and the following rules will be followed.
(a) In the case of more than one coating applied to the same side of the panel, only the strength values
given in Table 10.5 shall be used for the material in contact with the panel face.
(b) If the same coating is coated on both sides of the panel with the same screw placement, the shear
strength values of the unit paint given for one hundred in Table 10.5 are added together and used for both
sides. In this case, it will be indicated by calculation that the panel edge struts, the lower and upper head
profiles reliably meet the resulting shear force.
(c) In the case of different coating material being used on the two sides of the panel, for the calculation
of the shear strength for the unit length, the shear strength of the coating material with a small shear
strength shall be compared with 2 times the strength of the coating material with a small shear strength and
the value greater than these shall be taken using the strength values given in Table 10.5.
(d) The minimum screw diameters to be used in panel construction are given in Table 10.5.
*,**
Table 10.5 – Shear Resistance of Unit Paint of Panels ( ) (kN/m)
Strut minimum w
h/l Cladding screw spacing for panel edge struts/ intermediate struts (mm)
thickness (mm
Panel Shear
Material strength of
unit paint
(kN/m)
12.5 mm 200/300 150/300 100/300 100/100
Gypsum 2:1
Board 2.7 3.1 3.4 -
150/300 100/300 75/300 50/300
12mm
2:1 11.4 14.4 - -
plywood
13.0 19.4 25.9 32.0
150/300 100/300 75/300 50/100
11 mm OSB 2:1 10.2 13.4 - -
12.0 18.0 22.6 30.0
18.0 27.0 33.7 45.0
150/300 100/300 75/300 50/300
0.46 mm
2:1 5.7 - - -
sheet metal
0.68 mm
4:1 14.6 15.8 17.1
sheet metal
* Panel materials in this table whose values according to the coating screw spacing are not included and other materials not included in this table shall be
tested in accordance with Annex 10.C and their characteristic strength values shall be taken into account in accordance with the results obtained from the
test in the cases specified in paragraphs 10.3.2.3(a), (b) and (c).
** The values in this table shall be used if confirmed by experiments in accordance with Annex 10.C. If the results of the experiment
are different from the values in the table, the values obtained from the experiment will be used.
(e) When the panels are being covered, the

joint screws shall not be allowed to be
embedded in the coating and the screws
shall be allowed to advance a
minimum of 3 screw steps into the
profile/sheet.
In practice, the screw will first enter the
coating and then the sheet material
(Figure 10.8).
Fig. 10.8
10.3.3. Strut Design
In coated panel systems, the axial forces generated at the edge struts due to horizontal loads are equivalent to
the following .( 10.4) and Equivalent.( 10.5) (Figure 10.9).
Mvh(10.4)
=
i di
Mi
TC= (10.5)
=
Ii

i
Axial compressive strength of the nP shall be determined as follows.
strut
For the Design with Load and Strength Coefficients (IAC) method:
n etk n0.85P AF= (10.6a)
For the Design with Safety Coefficients (GCT) method:
n etk n0.56P AF= (10.6b)
Under the sum of the axial forces consisting of axial forces and vertical loads calculated in this way, the
design of the strut will be made as follows.
The effective field A in these statements shall be determined

using the relevant equations given in Section 5.5 of TS EN 1993-1-3.
Figure 10.9
10.3.3.1 – The calculation of the characteristic compressive

strength F n of the strut is described below.
(a) The characteristic compressive strength F n

of the strut is
equivalent for the bending buckling limit condition of the strut.(
10.7) or Equivalent.( 10.8) shall be calculated with:
λ
2
c
F =(0.658 ) F ( λ ≤ to 1.5 )
(10.7)
ny c
0.877
⎛ ⎞
F = ⎜ ⎟ F ( λ > to 15) (10.8)
.
n 2y c
⎝c⎠
Here
F
(10.9)
λc =
e
(10.10)
r=
(10.11)
equations.
(b) According to the torsional and torsion-bend buckling limit situation in the struts, Fn
The characteristic compressive strength shall be determined in accordance with TS EN 1993-1-3
Part 6.2 or AISI S100 Part C4.
10.3.4. Design of Combinations
Cold-formed steel elements shall be joined by screws and/or bolts. In joints, screws or bolts will
be designed under the forces acting on them. The forces that the screws or bolts will carry will be
calculated using different equations for different forms of migration. Alternative strength
calculations for drill-tipped screws and bolts are given in Annex 10B.
For each screw, the design shear strength P sand the design pull-out strength Ptshall be calculated
by the following equations, assuming that the screw is in contact with the coating.
gn with Load and Strength Coefficients (IAC): P=min ( ,, ) P=φ(P)
PPP (10.12a)
ns ns1 ns2 ns3 s ns
P=min (PP , ) P=φ(P) (10.12b)

nt novnot t nt
φ=0.5 (Strength coefficient)

1
(b) For Design with Safety Coefficients (GCT): P=min (PPP , ) P = (Pns ) (10.13a)
,
ns ns1 ns2 ns3 s
Ω
1
P=min (PP , ) P= (Pnt ) (10.13b)
nt tdF (for novnot t
margin limit) Ω
Ω=3.0 (Security coefficient) (10.14)
10.3.4.1 – The characteristic shear strength Pns shall be calculated by the following equations and
shall be calculated by (a), (b),
(c) shall be determined by the conditions set out in paragraphs.
3
P=4.2
ns1 2v u2
⎪
Pns2 = 2.7t1dv Fu1 ⎫(10.15) (for crush limit state)
⎬
Pns3 = 2.7t2dv Fu2 ⎪(10.16)
(a) in the case of tt≤1;

/
2 1
PPP
P =min , ( 10.17)
ns ( ns1 , ns2 ns3 )
(b) in the case of tt/1≥2.5;
2
P=min (PP , ) (10.18)

ns ns2 ns3
(c) 1.0 < tt < 2.5
In the case of /, the values P calculated by paragraphs (a) and (b)

21 ns
between linear interpolation will be performed.
10.3.4.2 – Equivalent to the characteristic pull-out strength of the screw head from the sheet metal
( 10.19) shall be calculated with:
Pnov = 1.5 1w u1 (10.19)
td F
Here dw is no greater than 13 mm, the thickness of the flake used shall not be less than 1.3 mm.
10.3.4.3 – Equivalent to the characteristic pull-out strength of the screw end from the sheet metal (
10.20) will be calculated with:
Pnote = 0.85c v u2 (10.20)
tdF
10.3.4.4 – The following limitations shall be observed in the combinations of Coated Panel
Systems:
(a) The screw spacing for edge struts shall be maximum s=200 mm.
(b) The screw spacing in the inner struts shall be maximum p=300 mm.
(c) The edge distance of the screws along the edges of the slip panel shall be at least 10 mm.
(d) The length of the screw to be used in the combination of sheet metal elements forming the
panel is at least 2tstrut +10
mm. In addition, the screws will enter at least 3 screw steps into the sheet where the screw head
does not touch.
(e) The screw to be used in the joining of the coating material to the panel is at least
tcoating will be a + 2tdmik e +10mm. In addition, the screws will enter at least 3 screw steps into the sheet
where the screw head does not touch (Figure 10.8).
10.3.4.5 – Slip and connection anchors shall comply with TS EN ISO 898-1 standard.
10.3.4.6 – The slip anchor shall be placed in such numbers as to transfer the resulting shear force.
10.4. REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELS BEARING HORIZONTAL LOADS
The conditions to be followed in the design of Coated Panel Systems and Cross Panel Systems
are given below.
10.4.1. Conditions for Coated Panel Systems
The following conditions will be taken into account in the design of panels covered with sheet,
OSB, plywood and gypsum.
10.4.1.1 – Combinations shall be sized according to the conditions given below.
(a) Panel edge struts, sub-heading, header elements and, if applicable, belt profiles shall be
dimensioned to meet the forces arising from loading situations with the relevant strength surplus
coefficient increased by D given in Table 4.1.
(b) The pull-out strength of the screws shall not be used to meet the tensile forces of earthquake
loads.
(c) The panels shall be connected in such a way that, in areas where there are edge struts, the
resulting tensile forces are safely transferred to the underlying system by anchors.
(d) In the sizing of anchors, the internal forces magnified by applying the D strength surplus
coefficient given in Table 4.1 shall be used.
10.4.1.2 – Foundations shall be dimensioned under internal forces magnified by applying the D
strength surplus coefficient given in Table 4.1.
10.4.1.3 – The wall thickness of the panel pillars shall not be smaller than the wall thicknesses
specified in Table 10.5.
10.4.2. Conditions for Crossover Panel Systems
10.4.2.1 – The elements and combinations of diagonal panel systems shall be dimensioned in
accordance with the rules given below.
(a) Panel edge struts, header elements and joining elements to which the diagonal elements are
connected shall be connected to the Table of P n of design axial forces generated on these
elements due to horizontal loads.
They shall be dimensioned to meet the forces calculated by applying the surplus coefficient D
given in 4.1 and increasing it.
(b) Axial force calculation strength of the cross element P , the axial force is tensile
n,cross
If
For the Design with Safety Coefficients (GKT) method:
gy
(10.21a)
P = AF
Ω
n,cross t
Ωt = 1.67
For Design with Load and Strength Coefficients (IAC) method:
P =φ AF (10.21b)
g n,diagonal t y
φt = 0.90
will be calculated as follows.

P calculation strength in case the axial force is pressure, the design to choose
n,cross
Denk.( 10.6a) or Equivalent.( 10.6b).
(c) Under the influence of the tensile force, a net cross-sectional calculation strength check shall be
carried out at the point where the diagonals are joined to the edge struts and the head elements and
the Equivalent .( 10.23).
P =A F (10.22)
net,cross net u
P net,diagonal ≥1.20 p (10.23)

n,diagonal
Equivalent. (10.23) The coefficient of 1.20 in net cross-sectional calculation strength was obtained
from the ratio of the safety coefficients (2/1.67) and strength reduction coefficients (0.9/0.75) taken
as the basis for cross-sectional calculation strength.
(d) The pull-out strength of the screws shall not be used in the calculation of meeting earthquake
loads.
10.4.3. Additional Special Requirements for Crossover Panel Systems Whose Cross Elements
Are Only Under the Influence of Pulling
(a) If no strip cross is applied on both sides of the panel, the moment effect from the eccentricity
shall be taken into account in the standing calculations as "Te". (Figure 10.10).
×
(b) The connections of the strip crosses shall be made in a taut manner.
(c) The foundations shall be dimensioned under the internal forces magnified by applying the
surplus coefficient D given in Table 4.1.
(d) In the case of panel struts bearing horizontal load, a horizontal belt shall be placed at
maximum h/2 intervals, including
hpanel height (Figure 10.2).
Fig. 10.10
10.5. FLOORS
The floors shall be calculated in

such a way as to reliably transfer the
forces generated in their planes due to
the earthquake to the horizontal load
carrier (Y.Y.T) panels (Figure 10.11).
In light steel structures, the flooring
system can be formed with beams and
shaped steel sheet (trapezoidal),
wood or cement-based elements.
Necessary measures will be taken to
ensure that the floors are rigid enough to
ensure that the earthquake
forces are safely transferred to
the horizontal load- bearing system.
The conditions required for the upholstery coating to perform the function of the diaphragm are
given below.
(a) In the sizing of the floors under the effects of earthquakes, the D surplus coefficient given in
Table 4.1 shall be applied.
(b) It shall be shown by calculation that the diaphragm forces are safely transferred to horizontal
load-bearing vertical panels, floor beams and header elements with appropriate connections
(screws, bolts).
(c) Longitudinal elements shall be used where necessary to carry the head forces caused by
diaphragm behavior.
(d) For gaps to be drilled in the slabs, no separate calculation is required as long as the clearance
area does not exceed 3 % of the slab area.
(e) In the case of bearing of the slab beams, the minimum seating distance shall be 40 mm.
Fig. 10.11
ANNEX 10A – RULES FOR HOLES TO BE DRILLED IN THE ELEMENTS 10A.0. ICONS
h = Flat body height of the profile

dR = Circular hole diameter
dr = Inner bend radius of the corners in non-circular holes
t = Profile wall thickness
10A.1. SCOPE AND GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
In this section, the conditions that must be observed are given with regard to the holes to be drilled
in the bearing elements for mechanical and electrical installations or for other reasons.
10A.2. RULES FOR HOLES
When it is necessary to drill holes in the profile bodies, the following rules shall be observed and
hole losses shall be taken into account in the cross-sectional calculations.
(a) The holes to be drilled in the bodies of the profiles shall necessarily center the vertical axis of
the body.
(b) The circular hole diameter in the profile shall be Rdand the flat body height of the profile, h;
Rh< will be 0.70.

d/
(c) In case of drilling a hole, a cross-sectional condition of 200 < ht/.

(d) The distance between the holes shall be no more than 600 mm from axis to axis.
(e) The net distance between the holes shall be at least 450 mm.
(f) The diameter of the circular holes shall not exceed 150 mm.
(g) The holes shall be drilled at a net distance of at least 300 mm from the end of the profiles.
(h) d/<
In the case of Rh 0.38, the effect of the hole in the strength calculations is negligible.
(i) In the case of non-circular holes, the hole height shall not be more than 65 mm and the hole
length shall not exceed 115 mm.
(j) In non-circular holes, the inner bend radii of the cornersshall satisfy the condition r d> 2t.
ANNEX 10B – STRENGTH CALCULATIONS FOR DRILL-TIPPED SCREWS AND
BOLTS
10B.0. ICONS
netA = Net cross-sectional area
sA = Bulon tooth bottom area
db = Characteristic bolt diameter
od = Hole diameter
vd = Characteristic screw diameter
wd = The larger diameter of the flake or screw head
The joining element is the screw or bolt hole at the end of the joined sheet metal or
=
e1 profile
(parallel to the direction of load transfer)
The joining element is attached to the screw or bolt hole to the edge of the joined
=
e2 sheet or profile
(Perpendicular to the direction of load transfer)
Fb,Rd = Crush resistance
Fn,Rd = Net cross-sectional strength
Fo,Rd = Strength to pull the screw end from the sheet metal
Fp,rd = Screw head pull-out strength from sheet metal
Ft,Rd = Screw tensile strength determined by experiments
u,supF = Tensile strength of the profile or sheet to which the screw is attached
uF = Sheet metal minimum tensile strength
FUb = Bolt tensile strength
Fv,Rd = Screw shear strength
Fv,Rk = Characteristic screw shear strength determined as a result of the test
vs = Screw step
Combin Elemen from the on
= screws or Bolt of holes Axis
p1 ation t axis e
distance (parallel to the direction of load transfer)
p2 = The distance of the joining element screws or bolt holes from axis to axis
(Perpendicular to the direction of load transfer)
ti = The wall thickness of the sheet that is thin in the joint
tk = The wall thickness of the thick sheet in the joint
Supt = Wall thickness of the profile or sheet to which the screw is attached
α = Variable coefficient used for crush strength
10B.1. SCOPE
10.B.1.1 – In this section, the equations to be used for the strength calculations of drill bit
screws and the application conditions of these equations are given.
In these equations, a strength reduction coefficient of 1/1.25 was used.
(a) In cases where the screws are under the influence of shear force, the crush strength is
equivalent ( 10B.1).
F = 0.80α Fdt (10B.1)

b,Rd u vi
The coefficient of α in this equation will be determined as follows.
If t = t, or if the ≥ t is 2.5 t and t <1.0 mm

ik kii
t
≤ 2.1
(10B.2a) α=3.2
v
If t ≥ is 2.5t and t ≥1.0 mm

k ii
α = 2.1 (10B.2b)
If t i < t k < is 2.5t i, the α will be obtained by linear interpolation.
Net cross-sectional strength Equivalent.( 10B.3).
Fn,Rd = 0.80Anet Fu (10B.3)
Screw shear strength:

The shear strength of the screws will be determined by the test, and will also provide the
following conditions.
F = 0.80 F (10B.4)
v,Rd v,Rk
f v,rd ≥1.20 f b,rd or a ∑f v,rd ≥1.20 f n,rd (10b.5)
(b) where the screws are under the influence of pulling force;
Pull-out strength of screw end from sheet: f = 0.36dt F (10B.6) for t/s < 1.0
sup v o,rd v sup u,sup
f = 0.52dt f for t/s ≥ 1.0 (10B.7)
sup v o,rd v sup u,sup
Strength of pulling the screw head from the sheet:

Under static charges,
Fp,Rd = 0.80dwi tF u (10B.8)

Under the influence of earthquakes,
Fp,Rd = 0.40dwi tF u (10B.9)
The tensile strength of the screws shall be determined by the test and shall also meet the following
conditions.
F t,Rd ≥ or ≤F (10B.10)
F o,Rd ∑F p,Rd t,Rd
(c) All equations given in paragraphs (a) and (b) shall also satisfy the following conditions:
e1 ≥3dv
p1 ≥3Dv
3mm dv
≤≤ 8mm e2 ≥1.5dv
p2 ≥3dv Under the influence of tensile : 0.5mm
≤≤1.5mm and tk
ti ≥0.9mm Fu ≤550 MPa
In the equations given in paragraphs (a) and (b), it is assumed that the screw heads are in
contact with the thin sheet. In addition, when calculating the pull-out strength from the screw
head, it was accepted that if a flake head screw was used, the screw head would provide the
required strength.
10.B.1.2 – In this section, the equations that can be used for the strength calculations of bolts and
the application conditions of these equations are given.
In these equations, a strength reduction coefficient of 1/1.25 was used.
(a) Where bolts are under the influence of shear force:
Crush strength will be calculated by Equivalent(10B.11). F =2αkFdt (10B.11)
b,Rd btu i
For α b value, the lesser of e 1/3db or 1.0 shall be used. 0.75mm <ti <1.25 mm
k t = 1 (10B.13) Net Cross-sectional strength in the

case of k = 10 t i >+1.5 / 2.5 (10B.12) in the case of k = 0.8 t i +1.5 / 2.5 (10B.14 )
t
()
n,Rd ⎣ ⎦net
rd ⎤
Fn,Rd ≤0.80AF net u (10B.15)
r=[ Number of bolts in the cross-section] / [Total number of bolts in the combination] u=2e 2 and
up≤2 (Figure 10B.1) Drum shear strength Equivalent.( 10B.16) or Equivalent.( 10B.17). Drum
quality is equivalent to 4.6, 5.6 and 8.8.( 10B.16).
F = 0.48FA (10B.16)
v,Rd ub s
Drum quality is equivalent to 4.8, 5.8 and 10.9 .( 10B.17) and Equivalent.( 10B.18).
F = 0.40FA (10B.17)
v,Rd ub s
f v,rd ≥1.20 f b,rd or a ∑f v,rd ≥1.20f n,rd (10B.18)
(b) The pull-out strength shall not be calculated in bolts under the influence of tensile force. Bolt
tensile strength:
F = 0.72FA (10B.19)
p,Rd ub s
∑F p,Rd ≤Ft,Rd (10B.20)

(c) For all equations and bolts in paragraphs (a) and (b), the following conditions shall also be
(Figure 10B.1). e 1 ≥1.0 d0
p1 ≥3d0
0.75mm ti3
≤<mm
e 2 ≥1.5 d 0 p2 ≥3d0 fu ≤550 MPa
The minimum bolt size will be M6 and bolt quality: 4.6 -10.9 range.
Figure 10B.1
ANNEX 10C – PRINCIPLES OF PANEL TEST 10C.0. ICONS
Dmax = Maximum displacement
10C.1. SCOPE AND GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
10.C.1.1 – This section contains the principles of the tests to be carried out according to 1.4 to
determine the strength of panel systems including slip and tensile anchors.
10.C.1.2 – The strength of the panels shall be determined by displacement-controlled experiments

and by averaging the results of at least three panel tests. The height / width ratio of the panels will
be 2/1.
10.C.1.3 – Equal Energy Elastic-Plastic (EEEP) rule shall apply. According to this rule, the envelope
curve and the areas below the idealized curve are equal to each other.
10.C.1.4 – The following is explained how the experiment will be carried out and the number of
test steps and cycles to be applied during each experiment are given in Table 10.C.1.
Table 10.C.1-Test Steps and Cycle Numbers
(a) At each Steppe Number of Cycles Initial Cycle Size ( .max )%D
step, the 1 6 5
magnitude of 2 7 7.5 the
cycles after 3 7 10 the
first cycle 4 4 20
shall be 5 4 30
taken as 75 6 3 40 %
of the size of 7 3 70 the
first cycle. 8 3 100 The
Dmax is the 9 3 100+50
largest Additional 50 increments up to
10 3
displacement model migration
predicted,
and this
value is obtained at the point where the force applied in the first cycle does not fall below 80%
of the greatest force obtained during the experiment.
(b) Themaximum value D shall also not be greater than 2.5% of the panel height.
(c) The loading shall be at a constant frequency (in the range of 0.2-0.5) or at a speed (1.0-63.5
mm/s).
(d) The migration of the model is considered to be the point at which the ratio of the applied
force to the greatest force is 0.8.
10.C.1.5 – In the test result document, the unit shear strength of the panel as well as the material
and geometric properties of the panel (profile type, dimensions, wall thickness, sheet material
properties and coating thickness and properties) and coating application properties (screw type,
screw strengths, screw intervals) shall be indicated.
SECTION 11 – SPECIAL RULES FOR THE DESIGN OF MASONRY BUILDING CARRIER SYSTEMS UNDER THE
11.0. ICONS
A = Horizontal cross-sectional area of the filled wall part A si = Vertical reinforcement area in
reinforced masonry and reinforced panel walls Asw=Total cutting rebar area in the wall
b = Figure coefficient related to the distribution of shear stresses in the wall horizontal cross section = Wall
elasticity module
E
duv e Ed = The eccentricity of the axial force acting on the calculated wall section in the in-plane
direction ( M Ed / NEd )
f b = Average compressive strength of the masonry unit in a standardized (equivalent to a 100 mm × 100 mm
sample free from dimension effect) f b,min = Minimum compressive strength of the masonry unit
perpendicular to the horizontal joints
fbh,min = Minimum compressive strength of the masonry unit in parallel with the horizontal joints
fd = Masonry wall design compressive strength f k = Masonry wall characteristic compressive
strength f m = Average compressive strength of the mortar (28 days) fm,min = Minimum compressive
strength of the mortar (28 days)

Characteristic shear strength in the absence of axial stress
f
= vko
= Characteristic shear strength in the absence of axial stress; γ
f
vdo m
value divided by the coefficient of masonry material = Wall design obtained using
average vertical stresses on the wall
f
et al.
shear strength = The wall obtained using the average vertical stresses on the wall
f
vk
characteristic shear strength fyd = Reinforcement design yield stress
Gduv = Wall sliding mode H = Wall free height, length from the upper elevation of the slab to the
lower elevation of the slab (line if any)
hef
= Effective height of the wall hk = Floor height I = Moment of inertia of the filled wall part Wall
rigidity
k =
duv = Wall section length
c= The length of the pressure working part of the wall
= Vertical loads multiplied by load coefficients and the common effect of earthquake
loads
M
Ed
Flexural moment calculated under MRd = γ m and γ s bearing power moment
calculated using material coefficients = Vertical loads multiplied by load coefficients and the
common effect of earthquake loads
N
Ed
axial force calculated under = Axial force capacity calculated using the material
coefficient of γ
N
Rd m R = Carrier system behavior coefficient Ra (T1 ) = Earthquake load reduction coefficient
S (T1 ) = Spectrum coefficient t = Wall thickness = Active thickness of the wall
t
ef
= Vertical loads multiplied by load coefficients and the common effect of earthquake
loads
V
Ed
wall cutting force calculated under = Wall design cutting force strength strength
V
Rd
= Contains vertical reinforcement but neglects the contribution of shear force

reinforcement
V
Rd1
Shear force strength strength of reinforced masonry walls α = Masonry unit hole
ratio Stacking limit unit shortening
ε
= Does
Masonry material strength reduction coefficient
γ =
m Reinforcing steel yield stress reduction coefficient
γ
s λ = Capacity reduction coefficient related to precision σd = Vertical pressure stress calculated
under the common effect of vertical loads and earthquake loads multiplied by load coefficients
11.1. SCOPE AND DEFINITIONS

11.1.1 – This Section covers the rules regarding the earthquake-resistant design and construction
of unequipped, besieged and equipped masonry buildings and buildings with reinforced panel
systems to be constructed in earthquake zones.
11.1.2 – Types of masonry buildings are given below:
(a) An unreinforced masonry building is a type of building with limited ductility that is formed
using only masonry units and mortar without the use of load-bearing walls;
(b) buildings with a high level of ductility obtained by placing reinforcement in load-bearing
walls constructed using reinforced masonry buildings, masonry units and mortar in accordance
with the rules laid down in this Chapter;
(c) A besieged masonry building shall be constructed of bearing walls connected to each other
and to the flooring as reinforced concrete.
buildings with limited ductility created by the formation of horizontal and vertical lines prepared
after their knitting and using them as formwork in accordance with the rules given in this
Chapter,
(d) A building with a reinforced panel system includes buildings with a high level of ductility in
which the reinforcements in the grooves between the pre-fabricated aerated concrete panels
are connected to the reinforced concrete lines at the foundation and floor levels and the vertical
aerated concrete panels are brought together to form the bearing walls, and the reinforced
aerated concrete panels are connected to the reinforced concrete lines and form the floors.
11.1.3 – The maximum number of floors allowed for masonry building types is given in Table 4.1.
The attic area to be made in addition to these floors cannot be greater than 25% of the gross area
of the building at the foundation. Also a single basement can be made.
11.1.4 – Effective thickness of single-layer, double-layer and sandwich walls (), TS EN 1996-1
t
ef
The 1 standard shall be determined according to 5.5.1.3. When determining the wall thickness (t),
the thickness of the plaster will not be taken into account.
11.1.5 – Effective height of the wall (), according to TS EN 1996-1-1 standard, 5.5.1.2
h
ef
will be determined.
11.2. MATERIALS AND STRENGTH
11.2.1 – All joints, both horizontal and vertical, shall be filled with binding mortar in load-bearing
masonry walls. In buildings with equipped panel systems, reinforcement extending in the long
direction of the panel will be placed in the grooves between the panels and the grooves will be
filled with binding mortar.
11.2.2 – Masonry bearing walls shall be formed with brick masonry units (TS EN 771-1), concrete
masonry units with dense or light aggregates (TS EN 771-3), aerated concrete masonry units (TS
EN 771-4), natural stone units (TS EN 771-6) or artificial stone units (TS EN 771-5). The masonry
units are divided into two groups according to the type of material used and the hole ratio (Table
11.1). Gaps in the units, where reinforcement will be placed and completely filled with mortar,
will not be taken into account in the calculation of the hole ratio. However, this unconsidered hole
rate shall not be more than 15%.
Table 11.1 -Grouping of Carry Units by Hole Ratios
11.2.3 – The standardized minimum compressive strength of the masonry units, which shall be
determined in accordance with TS EN 772-1, shall be determined from f b,min = 5.0 MPa in the
direction perpendicular to the horizontal joints
in Kargir Unit Type(*) Group I Group II parallel
Brick %35 ≤α %35 %50 <≤α
Concrete %35 ≤α %35 %50 <≤α
direction, f shall not be less thanbh,min = 2.0 MPa.
11.2.4 – Hollow concrete briquettes, other bricks produced for filling walls, adobe, rubble stone,
pumice stone and similar shaped blocks shall never be used as load-bearing wall material.
11.2.5 – The design and production of the panels to be used in buildings with equipped panel
systems shall be made in accordance with TS EN 12602. A grade of aerated concrete lower than
grade 5 shall not be used in wall and floor panels. The reinforcements to be placed in the grooves
between the adjacent panels shall be of class S420, B420C or B500C and the diameter of the
reinforcement shall not be less than 12 mm. The diameter of the groove shall not be less than 5
times the diameter of the reinforcement.
11.2.6 – The smallest cubic dime strength values of the mortar to be used to be determined in
accordance with TS EN 1015-11 are from fm, min = 5.0 MPa for unreinforced and beleaguered
masonry, for reinforced masonry
fm,min = not lower than 10.0 MPa. The compressive strength of the cement sorbet to be filled into
the grooves between the panels for the reinforced panel system shall not be lower than 10.0 MPa.
11.2.7 – The characteristic compressive strength of masonry bearing walls, fk , can be determined
in two ways: i) by means of tests on wall samples in accordance with TS EN 1052-1, ii) by means of
masonry unit
and using compressive strengths obtained from separate tests to be carried out on the mortar
Mortar Coil unit compressive strength, fb (MPa)

Unit-Unit Mortar compressiv
Class class e strength, 5 10 15 20 25 30
mf (MPa)*
10.4- 11.9-
M10-M20 3.4-4.2 5.5-6.8 7.3-9.0 8.9-11.0
12.9 14.6
Group I M2.5-M9 2.2-3.3 3.6-5.3 4.8-7.1 5.9-8.7 6.9-10.1 7.8-11.5
General
purpose M1-M2 1.7-2.1 2.8-3.4 3.7-4.5 4.5-5.5 5.2-6.4 5.9-7.3
grout M10-M20 2.8-3.4 4.5-5.5 6.0-7.4 7.3-9.0 8.5-10.5 9.7-12.0
Group II and
M2.5-M9 1.8-2.7 3.0-4.4 3.9-5.8 4.8-7.1 5.6-8.3 6.4-9.4
Cut stone
M1-M2 1.4-1.7 2.3-2.8 3.0-3.7 3.7-4.5 4.3-5.3 4.9-6.0
Brick
2.9 5.3 7.5 9.6 11.6 13.5
(Group I)
Bricks
2.2 3.5 4.7 5.7 6.7 7.6
(Group II)
Thin
Concrete layer
(Group I), grout** 3.1 5.7 8.0 10.2 12.3 14.4
Aerated
concrete
Concrete
2.6 4.6 6.5 8.3 10.0 11.7
(Group II)
according to TS EN 772-1 and TS EN 1015-11 standards respectively (Table 11.2).
Table 11.2 – Characteristic Pressure Resistance of Masonry Bearing Walls, fk (MPa)
(*)
The number following the letter M is named in such a way as to indicate the characteristic
(**)
compressive strength in MPa. A layer of mortar, a mortar with a mortar layer between units of 0.5 mm and 3.0 mm.
11.2.8 – In order to use the values given in Table 11.2, the variation coefficient of the experiments
to be carried out on the masonry unit and mortar shall not be more than 25%. Double layer
246
on the walls the values given in Table 11.2 will be multiplied by a coefficient of 0.8. The
intermediate values not given in Table 11.2 will be found by linear proportioning.
11.2.9 – Wall characteristic shear strength fvk shall be made on wall samples
from experiments or Equivalent. (11.1) will be obtained with f = f + 0.4σ≤ 0.10 f (11.1)
vkvko d b
11.2.10 – The characteristic initial shear strength shall be determined by tests depending on fvko,
TS EN 1052-3 or TS EN 1052-4 standards or according to Table 11.3.
Coil unit General purpose mortar(*) Thin layer of grout

M10-M20 0.30
Brick M2.5-M9 0.20 0.30
M1-M2 0.10
Concrete M10-M20 0.20 0.30
Aerated concrete M2.5-M9 0.15 0.30
Natural or Artificial Stone M1-M2 0.10 Unavailable
Table 11.3 – Initial Shear Strengths of Walls, fvko (MPa)
(*)
The number following the letter M is named in such a way as to indicate the characteristic
compressive strength in MPa .
11.2.11 – When determining the design strengths of the walls, material coefficients of γ m in
masonry material and γ s (strength reduction coefficients) shall be used in reinforcement. γ s
coefficient shall be accepted as 1.15, if the masonry material coefficient is γm, 1.75 in aerated
concrete material and 2.0 in other materials
will be accepted.
11.2.12 – Concrete class shall be at least C25 in reinforced concrete components of unreinforced
masonry buildings, reinforced masonry buildings, besieged masonry buildings and buildings with
reinforced panel systems.
11.2.13 – Elasticity modulus of load-bearing walls, tests to be carried out according to TS EN

1052-1
E
duv
path. In the absence of these experiments, the value of structural analysis
For E
duv, 750f will be taken equal
to k. The modulus of elasticity of walls formed with reinforced panels shall be taken as 450 f k. Wall
slip module, 40% of the elasticity module
G
duv
will be taken as.
11.3. EARTHQUAKE ACCOUNT
11.3.1 – The calculation of earthquake loads shall be made according to Section 4.

11.3.2 – The building carrier system shall be modeled and structural analysis shall be carried out
under the combined effects of vertical and horizontal loads. Structural analysis can be done using
finite elements or one of the equivalent bar methods.
11.3.3 – In analysis using the finite element method, the load-bearing wall may be modeled using
detailed micromodeling, simplified micro-modeling, or macro modeling techniques. In the
detailed micro-modeling technique, masonry wall components (masonry unit, horizontal and
vertical grout joints) are taken into account separately. In the simplified micro-modeling
technique, horizontal and vertical mortar joints are neglected and the expanded frame units are
separated from each other by average interfacial lines. In macro modeling technique, masonry
wall is considered as a composite material.
11.3.4 – In the analysis using the equivalent rod method, the rigidity of the masonry wall shall be
calculated taking into account the slip and bending deformations. The free height of the wall, H,
is taken as the length from the upper elevation of the slab to the lower elevation of the slab (if
any). The wall length is taken as the length of the wall part between the gaps. For a rectangular
section of wall, elastic rigidity is equivalent to the acceptance that both ends are built-in. 11.2).
(11.2)
E and G shall be calculated in accordance with

11.2.13. Afull wall of the horizontal cross-
sectional area of the part, and
duvduv
Ishows the moment of inertia of the full wall piece.
11.3.5 – In buildings consisting of unreinforced masonry buildings, reinforced masonry buildings,

besieged masonry buildings and reinforced panels, the effective rigidity of the load-bearing wall
shall be determined by reducing the gross rigidities by 50%. The relative coefficient displacement
rate resulting from the displacements calculated using these effective rigidities multiplied by the
R/I coefficient will be below 0.007.
11.3.6 – Redistribution on each load-bearing wall shall be permitted provided that the shear force
on the wall does not decrease by more than 25% and does not increase by more than 33%.
11.3.7 – In unreinforced masonry buildings, reinforced masonry buildings with a thickness of at

least 100 mm shall be made to ensure the rigid diaphragm effect in masonry buildings without
reinforcement, reinforced masonry buildings and besieged masonry buildings. This flooring shall
be supported on horizontal lines with a section height of at least 300 mm and equipped with a
length of 6φ12 and a width of φ8/150 mm. The width of the horizontal lines will be at least as
thick as the wall. The vertical range of horizontal lines shall not exceed 4 m.
11.3.8 – In buildings consisting of reinforced panels, if the floors are formed with reinforced
panels, arrangements shall be made to ensure that the panels work as rigid diaphragms in both
directions.
11.3.9 – In besieged masonry buildings, reinforced concrete vertical and horizontal lines shall not
be taken into account in structural modeling.
11.3.10 – Walls whose wall section length is less than two times the thickness of the wall shall not
be considered as carriers in the calculations.
11.4. CALCULATION BY CONVEYING POWER METHOD
11.4.1 – The design force acting on the masonry wall in the vertical direction, N Ed, shall not be
greater than the wall vertical load design strength NRd. The vertical load design strength of the unit
length of the single-layer masonry bearing wall is Equivalent.( 11.3). Masonry wall
The design compressive strengthis equivalent to F D.( 11.4).
Nrd = λ Af d (11.3)
f = f / γ (11.4)
d km
11.4.2 – The capacity reduction coefficient λ due to delicateness is less than the value of the ratio
of narcissity (h /t )6
ef ef
1.0 will be taken if it is smaller, 0.8 if it is between 6 and 10, and 0.7 if it is 10 and 15. The delicate
ratio will not be allowed to be greater than 15. Strength reduction coefficient for masonry wall γm,
according to 11.2.11
will be determined.
11.4.3 – Load-bearing masonry wall design cutting force strength VRd in unreinforced masonry
walls, the design cutting force acting on the wall shall be greater than V Ed. Wall cutting force
strength strength VRd, Equivalent.( 11.5). In this equation, the value fb will not be taken greater
than 25 MPa. Thecoefficient b is the ratio of wall height to wall length and shall not be less than
1 and greater than 1.5.
V = ft(11.5a)
RD VDC
(11.5b)
11.4.4 – During the design of reinforced masonry walls and panels exposed to in-plane bending
and vertical loads, the tensile strength of masonry and aerated concrete material shall be
neglected. Under the pressure effects of the reinforced masonry walls, the design strength
moment shall be calculated by taking into account the deformation and stress distribution in the
cross-section, as given in Figure 11.1. Equipped
The
torque capacity of the wall formed by M Rd aerated
concrete panels shall be taken as the sum of the bending moment capacities of the panels
forming the wall to be calculated separately. When calculating the torque capacity of each panel,
the axial load acting on the panel and the contributions of the vertical groove reinforcement
remaining in the tensile zone of the panel shall be taken into account, while the contributions of
the groove reinforcements that do not remain between the two panels shall be neglected.
Masonry wall design strength moment,
M
Rd
the design moment acting on the wall will be greater than . Completely under the influence of
pressure
M
Ed
The boundary pressure change for non-sections shall not be greater than ε= 0.0035 if the
masonry unit is Group I. For other cases, ε= more than 0.002
it won't be big. It should be indicated by calculation that there will be no pressure breakage in the wall before the reinforcement flows
on the load-bearing walls.
Figure 11.1
11.4.5 – In the
calculation of reinforced
masonry walls exposed
to in-plane cutting effect, the
bearing masonry wall design
cutting force strength
shall not be less than V Rd,
the design cutting force
acting on the wall shall not
be smaller than V Ed. The
calculation of the shear force strength V Rd1 of reinforced masonry walls containing vertical
reinforcement, but in which the contribution of the shear force reinforcement is neglected, shall
be made as given in 11.4.3. In reinforced masonry walls containing vertical reinforcement and in
which the contribution of the shear force reinforcement is taken into account, Equivalent.( 11.6).
In order for the contribution of the cutting force reinforcement to be taken into account, the
continuity of the horizontal reinforcement along the wall must be ensured. Additive of shear force
reinforcement, VRd2, Equivalent.( 11.7). In cases where the contribution of the shear force
reinforcement is taken into account, the Equivalent.( 11.8).
V + V ≥ V (11.6)
Rd1 Rd2 Ed
V = 0.9Amnesty (11.7)
rd2 sw yd
( Ed
) /() ≤2.0 MPa (11.8)
Vt
11.4.6 – Equivalent wall shear force strength in buildings formed with reinforced panels 11.9),
Denk.( 11.10) and Equivalent.( 11.11) shall be taken as the smallest of the values.
0.5
V = 0.15(Ft(11.9)
Rd d
V = N + 0.5Amnesty (11.10)
Rd Ed si yd
V = 0.2 ft(11.11)
Rd d
11.4.7 – For reinforced masonry buildings, calculated in accordance with 11.4.3 for masonry
buildings without reinforcement, Equivalent.( 11.6) and Equivalent( 11.7) For buildings
constructed with reinforced panels, Denk.( 11.9), Denk.( 11.10) and Equivalent.( 11.11) shall be
checked taking into account the coefficient of excess strength D given in Chapter 4.
11.4.8 – The calculation of vertical loads and/or elements subject to bending in besieged masonry
buildings shall be made according to the calculation principles given for reinforced masonry walls.
In the pressure working part of the wall section, only the masonry strength will be taken into
account, and the contribution of reinforcement and concrete in the pressure zone will be
neglected. As reinforcement, vertical reinforcements located in the vertical lines remaining in the
pull shall be taken into account.
11.4.9 – The shear force strength of the besieged masonry walls shall be obtained by summing
the shear force strengths of the walls and vertical siege lines. The calculation of the strength of
the masonry shear force shall be made by adopting the approach given for unreinforced masonry.
When calculating the shear force strength of the lines, only the concrete additive will be taken
into account, and the axial force on the lines will be neglected.
11.5. OTHER DESIGN CRITERIA
11.5.1 – The walls to be considered as load-bearing elements shall meet the requirements laid
down in Table 11.4. Walls that do not meet these requirements will not be considered as load-
bearing elements.
Table 11.4 – Geometric Conditions to be Applied in Masonry Walls Under the Influence of
Masonry Type ( Ef ) Min ( )ef ef max /h t

t (mm)
Masonry without reinforcement, with natural or
350 9
artificial cut stone
Masonry without reinforcement, with other masonry 240 12
units
Surrounded masonry 240 15
Reinforced stacking 240 15
Equipped panel systems 200 15
Cutting Force
11.5.2 – In unreinforced and besieged masonry buildings, the maximum unsupported lengths of
the load-bearing walls and the distances between vertical lines shall comply with the requirements
given in Figure 11.2. In buildings with reinforced masonry and equipped panel systems, the size
limits given in Figure 11.2 can be increased by 20%. The inspections of the wall elements that do
not comply with these requirements in the direction perpendicular to the plane will be carried out
according to the
conditions given
in TS EN 1996- 1-1.
l1
l2
l3
Fig. 11.2
11.5.3 –
Reinforced concrete lintels shall be made above the door and window gaps. The length of the
sections of the lintels that sit on the wall will not be less than 200 mm. The height of the lintel will
not be less than 150 mm. The rules given in Figure 11.3 shall be followed in the door and window
cavities to be left on the load-bearing walls.
(DTS 1, 1a, 2 and 2a) (DTS 3, 3a, 4 and 4a)
Fig. 11.3
11.5.4 – In besieged
masonry
buildings,
horizontal and vertical
lines shall be cast after
masonry walls have
been erected and the walls shall be cast using formwork (Figure 11.4 and Figure 11.5).
11.5.5 – In besieged masonry buildings, vertical lines shall be established in the following cases:
(a) on the free edges of the load-bearing walls,
2
(b) on both sides of wall cavities whose area is greater than 1.5 m ,
(c) every 4 m of wall length, with a distance between lines not exceeding 4 m,
(d) where the two load-bearing walls meet each other (if the nearest vertical line is more than
1.5 m.
if far away).
11.5.6 – In besieged masonry buildings, the cross-sectional heights of vertical lines shall not be
less than 300 mm and in these lines the longitudinal reinforcement shall not be less than 6φ12
and the transverse reinforcement shall not be less than φ8/150 mm. The cross-sectional width of
the vertical lines shall be at least as much as the wall thickness. In vertical line reinforcements, the
overlapping inserts shall not be shorter than 60φ.
11.5.7 – In equipped masonry buildings, horizontal reinforcements shall be placed inside

horizontal joints or in appropriate notches. The vertical spacing of these reinforcements shall not
exceed 600 mm. The ratio of horizontal reinforcement in the wall shall not be less than 0.05% over
the gross cross-sectional area of the wall
(Figure 11.6) .
11.5.8 – In reinforced masonry buildings, vertical reinforcements shall be placed in pockets or

holes in masonry units. The proportion of these reinforcements shall not be less than 0.08% over
the gross cross-sectional area of the wall. The vertical reinforcement interval shall be no more
than 600 mm. At least 2φ12 additional reinforcements shall be placed along each edge of the door
and window cavities (Figure 11.6). Horizontal reinforcements in the form of open ethers, not less
than 4 mm in diameter, shall be passed around the reinforcements used at the extreme ends of
the wall sections (Figure 11.7).
Figure
11.4
Figure 11.5
11.5.9 – In reinforced masonry buildings, in addition to the vertical reinforcement mentioned

above, vertical reinforcement shall be installed for the following situations in such a way as not
less than 4φ12 and the pockets or holes in which these reinforcements are placed shall be filled
with mortar.
(a) the free edges of the load-bearing walls;
(b) wall-wall joints,
(c) every
5m
Fig. 11.6
Fig. 11.7
11.5.10 – In buildings
constructed with
reinforced panels, the
connection details of the
reinforced concrete
lines and the
foundation on which
they are
supported by the floor
panels shall meet the
requirements given in
Figure 11.8.
11.5.11 – If the height of

the roof shield wall
sitting on the
horizontal line on the top
floor is greater than 0.80
m, vertical and oblique
lines will be made (Figure
11.9).
11.5.12 – In
unreinforced and besieged
masonry buildings, the maximum unsupported lengths of the upper floor parapet walls in the plan
and the distances between vertical lines shall comply with the requirements given in Figure 11.2.
In buildings with reinforced masonry and equipped panel systems, the size limits given in Figure
11.2 can be increased by 20%. If the parapet height is greater than 1.00 m, a horizontal line will
be formed every 1.00 m along the parapet height. In case of non-compliance with these
conditions, the height of the parapet wall shall not exceed four times the wall thickness.
Fig. 11.8
Fig. 11.9
SECTION 12 – SPECIAL RULES FOR THE DESIGN OF WOODEN BUILDING CARRIER SYSTEMS UNDER THE
12.0. ICONS
a o = Intermediate beam spacing in wooden slabs [m] bo = Distance between intermediate struts
[m] C = Compressive force [kN] ci = Coefficient of dimension effect d = Diameter of the joining
element [mm]
fi = Cutting capacity of a nail [kN] h = Panel height [m] h b = Beam height [m] i= Width of panel
panes at full floor height [m ] M = Bending moment [kNm] p = Nail spacing in intermediate struts
[m] s = Nail spacing in main struts [m] tb = Beam thickness [mm] T = Tensile force [kN] v c = Safe
shear strength of the unit paint [kN/m] v p = Cutting force demand for the unit paint [kN/m] V p =
Total horizontal load acting on the panel [kN]
γM = Partial coefficient of safety
12.1. SCOPE
12.1.1 – The sizing and arrangement of the bearing system elements of all wooden buildings to
be constructed under the influence of earthquakes shall be carried out in accordance with the
rules specified in this section, together with the relevant standards and regulations in force in
this regard.
12.1.2 – Horizontal load-bearing systems of wooden buildings covered by this section may
consist only of coated panels or only of wood diagonal panels.
12.1.3 – The rules for the foundations of wooden buildings are given in Chapter 16.
12.2. GENERAL RULES
12.2.1. Classification of Wood Carrier Systems
Horizontal load-bearing systems in wooden buildings are divided into two classes defined in
12.2.1.1 and 12.2.1.2 in terms of their earthquake behavior.
12.2.1.1 – Coated Panel Systems: Coated panel systems are divided into two as follows: (a) and (b)
below.
(a) Wooden buildings where the entire impact of the earthquake is met by spiked or screw OSB,
plywood panels, meeting the conditions given in 12.2.2.4 and 12.2.3.3. Such buildings shall be
taken as Systems with High Ductility Levels.
(b) Wooden buildings in which the entire impact of the earthquake is met by glued, curtain and
floor panel elements combined with nails, screws and bolts. Such buildings will be taken as
Ductility Level Limited Systems.
12.2.1.2 – Crossover Panel Systems: Wooden buildings where the entire earthquake effect is met
by cross elements. Such buildings will be taken as Ductility Level Limited Systems.
12.2.1.3 – Apply to the design of systems falling into these two classes under the effects of
earthquakes
Carrier System Behavior Coefficients and Strength Excess Coefficients (D) and Permissible Building
Height Classes (BYS) are given in Table 4.1.
12.2.1.4 – The load-bearing curtain panels of wooden buildings shall be placed as orderly as
possible in the plan and symmetrical or symmetrical according to the main axes. Load-bearing
curtain panels will be arranged on top of each other on all floors.
12.2.2. Related Standards and Design Principles
12.2.2.1 – Design of wood carrier systems covered by this section, together with the specified
rules given in Parts 2, Part 3 and Part 4 and the rules given in TS EN 1995
rules.
12.2.2.2 – Wooden structural elements and their joints shall have a level of strength, stability and
rigidity capable of performing all the functions expected of them under a certain safety during
the life of the building.
12.2.2.3 – Nonlinear behavior shall be permitted only in materials and combinations known to
exhibit ductile behavior in wooden buildings covered by this section. The design of such elements
shall be made according to the earthquake loads reduced by the R carrier system coefficients given
in Table 4.1.
12.2.2.4 – In the case of joining elements, elements that meet the conditions given in (a) and (b)
below shall be considered ductile.
(a) Elements with steel pin, bolt and studded joints, with a thickness of at least 10d and whose
joining element diameter does not exceed 12 mm.
(b) Elements of flooring and curtain panels with a wood-based coating thickness of at least 4d
and whose nail diameter does not exceed 3.1 mm.
12.2.2.5 – The properties of joints that do not meet the conditions specified in 12.2.2.4 and
wooden elements that do not meet the conditions specified in 12.2.3.3 are according to the tests
defined in TS EN 12512
will be determined.
12.2.2.6 – The level of ductility of elements whose cyclic properties are defined in accordance
with 12.2.2.5 shall be determined as defined in (a) and (b) below, depending on the displacement
ductility of these elements.
(a) Elements whose displacement ductility is greater than 4 and less than 6 have a limited level of
ductility
will be accepted.
(b) Elements whose displacement ductility is greater than or equal to 6 shall be deemed to have a
high level of ductility.
12.2.3. Material Conditions
12.2.3.1 – Strength classes and

material properties shall be determined according to TS EN 1995.
12.2.3.2 – Within the scope of this regulation, the material properties of the steel elements to be
used in the joints shall comply with the conditions given in 9.2.3.
12.2.3.3 – Ductile behavior may be permitted in the case of wall and floor wood cladding if the
conditions set out in (a), (b), (c) below are met:
(a) The density of particle board panels is 650 kg/m3,
(b) The thickness of plywood, OSB wood coatings must be at least 9 mm,
(c) Particleboard and fiberboard thickness must be at least 13 mm.
12.2.3.4 – The material safety coefficients given in Table 12.1 shall be used for the material
properties and strengths of the wooden elements to be used in the design to be made with the
bearing power approach within the scope of this regulation.
Table 12.1. Material Safety Coefficients

Material
in Wooden Elements Material type safety
coefficient
Solid Wood 1.3
12.3. STRUCTURAL MODELING AND
Gluing Laminated Wood 1.25
CALCULATION UNDER EARTHQUAKE
Plywood, ASD 1.2
IMPACT
Particleboard 1.3
Fiber Plate 1.3
12.3.1 – The modeling and calculation of
wooden structures within Joins 1.3 the scope of this
section shall be carried out Gear Sheet 1.25 in such a way as
to meet the conditions in (a) to (d) below.
(a) The strut elements, base and header beams, intermediate belt beams and cross elements
constituting the main frame of the wood panels shall be modeled with two-dimensional finite
elements, while the wood cladding shall be modeled with two-dimensional finite elements . Cross
wood veneer equivalent in simple systems
can be modeled with elements.
(b) Wooden beams and wooden intermediate belt beams, which form the main frame of
wooden flooring, shall be modeled with bar finite elements and wood cladding shall be modeled
with two-dimensional finite elements. In simple systems, wooden flooring can be modeled as
rigid diaphragms within their plane.
(c) The loss of rigidity that will occur without stripping in the fasteners at the nodal points of all
wooden elements shall be determined in accordance with TS EN 1995 – 2.3.2 and shall be
reflected in the calculation models.
(d) In modelling, the value corresponding to the sudden loading state of the wooden elements shall
be taken as a modulus of elasticity.
12.3.2 – Within the framework of the modeling rules defined in 12.3.1, the design of the elements
in (a) to (d) below shall be made according to the internal forces obtained from the earthquake
loads reduced by the carrier system behavior coefficients R given in Table 4.1:
(a) the joining elements defined in 12.2.2.4,
(b) the wooden cladding elements defined in 12.2.3.3,
(c) combinations with high ductility in accordance with 12.2.2.6 and wooden elements;
(d) Wooden cross elements bearing horizontal load.
12.3.3 – Within the framework of the modeling rules defined in 12.3.1, the design of the elements
specified in (a) to (f) below shall be made according to the R carrier system behavior coefficients
given in Table 4.1 and the values of the internal forces obtained from the reduced earthquake
loads with the D surplus coefficients
(a) all joining elements and wooden elements which do not meet the conditions defined in
12.2.2.4 and 12.2.3.3 and whose ductility level is limited in accordance with 12.2.2.6;
(b) All glued joints,
(c) Panel edge struts, upper and lower head elements and, if applicable, girdle beams,
(d) Transferring the tensile forces generated in areas where there are edge struts to the
underlying system,
anchors and anchors that transfer the base cutting force to the foundation,
(e) Diagonal steel tensile elements used to increase in-plane rigidity;
(f) Wooden diaphragm heads and girdle beams.
12.3.4 – The load combinations to be applied under vertical loads and earthquake effects are given
in 4.4.
12.4. DESIGN PRINCIPLES OF PANELS
12.4.1. Elements Constituting Panels
The wooden frame of the panels shall be formed from the elements specified in (a) to (f) below:
(a) Main struts,
(b) Intermediate struts,
(c) Floor beams to be placed under the struts;

(d) Headboard beams to be placed on top of the struts;
(e) Horizontal girdle beams between the base and headboard beams forming rectangular eyes
on the wall and connecting the struts along the wall;
(f) Crosses dividing the formed rectangular eyes into triangular eyes or bearing horizontal loads
cladding panels.
A typical panel skeleton with a coating is given in Figure 12.1, and a typical panel skeleton with a
cross is given in Figure 12.2.
Figure 12.1
Fig. 12.2
12.4.2. Rules for the Creation of Panels
The rules to be followed in the creation of panel systems are given below.
12.4.2.1 – h panel height and i panel width (Figure 12.1), h / i ≤ 4 condition

The panel elements that provide shall be taken as panel elements that carry horizontal load . Panel
elements that do not meet this condition will not be considered as horizontal load-bearing
elements.
12.4.2.2 – Thickness of wood veneer and bostrut spacing (Figure 12.1), all wood
coating elements will provide bto / ≤ 100 condition.
12.4.2.3 – Panels in areas where door and window cavities are located shall be horizontal load
carriers
will not be accepted as panels.
12.4.2.4 – In order for the wooden cladding to be accepted as a carrier, thearching range shall not
exceed 0.625 m.
12.4.2.5 – Gypsum panel coatings shall not be considered horizontal load carriers.
12.4.2.6 – In single-storey wooden buildings, struts, floor and head beams and cross-sectional
sections
the dimensions will be at least 100mm×100mm and the cross-sectional dimensions of the
intermediate belt beams will be at least 50mm ×100mm.
12.4.2.7 – The main pillars and crosses shall be one-piece continuous (sequester) along the floor.
If the diagonal elements are X-shaped, then one of the diagonal elements will be continuous, the
other diagonal element, interrupted, will be connected to each other with the help of steel plates.
12.4.2.8 – Additional may be made in base beams and header beams. It will be shown by
calculations that the strength of the additions to be made is sufficient.
12.4.2.9 – The main struts shall be reinforced with nails, even if they are joined to the base beam
and the header beam in a transitional manner. In case of non-plug-in joining, studded corner
wedges, steel fasteners or special production elements will be used. The load transfer of the
generated system
account.
12.4.2.10 – Other element connections may be made in the form of flat or oblique breasted
tenons, as well as auxiliary steel fasteners.
12.4.2.11 – In cases where special precautions are not used to pull by special precautions, cross-
members shall be considered as employees working only on pressure.
12.4.3. Rules for the Design of Panels
12.4.3.1 – In the design of wooden curtain panels:

(a) The cutting capacity of the panel shall be greater than the shear force demand from such
panel.
(b) The axial force-carrying capacity of the struts shall be greater than the axial forces acting on
the struts.
(c) The design of the anchors transferring shear force and the foundation and floor connection
anchors shall be such as to meet the base cutting force, the ply cutting force and the tipping
moment.
12.4.3.2 – Only sections of full-rise load-bearing panels shall be deemed to be capable of carrying
shear force. For each section of the carrier panel, tensile force transfer anchors shall be used in
the edge struts (Figure 12.3).
12.4.3.3 – Demand for cutting force on coated panel, Equivalent( 12.1) shall be less than the shear
design strength calculated according to:
pi
v ∑l V ≤ (12.1)
p
γ
Fig. 12.3
The characteristic shear strength of the unit paint vp, Equivalent.( 12.2).
Fc
ii
vp = (12.2)
s
The cutting capacity of the nail shall be determined in accordance with 12.2.3.1. Size effect
coefficient c
f
ii
Equivalent. (12.3 ).
2li
c i = ≤1.0 (12.3)
h
12.4.3.4 – The shear strength of the panels of the unit paint is the values that oppose the coating
of the single side of the panel. Otherwise, the rules set out in (a), (b), (c) below shall be complied
with.
(a) In the case of more than one coating applied to the same side of the panel, only the strength
value of the material in contact with the panel face shall be used.
(b) If the same coating is coated on both sides of the panel with the same nail or screw
placement, the shear strength values of the unit paint calculated in accordance with 12.4.3.3 shall
be added together for both sides. In this case, the calculation will show that the panel edge
struts and the lower and upper head beams safely meet the resulting cutting force.
(c) In the case of different coating material being used on the two sides of the panel, the shear
strength for the unit length; According to 12.4.3.3, a coating material with a small shear strength
shall be taken as twice the strength and the coating material with large shear strength shall be
taken as the greater of its strength.
12.4.3.5 -Panels carrying horizontal loads shall use an anchor or combination transferring tensile
force not more than 5 m.
12.4.4. Design of Struts
In coated panel systems, the axial forces generated at the edge struts due to horizontal loads are
equivalent ( 12.4) (Figure 12.4).
C = T = vh (12.4)
iid
Under the sum of the axial forces consisting of axial forces and vertical loads found in this way,
the axial compressive strength of the strut shall be
calculated according to TS EN 1995 Part 6.
Figure 12.4
12.4.5. Design of Combinations
12.4.5.1 – The wooden structural elements that make up

the panel shall be joined by nails/screws and/or
bolts. The forces to be carried by nails, screws or bolts shall
be calculated according to TS EN 1995 Part 8 under
different forms of migration.
12.4.5.2 – In combinations of Coated Panel Systems,

the limits given in (a) to (d) below shall be observed:
(a) For edge struts, the nail/screw spacing shall be up to s =
150 mm.
(b) The nail/screw spacing in the inner struts shall be up to p = 300 mm.
(c) The edge distance of the screws along the edges of the panel shall be at least 10 mm.
(d) The cutting anchor shall be placed in such numbers as to transfer the resulting shear force.
12.4.5.3 – Other rules to be followed in the combination of coated and diagonal panel systems are
given below in (a) and (b).
(a) The pull-out strength of nails and screws shall not be used to meet the tensile forces of
earthquake loads.
(b) The panels shall be connected in such a way as to safely transfer the tensile forces generated
in the areas where there are edge struts to the underlying system by anchors.
12.4.5.4 – The foundations shall be dimensioned under the forces magnified by the coefficient D
given in Table 4.1.
12.5. DESIGN PRINCIPLES OF FLOORS
12.5.1. Elements Constituting Wooden Flooring
12.5.1.1 – The frame of wooden flooring shall be composed of the following elements ( a), (b),
(c):
(a) Beams of wooden flooring,
(b) horizontal intermediate belt beams connecting the wooden flooring beams;
(c) Covering wood flooring. The appearance of a typical frame of wooden flooring is given in
Figure 12.5.
Figure 12.5
12.5.1.2 – Slab beams on the ground floor shall be placed on the base beams, while slab beams
and roof trusses on other floors shall be seated on header beams; they shall be joined by studded,
screwed, bolted or specially designed steel joining elements. A typical joining detail is given in
Figure 12.6.
12.5.2. Rules for the Design of Floors
12.5.2.1 – All floor panel elements that are not attached to the frame elements shall be connected
to the transverse connection (wedge) elements to be formed between the wooden flooring
beams. These elements will also be arranged at the upper elevation of the walls bearing a
horizontal load.
12.5.2.2 – In the event of a gap in the slab, continuity shall be ensured in the beams surrounding
the gap.
12.5.2.3 – In the absence of transverse fasteners in the beams, the ratio of the beam height to its
width (h b / tb) shall be less than 4.
12.5.2.4 – all wood cladding elements, including tpanel cladding thickness and a o beam spacing
at≤100
/ condition.
o
Fig. 12.6
12.6. DESIGN OF COMBINATIONS
12.6.1 – Pressure elements and their joints (threaded joints, etc.) shall be designed in such a way
that they are not separated from each other and maintain their positions due to the loss of load
bearing caused by deformation due to repeated loads.
12.6.2 – Large bolts and wedges (d>16 mm) shall not be used in wood-wood and steel-wood joints
where wooden joining elements are not used.
12.6.3 – In the case of a combination of wood-wood or wood-steel plates with nails or screws, it
is obligatory to show by calculation that the strength of the nail or screw is sufficient.
SECTION 13 – SPECIAL RULES FOR THE DESIGN OF HIGH BUILDING CARRIER SYSTEMS UNDER THE INFLUENCE
OF EARTHQUAKES
13.0. ICONS
BYS = Building Height Class D = Excess Strength Coefficient DTS = Earthquake Design Class DD-1
= Earthquake with a probability of exceeding 50 years is 2% (recurrence period is 2475 years)
earthquake ground motion level DD-3 = 50% probability of exceeding in 50 years
DD-3 = earthquake ground motion level DD-3 = 50% probability of exceeding in 50 years
(repetition period 72 years) earthquake ground motion level DD-4 = earthquake ground motion
level with a probability of exceeding in 50 years 68% (repetition period 43 years)
(H)
Ed = Horizontal earthquake effect based on the design with direction joining applied
2
G = Constant charge effect g = Gravitational acceleration [m/s ]
HN = Total height of the upper section of the building above the basements [m] I = Building
Importance Coefficient m t = Total mass of the upper section of the building above the basement
floors [t] n = Moving load participation coefficient R = Carrier System Behavior Coefficient
Q = Moving load effect
Qe = Active moving load effect Short-period design spectral acceleration coefficient
[dimensionless]
S=
DS
(X)
VtE = (X) total equivalent earthquake load (base shear force) affecting the entire building in line with the
earthquake [kN] α = Empirical coefficient used for earthquake joint cavities coefficient of torsion
the ith floor torsional irregularity coefficient
η
bi = γE = Empirical coefficient used to determine the equivalent base shear force magnification
coefficient
13.1. SCOPE AND DEFINITION
13.1.1 – This section of the Regulation covers the specific rules to be applied for the design of
reinforced concrete and steel high-rise building carrier systems under the influence of
earthquakes.
13.1.2 – Based on the definition of height given in 3.3.1, according to Table 3.3, the buildings
specified in (a), (b), (c) below are defined as high-rise buildings and classified as BYS = 1:
(a) Buildings with a height H N > 70 m for DTS = 1, 1a, 2, 2a;
(b) buildings with a height of H N > 91 m for DTS = 3, 3a;
(c) Buildings with a height H N >105 m for DTS = 4, 4a.
13.1.3 – High-rise building carrier systems shall be regulated as systems with high ductility
according to the definitions given in Chapter 4, Chapter 7, Section 8 and/or Chapter 9, with the
exception of the carrier systems defined in 13.1.5. Other systems with limited ductility and mixed
ductility are not allowed.
13.1.4 – High-rise building carrier systems shall be composed of reinforced concrete with a high level
of ductility defined by the symbols A12, A13, A14, A15, B12, B13 in Table 4.1 or steel carrier systems
with a high level of ductility defined by the symbols C12 , C14, C15.
13.1.5 – Only in high-rise buildings with DTS=4, also in Table 4.1 A21, A22 and C21, C22
The ductility level defined by the symbols mixed reinforced concrete and steel carrier systems can
also be used.
13.1.6 – The thickness of reinforced concrete curtains in high-rise building carrier systems shall
not be less than 300 mm, 7.6.1.3 and 7.6.3.2 shall not apply.
13.1.7 – Only ribbed reinforcement steels of B420C or B500C quality shall be used in high-rise
reinforced concrete carrier systems.
13.2. PERFORMANCE TARGETS AND DESIGN STAGES
The design of high-rise buildings shall be carried out in the three stages referred to in 13.2.1,
13.2.2, 13.2.3. The sequences of Stage II and Stage III may be changed.
13.2.1. Design Phase I: Preliminary Design Sizing Under DD-2 Earthquake Ground Motion
13.2.1.1 – At this stage, the preliminary design – sizing of the tall building with the Design by
Strength (DGT) approach will be carried out in order to meet the Controlled Damage (KH)
performance target under the influence of DD-2 earthquake ground motion.
13.2.1.2 – Details of the mandatory accounting and design principles for this stage are given in
13.4.
13.2.1.3 – This stage will be based on Section 4 together with the rules set out in Chapter 7, Section
8 and/or Section 9 as well as in this Chapter.
13.2.2. Design Phase II: Evaluation – Improvement for Uninterrupted Use or Limited Damage
Performance Target Under DD-4 or DD-3 Earthquake Ground Motion
13.2.2.1 – At this stage, the pre-designed high-rise building;

(a) Performance evaluation will be carried out with the Design by Strength (DGT) approach in
order to meet the Uninterrupted Use (QC) performance target under DD-4 earthquake ground
motion for the normal performance target according to Table 3.4(b).
(b) Performance evaluation shall be carried out by Evaluation and Design by Deformation (SCT)
approach in order to meet the Limited Damage (SH) performance target under DD-3 earthquake
ground motion for the forward performance target according to Table 3.4(b).
(c) Details of the account requirements for this stage are given in 13.5.
13.2.2.2 – This stage will be based on Section 4 or Section 5 together with the rules set out in
Chapter 7, Section 8 and/or Section 9, as well as in this Section. If deemed necessary as a result of
the evaluation, the preliminary design will be improved and the evaluation will be repeated.
13.2.3. Design Phase III: Assessment – Improvement – Final Design for Migration Prevention or
Controlled Damage Performance Target Under DD-1 Earthquake Ground Motion
13.2.3.1 – At this stage, the first two design stages have been completed and the Evaluation and
Design by Deformation to meet the performance target of Migration Prevention (IO) as the
normal performance target under DD-1 earthquake ground motion according to Table 3.4(b) and
Controlled Damage (KH) as the advanced performance target (SCTT) approach.
13.2.3.2 – Details of the account principles for this stage are given in 13.6.
13.2.3.3 – If deemed necessary as a result of the evaluation, the design will be improved and the
final design will be repeated by repeating the evaluation. This stage will be based on Section 5 as
well as the rules set out in Chapter 7, Section 8 and/or Section 9, as well as in this Chapter.
13.3. BEHAVIORAL CHARACTERISTICS OF HIGH BUILDING CARRIER SYSTEM ELEMENTS
13.3.1. Deformations of Nonlinear Ductile Behavior
Within the scope of the application of the principles of capacity design given in general definition
4.2.2, the types of elements and modes of behavior for which nonlinear ductile behavior can be
defined are as follows:
(a) Reinforced concrete curtains with high ductility levels: in the curtain base areas (foundation,
basement
or in areas just above the plinth) and from these zones upwards at a reasonable height in two
directions and flow under the influence of axial force (P-M-M). In the case of a curtain with a tie
beam, in the case of a bend and/or cut effect on reinforced concrete or steel bond beams
Yield.
(b) Reinforced concrete or steel frames with high ductility levels: Flow under the influence of
bending at the beam end areas, bending in two directions at the column base sections (sections
just above the foundation, basement or plinth) and flow under the influence of axial force (P-M-
M).
(c) Steel frames with a high level of ductility: Cut-bending flow (preferably only cutting flow) in
the bond beams, bending in two directions in the column base sections (sections just above the
foundation, basement or plinth) and flow under the influence of axial force (P-M-M).
(d) Steel frames with high ductility central crosses: Flow at tensile crosses, buckling at pressure
crosses, bending in two directions at column base sections (sections just above the foundation,
basement or plinth) and flowing under the influence of axial force (P-M-M).
(e) High-ductility, anti-buckling steel frames: Flow at tensile and pressure crosses, bending in two
directions at the base sections of the column (sections just above the foundation, basement or
plinth), and spillage under the influence of axial force (P-M-M).
13.3.2. Internal Forces of Linear Behavior
13.3.2.1 – Within the scope of the application of the principles of capacity design given in general
definition 4.2.2, it is essential to ensure sufficient strength for internal forces related to linear
behavior.
13.3.2.2 The following internal forces relating to linear behavior shall be defined as critical
internal forces:
(a) Cutting forces on curtains, basement curtains, columns and beams (except cross-reinforced tie
beams);
(b) Axial forces in columns subject to axial force only;
(c) Internal forces transferred to the transfer elements and vertical carrier system elements
(curtains and columns) in floor laying plates and transfer floors flooring plates
(d) Stapling on slab and raft foundation plates for which no special punching reinforcement is
installed
Force
(e) Shear forces on foundations
(f) Internal joints in steel joints with a strength less than the strength of the connected elements
Forces.
13.3.2.3 The following internal forces relating to linear behavior shall be defined as non-critical
internal forces:
(a) Bending moments in basement curtains
(b) Bending moments in foundations
(c) Bending moments in slabs.
13.4. DESIGN PHASE I: PRELIMINARY DESIGN – CALCULATION PRINCIPLES FOR SIZING
13.4.1. Scope
13.4.1.1 – In Phase I, the preliminary design – sizing earthquake calculation of the selected high-
rise building carrier system will be made according to the Design by Strength (DGT) calculation
principles given in Section 4 under the influence of DD-2 earthquake ground motion, which is
characterized as standard design earthquake ground motion, taking into account the additional
rules defined herein.
13.4.1.2 – A preliminary design (preliminary saging) of the selected high-rise building carrier
system shall be made on the basis of the calculation results and the rules given in this Chapter
and in Chapter 7, Section 8 and/or Section 9.
13.4.2. Phase I Carrier System Modeling
13.4.2.1 – Stage I carrier system modelling shall be carried out according to the rules given in 4.5.
13.4.2.2 – The load combinations involving the earthquake effect to be considered in Phase I are
defined in 4.4.4.
13.4.3. Phase I Earthquake Calculation
13.4.3.1 – Before the Stage I earthquake calculation, the vertical load calculation and wind
calculation taking into account the construction stages and the creep calculation in reinforced
concrete buildings will be made.
13.4.3.2 – In the calculation of the Stage I earthquake, the Carrier System Behavior Coefficient R
and the Strength Excess Coefficient given in Table 4.1 shall be used for the high-rise building carrier
system selected according to 13.1.4 or 13.1.5 and the rules given in 4.3.2.4 shall be applied.
13.4.3.3 – Within the scope of Stage I earthquake calculation, a three-dimensional linear

calculation will be made under DD-2 earthquake ground motion by Mode Joining Method according
to 4.8.2 or Mode Addition Method in the time definition field according to 4.8.3.
13.4.3.4 – The process of magnifying the reduced internal forces according to 4.8.4 according to
the Equivalent Base Shear Force is the equivalent in the calculation of the Stage I earthquake of
high-rise buildings. 13.1) shall be made on the basis of the Minimum Base Cutting Force as defined
by .
V = 0.04 α mS g (13.1)
t,min H tDS
Here is the total mass of the upper section, where the base and tower are located, in the DD-2
earthquake
m S
t DS
for the level of motion, the short-period design spectral acceleration coefficient defined in 2.3.2,
g is the gravitational acceleration, and αH is equivalent based on the height definition given in
3.3.1. 13.2) Building with
denotes the coefficient, the height of which is calculated depending on H N.
α = 1.0H ≤105 m
HALL
α = 2.05 − 0.01 H 105 m< H ≤155 m (13.2)
HN N
α H = 0.5 155 m< HN
(X)
Equivalent. (13.1) calculated by V , Equivalent.( 4.25) will be used instead of V and in the same
equation
t,mintE
γ = 1 will be taken.
E
13.4.4. Additional Terms Regarding the Pre-Sizing of the Carrier System

13.4.4.1 – The dimensions and fittings of structural elements shall be determined according to the
internal forces of the preliminary design calculated in accordance with 13.4.3, taking into account
the principles given in Chapter 7, Chapter 8 and/or Chapter 9.
will be determined.
13.4.4.2 – The preliminary design of the foundations of high-rise buildings shall also be made in
accordance with Section 16 on the basis of the forces defined in 4.10.3.
13.5. DESIGN PHASE II: ACCOUNT PRINCIPLES FOR UNINTERRUPTED USE OR LIMITED
DAMAGE PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
13.5.1. Scope
13.5.1.1 – In Phase II, the pre-designed carrier system elements are very close to linear or linear
behavior to achieve the Uninterrupted Use (PP) performance target under DD-4 earthquake ground
motion for the normal performance target according to Table 3.4(b) and the Limited Damage (SH)
performance target under DD-3 earthquake ground motion for the advanced performance target. they will
be proven to be in a situation.
13.5.1.2 – Evaluation for the Uninterrupted Use (QC) performance target will be carried out by the DGT
approach based on linear calculation according to Chapter 4. The evaluation for the Limited Damage (SH)
performance target will be made with the SCDT approach based on non-linear calculation according to
Section 5.
13.5.2. Phase II Carrier System Modeling
13.5.2.1 – In the case of the implementation of the DGT approach based on the linear account for the
normal performance target according to Table 3.4(b) in Phase II, the modeling rules given in 4.5 and in
the case of the nonlinear account-based SHAD approach for the advanced performance target shall be
followed. However, the different rules given below in 13.5.2.2 to 13.5.2.5 shall be followed in both cases.
13.5.2.2 – 4.4.4 or 5.2.2 shall be used as the basis for defining load combinations in Phase II.
13.5.2.3 – In the case of the implementation of the linear calculating DGT approach for the normal
performance target in Phase II, the effective cross-sectional rigidity multipliers given in Table 13.1 shall be
used for reinforced concrete elements. The multipliers given in Table 13.1 can be used for flooring and
basement curtains if the SCDT approach based on nonlinear calculation is applied for the advanced
performance target.
13.5.2.4 – The additional decentralization effect shall not be taken into account.
13.5.2.5 – The damping rate shall be taken as 2.5%.
13.5.3. Phase II Earthquake Calculation
13.5.3.1 – According to 13.4.3.1, the vertical load calculation results made before the Stage I earthquake
calculation and taking into account the construction stages will also be used in Phase II.
13.5.3.2 – Within the scope of Phase II earthquake calculation, linear calculation will be made by modal
calculation methods according to 4.8 under DD-4 earthquake ground motion according to 13.5.1.2 for
normal performance target. For the advanced performance target, nonlinear calculation will be made in
the time definition field according to 5.7 under DD-3 earthquake ground motion.
13.5.3.3 – In case the earthquake calculation is made by modal calculation methods according to 4.8 for
the normal performance target;
(a) In the calculation of internal forces, R / I = 1 and D = 1 shall be taken.
(b) The minimum base shear force requirement in Phase I shall not apply.
(c) In the case of earthquake calculation by Mode Coupling Method in accordance with 4.8.2, in order to
obtain horizontal elastic design spectral acceleration values ae () corresponding to the damping rate of
2.5% defined in 13.5.2.5, Equivalent.( 2.2) is the spectral given for a 5% damping rate
ST.
acceleration values will be multiplied by a coefficient of 1.25. In addition, in the case of using the Whole
Quadratic Merge Rule according to 4B.2.4 for the merging of mod contributions, the Equivalent.( 4B.5),
the damping rate for all modes will be taken as 2.5% in the calculation of the cross correlation coefficients.
(d) If the earthquake calculation is made by the Mode Picking Method in the time definition field according
to 4.8.3, the modal single-degree of freedom system for each vibration mode is equivalent to ( 4B.10) in the
equation of motion given by 2.5%.
Table 13.1. Effective Cross-Sectional Rigidity Multipliers to be Applied in Stage II for Reinforced
Concrete Carrier System Elements
Reinforced Concrete Carrier Effective Cross

13.5.3.4 – If the System Element Section Rigidity earthquake calculation is
made as a nonlinear Multiplier calculation in the time
definition field according Curtain – Flooring (In-Plane) Axial Glide to 5.7 for the advanced
performance target, the Curtain 0.75 1.00 damping rate shall be taken
as 2.5% in the modes to be Basement curtain 1.00 1.00 considered for the creation
of the Rayleigh Flooring 0.50 0.80 proportional damping
matrix or modal damping Curtain – Flooring (Out of Bending Cut matrix according to 5.7.3.2.
Plane)
13.5.4. Evaluation in Curtain 1.00 1.00
Phase II and Internal
Force Demands Basement curtain 1.00 1.00
Flooring 0.50 1.00
13.5.4.1 – If the Phase II earthquake calculation is
made by linear modal Bar element Bending Cut calculation methods
according to 4.8 within Vineyard beam 0.30 1.00 the scope of 13.5.3.3 for the
normal performance Frame beam 0.70 1.00 target, the internal forces
obtained in this Frame column 0.90 1.00 calculation shall be
considered as internal Curtain (equivalent rod) 0.80 1.00 forces based on the
evaluation.
13.5.4.2 – In the case of a non-linear calculation in the time definition field according to 5.7 for the advanced
performance target of the Phase II earthquake calculation;
(a) Requests for deformation based on evaluation in the case of elements with ductile behavior shall be the
largest absolute absolute of the results obtained from each of the calculations made (at least 2 11 22
calculations)
×=
values will be calculated as an average.
(b) The evaluation requests for internal forces defined in 13.3.2.2 as critical internal forces shall be
calculated as 1.4 times the average of the maximum absolute values of the results obtained from each of the
calculations made (at least 2×=11 22 calculations).
(c) The evaluation requests for internal forces defined in 13.3.2.3 as non-critical internal forces shall be
calculated as the average of the maximum absolute values of the results obtained from each of the
13.5.5. Phase II Performance Evaluation
13.5.5.1 – To achieve the Uninterrupted Use performance target under DD-4 earthquake ground motion
for normal performance target according to 13.5.1.1 or the Limited Damage performance target under DD-
3 earthquake ground motion for advanced performance target, the internal force limits given below or
13.5.5.3 The limits of deformation and internal force given in must not be exceeded. In both cases, the
calculation of internal force capacities will be based on the average (expected) material strength values
given in Table 5.1 instead of the characteristic material strengths.
13.5.5.2 – In the event that the calculation of Stage II Earthquake is made by linear modal calculation
methods according to 4.8 for the normal performance target;
(a) The ratio of impact (demand)/capacity for internal forces in elements with ductile behavior described in
13.3.1 shall not exceed E / K = 1.5.
(b) For internal forces defined in 13.3.2.2 and 13.3.2.3 that do not have ductile behavior, the ratio of
impact (demand)/capacity shall not exceed E / K = 0.7.
13.5.5.3 – In the event that the calculation of the Stage II Earthquake is made as a non-linear calculation in
the time definition field according to 5.7 for the advanced performance target;
(a) In the case of reinforced concrete elements with ductile conduct, the deformation requests calculated in
accordance with 13.5.4.2(a) shall not exceed the limit values given in 5.8.1 for the relevant performance
level.
(b) In the case of steel elements with ductile conduct, the deformation requests calculated in accordance
with 13.5.4.2(a) shall not exceed the limits given in Annex 5C for the relevant level of performance.
(c) In the case of elements without ductile conduct, the internal force demands calculated in accordance
with 13.5.4.2( b) and 13.5.4.2 (c) shall be shown to be smaller than the internal force capacities defined
in Chapter 7 for the respective reinforced concrete elements and in Chapter 9 for the steel elements.
average (expected) material strengths will be taken as basis.
13.5.5.4 – In the event that the conditions given in 13.5.5.2 and 13.5.5.3 above are not met, the
preliminary design of the carrier system shall be changed and the Stage I earthquake calculations shall be
repeated.
13.6. DESIGN PHASE III: PRINCIPLES OF ACCOUNT FOR MIGRATION PREVENTION OR

CONTROLLED DAMAGE PERFORMANCE ASSESSMENT
13.6.1. Scope
13.6.1.1 – In Phase III, the normal performance target according to Table 3.4(b) under DD-1 earthquake
ground motion, the preliminary design and sizing of which has been completed in Phase I and shown to
meet the performance target of Uninterrupted Use (KK) or Limited Damage (SH) in Phase II, is considered
to be the largest earthquake considered and has a 2% probability of being exceeded in 50 years (recurrence
period of 2475 years) or Controlled Damage (KH) as the Prevention of Migration ( WHO) performance
target or as the advanced performance target.
13.6.1.2 – For the realization of the performance target described in 13.6.1.1 above, the three-
dimensional nonlinear calculation of the high-rise carrier system in the time definition area in Phase III shall
result in the assessment obtained in accordance with 13.6.4 of the evaluation based on the deformation,
internal force and relative floor deferral of the demands 13.6.5 will be shown to be smaller than the
performance limits defined in . If these conditions cannot be met, the necessary improvements will be made
in the carrier system and the analyzes will be repeated and in this way, the design will be developed and
concluded.
13.6.2. Phase III Carrier System Modeling
13.6.2.1 – In Phase III, the modeling rules given in 5.4 for nonlinear calculation in the time definition
area will apply. Rules that differ from these rules are set out in 13.6.2.2 to 13.6.2.4.
13.6.2.2 – 5.2.2 shall be used as the basis for load aggregation in Phase III.
13.6.2.3 – The additional decentralization effect shall be considered in accordance with 13.6.3.3.
13.6.2.4 – The damping rate shall be taken as 2.5%.
13.6.3. Phase III Earthquake Calculation
13.6.3.1 – Stage III Earthquake Calculation of the high-rise building carrier system will be made by
non-linear calculation method in the time definition area described in 5.7 under the influence of DD-1
earthquake ground motion.
13.6.3.2 – According to 5.7.3.2, the Rayleigh proportional damping matrix or the modal damping matrix
In the modes to be considered for its creation, the damping rate will be taken as 2.5%.
13.6.3.3 – In the Stage I calculation, any irregularity of type A1 defined in Table 3.6 is found on any first
floor of the building and the torsional irregularity coefficient is η>1.5
In the case of bi, the

additional eccentricity effect described in 4.5.10.2 shall be taken into account in the calculation of the
Phase III earthquake. The additional coefficient mass moment of inertia on each floor shall be calculated
in accordance with 4.5.10.2(b) and 4.5.10.3 shall be observed.
13.6.4. Evaluation in Phase III and Internal Force Demands
13.6.4.1 – In the case of elements with ductile behavior, requests for deformation based on evaluation shall
be calculated as the average of the maximum absolute values of the results obtained from each of the
13.6.4.2 – The main requests for evaluation for the internal forces defined in 13.3.2.2 as critical internal
forces shall be calculated by adding a standard deviation to the mean of the maximum absolute values of the
results obtained from each of the calculations made (at least 2×=11 22 calculations), but not more than 1.5
times the average and not less than 1.2 times.
13.6.4.3 – The main requests for evaluation for internal forces defined in 13.3.2.3 as non-critical internal
forces shall be calculated as the average of the maximum absolute values of the results obtained from each
of the calculations made (at least 2×=11 22 calculations).
13.6.5. Phase III Performance Evaluation
13.6.5.1 – Under the influence of DD-1 earthquake ground motion, in order to achieve the performance
target of Migration Prevention (IO) as the normal performance target according to 13.6.1.1 and the
Controlled Damage (KH) performance target as the advanced performance target, the deformation limits
given in (a) and (b) below and (c) The limits of internal force given in must not be exceeded.
(a) In the case of reinforced concrete elements with ductile conduct, the deformation requests calculated
in accordance with 13.6.4.1 shall not exceed the limit values given in 5.8.1 for the relevant performance
level.
(b) The deformation requests calculated in accordance with 13.6.4.1 on steel elements with ductile
behavior shall not exceed the limits given in Annex 5C for the relevant level of performance.
(c) In the case of elements without ductile conduct, it shall be shown that the internal force demands
calculated in accordance with 13.6.4.2 and 13.6.4.3 are smaller than the internal force capacities
defined in Chapter 7 for the reinforced concrete elements concerned and in Chapter 9 for steel elements.
average (expected) material strengths will be taken as basis.
13.6.5.2 – As a result of the non-linear calculation made for the high-rise building carrier system under DD-
1 earthquake ground motion in Phase III, 2×=22
The average
relative floor deferral rate from 11 earthquakes shall not exceed 0.03, and the largest relative floor deferral
rate from a single earthquake shall not exceed 0.045.
13.7. FINALIZATION OF THE DESIGN OF THE HIGH BUILDING AND DESIGN OF THE
FOUNDATIONS
13.7.1. Conclusion of High-Rise Building Design
The dimensions and reinforcements of the vertical bearing elements (curtains and columns) and foundations
specified in Stage I shall not be reduced in Stage III. If it is desired to reduce these elements, all three
calculation stages will be repeated by changing the sections. For other bearing elements (beams, tie beams,
etc.), if deemed necessary, reductions may be made in Phase III. In this case, only the Stage III calculation
will be repeated.
13.7.2. Performance Evaluation / Design of Foundations
13.7.2.1 – The force demands of the high-rise building foundations pre-designed in Phase I for performance
evaluation/design under DD-1 earthquake ground motion in Phase III shall also be calculated in accordance
with 13.6.4.
13.7.2.2 – In the performance evaluation / design of foundations according to Section 16, reinforced
concrete material strengths shall be taken into account as average (expected) strengths.
13.7.2.3 – The calculations described in 16.8.3.4(b) shall be made in relation to nonlinear ground behaviour.
13.7.2.4 – In high-rise buildings with pile foundations;

(a) In Phase III, the calculations of the structure-pile-ground dynamic interaction shall be made by the
methods described for high-rise buildings at 16.10, including both the kinematic interaction between the
ground environment and the piles under the earthquake ground motion defined in the base rock and the
inertial interaction under the effects transferred from the superstructure to the ground-pile system.
(b) If the effects on the superstructure carrier system as a result of the interaction calculations are more
favorable than those obtained in the superstructure analyzes carried out without taking into account the
interaction, the interaction effects on the superstructure shall not be taken into account.
13.8. BUILDING HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM TO BE INSTALLED IN HIGH BUILDINGS
13.8.1 – DTS= 1, 1a, 2, 2a class buildings HN >105 m, records are kept in real time by the Disaster and
Emergency Management Presidency and the building owner.
A building health monitoring system will be established in accordance with the directive published by the
Presidency. The system will be shown in application projects.
13.8.2 – Building owners shall be responsible for the maintenance and maintenance of the monitoring system.
INFORMATION ANNEX 13A – HIGH BUILDING CARRIER SYSTEMS
13A.1. TYPICAL HIGH BUILDING CARRIER SYSTEMS
A general description of typical high-rise building carrier systems is given below. In practice, carrier systems
that meet this definition are usually used.
13A.1.1 – A typical high-rise building consists of a low-rise plinth (podium) located above basements,
usually buried in the ground, and a tower section rising above it. A very large proportion of high-rise
buildings fit this definition, but in some high-rise buildings the plinth
Not.
13A.1.2 – The tower carrier system consists of a central core curtain system that meets a significant part
of the effects of earthquakes and winds, or even almost all of them, depending on the location, and consists
of frames formed by reinforced concrete, steel or composite columns and beams and/or beamless slabs that
are directly relied on columns or curtains.
13A.1.3 – Care shall be taken to ensure the torsional rigidity and strength required for the tower carrier system
with frames with sufficient rigidity and strength arranged all around.
13A.1.4 – The bearing system of the low-rise plinth section, which is located above the basement floors
buried in the ground and occupies a larger space in the plan than the tower section above, is a system that
usually consists of curtains and frames and/or beamless slabs in addition to the tower carrier system that
continues from top to bottom. The bearing system of basements embedded in the ground consists of the
surrounding rigid curtains in addition to the carrier system that continues from top to bottom.
13A.1.5 – The fact that the tower is located in a common carrier system without separating from basements
with plinth and rigid perimeter curtains causes the effects from the tower to be transferred to the plinth and
largely to the rigid basement curtains. Thus, both the height of the tower is shortened and the tipping moment
at the foundation level of the tower is significantly reduced. However, on the other hand, the floors of the
transition floors (transfer floors) in the transition from the tower to the plinth and especially to the
surrounding basement curtains are subjected to great difficulties within their own planes.
13A.1.6 – The core curtain system, which is the main element of the tower carrier system, is the carrier
system consisting of independently operating curtains with U, E or similar sections and usually the curtain(s)
with bond beams formed by connecting them with reinforced concrete or steel bond beams with high rigidity
and strength.
13A.1.7 – In special cases, external support (outrigger) systems based on the core curtain group in the
center and strong columns on the outside on certain floors or floors may also be included in the tower carrier
system.
13A.1.8 – Mega-frame systems consisting of multi-part steel mega-columns and mega-beams, including
mega crosses when necessary, can also be used as high-rise building carrier systems.
13A.2. ISSUES TO BE CONSIDERED IN THE ARRANGEMENT OF THE HIGH BUILDING
CARRIER SYSTEM
13A.2.1 – High-rise building carrier systems shall be as orderly as possible, both in the plan and in the vertical
direction. Care should be taken to place the core curtain in the center of the building and to choose
symmetrical or near-symmetrical carrier systems according to both main axes in the plan.
13A.2.2 – In the case of systems with reinforced concrete beamless flooring, it shall be essential to work
together with the core curtain in the center, to connect the surrounding columns or curtains to each other with
as rigid beams as possible, thus creating strong outer frames to ensure sufficient torsional rigidity and strength
in the bearing system (see Section 1.2.2 13A.1.3). In this context, it should be ensured that the dominant
torsion mode period of the carrier system is not longer than the period of the dominant displacement mode.
13A.2.3 – In the case of using external support (outrigger) in the carrier system (see External support (see
External Support) in the carrier system. 13A.1.7) measures shall be taken to limit the strength of the support
beams so that the axial forces to be transferred to the core curtains and support columns on which they are
supported do not exceed the prescribed levels. In this context, it may be preferable to arrange the support
beams as lattice systems using buckling-prevented steel crosses whose yield levels can be controlled.
ECTION 14 – SPECIAL RULES FOR THE DESIGN OF INSULATED BUILDING CARRIER SYSTEMS UNDER
14.0. IMAGES AND DEFINITIONS
14.0.1. Icons
A = Gross cross-sectional area of elastomer insulation unit
AL = Elastomer layer edge surface area
AP = Area of lead core in lead-core elastomer insulation units
Ar = Load-subject surface area of a single layer of elastomers adhered to by steel plate
b = The longest plan length of the building is the shortest plan length in the direction perpendicular to d
B = Diameter of elastomer adhered to steel plate

'
B = Size defined in Figure 14A.1
BL = Lead core diameter
d = Longest plan length of the structure

D = Displacement value for the insulation unit D D = Displacement to occur in the center of the effective
rigidity of the insulation system in the direction taken into account at the design earthquake ground motion
level
DTD = Total displacement to occur in the center of effective rigidity of the insulation system in the direction
taken into account at the design earthquake ground motion level DM = Insulation in the direction considered
at the largest earthquake ground motion level
displacement to occur in the center of effective rigidity of the system DTM = Total
displacement to occur in the effective rigidity center of the insulation system in the direction taken into
consideration at the level of ground motion of the largest earthquake Dy = Effective yield displacement
of the insulation unit e = The eccentricity measured between the center of gravity of the superstructure and
the center of rigidity of the insulation system and the additional external displacement calculated as 5% of
the plan size in the direction perpendicular to the earthquake loading sum of centrality E d = Total
earthquake effect based on design E c = Pressure modulus of elastomer insulation unit E'c = Pressure
modulus based on fixed volume acceptance of elastomer insulation unit Eo = Modulus of elasticity
Ev = Vertical rigidity module
F = Resistance to D displacement in the insulation unit

FS = Earthquake force affecting the superstructure Fy = Effective yield strength
= Characteristic strength of the insulating unit (force corresponding to zero displacement in the force-displacement
cycle) g = Gravitational acceleration
G = Constant load Gv = Shear modulus of elastomer material
Ge = Active slip module H = Total height of the insulation unit h i = Distance between the first floor and
the (i-1) floor (floor height)
h x = x height of the floor

K = Volume modulus of rubber material
QC = Uninterrupted Use Performance Level
= Nominal effective rigidity of the insulation system at the design earthquake ground motion displacement level K M
= Nominal effective rigidity of the insulation system at the largest earthquake ground motion displacement
level k1 = Initial rigidity of the elastomer insulation unit (elastic rigidity)
k2 = Secondary (beyond elastic) rigidity of the elastomer insulation unit
Active rigidity corresponding to displacement D

k =
e
kv = Vertical rigidity of elastomer insulation unit
= The largest vertical load occurring under the joint influence of vertical load and earthquake load P cr = Buckling load
of elastomer insulation units in the absence of horizontal displacement Pcr′ = Buckling load of elastomer
insulation units in case of horizontal displacement
Axial load of elastomer insulation units due to unit shape change
P =
str capacity
Rc = Radius of curvature of the insulation unit shear surface
R = Earthquake load reduction coefficient

S = Figure coefficient
SH = Limited Damage Performance Level
(DD-2)
S spectral acceleration for 5% damping at ground motion level [g]
ae
= Spectral acceleration in period TD at the design earthquake ground motion level
(DD-2 [g]
)
S (T
ae d = Horizontal spectral acceleration for 5% damping at the ground motion level of the
) (DD-
S largest earthquake [g]
1) ae
= Spectral acceleration in period TM at the level of ground motion of the largest
S earthquake [g]
(DD-1 ) ae
(
T ) = Elastomer layer thickness
M t
= Effective vibration period at the level of design displacement of the earthquake-
TD
insulated building
T = Prevail mode vibration period calculated using the gross cross-sectional rigidity of
p
the uninsulated building
TM = Effective vibration period of earthquake-insulated building under the largest

displacement
Tr
= Total elastomer thickness
Tv
= Vibration period in the vertical direction of the insulated structure with elastomer
insulation units
VD
= Design earthquake ground motion level DD-2 calculated for the force acting on the
VM superstructure
= Force acting on the superstructure calculated for the largest earthquake ground
y
motion level DD-1
Q W Wd w i = Distance perpendicular to earthquake loading between the rigidity center of the

β
wx e τ insulation system and the relevant element
= Reduced moving load according to TS 498

yp = Weight of the building against the total mass at the time of the earthquake
εb γ = Energy consumed (the area within the force-displacement curve)
γ
c c = Constant load of the first floor of the building
= Design
= total weight of x solid
earthquak
= Effective damping rate
e
horizontal = Shear yield stress of lead material
= Breaking elastomer material
unit = Angular deformation caused by vertical loads
deformation = Unit deformation caused by pressure generated under the influence of ground motion
value of in DD-1 and DD-2 earthquakes
γ = Angular deformation caused by pressure γ r,st = Unit deformation caused by the relative rotation
c,st
between the upper and lower plates of the insulating unit γ s = Angular deformation caused by total
earthquake design displacement γ = Unit deformation caused by horizontal displacement caused by the
s,E
effect of DD-1 and DD-2 earthquake ground motion γ = Horizontal effects (expansion, wind, etc.) other than
s,st
earthquakes
angular deformation resulting from displacement μ = Effective coefficient of friction ηbi =
Torsion Irregularity Coefficient defined in the i layer

η = Damping scaling coefficient for design earthquake ground motion level η = Damping scaling
D M
coefficient for the largest earthquake ground motion level ∆s = Amount of horizontal displacement caused
by horizontal loading θ = Design rotation angle ξ = For the insulation unit at DD-1 or DD-2 earthquake
s
ground motion level

calculated percentage of active damping
14.0.2. Definitions
Insulation System: It is all the components that provide vertical rigidity, horizontal flexibility and energy
consumption in the insulation interface.
Insulation Interface: It is the interface where the insulation system is placed.
Infrastructure: It is the part of the insulation interface of the building, including the foundation system,
that is below it.
Superstructure: It is the structural part of the building that remains above the insulation interface.
Insulation Unit: Each of the elements that make up the insulation system is called the insulation unit. The
insulation unit acts as a support under earthquake loads, which allows the insulation system to behave
flexibly horizontally and rigidly in the vertical and to make large horizontal displacements. Insulation units
must have the ability to consume energy.
Design Earthquake Ground Motion: DD-2 earthquake ground motion level defined in 2.2.2.
Design Displacement: It is the maximum relative displacement (relative displacement between the bottom
of the superstructure and the top of the infrastructure) that occurs under the influence of Design Earthquake
Ground Motion, in the center of effective rigidity at the interface of the insulation system, in line with the
earthquake under consideration.
Total Design Displacement: It is the largest relative displacement (relative displacement between the
bottom of the superstructure and the top of the infrastructure) obtained in each of the insulation units at the
insulation interface under the influence of Design Earthquake Ground Motion, taking into account the
torsional behavior of the structure in line with the earthquake considered.
Largest Earthquake Ground Motion: DD-1 earthquake ground motion level defined in 2.2.1.
Largest Displacement: The largest earthquake is the maximum relative displacement (relative displacement
between the bottom of the superstructure and the top of the infrastructure) that occurs under the influence of
ground motion, in the center of effective rigidity at the interface of the insulation system, in line with the
earthquake under consideration.
Total Largest Displacement: The largest earthquake is the maximum relative displacement (relative
displacement between the bottom of the superstructure and the top of the infrastructure) obtained in each of
the insulation units at the insulation interface under the influence of ground motion, taking into account the
torsional behavior of the structure in line with the earthquake under consideration.
Effective Damping Ratio: The effective damping ratio that the insulation system will show under
displacements of a certain amplitude (separately for design displacement and the largest displacement
is determined).
Effective Rigidity: It is the stiffness value obtained by dividing the total shear force generated in the
insulation system by the relative displacement value in the insulation system rigidity center (determined
separately for design displacement and the largest displacement).
Effective Rigidity Center: It is the rigidity center calculated depending on the effective horizontal rigidity
of the units in the insulation system that oppose the displacement under the design earthquake ground motion.
Effective Insulation Period: It is the natural vibration period of a single-degree of freedom system whose
mass is equal to the mass of the superstructure and whose rigidity is equal to the effective horizontal rigidity
of the insulation system (determined separately for design displacement and the largest displacement).
14.1. SCOPE
14.1.1 – This Section covers the principles of earthquake design of new buildings to be strengthened by
applying earthquake insulation and existing buildings to be strengthened by applying earthquake insulation.
14.1.2 – This Section covers the use of elastomer and friction insulation units with curved surfaces in
earthquake insulation.
14.2. PURPOSE
14.2.1 – The main purpose of earthquake insulation is to reduce the earthquake forces acting on the bearing
system of the building. For this purpose, it is necessary to extend the natural vibration period of the isolated
building and/or increase its energy consumption capacity.
14.3. GENERAL DESIGN PRINCIPLES
14.3.1 – In designs covered by this Section, the insulation system shall be placed at an insulating interface
located under the superstructure.
14.3.2 – In buildings where earthquake insulation is applied, the Building Importance Coefficient I = 1 will
be taken.
14.3.3 – The design shall take into account two different levels of earthquake ground motion, as specified in
(a) and (b) below and defined in 2.2.
(a) DD-2 Earthquake Ground Motion Level (Design Earthquake Ground Motion)
(b) DD-1 Earthquake Ground Motion Level (Largest Earthquake Ground Motion)
14.3.4 – According to the level of limited ductility of the substructures and superstructures of the buildings
to which earthquake insulation is applied
can be designed.
14.3.5 – In order to reduce torsional effects, the vertical projection of the effective rigidity center of the
insulation system and the superstructure mass center at the insulation interface shall be as close as possible.
14.3.6 – The calculation of the largest displacement of the insulation system will be made with the lower
limit values of the parameters of the insulation units at the DD-1 earthquake ground motion level, and
the calculation of the largest horizontal force affecting the superstructure will be made with the upper limit
values of the parameters of the insulation units at the DD-2 earthquake ground motion level .
14.3.7 – The difference between the internal force of the insulation system in the case of the largest
displacement occurring under the ground motion of the DD-1 earthquake and the internal force of 50% of
the largest displacement shall be at least 0.025 W. In addition, the insulation system shall be designed in
such a way that it can generate horizontal centering force at any D displacement, and the vibration period
calculated using its secondary (beyond elastic) rigidity shall not be greater than 6 seconds. In satisfying the
conditions of the centering force and tangential rigidity, forces independent of displacement shall not be taken
into account.
14.3.8 – In the entire structure model, it is possible to model only the insulation units for nonlinear behavior,
while the upper and substructures can be modeled linearly elastically.
14.3.9 – The effective cross-sectional rigidity multipliers to be used in the modeling of the structure shall be
determined using Table 13.1.
14.3.10 – The nominal values of the relevant parameters of the insulation system may be used in determining
the floor accelerations in the building and in the equipment surveys.
14.3.11 – The insulation system must have an amount of unobstructed range of motion equal to the largest
calculated displacement.
14.3.12 – For matters not specified in this section, TS EN 1337-1 and TS EN 15129 standards shall be taken
as basis.
14.4. MAIN FEATURES OF INSULATION UNITS
14.4.1 – The insulation units constituting the insulation system to be used shall show increased resistance to
horizontal displacements increased under the joint effect of vertical load and earthquake. Changes in its
physical properties, on the other hand, shall remain within the limits set forth in this Chapter.
14.4.2 – The upper and lower limit values of the insulation units shall be determined according to 14.12.1
for elastomer insulation units and according to 14.13.1 for frictional insulation units with curved surfaces.
14.4.3 – In the design of the insulation unit elements, measures shall be taken for effects such as wind,
temperature, aging, creep, fatigue and humidity other than earthquakes and these effects shall be taken into
account in the calculations.
14.4.4 – In the design of the insulation system, it is essential that no tensile force is generated in the insulation
units at any earthquake ground motion level. However, special quality insulation units can be used to meet
the tensile forces in special cases. The rigidity of this type of insulation units under tensile and the ability to
meet the tensile forces generated will be confirmed by experiments.
14.5. STABILITY OF THE INSULATION SYSTEM
14.5.1 – The stability of the insulation system and the elements under the insulation system shall be indicated
by the calculation made by using the lower limit values of the parameters of the insulation units at the DD-1
earthquake ground movement level.
14.5.2 – All elements of the insulation system shall be capable of decisively handling the axial forces in the
state of the greatest displacement.
14.5.3 – The safety coefficient of the insulation system of the building against tipping at the DD-1 earthquake
ground movement level shall be at least 1.0. In the calculation of the safety coefficient, all earthquake and
non-earthquake load combinations will be taken into account. In the event of a rise or pull in any unit in the
insulation system, it will be shown by calculation that the stability of the building is not impaired.
14.6. WIND, FIRE AND ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS
14.6.1 – The maximum relative displacement at the insulation interface under wind load shall not be more
than the relative floor displacement value allowed for the building at the DD-2 earthquake ground motion
level. In cases where the insulation system cannot meet this limit on its own, only locking mechanisms that
will work under wind load can be used.
14.6.2 – The fire resistance of the insulation system shall be equal to or greater than the fire resistance
required for other vertical load-bearing elements of the building.
14.6.3 – Changes in the mechanical properties of the insulation units over time arising from production and
placement or due to physical and environmental effects shall be considered for the most unfavorable
situations at the design stage.
14.7. INSPECTION, MONITORING AND MAINTENANCE OF THE INSULATION SYSTEM
14.7.1 – After the insulation units are placed at the insulation interface, a conformity examination will
be carried out on site and it will be checked that the insulation units are placed and connected in such a way
as to provide the displacements specified in the project, and that the installation elements that cut the
insulation interface have the characteristics specified in the project.
14.7.2 – Access to the insulation units should be provided throughout the life of the building, and if
necessary, a working area of sufficient dimensions and a transition area to the insulation units should be left
so that the insulation unit can be replaced.
14.7.3 – The procedures for the periodic maintenance of the insulation units and, if necessary, their
replacement shall be defined for a period covering the useful life of the building by a report to be prepared
by the engineer responsible for the design.
14.8. APPROVALS AND DOCUMENTS
14.8.1 – Insulation units shall have CE marking.
14.9. PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES
14.9.1 – Performance targets and design approaches to be applied according to the Earthquake Design Class
of insulated buildings are given in Table 3.5.
14.9.2 – In order to achieve the targeted performance levels under DD-2 earthquake ground motion in Table
3.5 in the design of buildings where earthquake insulation is applied, the earthquake load reduction
coefficient Rand the strength surplus
coefficient D shall be Performance Target R D determined according to
Table 14.1. QC 1.2 1.2
.SH 1.5 1.5
Table 14.1- Earthquake Load Reduction
and Strength Excess Coefficients
14.10. LOAD COMBINATIONS TO BE USED IN DESIGN
14.10.1. Load Combinations to be Used in the Design of the Insulation Interface and the Underlying
Equivalent. (14.1), Equivalent. (14.2), Equivalent. (14.3) The load combinations given in will
be considered.
(14.
1.4G1.6Q+
1)
(14.
d1.2GQE+ ±
2)
(14.
0.9GE± 3)
Infrastructure Elements
In the calculation of the loads that are located at the insulation interface and affect the elements under it
14.10.2. Load Combinations to be Used in the Design of Superstructural Elements on the Insulation
Interface
The load combinations to be used in the design of the superstructure and including the earthquake effect are
given in 4.4.4.
14.10.3. Load Combinations to be Used in Insulation Unit Tests
In the calculation of the loads to be used in the insulation unit tests, Equivalent.( 14.4) to Equivalent.( The
load combinations given in 14.8) shall be taken into account.
1.4G+1.6Q (14.4) G+ 0.5 Q (14.5) 1.2G+ 0.5QEd
± (14.6) 1.2GQE± d (14.7)
+
0.9GED (14.8)
±
14.11. INSULATION SYSTEM ACCOUNT PRINCIPLES
14.11.1 – Insulation units shall have the capacity to meet the displacements and axial loads obtained by taking
into account the nonlinear behavior of the insulation system in the time definition area under the influence of
DD-1 earthquake ground motion.
14.11.2 – Unless otherwise determined by the test data, the change of the insulation unit properties according
to the effects of axial force, temperature, speed, etc. shall be taken into account in the design.
14.12. ELASTOMER INSULATION UNITS
14.12.1. Lower and Upper Limit Values to be Used in Design
Upper limit and lower limit values of the insulation units parameters to be used in the calculations, multiplied
by the nominal values of the insulation unit parameters by theupper and lower coefficients λ respectively
will be obtained with. Theupper and λlower values of λ are equivalent. (14.9) and Equivalent. (14.10) will be
calculated by the correlations given in .
λ top =[1 +0.75 −1)] λ (14.9)

(λ ae,top λ experiment,top silk,top
λ alt =[1 −0.75(1 − ] λ (14.10)

λ ae,alt ) λ experiment,alt spek,alt
In the event that any λ upper and λ lower values cannot be determined by prototype or production control
experiments, the lower and upper
Type FQ k2
limit values given in Table 14.2
Filed under ball Filed under ball
shall be used in the
æλ KCE 1.00 1.10 1.00 1.30
calculations.
YSE 1.00 1.30 1.00 1.40
mer Insulation Units Strength and Experiment λ KCE 0.70 1.30 0.90 1.30 Rigidity
Parameters Lower YSE 0.70 1.30 0.90 1.30 and Upper
Limit
spek λ KCE 0.85 1.15 0.85 1.15
Recommendation Values
YSE 0.85 1.15 0.85 1.15
In Table 14.2, KCE shows the

lead-core elastomer-type insulation unit and the YSE shows the high-damped elastomer-type insulation
unit. Here, Findicates the characteristic strength of the lead-core rubber-type insulation unit, and the secondary
(beyond elastic) rigidity of the k 2-core rubber-type insulation unit. λ æ refers to the multipliers to be used
due to aging and environmental effects, λ effects such as test loading speed and heating, and variability in
production.
λ
spek
is.
14.12.2. Unit Deformation Limits of Elastomer Insulation Units
14.12.2.1 – Elastomer insulation units shall check for unit deformations and stability situations that will occur
under earthquakes, constant loads and moving loads.
14.12.2.2 – Unit deformation components occurring in the earthquake-free state are equivalent ( 14.11),
Denk.( 14.12) and Denk.( 14.13 ).
(a) Angular deformation resulting from pressure (Figure 14.1a):
6SPK1
γc,st = (14.11) AE
Rc
PK1 Equivalent.( The vertical force obtained under the load combination given in 14.1) is the load-subject
surface area of a single layer of elastomer Aadhered to by steel plate. Account Equivalent.( 14A.5) and
Equivalent.( 14A.6). S shall specify the figure coefficient defined in Annex 14A.6 to be the equivalent of
Ec.( 14A.11) refers to the elastomer insulation unit pressure modulus calculated according to .
(b) Angular deformation caused by horizontal displacement due to other effects other than earthquakes
(expansion, wind, etc.) (Figure 14.1b):
Δ
s
T
γs,st = (14.12) r
∆s is the amount of horizontal

displacement that occurs from horizontal
loading, and Tris the total thickness of the
elastomer layers.
Fig. 14.1
(c) Unit deformation resulting from the

relative rotation between the upper and lower
plates of the insulating unit (Figure 14.1c):
2
Bθ
s
γr,st = (14.13)
2tT
r
The design will include a rotational angle θsconstant load, moving load and rotational effects during
manufacturing. This value will be taken as at least 0.005 radians. B represents the diameter of the elastomer
adhered to the steel plate, t represents the elastomer layer thickness, and Trrepresents the total elastomer
thickness.
is.
14.12.2.3 – At DD-1 and DD-2 earthquake ground motion levels, the unit deformation values to be formed
in the elastomer material under the effects of earthquake and vertical load effects shall be calculated as defined
in (a) and (b) below.
(a) DD-1 and DD-2 earthquakes are equivalent to the unit deformation caused by the pressure generated
under the influence of ground motion. 14.14).
K2 6
SP
γc,E = (14.14)
AE
re c
PK2 , Equivalent.( 14.2) is the vertical force obtained by the combination of charge given in .
(b) DD-1 and DD-2 earthquakes are equivalent to the unit deformation resulting from the horizontal
displacement occurring under the influence of ground motion . 14.15 ).
D
γs,E = (14.15)
T
r
D is the horizontal displacement that occurs at the level of ground motion of the relevant earthquake.
14.12.2.4 – Unit deformations to be formed in elastomer insulation units shall meet the following conditions:
(a) Unit deformations in the elastomer material consisting of vertical loads other than earthquake load are
equivalent.( 14.16) and Equivalent.( 14.17). In these equations, the breaking unit deformation of the ε b
elastomer material
value.
γc,st ≤ 3.5 or γc,st < εb / 3 (14.16)
γ +γ s,st +γ r,st ≤ 5.0 or γ c,st + γ s,st + γ

c,st r,st
< 0.75ε b (14.17)
(b) The total unit deformation occurring at the elastomer material interface without horizontal displacement
and rotation is equivalent ( 14.18) and Denk.( 14.19).
γC,E + γS,E + 0.5γr,st ≤ 6.0 (14.18)
γpp,E ≤ 2.0 (14.19)
14.12.3. Vertical Stability of Elastomer Insulation Units
14.12.3.1 – In the absence of horizontal displacement, the buckling load of elastomer insulation units () is
equivalent for insulating units with a circular cross section, without lead cores . 14.20), square
Equivalent
for insulation units with P crsection, without lead core.( 14.21), for lead-core insulation units,
Equivalent.( 14.22).
4
P = 0.218GB /( tT) (14.20)

cr vr
(14.21)
22
GB
(
4 (1− L/ ) 1− BL/ )
v
BB B Pcr = 0.218 2 2 (14.22) tTr1+ BB
L/
Gvelastomer refers to the material shear modulus and BLrefers to the lead core diameter.
14.12.3.2 – In cases where there is horizontal displacement, DD-1 earthquake under the influence of ground
motion
'
The buckling load of elastomer insulation units is equivalent to P .( 14.23).

Cr
'
( /) A (14.23)
P = PA
cr cr re
In determining Are, D TMshall be used for the value D defined in Figure 14.2.
Figure 14.2
14.12.3.3 – Axial load capacity of elastomer insulation units due to unit change is equivalent ( 14.24 ).
(14.24)
14.12.3.4 – The limit of the buckling load in cases where there is no horizontal displacement of elastomer
insulation units is equivalent ( 14.25 ).
2.0 (14.25)
K1
14.12.3.5 – The buckling load limit under horizontal displacement occurring at the
level of ground motion of the largest earthquake of elastomer insulation units
K2
is Equivalent.( 14.26 ).
′
1.1 (14.26)
14.12.4. Connections of elastomer Insulation Units
14.12.4.1 – The design of the upper and infrastructural joints of elastomer insulation units shall be made in
such a way as to bear the horizontal and vertical forces calculated under the loads obtained by multiplying by
1.1 all the load combinations given in 14.10.1 under the total greatest displacement.
In 14.10.1, Ed shows the earthquake load for the DD-1 earthquake ground motion level. Earthquake
In determining the effect Ed, the vertical earthquake component in the insulation unit design will also be
considered. In the calculation of the connection, the frictional effect between the connection surface and the
insulation unit will not be taken into account.
14.12.4.2 – Rolling stability is not required to be ensured if the standard bolted connection in Figure 14.3a
is used for the upper and infrastructure connections of elastomer insulation units.
In cases where the insulation units and the upper and infrastructure connections
are not in a tensile order (Figure 14.3b) and the horizontal loads are met by
the sliding wedge, ensuring rolling stability in the elastomer insulation
units is equivalent ( 14.27).
B (14.27)
The vertical earthquake effect shall also be taken into account in determining
the earthquake load E d required for the calculation of this force. The
horizontal displacement of the insulating unit under the influence of the largest earthquake ground motion is
D with M, and the effective linear horizontal rigidity corresponding to it is with ke
Demonstrates. H is the total height of the insulation unit, P is equivalent to K3.( 14.3) calculated with vertical
expresses strength.
Fig. 14.3
14.12.4.3 – The adequacy of applications other than those shown in Figure 14.3 shall be further proven.
14.13. FRICTIONAL INSULATION UNITS WITH CURVED SURFACES
14.13.1. Lower and Upper Limit Values to be Used in Design
14.13.1.1 – The upper limit and lower limit values of the parameters of the insulation units to be used
in the calculations, the nominal values of the insulation unit parameters are determined by the upper and λlower
coefficients respectively
will be obtained by multiplying. Theupper and lower values of λ are equivalent.( 14.9) and Equivalent.( 14.10).
14.13.1.2 – By prototype or production control tests of any λ upper and λlower values
If this cannot be determined, the lower and upper limit values given in Table 14.3 shall be used in the
calculations.
Table 14.3 – Lower and Upper Limit µ Recommendation Values for

Filed
Frictional Insulation Units with under ball Curve Surfaces
æλ 1.00 1.20
λExperim 0.70 1.30
ent
The lower and upper limit values are λspek 0.85 1.15 given for frictional insulation units with
curved surfaces that are protected from environmental influences (isolated)
and contain an unlubricated PTFE friction layer.
Here, the frictional insulation unit with μ curved surface indicates the effective friction coefficient. λæ
aging and environmental influences, λ effects such as test loading speed and heating, and λspek in production
refers to the multipliers to be used due to variability.
14.13.2. Connections of Frictional Insulation Units with Curve Surfaces
14.13.2.1 – The design of the upper and infrastructural joints of frictional insulation units with curved surfaces
shall be made in such a way as to carry the horizontal and vertical forces calculated under the loads
obtained by multiplying by 1.1 all the load combinations given in 14.10.1 under the total greatest
displacement. Where Ed is the total earthquake load for DD-1 earthquake ground motion level
Shows. The vertical earthquake component shall also be taken into account in determining the earthquake
load E d. In the calculation of the connection, the frictional effect between the connection surface and the
insulation unit will not be taken into account.
14.14. ACCOUNT METHODS
14.14.1. Selecting the Account Method
14.14.1.1 – If all of the conditions described below are met, the earthquake calculation of the superstructure
and infrastructure can be made by the Effective Earthquake Load Method given in 14.14.2.
(a) The building is located on ZA, ZB, ZC or ZD type ground.
(b) The effective period of the insulated building under the influence of DD-1 earthquake ground motion is
less than 4.0 seconds.
(c) The number of floors of the building on the insulation system is maximum 4 meters and the total height
over the insulation interface is maximum 20 meters.
(d) Lifting or pulling does not occur in the insulation units.
(e) The effective damping rate is less than 30%.
(f) The torsional irregularity coefficient on each floor of the building on the insulation system η<2.0
bi
condition is provided and there is no B2 type irregularity in the building.
(g) The vibration period of the building in the vertical direction is Tv ≤0.1 s.
14.14.1.2 – Where the conditions (a), (b) and (d) given in 14.14.1.1 are met, the superstructure and
infrastructure can be calculated by the Mode Defragmentation Method given in 14.14.3.
14.14.1.3 – The superstructure and infrastructure can in any case be calculated by the Nonlinear Analysis
Method in the Time Definition given in 5.7.
14.14.2. Effective Earthquake Load Method
14.14.2.1 – Design earthquake ground motion level DD-2 for insulation unit displacement D D Equivalent.(
14.28).
⎛ ⎞2 (DD-2)
g
D D = 1.3⎜ 2 ⎟T D η D Sae ()T D (14.28) ⎝4π ⎠
14.14.2.2 – Design earthquake ground motion level DD-2 for the building's active period TD Equivalent.(
14.29).
TD = 2π
D
14.14.2.3 – The insulation unit horizontal displacement for the largest earthquake
ground motion level DD-1 is equivalent to D M.( 14.30).
(14.29)
⎛ ⎞2 (DD-1)
g
D = 1.3 T η S () (14.30)
T
M ⎜ 2 ⎟MMae M
⎝4π ⎠
14.14.2.4 – The ground motion level of the largest earthquake is equivalent to the building
effective period T M for DD-1 .( 14.31).
(14.31)
TM = 2π
M
14.14.2.5 – Damping scaling coefficients η and ηMEquivalent.( 14.32).

D
(14.32)
where ξ is the effective damping percentage calculated for insulation unit displacements at the DD-1 or DD-
2 earthquake ground motion level.
14.14.2.6 – Total displacement of the insulation interface at DD-2 and DD-1 earthquake ground motion
levels, Equivalent.( 14.28) and Equivalent.( 14.30) shall be calculated by adding additional displacements
from the superstructure and insulation system torsion to the displacement values calculated from 14.30). In
the case of a uniform distribution, the total displacements are equivalent.( 14.33) and Denk.( 14.34).
⎡ 12e ⎤
DTD = DD ⎢1+ y22 ⎥ (14.33) ⎣ b + d ⎦
⎡ 12e ⎤
DTM = DM ⎢1+ y(14.34)
22 ⎥
⎣b+d⎦
Equivalence of the displacement values calculated by taking into account the torsion.( 14.33) and Denk.(
14.34) if it is smaller than the values calculated with Equivalent.( 14.33) and Denk.( 14.34), with the values
obtained from the calculation and the values calculated with 1.1 D M and 1.1 D D
those larger than their values will be considered.
14.14.2.7 – Force acting on the superstructure, equivalent to the

design earthquake ground motion level DD-2 ( 14.35).
(14.35)
14.14.2.8 – Force acting on the superstructure, equivalent to the

ground motion level DD-1 of the largest earthquake . 14.36).
(14.36)
14.14.2.9 – The force acting on the superstructure shall in no case be below the design wind force value or
the force required for the insulation system to switch to secondary rigidity.
14.14.2.10 – The force acting on the superstructure is equivalent to the folds ( 14.37).
(14.37)
14.14.2.11 – Force design affecting the superstructure is equivalent to earthquake ground motion level DD-
2 ( 14.35), the value of R will be taken from Table 14.1 according to the performance targets in Table 3.5.
14.14.2.12 – The force acting on the superstructure is equivalent to the ground motion level DD-1 of the
largest earthquake. 14.36), the value of R will be taken from Table 14.1 according to the performance
targets in Table 3.5.
14.14.2.13 – The force acting on the infrastructure is taken as R=1 and equivalent.( 14.36).
14.14.3. Mode Assembly Method
14.14.3.1 – In the case of the use of the Mode Merge Method, the rules contained in this Section shall be
taken into account in addition to the conditions set out in 4.8.2.
14.14.3.2 – Insulation system units shall be modeled in such a way as to demonstrate the torsional effects
with sufficient accuracy by vertical and horizontal displacements of the system in both directions.
14.14.3.3 – The calculated displacements shall not be less than 80% of the values calculated in accordance
with 14.14.2.6 if there are no irregularities in the building, and 90% of the values calculated according to
14.14.2.6 if at least one of the A1, B2 or B3 irregularities is found in the building.
14.14.3.4 – The calculated superstructure and infrastructure forces shall not be less than 80% of the values
calculated according to 14.14.2.7 in the absence of irregularities in the building and 90% of the values
calculated according to 14.14.2.7 if at least one of the A1, B2 or B3 irregularities is found in the building.
14.14.3.5 – The effective damping rate shall be limited to 30%.
14.14.4. Nonlinear Calculation Method in Time Definition Field
14.14.4.1 – The method of nonlinear analysis in the field of time definition shall be applied according to 5.7.
In cases where 14.14.1.1(g) is provided, the two horizontal components of the earthquake shall be used,
and in cases where it cannot be provided, the vertical component shall be used in addition to the two horizontal
components of the earthquake.
14.14.4.2 – All the rules given in 2.5 apply to the selection of earthquake records to be used in the
earthquake calculation in the time definition area of earthquake-insulated buildings. However, instead of 0.2
Tp as defined in 2.5.2, the earthquake-insulated building under the largest displacement of 0.5TM(TM
effective vibration period calculated with upper limit values), 1.25 T M instead of 1.5TM (TM en
Under the large displacement will be used (effective vibration period) calculated with the lower limit values
of the earthquake-insulated building.
14.14.4.3 – In cases where the ground is weaker than ZD, three-dimensional dynamic structure-ground
interaction calculations will be made and the results will be taken into account in the building calculations.
14.14.4.4 – The nonlinear calculation shall be repeated for at least eleven pairs of records in accordance
with 5.7.2.1 at each earthquake ground motion level and in each direction, and the averages of the largest
values obtained in the calculations made at the relevant earthquake level and direction shall be taken into
account as the main value of the design.
14.14.4.5 – The insulation unit displacements obtained as a result of nonlinear calculation in the time
definition field shall be determined as the vector combination of the displacements in the direction
perpendicular to each other occurring at each time step.
14.14.4.6 – Displacements calculated in the isolation interface as a result of nonlinear calculation in the time
definition field shall not be less than 80% of the values calculated according to 14.14.2.6.
14.14.4.7 – The superstructure and infrastructure forces obtained as a result of nonlinear calculation in the
time definition field shall not be less than 80% of the values calculated according to 14.14.2.7 if there are
no irregularities in the building.
14.14.5. Relative Floor Rollover Limits and Earthquake Joints in Insulated Buildings
14.14.5.1 – Relative floor displacements in the superstructure, 0.005 h i for Uninterrupted Use (QC)
performance level, 0.01hi for Limited Damage (SH) performance level, Controlled Damage (KH)
for the performance level, it shall not exceed 0.015hi.
14.14.5.2 – In determining the dimensions of earthquake joints to be left in insulated buildings, relative floor
displacements shall be taken into account in addition to the total largest displacement of the insulation system.
The width of the joint shall not be less than the sum of the absolute largest displacements calculated for
structures on either side of the joint.
14.15. INSULATION UNIT TESTS
14.15.1. Test Conditions
14.15.1.1 – Prototype Tests shall be carried out to determine the force-displacement properties, effective
damping rates, effective horizontal and vertical rigidity and other parameters of the insulation units used in
the insulation system or to control the parameters taken in the calculations, and Production Control Tests
shall be carried out to confirm that the change in production remains within the predetermined limits.
14.15.1.2 – Experiments shall be carried out under the supervision and supervision of the design engineer
and the results of the tests shall be documented.
14.15.1.3 – In the case of the application of the Prototype Tests referred to in 14.15.2 to insulating units
of the same properties and dimensions, it is not mandatory to carry them out again. These tests of the
insulation units shall be documented by the manufacturer.
14.15.1.4 – The design engineer shall prepare the vertical load and displacement values to be used in the
prototype and production tests in accordance with Table 14.4 and Table 14.5.
14.15.2. Insulation Unit Prototype Tests
Prototype experiments will be dynamically applied to at least 2 insulation units for each type of insulation
unit. The displacement and period values to be used in the experiments will be determined using the nominal
parameters of the insulation unit. Prototype tests will be carried out in laboratories independent of the
manufacturer and accredited according to TS ISO / IEC 17025. The contents of the prototype experiments
are given in Table 14.4.
14.15.3. Insulation Unit Production Control Tests
14.15.3.1 – Production control tests shall be applied to a randomly selected 30% of each type of insulation
unit produced. In the event that any of these selected insulation units does not meet the acceptance conditions
given in Table 14.5, production control tests shall be applied to all such insulation units produced.
14.15.3.2 – The displacement and period values to be used in the experiments shall be determined using the
nominal parameters of the insulation unit. The content of the production control tests is given in Table 14.5.
In case of non-performance of the experiment with period TD in Experiment No.2 Table
The speed correction coefficients shall be determined by repeating the Prototype Test No.3 given in 14.4 at
the speed of Production Control Test No.2.
Table
Table
14.5
14.4
– Insulation
– Insulation
Unit
Unit
Production
PrototypeControl
Tests Tests
Test time (s)/ Test Admissi

Admissio
Test Vertical Load
Load or
or Horizontal
Horizontal Displacement Number speed (m/s)/ Cycle n on
Test Vertical Number of Test Time/
No Displacement Displacement / Force
/ Horizontal
No Displacement Cycles of CyclesCycle
Period (s) (s)
Period Require
Require
Horizontal Force
ment ment
Equivalent. The maximum
Equivalent. The Facility
1 value of the vertical load - - Static (180s) a
maximum value of the Static (180
1 calculated by (14.4)
vertical load calculated by 0 -
seconds)
a
Equivalent. The average
(14.4)
2 value of the vertical load DD 3 TD or ≥ 0.05m/s h, i
Equivalent.
calculated byThe Facility
(14.5)
average value of the Horizontal wind
2 vertical load calculated by force per unit of 20 TD b
insulation or 25 mm
(14.5)
Equivalent. The Facility D 0.25D D 0.50 D D 1.00 T D TD T DT M
average value of the V M 1.00 D
3 vertical load calculated by 3333 c, d
(14.5)
Equivalent. The Facility D 0.25D D 0.50 D D 1.00 T D TD T DT M
average value of the V M 1.00 D
4 vertical load calculated by 3333 c, d
(14.6)
Equivalent. Average D 0.25D D 0.50 D D 1.00 T D TD T DT M
5 value of vertical load V M 1.00 D 3333 c, d
calculated by (14.8)
average value of the
6 vertical load calculated by TM 1.00D 3 TM c, d, e
(14.5)
average value of the
7 vertical load calculated by TD1.00D 10 TD f
(14.5)
maximum value of the One-Way
8 vertical load calculated by TM 1.00D - g
Push
(14.7)
smallest value of the One-Way
9 vertical load calculated by - g
Push
(14.8) TM 1.00D
The largest vertical
One-Way
10* opening between the upper - g
Push
and lower plates TM 1.00D
*Applies to insulation units that are subjected to tensile stress at any loading combination or lose pressure contact between the bottom and top plate. After
the experiment reaches DTM displacement, the average axial load obtained with Equivalent 14.7 will be loaded and the insulation
unit will be brought back to the center position.
14.15.4. Insulation Unit Acceptance Conditions
The conditions for acceptance of insulating units are specified in the following articles. During all
experiments, the insulating units will remain stable, and the force-displacement curve will always have a
positive slope.
(a) The vertical rigidity of the elastomer insulation units shall be determined on the test element. The ratio
of the difference between the determined vertical rigidity and the vertical rigidity considered in the
calculation to the value obtained from the experiment shall not be more than 15%. There will be no
permanent deformation in the elastomer insulation unit or on the sliding surfaces of frictional insulation
units with curved surfaces.
(b) The values obtained as a result of the test shall meet the conditions laid down in 14.6.1.
(c) Secondary rigidity calculated for each cycle at all installation and replacement steps
Value; The λ test, lower and λtest, used in the design, will remain between the upper values and the lower and
upper limits obtained by multiplying the nominal secondary rigidity.
(d) For two insulating units of the same type subjected to the test, the difference between the difference
of the effective rigidity values calculated in each cycle and the average effective rigidity value shall be
less than 15 %.
(e) The mean secondary rigidity and the average energy consumed shall be between the upper values of λ
spek, lower
and λspek, used in the design, and the lower and upper limits obtained by multiplying the nominal
values, with a tolerance of +/-5%.
(f) The effective rigidity and the effective damping ratio calculated in the second cycle for both insulating
units subjected to the test shall not vary by more than 30 % in all other cycles.
(g) There will be no permanent loss of pressure, tensile or horizontal rigidity in the insulation unit and the
insulation unit will maintain its stability.
(h) The secondary rigidity calculated for each cycle shall remain between the lower and upper limits
obtained by multiplying the maximum values of the λ test, min and λtest used in the design.
(i) The largest and most of the average secondary rigidity values obtained from each production test
the smaller one shall remain between the lower and upper limits obtained by multiplying the nominal value
with λspek,min and λspek, which are used in the design.
14.15.5. Verification of Design
14.15.5.1 – Where the conditions for acceptance of the insulation unit are not met, the lower and upper
limit values shall be reviewed and changed to repeat all calculations or to improve the design of the insulation
unit and to show that the building meets the conditions specified in this Section. If necessary, prototype
experiments will be repeated according to the new axial load and displacement conditions.
ANNEX 14A – MAIN FEATURES OF ELASTOMER INSULATION UNITS
14A.1 – Elastomer insulation units are made by using a combination of steel and natural rubber (or neoprene)
plates ( Figure 14A.1).
Figure 14A.1
The simplified force- displacement (loading

cycle) curve of such insulating units is
given in Figure 14A.2.
Fig. 14A.2
In Figure 14A.2: FQ =
Characteristic strength, k 1 =
Initial (elastic) rigidity, k2 =
Secondary (beyond elastic)
rigidity,
ke = Active rigidity corresponding to D displacement, F = Horizontal force corresponding to D
displacement, F y = Active yield strength, D y = Active yield displacement.
14A.2 – Effective rigidity of the insulating unit (), the horizontal force exerted in the loading cycle
ke
lue of the horizontal displacement (D) corresponding to this force. F

ke = (14A.1)
D
14A.3 – The effective damping rate shall be determined by β e Equivalent(14A.2). Wdis the amount of
energy consumed in a loading cycle.
1 ⎡ Wd ⎤
(14A.2)
β=
e ⎢⎥
2π ⎣ FD ⎦ 14A.4 – The characteristic strength of the
elastomer insulation unit with lead core is F ,

Q
Equivalent. (14A.3). F Q ≅ Fy = Ap τyp (14A.3)
14A.5 – The initial rigidity of the lead-core insulation unit shall be determined by the elastic rigidity of
the lead core. The secondary (beyond elastic) rigidity of the elastomer insulation unit is equivalent.(
14A.4).
( /) (14A.4)
k = GAT
2 vrr
Ar Equivalent for circular section and lead-core elastomer insulation units ( 14A.5), and for rectangular
section and lead-core elastomer insulation units, A r Equivalent.( 14A.6).
22
A = (π / 4)( B − B ) (14A.5)
rL '2
A = BB− (πB / 4) (14A.6)

Rl
14A.6 – Figure Coefficient of elastomer insulation units ()
S () of the surface area of each elastomer layer

adhered to by steel plate (exposed to load)
Ar will be found by dividing the elastomer layer by the

edge surface area ().
e is equivalent for circular section and lead-core elastomer insulation units.( 14A.8).
22
S = (B − B ) / (4 Bt ) (14A.8)
Here
B = Elastomer plate diameter adhered with steel plate, BL = Lead core diameter,
t = Elastomer is the layer thickness.
14A.7 – Vertical rigidity of elastomer insulation units kv Equivalent.( 14A.9).
EA
vr
kv = (14A.9) T
r
Equivalent. (14A.9) The vertical rigidity modulus in EVEquivalent.( 14A.10).
(14A.10)
+
Ec K
Here Kis the volume modulus of the rubber material, 2000 MPa will be taken. Ecis the pressure modulus of
the elastomer insulation unit and is equivalent ( 14A.11).
2
E = E0(1+ 2 kS)
(14A.11)
c
In this equation, E 0 is the modulus of elasticity of the rubber material and will be calculated by the relation
E0 = 4G v. The k coefficient shall be taken as 0.75, 0.60 and 0.55 respectively, when the hardness value of
the rubber material is 50, 60 and 70.
ANNEX 14B – MAIN FEATURES OF FRICTIONAL INSULATION UNITS WITH CURVED SURFACES
14B.1 – Frictional insulation units with curved surfaces consist of concave steel elements with one or more
surfaces, in which a sliding element is located (Figure 14B.1). The simplified force-displacement curve
(loading cycle) of this type of insulation units is shown in Figure 14B.2.
Figure 14B.1
Figure 14B.2 In Figure 14B.2:
FQ = Fy = Characteristic strength or effective yield strength, k 1 = Initial rigidity, k 2 = Secondary rigidity,
ke = Active rigidity against D displacement,

F = D is the force against displacement Dy = Effective yield displacement.
14B.2 – Characteristic strength or effective yield strength Equivalent ( As stated in 14B.1), the effective
coefficient of friction (at zero displacement) is equal to μ e multiplied by the vertical force acting on the
insulating unit.
FQ = Fy = μe P (14B.1)
14B.3 – Initial rigidity is a virtual rigidity, which is a very high value in calculations. Frictional insulation
with curved surface of vertical force ()as specified in 14B.2)
P
unit shall be determined by dividing the shear surfaces by the radius () of effective curvature.
Rc
P
k2 = (14B.2)
R
c
14B.4 – Effective rigidity in a given loading cycle, equivalent.( 14B.3)
()the maximum horizontal force exerted in the

cycle in question () the maximum horizontal force reached
F
will be obtained by dividing () into displacements.
D
FP μ P
e
k e == + (14B.3)
DR D
c
14B.5 – Effective damping ratio is equivalent to βe ( 14B.4) shall be obtained by dividing the energy
consumed (Wd) in a displacement cycle by 2πFD.
1 ⎡ Wd ⎤ 2 ⎡ μ e ⎤
β ==
(14B.4)
e ⎢⎥ ⎢ ⎥
2π FD πμ + D / R
⎣⎦ ⎣ ec ⎦
SECTION 15 – SPECIAL FOR THE EVALUATION OF EXISTING BUILDING
SYSTEMS UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF EARTHQUAKES AND FOR
THE DESIGN OF REINFORCEMENT
RULES
15.0. ICONS
In dimensional expressions using the following symbols in this section, the forces are in Newton
[N], the masses [tons], the lengths in millimeters [mm], and the stresses in MegaPascal [MPa] =
2
[N/mm ].
b = Width of horizontal plates in steel winding bw = Body width of the beam BKS = Building Use
Class
d = Useful height of the beam and column ECO = Impact/capacity ratio (ECO) = Impact/capacity
ratio calculated in column i according to 15.5.2.3
fctm = tensile strength of existing concrete defined according to 15.2.4.3 fyw = Yield strength of steel
in steel winding
IO = Pre-Migration Damage I = Building Importance Coefficient KH = Controlled Damage
Lp = Plastic joint length
LP = Fibrous Polymer Ls = Cutting opening M = Effective yield moment
y
Ra = Earthquake Load Reduction Coefficient s = Spacing of horizontal plates in steel winding

SH = Limited Damage tj = Thickness of horizontal plates in steel winding
Ve = Design cutting force based on column, beam and curtain V i = Shear force calculated in
column i Vj = Additional shear strength provided by steel winding
= Column cutting above and below the node calculated according to Section 4
V
arm
The smaller of the forces V r = The shear strength of the column, beam or curtain
section β v = The cutting force in the curtain is the dynamic magnification coefficient φ t = Total
curvature φ = Equivalent yield curvature
y
θ = Plastic rotation request

p
θk = Displaced axis rotation

θ = Yield rotation
y
The volumetric ratio of transverse reinforcement in the direction considered

ρ =
sh
wf = Width of the fibrous polymer strip
15.1. SCOPE
15.1.1 – The calculation rules to be applied in the evaluation of the performance of all existing and
to be strengthened buildings and building type structures under the influence of earthquakes, the
principles to be taken as the basis for strengthening decisions and the strengthening design
principles of the buildings decided to be strengthened are defined in this Section.
15.1.2 – The capacity calculation of existing and reinforced masonry buildings shall be made in
accordance with the principles in Chapter 11. However, the information of the existing masonry
buildings is according to this Section.
will be compiled.
15.1.3 – The capacity calculation of existing and reinforced steel buildings shall be made within
the framework of the principles defined for new buildings to be constructed in Chapter 4, Section
5 and Section 9. However, the information of existing steel buildings shall be compiled in
accordance with this Section.
15.1.4 – The capacity calculation of existing prefabricated reinforced concrete buildings shall be
made within the framework of the principles defined for new buildings in Chapter 4, Section
5 and Section 8. However, the information of existing prefabricated reinforced concrete buildings
shall be compiled in accordance with this Section.
15.1.5 – The rules given in this Chapter do not apply to buildings that are not of the building type.
In addition, the evaluation and strengthening of registered buildings and monuments of historical
and cultural value are outside the scope of this Section.
15.1.6 – Earthquake safety of the damaged building after an earthquake causing damage to the
building
It cannot be determined by the methods given in the Department.
15.1.7 – The principles given in this Chapter shall be applied to strengthen the damaged building
after an earthquake causing damage to the building and to determine the earthquake performance
of the reinforced building thereafter . The civil engineer responsible for the project will decide to
what extent the strength and rigidity of the existing elements will be taken into account in the
strengthening of the damaged building.
15.2. COLLECTION OF INFORMATION FROM BUILDINGS
15.2.1. Scope of Information to be Collected from Buildings

15.2.1.1 – Information on the element details and dimensions to be used in determining the
capacities of the bearing system elements of existing buildings and in the evaluation of
earthquake resistance, information on the carrier system geometry and material properties, from the
projects and reports of the buildings, from the observations and measurements to be made in the
building, to the material samples to be taken from the building,
will be obtained from the experiments to be applied.
15.2.1.2 – The procedures to be carried out within the scope of collecting information from
buildings are the definition of the structural system, the determination of the building geometry, the
foundation system and the ground features, the determination of the existing damage and the
changes and / or repairs that have already been made, if any, the measurement of the element
dimensions, the determination of the material properties, the control of the suitability of all this
information compiled on the site with the project of the building, if any.
15.2.1.3 – Examination, data collection, compilation, evaluation, material sampling and

experimentation defined within the scope of collecting information from buildings shall be carried
out under the responsibility of civil engineers.
15.2.2. Knowledge Levels
According to the scope of the current status information to be obtained from the inspection of the
buildings, the level of knowledge for each type of building and, accordingly, the coefficients of the
level of information specified in 15.2.12 shall be defined. Their level of knowledge will be
classified as limited and comprehensive, respectively. The obtained knowledge levels will be used
in the calculation of carrier element capacities.
15.2.2.1 – At the limited level of information, the characteristics of the carrier system are
determined by measurements to be made in the building. The limited level of knowledge shall apply
only to Other Buildings (BKS=3) as defined in Table 3.1.
15.2.2.2 – Comprehensive knowledge level is measured more than in limited knowledge level.
15.2.3. Current Material Strength
The material strengths to be used in the calculation of the capacities of the bearing elements are
defined as the material strength available in this Section of the Regulation.
15.2.4. Limited Knowledge Level in Reinforced Concrete Buildings
15.2.4.1 – Building Geometry: A conveyor system plan relay of the building will be obtained
through field work. If architectural projects are available, they are used as an assistant to the relief
works. The information obtained should include the location and material of all reinforced concrete
elements and partition walls on each floor, their axis spans, heights and dimensions, and should be
sufficient for the creation of an account model of the building. The foundation system shall be
determined by a sufficient number of inspection pits to be drilled inside or outside the building.
Short columns and similar negativities in the building will be recorded in the floor plan and sections.
The relationship of the building with neighboring buildings (discrete, adjacent, with / without joints)
will be determined.
15.2.4.2 – Element Details: It is assumed that the amount and details of reinforcement in reinforced
concrete elements meet the minimum reinforcement conditions on the date the building is built. In
order to verify this assumption or to determine at what rate it has occurred, at least one on each
floor, 5% of the curtains and columns will be reinforcement determined by stripping the concrete
cover. For the purpose of fixing the reinforcement, the concrete cover of one beam will be stripped
from each floor. Stripping should be carried out in the third section of the length of the columns and
beams in the middle of the opening. The stripped surfaces will then be sealed with a high-strength
repair mortar. In addition, the number and placement of transverse and longitudinal reinforcements
in 20% of the curtains and columns whose concrete cover is not stripped will be determined by
reinforcement fixing devices. The reinforcement realization coefficient, which expresses the ratio
of the existing reinforcement to the minimum reinforcement in the reinforced concrete curtains and
columns where the reinforcement is determined, will be determined. This coefficient, which is used
to determine the curtain and column capacities, cannot be greater than 1. This coefficient will be
applied to all other curtains and columns where reinforcement determination is not made and
possible reinforcement amounts will be determined. For the rafters, only the necessary
reinforcement under vertical design loads will be used.
15.2.4.3 – Material Properties: Columns or curtains on each floor in TS EN 12504-1
At least three concrete samples will be taken in accordance with the specified conditions and the
test will be carried out. The strength values found by testing the cores whose length and nominal
diameter are equal to each other and which are 100 mm can be used to determine the existing
concrete strength without applying any coefficient. The conversion of test results from cores
with different length/diameter ratios should be based on appropriate conversion coefficients. If
the total number of samples is three, the lowest compressive strength obtained from the samples
will be taken as the current concrete strength without statistical evaluation. If the number of
samples is more than three, the greater one between the value obtained from the samples (mean
minus standard deviation) and the value (0.85 times average) will be taken as the current concrete
strength. The difference between the smallest value and the average of the remaining results among
the test results of a group of concrete samples will be evaluated and it will be checked whether the
smallest value is a statistically deviant result. For this purpose, in the evaluation of sample results
in the group, if the lowest single value is lower than 75% of the average of the remaining results,
this sample is not evaluated. The reinforcement class shall be determined by visual inspection of
the stripped surfaces as described in 15.2.4.2, and the characteristic yield stress of steel of this
class shall be taken as the strength of the existing steel. In this examination, the elements in which
corrosion is observed in the reinforcement will be marked in the plan and this will be taken into
account in the element capacity calculations.
15.2.5. Comprehensive Knowledge Level in Reinforced Concrete Buildings
15.2.5.1 – Building Geometry: If the building has reinforced concrete projects, the suitability of the
existing geometry to the projects is checked with the measurements to be made. If the projects show
significant differences with the measurements, the project is ignored. If there is no project, the
bearing system relay of the building will be obtained by field work. The information obtained
should include the location of all reinforced concrete elements and partition walls on each floor,
their opening, height, dimensions and material. Short columns and similar negativities in the
building will be recorded in the floor plan and sections. Its relationship to neighboring buildings
(discrete, adjacent, have/no joints) will be determined. Building geometry information should
include the details necessary for precise identification of the building mass. The foundation system
shall be determined by a sufficient number of inspection pits to be drilled inside or outside the
building.
15.2.5.2 – Element Details: If the building has reinforced concrete detail projects, the procedures
specified in 15.2.4.2 shall be applied to the same amount of reinforced concrete elements in order
to check the suitability of the reinforcement to the project. In addition, the number and placement
of transverse and longitudinal reinforcements in 20% of the curtains and columns and 10% of the
frame beams will be determined by reinforcement detection devices. If there is a discrepancy
between the project and the application, the reinforcement realization coefficient, which expresses
the ratio of the existing reinforcement in the reinforced concrete elements to the reinforcement
foreseen in the project , shall be determined separately for the curtains, columns and beams. This
coefficient, which is used to determine the capacity of the elements, cannot be greater than 1. This
coefficient will be applied to all other elements that are not reinforcement determined and the
possible reinforcement amounts will be determined. If reinforced concrete projects or construction
(application) drawings are not available, at least two on each floor, 10% of the columns and curtains
will be reinforcement determined by stripping the concrete cover. The stripped surfaces will then
be sealed with a high-strength repair mortar. In addition, the number and placement of transverse
and longitudinal reinforcements in 30% of the columns and curtains and 15% of the beams whose
concrete cover is not stripped will be determined by reinforcement detection devices.
15.2.5.3 – Material Properties: From columns or curtains as specified in TS EN 12504-1
In accordance with the conditions, three concrete samples from every 400 m 2 shall be taken and
not less than two on the other floors and not less than nine in total in the building. The strength
values found by testing the cores whose length and nominal diameter are equal to each other and
which are 100 mm can be used to determine the existing concrete strength without applying any
coefficient. The conversion of test results from cores with different length/diameter ratios
should be based on appropriate conversion coefficients. In calculating the capacities of the elements,
the greater one between the value obtained from the samples (average minus standard deviation)
and the value (0.85 times average) will be taken as the current concrete strength. The difference
between the smallest value and the average of the remaining results among the test results of a group
of concrete samples will be evaluated and it will be checked whether the smallest value is a
statistically deviant result. For this purpose, in the evaluation of sample results in the group, if the
lowest single value is lower than 75% of the average of the remaining results, this sample is not
evaluated. The distribution of concrete strength in the building can be checked by concrete tractor
readings adapted with the results of the concrete samples test or similar non-damaged inspection
tools. The reinforcement class shall be determined by examination of the stripped surfaces as
described in 15.2.5.2, a sample shall be taken for each grade of steel (S220, S420, etc.), and the
conformity of the steel to the project shall be determined by determining the yield stress, tensile
strength and deformation properties of the steel. If it is suitable for the project, the characteristic
yield stress of the steel used in the project will be taken as the existing steel yield stress in the
element capacity calculations. If it is not suitable, at least three more samples will be taken and the
most unfavorable yield stress obtained will be taken as the steel yield stress available in the element
capacity calculations . In this examination, the elements in which corrosion is observed in the
reinforcement will be marked in the plan and this will be taken into account in the element capacity
calculations.
15.2.6. Limited Level of Knowledge in Steel Buildings
15.2.6.1 – Geometry of the Building: The conditions given in 15.2.4.1 apply exactly. Only
reinforced concrete will be replaced by steel.
15.2.6.2 – Element Details: If steel projects or manufacturing drawings are not available, the size
of all steel or other types of elements (columns, beams, joints, crosses, slabs) on each floor will be
checked, welding characteristics and joining details will be determined in detail. If application
projects or manufacturing drawings are available, 20% of the elements mentioned above will be
dimension checked.
15.2.6.3 – Material Properties: If steel projects are not available, a sample of each type of steel
structural element will be cut and the test will be carried out, and the strength and deformation
properties will be determined. In the same way, a welding sample will be cut out of the building
and an experiment will be carried out. The removed samples will be repaired by filling in their
places. For bolt joints, a bolt sample will be taken and experimented. In calculating the capacities
of the elements, the average strengths obtained from the experiments will be taken as the current
steel yield stress.
15.2.7. Comprehensive Knowledge Level in Steel Buildings
15.2.7.1 – Geometry of the Building: The conditions set out in 15.2.5.1 apply. Only reinforced
concrete will be replaced by steel.
15.2.7.2 – Element Details: The building has steel detail projects. The element dimensions and joint
details specified in the projects shall be checked and verified at least 20% of the total number of
each element and joint type in the building.
15.2.7.3 – Material Properties: The steel grade specified in the project shall be checked by cutting
samples from at least one steel element and conducting a test. In the same way, the sample will be
cut out from a welded joint in the project and the suitability of the strength to the project will be
checked by experimenting. The removed samples will be repaired by filling in their places. For bolt
joints, a bolt sample will be taken and experimented. If conformity with the project is confirmed,
the characteristic strengths foreseen in the project in the calculation of the element capacities will
be taken as the current steel yield stress. If compliance cannot be achieved with the project, at least
three samples and welding samples will be taken and the most unfavorable values obtained will be
taken as the existing steel yield stress in the element capacity calculations.
15.2.8. Limited Knowledge Level in Prefabricated Reinforced Concrete Buildings
The conditions in 15.2.4.1 apply to the geometry of the building. Only reinforced concrete will
be replaced by prefabricated reinforced concrete. The conditions in 15.2.6.2 apply to the element
details, but prefabricated reinforced concrete shall be used instead of the steel in this article. The
conditions in 15.2.4.3 apply to the determination of material properties.
15.2.9. Comprehensive Knowledge Level in Prefabricated Reinforced Concrete Buildings
The conditions given in 15.2.5.1 apply to the geometry of the building. The conditions given in
15.2.7.2 apply to the element details. Only prefabricated reinforced concrete will be used instead
of steel and reinforced concrete in the relevant articles . For concrete compressive strength, at
2
least one sample will be taken from every 600 m area and an experiment will be performed. The
total number of concrete samples taken from the building will be at least five. In the capacity
calculations of the elements, the average concrete compressive strength obtained from the
experiments or the concrete compressive strength specified in the project (the lower one) shall be
taken as the current concrete strength. The reinforcement yield stress to be used in the capacity
calculation of the elements will be the characteristic pour stress of the steel class specified in the
project.
15.2.10. Limited Level of Knowledge in Masonry Buildings
15.2.10.1 – Building Geometry: If architectural projects are available, the suitability of the existing
geometry to the project will be determined by visual inspection of the building. If there is no
architectural project, the system relay of the building will be obtained. The information obtained
should include the location of the masonry walls on each floor, their length, thickness, gaps and
floor heights.
15.2.10.2 – Details: Type of roof and flooring, forms of connection with walls, lines and lintels
The status will be visually determined.
15.2.10.3 – Material Properties: The type of wall materials shall be determined by eye by removing
the plaster of a part of the wall surface. Building strength calculations shall be based on the wall
shear strengths given for each wall type in Chapter 11.
15.2.11. Comprehensive Knowledge Level in Masonry Buildings
15.2.11.1 – Building Geometry: The system relay of the building shall be issued. The information
obtained should include the location of the masonry walls on each floor, their length, thickness,
gaps and floor heights. The foundation system will be determined by an inspection pit to be opened
from outside the building.
15.2.11.2 – Details: The type of roof and flooring, the forms of connection with the walls, the
condition of the lines and lintels will be visually examined. As a result of this examination, it will
be determined whether the rigid diaphragm feature is provided on each floor. If this feature cannot
be provided, it will be decided that the building is insufficient in terms of earthquake safety.
15.2.11.3 – Material Properties: Type of wall materials, part of the wall surface
it will be fixed by eye by removing the plaster. At least two wall part samples shall be taken from
the building to determine the properties of the wall material and the average properties to be
obtained from the compressive strength tests of these samples shall be used in the calculations
to be made in accordance with Section 11. Building strength calculations shall be based on the
wall shear strengths given for each type of wall in Chapter 11.
15.2.12. Coefficients of Knowledge Level
(a) The Knowledge Level Coefficients to be applied to the staff capacities according to the level
of knowledge obtained from the buildings examined are given in Table 15.1.
(b) Material strengths shall not be divided by the material coefficients given in the relevant design
regulations, unless specifically specified. Existing material strengths will be used in the
calculation of element capacities.
Table 15.1 – Knowledge Level Coefficients

for Buildings Knowledge Level Knowledge Level
Coefficient
Limited 0.75
15.3. DAMAGE LIMITS Comprehensive 1.00
AND DAMAGE
ZONES IN BUILDING ELEMENTS
15.3.1. Sectional Damage Conditions
Three damage conditions and damage limits are defined at the cross-sectional level for ductile
elements. These are Limited Damage (SH), Controlled Damage (KH) and Pre-Migration Damage
(IO) states and their limit values. Limited damage describes a limited amount of transelastic
behavior in the relevant cross-section, controlled damage defines transelastic behavior in which
cross-sectional strength can be safely achieved, and pre-migration damage condition describes
advanced inelastic behavior in the cross-section. This classification does not apply to crunchly
damaged elements.
15.3.2. Sectional Damage Zones
Elements whose damage to critical sections do not reach SH are located in the Limited Damage
Zone, elements between SH and KH are located in the Significant Damage Zone, elements
between CH and EO are located in the Advanced Damage Zone, and elements exceeding the RE
are located in the Migration Zone (Figure 15.1) .
Figure 15.1
15.3.3. Identification of Section and Element Damage
Comparing the internal forces and/or deformations calculated by the methods described in 15.5
or 15.6 with the numerical values defined to correspond to the cross-sectional damage limits
in 15.3.1 will decide which damage zones the sections are in. Element damage will be determined
by the most damaged section of the element.
15.4. GENERAL PRINCIPLES AND RULES REGARDING EARTHQUAKE

CALCULATION
15.4.1 – According to this Section of the Regulation, the purpose of the earthquake calculation is
to determine the earthquake performance of existing or reinforced buildings. For this purpose, the
linear calculation methods defined in 15.5 or nonlinear calculation methods defined in 15.6 can
be used. However, performance evaluations to be made with these methods, which are theoretically
based on different approaches, should not be expected to give exactly the same result. General as
defined below
The principles and rules apply to both types of methods.
15.4.2 – For earthquake ground motion levels determined according to 2.2 in the definition of
earthquake impact
The horizontal elastic design spectrum given in 2.3.4 or 2.4.1 shall be used. The Building
Importance Coefficient defined in 3.1.2 will not be applied in the earthquake calculation (I =
1.0).
15.4.3 – The earthquake performance of buildings shall be assessed under the combined effects of
vertical loads and earthquake effects affecting the building. In the earthquake calculation, the
masses will be defined according to 4.5.9.
15.4.4 – Earthquake forces will be applied to the building in both directions and in both directions
separately.
15.4.5 – The model of the load-bearing system of the building shall be prepared with sufficient
accuracy to calculate the internal force, displacement and deformation of the building elements
under the joint effects of earthquake effects and vertical loads.
15.4.6 – In buildings where the floors operate as rigid diaphragms in the horizontal plane, the
degrees of freedom of rotation around the vertical axis with two horizontal displacements on each
floor shall be taken into account. The degree of floor freedom shall be defined in the center of mass
of each floor, and no additional eccentricity shall be applied.
15.4.7 – Uncertainties in the carrier systems of existing buildings shall be reflected in the
calculation methods through the coefficients of knowledge level defined in 15.2 according to the
scope of the data collected from the building.
15.4.8 – Columns defined as short columns according to 7.3.8 shall be defined by their actual free
length in the carrier system model.
15.4.9 – The conditions for the definition of interaction diagrams of reinforced concrete sections
under the influence of one- or two-axis bending and axial force are given below:
(a) The calculation of earthquakes shall be based on the current strength of concrete and
reinforcement steel, determined according to the level of knowledge defined in 15.2.
(b) The maximum pressure unit deformation of the concrete is 0.0035 and the maximum unit
deformation of the reinforcing steel is 0.01.
(c) Interaction diagrams shall be optimally linearized to form a polylinear or multi-plane
can be modeled as diagrams.
15.4.10 – In the definition of element dimensions of reinforced concrete systems, junction zones
may be considered as rigid end zones .
15.4.11 – Effective sectional rigidities of the cracked section shall be used in reinforced concrete
elements under the effect of bending effect . The effective cross-sectional rigidities shall be
calculated according to 4.5.8.
15.4.12 – In the calculation of positive and negative plastic moments of beams with reinforced
concrete table, the table concrete and the reinforcement in it can be taken into account.
15.4.13 – In the event that the clamping or overlapping length is insufficient in reinforced
concrete elements, the calculation of the cross-sectional capacity moment shall be reduced by the
deficiency of the relevant reinforcement in the yield stress, clamping or overlapping length.
15.4.14 – In cases where deformation in the ground may affect the structure behavior, the soil
characteristics shall be reflected in the analysis model.
15.4.15 – The other principles given in Chapter 3, Section 4 and Chapter 5 regarding modelling
apply.
15.5. EARTHQUAKE CALCULATION WITH LINEAR CALCULATION METHODS
15.5.1. Account Methods
The linear calculation methods to be used to determine the earthquake performance of buildings are
the Equivalent Earthquake Load Method defined in 4.7 and the Mode Coupling Method defined
in 4.8.2. Additional rules set out below will apply in relation to these methods.
15.5.1.1 – Buildings to which the Equivalent Earthquake Load Method can be applied are given
in Table 4.4. Additional eccentricity will not be taken into account in the earthquake calculation of
buildings. Equivalent of the total equivalent earthquake load (base shear force) 4.19) and
Equivalent.( According to 4.8), Ra = 1 will be taken in your account.
15.5.1.2 – Ra = 1 will be taken in the earthquake calculation according to 4.8.2 by Mode Merge
Method.
In calculating the internal forces and capacities of the elements compatible with the direction and
direction of the earthquake applied, the internal force directions obtained in the prevailing mode in
this direction shall be taken as basis.
15.5.2. Determination of Types of Damage to the Building Elements of Reinforced Concrete

Buildings
15.5.2.1 – In determining the application limits of the following calculation methods for reinforced
concrete systems, numerical values expressed as bending effect/capacity ratios (ECO) of cross-
sections of beam, column and curtain elements shall be used.
15.5.2.2 – Reinforced concrete elements are classified as "ductile" if the fracture type is bending
and "crispy" if the cutting is challenging.
(a) In order for columns, beams and curtains to be counted as ductile elements, the shear force
calculated in accordance with the bending capacity of these elements in critical sections is
equivalent using the available material strength values of Ve in accordance with the level of
knowledge defined in 15.2. 7.10). V e's calculation is 7.3.7 for columns,
shall be made according to 7.4.5 for beams and 7.6.6 for curtains, but not in Equivalent.( β v =1
in 7.16 )
will be taken. Strengthened bearing power moments in the calculation of V e in columns, beams
and curtains
instead of carrying power moments, they will be used. Taking Ra = 1 together with vertical loads
If the total shear force calculated from the earthquake is less than V e, this cutting force will be
used instead of V e.
(b) Reinforced concrete elements that do not meet the ductile element conditions given in (a) above
shall be defined as elements that are crunchly damaged.
15.5.2.3 – The impact/capacity ratio (ECHO) of ductile beam, column and curtain sections is
obtained by dividing the total cross-sectional moment calculated by taking R a = 1 under the
influence of vertical loads and earthquakes. In the EKO calculation, the direction of the earthquake
force applied will be taken into account. The axial forces corresponding to the bending moment
capacities of the column and curtain sections will be calculated under the joint influence of vertical
loads and earthquake loads calculated by taking Ra = 4.
15.5.2.4 – The impact/capacity ratio of reinforced partition walls is the ratio of the shear force
calculated under the influence of an earthquake to the strength of the shear force. The cutting forces
generated in the reinforced partition walls modeled with diagonal bars shall be considered as the
horizontal component of the axial force of the bar.
15.5.2.5 – For all boundary conditions in reinforced concrete column-beam joints, the joining and
equivalent The shear forces to be calculated from 7.11) shall not exceed the shear strengths
given in 7.5.2.2. However, Denk.( 7.11) considers the consolidation of the Varm instead of the
consolidation according to 7.3.7
Calculated without taking Ve tobe used, Equivalent.( 7.12) or Equivalent( 7.13)
The existing concrete strength determined according to the level of knowledge defined in 15.2 shall
be used instead of f ck. If the joint shear force demand exceeds the shear force strength, the
column-beam joining zone shall be defined as the crunchly damaged element.
15.5.3. Application Limits of Linear Calculation Methods
15.5.3.1 – Linear calculation methods, the occurrence of any of the following situations
is not applicable.
(a) The building height class must be less than 5 (BYS < 5).
(b) The building has a B3 irregularity specified in 3.6.2.4.
(c) In reinforced concrete buildings, on any floor of the building other than the upper floor, the
average of the EKO values scaled by the cutting force of the vertical ductile elements (column,
curtain and reinforced partition walls) for each earthquake direction is greater than the average
EKO value of the beams in the direction of the earthquake.
(d) On any floor of the building other than the upper floor, the average of the ECHO values
scaled by the cutting force of the ductile curtain, ductile column and reinforced partition walls
for each earthquake direction is greater than 3.
(e) On any floor of the building other than the upper floor, the average ECHO value of the
ductile beams in the direction of each earthquake is greater than 5.
15.5.3.2 – Equivalent to the ECO values scaled by the shear force specified in (c) and (d) above.(
15.1).
(15.1)
Equivalent. (15.1) In , i denotes the column number on the

relevant floor, Vi represents the shear force calculated in column
i, and (EKO) represents the ECO value calculated in this
column according to 15.5.2.3.
15.5.3.3 – If any of the situations specified in 15.5.3.1 (a)-(e)

occur in the building, the building shall be evaluated by one of
the methods specified in 15.6.
15.5.4. Determination of Unit Deformation and Plastic

Rotation Requests
15.5.4.1 – Unit deformation and plastic rotation demands of

element sections, 4. As a result of the calculation made according
to 7 or 4.8.2, the total displaced axis rotation obtained at any
element end shall be determined using θ k. Displaced at the ends of
the elements
The definition of axis rotations is given in Annex 15A.
15.5.4.2 – Total curvature demand of the element end section φt, Equivalent.( 15.2).
y
(15.2)
Equivalent. (15.2) In θ y is the displaced axis yield rotation in the element end cross-section, and
φ y is the element
is the yield curvature in the end cross-section. The definition of displaced axis yield rotations at
the end of the element is given in Annex 15A. Lpis the plastic joint size and will be taken equal to
half of the cross-sectional size in the effective direction.
15.5.4.3 – In reinforced concrete systems, the effective yield curvature φ y and the effective yield
moment M y shall be calculated by moment-curvature analysis.
15.5.4.4 – For models of concrete and reinforcing steel with or without coiling, Annex 5A may be
used in the absence of any other choice.
15.5.4.5 – Plastic rotation demand of element sections θp, Equivalent.( 15A.2).
15.6. EARTHQUAKE CALCULATION WITH NONLINEAR CALCULATION METHODS
15.6.1. Definition
The purpose of the nonlinear calculation methods to be used for determining the structural
performance of existing or reinforced buildings under the influence of earthquakes and for
strengthening calculations is to calculate the plastic deformation and plastic rotation demands
related to ductile behavior for a given earthquake and the internal force demands related to brittle
behavior. Then, these demand sizes will be compared with the deformation and internal force
capacities and structural performance evaluation will be made at the cross-sectional and building
level.
15.6.2. Account Methods
The nonlinear calculation methods to be used in the evaluation of existing or reinforced buildings
are the Single Mode Thrust Methods, the details of which are described in 5.6, the Multimodal
Thrust Methods described in 5.6.6 and the Nonlinear Calculation Method in the Time Definition
Area described in 5.7.
15.7. LIMITS OF DEFORMATION
15.7.1. Sectional Unit Deformation and Plastic Rotation Limits of Reinforced Concrete and
Prefabricated Reinforced Concrete Elements
15.7.1.1 – The unit deformation requests of concrete and reinforcement steel obtained in
accordance with 15.5.4 or 15.6.2 shall be compared with the unit deformation capacities defined
below and the performance of the carrier system at the cross-sectional level shall be determined.
15.7.1.2 – If the longitudinal reinforcements of the reinforced concrete elements for which the
deformation is calculated are arranged with non-ribbed (flat) reinforcement steel, the
reinforcement steel unit deformation request and the plastic rotation demand shall be increased by
multiplying by 1.5.
15.7.1.3 – In reinforced concrete ductile beam, curtain and column elements where plastic
deformation occurs, the unit deformation and plastic rotation upper limits (capacities) allowed
according to various cross-sectional damage limits are defined in 5.8.1.1, 5.8.1.2, 5.8.1.3 and
5.8.1.4. Equivalent. (5.4d) In the calculation of ρsh in , 30% of the 90 degree closed ethers can be
taken into account.
Equivalent given in 5.8.1.2( In 5.6), L s shall not be less than Lp.
15.7.1.4 – If the shear force ratio of the reinforced concrete section for which the deformation is
calculated is V / (b df )< 0.65, the upper limits of the deformation calculated according to 15.7.1.3
are valid.
e w ctm
If the cutting force ratio is greater than 1.30, the upper limits of deformation calculated according
to 15.7.1.3
It will be reduced by multiplying by 0.50. Linear interpolation will be applied for intermediate
values.
15.7.2. Deformation and Plastic Rotation Limits of Steel Elements
The permissible limits for calculated deformations and element end rotations in existing or
reinforced steel buildings are given in Annex 5C for the respective performance levels. Existing
material strengths will be used as material strengths.
15.7.3. Deformation Limits of Reinforced Partition Walls
In determining the earthquake performance of reinforced partition walls in reinforced concrete

buildings, the shear angle limits given in Table 15.2 shall be taken into consideration. The shear
angle will be obtained by dividing the largest relative floor displacement calculated on the
respective floor by the floor height.
Table 15.2 – Shear Angles Defining Performance Limits for Reinforced Partition Walls
Performance
Limit
. .SH KH SEE
0.003 0.005 0.010
15.8. DETERMINATION OF EARTHQUAKE PERFORMANCE OF EXISTING
BUILDINGS
15.8.1. Targeted Earthquake Performance in Existing or Reinforced Buildings
It will be taken as a basis for determining the earthquake performance of existing or to be

strengthened buildings.
earthquake ground motion levels and the minimum performance targets foreseen for buildings at
these earthquake ground motion levels are given in Table 3.4.
15.8.2. Earthquake Performance of Existing or To Be Strengthened Buildings
The earthquake performance of existing buildings is related to the condition of the damages
expected to occur in the building under the effect of the applied earthquake and is defined on the
basis of four different damage conditions. The earthquake performance level of the building is
determined by applying the calculation methods defined in 15.5 and 15.6 and deciding on the
performance of the personnel according to 15.7. The rules to be applied for determining the
earthquake performance of buildings are given below. The rules given here apply to reinforced
concrete, prefabricated reinforced concrete and steel buildings. The rules to be applied in masonry
buildings are given in 15.8.8.
15.8.3. Limited Damage Performance Level on Existing Buildings
On any floor of reinforced concrete buildings, a maximum of 20% of the beams can pass into the
Significant Damage Zone as a result of the calculation made for each earthquake direction
applied, but all of the other bearing elements are in the Limited Damage Zone. Buildings in this
state are considered to be at the Limited Damage Performance Level, provided that any crunchly
damaged elements, if any, are reinforced . For steel and prefabricated reinforced concrete
buildings, these exceptions do not apply.
15.8.4. Controlled Damage Performance Level in Existing Buildings
Provided that crunchly damaged elements, if any, are reinforced, buildings that meet the following
conditions are considered to be at the Controlled Damage Performance Level:
(a) On any floor of reinforced concrete buildings, as a result of the calculation made for each
earthquake direction applied, not more than 35% of the beams and as many of the vertical
elements (columns, curtains and reinforced partition walls) as defined in paragraph (b) below,
except for the secondary (not included in the horizontal load-bearing system) beams, may pass
into the Forward Damage Zone. For steel and prefabricated reinforced concrete buildings, these
exceptions do not apply.
(b) The total contribution of vertical elements in the Forward Damage Zone to the shear force
carried by the vertical elements on each floor must be less than 20%. The ratio of the shear
forces of the vertical elements in the Forward Damage Zone on the top floor to the sum of the
cutting forces of all vertical elements on that floor can be up to 40%.
(c) All other carrier elements are in the Limited Damage Zone or the Significant Damage Zone.
However, the ratio of the shear forces carried by vertical elements whose Significant Damage
Limit has been exceeded in both the upper and lower sections of any floor to the shear force
carried by all vertical elements on that floor must not exceed 30% (In the calculation with the
linear method, the equivalent of both the lower and upper nodes is equivalent in both ( 7.3) are
the columns in which this
they are not included in the account).
15.8.5. Performance Level of Migration Prevention in Existing Buildings
Provided that all crunchly damaged elements are in the Migration Zone, buildings that meet the
following conditions are considered to be at the Migration Prevention Performance Level:
(a) On any floor of reinforced concrete buildings, as a result of the calculation made for each
earthquake direction applied, a maximum of 20% of the beams, excluding secondary (not
included in the horizontal load carrier system) beams, may pass into the Migration Zone. For
steel and prefabricated reinforced concrete buildings, these exceptions do not apply.
(b) All other carrier elements are in the Limited Damage Zone, Significant Damage Zone or
Forward Damage Zone. However, the ratio of the shear forces carried by vertical elements
whose Significant Damage Limit has been exceeded in both the upper and lower sections of
any floor to the shear force carried by all vertical elements on that floor must not exceed 30% (In
the calculation with the linear method, the equivalent of both the lower and upper nodes is
equivalent in both ( 7.3) are not included in this calculation).
(c) The use of the building in its current condition is inconvenient for the safety of life.
15.8.6. Migration Status
If the building fails to meet the Migration Prevention Performance Level, it is in Migration Status.
The use of the building is inconvenient in terms of life safety.
15.8.7. Performance Levels of Reinforced Partition Walls in Reinforced Concrete Buildings
In the calculation made by linear and nonlinear methods, in line with each earthquake, the shear
angle capacities of the reinforced partition walls on any floor of the building must meet the shear
angle limits given in Table 15.2 for each damage limit. Otherwise, the damage assessments made
in 15.8.3-15.8.6 will not be taken into account.
15.8.8. Determination of Earthquake Performance of Masonry Buildings
The performance level of masonry buildings will be decided as a result of the examination made
according to 15.2 and the calculation made according to Section 11. If the shear force strength of
all the walls of the masonry building in both directions is sufficient to meet the shear forces
generated under the effects of the applied earthquake, it is concluded that the building provides the
Limited Damage Performance Level. If the contribution of the walls that do not meet this condition
in line with the earthquake applied on any floor to the floor cutting force is below 40%, it will be
accepted that the building provides the Controlled Damage Performance Level. If this rate exceeds
40%, the building is considered to be in Migration Status.
15.9. STRENGTHENING OF BUILDINGS
It includes strengthening buildings, eliminating defects that will cause earthquake damage, adding
new elements to increase earthquake safety, reducing the mass, improving the earthquake behavior
of existing elements, ensuring continuity in force transfer.
15.9.1. Determination of Earthquake Safety of Reinforced Buildings
In calculating the earthquake safety of the reinforced buildings and their elements, the calculation
methods and evaluation principles given in this Chapter shall be used for existing buildings.
15.9.2. Design of Elements to be Added to Buildings
In the design of new elements to be added to buildings for retrofitting purposes, Section 7 and/or
Section 9 shall be complied with, as well as other applicable standards and regulations, together
with the specific rules given in this Section.
15.9.3. Types of Empowerments
Reinforcement applications will be evaluated in two different scopes, at the level of element and
building system for each type of carrier system.
15.9.3.1 – The processes applied to increase the strength and deformation capacities of the
elements of the building that meet earthquake loads such as columns, beams, curtains, joint zones
are defined as element reinforcement.
15.9.3.2 – System strengthening is defined as increasing the strength and deformation capacity
of the building's carrier system and ensuring continuity in the distribution of internal forces, adding
new elements to the building, strengthening the junction zones, reducing the mass of the building
in order to reduce the effects of earthquakes .
15.10. STRENGTHENING OF REINFORCED CONCRETE BUILDINGS
The element and system strengthening methods given in this Section cover the techniques
frequently used in practice. However, types of empowerment not covered herein may be applied
provided that they comply with the general approach and principles of this Chapter.
15.10.1. Wrapping of Columns
In order to increase the ductility of the columns, the methods given below can be used to increase
the shear and compressive strength, to eliminate the weaknesses of the superimposed inserts. With
these methods, the bending capacity of the columns cannot be increased.
15.10.1.1 – Reinforced concrete Winding: The concrete cover of the existing column shall be
applied by stripping or roughening the surfaces . Reinforced concrete winding should be of
sufficient thickness for the placement of both horizontal and vertical reinforcement, pouring
concrete and ensuring minimum concrete cover. The minimum winding thickness is 100 mm.
Reinforced concrete winding begins above the floor slab and ends below the top floor slab. The
rules given in 7.3.4.2 shall apply to the winding carried out with the aim of increasing the axial
compressive strength for the transverse reinforcement in the winding concrete throughout the entire
height of the column. In the calculation of the shear and compressive strengths of the winded
column, the design strength of the mantle concrete with the wrapped gross cross-sectional
dimensions will be used, but the resulting strengths will be reduced by multiplying by 0.9.
15.10.1.2 – Steel Winding: Steel winding is formed by placing four longitudinal brackets at the
corners of rectangular reinforced concrete columns and welding the brackets with horizontal plates
arranged at regular intervals. There should be no gaps between the brackets and reinforced concrete
surfaces. Horizontal plates should be continuous on four surfaces. In order for the steel winding
to increase the column bending axial load capacity, it must be shown by calculation that the
brackets are continuous between the lower and upper slabs (taking the gaps) and that the transfer of
pressure to the slabs with the head plates is provided. If necessary, the axial pressure load of the
existing reinforced concrete column section due to vertical loads can be reduced by pre-loading the
brackets . The additional shear strength to be provided by steel winding is equivalent.( 15.3).
t bd
j
V = fyw (15.3)
j
s
Equivalent. (15.3) In t j, b and s is the thickness, width and spacing of the horizontal plates, and d
is the useful height of the cross-section. In order to eliminate the weaknesses of the steel wrapped
and overlapping inserts, the length of the winding should be at least 50% longer than the length of
the overlapping zone and the steel winding should be compressed in the reinforcement overlay zone
with two rows of bolted anchors with a diameter of at least 16 mm arranged on the opposite faces
of the column . If the overlay insert is made at the lower end of the column, at least two rows of
bolted anchors will be made 250 and 500 mm above the lower slab, respectively.
15.10.1.3 – Fibrous Polymer (LP) Winding: Winding is provided by winding and gluing the LP
layer around the columns, so that the fibers are parallel to the transverse reinforcements. With LP
winding, the ductility capacity of reinforced concrete columns, their shear and compressive
strength, and the reinforcement clamping strength are increased in cases where the longitudinal
reinforcement overlap length is insufficient. In the reinforcements made with LP winding, full
winding (winding of the entire sectional circumference) method should be used and at least 200 mm
overlap should be made at the end of the winding. LP winding can be applied in rectangular columns
by rounding the column corners with a radius of at least 30 mm. LP application should be carried
out in accordance with the method recommended by the manufacturer. The calculation methods
of the increase in ductility with the increase in shear, axial pressure and clamping strengths
obtained in LP-wound columns are given in Annex 15B.
15.10.2. Increasing the Bending Capacity of the Columns
Colon sections can be enlarged to increase the bending capacity of the columns. This process also
increases the cutting and compressive force capacities of the column. The continuity of the
longitudinal reinforcements added to the enlarged column between the floors will be ensured.
Longitudinal reinforcements will be passed through holes drilled in the floor coverings. In the
column-beam junction areas, the necessary transverse reinforcement will be placed by drilling the
beams or anchoring the beams. The enlarged section of the column shall be enveloped with
transverse reinforcement in accordance with 7.3.4. The concrete cover of the enlarged column
section will be of sufficient thickness to cover the added vertical and horizontal reinforcement. In
order to ensure the adherence of the new and old concrete, the plaster layer on the surface of the
existing column will be stripped and the concrete surfaces will be roughened. The calculation of the
bending, shearing, compressive strength and flexural rigidity of the enlarged column section will
be based on the gross section dimensions and the design characteristics of the added sectional
concrete, but the resulting rigidity and strength will be reduced by multiplying by 0.9.
15.10.3. Winding of the Beams
The purpose of winding reinforced concrete beams is to increase the shear strength of the beams,
and in some cases their ductility capacity. The bending capacity of the beams cannot be increased
by the methods given below.
15.10.3.1 – External Addition to the Ether: In the beam support areas with insufficient shear
strength, the required number of ether rods shall be added externally to the two sides of the
beam as shown in Figure 15.2. The bars, bolted to a steel profile placed under the beam , will be
inserted by bending into the slot opened on the top surface of the slab by passing through the holes
drilled in the upper slab at the top. Then the gaps dug in the concrete will be filled with concrete.
This method can also be applied using different details with the same principles. The shear strength
of the beams, which is increased by external stages added, will be calculated according to TS
500. Externally added ethers do not have a winding effect, do not increase the ductility of the
beam section . In this application, profiles and bolts must be protected against external influences.
15.10.3.2 – Wrapping with Fibrous Polymer (LP): Full winding (winding of the entire sectional
circumference) method should be used to increase beam ductility and shear strength by LP
winding . LP-reinforced beam shear strength is equivalent given in Annex 15B. (15B.1). Spacing
of LP strips in case of discontinuous (in strips) LP use
will be applied by rounding. In LP windings, at least 200 mm overlap should be made at the end
of the winding. LP application should be carried out in accordance with the method recommended
by the manufacturer.
Fig. 15.2
(wf + 15.10.4. Strengthening of Partition Walls

d 4). LP
The winding rigidity and shear force strength of the partition walls within the reinforced
beams concrete
frame, with a which
are radius of
at least
30 mm of
corners
continuous from the
foundation to the top, can
be increased by the
strengthening methods
defined in EK 15C. If
the strengthening of the
building is carried out
mainly by the
reinforcement of the partition walls, then this method is carried out only in buildings with a
maximum of three floors, excluding the basement.
applicable.
15.10.5. Strengthening of Reinforced Concrete Carrier Systems with Cast Reinforced Concrete
Curtains in Place
Reinforced concrete carrier systems with insufficient lateral rigidity and strength, cast reinforced
concrete in place
can be strengthened with curtains . Reinforced concrete curtains can be arranged within the existing
frame plane or adjacent to the frame plane.
15.10.5.1 – Addition of Reinforced Concrete Curtain in the Frame Plane: To the reinforced concrete
system
The curtains to be added will be arranged inside the frame axis, starting from the foundation to the
upper level of the curtain. For this purpose, the continuity of the longitudinal reinforcements in the
curtain end area and, if necessary, the longitudinal reinforcements in the curtain body throughout
the curtain height shall be ensured. The curtains will be connected to the frame in which they are
located with anchor rods so that they work together. The anchor rods shall have sufficient strength
to meet the shear stresses generated under earthquake forces at the interfaces between the existing
frame elements and the added reinforced concrete curtain element. The distribution of the shear
stresses at the interfaces throughout the frame elements shall be calculated in accordance with
known mechanical principles. In the design of the anchor bars, the friction cutting principles in TS
500 will be used. The smallest anchor rod diameter should be 16 mm, the minimum anchor depth
should be ten times the rod diameter, and the widest rod spacing should be 400 mm. In the absence
of an existing column at the curtain end, a curtain end zone shall be established in accordance
with 7.6.5. If there is an existing column at the curtain end, the existing column can be used as the
end zone. If necessary, the existing column shall be enlarged in accordance with 15.10.2 or the
curtain end zone shall be formed by arranging the column in the curtain adjacent to the existing
column. In both cases, the continuity of the vertical reinforcements to be added to the curtain end
zone will be ensured between the floors. The basis will be made under the curtain in accordance
with the principles given in 16.7 and 16.8. The curtain foundation will be sized in such a way as
to reliably transfer the internal forces generated at the base of the curtain to the foundation floor. In
order to reduce the eccentricity that may occur on the curtain foundation, the curtain foundation can
be extended to include neighboring columns and the axial pressure forces of the existing columns
can be utilized. Necessary measures will be taken to ensure that the curtain foundation works
together with the existing foundation system.
15.10.5.2 – Addition of reinforced concrete curtains adjacent to the frame plane: To the reinforced
concrete system
The curtains to be added will be arranged outside the outer frame axis, adjacent to the frame,
starting from the foundation to the upper level of the curtain. The curtains will be connected to the
frame where they are adjacent with anchor rods so that they work together. The anchor rods shall
have sufficient strength to meet the shear stresses generated under earthquake forces at the interfaces
between the existing frame elements and the eccentric curtain element added to the system. In
the design of the anchor rods, the principles given in 15.10.5.1 shall be complied with.
15.10.5.3 – In the absence of an existing column at the curtain end, a curtain end zone shall be
established in accordance with 7.6.5. If there is an existing column at the curtain end, the existing
column can be used as the end zone. If necessary, the existing column will be enlarged according
to 15.10.2 to create a curtain end zone. The basis will be made under the curtain in accordance
with the principles given in 16.7 and 16.8. The curtain foundation will be sized in such a way as
to reliably transfer the internal forces generated at the base of the curtain to the foundation floor. In
order to reduce the eccentricity that may occur on the curtain foundation, the curtain foundation can
be extended to include neighboring columns and the axial pressure forces of the existing columns
can be utilized. Necessary measures will be taken to ensure that the curtain foundation works
together with the existing foundation system.
15.10.6. Addition of New Frames to the Reinforced Concrete System
The foundations of the frames to be added to the outside of the reinforced concrete system will be
arranged together with the foundations of the existing building. In order for the new frames to work
in conjunction with the load-bearing system of the existing building, these frames shall be connected
to the floors of the existing building in such a way as to transfer the necessary load.
15.10.7. Reduction of the Mass of the Reinforced Concrete System
The most effective methods that can be applied in order to reduce earthquake loads are to remove
the upper floor or floors of the building by canceling, to replace the existing roof with a light roof,
to reduce the installation weights such as water tank etc. on the roof to the floor, to replace heavy
balconies, parapets, partition walls, façade cladding with lighter elements.
ANNEX 15A – DISPLACED AXIS ROTATIONS IN COLUMNS, CURTAINS AND DIRT
ELEMENTS IN THE CALCULATION BY LINEAR METHODS
DEFINITION
15A.0. ICONS
= Total length of the element

c= Element net clearance
s = Cutting opening (the ratio of torque/shear force in the section)
M = Effective yield torque

y
Effective yield moment at the end M yi = i
M yj = effective yield moment at the end j
Δ = Translation between floors

θ i = i nodal rotation θ j = j nodal rotation θ ki = displaced axis rotation at the end i θ kj =
displaced axis rotation at the end of j θpi = plastic rotation at the end i
θ = Yield rotation
y
θyi = yield rotation at the end i return θ yj = yield rotation at the end j
15A.1. DEFINITIONS
The deformation properties of a typical bending element under double curvature bending are
shown in Figure 15A.1. where  shows the total length of the element, c shows the net
clearance, Δ shows the displacement between the folds, θ i and θ j represent the rotations of the
knots i and j respectively, θki and θkj are the displaced axis rotations at the ends i and j
respectively.
15A.2. DISPLACED AXIS ROTATION
While the flexural element is in the case of linear elastic deformation, the relationship between
the displaced axis and nodal point rotations at the i end and the displacement between the folds
is equivalent.( 15A.1).
∆
θki =− θi (15A.1)

c
Fig. 15A.1
The displacement value between the floors in the beam elements can generally be taken as zero ( ∆
= 0 ). When yield occurs at the i end of the element, the total displaced axis rotation at the i end is
equal to the sum of the yield rotation and the plastic rotation at this end.
θki = θ yi + θpi (15A.2)
15A.3. YIELD ROTATION IN FRAME ELEMENTS
The relationships between the end yield rotations and the extreme moments at the i and j ends of a
flexural element that passes into a yield state at both ends are equivalent ( 15A.3). The definition
of yield rotations for elements with both ends in the state of flow corresponds to the most
unfavourable situation in calculating unit deformation requests according to 15.5.4.
M ⎡M ⎤
yic yj
θ =⎢1− (15A.3a)
⎥
3EI ⎢ 2M yi ⎥
yi
⎣ ⎦
M  ⎡M ⎤
yj c yi
θyj =⎢1−⎥ (15A.3b)
3EI ⎢ 2M yj ⎥
⎣⎦
Equivalent. (15A.3) The flexural rigidity of the uncracked cross section in EI, M yi and M yj i and
j respectively
are the effective yield moments at the ends. The directions of the yield moments are
counterclockwise plus and counterclockwise minus. Hence Denk.( 15A.3) covers both double and
single curvature bending situations. The effective yield moment M y is obtained in accordance with
the definition given in Annex 5A.1
will be.
15A.4. YIELD ROTATION IN CURTAIN ELEMENTS
According to 4.5.3.2, the relationship between the rotation of the yield and the moment of pour at
the lower end of a bending element on any floor of the building, defined as a curtain , is equivalent
( 15A.4).
M
ys
θy = (15A.4)
3EI
where s is the cutting angle (the ratio of moment/shear force in the cross-section). It can be taken
as approximately half the distance from the base of each floor to the top of the curtain.
ANNEX 15B – CALCULATION OF INCREASE IN STRENGTH AND DUCTILITY IN
COLUMNS WRAPPED WITH FIBER POLYMER
15B.0. ICONS
sA = Column reinforcement area (for single bar)
A.sh = Transverse reinforcement area
b = Section width
wb = Beam body or column width
d = Useful height of the cross section
d′ = Concrete cover thickness
Ef = Modulus of elasticity of fibrous polymer
sE = Steel reinforcement elasticity module
Cc f = Compressive strength of concrete wrapped with fibrous polymer
fCD = Concrete compressive strength
Cm f = Existing concrete compressive strength as defined in 15.2.4.3
Lateral pressure corresponding to unit elongation of 0.001 in transverse
fHs =
reinforcement
In the case of unit elongation of 0.001 in transverse reinforcement, transverse
fHs =
reinforcement and fibrous polymer
the total lateral pressure it must provide
Ymf = Current steel yield strength defined in accordance with 15.2.4.3
fl = Lateral pressure provided by fibrous polymer
h = Cross-sectional size in the working direction
LP = Fibrous polymer
sL = Available trap size
n = Number of trapped reinforcements
nf = Number of LP winding sheets on one side
p = Core cross section circumference
cr = Rounding radius at corners
sf = Axis-to-axis range of fibrous polymer strips
Effective thickness for a layer of fibrous polymer (made for insufficient overlap
=
tf length
fibrous polymer effective thickness required in winding)
cV = The contribution of concrete to shear force strength
Vf = The contribution of fibrous polymer to shear force strength
.maxV = Shear force defined to limit prime pressure stresses
rV = Shear strength of column or beam
wV = The contribution of transverse reinforcement to shear force strength
w f = Width of the fibrous polymer strip ε cc = Unit shortening ε against the compressive strength
of the coiled concrete f = The effective unit elongation limit of the fibrous polymer εfu =
Breaking unit elongation of the fibrous polymer κ a = Cross-sectional shape efficiency coefficient
φ = Longitudinal reinforcement diameter ρ f = Volumetric ratio of the fibrous polymer
A
sh
= Transverse reinforcement ratio, ρ =
ρ sh
sh
Sb
w
15B.1. INCREASING THE SHEAR STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
The shear force strength of LP-wound columns and beams is equivalent.( 15B.1). V = V +V
+V ≤ V (15B.1)
rc w f max
The contribution of concrete to the shear force strength Vc, the contribution of the transverse
reinforcement V w and the V maxvalues defined to limit the prime pressure stresses are determined
by the equations proposed by TS 500, but using the existing material strengths determined
according to 15.2
will be calculated. The contribution of LP winding to the shear
force strength is equivalent if V f winding is in strips .(
15B.2).
shall
(15B.2)
not exceed
the value of
Equivalent. (15B.2) n f represents the number d. of LP winding sheets on a single
face, t f shows the effective thickness for one layer LP, w f shows the width of the
LP strip, E f shows the LP modulus of elasticity, ε f shows the effective unit
elongation limit of LP, d element indicates the useful height, s f shows the intervals
of LP strips, from axis to axis ( Figure 15B.1). If the winding is carried out
continuously, w f = sf will be taken. The effective unit elongation value is
Equivalent.( 15B.3) and Equivalent. (15B.4) will be taken as the smaller of the
values determined by .
εf ≤ 0.004 (15B.3)
εf ≤ 0.50εfu (15B.4)
Equivalent. (15B.4) is the εfu LP rupture unit elongation in . Discontinuous (in

strips) LP use
The ranges of LP strips in case s f, (wf +
a) Columns b) Beams
Figure 15B.1
15B.2. INCREASING THE AXIAL COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF THE COLUMNS
In order to increase the axial compressive strength of the columns by LP winding , the ratio of
the long dimension of the column section to the short dimension should not be more than two and
a half. The cross-sections of the columns can be converted from rectangular to ellipse, increasing
the efficiency of the LP. In ellipse sections, the ratio of long size to short size can be up to three.
When calculating the axial load strength of an LP-wound column, the concrete compressive
strength is equivalent instead of f. ( 15B.5)
cd
cc
value will be used.
f= f
1+2.4(
/ ff
)≥1.2f
(15B.5)
[ ]
cc cm 1 cm cm
Equivalent. (15B.5) The current compressive strength of unwrapped concrete in f cm
is the one
provided by f l LP winding.
is the amount of lateral pressure. fl Denk.( 15B.6).
1
fl = κρε
E
(15B.6)
aff f
2
Equivalent. (15B.6) εf Denk.( 15B.3) and Equivalent. (15B.4) is the smaller one. In this equation,
κa
The cross-sectional shape efficiency coefficient is the volumetric ratio of ρ f LP. κ a is equivalent
for various sections.( 15B.7).
⎧1 Circular section ⎫
⎪
⎪bh/ Ellipse section ⎪

κ = ⎬ (15B.7) ⎪
⎪
Rectangular section

Equivalent. (15B.7) In b and h are the short and long side dimensions for rectangular sections,
in elliptical sections are the corresponding dimensions of the ellipse for short and long dimensions,
and rcis the radius of rounding at the corners in rectangular sections (Figure 15B.2).
concrete
a) Circular Column b) Quadratic Column c) Elliptical Column
Figure 15B.2
15B.3. INCREASING THE DUCTILITY OF THE COLUMNS
In order to increase the ductility of the columns by LP winding , the ratio of the long size of the
column section to the short size should not be more than two and a half. In ellipse sections, the ratio
of long size to short size can be up to three. Unit shortening ( ε cc ) Equivalent to the compressive
strength of the clad concrete in a column wounded with LP ( 15B.8).
εCC⎣⎡+15(F1 ⎤(15B.8)
0.75
⎦
= 0.002 1 / fcm )
In case of LP dressing with the aim of increasing ductility in the columns, Denk.( 15B.5) and
Equivalent.( f 1 Equivalent.( 15B.6). Equivalent. (15B.6) εf Denk.( 15B.4)
calculated value and will be taken as the one less than 0.01.
(a) When using linear calculation methods, the Equivalent.( 15B.8), if the cc value of the ε
calculated by 0.018 is greater than 0.018, the column in question shall be deemed to be coiled
and otherwise unwrapped.
(b) For nonlinear calculation methods, the moment-curvature relationship of LP-wound
sections can be obtained, while for LP-wound concrete, an idealized stress-deformation
relationship can be used so that two direct forms can be used. In this relationship, the stress and
deformation values f cm (capacity) and 0.002 can be taken at the bend point. Stress-deformation
the values at the end point of the relationship are Equivalent.( 15B.5) and Equivalent.( 15B.8).
In the case of reinforced concrete carrier system elements coiled with LP where plastic
deformation occurs , the maximum allowable concrete unit shortening values according to their
performance levels are equivalent to the damage limit before cross-sectional migration. 15B.8) for
the controlled damage limit, equal to the value calculated with Equivalent.( 15B.8), 75% of the
value calculated with 0.004 for the limited damage limit. These values and the unit elongation
values of the reinforcing steel in the section shall not exceed the upper limits specified in 5.8.
15B.4. WINDING FOR INSUFFICIENT INSERTION LENGTH IN COLUMNS
Since the winding effect will be insufficient for columns with a section size ratio greater than two
or whose longitudinal reinforcements have a flat surface, the strengthening of the overlap zones
cannot be done with LP winding. In columns with ribbed longitudinal reinforcements, the LP
thickness required to eliminate the insufficiency of the overlap length is Equivalent.( 15B.9).
(15B.9)
Equivalent. (15B.9) The section width, which is greater than bw in fhs

transverse reinforcement, is 0.001 units against elongation
incoming lateral pressure. Equivalent. (15B.9) f Denk.( 15B.10), f Denk.( 15B.11)
hs hs
will be calculated.
f = 0 001(15B.10)
.ρE
hs sh s
Af
2r s ym
c
fhs = (15B.11)
b ⎡p
⎤
′
+2(φ+d) L
⎢⎥ s
w
⎣2n ⎦
Equivalent. (15B.10) The transverse reinforcement ratio of ρ sh (the smallest of the values obtained
for the two directions) is the modulus of elasticity of reinforcing steel e e . Equivalent. (15B.11)
s
A column longitudinal reinforcement area (for single bar of the largest diameter for which an
overlapping addition is made), f the steel yield strength available for longitudinal
ym
reinforcement, pcore cross section circumference, n number of overlapped reinforcements, φ

longitudinal reinforcement diameter (if there are reinforcements of different diameters, the
diameter of the largest diameter reinforcement to which an overlapping addition is made), d ′ is the
thickness of the concrete slab and the current thrust length of L s. r is the radius of rounding made
c
at the corners,
bw is the size of the cross section in the long direction.
15B.5. STRENGTHENING THE COLON-KIRT UNION ZONES WITH LP
Reinforced concrete column-beam joints can be strengthened by gluing the fibers in parallel with
the prime tensile stresses. The effectiveness of the strengthening details to be applied must be
experimentally proven. Equivalent to the LP active unit elongation value to be considered in the
calculations. (15B.3) must meet the condition in .
ANNEX 15C – STRENGTHENING OF EMBANKMENT WALLS 15C.0. ICONS
A d = Cross-sectional area of the filler wall a d = Width of the equivalent pressure bar [mm]
E c = Elasticity modulus of frame concrete E d = Elasticity modulus of the filler wall E f =
Modulus of the fibrous polymer strip f d = Compressive strength of the filler wall f f yd = Design
yield strength of wire mesh reinforcing steel
hd = Height of filler wall [mm]
hk = Column length [mm]
4
Ik = Moment of inertia of the column [mm ]
kd = Axial rigidity of the equivalent pressure bar
kt = Axial rigidity of the towbar
min = Anchor bar minimum depth
LP = Fibrous polymer
rd = Diagonal length of the filler wall [mm]
smax= Anchor bar maximum range
td = Thickness of the filler wall [mm]
tf = Thickness of the fibrous polymer strip
Tf = Tensile strength of the towbar
Vd = Shear force strength of the filler wall wf = Width of the fibrous polymer strip = Minimum
diameter of the anchor bar
φ
min λ d = Equivalent pressure bar coefficient ρsh = Ratio of horizontal body reinforcements in
curtain and wall to the gross cross-sectional area of the curtain body θ = Angle of the equivalent
pressure bar with horizontal τd = Shear strength of the filler wall
15C.1. STRENGTHENING OF EMBANKMENT WALLS
According to 15.10.4, the rigidity and shear strength of the filler walls in the reinforced concrete
frame, which are continuous from the top of the foundation to the top, can be increased by the
strengthening methods described below.
15C.2. REINFORCEMENT OF INFILL WALLS WITH SPECIAL PLASTER REINFORCED
WITH WICKER STEEL
The rigidity and shear strength of the filler walls can be increased by a special layer of blended
plaster, reinforced with mesh steel, applied to the wall face.
(a) The thickness of the plaster layer must be at least 30 mm and the concrete cover of the
wicker reinforcement must be at least 20 mm. The compressive strength of the plaster will be at
least 5 MPa .
(b) The ratio of the diagonal length of the walls to be strengthened to the thickness before the
reinforcement shall be less than 30. In such applications, the formation of a pressure bar within
the existing frame should be ensured and the necessary anchors for the transfer of loads to the
frame should be arranged. For this, there must be a gap of at least 30 mm deep between the wall
face to be applied and the outer face of the frame elements (Figure 15C.1). Otherwise, such wall
reinforcement cannot be applied.
(c) The smallest diameter of the frame anchor bar to be used between the reinforced plaster
layer and the frame elements shall be 12 mm, the minimum depth of the anchor shall be ten
times the diameter of the rod and the widest bar spacing shall be 300 mm. In addition, four body
anchors will be made in each square meter of wall area perpendicular to the wall plane to ensure
that the reinforced plaster layer and the existing filling wall work together . The body anchor rods
to be made in the direction perpendicular to the wall shall be embedded in the mortar joints of
the filler wall and the rod diameter shall be at least 8 mm and the anchorage depth shall be at
least ten times the rod diameter. All anchor rods to be made parallel to the wall plane and in the
direction perpendicular will be planted with an epoxy-based material in the holes to be drilled
and the ends will be bent 90 degrees in an L-shaped shape and passed into the wicker
reinforcement. Application details in Figure 15C.1
is shown.
(d) The basic arrangement necessary for the safe transfer of the forces generated in the reinforced
filling walls to the ground shall be made. Walls reinforced with wicker steel reinforcement will be
added to the structure model according to the principles given below.
15C.2.1 – Modeling Principles: The rigidity and strength characteristics to be used to represent
the filling walls reinforced with wire mesh steel reinforcement in the structure model are defined
below. In the building model, infill walls arranged in a reinforced concrete frame and whose ratio
of diagonal length to thickness is less than 30 will be considered. Walls with gaps with a ratio of
not exceeding 10% to the wall surface area may be allowed to join the building model, provided
that the location of the gaps does not prevent the formation of diagonal pressure bars. Filler walls
reinforced with mesh steel shall be represented by equivalent diagonal bar elements that receive a
compressive force in the direction of the applied earthquake.
(a) Rigidity: The thickness of the equivalent pressure bar is equal to the thickness of the reinforced
filler wall. The width of the pressure bar is equivalent to ad ( 15C.1).
- 0.4
a = 0.175 (λ h ) r (15C.1 )
d dkd
where ad is the bar width (mm), h k is the column length (mm), rd is the diagonal length of the filler
wall
(mm). λ d Denk.( 15C.2).
1
(15C.2)
Equivalent. (15C.2) Modulus of elasticity of E and Eembankment wall and frame concrete in ,
t and h
4
The thickness and height (mm) of the reinforced wall dcdd, the moment of inertia (mm ) of the
I k column, and the angle of the θ diagonal to the horizontal one. The
axial rigidity of the diagonal pressure rod element is Equivalent.(
15C.3).
(15C.3)
(b) Shear strength: The shear strength of the filler wall reinforced with wire mesh steel
reinforcement shall be considered as the horizontal component of the equivalent compressive
strength strength strength of the diagonal bar. Reinforced filler with cross-sectional area A d ,
compressive strength fd and shear strength τd
The strength of the shear force of the wall isVd, Equivalent.( 15C.4).
V = A(τ + fρ) ≤ 0.22 Amnesty (15C.4)

d dd ydsh dd
where fyd is the design yield strength of the wicker reinforcement and ρsh is the ratio of the
horizontal body reinforcements in the wall to the wall gross cross sectional area. The wicker
reinforcement must have the same reinforcement area in horizontal and vertical directions.
Figure 15C.1
15C.2.2 – Material Properties: In the equations given above, the recommended values for E d, fd
and τd in the filler walls made of various types of bricks are Equivalent. 15C.5). In calculating the
modulus of elasticity, compressive and shear strengths, the composite cross-sectional structure of
the reinforced wall can be taken into account.
Factory brick with hollows: Ed = 2000 MPa; f d = 3.0 MPa; τd = 0.20 MPa (15C.5a)
Full threshing brick: E = 2000 MPa; f = 5.0 MPa; τ = 0.25 MPa (15C.5b)
d dd
Aerated concrete block: E = 1000 MPa; f = 2.5 MPa; τ = 0.20 MPa (15C.5c)
d dd
15C.3. STRENGTHENING OF FILLER WALLS WITH FIBERS POLYMERS
15C.3.1 – The rigidity and shear strength of filler walls with a ratio of length to height between
0.5 and 2 can be increased by fibrous polymers (LP) applied to the wall face.
(a) In such applications, the formation of a pressure bar within the existing frame shall be ensured
and the anchors necessary for the transfer of loads to the frame shall be arranged. For this, there
should be a gap of at least 30 mm deep between the wall face where the application will be made
and the outer face of the frame elements. Otherwise, such wall reinforcement cannot be applied.
(b) The elaboration of diagonal fibre polymer strips is shown in Figure 15C.2. Square LP
boards with a width of not less than 1.5 times the width of the strip shall be used in order to
ensure load distribution in the corner areas and to place a sufficient number of anchors
between the reinforced concrete frame and the LP strips. The fibrous polymer application will
be made on both sides of the wall and the LP strips will be fixed to the wall with LP bolts passing
through the wall thickness . The distance between LP bolts cannot be more than 600 mm, and
the distance of the bolt to the diagonal strip edge cannot be more than 150 mm. LP anchors shall
be used to ensure load transfer between the diagonal LP strip and the frame . LP anchors will be
formed by saturating LP strips with epoxy and wrapping them around a silicone rod. The ends
of the LP anchors shall be fan-shaped and at least four anchors shall be placed in the direction
of a diagonal LP strip by injecting epoxy into the dust-free hole drilled in the concrete . The
width of the LP wrapped around the rod in the construction of the acraj shall not be less than 100
mm. The diameter of the anchor hole shall not be less than 10 mm , and the depth shall not be
less than 150 mm. As the tensile strength of an anchor prepared accordingly, it shall be taken
as 20 kN or less than 30% of the pulling capacity of the LP wrapped around the silicone rod.
(c) The foundation arrangement necessary for the safe transfer of the forces generated in the
reinforced filling walls to the ground shall be made. Walls reinforced with fibrous polymers will
be added to the structure model according to the principles given below.
15C.3.2 – Modeling Fundamentals: Filler walls reinforced with fibrous polymers shall be
represented in the building model by a pair of diagonal pressure and towing bars.
(a) Pressure Bars means The rigidity and shear strength of the pressure bars shall be calculated
in accordance with 15C.2.1(a) and (b).
(b) Towbars: The tensile strength of the towbar is equivalent to Tf ( 15C.6).
T = 0.003 Ewt (15C.6)

f fff
The shear strength of the towbar shall be considered as the horizontal component of the tensile
strength. The axial rigidity of the towbar, Equivalent.( 15C.7).
wtE
ff f
kt = (15C.7) r
d
In these equations, E f, w f and t f are the modulus of elasticity, width and thickness of the fibrous
polymer strip , respectively, and rdis the diagonal length of the filler wall. wfvalue Equivalent.(
15C.1) cannot be taken larger than the width calculated by .
Figure 1.
SECTION 16 – SPECIAL RULES FOR THE DESIGN OF THE FOUNDATION AND
FOUNDATIONS UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF EARTHQUAKES
16.0. ICONS
2
Ac = Total area where compressive stresses occur under the foundation [m ] BYS = Building Height Class
'
B = Effective base width b = Slice width [m] c, q, Basic base slope correction coefficients
bb=
γ
CB = Drilling hole diameter correction coefficient C E = Energy ratio correction coefficient C M = Design
earthquake moment magnitude correction coefficient CN = Geological stress (depth) correction applied on
cohesion-free soils
Coefficient
CPT = Cone Penetration Test C R = Tij length correction coefficient CRRM7.5 = Cyclic resistance rate to
earthquake with torque magnitude 7.5 CS = Sample receiver type correction coefficient c = Cohesion
strength of the ground [kPa]

c′ = Effective (drained) cohesion strength of the ground [kPa] CU = Consolidated-Drained cu = Non-
drainage shear strength [kPa]
cu = Average non-drain shear strength at upper 30 meters [kPa]
()30 c = non-drainage shear strength of substrate i [kPa]

u,i
D = Pile diameter [mm] DTS = Earthquake Design Class , , Foundation depth correction coefficients
dd d=
cq γ
d water = Wall height under water [m] E giant = Sum of effects that force the resisting structure to tip over Et
= Design effects on loading situations including static and earthquake F H = Horizontal inertial force
acting on the bucket [kN] F V = Vertical inertial force acting on the sheve [kN] Gmax = Maximum slip
modulus [MPa]
, , = Ground slope correction coefficients
gg g
cq γ
H = Total height of the bearing structure [m]

Hb = Total height of the basement curtain [m] Hc = Vertical distance from the midpoint of the slice base to
the center of the slice [m] hi = ith substrate thickness [m]
, , Loading skew correction coefficients
iii =
cq γ
K = Typical total (static+dynamic) soil pressure coefficient K a = Total (static+dynamic) active soil
pressure coefficient K = Total (static+dynamic) passive earth pressure coefficient

kh = Static-equivalent horizontal earthquake coefficient kv = Static-equivalent vertical earthquake
coefficient Mw = moment magnitude of the design earthquake N = Standard penetration test (SPT) number
of pulses Nb = Basic bond beam design axial force [kN]
Nc, N q, Nγ = Coefficients of bearing power

Nk = The greatest axial force in the column or pitch to which the foundation bond beam is attached [kN]
(N) = Average number of standard penetration pulses at the top 30 meters
60 30
N = standard penetration pulse number of the ith substrate

60,i
N = Corrected number of SPT hits

1,60
N = Number of SPT strokes corrected according to the fine grain content

1.60f
PI = Plasticity index P t = Combination of total (static and dynamic) soil pressure affecting the structure of
2
the withstand P water = Compound static water pressure [kN/m ] P tv= Design vertical pressure force acting
on the foundation base, vertical design force acting on the pile [kN] Pty=Lateral design force acting on
the pile [kN]
2
p water = Staticwater pressure [kN/m ] Q ks = Pile characteristic environmental friction resistance [kN] Q
= Pile characteristic tip resistance [kN] Q ktv= Pile characteristic total bearing force [kN] Q s = Pile
ku
circumference resistance [kN] Q tv= Vertical design strength of the pile [kN] Q ty = Lateral design strength
of the pile [kN]

2
Qu = Pile end resistance [kN] q = Additional load (surcharge) [kN/m ]
qk = Basic bearing power characteristic strength [kN/m 2] qo = Basic base pressure generated by vertical
2
load, shear and torque effects acting at the foundation level [kN/m ]
qt = Basic bearing force design strength [kN/m 2] R d = Radius of circular migration surface [m] R dev =
Sum of effects and resistors resisting tipping in the bearing structure R k = Characteristic strength [kN/m
2
2] R pk = Characteristic passive resistance [kN/m ] R pt= Design passive resistance [kN/m 2] R t = Design
2
strength [kN/m 2] R th = Design friction resistance [kN/m ]
r = Static-equivalent earthquake mitigation coefficient Short-period design spectral acceleration coefficient
[dimensionless]
S=
DS
SPT = Standard Penetration Test
ST = Topographic magnification coefficient
s = Ratio of the intermediate distance of the pile rows to the diameter of the pile
ssc, q, s = coefficients of correction of the basic shape
γ
t = Steel pipe pile wall thickness [mm]

UU = No consolidation – No drainage
2
u = Water pressure acting at the base of the slice [kN/m ]
VS = Shear wave velocity [m/s]
(V ) = Average shear wave velocity at upper 30 meters [m/s]
S 30 V
S,i
= shear wave velocity of the substrate i [m/s]
= Design horizontal force acting on the base of the foundation [kN]
V
th w = Natural water content
W = Weight of the mass of the sliding slope [kN]
Ws = Slice weight [kN]
z = Height measured down from the surface of the water [m]
z = Static-equivalent dynamic measured from the surface of the water of the composition of water pressure
depth α = Angle of the slice base horizontally [degrees] β = Angle of inclination of the back-
of-wall floor surface relative to the horizontality [degrees] βG = Empirical for approximate consideration of
the group effect in piles

reduction coefficient ∆P water = Compound dynamic water pressure [kN/m 2] ∆p = Additional
2
ground pressure from an earthquake [kN/m ]
2
∆psu()z = Static-equivalent dynamic change of water pressure over water depth [kN/m ]
δ = Angle of friction between the foundation base and the ground [degrees]
δd = Friction angle between floor and wall [degrees]
φ′ = Effective shear resistance angle of the floor [degrees]
φ′ d = Design slip resistance angle of the floor [degrees]
3
γ = Natural unit volume weight of the floor [kN/m ]
3
γd = Water-saturated unit volume weight of the ground [kN/m ]
3
γ water = Unit volume weight of water [kN/m ]
3
γ * = Typical unit volume weight of the floor [kN/m ]
γR = Strength coefficient = Strength coefficient for cohesion resistance
γ
Rc
= Design safety coefficient against tipping in the bearing structure
γ
Rdev
= Strength coefficient of friction resistance
γ
Rh
= Anti-slip design safety coefficient
γ
Rk γRp = Passive resistance coefficient
Pile environment friction resistance (pressure) strength coefficient

γ=
Rsb
Pile environment friction resistance (pull) strength coefficient
γ=
Rsc
γRt = Total bearing force (pressure) strength coefficient of the pile
γRu = Pile end resistance strength coefficient
γRv = Basic bearing strength coefficient
γRφ = Strength coefficient for friction resistance
ψ = The angle of the wall back surface with the wall base[degrees]
3
ρ = Unit volume mass of the floor [t/m ] τcy,u = Shear strength without drainage [kPa]
τ earthquake = Average repeated shear stress on the ground from the earthquake [kPa]
τR = Liquefaction resistance of the ground [kPa] θ = angle depending on the static-equivalent earthquake
coefficient [rad]
16.1. SCOPE
16.1.1 – The scope of the soil researches required for the new buildings to be designed under the influence
of earthquakes and the existing buildings whose earthquake performance will be evaluated or strengthened,
the determination of the ground conditions, classes and parameters, the design of the building
foundations and the surrounding basement curtains under the influence of earthquakes, the analysis of the
structure-ground interaction and the evaluation of the soil liquefaction potential, together with the
regulations and standards on these subjects, shall be included in this Section. will be done in accordance
with the given rules and conditions.
16.1.2 – The principles of design of ground bearing structures and slopes under the influence of earthquakes
are also given in this Chapter.
16.1.3 – General principles for the on-site improvement of land soil characteristics, to be applied if necessary,
are set out in Annex 16D.
16.2. DEFINITION OF GROUND CONDITIONS
The studies to be carried out for the definition of the ground conditions of the construction area, determination
and reporting of the geotechnical parameters required for the structural design are stated below.
16.2.1. Soil Surveys
16.2.1.1 – Soil surveys including field and laboratory studies shall be carried out to determine the ground
conditions. The scope of the soil researches will be planned by taking into account the characteristics of the
structure and its components, the characteristics of the geological structure and ground units, the status of the
surrounding structures, the groundwater situation, regional earthquake characteristics and environmental
conditions, drilling wells and/or inspection pits will be drilled in sufficient number and depth, necessary field
experiments will be carried out, laboratory experiments will be carried out by taking samples that have not
been damaged and damaged.
16.2.1.2 – Soil surveys shall be carried out according to the rules defined in Annex 16A.
16.2.2. Soil and Foundation Survey Reports
Soil and Foundation Survey Reports will consist of the Data Report where the results of the soil surveys
will be presented and the Geotechnical Report to be prepared for the design.
16.2.2.1 – Data Report is the report in which the data obtained from the soil surveys carried out in the field
and laboratory are presented. Within the scope of this report, the geological structure of the region and the
geological characteristics of the project site, soil survey results such as research drillings and inspection pit
logs, ground sections and groundwater level, results of field and laboratory experiments, geophysical research
findings, etc. will be presented.
16.2.2.2 – Geotechnical Report is a report in which the land soil model is created, geotechnical design
parameters are given for the ground layers, the options for the selection of foundation types are examined,
engineering analyzes and evaluations and recommendations for the design of the foundation are presented,
taking into account static, dynamic and earthquake effects. Explanations of the content of the geotechnical
report are given below:
(a) By evaluating the findings of the land soil surveys presented in the data report, a land floor model will
be created, the behavior of the ground layers under the influence of building loads and earthquakes will be
examined, and the geotechnical design parameters related to the design of the structure and its foundations
will be examined.
will be given.
(b) The foundation system compatible with the building characteristics and the expected performance level
shall be selected, the bearing power and short and long term ground displacement-seating values shall be
given, and in this context, the swelling behavior, net foundation pressures and possible lifting forces of the
floors shall be taken into consideration.
(c) In case of need for soil improvement and/or strengthening, possible methods shall be examined, the
application principles for the proposed method shall be defined, the soil characteristics targeted for the
improved ground, the bearing power of the foundations and the displacement values shall be given.
(d) The ground parameters required for the design of the shoring systems to be applied in temporary or
permanent foundation excavations shall be given. For the structures to be built on sloping lands where there
is a danger of slope stagnation, slope stability analyzes shall be carried out taking into account the
excavation and construction steps and appropriate measures to be taken against slippage shall be
determined.
16.3. DETERMINATION OF GROUND PARAMETERS
The following principles shall be followed in the design of building foundations under the influence of
earthquakes, the definition of local ground classes and the determination of ground parameters to be used in
the analysis of retaining structures and slopes.
16.3.1 – Strength parameters compatible with drainage or non-drainage conditions to be determined

according to the loading speed and permeability conditions of the field floors shall be used in the evaluations.
16.3.2 – Strength of earthquake on cohesive soils

Considering the losses/softening values, the non-drainage shear strength (cu) value will be used in the total
tensile analysis.
16.3.3 – In non-cohesion soils, the value of non-drained shear strength (τ cy,u) shall be used in total tensile
analysis, taking into account the gap water pressure increases and internal friction angle value decreases that
will occur under the influenceof earthquakes.
16.3.4 – In the event that void water pressures can be determined under the effects of earthquakes, valid for
cohesion and non-cohesion soils, analyzes can be made using effective stress parameters.
16.3.5 – Appropriate strength for rocks using rock mass classification parameters such as at least
uniaxial compressive strength qu, geological strength index (GSI) values, etc.
parameters will be determined.
16.3.6 – Maximum shear modulus to be used in analyses, Gmax Equivalent.( 16.1).

2
G =ρV (16.1)
max S
It is essential to determine the shear wave velocity (VS ) by geophysical methods. However, standard
penetration testing (SPT) can also be calculated indirectly using field test results and generally accepted
correlations such as cone penetration test (CPT).
16.3.7 – Shear wave speed VS, SPT impact in the determination of local ground classes according to 16.4
Number N and the value cucan be used for cohesive floors.
16.3.8 – In site-specific soil behavior analyses and dynamic ground-structure interaction analyses, the slip
unit formed during the propagation of earthquake waves within the ground profile
the shift modulus compatible with the deformation andthe hysteretic damping coefficient shall be used (see
16.5.2).
16.4. DETERMINATION OF LOCAL FLOOR CLASSES
16.4.1 – The local soil classes to be used as the basis for defining earthquake design spectra in accordance
with Chapter 2 shall be determined by soil surveys to be carried out in accordance with this Chapter.
(a) Floors requiring site-specific research and evaluation are classified as ZF grade floors. Definitions of
soils in this class are given in the last line of Table 16.1.
(b) For the determination of other local ground classes defined as ZA, ZB, ZC, ZD and ZE, the
specifications for these classes are given in the other lines of Table 16.1.
Local Average at upper 30 meters

Soil Floor Type S ()30V [m/s] 60 30 ( )N ()30c [kPa]
u
Class [pulse /30 cm]
ZA Sturdy, hard rocks > 1500 – –
ZB Slightly decomposed, moderately solid rocks 760 – 1500 – –
Layers of very tight sand, gravel and hard clay,
ZC 360 – 760 > 50 > 250
or weak rocks with decomposed, very cracked
Medium tight – layers of tight sand, gravel or
ZD 180 – 360 15 – 50 70 – 250
very solid clay
layers of loose sand,
Profiles containing
gravel or soft – solid clay or a layer of
ZE soft clay thicker than 3 metres in total ( ) > 25 < 180 < 15 < 70
kPa c satisfying conditions of PI > 20 and w <
40%
Soils requiring site-specific research and evaluation: 1) Soils with a risk of collapse and
potential migration under the influence of earthquakes (liquefiable soils, highly sensitive
clays, migratable weak cemented soils, etc.), 2) Clays with a total thickness of more than 3
ZF
meters of peat and/or high organic content, 3) Coils with a high plasticity (PI >50) with a
total thickness of more than 8 meters, 4) Soft or medium solid clays with a total
>thickness of more than 8 meters.
Table 16.1 – Local Soil Classes
16.4.2 – The soil parameters given in Table 16.1 shall be determined for the part of the ground profile with
a thickness of the top 30 m from the lower elevation of the foundation or pile head. In ground profiles
containing distinctly different layers of soil and rock, the layers at the top 30 meters shall be divided into
sufficiently lower layers and arranged as i = 1 at the top and i = N at the bottom. Average shear wave velocity
(V) at upper 30 meters, average standard
S 30
penetration pulse number (N) and average non-drainage shear strength c Equivalent.( 16.2)
()30
6030 u
will be calculated with:
(16.2)
(V )
; (N )
; (cu ) 30th
S 30
60 30
∑∑
⎜
∑⎜ ⎟ i=1 ⎝
i
S,i ⎠ i=1
V N 60,i ⎠
⎝
⎜c ⎟
⎝ u,i ⎠
i=1
where h i is the value of the thickness of the substrate numbered (i) [m], V S,i , N 60, i and cu,i values, the
order of which is
shows the shear wave velocity [m/s] of the same substrate, the number of impacts of the standard penetration
test [impact/30 cm], and the non-draining shear strength [kPa].
16.4.3 – In the case of surface foundations, if there is a ground with a thickness of more than 3 m between
the base elevation of the foundation and the rock upper elevation, the definition of class ZA and ZB shall not
be made.
16.5. FIELD-SPECIFIC GROUND BEHAVIOR ANALYSES UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF

EARTHQUAKES
16.5.1. Scope
16.5.1.1 – Site-specific ground behavior analyses are carried out to determine the change of earthquake
ground motion defined in the base rock along the ground layers and the earthquake ground motion on the
ground surface.
16.5.1.2 – In cases where the ground environment in the building foundation and its immediate vicinity
consists approximately of horizontal layers, the one-dimensional horizontal layer free floor model based
on 16.5.2 can be used for site-specific soil behavior analysis. Otherwise, two- or three-dimensional floor
models will be used.
16.5.1.3 – According to Table 16.1, it is mandatory to conduct a site-specific ground behavior analysis to
determine the earthquake ground motion on the surface of the soils defined as class ZF.
16.5.1.4 – The results of site-specific free ground analyses shall be used as earthquake data in the kinematic
interaction analyses described in 16C.3.2 and 16C.4.2 for pile foundations.
16.5.2. Nonlinear Free Ground Model and Earthquake Analysis
16.5.2.1 – In order to establish a site-specific soil behavior model, it is necessary to define the nonlinear
variations of the slip modules and equivalent hysteretic damping coefficients due to the slip unit deformation
in the horizontal ground layers. These parameters shall be defined according to field and laboratory
experiments and generally accepted information contained in the literature for similar soil conditions.
16.5.2.2 – Soil behavior analyses shall be carried out by one of the following analysis methods on the basis
of nonlinear dynamic ground parameters defined in 16.5.2.1 under earthquake ground motion defined in
the base rock within the framework of the horizontal layered free ground model:
(a) Nonlinear analysis in the field of time definition;
(b) Nonlinear analysis by sequential approach using the equivalent linear calculus model in the frequency
definition field, provided that the shear unit deformation does not exceed 1%.
16.5.2.3 – The free floor model shall be formed as follows:

(a) The ground layer, defined as local ground class ZA or ZB according to Table 16.1, shall be taken as
the engineering base rock on which the earthquake will affect the ground profile. The depth of the
engineering base rock so defined from the building foundation shall not be less than three times the width
of the largest building and, in the case of pile systems, the longest pile length. In this case, the spectral
magnitudes describing the design earthquake ground motion according to 2.3.4 or 2.4.1 shall be reduced
by taking into account the local ground effect coefficients given for the ZA or ZB local class in Table 2.1
and Table 2.2.
(b) However, if the base rock is much deeper than the lower limit given above, the stratified ground model
may be terminated with the ground layer with local soil class ZC or ZD in accordance with Table 16.1.
In this case, the earthquake effect shall be defined on top of this layer rather than the base rock, and the
spectral magnitudes describing the design earthquake ground motion according to 2.3.4 or 2.4.1 shall be
magnified taking into account the local ground effect coefficients given for the local class ZC or ZD in
Table 2.1 and Table 2.2. This layer and the ground environment below it will be idealized using the
appropriate permeable boundary condition in the one-dimensional floor profile model.
(c) For the precision of the analysis, the ground layers shall be divided into sufficiently thin substrates. In
addition to the uncertainties related to the total depth of the soil model, uncertainties in dynamic soil
parameters will also be taken into account by appropriate sensitivity analysis.
16.5.2.4 – At least eleven earthquake records shall be defined in accordance with 2.5.3 in accordance
with the elastic acceleration spectrum defined in 2.3.4 or 2.4.1 to act on the one-dimensional stratified
ground model from the base of the ground model according to 16.5.2.3.
16.5.2.5 – In the context of determining the site-specific earthquake spectrum at the ground surface, the ratio
of ground surface spectral acceleration to base rock spectral acceleration for each spectral period shall be
calculated for each record, then the average of these ratios for at least eleven records shall be defined as the
local ground effect coefficient for the relevant period. By multiplying these coefficients by the base rock
spectrum defined in 2.3.4 or 2.4.1, the site-specific earthquake spectrum on the ground surface will be
determined. On soils other than local ground class ZF, ordinates of the site-specific earthquake spectrum
determined on the ground surface, Table
2.1 and Table 2.2 shall not be taken smaller than the spectral accelerations determined by taking into account
the relevant local soil class.
16.5.2.6 – In soils with liquefaction potential according to 16.6, no calculation shall be made in the
frequency definition field with the equivalent linear analysis model according to 16.5.2.2(b). In these
cases, nonlinear analysis shall be performed in the time definition field according to 16.5.2.2(a).
16.6. ASSESSMENT OF THE RISK OF LIQUIDATION OF THE GROUND UNDER THE INFLUENCE
OF EARTHQUAKES
16.6.1 – For buildings with Earthquake Design Class DTS=1, DTS=1a, DTS=2a and DTS=2a according
to Section 3, the potential for liquefaction in sandy soils belonging to group ZD, ZE or ZF in Table 16.1, in
the form of a continuous layer or thick lenses and except in the cases described in 16.6.6 It is mandatory to
examine the presence of , with appropriate analysis methods based on field and laboratory experiments, and
to report the results of the analysis in detail.
16.6.2 – Ground liquefaction shall be defined as a significant decrease in shear strength and rigidity in parallel
with the increase in void water pressure under earthquake shaking of uncohesive or low-cohesion (PI<12%)
soils located below the groundwater level and to a depth of 20 m from the surface.
16.6.3 – Soil survey studies to assess soil liquefaction shall include, at a minimum, the determination of the
grain diameter distribution, water content and Atterberg limit values in the relevant soil layers, in addition to
the construction of standard penetration testing (SPT) and/or cone penetration test (CPT).
16.6.4 – Potentially liquefiable floors shall be defined as sand, gravel sand, silt-clay sand, non-plastic silt and
silt-sand mixtures located under the groundwater table.
16.6.5 – Sub-foundation floors are composed of potentially liquefiable floors and this
In cases where the number of corrected SPT strokes in the ground layers is less than N1,60, 30 pulses / 30 cm, a
ground liquefaction triggering assessment will be made.
16.6.6 – Liquefaction triggering analysis may not be performed where the Earthquake Design Class is DTS
= 4 and at least one of the following is provided:
(a) Sandy soil with a clay content of more than 20% and a plasticity index higher than 10%
on the floors;
(b) on sandy soils where the percentage of fine grain is more than 35% and the corrected number of SPT
strokes is higher than N1.60, 20 strokes/30 cm;
16.6.7 – In the assessment of soil liquefaction, in addition to the risk of triggering liquefaction, it is
necessary to take into account the loss of ground strength and rigidity after liquefaction and the displacements
that may occur on the foundation floor.
16.6.8 – The method based on the evaluation of soil liquefaction using SPT test results is given in Annex
16B. If the evaluation is made according to CPT or slip wave speed, generally accepted methods can be used
in practice.
16.6.9 – Safety condition against liquefaction Equivalent ( 16.3).

τ
R
≥1.10 (16.3)
τ
earthquake
where τR and τearthquakes , respectively, mean the liquefaction resistance and the earthquake in the ground.
refers to repeated slip stress. Equivalent. (16.3) In the event that the condition given in , the decrease in the
strength and rigidity properties of the layers expected to be liquefied, possible bearing power losses, stability
disorders and ground movements in the type of sitting and lateral spread will be evaluated.
16.6.10 – The effects of the identified post-liquefaction displacements on the superstructure/infrastructure

behavior will be evaluated and superstructure and/or soil improvements will be applied if necessary.
16.7. GENERAL RULES FOR THE DESIGN OF FOUNDATIONS
16.7.1. Purpose
16.7.1.1 – The purpose of the building foundation design under the influence of earthquakes is to ensure that
the basic bearing power is not exceeded and that ground displacements remain below permissible limits. In
its basic design, the following general principles shall be observed.
16.7.1.2 – If foundations are located near slopes, landslide zones, excavations, tunnels, underground and mine
excavations, basic general stability and/or interaction analyses shall be carried out. General stability analyses
shall be carried out in accordance with the principles laid down in 16.13. The scope and design conditions
of interaction analyses are outside the scope of this Regulation.
16.7.2. Principle of Bearing Power in Basic Design
In this regulation, the principle of bearing power is taken as the basis for the geotechnical design of
superficial and deep foundations. The adequacy of the design bearing power of the basic ground, which
opposes possible migration mechanisms, is equivalent to ( 16.4) shall be provided by the general statement
given:
E t ≤ Rt (16.4)
where E t refers to the design effects of static and earthquake-bearing loading situations, and Rt refers to the
design resistance to the relevant migration mechanism.
16.7.3. Design Effects
16.7.3.1 – Static load combinations shall be taken from the relevant regulations. The load combinations
involving the earthquake effect are given in 4.4.4. The effects on the foundation ground, Et, together with
the vertical load effects, shall be calculated on the basis of the forces transferred from the building carrier
system to the foundation in the earthquake according to 4.10.3.
16.7.3.2 – The axial force and bending moment inherent in the design shall be met by the basic bearing
force in the vertical direction at the base of the foundation.
16.7.3.3 – The horizontal cutting force of the design shall be met by taking into account the frictional
resistance between the floor and the foundation base, as well as a maximum of 30% of the passive soil
pressure generated on the side face of the foundation.
16.7.4. Design Strengths
Design strength for static and earthquake-bearing loading conditions R t, characteristic

The strength of Rk will be found by dividing the strength coefficient γ by R.
R
k
Rt = (16.5)
γ
R
The values of the strength coefficient are given in 16.8.2 (Table 16.2) and 16.9.3 (Table 16.4) according to
the basic type and the calculated strength component.
16.8. SUPERFICIAL FOUNDATIONS
16.8.1. Scope
The following rules shall be observed when sizing superficial foundations. The design principles given here
cover singular, continuous (strip) and raft (plaque) foundations.
16.8.1.1 – By calculating the bearing power of surface foundations and their design strength against horizontal
slippage, it shall be shown that they meet the design effects in static and earthquake-bearing loading
situations.
16.8.1.2 – Possible effects on non-drainage shear strength in total stress analyses and void water pressure
should be taken into account in effective stress analyses on soils where excessive void water pressure increase
may occur in an earthquake.
16.8.2. Strength Coefficients for Superficial Foundations
The design strength for all loads multiplied by load coefficients R t shall be calculated using the values R
γ the strength coefficient given in Table 16.2.
Table 16.2. Type of Strength Strength Coefficient Strength Coefficient Strength

Coefficients for Symbol Value Superficial
Foundations Basic Carrying Power γR.V. 1.4
Friction Resistance γRh 1.1
Passive Resistance γRp 1.4
16.8.3. Bearing Power of
Superficial
Foundations
16.8.3.1 – Equivalent in each of the loading situations involving static and earthquake effects.( 16.6) shall be
ensured:
qo ≤ qt (16.6)
where qois the vertical load, shear and torque effects acting at the foundation level
is the basic base pressure. q t is the design strength equivalent of Rt in relation to the basic bearing power and
is equivalent to ( 16.7) is defined by:
q
k
q = (16.7)
t R.V.
γ
16.8.3.2 – Characteristic strength of the basic bearing power q kequivalent.( 16.8).
q = cNsdigb + qNsdigb + 0.5 γBNsdigb′ (16.8a)

k cccccc qqqq qq γγγγ γγ
Equivalent. (16.8a) The coefficients of the bearing power in are equivalent to ( 16.8b) is defined in:
πtan φ′ 2
Nq = e tan (45 + φ′/2) ; N c = (Nq − 1)cotφ′ ; N γ= 2( Nq −1) to φ′ (16.8b)
Equivalent. (16.8a) the basic shape coefficients ss c q, s, which are included as dimensionless correction
coefficients in ; depth coefficients dd dq, ; loading inclination coefficients ii iq, ; foundation floor
,,,
γcγcγ
slope coefficients , g and foundation base slope coefficients ,
bbb is based on literature and
gg, ,
cq γ cq γ
will be calculated using generally accepted correlations.
16.8.3.3 – Within the effective depth of the foundation, the presence of variable layers and/or discontinuities
on the foundation floor shall be taken into account in the calculation of the bearing power.
16.8.3.4 – Relocations under the foundation shall remain within permissible limits. In this context;
(a) Sub-foundation displacements shall be calculated by generally accepted geotechnical engineering
approaches, taking into account the increases in void water pressure under cyclic loadings and possible loss
of strength and rigidity in soft clays and water-saturated loose-medium tight cohesion-free soils under the
influence of earthquakes.
(b) Permanent deformations shall be calculated on floors other than class ZA and ZB in high-rise
buildings defined in Chapter 13 and on soils other than class ZA, ZB and ZC in other buildings with
Earthquake Design Class DTS = 1, 1a, 2, 2a, taking into account the nonlinear ground behavior that may
occur under superficial foundations.
16.8.4. Horizontal Shift of Superficial Foundations
16.8.4.1 – Equivalent in each of the static and earthquake-bearing loading situations in relation to horizontal
slippage ( 16.9) shall be ensured:
V th ≤ R th + 0.3Rpt (16.9)
Here the design horizontal force acting on the base of the foundation, the design friction resistance,
V th R
th Rpt shows the design passive resistance.
16.8.4.2 – Design friction resistance Rth Equivalent in drained case. 16.10) can be calculated with:
(16.10)
Here, the design acting on the base of the Ptv foundation shows the vertical pressure
force, while the δ shows the friction angle between the foundation base and the
floor.
16.8.4.3 – The δ of the coefficient of friction shall not be greater than the values given in Table 16.3, unless
otherwise determined by field tests.
Table 16.3. Coefficient of Friction Between

Superficial Foundations Friction Interfacial tan δ and Ground
Cast Concrete in Place – Compacted
0.6
Foundation Base Floor
16.8.4.4 – Design friction Prefabricated Concrete – Compacted resistance Rth cohesion
0.4
Foundation Base Floor
floors (in case without drainage)
Cast Concrete in Place – Concrete 0.5
Equivalent( 16.11). Concrete – Base Rock 0.5
Ac
Cu
Rth = (16.11)
γ
Rh
Here, Ac refers to the total area in which compressive stresses occur under the foundation.
16.8.4.5 – Design passive resistance R pt, characteristic passive resistance Rpk to the strength coefficient
will be calculated by dividing:
Rpk
Rpt = (16.12)
γ
Rp
16.8.4.6 – In foundations below the groundwater level, the design friction resistance in an earthquake shall
be calculated on the basis of the non-drainage slip strength of the ground.
16.8.5. Basic Vineyard Beams
16.8.5.1 – In reinforced concrete and steel buildings, tie beams shall be arranged connecting individual
foundations or pile heads in both directions and continuous foundations at column or curtain levels.
According to Table 16.1, bond beams may not be made on foundation floors with local floor class ZA.
16.8.5.2 – Vineyard beams may be made at any level of height from the bottom of the foundation to the base
of the column, in accordance with the excavation of the foundation.
16.8.5.3 – The axial force to be considered in the cross-sectional design of the bond beam is Nb Equivalent.(
16.13 ).
Nb = 0.10 DS
SNk (16.13)
where Nk represents the greatest axial force in the column or curtain to which the bond beam is attached,
while SDS represents the short-period design spectral acceleration coefficient.
16.8.5.4 – In the cross-sectional calculation, it shall be taken into account that the bond beams will work at
both pressure and tensile forces. In the case when the bond beams wrapped by the floor or base concrete work
on the pressure, the buckling effect may not be taken into account. In the case of pulling, however, it shall be
assumed that the tensile force is carried only by the reinforcement. The minimum size of the bond beams
shall be 300 mm × 300 mm, the reinforcement rate shall be at least 0.5%, the ether diameter shall be 8 mm
and the ether spacing shall be 200 mm.
16.8.5.5 – Reinforced concrete slabs may also be used instead of tie beams. In this case, the thickness of the
slab will not be less than 150 mm. The flooring and the reinforcement placed in it, Equivalent.( 16.13) shall
be shown by calculation to be able to safely transfer loads equal to the axial loads given by .
16.9. SCRATCHED FOUNDATIONS
16.9.1. Scope
The following rules will be observed when sizing pile foundations. The design principles given here cover
cast-in-place and nailing piles.
16.9.1.1 – The vertical and lateral bearing forces of pile foundations shall be calculated and shown to meet
the design effects in static and earthquake-bearing loading situations.
16.9.1.2 – One of the following approaches may be applied to the calculation of the bearing power of pile
foundations. Carrying power;
(a) Static loading can be calculated using data from the test results.
(b) It can be calculated using soil properties obtained from soil surveys.
(c) It can be calculated using the results obtained from static loading tests and dynamic load tests that have
been validated.
16.9.2. Strength Coefficients for Pile Foundations
16.9.2.1 – In the calculation of the vertical bearing power of pile foundations, the strength coefficients
given in Table 16.4 γ R in the calculation of the environmental friction Qs and end resistance Qu to be
calculated using the soil characteristics obtained from the results of soil surveys and loading tests
Apply.
16.9.2.2 – The strength coefficient values given in Table 16.4 for the pile loading test can be used in the event
of at least one loading test under each building and loading test on at least 1% of the piles used at the project
site. If more experiments are carried out than these minimum numbers, a maximum reduction in strength
coefficients of 0.10 can be made in the light of regional experience.
16.9.3. Vertical Bearing Power of Piles
16.9.3.1 – Equivalent in each of the loading conditions involving static and earthquake effects. 16.14) shall
be ensured:
P ≤ Q (16.14)
tv tv
Here Pisthe vertical design force acting on the tv pile. QTV, on the other hand, shows the vertical design strength
of the pile and is equivalent ( 16.15a) or Equivalent.( 16.15b) is defined as:
QQ
ks ku
Qtv =+ (16.15a)
γγ
Rs Ru
or
q
ktv
Qtv = (16.15b)
γ
Rt
Here and the characteristic circumferential friction resistance of the pile and the characteristic tip
Q shows
ks Q ku resistance, while Qktv shows the characteristic total pile bearing power.
Table 16.4. Strength Coefficients for Pile Foundations

16.9.3.2 – Unit peripherals and unit end resistances in cohesive and non-cohesion soils can be calculated
using generally accepted correlations based on the literature. In calculating the bearing power, the effect of
the pile manufacturing method should be taken into account.
Strength Strength Coefficient Value

Type of Strength Coefficient If no pile loading test If a pile loading test has
Symbol has been carried out been carried out
Environmental friction γRsb 1.5 1.3
(pressure)
Environmental friction (pulling) γRsc 1.6 1.4
Tip resistance γRu 2.0 1.5
Total bearing power (pressure) γRt – 1.4
16.9.3.3 – The bearing power in the case of pile foundations which shall exhibit group behaviour shall be
selected as the sum bearing power of each pile in the group and the smaller of the bearing power values of
the block consisting of the piles and the ground between them.
16.9.3.4 – Earthquake Design Class DTS = 1, 1a, 2, 2a on the pile foundations of the buildings at least two
static loading tests shall be performed to prove that the design acceptances are verified on the spot.
16.9.4. Lateral Bearing Power of Piles
16.9.4.1 – Equivalent in each of the loading situations involving static and earthquake effects.( 16.16) shall
be ensured:
P ty ≤ Qty (16.16)
Here Ptyis the lateral design force acting on the pile. Qtyindicates the lateral design strength of the pile.
16.9.4.2 – In the design of lateral loaded piles that are expected to exhibit non-linear load-displacement
behavior, it shall be shown by calculation that the permissible displacements and the bearing power of the
pile section are not exceeded.
16.10. EARTHQUAKE CALCULATION OF EXCAVATED FOUNDATIONS
16.10.1. Structure-Piling-Ground Interaction
16.10.1.1 – The calculation methods given in this section shall be applied for the design of pile foundations
working as bearing system elements together with the superstructure (building) under the influence of
earthquakes, taking into account the effect of the ground.
16.10.1.2 – For the earthquake calculation of pile foundations, within the framework of dynamic structure
– pile – ground interaction , the following calculation approaches can be used:
(a) Common systems approach: In this approach, where the superstructure (building), building foundation,
piles and ground are modeled and analyzed together as parts of the load-bearing system, the nonlinear
behavior of all parts can be taken into account.
(b) Subsystem approach: This approach, in which the superstructure-foundation subsystem and the
foundation-pile-ground subsystem are modeled separately and analyzed by taking into account their
interaction with each other, is based on linear behavior in principle. However, in engineering practice, this
approach can also be applied to the nonlinear behavior of the foundation-pile-ground subsystem and the
superstructure-foundation subsystem within the framework of certain methods.
16.10.1.3 – Within the framework of the subsystem approach, the structure-pile-ground interaction is handled
in two stages. The details of these stages, called kinematic interaction and inertial interaction, and the
calculation methods and design rules that can be used for these stages are given in Annex 16C. The
application areas of these methods, called Method I, Method II and Method III, are defined in Table 16.5
depending on the Local Ground Class, Earthquake Design Class and Building Height Class. Depending on
the preference of the building owner / design engineer, Method I can be used instead of Method II, Method
II instead of Method III, and the application areas of the methods can be expanded.
16.10.2. Special Conditions for the Design of Piles
16.10.2.1 – Due to the damage risks they carry within the scope of kinematic interaction, oblique piles are
not allowed on the foundations of buildings under the influence of earthquakes.
16.10.2.2 – The minimum cross-sectional dimensions of reinforced concrete and prestressed reinforced
Analysis Method Earthquake Design Building Height Class Local Soil Class
Class
Method I DTS = 1, 1a, 2, 2a BYS = 1 ZD, ZE, ZF
DTS = 1a, 2A Bys = 2, 3
Method II ZD, ZE, ZF
DTS = 3, 3a, 4, 4a BYS = 1
DTS = 1a, 2A BYS ≥ 4
Method III ZD, ZE, ZF
DTS = 1, 2, 3, 3A BYS ≥ 2
concrete piles shall be 30 cm / 30 cm or ∅35 cm.
Table 16.5 – Application Areas of Interaction Analysis Methods
16.10.2.3 – In reinforced concrete piles, the ratio of longitudinal reinforcement at 1/3 of the top of the pile
length under the pile head, not less than 3 meters, shall not be less than 0.01 in buildings with DTS = 1, 1a,
2, 2a, and 0.008 in buildings with DTS = 3, 3a, 4, 4a. The diameter of the spiral reinforcement (or ether for
rectangular section driving piles) to be placed in this zone DTS = 1, 1a,
Less than 10 mm in buildings with 2, 2a, less than 8 mm in buildings with DTS = 3, 3a, 4, 4a and spiral
the step (or ether pitch) shall not be more than 200 mm, but at least two pile diameters from the top
in height it will be reduced to 100 mm.
16.10.2.4 – The wall thickness of steel pipe piles is equivalent ( 16.17) shall be satisfied:
D
DTS=1, 1a, 2, 2a: ≤ 60
t
(16.17)
D
DTS=3, 3a, 4, 4a: ≤ 80
t
16.10.2.5 – Monolithic connections of steel piles to the reinforced concrete foundation (pile head) shall be
made with reinforced concrete plugs to be arranged at the top of the piles at a depth of at least two piles in
diameter. The longitudinal reinforcement in the plugs shall be arranged in such a way as to transfer the
bending moment and axial force calculated at the pile top as a reinforced concrete section. Along the height
of the stopper shall be used spiral transverse reinforcement as defined in 16.10.2.3. It will be shown by
calculation that the axial force of the pile is safely transferred from the plug in the steel pile section.
16.11. STATIC AND DYNAMIC GROUND PRESSURES AFFECTING THE BASEMENT CURTAINS OF
BUILDINGS
In cases where the floor is idealized in a nonlinear way, excessive void water pressures are taken into account
and wall-floor interaction models including the structural elements that make up the surrounding basement
curtains are not calculated, the ground pressures affecting the rigid basement perimeter curtains of the
buildings can be calculated as given below.
16.11.1 – p
The ground pressures to be applied uniformly spread in the static state are defined in Table 16.6.
where Hb describes the total height of the basement curtain γ of the natural
unit volume weight, γd water saturated unit volume weight, q overhead (surcharge), z water surface measured
The Type of Floor Outside the Basement Altitude Affected by Ground Pressure ( )p
Curtain Pressure
Ground without cohesion Across the entire height ( )b0.2 γ*H q+
Upper 20% through ( )b 0.2 γ*H q+ ( )b0.3
Soft – medium floor with cohesion Bottom 80% γ*H q+
Solid – hard cohesive floor Across the entire height ( )b0.3 γ*H q+
Note: In the absence of water behind the basement curtain, *γ=γ will be taken. If the basement curtain is partially under wat
water pressure water water ( )p z = γ will be added to the ground pressure from the water top level downwar
height.
Table 16.6. Static Ground Pressures Affecting Basement Curtains
16.11.2 – Additional ground pressures under the influence of earthquakes ()p Equivalent.( 16.18) shall be
calculated as:
∆
∆= p 0.4 SDS γHb (16.18)
This pressure will be spread smoothly along the wall height.
16.11.3 – In the case of non-cohesion floors, if the basement zd is partially dry, the change of
the static-equivalent dynamic water pressure over the water(16.19) depth to be considered between
the water level and the basement floor, in addition to the static water pressure in the second
line of Table 16.6, ∆psu()z , Equivalent.( 16.19) shall be determined by:
7
z
∆p () = (0.4 S ) γ
water DS water water
8
where SDS denotes the design spectral acceleration coefficient defined on the floor surface, and dwater denotes
the wall height underwater. Equivalent. (16.19) By integrating the water depth of , the static-equivalent
additional dynamic water force of the compound and the depth of the component from the surface of the
water are equivalent. 16.20) is obtained with:
7
2
∆P = (0.4 S )γd ; z = 0.6 d (16.20)

water DS water water
12
16.12. FOR THE DESIGN OF WITHSTAND STRUCTURES UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF
EARTHQUAKES
RULES
In the design of withstand structures under the influence of earthquakes, both limit balance (migration) and
service conditions will be taken into consideration. Withstand structures can be designed in such a way that
displacements are allowed in such a way that they do not harm their functions after an earthquake.
16.12.1. Stability of Bearing Structures
The balance of the effects (moments/forces) that force tipping and horizontal shifting and the effects and
resistances that resist them will be compared:
16.12.1.1 – Equivalent for the safety of the bearing structure against overturning. (16.21) The condition in
must be met:
R
dev
E dev ≤ (16.21)
γ
Rdev
Here, E is the sum of the effects that force the giant tipple, R is the sum of the effects that resist the giant
tipping and
the sum of resistors, γ Rdev is the design safety coefficient against rollover. This coefficient
γRdev ≥1.3 will be selected by the engineer in charge of the project, taking into account the risks arising from
migration.
16.12.1.2 – Investigations against exceeding the ground bearing power and horizontal slippage on the basis
of the bearing structure shall be carried out in accordance with 16.8.3 and 16.8.4, and investigations on
wholesale migration shall be carried out in accordance with 16.13.
16.12.2. Soil Pressures
16.12.2.1 – Horizontal and vertical static-equivalent earthquake coefficients to be

used in the calculation of soil pressures are equivalent.( 16.22) is defined in:
; k v = 0.5kh (16.22)
Equivalent. (16.22) The coefficient r in is given in Table 16.7 for the different types of bearing structures.
16.12.2.2 – In Type of Bearing Structure r the case

of saturated Weight type walls for which displacement is permissible up to DS120S 2.0 floors
where high (mm) void
water Weight type walls for which displacement is permissible up to DS80S (mm) 1.5 pressure
increases may Anchored walls, weight-type walls that are not allowed to be displaced 1.0 occur,
the value of the
coefficient r shall not be taken greater than 1.
Table 16.7. R coefficients for Withstand Structures
16.12.2.3 – Equivalence of the total (static and dynamic) soil pressure affecting the structure of the
withstand 16.23) shall be calculated as:
1
2
P =K(1k )( γ*H + qH ) + P + ∆P (16.23)

tv water water
2
where H is the wall height, γ* is the typical unit volume weight of the floor, q is the overhead
(surcharge), K is the total (static+dynamic) active (K a) or passive (Kp ) is the ground pressure coefficient,
k is vertical
v indicates the static-
equivalent earthquake coefficient, P indicates water and ∆Pindicates the static and dynamic water pressures at the
junction.
16.12.2.4 – Total active pressure coefficient Equivalent ( 16.24) shall be calculated as:
(a) ′d
In the case of β≤φ −θ:

2
ψ+ φ
−θ ′ (
) ⎤φ +δ
1
−β−θ ′ 6
d
.
) 1 ⎥4
2
cos θsin ψsin( ψ−θ−δ d
⎢+
a
)
K
⎢ sin( ψ− θ−δ )sin(
a
ψ+β ) ⎥
⎡
⎣d⎦
2
2
s ψ+ φ
′
i −θ ′
n
(b) β>φ −θ d:
(
′
d (
d 1
) 6
s .
i 2
n 4
( b
φ )
16.12.2.5 – The total coefficient of passive pressure, assuming that there is no friction between the floor and
the wall, shall be equivalent to 16.25) shall be calculated as:
⎡ in ψ ψ+θ )1 (
Sin( ⎢− ⎥
si 1
n 6
φ
⎢⎣ sin( ψ+θ ) sin( ψ+β ) ⎥⎦ .
′ 2
si 5
n )
( K
′ p
2
d φ
d +
β
− c
θ o
⎤
) s
θ
s
16.12.2.6 – Equivalent. (16.24) and Denk.( In 16.25), φ′d shows the angle of design slip resistance
of the floor, δ d shows the angle of friction between the floor and the wall, the angle of
inclination of the floor surface behind the β wall relative to the horizontal, and the ψ shows the
angle of the wall measured relative to the horizontalum (from the horizontally in front of the wall
to the back of the wall). The angle θ depending on the static-equivalent earthquake coefficient and
the equivalent.( 16.23)
The values of the field ground unit volume weight γ* are given in 16.12.3 depending on whether
there is water behind the bearing structure.
16.12.2.7 – Equivalent in static case ( 16.24) and Equivalent.( 16.25), θ=0 will be taken. The
dynamic soil pressure coefficient will be obtained by subtracting the static pressure coefficient from
the total pressure coefficient.
16.12.2.8 – The point of action of the combined force for dynamic soil pressures shall be taken as
the midpoint of the wall height. On the walls that can freely rotate around the heel, it can be assumed
that the dynamic force will act at the same point as the static force.
16.12.2.9 – Static and dynamic soil pressures shall be deemed to act according to the normal of
the behind the wall, with an angle of not more than (/)23 φ′ in the active pressure state and with a
zero slope in the passive state.
16.12.3. Effect of Water Level Behind Bearing Structure
16.12.3.1 – It is essential to ensure that the ground mass held by the withstand structure is not under
the water table with drainage measures. In this context, the drainage system should be arranged in
such a way as not to harm its function in such a way that it does not harm its function, temporary
and permanent displacements caused by earthquakes.
16.12.3.2 – Depending on whether there is water behind the bearing structure, the angle θ and the
equivalent.( The values of the ground unit volume weight γ* in 16.23) are defined below.
(a) If the water level is below the basic ground level ( P water = ∆Pwater = 0 );
⎡k ⎤
−1 h
θ=tan
⎢⎥
; γ* =γ (16.26a)
1kv ⎦
⎣
Here the γ floor of course shows the unit volume weight.
(b) If the water level is above the basic floor level and the ground is dynamically impermeable (on
soils where the permeability coefficient is less than 5×10-4 m/s):
⎡γ k ⎤
h in 1d
θ= tan
⎢⎥
; γ* = γ d −γ water (16.26b)
γ −γ 1k
⎣ dsu v ⎦
where γd indicates the unit volume weight of the ground saturated with water. ∆Pwater = 0 will be taken.
(c) If the water level is above the basic floor level and the ground is dynamically permeable:
⎡γ k ⎤
−1h
θ= tan
⎢⎥
; γ* = γ d −γ water (16.26c)
γ −γ 1k
⎣ dsu v ⎦
In this case, the static-equivalent additional dynamic water force ∆P water and the depth of the
component from the water surface are equivalent.( 16.20).
16.13. STABILITY OF THE SLOPES UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF EARTHQUAKES
16.13.1 – In order to maintain the safety and serviceability of the structures to be built on and near
natural or artificial slopes under the influence of design earthquakes, it is necessary to investigate
that the slope will remain stable and functional (serviceable) under the influence of earthquake
loads. For buildings with Earthquake Design Class DTS=4, slope stability analysis may not be
performed under the influence of earthquakes.
16.13.2 – In slopes supported by structural elements (for example: slopes supported by flexible
walls or piles, slopes with anchors or studded, etc.), it is necessary to carry out ground-structure
interaction analyses in which the relative rigidity differences of the ground and structural elements
are taken into account.
16.13.3 – Strength coefficients on soil properties (for cohesion and friction resistance, respectively,
c/′ γ Rc and tan φ′ / γRφ )
Should be applied. In the design of pile-like or anchor-like structural elements located in the slope,
ground resistances should be taken into account by applying strength coefficients in the same way.
16.13.4 – In the analysis of the stability of slopes, the equilibrium of the soil or rock mass is
investigated by accepting a migration model suitable for the type of soil. In order for a slope to be
safe against total migration, Denk.( 16.27) shall be satisfied:
R
t
Et ≤ (16.27)
γ
Rk
Here, the sumof the effects that force E t migration, the effectsand resistances that resist R t
migration
and γRk (≥ 1.0) is defined as the number of design safety against slip.
16.13.5 – The stability of slopes in the event of an earthquake shall be calculated by total stress
analysis using non-drainage shear strength (cu) in clay soils and effective stress analysis in sandy
(cohesion-free) soils.
16.13.6 – In old landslide zones at risk of being re-triggered by earthquakes, the values
corresponding to their large deformation as ground strength parameters
should be used. In loose-to-medium tight non-cohesive floors that may be subject to an increase in cyclic
cavity water pressure, the maximum void water pressure that can be expected to occur must be taken into
account.
16.13.7 – Slope stability control in earthquake effect can be performed by equivalent static limit equilibrium
analysis, finite element method or dynamic behavior analysis to be performed in the time field. The
equivalent static analysis method should not be used in cases where the topography and soil stratification
show sudden irregularities and for liquefiable or sensitive soils that may suffer a significant loss of rigidity
under the influence of cyclic loading.
16.13.8 – Where permissible displacement criteria apply, permanent displacements may be calculated
using ground strength parameters compatible with dynamic effects by the Newmark sliding rigid block
method or equivalent methods . In the calculations, the material consolidation or softening behavior that
will occur with increasing deformation and the possible effects of the increase in void water pressure should
be taken into account.
16.13.9 – In equivalent static analyses, the effect of horizontal ()and vertical ()inertial forces on the ground
mass and the forces present on the slope is equivalent. 16.28).
FF
HV
H
= 0.5W(0.4 DS) ; V =±0.5F
F SST F H (16.28)
where W is the weight of the sliding mass, the short period design spectral acceleration coefficient, and S T
is
S
DS
shows the topographic magnification coefficient.
16.13.10 – To be built on and near the slope, Earthquake Design Class DTS = 1, 1a,
In the slope stability analysis of the earthquake effect to be made for the structures with 2, 2a , the
topographic magnification effect will be taken into consideration. Topographic magnification factor (two-
dimensional topographic
ST
it will be used in slopes where irregularities are found (for example, in long valleys, hills with a height of
more than 30 m) and in cases where the surface of possible migration passes close to the slope hill. The
topographic magnification effect is negligible in slopes with a slope angle of 15 β; the crown
≤°
Slope angle for ridges whose (top) width is smaller than the base width is β ≥30 in the slopes that happen
ST will be used as ≥1.4 and S T will be used as ≥1.2 at smaller slope angles. In potential landslide areas
where the possible migration surface passes close to the bottom, it can be neglected.
16.13.11 – In equivalent static limit equilibrium analyses based on the slice method, it is accepted that the
mobilized values of the ground resistances are reached (γ=φ γ) by dividing the ground strength parameters
by the number of safety in the determination of the critical surface and the calculation of the safety
number against slippage by iterative methods:
γ=
RcR Rk
c′ to φ′ c′ to φ′
τ= + = + (16.29)
Mob
γγ γγ
Rc Rφ Rk Rk
⎡1 ⎛
(a) In the static state:
ub⎟⎥tan φ′ (16.30)
⎣ α⎝ Rk ⎠⎦
m
Rk
(b) In the event of an earthquake, the effect of horizontal and vertical inertial forces shall be taken into account
in the calculation of the number of safety against slippage as follows.
cb ′+⎢ ′ ⎞⎤ γ=
⎜W s
′ ⎞⎤ γ cb
⎡1⎛
W(1 −k
)sin α+ kW(cos α− ) ⎣ ⎦
mα⎝ Rk ⎠
c
′+⎢ ⎜Ws(1 −kv)
ub⎟⎥tan φ′
Rk
∑ SV HS R
D
(16.31)
Here, b is the slice width, Ws is the slice weight, the α the angle of the slice base horizontally, u is the water
pressure acting at the base of the slice, k = 0.2 S and k =± 0.5 kh respectively
horizontal and vertical 1
h DSv
the equivalent earthquake coefficient, Hc is the vertical distance from the midpoint of the slice base to the
center of the slice, and Rd is the radius of the circular migration surface. Equivalent. (16.30) and Equivalent.
(16.31) m α Denk.( 16.32) is given:
⎛
m α=cos α
(16.32)
⎝ Rk ⎠
(c) The number of safety against slippage (γRk ) is obtained by sequential approach. Except where special
risks involve γ≥1.10 is considered to be an adequate level of security against wholesale slippage.
Rk
can be.
ANNEX 16A – GENERAL RULES FOR SOIL SURVEYS
Soil surveys will be carried out according to the general rules defined below.
16A.1. SOIL SURVEY DRILLING
16A.1.1 – Drilling wells shall be drilled with hammer or rotary systems with auger, sand or clay bucket on
the ground, and in rock with rotational systems that proceed by continuous core from the rock surface.
16A.1.2 – Drilling Numbers: The variability of the ground conditions shall be determined by taking into
account the floor area of the structure and the loads it transfers and the conditions around it, at least one for
2
every 300 m of floor area. However, the number of drillings will not be less than three in the areas where
buildings with Building Height Class BYS ≤ 3 will be built. The number of drillings shall be planned in
such a way that there shall be at least five in buildings with a floor area exceeding 1000 m 2, one at the corners
of the building and one in the middle.
16A.1.3 – Drilling Sites: If the topographic and geomorphological conditions do not indicate special
locations, at least the corners and the middle of the building plan shall be selected for the drilling sites. If the
types and locations of structures in large areas are specific, drilling points will be selected in accordance with
the building layout. In project sites with uncertain layout , drilling locations will be planned over a grid. In
sloping lands with the potential for slope stability, drilling sites will be planned along lines that will provide
data for slope stability analysis, and drilling sites will be selected outside the building area.
16A.1.4 – Drilling Depths: Drilling depth means that the increase in stress in the ground (Δσ) caused by
the weight of the ground itself is at least 1.5 times the width of the structure starting from the foundation
base for building foundations or the effective stress (σ'vo ) caused by the net foundation base pressure
It will be chosen to be more unfavorable than the depth (Δσ = 0.10σ' vo ), of which it is equal to 10%.
(a) If a layer with high strength and rigidity is found at shallower depths, the drilling may be terminated
by determining the continuity of the layer by entering at least 3 meters into this layer.
(b) Where the application of a pile foundation may be required, the drilling depth shall be selected in such a
way as to allow calculations of pile bearing power and seating.
(c) Drilling shall be carried out in slope stability studies to a depth sufficiently below the possible slip
surface depths, and in the case of deep excavations to depths of at least half the depth of the excavation
from the base of the excavation.
will go down.
(d) In areas with earthquake design classes DTS=1, DTS=1a, DTS=2 and DTS=1a, the groundwater level
shall be higher than 10 meters from the foundation base, and in areas with loosely located coarse (rough)
grained soils, the drilling depth shall be at least 20 m from the ground face.
16A.2. LAND EXPERIMENTS
16A.2.1 – Field tests (SPT, fin cutter, pressiometer, etc.) shall be carried out at appropriate intervals (e.g.
one in every 1.50 m) in the drilling wells in accordance with the ground conditions and in order to meet the
project requirements. For the continuous and healthy determination of the soil profile and properties, it will
be useful to perform Cone Penetration Tests (CPTu with CPT and cavity water pressure measurement)
planned in parallel with the drillings.
16A.2.2 – Sampling: In drilling wells, ground/rock samples that are compatible with the ground conditions
and not damaged and not damaged at appropriate intervals to meet the project requirements shall be taken.
16A.2.3 – Damaged Samples: In boreholes, samples of all types of soil shall be taken during the Standard
Penetration Test (SPT). Under the groundwater level, on coarse or non-plastic silt floors, if a sufficient
amount of damaged samples from the SPT spoon cannot be obtained, unwashed samples will be taken with
special tubes with a floor holder (basket-basket type) in the mouth.
16A.2.4 – Undamaged Samples: In boreholes, a number of undamaged samples shall be taken from
cohesive soils sufficient to determine the engineering characteristics of each ground layer within the depth of
impact defined in 16A.1.4. Examples of unpaved floors shall be suitable for the consistency of the floor and
with a thin wall (area ratio=wall thickness/inner tube area<10 %) and an inner diameter of the most
It shall be taken using tube or piston tube which is less than 76 mm. In addition, undamaged samples can be
prepared from research pits and ditches, as well as blocks cut and removed properly.
16A.2.5 – In rock drilling, the type of core and screw shall be selected according to the characteristics of
the lithological units and the diameter of the cores shall be at least NX (54 mm) or NQ (47.6 mm).
16A.2.6 – Measurement of Groundwater Level: The groundwater level shall be determined by measurements
to be made in the borehole. In the event that there is more than one cohesive and non-cohesion layer and/or
water-bearing layer (aquifer) level within the survey depth, it is appropriate to use standard piezometers to
measure groundwater level or pressure . In any case, observations and measurements in the borehole shall
be carried out over a period of time long enough for the groundwater level to reach equilibrium in the well.
16A.3. LABORATORY EXPERIMENTS
16A.3.1 – Laboratory experiments shall be planned by the civil engineer responsible for the project according
to the characteristics of the structure and the ground and shall be carried out in authorized laboratories in
numbers and depths sufficient to describe the soil characteristics in the research area at intervals of maximum
2 m.
16A.3.2 – Classification Tests: Tests of consistency limits, natural water content (on preserved samples),
sieve, pipette/hydrometer and specific gravity shall be carried out on the affected and undamaged specimens,
which will allow the ground classification of the layers . Natural water content and unit volume weight
determination tests will also be carried out on undamaged samples. Classification tests (including
pipette/hydrometer) will be carried out on all samples taken from the first 15 m on problematic soils
(liquefaction, swelling, migration, softening, delicate clays, etc.).
16A.3.3 – Engineering Properties Tests: Strength (uniaxial pressure, cutting box, three-axis pressure-
UU/CU) tests will be performed on undamaged samples to determine the engineering properties of the layers,
and drainage and non-drained shear strength parameters will be determined in accordance with the project
requirements . In addition, in order to determine the parameters for the seating calculations, eudometer-
consolidation experiments will be carried out on undamaged samples taken from clay floors.
ANNEX 16B – SIMPLIFIED FLOOR LIQUIDATION ASSESSMENT
16B.1. SCOPE
Within the scope of soil liquefaction triggering analyzes, the slip resistance of field floors against liquefaction,
τ ; Developed for uninclined sites, it will be found using terrain penetration experiments or empirical ground
liquefaction resistance correlations and curves (applying necessary corrections) depending on shear wave
velocity values. The proposed method for calculating the liquefaction resistance using the SPT test results
is given in 16B.3. Shear stresses that develop during earthquake shaking, τ , using simplified method
earthquake
will be calculated.
16B.2. CORRECTION OF SPT DATA
16B.2.1. Correction of Raw SPT Data
16B.2.1.1 – Raw SPT data from land, N, Equivalent.( 16B.1) to N1.60.

N = NC C CCC (16B.1)
1.60 NRSBE
Here CN shows the geological stress (depth) correction coefficient applied on cohesion-free soils, C R shows
the tie length correction coefficient, C S shows the sample holder type correction coefficient, C B shows the
drilling hole diameter correction coefficient, CE shows the energy ratio correction coefficient.
16B.2.1.2 – Depth correction coefficient CN Equivalent.( 16B.2).
CN = 9.78
1.70 (16B.2)
Vo
2
Equivalent. (16B.2) The effective vertical stress σvo ′ (kN/m ) in the depth of the experiment is calculated
according to the terrain conditions in which the Standard Penetration Test (SPT) is performed. Effective
stress changes caused by additional filling, foundation stress or ground excavation and similar reasons after
the experiment shall not be taken into consideration.
16B.2.1.3 – Equivalent. (16B.1) The other correction coefficients in are given in Table 16B.1.
16B.2.2. Correction of SPT Data to Fine Grain Content

Pulse numbers adjusted for fine grain content (IDI) N 1.60f Equivalent.( 16B.3a) shall be calculated as:
N 1.60f = αβ+ N (16B.3a)

1.60
Equivalent. (16B.3a) The coefficients of α and β in Equivalent.( 16B.3b) is given at:
α=0; β=1.0 (IDI ≤ 5%)
2 1.5
⎡⎤
α = exp 1.76 − (190 / IDI ) ; β = 0.99+IDI /1000 (5%< ≤ 35%) (16B.3b)
⎣⎦
α = 5.0 ; β=1.2 (35 % ≥ IDI)
Correction Variable Value
Table 16B.1. Coefficient SPT correction
coefficients In the range of 3m to 4m 0.75
In the range of 4m to 6m 0.85
CR
16B.3. In the range of 6m to 10m 0.95
Deeper than 10m 1.00
Standard sampler (with inner tube) 1.00
CS
Sampler without inner tube 1.10-1.30
Diameter between 65mm-115mm 1.00
CB Diameter 150mm 1.05
Diameter 200mm 1.15
Safe mallet 0.60-1.17
CE Ring mallet 0.45-1.00
Automatic impact mallet 0.90-1.60
CALCULATION OF LIQUIDATION RESISTANCE
16B.3.1 – Liquefaction resistance τR shall be calculated by multiplying the cyclic resistance ratio (CRRM7.5 )
to earthquake with a moment magnitude of 7.5 by the design earthquake moment magnitude correction
coefficient (CM ) and effective vertical stress (σvo ′).
τ= CRR C σ′ (16B.4a)
R M7.5 M vo
16B.3.2 – Cyclic strength ratio equivalent( 16B.4b) shall be calculated by the correlation given:
Earthquake magnitude correction coefficient (C M ) is equivalent depending on the design earthquake

magnitude (Mw ).
16B.4c).
2.24
10
C = (16B.4c)
M
Mw 2.56
16B.4. CALCULATION OF THE SLIP STRESS CAUSED BY THE EARTHQUAKE
16B.4.1 – Slip stress on the ground Equivalent.( 16B.5). τearthquake = 0.65σ vo (0.4 SDS ) rd (16B.5)
Here, σvo represents the total vertical stress at the depth at which the liquefaction assessment is made, rd is
the stress reduction coefficient at the relevant depth, and SDS is the short-period design spectral acceleration
coefficient.
16B.4.2 – Stress reduction coefficient, depending on the depth () examined
rd z
Equivalent. (16B.6) will be obtained by correlation in . r d = 1.0 − 0.00765 zz ≤ 9.15m rd = 1.174 −

0.0267 z 9.15m < z ≤ 23m
(16B.6)
r d = 0.744 − 0.008 z 23m < z ≤ 30m rd = 0.50 z > 30m
ANNEX 16C – STRUCTURE UNDER EARTHQUAKE IMPACT – PILE – GROUND
INTERACTION
16C.1. STRUCTURE – GROUND INTERACTION
16C.1.1 – In general, structure-ground interaction is defined as the mutual interaction of structure and
ground in the building-ground common system in which the ground environment (and piles, if any) and the
superstructure are considered together under the influence of earthquakes . The earthquake waves that are
formed from the earthquake ground movement defined in the base rock and spread within the ground
environment and reach the building foundation are partially reflected from the building foundation and return
to the ground environment, and some of them pass to the superstructure and cause its vibration and return to
the ground environment.
16C.1.2 – If the foundation is superficial, dynamic structure-ground interaction for building type structures
on relatively soft ground generally affects the building in a favorable direction and reduces the equivalent
earthquake loads generated by earthquake waves passing from the ground to the building. Due to the
preference to stay on the safe side, the structure-ground interaction can therefore be neglected in buildings
whose foundation is superficial (including basement buildings).
16C.1.3 – On the other hand, in buildings constructed with piles on relatively soft ground, the structure-
pile-ground interaction significantly affects the earthquake behavior of the piles, in particular. With the effect
of earthquake waves that are formed from the earthquake ground movement defined in the base rock and
spread within the ground environment, the piles are subject to significant deformation and strain. In turn,
piles can significantly alter the effective motion of the foundation on the building basis in terms of both
amplitude and frequency content. This formation in the foundation – pile – ground system, where the inertial
feature of the superstructure is not taken into consideration, is called kinematic interaction. Piles are also
subject to additional strain due to earthquake waves returning from the vibrating superstructure to the
pile-ground environment as part of the inertial interaction. For these reasons, it is necessary to consider the
structure-pile-ground interaction in buildings with pile foundations on weak grounds .
16C.1.4 – The three methods to be used in the analysis of kinematic interaction and inertial interaction
for buildings with pile foundations according to 16.10 are described in 16C.2, 16C.3 and 16C.4.
16C.2. CALCULATION OF STRUCTURE – PILE – GROUND INTERACTION WITH METHOD I
16C.2.1. Method I – Scope
Method I, according to the classification in Table 16.5, shall be applied in the nonlinear calculation made in
the time definition area under the influence of earthquake ground motion DD-1 in Stage III in Chapter 13
for Pile Tall Buildings (BYS = 1) with DTS = 1, 1a, 2, 2a, where the local ground class is ZD, ZE or ZF.
16C.2.2. Method I – Kinematic Interaction Calculus
16C.2.2.1 – The model of the calculation of the basic – pile-ground kinematic interaction in which the
inertial property of the superstructure is not taken into account shall be established as follows:
(a) The soil environment shall be modeled in three dimensions on the engineering base rock defined in
accordance with 16.5.2.3 to be analyzed by discrete analysis methods (finite elements or finite
differences). The depth of the engineering base rock from the building foundation shall not be less than
three times the width of the largest building and the longest pile length. Engineering along the outer
perimeter of the finite floor model and not classified as ZA or ZB
In the base rock, appropriately selected permeable boundaries shall be used to prevent the reflection of
waves emitted outward from the ground environment to the inside. The horizontal distance of the
permeable boundaries to the building shall not be less than three times the width of the building foundation,
in both directions and separately on each side. The three-dimensional nonlinear behavior of the soil
environment will be considered using models compatible with experimental data. According to 16.6,
nonlinear soil structure models shall be used in soils with liquefaction potential, which allow effective
stress analysis in the time definition area.
(b) Piles shall be modelled as rod elements in which the plastic joints described in 5.3.1 are placed at
appropriate intervals along the depth. Appropriately selected interface elements shall be used between the
piles and the ground environment. Before the earthquake calculation, the axial forces generated in the piles
from vertical loads will be determined by nonlinear static calculation.
(c) The building foundation, together with the basement perimeter curtains (up to ground floor level), shall
be modeled as a massless, infinitely rigid element.
(d) Earthquake records shall be selected in accordance with 2.5.1 to be at least eleven (two-component)
pairs and converted in accordance with 2.5.3 and the system shall be affected from the engineering base
rock.
16C.2.2.2 – In Method I, as a result of the foundation-pile-ground kinematic interaction analysis to be
performed in the time definition area, the following outputs will be obtained:
(a) The internal force and deformation demands on the piles shall be calculated as the average of the
maximum absolute values of the results obtained from each of the analyses (at least 2×=11 22 analyses).
(b) 2×=11 22 for analysis at the base of the rigid foundation modeled according to 16C.2.2.1(c), in the
direction of the two horizontal axes and for degrees of freedom defined as rotation around these axes, the
changes in time of the displacements related to the effective fundamental movements (basic level
earthquake records) and the acceleration spectra generated from them ( basic level earthquake spectra)
will be obtained. These outputs shall be used as inputs to the inertial interaction account described in
16C.2.3.
(c) Since the inertial property of the superstructure is not taken into account and the building foundation
is taken rigid, no internal force occurs in the superstructure from the kinematic interaction.
16C.2.3. Method I – Inertial Interaction Calculus
In Method I, the calculation of the inertial interaction will be done as follows:
16C.2.3.1 – Nonlinear incremental static static calculation for each degree of freedom by incrementally
acting on the degrees of freedom (for rotation in the direction of two horizontal axes at the base of the rigid
foundation) in which the effective foundation movements are defined in 16C.2.2.2(b) in the foundation – pile
– ground system will be done. From these analyses, skeletal curves of nonlinear force-displacement
relationships of the interaction arcs representing the foundation-pile-ground system will be obtained.
16C.2.3.2 – The building (superstructure) carrier system shall be modelled in accordance with 13.6.2,
together with the building foundation and basement floors as defined in 16C.2.2.1(c), and taking into account
their masses. The interaction arcs described in 16C.2.3.1 shall be placed at the base of the building
foundation and a hysteretic behavior model shall be adapted to these arcs . The acceleration records of the
active basic movements defined in 16C.2.2.2(b) shall be applied to the superstructurebase system thus
constituting it and the nonlinear inertial interaction in the time definition field of the system shall be
calculated.
16C.2.3.3 – The calculation of inertial interaction in Method I corresponds to the way in which the
nonlinear calculation of the superstructure (building) carrier system in the time definition field according to
5.7 is taken into account in terms of the structure-pile-ground interaction.
16C.2.3.4 – Method I will result in the calculation of inertial interaction and the following outputs will be
obtained:
(a) On the basis of the basestructure and superstructure (including basements), time-dependent variations
of the internal force, displacement and deformation demands shall be obtained.
(b) Time-dependent variations of the interaction displacements and interaction forces in the arcs defined
on the foundation base shall be obtained. Using these and the results of incremental static calculations
made in 16C.2.3.1, the internal forces and deformations of the piles in the inertial interaction shall be
calculated.
(c) The internal forces and deformations obtained in the stakes as a result of the inertial interaction
calculation shall be combined with those obtained from the kinematic interaction calculation according to
16C.5. The permissible unit deformation and internal force limits for reinforced concrete and steel piles
are defined in 5.8.3.
(d) If the effects of the superstructure (building) carrier system as a result of inactive interaction are
more favorable than those obtained from building calculations made without taking into account the
interaction, the effects of the interaction in the superstructure (building) carrier system shall not be taken
into account.
16C.2.4. Method I – Interaction Calculation with Common System Approach
The interaction calculation in Method I can also be performed as a calculation in the field of time definition
under the earthquake effect defined in the base rock of the common system, which is obtained by combining
the kinematic interaction and inertial interaction models defined in 16C.2.2 and 16C.2.3 for the
superstructure, foundation, piles and ground, depending on the computer hardware and software facilities.
16C.3. CALCULATION OF STRUCTURE – PILE – GROUND INTERACTION WITH METHOD II
16C.3.1. Method II – Scope
Method II, according to the classification in Table 16.5, where the local ground class is ZD, ZE or ZF,
(a) For Pile High Buildings (BYS = 1) with DTS = 3, 3a, 4, 4a, the DD-1 in Phase III of Chapter 13 shall
be applied in the nonlinear calculation made in the time definition area under the influence of earthquake
ground motion.
(b) For pile buildings with DTS = 1a, 2a and BYS = 2, 3, DD-1 shall be applied in the nonlinear
calculation made in the time definition area under the influence of earthquake ground motion according to
Tables 3.4(a) and 5.1.3.2.
16C.3.2. Method II – Kinematic Interaction Calculus
16C.3.2.1 – In Method II, the model of the calculation of the kinematic interaction of the foundation – pile
– ground, in which the inertial property of the superstructure is not taken into account, shall be formed as
follows:
(a) No modelling shall be carried out for the ground environment. The impact of the ground environment
shall be considered, indirectly, in paragraph (d) below.
(b) Piles shall be modelled as rod elements in which the plastic joints described in 5.3.1 are placed at
appropriate intervals along the depth. The relative force-displacement relationship between the pile and the
ground medium at each pile node point will be modeled by the nonlinear p-y, t-z arcs, and at the pile end
by the Q-Z spring (see 16C.6). p-y springs can be defined as a pair of pressure springs at each nodal point
and in both directions . Before the earthquake calculation, the axial forces formed in the piles from vertical
loads will be calculated using the t-z and Q-Z springs . For an approximate consideration of the group
effect on piles, see Denk.( 16C.1) The reduction coefficients calculated by empirical correlation given in
βG,
It will be applied to the force (p) axis of the force-displacement curves defined for the p-y arcs:
β=0.2 [(1 −β) s −−β (16 )] (16C.1)
G G1 G1
where s represents the ratio of the intermediate distance of the pile rows to the diameter of the pile (s ≤6)
in the direction under consideration, and βG1 denotes a coefficient to be applied differently for each pile row.
For the front pile row exposed to lateral pressure to be applied to the pressure springs only, β=G1 0.7, for the
second row of piles behind it β=0.45
G1
for the third pile row
β=0.3, and for the fourth and rearer, β=0.2 will be taken. In the opposite direction
G1 G1
for displacements, these coefficients shall be applied to the same piles in reverse order. s >6 to β=1
G
will be taken.
(c) The building foundation shall be modelled as a massless, infinitely rigid element, including
basements, according to the definition in 16C.2.2.1(c). To represent the horizontal force-displacement
relationship between basement curtains and the ground, p-y-like non-linear pressure springs selected from
the literature will be used in the direction perpendicular to the curtain at the curtain finite element nodal
points .
(d) As earthquake records, in the free ground behavior analyses carried out in accordance with 16.5.2, the
time variations of the total displacements obtained at the pile node points alignments along the ground
profile from the earthquake record pair affected separately in both horizontal directions in the base rock
shall be used (total displacement, displacement of the base rock and the sum of the relative
displacement that occurs on the ground ). Total displacements at each time t shall be applied
simultaneously in both horizontal directions in the direction of pressure to the other ends of the p-y springs
connected to the pile nodes at one end (dynamic displacement loading). These displacements will be
applied in the direction of pressure to the other ends of the p-y-like arcs connected to the curtain finite
element nodal points in basement buildings, and thus earthquake analysis will be performed in the time
definition area of the kinematic interaction model.
16C.3.2.2 – As a result of the foundation-pile-ground kinematic interaction analysis in Method II, the
following outputs will be obtained:
(a) The internal force and deformation demands on the piles shall be calculated as the average of the
maximum absolute values of the results obtained from each of the analyses (at least 2×=11 22 analyses).
(b) 2×=11 22 for analysis at the base of the rigid foundation modeled in accordance with 16C.2.2.1(c),
in the direction of the two horizontal axes and the rotation degrees of freedom defined as rotation around
these axes, the changes in time of the total displacements related to the effective fundamental movements
(foundation level earthquake records) and the acceleration spectra generated from them ( basic level
earthquake spectra) will be obtained. These outputs shall be used as inputs to the inertial interaction
account described in 16C.3.3.
(c) Since the inertial property of the superstructure is not taken into account and the building foundation
is taken rigid, no internal force occurs in the superstructure in the kinematic interaction.
16C.3.3. Method II – Inertial Interaction Calculus
16C.3.3.1 – The steps for the inertial interaction calculation in Method II are the same as the calculation
steps described in 16C.2.3.1 and 16C.2.3.2 for Method I. The difference is only in the calculation model.
Instead of the foundation-pile-ground media model in Method I , the foundation-pile-ground arcs (p-y, t-
z and Q-Z arcs) model is considered in Method II.
16C.3.3.2 – The calculation of inertial interaction in Method II contradicts the nonlinear calculation of
the building carrier system by calculation method in the time definition field according to 5.7, the way in
which the structure-pile-ground interaction is taken into account.
16C.3.3.3 – As a result of the inertial interaction calculation in Method II, the outputs specified in
16C.2.3.4 for Method I shall be obtained.
16C.3.3.4 – The internal forces and deformations obtained in the stakes as a result of the inertial interaction
calculation shall be combined with those obtained from the kinematic interaction calculation according to
16C.5. The permissible unit deformation and internal force limits for reinforced concrete and steel piles
are defined in 5.8.3.
16C.3.3.5 – If the effects of inertial interaction on the superstructure (building) carrier system are more
favorable than those obtained in building calculations made without taking into account the interaction, the
effects of the interaction in the superstructure (building) carrier system shall not be taken into account.
16C.3.4. Method II – Interaction Calculation with Common Systems Approach
In Method II, the interaction calculation can also be performed as a calculation in the time definition
field of the common system, which is obtained by combining the kinematic interaction and inertial interaction
models defined in 16C.3.2 and 16C.3.3 for the superstructure, foundation, piles and ground, depending on
the computer hardware and software facilities . In this case, as explained in 16C.3.2.1(d), the total
displacements from the free ground behavior analyses are applied simultaneously in both horizontal
directions in the direction of pressure to the other ends of the p-y springs connected to the pile nodes at one
end (dynamic displacement loading) ) is calculated in the time definition field of the common system. This
type of interaction account is in most cases as a practical account
preferable.
16C.4. CALCULATION OF STRUCTURE – PILE – GROUND INTERACTION WITH METHOD

III
16C.4.1. Method III – Scope
Method III, according to the classification in Table 16.5, where the local soil class is ZD, ZE or ZF,
(a) For pile buildings with DTS = 1a, 2a and BYS ≥ 4, DD-2 according to 4.7 or 4.8.2 shall be applied in
the linear calculation made under the influence of earthquake ground motion.
(b) For pile buildings where DTS = 1, 2, 3, 3a and BYS ≥ 2, DD-2 according to 4.7 or 4.8.2 shall be
applied in the linear calculation made under the influence of earthquake ground motion.
16C.4.2. Method III – Kinematic Interaction Calculus
The calculation of foundation-pile-ground kinematic interaction with Method III corresponds to the
simplified form of calculation made by Method II according to 16C.3.2.
16C.4.2.1 – In Method III, the model of the calculation of the kinematic interaction of the foundation –
pile – ground in which the inertial property of the superstructure is not taken into account will be formed as
follows.
(a) No modelling shall be carried out for the ground environment. The impact of the ground environment
shall be considered, indirectly, in paragraph (d) below.
(b) Piles shall be modelled as rod elements in accordance with 4.5.2 on the basis of linear behavior in
accordance with the earthquake under consideration. The relative force-displacement relationship between
the pile and the ground medium at each pile node point will be modeled by the nonlinear p-y, t-z arcs, and
at the pile end by the Q-Z spring (see 16C.6). p-y springs can be defined as a pair of pressure springs at
each nodal point and in both directions . Before the earthquake calculation, the axial forces formed in the
piles from vertical loads will be calculated using the t-z and Q-Z springs . For an approximate
consideration of the group effect on piles, see Denk.( The empirical relation given in 16C.1) shall be
used.
(c) The building foundation shall be modelled as a massless, infinitely rigid element, including
basements, according to the definition in 16C.2.2.1(c). In order to represent the horizontal force-
displacement relationship between basement curtains and the floor, p-y-like nonlinear arcs selected from
the literature will be used in the direction perpendicular to the curtain at the curtain finite element nodal
points.
(d) For each of the earthquakes (eleven earthquake records) impacted horizontally from the base rock in
line with the earthquake taken into account in the one-dimensional free ground behavior analyses made in
accordance with 16.5.2, an envelope of the maximum over time of the total displacements obtained at
the level of the pile nodes along the ground profile shall be taken. The total displacement envelope shall
be applied statically incrementally to the other ends of the nonlinear p-y arcs connected to the pile nodes
at one end, starting from zero in the direction of pressure (static incremental displacement loading). The
same displacement envelope will be applied in the direction of pressure to the other ends of p-y-like arcs
connected to the curtain finite element nodes in basement buildings, thus making an approximate
incremental static calculation of the kinematic interaction model .
16C.4.2.2 – As a result of the foundation-pile-ground kinematic interaction analysis in Method III, the
internal force demands on the piles shall be calculated as the average of the maximum absolute values
of the results obtained from each of the analyses carried out separately for eleven earthquake records in line
with each earthquake . The pile bending moments obtained in this way will be reduced by dividing by the
coefficient R = 2.5. There shall be no reduction for shear forces and axial forces.
16C.4.2.3 – Relating to the effective fundamental movements achieved in Method I and Method II
there is no calculation of displacement and spectra in Method III, which is based on the calculation of static
kinematic interactions . Instead, the average of the spectra obtained at the base of the foundation from the
free ground behavior analyses performed according to approximately 16.5.2 can be used as the design
spectrum in the inertial interaction calculation given in 16C.4.3. However, the ordinates of this spectrum
shall not be taken smaller than the ordinates of the design spectrum given in 2.3.4 for the local floor class
defined in accordance with 16.4 on the foundation base.
16C.4.3. Method III – Inertial Interaction Calculus
16C.4.3.1 – The calculation of inertial interaction in Method III can be made with the common system
model consisting of superstructure-foundation-pile-ground arcs (p-y, t-z and Q-Z arcs) on the basis of linear
behavior. However, in this model, the linear behavior (initial rigidity) of the ground arcs will be taken into
account. In the model, the masses of the foundation and basements will be taken into account, and the
masses of the piles will not be taken. As earthquake data, the earthquake spectrum defined according to
16C.4.2.3 will be used in line with the earthquake considered.
16C.4.3.2 – The inertial interaction calculation in Method III corresponds to the linear earthquake
calculation of the building carrier system according to 4.7 or 4.8.2, the way in which the structure-pile-
ground interaction is taken into account.
(a) In buildings where basements are externally surrounded by rigid curtains according to the definition
given in 3.3.1, in the two-step calculation approach applied for linear earthquake calculation according to
4.7.5 or 4.8.5, piles shall be taken into account together with the basement elements and R and D applied
for basements Their coefficient will also be applied from the interaction of inertia to the internal forces
occurring in the piles.
(b) In the case of buildings without a basement, the coefficients R and D applied to the building
(superstructure) carrier system shall be applied exactly to the internal forces occurring in the piles from the
inertial interaction.
16C.4.3.3 – The internal forces obtained according to 16C.4.3.2 for each earthquake direction in the
piles as a result of the inertial interaction calculation shall be combined according to 16C.5 with the internal
forces obtained according to 16C.4.2.2 for each earthquake direction for the piles from the kinematic
interaction calculation. The pile internal forces, consisting of earthquakes in perpendicular directions, will
then be combined according to 4.4.2.
16C.4.3.4 – If the effects of inertial interaction on the superstructure (building) carrier system are more
favorable than those obtained in building calculations made without taking into account the interaction, the
interaction effects in the superstructure (building) carrier system shall not be taken into account.
16C.5. CHANGES IN THE FORM OF EVALUATION / DESIGN IN THE RECESSES AND INTERNAL
FORCES
As a result of the calculations made by the methods described in 16C.2, 16C.3 and 16C.4, the deformations
and internal forces based on the evaluation/design of the piles shall be calculated as the sum of the absolute
values of the results of the kinematic and inertial interaction.
16C.6. PILE – NONLINEAR GROUND SPRINGS FOR GROUND INTERACTION
16C.6.1. Definition
For the purpose of modeling the pile-ground interaction, nonlinear p–y springs for lateral behavior, t–z
springs for axial behavior (circumferential friction) and Q–Z springs for axial pile tip behavior will be used.
(a) for soft clay under p–y springs (s < 50 kPa) Matlock (1970), water level
u
Nonlinear correlations developed by Reese et al. (1975) for solid clay below it, Welch and Reese (1972 )
for solid clay above water level, and Reese and others (1974) for sand for static and repeated loading can
be used.
(b) For the t–z and Q–Z springs, the nonlinear relations described in the American Petroleum Institute API
WSD RP-2A (2000) may be used.
16C.6.2. Resources for p-y Springs
(a) Matlock, H. (1970). "Correlation for design of laterally loaded piles in soft clay." Proc.,2nd Annu.
Offshore Technology Conference, Paper No. OTC 1204, Houston, Texas, pp. 577-594.
(b) Reese, L. C. and Welch, R. C. (1975). "Lateral loading of deep foundation in stiff clay." Journal of
Geotechnical Engineering Division, ASCE, 101(7), pp. 633-649.
(c) Reese, L. C., Cox, W. R., and Koop, F. D. (1975). "Field testing and analysis of laterally loaded piles in
stiff clay." Proc. 7th Offshore Technology Conference, Paper No. OTC 2321, Houston, Texas, pp. 671-
690.
(d) Welch, R. C. and Reese, L. C. (1972). "Laterally loaded behavior of drilled shafts." Research Report
3-5-65-89, Center for Highway Research, University of Texas, Austin.
(e) Reese, L. C., Cox, W. R., and Koop, F. D. (1974). "Analysis of laterally loaded piles in sand." Proc.
6th Offshore Technology Conference, Paper 2080, Houston, Texas, pp. 473-483.
16C.6.3. Welding for t-z and Q-Z Springs
API WSD RP-2A (2000). Planning, Designing and Constructing Fixed Offshore Platforms, American
Petroleum Institute.
ANNEX 16D – ON-SITE IMPROVEMENT OF LAND SOIL PROPERTIES
In cases where the effects cannot be met by the resistors, the on-site improvement or strengthening of the soil
properties can be resorted to in the soils where the soil liquefaction is expected to be triggered during the
earthquake and / or to suffer a great loss of strength/rigidity. The appropriate soil improvement or
strengthening method is determined by the civil engineer responsible for geotechnical field by using the
general principles listed below.
16D.1 – On loose and medium tight cohesion (coarse denum) floors, increasing the degree of tightness is the
most effective way of healing. Methods that apply vibrations to the floor are more effective in increasing the
degree of tightness. Vibrating methods; deep compaction (compression), vibroflotation, compression piles,
vibratory probes, blasting, compression from the surface with vibrating rollers, etc.
16D.2 – In soft-solid cohesion (fine grain) soils, effective improvement can be achieved by reducing the
water content of the floor, increasing the consolidation pressure and strengthening the internal structure. In
this context, drainage, groundwater level reduction, consolidation methods (booting, electro-osmotic,
vacuum-acting) can be used. In addition, solidification (deep mixing) and injection methods can be used by
mixing binding additives such as cement, lime. In cohesive soils that are not saturated with water and do
not have high plasticity, the deep compression method can also be used.
16D.3 – In cohesive and non-cohesion soils, static and earthquake loads can be met mainly by these elements
by creating rigid elements (stone columns, jet injection columns, concrete columns, etc.) within the ground.
16D.4 – In the design of soil improvement, the soil characteristics to be improved (degree of tightness,
shear strength, jamming module, etc.) and the targeted degree of improvement should be clearly indicated.
The field application of the selected soil improvement method should be closely monitored with instrumental
observations, the degree of improvement provided according to the current situation and the realization of
the targeted improvement in the design should be checked.
16D.5 – The measures that can be applied for ground improvement under an existing structure are more
limited. In addition to the difficulty of working under the foundations of the structure, it is necessary to take
into account possible ground displacements that may develop during the implementation of improvement
methods . In some cases, with the measures taken around the building, it may be resorted to limiting the
lateral ground displacements that may occur during the earthquake.
16D.6 – Instead of (or with) ground reinforcement methods, it may also be resorted to changing the
foundation system (pile or helmet foundations, perimeter diaphragm wall, rigid basement foundation design,
etc.) and making design changes in the superstructure.
ECTION 17 – SIMPLIFIED DESIGN RULES FOR REGULAR CAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BUILDINGS
17.0. ICONS
Unless otherwise specified in dimensional expressions using the following symbols in this section, the forces
are in kiloNewtons [kN], the lengths are in meters [m], the areas are in square meters [m 2], and the spread
2
loads are in kiloNewtons/square meter [kN/m ].
Aci = Cross-sectional area of the column under consideration A g = Cross-sectional area of the column or
curtain A = Building floor area
Pt
A s = Bending reinforcement area under tensile effect in the beam cross section A sg = The sum of the
areas of the inner row longitudinal reinforcement in the direction considered for the column cross
section or the sum of the longitudinal reinforcement areas in the curtain body for the curtain section A sh
= Along the height corresponding to the s transverse reinforcement interval in the middle region of the
column, sum of the projections of the cross-sectional area values of the cross-sectional arms and gyros
in the direction perpendicular to the cross-sectional width of the column (b) Awater = The sum of the areas
of the outermost row longitudinal reinforcements in the direction considered for the column cross
section or the curtain cross section Sum of the longitudinal reinforcement areas at the end zones for Ast =
Total longitudinal reinforcement area in the column cross section
Asw = Sum of the cross-sectional area values of all the skirting arms and ciroz along the length corresponding to
the s transverse reinforcement interval in the middle region of the beam a = Horizontal distance
between the skirting arms and/or the gyros in the middle region of the column BKS = Building Use Class
b = Cross-sectional for the direction considered of the column or curtain width bw = Beam body width
or curtain thickness
DTS = Earthquake Design Class d = Distance from the concrete surface under the influence of pressure
in the beam, column or curtain cross section to the center of the bending reinforcement under the
influence of tensile effect d ' = Distance from the concrete surface under the influence of pressure in
the beam, column or curtain cross section to the center of the bending reinforcement under the influence
of pressure E d = Earthquake effect based on the design in the horizontal direction taken into consideration
(Z)
Ed = Vertical earthquake effect
ee,= the distance between the center of mass of the fold and the center of rigidity in the x and y
directions
xy
Fi = Equivalent earthquake load affecting the first floor of the building F j = Equivalent earthquake load
affecting the jth floor of the building Fper,j = Horizontal earthquake force transferred to the curtain on the
jth floor f ck = Characteristic compressive strength of concrete f cd = Design compressive strength of

concrete fyk = Characteristic yield of reinforcement steel strength fyd = Design yield strength of reinforcing
steel
g = Average spread constant load not magnified by load coefficients acting on each floor or affecting the
2
overall floor of the area share of the vertical carrier element [kN/m ]
H = Horizontal ground thrust effect Hi = The height of the first floor of the building measured from
above the foundation or the height of the first floor of the building surrounded by solid basement
curtains on four sides in the basement floor from the top of the ground floor of the building from the
top of the ground floor hw = The total height of any curtain measured from above the foundation or the
total height of any curtain in the basement floor from four sides rigid Surrounded by basement curtains,
the building has a ground floor of the curtain
The total height measured from the top of the flooring
H= Building ground floor height
h = Cross-sectional height of the column or curtain for the given direction

hi = Floor height of the first floor of the building (the floor under the ith floor slab)
I = Coefficient of building importance Ii = Cross-sectional inertia in the direction considered of a single
column on the ground floor
moment of action of the column cross section in the given direction I per = Moment of inertia
of the curtain inthe given direction k T = Torsional rigidity of the building k x = Horizontal rigidity of
the curtain in the direction x k y = y horizontal rigidity in the direction kn = Free opening of the beam in
the short direction of the flooring part n= Beam free opening w= Length of the curtain in the floor
plan Mbr = Bending against the balanced state calculated by taking into account fcd and fyd for column or
curtain sections Moment

N
Md The total moment
= Bending number of floors
based on from
designtheobtained
top of the
frombuilding
analysisor from four sides in the
=
Mgigant basement
= The total tipping moment formed at the base of the building
ic Surrounded by rigid basement curtains, the building has a ground floor covering
Mi = Total
from the tipping
top moment on the first floor of the building
MDirt = Flexural moment
total number of floors. due to vertical loads in any beam section
MBrdirt,i
N = The bending moment
= Balanced column or pitch caused by thecalculated
sections effects of by
earthquakes
taking intoinaccount
any beam fCDsection
and fYdon
the first floorforce
compressive of theagainst
buildingthe situation
Mdarm
N = The bending moment
= Axial force based on the caused by obtained
design vertical loads
from in theany column section
analysis
Marm,i
mostN
= The bending moment caused by the effects
= Axial drawing calculated by considering fYd for column orof earthquakes incurtain
any column section
sections
on the first floor of the building
Resistance
pM = Torque strength calculated by taking into account the increase in strength of fCk,
N0r = Axial calculated by considering fCD and fYd for column or curtain sections
yk and steel for column or beam sections
fcompressive strength
Pam = The Facility torque strength calculated by taking into account the increase in
n = Moving load participation coefficient
ninterio strength
The number of fof
Ck, fyk and steel at the lower end of the free height of the column
internal columns in the direction considered in the building
rMPu
=
= The Facility torque strength calculated by taking into account the increase in
nextern strength of
= Number ofouter
fCk, fyk and steel
columns at the
in the upper considered
direction end of the freein theheight of the column
building
al
Mlinks
pi = Positive or negative torque strength calculated by taking into account the strength
p = Sum of diffuse
increase of fCk,fixed
fyk andandsteel
moving loads
on the actingoroncurtain
column the floor (g+q)
face at the i end of the
Q = beam
Moving load effect
qMpj = The areaor
Positive share of thetorque
negative vertical carriercalculated
strength element taken into consideration
by taking is affected
into account the increase
by the effect on each floor or the floor
in strength of fCk, fyk and steel on the column or curtain face at the j end of the
average radiated moving load not magnified by load coefficients affecting the
beam
overall [kN/m2]
per M = Flexural moment due to vertical loads in any pitch
aR = Earthquake load reduction coefficient
Mper,de =
Sv = The
Snowbending moment caused by earthquake effects at the base of any curtain
load effect
SMDSper,i = Short period design
The bending momentspectral
causedacceleration
by the effects coefficient [dimensionless]
of earthquakes in any curtain on the
Transverse reinforcement and gyros spacing in the middle area of the column or
s = first floor of the building
rM = beam
Carrying power torque calculated by taking into account f CD and fYd for column,
Ti = beam
The total torsional
or curtain torsion moment on the first floor of the building
sections
TMkat,j
Ri = Torsion moment affecting
= Positive or negative conveying the jth floormoment
power of the building
calculated by taking f CD and fYd
tT = The
on the column or curtain face at the i end of thethe
total torsional torsion moment at the base of building
beam
VMDyRj =
= Simple
Positivebeam cuttingconveying
or negative force power moment calculated by taking into account f
eV = Design-based cutting force for columns, beams and curtains
CD and fyd on the column or curtain face at the j end of the beam
VRai m =
= Floor
Carryingcutting
powerforce on theatfirst
moment the floor
upperofend
theofbuilding
the column free height
VMDirt
rü
=
= Cutting
Carryingforcepowerduemoment
to vertical loads
at the in any
lower end beam
of thesection
column free height
Vmarm,i =
= Any
Longcolumn on theedge
edge / short firstratio
floorfor
of tile
the part
building due to earthquake effects
cutting force
Vper,i = Any curtain on the first floor of the building due to earthquake effects
cutting force
tV = Total equivalent earthquake load affecting the building (base shear force)
377
W = The total weight of the building using the moving load participation coefficient w = Smooth spread
(linear) vertical load transferred from the floor to any beam wi = The ith floor of the building is calculated
using the moving load participation coefficient
weight x = Distance of the cross-sectional geometric center of any curtain from the
reference point x y = Distance of the cross-sectional geometric center of any curtain from the reference
point y
Distance in the direction x = Distance of the center of the stiffness of the floor from the
reference point in the direction of x y = Distance of the center of the rigidity of the floor from the
reference point in the direction y
ρ = Beam upper or lower longitudinal reinforcement ratio ρ sh = Transverse reinforcement ratio in the
middle region of the column
ρt = Column total longitudinal reinforcement ratio
ρw = Transverse reinforcement ratio in the middle zone of the beam
∆VT,i = Additional cutting force due to torsional effects on the floor in any curtain on the first floor of the building ∑
Aci = Sum of the column cross-sectional areas on the ground floor
∑ Api = Sum of the building floor areas
∑ Awi = Sum of the cross-sectional areas of the curtain or curtain arm operating in the direction under
consideration
∑ A0i = Sum of the accumulated area shares along all floors for the column under consideration
∑ (I i / H i 2 ) = Sum of the values of the direction taken in the ground floor (column cross-section moment of inertia /
2
floor height ) ∑V arm, i = Sum of the cutting forces caused by earthquake effects in the columns on the first
floor of the building
17.1. SCOPE
17.1.1 – In basement buildings whose basement is surrounded on three or four sides by rigid basement
curtains, the definition of the building base according to 3.3.1 at the level of floor covering at the upper
elevation of the basement curtains, in buildings without a basement or in basement buildings whose
basement is surrounded by rigid basement curtains on two sides, 17.2 from unin-place cast reinforced
concrete buildings without a basement or with a basement, with BYS ≥ 6 for DTS=1.2 and BYS ≥ 7 for
DTS=3.4 , defined at the foundation upper elevation of the building base according to 3.3.1. In the
design of horizontal load-bearing system elements of buildings that meet the conditions in , together with
the relevant standards and regulations in force in this regard, the simplified calculation (structural analysis)
and design rules described in this chapter may be used, depending on the preference of the building owner
and the engineer responsible for the project.
17.1.2 – The terms and conditions described in this section may only be used for design purposes under this
section.
17.1.3 – The scope of application of the rules defined in this section is limited to residential or workplace
type buildings where the Building Use Class given in Table 3.1 is defined as BKS=3.
17.1.4 – For residential or business type buildings without a basement or with a basement and where
the Building Use Class is defined as BKS=3, where the simplified calculation (structural analysis) and
design rules described in this section are not used, but where the BYS ≥ 5 for DTS=1.2 and BYS ≥ 6 for
DTS=3.4 as defined in 17.1.1 and the sizing rules defined in 17.4 and the cross-sectional and
reinforcement lower boundary conditions may be used for preliminary design purposes, at the discretion of
the building owner and the engineer responsible for the project. However, in the final design of such
buildings, it is mandatory to use the relevant standards and regulations in force in this regard, as well as the
calculation and design rules defined in other parts of this regulation.
17.2. GENERAL RULES
The application limits of the design rules defined in this section are defined below:
17.2.1 – The horizontal load-bearing system of reinforced concrete buildings within the scope of this section
shall consist only of frames with a high level of ductility or the combined use of gapless curtains with a
high ductility level and frames with a high level of ductility.
17.2.2 – The scope of application of the design rules defined in this chapter is limited to the sizing and
reinforcement of the sections of the bearing element in order to provide sufficient momentum bearing power
and sufficient shear strength in the carrier system elements (curtain, column and beam) under earthquake
effects and vertical loads . Design rules by strength, detailing rules, geometric rules, minimum requirements
and upper limit conditions that fall outside the scope of the design rules defined in this section are subject to
all of the rules given in Section 7 and the relevant standards and regulations in force. However, for buildings
to which the design rules in this section apply, the calculation of relative floor displacements under the effects
of earthquakes and the comparison of the relative floor displacement rates with the limit values
is not required.
17.2.3 – Where the load-bearing system of the design rules described in this section is used only for buildings
consisting of frames, flexible joints or joints shall be established between infill walls or façade elements made
of brittle material and frame elements in accordance with 4.9.1.3(b).
17.2.4 – The building shall have a floor plan close to a rectangle. In the floor plan, the long side of the building
should be maximum 30 m long, and the ratio of the long side to the short side should be maximum 4. The
building carrier system (frame and curtains) should be formed along the axes perpendicular to each other in
the floor plan (orthogonal), and there should be no discontinuity or off-axis shift in the carrier system axes.
17.2.5 – The largest opening in the building floor plan should be 7.5 m and the smallest opening should be
3 m. There must be at least two openings in each direction of the carrier system. Except for the opening
between the free ends of the curtains with a cross section U or C that may be formed around the elevator or
staircase, the difference between the two adjacent openings in each direction should not be more than 1/5
of the one longer than the two openings. If there are cantilever beams in the building, the length of the
cantilever should not be more than 2 m, and 1/3 of the neighboring opening.
17.2.6 – The building should not have floors higher than 4 m, and the height change between the floors should
not be more than 1/5 of the height of the high floor.
17.2.7 – As defined in Table 3.6, there should be no A2 – Floor Discontinuities, A3 – Protrusions in the
Plan, B1 – Strength Irregularity between Neighboring Floors (Weak Floor) and B3 – Discontinuity of Vertical
Elements of the Carrier System in the building.
17.2.8 – The eccentricity between the center of mass and the center of rigidity of the building, calculated
in accordance with 17.5.1 for each earthquake direction on all floors except the partial basement floor , shall
not be more than 1/5 of the length of the floor plan of the building in the direction perpendicular to the relevant
direction. If reinforced concrete curtains are used in the carrier system, the building plan should have at least
two rectangular curtains or curtain arms in each direction, at least one on each side of the floor mass center.
17.2.9 – No reduction shall be made in vertical bearing element (column, curtain) cross-sections along
the height of the building, different beam cross-sections shall not be used on different floors of the building
and no changes shall be made in the beam cross-sections along any horizontal bearing system axis.
17.2.10 – If a beamed plate flooring system is used in the building, the floor thickness must be at least 150
mm. In the case of using threaded or filled (asmolen) flooring systems, the plaque thickness must be at least
70 mm, the beams between the vertical bearing elements must be dimensioned and equipped as frame beams
with a high level of ductility. The teeth in such flooring should be formed in a direction perpendicular to the
frame beams, which are strongly attached to the rectangular curtains or curtain arms and transfer the
earthquake loads from the slab to the curtains.
17.2.11 – The building foundation shall be formed as a raft or continuous foundation when the bearing
system consists of frames, and a raft if the bearing system consists of curtains and frames.
17.2.12 – The calculation rules in this section are only GQ + 0.2 S ± E d and 0.9GEd load
+±
combinations . Snow load S, affecting the attic of the building
(Z)
can be added to the moving load value. The vertical earthquake effect may not be observed in the E d account.
Direction joining will not be applied in horizontal earthquake effects.
17.2.13 – It is mandatory to use gapless curtains with high ductility levels in the horizontal load carrier
system of buildings with Earthquake Design Class DTS=1 and DTS=2 . In the design of such buildings,
the condition that all of the equivalent earthquake load affecting the building is met by curtains with high
ductility levels and 33% by frames with high ductility levels is taken into consideration in the calculations.
In buildings consisting of frames with a high level of ductility in the horizontal load carrier system, the total
equivalent earthquake load affecting the building is all covered by the frames.
17.2.14 – In buildings with a basement floor surrounded by rigid basement curtains on two sides, the
basement floor shall be considered as the ground floor in the structural analysis due to the identification
of the building base at the upper elevation, and the internal force values generated by the earthquake effects
in the bearing system elements in the basement floor shall also be valid for the bearing system elements on
the upper floor.
17.2.15 – In buildings with a basement floor surrounded by rigid basement curtains on three or four sides,
an upper floor of the basement floor shall be considered as the ground floor in the structural analysis,
since the building base is defined at the level of floor laying at the upper level of the basement curtains,
the internal force values of the bearing system elements on the ground floor due to earthquake effects shall
also be considered for the bearing system elements in the basement floor. will be valid.
17.2.16 – Horizontal ground thrust effects (H) are not observed in the calculation rules defined in this section.
Therefore, in buildings exposed to horizontal ground thrusts that are not balanced from two sides in the
basement, it should also be shown that the ground thrust effects are safely transferred to the foundation.
17.2.17 – Reinforcing steel shall not be used in buildings to be designed in accordance with the rules defined
in this section except for concrete class with strength lower than C25 or higher than C50 and classes B420C
or S420 as defined in 7.2.5.3.
17.2.18 – In all load-bearing elements in buildings to be designed in accordance with the rules defined in this
section, the clamping length and the trapping length of the longitudinal reinforcement shall not be less than
50 times the diameter of the reinforcement and the clamping length of the 90-degree hooks shall not be less
than 25 times the diameter of the reinforcement.
17.2.19 – In buildings to be designed in accordance with the rules defined in this section, at least one floor
from the top of the foundation in buildings without a basement with a critical height of the curtain; two, three
or four sides
In basement buildings surrounded by basement curtains, it will be continued for at least two floors from the
top of the foundation.
17.2.20 – The buildings to which the calculation and design rules described in this section are to be applied
must meet the rules defined in 17.3 and 17.4.
17.3. DIMENSIONING OF VERTICAL CARRIER ELEMENTS
The mean spread constant load and the average spread moving load values to be used in the determination
of the cross-sectional areas of the vertical carrier elements by the equations given in 17.3.1 and 17.3.2 are
2
the sum of the value (g+q) is 15 kN/m 2, and the value (g+0.3 q) is 13 kN/m will not be taken less than
. Spread constant load values must include the weight of horizontal and vertical bearing elements (beam,
column, curtain) and non-bearing elements (partition wall) together with the floor loads. The moving load
acting on the attic of the building should also include the reduced snow load with a load coefficient of 0.2.
17.3.1. Buildings Consisting of Carrier System Frames
17.3.1.1 – The cross-sectional area of each column for the limitation of axial pressure stresses in the columns
is A ci , Equivalent.( 17.1). The values g and q in the equation are the average fixed and moving spread
load that affects the area share of the column taken into consideration on each floor, and the ∑ A0i value is the
sum of the area shares accumulated along all the layers carried by the arm for the column taken into
consideration.
Aci ≥ (+)∑ A0i
0.00014 gq (17.1)
17.3.1.2 – In order for the columns to have sufficient shear force strength, the cross-sectional area of each
column is Aci, Equivalent.( 17.2). The SDS value in the equation is the design spectral acceleration coefficient
defined for the short-period region.
Aci ≥ 0.00022SDS ( g + 0.3q)∑ A0i (17.2)

17.3.1.3 – The sum of the values of the ratio of the cross-sectional moment of inertia of the ground floor
columns of the building to the square of the floor height in order for the carrier system to have sufficient
lateral rigidity,
2
∑ (IH/) value is equivalent in both directions of the building . 17.3).

Ii IHii
≥
The ∑ Api value in the equation is4.44×10 DSthe sum of the building floor areas.
(+ q∑ Api 2 −7
(17.3)
∑(
) Sg 0.3 )
17.3.2. Buildings with Carrier System Consisting of Curtains and Frames
17.3.2.1 – The cross-sectional area of each column for the limitation of axial pressure stresses in the columns
is Aci, Equivalent.( 17.4).
A 0.00012 + A
CI
≥( GQ)∑ 0i (17.4)
17.3.2.2 – In order for the columns to have sufficient shear strength, the cross-sectional area of each column
is Aci, Equivalent.( 17.5).
A ≥ Sg
ci
0.0001 (+0.3q)∑ A (17.5)

DS 0i
17.3.2.3 – ∑ A, which is the sum of the cross-sectional areas of the rectangular curtain or curtain arm
operating in each direction of the building so that the gapless curtains have sufficient shear strength
Wi
The value is equivalent in both directions of the building.( 17.6) and Equivalent.( 17.7). ∑ in the equation,
the value A pi is the sum of the building floor areas, and the Aptvalue is the building floor
area.
A≥ 0.0002Sg + 0.3qA (17.6)
∑ wi DS ( )∑ pi
A≥ 0.0007Sg + 0.3qA (17.7)
∑ wi DS (pt)
17.3.2.4 – In order for the building carrier system to have sufficient shear force strength at the base, the value
obtained by summing the sum of the cross-sectional areas of the ground floor columns and the cross-
sectional areas of the rectangular curtain or curtain arm working in each direction of the building (∑ A ci +
∑ Awi ) is equivalent in both directions of the building. 17.8)
condition.
A+ Sg
∑ ci ∑ A wi ≥ 0.0003 DS (+ 0.3q)∑ Api (17.8)
17.4. CROSS SECTION AND REINFORCEMENT LOWER LIMITS
17.4.1. Cross-Section Lower Limits for Carrier System Elements
17.4.1.1 – The smallest square column section shall be 300 mm ×300 mm in size. In rectangular column
cross-sections, the short side will be at least 300 mm long, the ratio of the long side size to the short side
will not be more than 2.
17.4.1.2 – The smallest beam section shall be 300 mm wide and 500 mm high. The beam height shall not be
less than 1/11 of the opening in buildings with carrier system frames and 1/12 of the opening in buildings
with a carrier system consisting of curtains and frames. The beam height shall also not be more than 1/4 of
the free opening.
17.4.1.3 – The thickness of the rectangular curtain or the thickness of the curtain arm in curtains with a
cross section L, T, U, C shall not be less than 1/25 of the length of the curtain in the plan and 250 mm,
excluding the basement perimeter curtains. The thickness of the basement perimeter curtains shall not be less
than 200 mm.
17.4.1.4 – The length of rectangular curtains or curtain arms in curtains with cross sections L, T, U, C in the
building plan shall not be less than 1/8 of the height measured from the ground floor of the building.
17.4.2. Reinforcement Lower Limits for Carrier System Elements
17.4.2.1 – In square-cross section columns, the ratio of the total vertical reinforcement area to the column
cross-sectional area shall not be less than ρt, 0.01. In rectangular cross-sectional columns where the ratio of
long side to short side is 2 , this ratio will be at least 0.015. For intermediate values of the long edge / short
edge ratio, it can be assumed that the lower limit of the vertical reinforcement ratio varies linearly.
17.4.2.2 – In the case of columns with a square cross section, the ratio of transverse reinforcement in the
middle region of the column defined in 7.3.4.2 shall not be less than ρ sh = Ash /(sb) , 0.00165. In rectangular
cross-sectional columns where the ratio of long side to short side is 2, this ratio will be at least 0.0025. For
intermediate values of the long edge / short edge ratio, it can be assumed that the lower limit of the transverse
reinforcement ratio varies linearly. In any case, the spacing of the ether and the ciros in the middle region
of the column shall not be more than 200 mm and half of the smallest cross-sectional size of the column,
and the horizontal distance between the ether arms and/or the gyros shall not be more than 25 times the
diameter of the ether.
17.4.2.3 – In the section of the beam support where the beams meet the columns or curtains, the upper and
lower longitudinal reinforcement ratios of the beam shall not be less than ρ= A / (bd), 0.006 and 0.004,
respectively.
Sw
17.4.2.4 – The ratio of transverse reinforcement in the middle zone of the beam defined in 7.4.4 shall not
be less than ρ w = Asw /(sbw) , 0.0025, the spacing of the wort and gyros in this region shall not be more than
half of the useful height of the beam.
17.5. SIMPLIFIED STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS
17.5.1. Calculation of Earthquake Effects
17.5.1.1 – For each direction considered, the total equivalent earthquake load affecting the building
(the base shear force occurring on the ground floor), the equivalent earthquake loads affecting the
floors, the floor shear forces on the floors, the total tipping moments occurring on the floors and the total
tipping moment occurring at the building base (ground floor floor), Equivalent.( 17.9–17.13) (Figure 17.1).
R a = 4 value for earthquake load reduction coefficient in the calculation of total equivalent earthquake
load, n = 0.30 for moving load participation coefficient in the calculation of the total weight of the building
value will be used. The constant load values to be used in the calculation of building weight should include
the weight of horizontal and vertical bearing elements (beam, column, curtain) and non-bearing elements
(partition wall) as well as floor loads. Moving load, which acts on the attic of the building,
It should also include a reduced snow load with a load coefficient of 0.2.
SW
DS
V = (17.9)
t a
R
Wh
ii
Fi = Vt N (17.10) ∑ wH
jjj1
Vi =∑ Fj (17.11)
j=i
Mi
N
⎡F j
=∑
⎣
(H j
− H i-
1
⎦
VI )
(17.12)
j=i N
M = M =⎡FH 
(17.13)
⎣ jj ⎦
∑
1 dev
j1
=
F 5 H5 M I0 V 5 V 4 V 3 V 2 V 1M M
5 4
F4 M M 2 M 1 = Mdev
3
M
F3 F 2 F1 giant
Fig. 17.1
17.5.1.2 – The distance of the building floor rigidity center from a reference point selected in the plan in
the x and y directions in order to calculate the torsional moments affecting the floors of the building (Figure
17. 2), Denk.( 17.14). Equivalent. (17.14) The rigidity values k x and k in , x y
Equivalent.( 17.15), and for rectangular cross section curtains in the direction of y, Equivalent.( 17.16).
In buildings without curtains, it will be assumed that the center of rigidity coincides with the center of floor
mass.
(
1
7
.
1
4
)
∑
yi xi k
x
=w3
w
/ h i ky
3
= ww /
hi
(
b






b
)
( ∑(
k-x
) 1
7
.
1
5
)
33
k =(b ) / hk =(b / h

x wwi y wwi
Fig. 17.2
17.5.1.3 – Torsion moment affecting the jth floor flooring of the building, Equivalent.( 17.17). Equivalent.
(17.17) The eccentricity values in the x and y directions in are the distances between the center of mass of
the fold and the center of rigidity (Figure 17. 2). The floor mass center shall be considered the geometric
center of the floor slab, and the marginal gaps greater than 2.0 m contained in the slab shall be taken into
account in the calculation of the floor center of mass. Equivalent acting on floors
earthquake loads will be driven to the center of mass of the floor. In buildings where there is no curtain, there
is no need to calculate the torsional moments affecting the floors.
T = max ⎡ Fe , Fe ⎤ (17.17)
floor, j ⎣( jx )( jy )⎦
17.5.1.4 – The total torsional torsion moment on the first floor of the building and at the base of the building,
Equivalent.( 17.18) and Equivalent.( 17.19).
N
T =∑ T (17.18)
i kat,j
j=i
N
T =∑ T (17.19)
t kat,j
j1
=
17.5.1.5 – Torsional rigidity of the building, Equivalent.( 17.20).

222 2
k = ∑ kx + ky ⎤−⎡x ∑ k yi ⎤−⎡y ∑ k
⎡ ⎤
(17.20)
T ⎣( yii xi i )⎦⎣ ⎦⎣ xi ⎦
17.5.1.6 – On the first floor of the building, the shear force caused by the effects of earthquakes on a curtain
parallel to the direction of the assumed loading, Equivalent.( 17.21). Equivalent. (17.21) In , it was
assumed that the floor cutting forces were distributed to the curtains in proportion to the moments of inertia
and the additional cutting forces that would occur in the curtains due to torsion effects were considered. In
the calculation of the additional cutting forces generated in the curtains due to torsional effects, the
equivalent for the curtains in the direction of x ( 17.22), for curtains in the direction of y.( 17.23) (Figure
17.2).
3
VT,i (17.21)
V=
per,i ww
T y
x− xk y
y k
x
−
(
∆
( V
∆ )
V y
T
,
=
i T
)
x
=
T
i
(
1
7
.
T,i i
2
k 2
)
T
k
17.5.1.7 – On the first floor of the building , the bending moment caused by the effects of earthquakes on
a curtain parallel to the direction of the assumed loading is equivalent ( 17.24), and the tipping moment at
the base of the curtain is Equivalent.( 17.25). Equivalent. (17.24) and Denk.( The F in 17.25) per-force
represents the horizontal load transferred from the floor to the curtain on that floor.
is. The horizontal load transferred to the curtain on the first floor or attic (Nth floor) of the building, as
the difference of the cutting forces generated in the curtain on the neighboring floors, is equivalent to ( 17.26)
or Equivalent( 17.27) (Figure 17.3).
NM per,i =∑⎡Fper,j (H j − H i-1 )⎤ (17.24)
⎣⎦
j=i
per, dev ∑ ⎣ per, j j ⎦

M per, M = ⎡ F H ⎤ (17.25)
1 = j=1
F per, j = V −V (17.26)
per, j+1 per, j
F =V (17.27)
per, N per, N
17.5.1.8 – The sum of the cutting forces generated in the columns on the first floor of the building in
accordance with the loading taken into account in buildings whose bearing system consists of curtains and
frames , Equivalent.( 17.28). In buildings whose carrier system consists of frames, this sum is equivalent
to ( 17.29), the floor formed in the direction considered in the building shall be equal to the cutting forces.
∑Varm,i =
i
∑V arm,i = Vi (17.29)
(13)
V (17.28)
Curtain Curtain cutting Coming to the curtains
Force horizontal forces
Fig. 17.3
17.5.1.9 – The shear force generated in any column on the first floor of the building for the loading
direction under consideration shall be equivalent to the inner columns in the relevant direction. 17.30), for
the outer columns Equivalent.( 17.31) (Figure 17.4).
(17.30)
(17.31)
17.5.1.10 – The bending moment in any column on the first floor of the
building for the loading direction under consideration, Equivalent.( 17.32)
(Figure 17.4).
M arm,i = V h /2 (17.32)
arm,i i
4
M dirt,i =
5
M arm,i
8
= M (17.34)
(17.33) M dirt,i arm,i
5
Fig. 17.5
17.5.1.12 – The bending moment caused by the effects of earthquakes in the beam sections in the beam –
curtain joints shall not be calculated. The upper and lower longitudinal reinforcement to be placed on the
beam in these sections shall meet the lower limit conditions in 17.4.2.3 and shall be sufficient to meet the
bending moments caused by vertical loads.
17.5.2. Calculation of Vertical Load Effects
17.5.2.1 – The uniform spreading (linear) vertical load (w) transferred to any beam from the piece of flooring
operating in each pair of directions shall be equivalent to the beam in the short direction of the piece of
flooring, unless a more detailed calculation is made. 17.35), and for the beam in the long direction of the slab
part, Equivalent.( 17.36). All of the load transferred from the plate (or geared) flooring parts operating in
one direction will be transferred to the beam in the long direction of the plate flooring part (or to the beam to
which the laying teeth are attached). Denk.( 17.35) and Equivalent.( p in 17.36) is the total value (g+q or
1.4g+1.6q) calculated by taking into account the load coefficients of the radiated constant and moving loads
acting on the flooring. If there is a dividing wall on the beam, the diffused load created by the dividing wall
is added to the beam load (w) load, taking into account the corresponding load coefficient.
p
kn
w = (17.35)
p⎛0.5 ⎞
3
⎜
1.5 − 2 ⎟ (17.36) 3 ⎝ m ⎠
kn
w=
17.5.2.2 – The calculation values for the shear force and bending moment caused by vertical loads in any
beam section, unless a more detailed calculation is made, Table 17. It can be calculated using the correlations
given in 1.
17.5.2.3 – Unbalanced vertical load bending moments (∆M dirt) formed at the beam ends in column – beam
or column – curtain joints are equivalent to the upper and lower layer columns or curtains ( 17.37) and Denk.(
17.38), the upper and lower floor shall be distributed in proportion to the rigidity of the column or curtain
. In calculating the bending moment at the upper ends of the columns or curtains on the top floor, Equivalent.(
17.39).
(17.37)
(I )
(I )
M (
=∆ 1
M 7
per,top .
per i per i 3 )
8
top bottom
M per,alt
=∆ per i per i
M top bottom
M = ΔM 3
arm dirt 9
( )
M= 1
ΔM 7
per dirt .
Table 17.1 – Calculation Values in Beams for Vertical Load

Internal Force Account Value
Cutting force on the first inner column or curtain face in the outer opening
n dirt 1.15 = 2 Wv 
beam
Cutting force on all column or curtain faces except the cantilever beam n dirt = 2 Wv 
Cutting force on cantilever beam support V = w

dirt n
Opening moment in the outer opening

n dirt 2 14 w M +=+

Opening moment in the inner opening

n dirt 2 16 w M +=+

Bearing moment on the outer column or outer vertical curtain face

n dirt 2 16 w M −=−

Bearing moment on the inner column or inner vertical curtain face (in the n dirt 2 9wM −=−
case of two openings) 
Bearing moment on the inner column or inner vertical curtain face (in case n dirt 2 10 w M −=−
of more than two openings) 
Bearing moment on the face of the curtain in the beam that is strongly stuck n dirt 2 12 w M −=−
in the curtain 
Cantilever beam bearing torque

n dirt 2 34wM −=−

Fig. 17.6
17.5.2.4 – Axial forces due to vertical loads in columns or curtains can be calculated using the values of
fixed and mobile diffuse load (g + q) acting on the floors and the sum of the area allocations accumulated
along all the layers carried by the column or curtain considered. In this case, the spread constant load values
to be observed in the calculation shall include the weight of the horizontal and vertical bearing elements
(beam, column, curtain) and non-bearing elements (partition wall) together with the laying loads. The moving
load acting on the attic of the building should also include the reduced snow load with a load coefficient of
0.2.
17.6. INTERNAL FORCES BASED ON THE DESIGN
17.6.1 – The design of the vertical reinforcement at the end and body areas of the curtains shall be made
for the joint effect of the sum of the axial force generated by vertical loads in the curtain due to vertical
loads and the calculation bending moments generated by the vertical loads and earthquake effects in the
rigid direction of the curtain. In curtains with Hw/ w ≤ 2.0, bending caused by earthquake effects
moments will be magnified by multiplying them by the coefficient ⎡⎣3/ (1+ H w/ w )⎤⎦. But this
coefficient is less than 2
will not be taken large.
17.6.2 – The design of the longitudinal reinforcement in the columns shall be made for the joint effect of
the sum of the axial force generated by vertical loads in the column and the bending moments formed by
vertical loads and earthquake effects.
17.6.3 – The design of the bending reinforcement in the beams shall be made for the sum of the vertical
loads on the beam and the bending moments generated due to the effects of earthquakes.
17.6.4 – The cutting force for the design of the horizontal body reinforcement in the curtains, equivalent(
17.40).
V = 2V (17.40)
e per,i
17.6.5 – The shear force for the design of the transverse reinforcement in the middle region of the columns
is Ve,
Equivalent. (17.41) will be calculated by the capacity design approach given in (Figure 17.7). M pa and
Mpü values at the lower and upper ends of the column free height , bearing power of the column section
will be taken as 1.4 times the moment (M = 1.4M). However earthquake in the column for V
It is not necessary to take a value greater than 2 times

(2V arm, i
) of the calculation cutting force due to the effects of pr e.
(17.41)
Ve =(M pa + M

n
Fig. 17.7
17.6.6 – The shear force for the design of the transverse reinforcement in the central region of the beams is
V, Equivalent.( 17.42) and the capacity design approach shown in Figure 7.9
will be calculated. The values of M pi and M pj on the column or curtain face at the left and right ends of the
beam will be taken as 1.4 times the bearing power moment of the beam section (M p = 1.4M).
r
Ve = Vdy ±(M pi + Mpj
(17.42)
w
V=
n
) n
Dy
2
17.6.7 – The design of the foundation and the internal forces generated at the lower ends of the vertical
bearing elements connected to the foundation shall be taken into account in the ground investigations, the
bending moment at the lower ends of the curtain
values (Mper, giant), 2 in buildings without a basement, 1.5 in buildings where the basement is surrounded
by curtains on four sides, and 1.5 in buildings where the basement is surrounded by curtains on two or three
sides
It will be increased by 1.75 times.
17.7. SIMPLIFIED CROSS-SECTION CARRYING POWER RULES
17.7.1 – The bearing power moment of the beam sections is equivalent if there is no pressure reinforcement
in the cross-section . 17.43), if there is pressure reinforcement in the cross-section, Equivalent.( 17.44).
M = Amnesty (0.85d ) (17.43)
r syd
M = Amnesty (d − d′) (17.44)

r syd
17.7.2 – Axial compressive force under vertical loads (g+q) in column sections
N d ,max = 0.35 f ck bh and the axial pressure force under vertical loads in curtain sections shall not be
greater than N d ,max = 0.30 fck bh.
17.7.3 – Axial compressive and tensile strengths of column and curtain sections, Equivalent.( 17.45) and
Equivalent.( 17.46).
N = 0.85 f ( A − A )+ Amnesty (17.45)
0r cd g st styd
N = Amnesty (17.46)
en st yd
17.7.4 – Values of the pressure force and bending moment corresponding to the balanced state in the column
and curtain sections, Equivalent.( 17.47) and Equivalent.( 17.48). Equivalent. (17.48) The water value A in is
the sum of the areas of the outermost row longitudinal reinforcements in the direction considered in the
column section, or the sum of the longitudinal reinforcement areas in the end areas in the curtain section, the
A value
sg
is the sum of the areas of the inner row longitudinal reinforcements in the direction considered in the column
section or the sum of the areas of the longitudinal reinforcements in the curtain body in the curtain section
(Figure 17.8). The sum of the water A and A values is the sum of the total longitudinal reinforcement area in
sg
the column or curtain section

equals.
Nbr = 0.42fcd bh (17.47)
M = ⎡ ⎤−′ (17.48)
br
Nbr 0.32h +⎣0.6 A water + 0.15 Asg ⎦ fyd [0.5hd ]
Fig. 17.8
0r br
17.7.5 – The design bending moment value (Md) obtained from the analysis in
the column and curtain sections is less than the balanced compressive force value of the axial pressure
force value based on the design
in the case where it is greater ( N d ≥ Nbr ) Equivalent.( 17.49), if it is a minor (N ≤ N) Equivalent.(
17.50) (Figure 17.9).
d br
br
(17.49)
M≤M
Dr
br
(17.50)
M≤M
Dr
17.7.6 – Equivalence in corner columns ( 17.51).

M
(M )d
( d )y
x
+≤1.0 (17.51) (M r )x (Mr )y
br en
fig. 17.9
17.7.7 – Column sections,

except the section
above the foundation
(or ground floor slab) and
the inner column section
under the top floor beam,
in all other column-
beam joints (Figure
17.10),
Equivalent.( 17.52)
shall provide that the
columns described
in shall be stronger
than the beams.
( M+M)
(
≥1.2 M +
M ) (17.52)
raru rirj
Fig. 17.10
17.8. RECTANGULAR CURTAINS
17.8.1 – The specific rules defined for structural analysis and curtain design in buildings containing l, t, u,
and C cross section curtains are given in this section.
17.8.2 – The arms of the curtains with cross sections U and C held at only one end in the lateral direction
shall be of the same length.
17.8.3 – In the analysis of the carrier system, these curtains shall be regarded as bar elements located in
the geometric centers of the cross section and having horizontal rigidity in both directions. In the
calculation of curtain horizontal rigidity, floor rigidity center , floor torsional moment, floor torsional
rigidity and curtain cutting forces, the inertia moment values calculated in both directions according to the
cross-sectional geometric center of such curtains shall be used.
17.8.4 – In calculating the strength of the cutting force of such curtains, only the curtain arms which are in
line with the curtain cutting force under consideration shall be taken into account.
17.8.5 – In the calculation of the bearing power moment of such curtains, in the case where the curtain head
is under pull due to the bending effect (Figure 17. 11), the bearing power moment of the curtain shall be
calculated by the method given in 17.7.4 and 17.7.5 for rectangular curtain sections. In this calculation, b is
the total width of the curtain body, and A is the waterin the header.
will be taken as the total longitudinal reinforcement area found. The curtain head is under pressure due to
the bending effect (Figure 17. 11) or where one of the curtain heads is under pulling and the other is under
pressure, the bearing power moment of the curtain shall be calculated by the method given in 17.7.1 for the
beam sections, not taking into account the effect of the axial load on the boring power moment.
Curtain head under pressure Curtain head under pull
Fig. 17.11
17.9.
TRANSFER OF
EARTHQUAKE LOAD FROM FLOORS TO CURTAINS
17.9.1 – The equivalent earthquake loads acting on the floors of the building shall be transferred from the
floors to the curtains (or curtain arms) by beams stuck in the strong direction of the curtain.
17.9.2 – The axial tensile strength in the section of the curtain face of the beam strongly attached to any
curtain on the jth floor shall not be less than the horizontal earthquake force (F per, j) transmitted to
the curtain on the jth floor . This force, as defined in 17.5.1.7, is the upper and upper and
It is calculated as the difference of the cutting force values formed in the curtain sections below.
17.9.3 – Fper,j force in the case of two beams at both ends in a strong direction to the pitch,
the two beams stuck in the curtain are divided in proportion to the length of the beams in the floor plan.
17.9.4 – For this purpose, the longitudinal reinforcements (transfer reinforcements) to be placed on the beams
shall be sustained along the length of the curtain or an overlay addition shall be made to these reinforcements
within the length of the curtain.
17.9.5 – The amount of transfer reinforcement calculated on the curtain face can be reduced linearly to zero
until the beam ends in the floor plan (Figure
17.12).
17.9.6 – Reinforcements that meet the conditions for clamping in any section of the beam and that are left
over from the requirements
for the flexural strength of
the beam may be considered as
transfer
reinforcement in the
calculations.
Fig. 17.12
吀愀戀氀漀. ...................

TBDY 2018 English

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TBDY 2018 English

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SUPPLEMENT

PRINCIPLES FOR THE DESIGN OF BUILDINGS UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF EARTHQUAKES

16C.6.1. Definition.... 371

1.3. DESIGN SUPERVISION AND CONTROL IN SPECIAL MATTERS

1.5. REFERENCED STANDARDS, REGULATIONS AND/OR DOCUMENTS

EN, ISO, TS, etc. No Name & T Cited Section

Table 1.1 – Cited Standards, Regulations and/or Documents

ST = Vertical elastic design spectral acceleration [g]

ST = Horizontal elastic design spectral displacement [m] S DS = Short-period design spectral

2.1. EARTHQUAKE HAZARD MAPS

LT Horizontal elastic Spectrum cons to the displacement zone tran

2.2. EARTHQUAKE GROUND MOTION LEVELS

2.2.1. Earthquake Ground Motion Level-1 (DD-1)

2.2.2. Earthquake Ground Motion Level-2 (DD-2)

2.2.3. Earthquake Ground Motion Level-3 (DD-3)

2.2.4. Earthquake Ground Motion Level-4 (DD-4)

2.3. STANDARD EARTHQUAKE GROUND MOTION SPECTRA

(a) Short-period map spectral acceleration coefficient S S

2.3.3. Local Ground Impact Coefficients

2.3.4. Horizontal Elastic Design Spectrum

The transition period to the fixed displacement zone will be taken T L = 6 s.

2.3.5. Vertical Elastic Design Spectrum

TAD = ; TBD = ; TLD= 2 (2.6)

2.4. SITE-SPECIFIC EARTHQUAKE

2.4.1. Site-Specific Elastic

2.4.2. Site-Specific Ground Behavior Analyses

2.5. DESCRIPTION OF EARTHQUAKE GROUND MOVEMENTS IN THE TIME DEFINITION FIELD

2.5.1. Selection of Earthquake Records

2.5.2. Scaling of Earthquake Records by Simple Scaling Method

2.5.3. Conversion of Earthquake Records to Achieve Spectral Concordance

Irregularity Coefficient defined on the first floor

3.1. BUILDING USAGE CLASSES AND BUILDING IMPORTANCE COEFFICIENTS

3.1.1. Building Use Classes

3.1.2. Building Importance Coefficients

Building Building Building

DS< 0.33 s DTS = 4A DTS = 4

3.3.1. Building Base and Building Height

3.3.2. Building Height Classes

BYS 2= N 56 70< H ≤ N70 91< H ≤ N91< 105H ≤

BYS 3= N 42 56< H ≤ N56 70< H ≤ N56 91< H ≤

BYS 4= N42< 28 H ≤ N42 56< H ≤

BYS 5= N17.5 < 28≤ H N 42< 28 H ≤

BYS 7= N7 10.5< H ≤ N10.5 to 17.5< H ≤

BUILDING PERFORMANCE LEVELS

3.4.1. Uninterrupted Use (QC) Performance Level

3.4.2. Limited Damage (SH) Performance Level

3.4.3. Controlled Damage (KH) Performance Level

3.4.4. Migration Prevention (IO) Performance Level

Earthq (1) DTS = 1.1a , 2 2a , 3, 3a, 4, 4a (2) (2) DTS = 1a , 2a )

Earthq DTS = 1, 2, 3, 3a, 4, 4a DTS = 1a, 2A

Earthq DTS = 1, 2, 3, 3a, 4, 4a DTS = 1a, 2A

It will be applied in buildings with > 3.

(5) See 3.5.2.2.

Earthq DTS = 1, 2, 3, 3a, 4, 4a DTS = 1a, 2A

Earthq DTS = 1, 2, 3, 3a, 4, 4a DTS = 1a, 2A

Earthq DTS = 1, 2, 3, 3a, 4, 4a DTS = 1a, 2A

(1) Shall be applied to the insulation system.

3.6. IRREGULAR BUILDINGS UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF EARTHQUAKES

3.6.1. Definition of Irregular Buildings

A – IRREGULARITIES IN THE PLAN Related

The calculation of relative floor offsets will be made according to 4.7,

irregularity state – I A b/ A > 1/3 Ab: Sum of space fields

3.6.2. Conditions Relating

3.6.2.1 – A1 and B2 type